CF-Justice Center-MN 951103 PROJECT &L
..IJ$11
3,1
~~o~.~o
Phillips Swaser A~tes
124~ P~k Cen~ D~ve, S~ 2~
Dallas, Texas 75251-1819
214/239-8827
PHILLIPS SWAGER ASSOCIATES COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER
12404 Park Central Drive, Suite 240 PSA Project No: 4087.20
Dallas, Texas 75251
November 3, 1995
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division 0 - Biddin~,/Contract Reauirementa
Document 00020 Advertisement for Bids 00020-1 - 00020-1
Document 00100 Instructions to Bidders 00100-1 - 00100-4
Prevailing Wage Rates WR-1 - WR-1
Document 00220 Subsurface Exploration 00220-1 - 00220-1
Geotechnical Study 39 pages
Document 00300 Proposal Forms 00300-1 - 00300-3
Bid Affidavit 1 page
Insurance Requirement Affidavit 1 page
Document 00500 Agreement Forms 00500-1 - 00500-1
Document 00600 Bonds and Certificates 00600-1 - 00600-1
Document 00700 General Conditions 00700-1 - 00700-1
Document 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-1 - 00800-18
Insurance Coverage Limits 2 pages
Workers Compensation Insurance 4 pages
Document 00850 Drawings Index 00850-1 - 00850-1
Document 00861 Design Selections Summary 00861-1 - 00861-4
Division 1 - General Reauirement~
Section 01010 Summary of Work 01010-1 - 01010-2
Section 01026 Unit Prices 01026-1 - 01026-3
Section 01027 Applications for Payment 01027-1 - 01027-4
Section 01030 Alternates 01030-1 - 01030-1
Section 01035 Modification Procedures 01035-1 - 01035-2
Section 01040 Coordination 01040-1 - 01040-3
Section 01045 Cutting and Patching 01045-1 - 010454
Section 01050 Field Engineering 01050-1 - 01050-3
Section 01095 Reference Standards & Definitions 01095-1 - 01095-3
Section 01200 Project Meetings 01200-1 - 01200-3
Section 01300 Submittals 01300-1 - 01300-7
Section 01400 Quality Control 01400-1 - 01400-3
Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01500-1 - 01500-8
Section 01600 Materials and Equipment 01600-1 - 01600-4
Section 01631 Substitutions 01631-1 - 01631-3
Substitution Request Form SRF1 - SRF2
Section 01700 Contract Closeout 01700-1 - 01700-4
Section 01740 Warranties 01740-1 - 01740-2
Division 2 - Site Work
Section 02110 Site Clearing 02110-1 - 02110-3
Section 02200 Earthwork 02200-1 - 02200-10
Section 02240 Soil Stabilization: Lime 02240-1 - 02240-2
Section 02282 Termite Control 02282-1 - 02282-3
Section 02380 Caissons 02380-1 - 02380-7
Section 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 02520-1 - 02520-10
Section 02665 Water Systems 02665-1 - 02665-6
Section 02685 Gas Distribution Systems 02685-1 - 02685-11
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1
I
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER PSA Project No. 4087.20
Section 02700 Sewerage 02700-1 - 02700-5
Section 02811 Underground Sprinkler Irrigation System 02811-1 - 02811-20
Section 02831 Chain Link Fences and Gates 02831-1 - 02831-5
Section 02910 General Planting 02910-1 - 02910-5
Section 02911 Plant List 02911-1 - 02911-2
Section 02921 Tree Planting 02921-1 - 02921-2
Section 02923 Small Shrub and Groundcover Planting 02923-1 - 02923-1
Section 02932 Seeded Lawns 02932-1 - 02932-2
Divisioll ~ - Concrete
Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300-1 - 03300-13
Section 03345 Special Concrete Finishes 03345-1 - 03345-2
Division 4 - Masonry
Section 04200 Unit Masonry 04200-1 - 04200-19
Section 04270 Glass Unit Masonry 04270-1 - 04270-5
Section 04720 Cast Stone 04720-1 - 04720-3
Division 5 - Metals
Section 05120 Structural Steel 05120-1 - 05120-6
Section 05210 Steel Joists [O. ~, .O~_~ 05210-1 - 052104
Section 05310 Steel Deck 05310-1 - 05310-4
Section 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05400-1 - 05400-7
Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 05500-1 - 05500-7
])i¥ision 6 - Wood and Plastics
Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 06100-1 - 06100-7
Section 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 06402-1 - 06402-9
Division 7 - Moisture Protection
Section 07160 Bituminous Damproofing 07160-1 - 07160-2
Section 07180 Water Repellents 07180-1 - 07180-3
Section 07210 Building Insulation 07210-1 - 07210-3
Section 07270 Firestopping 07270-1 - 07270-9
Section 07410 Manufactured Roof and Wall Panels 07410-1 - 07410-6
Section 07527 SBS-Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing 07527-1 - 07527-8
Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-1 - 07620-6
Section 07901 Joint Sealants 07901-1 - 07901-10
Division 8 - Doors and Windows
Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08110-1 - 08110-5
Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors 08211-1 - 08211-4
Section 08305 Access Doors 08305-1 - 08305-2
Section 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors 08331-1 - 08331-5
Section 08360 Sectional Overhead Doors 08360-1 - 08360-3
Section 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08410-1 - 08410-8
Section 08710 Door Hardware 08710-1 - 08710-22
Section 08800 Glazing 08800-1 - 08800-10
Section 08830 Mirrors 08830-1 - 08830-2
Division 9 - Finishes
Section 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09255-1 - 09255-12
Section 09262 Gypsum Sheathing 09262-1 - 09262-3
Section 09300 Tile 09300-1 - 09300-8
Section 09385 Dimension Stone Tile 09385-1 - 09385-6
Section 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09511-1 - 09511-6
Section 09521 Acoustical Wall Panels 09521-1 -09521-4
Section 09660 Resilient Tile Flooring 09660-1 - 09660-4
Section 09678 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09678-1 - 09678-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER
PSA Project No. 4087.20
Section 09680 Carpet 09680-1 - 09680-4
Section 09800 Special Coatings 09800-1 - 09800-7
Section 09900 Painting 09900-1 - 09900-13
Section 09921 Multicolored Interior Coatings 09921-1 - 09921-5
Section 09950 Wall Coverings 09950-1 - 09950-3
Division 10 - S_uecialties
Section 10001 Specialties 10001-1 - I0001-2
Section 10100 Visual Display Boards I0100-1 - 10100-4
Section 10155 Toilet Compartments 10155-1 - 10155-4
Section 10200 Louvers and Vents 10200-1 - 10200-5
Section 10270 Access Flooring 10270-1 - 10270-8
Section 10350 Flagpoles 10350-1 - 10350-3
Section 10425 Signs 10425-1 - 10425-7
Section 10436 Exterior Post and PanelSigns 10436-1 - 10436-5
Section 10505 Metal Lockers 10505-1 - 10505-5
Section 10522 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories 10522-1 - 10522-3
Section 10655 Accordion Folding Partitions 10655-1 - 10655-3
Section 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10800-1 - 10800-4
Division 11 - Eouizml~nt
Section 11132 - - Projection Screens 11132-1 11132-3
Section 11190 Security/Detention Equipment 11190-1 - 11190-6
Section 11191 Custom/Security Hollow Metal Work 11191-1 - 11191-7
Section 11195 Security Glass and Glazing 11195-1 - 11195-7
Section 11196 Security Hardware 11196-1 - 11196-8
Section 11198 Security Control Systems 11198-1 - 11198-15
Section 11452 Residential Appliances 11452-1 - 11452-4
Division 12 - Furnishings
Section 12511 Horizontal Louver Blinds 12511-1 - 12511-4
Section 12512 Vertical Louver Blinds 12512-1 - 12512-4
Mechanical/Electrical Index 1 page
Division 15 - Mechanical
Section 15010 General Provisions - Mechanical 15010-1 - 15010-17
Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 15050-1 - 15050-12
Section 15090 Pipe Hangers and Supports 15090-1 - 15090-7
Section 15180 Insulation 15180-1 - 15180-7
Section 15300 Utility Services 15300-1 - 15300-2
Section 15401 Domestic Water Supply System 15401-1 - 15401-3
Section 15403 Natural Gas Distribution System 15403-1 - 15403-2
Section 15405 Drainage Systems 15405-1 - 15405-3
Section 15450 Plumbing Fixtures 15450-1 - 15450-7
Section 15500 Fire Protection Systems 15500-1 - 15500-6
Section 15665 Single Zone Packaged Rooftop Units 15665-1 - 15665-5
Section 15800 Air Treating and Handling Equipment 15800-1 - 15800-3
Section 15840 Ductwork and Accessories 15840-1 - 15840-8
Section 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-1 - 159904
Division 16 - Electrical
Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 16010-1 - 16010-15
Section 16050 Site Electrical 16050-1 - 16050-3
Section 16110 Systems of Raceways 16110-1 - 16110-8
Section 16120 Systems of Conductors 16120-1 - 16120-5
Section 16140 Wiring Devices 16140-1 - 161404
Section 16160 Cabinets and Enclosures 16160-1 - 16160-2
Section 16190 Supporting Devices 16190-1 - 16190-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER
PSA Project No. 4087.20
Section 16195 Electrical Identification 16195-1 - 16195-3
Section 16440 Disconnect Switches 16440-1 - 16440-3
Section 16450 Grounding 16450-1 - 16450-3
Section 16470 Panelboards 16470-1 - 16470-9
Section 16475 Overcurrent Protective Devices 16475-1 - 16475-2
Section 16500 Lighting Fixtures 16500-1 - 16500-3
Section 16620 Emergency/Standby Power System 16620-1 - 16620-8
Section 16670 Lightning Protection System 16670-1 - 16670-3
Section 16720 Fire Alarm System 16720-1 - 16720-6
Section 16741 Telephone and Data Communications 16741-1 - 16741-2 -.-
Section 16900 Equipment Connections and Control Wiring 16900-1 - 16900-2
Section 16950 Testing 16950-1 - 16950-5
END TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
DOCUMENT 00020 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
Sealed bids addressed to the Purchasing Agent will be received at the office of the Purchasing Agent until 2:00 p.m.
on December 7, 1995, and then publicly opened and read at that time for furnishing all labor, material and equipment,
and performing all work required for the construction of:
Coppell Criminal Justice Center
Coppell, Texas 75019
Proposals shall be accompanied by a bid bond from a reliable surety or a Certified Cashier's Check in an amount not
less than five percent (5%) of the total maximum bid price, payable without recourse to the City of Coppell, as a
guarantee that the bidder will enter into a contract, within ten (10) days after notice of award of contract to him. The
notice of award of contract will be given by the Owner within ninety (90) days following the opening of bids.
LOW BIDDER MUST QUALIFY WITHIN TWO WORKING DAYS AFTER BID OPENING BY SUBMITTING
SUCH ADDITIONAL EVIDENCE AS THE CITY MAY REQUIRE INCLUDING A STANDARD AIA
QUALIFICATION STATEMENT. SHOULD THE BIDDER FAIL TO PRODUCE EVIDENCE SATISFACTORY
TO THE CITY, THE BIDDER MAY BE DISQUALIFIED AND THE WORK AWARDED TO THE NEXT
BIDDER SO QUALIFYING.
A Certificate of Insurance for the coverages and amounts required for light construction by the City shall be submitted
with the signed contracts.
The right is reserved, as the interest of the City of Coppell may require, to reject any and all bids, and to waive any
informality in bids received.
Drawings, Specifications, and Bidding Documents may be examined without charge at the office of Phillips Swager
Associates, 12404 Park Central Drive, Suite 240, Dallas, TX 75251-1819, Tel. 214/239-8827.
Bidders may obtain up to three (3) sets of Drawings and Specifications at the office of Phillips Swager Associates
starting October November 3, 1995, upon deposit of $150.00 per set. Checks to be made payable to the City
of Coppell.
The full deposit will be refunded upon return of the Documents to Phillips Swager Associates in usable condition
with no permanent markings within fifteen (15) days following bid opening. Documents sent C.O.D. or by bus
service will not be accepted.
Bidders and sub-bidders may purchase additional copies by paying the cost of reproduction. Additional copies shall
be returned to the Architect with no refund made. Contract Documents may also be examined at the following plan
rooms: AGC/Dodge and Texas Contractor.
The original copy of the Bid Proposal must be submitted with the City of Coppell Bid No. Q-1095-01 designated
clearly on the exterior of the Bid Package.
END OF DOCUMENT 00020
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID 00020 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
DOCUMENT 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS: The Instructions to Bidders for this Project are the American Institute of
-- Architects, Document A-701, Instructions to Bidders, 1987 Edition.
2. Supplementary Instructions to Bidders are as follows:
3. GENERAL DESCRIPTION: This Project consists of the construction of a new Criminal Justice Center for
the City of Coppell, Texas. The Project consists of a single story building containing a courtroom, court
offices, police offices, jail and public lobby· Site work consists of utilities, concrete paving, hard and soft
.~ landscape and chain link fencing.
4. A general description of this project, by "Prime" trades, is as follows (not to be taken as a complete
description or extent of the work):
a. General Construction Work: The construction of the new facility, in general, consists of earthwork,
grading and paving, utilities, fencing, concrete piers, grade beams, and concrete slab; concrete
~ masonry units, brick masonry veneer, structural steel framing, metal stud framing, millwork,
' asphalt shingle roofmg system, aluminum storefronts, overhead sectional doors, interior finishes,
and building specialties.
~ b. Plumbing Work: Provide a complete system of supply and waste water piping; plumbing fixtures,
floor drains, and all other materials, specialty items and labor specified, shown, or required by the
Construction Documents.
· ,~ c. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Work: Provide a complete system of heating, ventilating
and air conditioning, and miscellaneous specialty equipment and systems, as shown, specified, or
required by the Construction Documents.
~ d. Electrical Work: Provide a complete system of electrical distribution, conduit, panels, switches,
wiring, fixtures, etc., including all special equipment and systems as shown, specified, or required
by the Construction Documents.
e. Codes and Permits:
(1) Construction work shall be performed in compliance with the requirements of all
~ applicable, local, state, and federal laws, regulations, and rules, and the requirements of
the Construction Documents.
f. Protection:
(1) Existing surrounding area and property shall be properly protected from damage and left
undamaged from all operations of the Contractor.
g. All work shall be completed in compliance with incorporation of terms, provisions, conditions, and
requirements of "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", North Central Texas
Council of Governments with 1986 Amendments.
5. METHOD OF BIDDING: The Method of Bidding for this Project shall be as indicated in the Proposal
Forms.
~ 6. DATE. TIME AND PLACE OF RECEIVING BIDS; Bids for "ALL WORK" will be recei~,ed by the
Owner in the Purchasing Agent's office, City of Coppell, 255 Parkway Blvd., Coppell, Texas at or before
2:00 p.m. on December 7, 1995, at which time bids will be publicly opened in the Council Chambers. Bids
will be held good and may not be withdrawn for a period of 90 calendar days from the date of receipt.
7. COMPLETION SCHEDULE: Under the Base Bids, the work is to be commenced upon written notification
to proceed after award of contract, and shall be completed (Certificate of Substantial Completion) suitable
for occupancy and use for purpose intended within 300 calendar days following the issuance of written Notice
-~ of Award.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
8. INTERPRETATIONS OR ADDENDA:
a. No oral interpretation will be made to any Bidder as to the meaning of the Contract Documents or
any pan thereof.
b. Requests for interpretations shall be made in writing to the Architect.
c. Inquiries received ten or more days prior to the date fixed for opening of bids will be given
consideration.
d. Interpretations made to a bidder will be in the form of an Addendum to the Contract Documents,
and when issued, will be on file in the office of the Architect at least seven days before Bids are
opened.
e. Addenda will be mailed to each bonafide bidding Contractor holding Contract Documents, but it
shall be the Bidders' responsibility to make inquiry as to the Addenda issued, and provide
distribution of Addenda to all subcontractors and suppliers.
f. Addenda shall become part of the contract and all Bidders shall be bound by such Addenda, whether
or not received by the Bidders.
9. INSPECTION OF SITE:
a. Bidder shall visit the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint himself with the existing
conditions there relating to construction and labor, and should fully inform himself as to the
facilities involved, the difficulties and restrictions attending the performance of the Contract.
b. The Bidder should thoroughly examine and familiarize himself with the Drawings, Technical
Specifications and all other Contract Documents.
c. The Contractor, by the execution of the contract, shall in no way be relieved of any obligation under
it due to his failure to receive or examine any form or legal instrument or to visit the site and
acquaint himself with the conditions there existing, and the Owner will be justified in rejecting any
claim based on facts regarding that which the contractor should have been on notice as a result
thereof.
10. BIDS:
a. Bids must be submitted on forms supplied by the Architect, and shall be subject to all requirements
of the Contract Documents, including the Drawings, and these Instructions to Bidders. Bids must
be regular in every respect and no interlineation, excisions or special conditions shall be made or
included in the Proposal Form by the Bidder. Three copies of the Proposal Form are included with
the bid Documents when issued to the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit two copies of the
Proposal and retain one copy for his record.
b. Bid Documents including the Proposal Form, shall be enclosed in envelopes (outer and inner), both
of which shall be sealed and clearly labeled with words "Proposal - Phase of Work; name of
project, name of bidder, date and time of bid opening and City of Coppell bid number", in order
to guard against premature opening of the bid. No Facsimile Proposal Forms will be accepted.
c. The Owner may consider as irregular any Bid on which there is an alternation of or departure from
the Proposal Form hereto attached, and at his option may reject same.
d. Corrections, erasures or other changes in the Proposal must be explained or noted over the signature
of the Bidder.
11. SUBSTITUTIONS:
a. Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the materials and equipment described in the
bidding documents.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
~ b. No substitution will be considered unless request has been submitted to the Architect for approval
at least ten (10) days prior to the date of receipt of bids. Substitution requests shall be written and
accompanied by adequate technical and cost data. Requests shall include a complete description of
the proposed substitution, name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted,
~ drawings, cuts, performance and test data, and any other data or information necessary for a
complete evaluation by the Architect.
_ c. If the Architect approves any proposed substitution, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum
not less than seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids.
12. BID GUARANTY:
a. The bid must be accompanied by a Bid Guaranty which shall not be less than 5 % of the amount of
the Base Bid.
.... b. At the option of the Bidder, the Guaranty may be a Certified Check, Bank Draft, or a Bid Bond.
c. The Bid Bond shall be secured by a Guaranty of a Surety Company acceptable to the Owner.
d. No bid will be considered unless it is accompanied by the required Guaranty.
e. Certified Check or Bank Draft must be made payable to the order of the Owner.
f. Cash deposits will not be accepted.
g. The Bid Guaranty shall insure the execution of the Agreement and the furnishing of the Surety Bond
~- or Bonds by the successful Bidder, all as required by the Contract Documents.
13. AWARD OF CONTRACT: REJECTIQN QF BIDS:
~' a. The Contract, if awarded, will be awarded to the responsible bidder submitting the lower "Base
Bids" for All Work; including Plumbing Work, Heating and Air Conditioning and Ventilation
Work; and Electrical Work; plus any acceptable alternates, complying with the Conditions of the
Contract Documents, within the Owner's Budget.
b. The Bidder to whom the awards are made will be notified at the earliest possible date.
~ c. The Owner, however, reserves the right to reject any and all Bids and to waive any informality in
Bids received whenever such rejection or waiver is in his interest.
14. Bids for each Base Bid and alternates will be held good for a period of ninety (90) days for "ALL WORK'.
15. EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT AND PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS:
a. Subsequent to the award and within ten days after the prescribed forms are prepared and presented
.... for signature by the Architect, the successful General Contractor shall execute and return to the
Architect an Agreement in the form included in the contract Documents in such number of copies
as the Owner may require. The submittal shall include the Performance Bond, Labor and Material
~ Payment Bond and insurance forms.
b. The General contractor's Base Bid shall include all costs for providing a single Performance Bond
and Labor Material Payment Bond in favor of the Owner, covering work of all trades and assigned
,' Contractors.
c. Having satisfied all conditions of award as set forth elsewhere in these Documents, the successful
General Contractor shall within the period specified above, furnish Surety Bonds in penal sums,
-~ each not less than the amount of the contract as awarded, as surety for the faithful performance of
the Contract, and for the payment of all persons, fumas or corporation to whom the Contractor may
become legally indebted for labor, materials, tools, equipment or services of any nature including
utility and transportation services, employed or used by him in performing the work. Such Bonds
~-' shall be in the same form as those included in the Contract Documents and shall bear the same date
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
as, or a date subsequent to that of the Agreement. The current Power of Attorney for the person
who signs for any Surety Company shall be attached to such Bonds. Bonds shall be signed by a
Guaranty or Surety Company acceptable to the Owner.
d. The failure of the successful Bidders to execute such Agreement and to supply the required Bonds
within ten days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, or within such extended
period as the Owner may grant, based upon reasons determined sufficient by the Owner, may
constitute a default.
e. Bidders should note that this Project Manual consists of all pages listed in the Table of Contents.
Upon notification, the Architect will furnish any pages missing from the Project Manual, or from
the Drawings as printed.
16. PRE-BID CONFERENCE: A "Pre-Bid Conference will be held on November 17, 1995, at 2:00 p.m. at
Council Chambers, City of Coppell, 255 Parkway Blvd., Coppell, Texas. Representatives of all bidding
f'n-ms: General, Mechanical and Electrical Work are requested to attend, to present any questions they may
have.
17. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE:
A "Pre-Construction" Conference will be scheduled shortly after the issuance of the "Notice to Proceed",
to establish lines of communication, review schedules, and establish guidelines for execution of the work.
This meeting is to be attended by the General Contractor; Plumbing Contractor; Heating and Air
Conditioning Contractor; Ventilating Contractor and Electrical Contractor; other Primary subcontractors,
the Owner, and the Architect.
18. WAGE RATES:
The following page, WR-1, PREVAILING WAGES FOR DALLAS COUNTY, will apply for this Project.
END OF DOCUMENT 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 4
, - TO ._~931~9'>4~, PAGE.883 88
P~H~G WA~ FOR Dg[I_~ CQ~
~~ ~ . $ 8.z~
C~e ~_~ {- ~.~
-- ~,~ { ii.i{
....... =~ .... $ 10.0~
{ 1~.i~ '
.~= ~.~ {[~= ............ ...
" '" ~" S 7~
~~ , ..,
s~.~
~_~ ~ ..,..,. .....
- ~~__~ ...... . ......... ~ ~ , ___
~.~W~r~,., . ..... = ...... S 7.35 ,,.
14~4
~=~ C-;X2- ~ ,, ~.._ Lc ....... : - ....
,~~ ~-~'"'.,.' . ' '..~ ........... .. , moz_
.. w~~ , ' ........ ,,., s 0.s9
i
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
DOCUMENT 00220 - SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
PART ! - GENERAL
1.1 SOIL BORING
A. Subsurface Exploration prepared by:
1. ATEC Associates
11356 Mathis Ave.
Dallas, Texas 75229-3157
.~- 214/556-2204
2. Report No: 25-02-95-00092
~ 3. Date: May 15, 1995
B. The logs of the borings indicate material penetrated at the specific locations of each boring.
-- C. The Soil & Foundation Investigation Report is bound herein for convenience of reference only and
is not a part of the Contract Documents.
~, D. Neither the Owner nor the Architect makes any promise, representation, guarantee or warranty,
expressed or implied, with respect to anything expressed or implied in the Soil Borings.
END OF SECTION 00220
_. SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION 00220 - 1
ATEC Associates, Inc.
' ~~ ~356 Malh~s Avenue
Dallas, Texas 75229-3157
~214) 556-2204. FAX (214) 556-1753
May 15, 1995
City of Coppell
500 Southwestern Boulevard
Coppell, Texas 75019
Attention: Mr. Clay Phillips
Subject: Geotechnical Exploration
PROPOSED POLICE STATION
Parkway Boulevard
Coppell, Texas
ATEC Report No. 25-02-95-00092
Dear Mr. Phillips:
ATEC Associates, Inc. (ATEC) has completed the geotechnical exploration at the above
referenced project site. This study was completed in accordance with ATEC Proposal No. 25-
02-95-00218 dated February 27, 1995 and authorized by your Purchase Order Number 01.2378
dated March 9, 1995.
This report contains the results of our findings, an engineering interpretation of these with
respect to the available project characteristics and recommendations to aid design and
construction of foundations and other earth connected phases of this project. We wish to remind
you that all soil and rock samples obtained during the field investigation will be retained for a
period of 30 days and then discarded unless you request otherwise.
We appreciate the opportunity to be of service on this project. After you have had an
opportunity to review this report, we will contact you to answer any questions you may have.
In the meantime, if we can be of further assistance, please call us at (214) 556-2204.
Sincerely, ,,..,,~. o~- r~-.~_
__~ATEC ASSOC__~,y&TES, INC. ~ t.) .n ,.$~fn/'fJ ~
f.
// / /~ ...... · ......................
tl t / ~,~?. 57574
Project Engineer I Manager, GME Dwis~'~ .... ;-
· %C.4 tO~ t, ,- 'r.-.~ -
cC: (2) Client
(3) Phillips Swager Associates - G. Schon
CRF/DPZ:crf
/~merican Teshncj and Engineerlncj Corporation Consulhng ~ ~,'tr(nr Hel iai Geotechmcat :e,;¢
Offices ~n &fa;or U S Ctties/$ince 1958 Mater at*, E,'~g.~eers
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................ 1
2.0 PROJECT CHARACTERISTICS ............................... 1
-- 3.0 GENERAL SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ......................... 2
3.1 General Area Geology ................................ 3
3.2 Soil Profile ...................................... 3
-- 3.3 Groundwater Conditions .............................. 4
4.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS .............................. 5
-- 4.1 General Considerations ............................... 5
4.2 Drilled Straight Shaft and Grade Beam Foundation System .......... 7
4.2.1 General Design Considerations ...................... 7
4.2.2 Uplift Considerations ............................ 9
4.3 Suspended Floor Slab System ........................... 10
4.4 Floor Slab on Improved Subgrade ......................... 10
4.5 Pavement Subgrade Preparation and Pavement Design ............ 12
4.6 Drainage ........................................ 15
5.0 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES AND RECOMMENDATIONS . . . 16
5.1 Site Preparation and Grading ............................ 17
_ 5.2 Drilled Shaft Excavations .............................. 17
5.3 Fill Placement and Compaction .......................... 18
5.4 Groundwater ..................................... 19
6.0 QUALIFICATIONS OF RECOMMENDATIONS ..................... 19
12MPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
APPENDIX
Figure 1 - Boring Location Plan
Field Investigation Procedures
Laboratory Investigation Procedures
Table 1 - Free Swell Test Results
Table 2 - Unconfined Compressive Strength Test Results on Gray Shale Specimens
Record of Soil Exploration Sheets (Boring Logs)
Key to Soil Symbols and Classification
Geotechnical Exploration
PROPOSED POLICE STATION
Parkway Boulevard
Coppell, Texas
ATEC Report No. 25-02-95-00092
1.0 INTRODUCTION
ATEC Associates, Inc. (ATEC) was retained by the City of Coppell, Texas to perform a
geotechnical exploration for the proposed police station facility to be constructed south of
Parkway Boulevard, just east of its intersection with Denton Tap Road in Coppell, Texas. The
site and our understanding of the proposed construction are described in more detail in Section
2.0.
The purpose of this geotechnical exploration was to determine the general subsurface conditions
at the proposed construction site by drilling test borings and evaluating these with respect to the
foundation concept and design. The subsurface conditions found in the eight test borings drilled
for this project are summarized in Section 3.0. The design recommendations for the foundation,
floor slab, and pavement systems are presented in Section 4.0.
Also included is an evaluation of the site with respect to potential construction problems and
recommendations dealing with the earthwork quality control testing during construction. The
recommendations pertaining to construction are included in Section 5.0. Qualifications of our
recommendations are discussed in Section 6.0. Text figures, field and laboratory investigation
procedures and test results are included in the Appendix along with the boring logs.
2.0 PROJECT CHARACTERISTICS
The subject site for the proposed police station is located on the south side of Parkway
Boulevard, just east of its intersection with Denton Tap Road in Coppell, Texas. The property
is bound on the south and west by unimproved pasture land. The City of Coppell City Hall is
1
northeast of the subject site. Residential properties are located to the east. The subject site has
frontage and access to Parkway Boulevard on its northern boundary.
The property for the proposed new facility consists of vacant undeveloped pasture land. The
site is covered with various short to medium height grasses and weeds. The southern portion
of the site is enclosed by a barbed-wire fence. The northern edge of this fence line dissects the
proposed building location. Small areas of ponded water were located northeast and north of
the proposed building location. The topography of the site is relatively flat with a slight slope
to the north-northeast. The elevation change across the site is on the order of 2 to 4 feet.
It is our understanding the proposed police station will consist of a single-story structure with
a footprint of approximately 20,000 square feet. The proposed building will be a steel-framed
structure with a concrete slab-on-grade. It is our understanding that the finished floor elevation
will be at or near the existing site grades. The site will have access to Parkway Boulevard by
a service road entrance along the west side and a parking area will be located on the south side
of the proposed structure. The final location of the proposed building and anticipated building
loads were not provided to ATEC prior to the submission of this report.
3.0 GENERAL SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
The subsurface conditions at the site were investigated by reviewing the available published
information for the site geologic characteristics and by drilling eight test borings at the locations
shown on the Boring Location Plan, Figure I in the Appendix. Shelby tube and standard
penetration samples were obtained in the clayey soil strata. The underlying shale bedrock was
cored at two locations using conventional NX sized rock coring equipment and also tested using
Texas Highway Penetration Test methods. Further discussion on the test borings can be found
in Section 3.2 of this report.
2
-- 3.1 General Area Geology
According to regional geologic information, the site for the proposed police station is
situated near the contact between the Cretaceous age Eagle Ford Group and the
Woodbine Formation. The Eagle Ford Group consists primarily of interbedded shales
and limestones and has a thickness of 200 to 300 feet in the site area and serves as a
confining layer over the water-bearing Woodbine Formation. The Woodbine Formation
has a thickness of 175 to 250 feet and is composed of well sorted sands, clays,
sandstones and shale layers. The residual overburden soils typically consist of tan,
brown, and dark gray plastic clays.
3.2 Soil Profile
In general, within the maximum 29-foot depth explored, the subsurface materials were
found to consist primarily of natural clayey soils underlain by gray shale of the Eagle
Ford Shale Formation. The upper natural clay soils are residual materials derived from
prolonged weathering of the gray shale bedrock.
The general stratigraphy and characteristics of the soil and rock materials encountered
within the test borings initiated for this exploration are summarized as follows:
Depth, feet Description
0 to 2.0 Reddish brown, very stiff, SANDY CLAY
Unified Soil Classification: CL
Moisture Content: 12%
.__ Liquid Limit: 36
Plastic Limit: 17
Plasticity Index: 19
0-2.0 to 18.0 Dark brown, brown, gray and tan, medium stiff to very
stiff, SILTY CLAY to CLAY
Unified Soil Classification: CL-CH
Moisture Content: 11 to 30%
Liquid Limit: 40 to 55
Plastic Limit: 19 to 21
Plasticity Index: 21 to 34
Unconfined Compressive Strength: 0.9 to 1.7
tons/ft2
18.0 to 19.0-26.0 Dark gray, hard, SHALY CLAY
Unified Soil Classification: CH
Moisture Content: 22 %
19.0-26.0 to boring Dark gray SHALE
termination depths Moisture Content: 5 to 16%
Texas Highway Department Penetration Tests: 1.5
inches to 2.5 inches penetration per 100 blows
Unconfined Compressive Strength: 10.1 to 24.2
tons/ft2
Based on the test results and our experience in the site area, the upper clay soils at the
site are regarded as moderate to highly plastic and potentially moderately to highly
expansive.
3.3 Groundwater Conditions
Continuous flight augers were used to advance the test borings to the top of the gray
shale formation. During the drilling of the bonngs initiated for this investigation,
groundwater was observed on the drilling tools in the soils above the shale strata at
depths ranging from 13 to 15 feet below the ground surface. NX rock core drilling
techniques were performed to sample the shale in two of the eight test borings. Due to
the use of water in the rock coring applications, an accurate measurement of the
groundwater level could not be completed after the rock coting activities in those
particular borings. Upon completion of test borings and prior to beginning rock coring
4
activities, the groundwater level was measured at depths ranging from 8.5 to 18 feet
below the ground surface. The borings drilled for this study were backfilled with the
drill cuttings immediately upon completion.
Longer term groundwater readings would require a cased observation well. This was not
included within the scope of this study. Generally, groundwater flow usually occurs
through the clay fissures/joints encountered above the gray shale bedrock. The
groundwater level at the site is anticipated to fluctuate seasonally depending on the
amount of rainfall, prevailing weather conditions and subsurface drainage characteristics.
-.' Further details concerning the subsurface materials and groundwater conditions
encountered can be obtained from the laboratory test results and boring logs included in
~'~ the Appendix of this report.
4.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS
The following design recommendations have been developed on the basis of the previously
described project characteristics and subsurface conditions. If there is any change in the project
criteria, a review should be made by this office to determine if modifications in the
recommendations will be required.
4.1 General Considerations
The upper clay soils encountered at the site were found to be moderately to highly plastic
and are considered moderately to highly expansive. Additionally, these soils were found
to have natural moisture contents slightly below to above their respective plastic limits
and a consistency of medium stiff to very stiff. These soils are expected to experience
vertical movements as a result of soil moisture content changes which are anticipated
beneath areas of the site covered by the proposed building floor slab and pavement.
Based on the depths of the clays, the plasticity indices, the moisture contents, and the
5
laboratory free swell results of the soils tested, it is estimated that a total potential
vertical rise (PVR) of up to 2.0 inches or slightly more could occur beneath the proposed
building slab if it is constructed at existing grade.
Based on the soil conditions encountered within the test borings, we feel that a drilled
straight shaft and grade beam foundation system with shafts bearing in the gray shale is
the most suitable foundation system for the proposed police station structure.
Recommendations for a drilled shaft foundation system are given in Section 4..2 of this
report.
Typically, it has been ATEC's experience that the ground supported floor slab for police
station structures are designed to withstand a total vertical movement of 1 inch or less.
Therefore, we feel that the soil related movements as described previously after grading
are excessive for consideration of slab-on-grade construction at this site unless significant
improvement of the underlying soils is performed. The only 100% positive method for
constructing the floor slab and insuring against damage from swelling of the underlying
soils would be to structurally support or suspend the floor slab on the drilled shaft and
grade beam foundation system. A suspended floor slab involves structurally connecting
grade beams directly beneath the floor slab to the drilled shafts. These drilled shafts
would therefore support the weight of the floor slab and the entire building.
Furthermore, the floor slab would not be in contact with the expansive clays, therefore,
eliminating post construction movement due to such soils swelling. Recommendations
for a suspended floor slab are included in Section 4.3 of this report.
As an alternative, a less positive way of constructing the floor slab system for the
proposed building in which the owner accepts the risk of soil movement occurring below
the slab is to construct a floor slab on improved subgrade. As stated previously, we
anticipate potential vertical movements of up to 2.0 inches or more could occur below
the floor slab after grading has occurred.
6
~7 In order to reduce the swell potential and variability of the soil conditions beneath the
proposed police station location, special site improvements must be performed beneath
-- the floor slab to reduce the potential vertical movements to 1 inch or less. The special
site improvements would begin by excavating the existing moderate to highly plastic clay
-- soil beneath the building pad area to a specified depth. The resulting excavation should
then be backfilled with well compacted select fill brought in from off site. Based on our
-- calculations, the depth of select fill beneath the finished subgrade elevation to reduce the
potential vertical rise movement to 1 inch or less is approximately 3 feet in the area of
-- the proposed police station structure. Recommendations for a floor slab on improved
_ subgrade are provided in Section 4.4 of this report.
4.2 Drilled Straight Shaft and Grade Beam Foundation System
Once the site grading operations are complete, our findings indicate that the structural
-- frame and walls for the proposed police station can best be supported by a system of
drilled straight shafts. Following are our recommendations for the design of drilled
straight shaft foundations.
4.2.1 General Design Considerations
In order to develop the full load transfer capacity of the drilled shafts, they should be
brought to bear at least 2 feet into the underlying shale bedrock for bearing capacity
purposes. It is anticipated that the gray shale will be encountered at depths ranging from
approximately 19 to 26 feet below the existing grade. It is also anticipated that the
required design shaft depths will penetrate below the minimum depth of 2 feet into the
gray shale for larger column loads in order to develop the total load transfer using a
combination of end bearing and skin friction. We recommend that the shafts be
dimensioned based on a net allowable end bearing pressure of 20 kips/square foot and
a skin friction value of 2.7 kips/square foot for downward loads. The skin friction
7
component should only be applied to that portion of the shaft bearing in the gray shale
(neglecting the upper 2 feet of penetration).
These design values were determined from the Texas Highway Penetration Test results
obtained and the unconfined compressive strength tests performed on selected samples
of the gray shale bedrock samples obtained during this exploration. The design values
allow for discontinuities and thin clayey seams. The design end bearing pressure
additionally applies to shafts that maintain a minimum total length to diameter ratio of
2.5 times. Additionally, we recommend a minimum center to center shaft spacing of at
least 2.5 times the shah diameter or reductions in the allowable design values will be
required.
During installation of the shafts, the cross section of the shafts should not be allowed to
increase at the ground level. A "mushroom" at the top of the shafts could create uplift
pressures related to soil swelling which could be detrimental to the shafts at some
locations. Any shaft caps over expansive clays, if required, should be constructed over
a void space. Also, all grade beams constructed over clays should be formed with a
nominal 6-inch void with soil retainers using cardboard box forms or other equivalent
materials made for this purpose. The purpose of this void is to minimize uplift pressures
on the grade beams from the underlying expansive soils. On-site soils can be used to
backfill around perimeter grade beams shortly after removing concrete forms. The
backfill should be well compacted to prevent water from entering the void space during
or after construction and inducing swelling of the underlying soils.
The approximate depth to the shale bedrock should only be used to estimate the shaft
bearing depths at the boring locations. The actual bearing depths must be determined
based on the design loads and uplift pressures and be confirmed by inspection during
construction as will be discussed in Section 5.2. Greater penetration into the gray shale
may be required if the upper surface of this stratum is observed to be fractured, broken
or weathered. Additionally, if any gray clay or weathered seams are observed during
8
the drilling operations within the gray shale, the shaft depths should be extended a
minimum 2 feet beyond these weaker zones before beginning the required penetration.
Provided the shafts are designed as outlined above, total settlement beneath properly
constructed foundation elements is estimated to be minor, generally on the order of 0.25
inch or less. Such settlement normally occurs as elastic deformation during construction.
4.:2.2 Uplift Considerations
Based on our understanding of the proposed grading scheme and depending on the soil
and rock conditions below the proposed floor elevation, the drilled shafts will need to be
designed to accommodate uplift pressures due to potentially expansive soil conditions.
Swelling clay soils in contact with the shaft perimeters will cause such uplift pressures
to develop in upward skin friction.
The magnitude of uplift pressure due to soil swell along the shafts is estimated not to
exceed 1.0 kip/square foot. The soil swell pressure should generally act over the portion
of the shaft bearing in the soils located to a depth of 10 feet below the final exterior
grade. If the slab on improved subgrade alternative is chosen, the uplift pressure can be
reduced to 0.75 kip/square toot acting over the same 10 feet below the final exterior
grade. This alternative is discussed in Section 4.4 of this report.
All shafts should be adequately reinforced due to uplift pressures caused by either
potential swelling soils and/or structural loading conditions. Reinforcing steel should
extend the full length of the shaft. The uplift resistance of each straight shaft can be
computed using an allowable skin friction value of 2.0 kips per square foot for upward
loads acting over the portion of the shaft extending below the minimum 2 feet penetration
into the gray shale bedrock.
4.3 Suspended Floor Slab Syste~n
Two methods are available for constructing a suspended floor slab system. These
included using pan and joist type construction and raising the floor slab well above the
underlying expansive soils or using cardboard carton forms to create a void.
The most effective suspended stab system is to use the pan-joist type construction
utilizing either concrete or steel beams. If this system is used, we recommend that the
floor slab be suspended at least 12 inches, and preferably more, above final subgrade --
elevations. If utility lines are suspended beneath the slab, the void space clearance
should be increased to a minimum of 2 feet to provide for access to these lines. Future
movements of soil supported utility lines must be considered when designing connections,
especially where these lines approach or enter the stationary structure. Provisions should -
be made for positive drainage of the under-floor space. Construction with metal beams
and joists must also contain sufficient ventilation to limit corrosion of the metal
components. Precast concrete segments spanning between grade beams may also be
considered.
Cardboard carton forms may also be used to create the void beneath the slab. If these
forms are used, care must be taken to preserve their structural integrity and ability to
create a consistent void. A rigid material layer should be placed directly on the forms
to prevent puncture by personnel during placement of concrete. This rigid layer would
also help reduce the potential for concrete to leak down between the cardboard forms.
A qualified inspector should be present during floor-slab concrete placement to assure
the void is maintained.
4.4 Floor Slab on Improved Subgrade
As stated in Section 4.1, due to the presence of moderate to highly expansive clay soils
present within the proposed construction area, the proposed new police station will be
10
subjected to upwards of 2.0 inches or more of potential vertical movement. To achieve
a total potential vertical movement desirable design level of I inch or less, and to keep
differential movements to 75 percent or less of the total movement, the following
subgrade improvements must be accomplished:
1) Existing vegetation should be stripped and removed from the site.
2) The building area should be excavated as necessary to a minimum depth
of 3 feet below the finished floor slab subgrade elevation. The highly
plastic clay soils excavated should be removed from the site, or stockpiled
on the site for use as grade raise fill outside the building area.
3) Following excavation and prior to placing fill, the entire subgrade should
be inspected by proofrolling. The proofrolling operation should be
performed in accordance with the recommendations provided in Section
5.1.
4) Following proofrolling, the exposed subgrade clay soils should be
scarified to a depth of 6 inches, wetted to within + 3% of optimum
moisture content and compacted to at least 95% of the Standard maximum
dry density for the subgrade materials (ASTM D-698 Method A).
5) Select fill soil should be used as the final 3 feet of fill within the building
area. Select fill should be brought in from off site and placed in 8-inch
thick horizontal lifts within the building areas, moisture conditioned to
within -3 % to + 3 % of optimum moisture content and compacted to 95 %
of the Standard maximum dry density for the select fill materials. Select
fill should be placed in accordance with the recommendations outlined in
Section 5.3.
6) Filling should then proceed up to finished subfloor grade. The exposed
surface of the select fill soils should be kept moist during shaft drilling
operations and be moistened just prior to placing the floor slab.
The horizontal limits of select fill should be limited to those areas where a reduction in
potential soil movements is desired. These may include paving and flatwork areas
directly adjacent to the structures such as at doorways and entrances. The select fill
should not extend outside the limits of the building in areas which will not be sealed with
flatwork or pavement. Additional recommendations regarding select fill below grade are
provided in Section 5.3 of this report.
When constructing select fill, care should be taken to avoid water ponding in the select
fill layer. This could cause post construction movements which exceed the estimated
values. Care must be taken to prevent landscape watering, surface drainage, leaking
utility lines or other sources of water from entering the select fill.
We also recommend that the slab-on-grade be "floating", that is, fully ground supported
and not structurally connected to walls or foundation where possible. This will help to
minimize the possibility of cracking and displacement of the slab due to differential
movement between the slab and the foundation. Although movements are estimated to
be within tolerable limits for structural safety, such movements could be detrimental to
a slab-on-grade if it is rigidly connected to the foundation system.
There may be certain areas or projects where it will be difficult or impractical to make
the slab floating. In such areas or on such projects, it may be necessary to increase the
slab thickness and reinforcement to prevent the foundations from cracking the slab and
moving independently. The project structural engineer should be involved in determining
whether a floor slab of this type should be used. A thin sand cushion should be placed
below the slab to allow proper curing of the floor slab concrete. In addition, a vapor
barrier of polyethylene sheeting or similar material should be placed between the sand
cushion and subgrade soils to retard moisture migration.
4.5 Pavement Subgrade Preparation and Pavement Design
We anticipate that once the site grading is complete, moderate to highly expansive clay
soils will be exposed at the surface on the majority of the site outside the building area.
Because these soils exhibit a potential for shrinking and swelling, it is likely that
pavements constructed on-site will be subject to movement from the soils below. The
12
result of these movements causes distress within the pavement section which typically
leads to higher maintenance frequency and costs than for pavements constructed over
non-expansive clays.
Some differential movements of the expansive subgrade soils should be anticipated once
grading is completed. Therefore, the pavement surfaces should be finished and sloped
for positive drainage. Good perimeter drainage around the pavements is also
recommended. Both total and differential movements should be taken into consideration
at locations where pavements transition into structures.
- Generally, it is common practice to lime stabilize the upper 6 to 8 inches of subgrade soil
beneath pavements within this area. The purpose of this stabilization is not to reduce the
movements beneath the pavements, but instead to improve the bearing value of the
pavement subgrade soils and provide uniform soil conditions on which to construct the
pavements. To reduce the movements beneath the pavement areas generally requires
additional pavement subgrade preparation in conjunction with the pavement design.
For this project, it is recommended that once the final grade has been established,
representative samples of the subgrade materials be obtained for laboratory testing. Lime
- series tests should be performed on the soil samples to determine the optimum lime
concentration to reduce the Plasticity Index to 15 or below and to raise pH levels to a
minimum of 12.4.
The exposed surface of the soils should be scarified to a depth of at least 6 inches and
mixed with the required amount of lime (determined in the lime - series tests) in
accordance with the procedures described in the Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction, North Central Texas, Item 4.6, prepared by the North Central Texas
Council of Governments (NCTCOG). The sealed soil-lime mixture should be allowed
to cure for a minimum time of 48 hours, then be remixed. The remixing and
13
pulverization operation, as described in NCTCOG Item 4.6, should proceed until the soil
is uniformly broken down and meets the gradation limits provided in that specification.
The resulting mixture should then be brought to near optimum (optimum to plus 3
percentage points above) moisture condition and uniformly compacted to a minimum of
95 percent of standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) density. The compacted material should
then be covered immediately with paving or kept moist until the paving is placed.
In all areas where hydrated lirne is used to stabilize the subgrade soils, routine gradation
tests should be performed at a rate of one test every 10,000 square feet of paving area
and at least one test per day. Gradation percentages outlined in NCTCOG Item 4.6
should be utilized. These tests will confirm that the material has been adequately broken
down. Should any areas be out of conformance on these tests, then additional lime or
remixing must be performed to bring the soil into compliance for the i0,000 square feet
area represented by the deficient tests. Field density testing should also be performed
at the above recommended frequency to confirm proper compaction.
The following reinforced concrete pavement sections have been developed based on the
noted traffic loading conditions for consideration at this site.
Light Traffic (automobiles, occasional light trucks, parking areas)
5.0 in. Reinforced concrete (3,000 psi concrete)
6.0 in. Lime stabilized and compacted subgrade
Heavy Traffic (fire lanes and service drives)
6.0 in. Reinforced concrete (3,600 psi concrete)
6.0 in. Lime stabilized and compacted subgrade
14
- A relatively close joint spacing of 15 feet is preferred. Local area practice often includes
the use of No. 3 reinforcing steel bars in each direction at spacing of 12 to 24 inches
- with an 18-inch spacing being commonly used.
-- Expansion joints should be sawed as soon as the concrete will allow. If construction
joints are provided, these joints should be keyed. Proper design and sealing of joints will
-- help minimize moisture in-flow in the subgrade. A properly graded and drained
pavement subgrade to minimize the trapping of water under the pavement must also be
- provided. Proper concrete finishing and curing practices must be employed. All paving
materials should comply with the Texas Department of Transportation Standard
- Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Item 360, 1993.
Loading (traffic) must not be allowed until the concrete has reached 75 percent of its
- design strength.
The pavement sections described above are considered suitable for general purpose usage
for the anticipated subgrade conditions. A comprehensive analysis of the pavement
system was not within the scope of work for this exploration. This analysis would
include consideration of traffic loads, frequency, subgrade drainage, design life and the
overall economics. An aggressive maintenance program to keep joints and cracks sealed
to prevent moisture infiltration will help extend the pavement life.
4.6 Drainage
Positive surface drainage must be incorporated into the final grading plan to reduce
seasonal variations in moisture content of the foundation soils. All pavements and
sidewalks must be sloped away from the proposed building to prevent ponding of water
near the foundations.
The foundation slab should be set at a high enough level to permit a final exterior
_ downward grade slope of at least 1 foot (vertical) to 10 feet (horizontal) for a distance
15
of at least 5 feet (but preferably 10 feet) away from the building. Roof downspouts
should discharge at least 3 feet away from the foundation slab.
We recommend that area paving or exterior flatwork extend to the building lines, if
possible, rather than have planters or other open areas adjacent to the structure. If
planters are located adjacent to the building, they should be self-contained to eliminate
a possible source of moisture gain or loss to the soils beneath the building slab. All trees
should be a minimum of one-half their mature height away from the building or
pavement edges to reduce potential for moisture fluctuations in the foundation soils.
Careful control of irrigation water within planters is essential. No water must be allowed --
to percolate down to any remaining underlying potentially active soils below the building.
Therefore, we recommend that the exposed backfill soils extending beyond the building --
lines be capped with a 18 inch thick cover of well compacted, impervious clay with a
plasticity index between 15 and 25 or be covered with pavements. The purpose of the --
clay cap or pavements is to minimize potential moistt, re losses or gains beneath the
building. -
5.0 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES AND RECOMMENDATIONS
It is possible that variation in subsurface conditions will be encountered during construction.
In order to permit correlation during construction between the test boring data and the actual
subsurface conditions encot, ntered &,ring construction, it is recommended that a registered
geotechnical engineer or his representative be retained on a continuing basis to perform
observations during construction.
Some construction problems, particularly as to degree or magnitude, cannot be anticipated until
the course of construction. The recommendations offered in the following paragraphs are not
intended to limit or preclude conceivable solutions, but rather to provide the client with our
t6
_ observations based on our experience and our understanding of the project characteristics and
subsurface conditions.
5.1 Site Preparation and Grading
In general, site preparation should include necessary stripping of vegetation and fencing
- and proofrolling. Upon completion of excavation and prior to placing any fill, we
recommend that the exposed subgrade be carefully inspected by proofrolling to help
-~ compact pockets of loose soil and expose additional areas of weak, soft, or wet soils.
This must be accomplished prior to placing any grade raise fill and drilling any shafts.
The proofrolling operation must be performed under the observation of a qualified
geotechnical engineer. Proofrolling consists of rolling the entire subgrade with a heavily
loaded tandem axle dump truck or other approved equipment capable of applying similar
wheel loads. Any soft, wet or weak fill or natural soils disclosed by proofrolling should
be removed and replaced with well compacted material as outlined in Section :5.3.
Care should be exercised during the grading operations at the site. The traffic of heavy
equipment, including heavy compaction equipment, may create a general deterioration
of the shallower soils. Therefore, it should be anticipated that some construction
difficulties could be encountered during periods when these soils are saturated and that
it may be necessary to improve, remove or simply stay off of the saturated soils.
5.2 Drilled Shaft Excavations
All drilled shaft excavations must be carefully observed to confirm that foundations will
bear on satisfactory materials. Materials exposed in the base of all satin;factory shaft
excavations should be protected against any detrimental change in condition.. Surface
runoff water should be drained away from the drilled shaft excavations and not be
allowed to collect. All concrete for drilled shafts should be placed the same day the
17
excavation is made and not more than 4 hours after completion of drilling. All drilled
shafts should be at least 1.5 feet in diameter to facilitate clean out of the base and proper
observation. --
Based on the soil and groundwater conditions encountered and our experience in the site
vicinity, it is our opinion that temporary casing will be required at nearly all of the
drilled shaft locations to control groundwater seepage. Any groundwater within the
drilled shafts should be removed by pumping within the casing prior to placing concrete.
We also recommend that a tremie pipe be utilized during concrete placement to minimize
segregation of aggregates from the concrete.
Fill Placement and Compaction
All soil materials used as fill should be free of decomposable or otherwise deleterious
material. All on-site or fill soils with a plasticity index greater than 15 can be used as
grade raise fill outside the building area. All clay soils should be compacted to a dry
density of at least 93 percent, but not exceeding 98 percent, of the Standard maximum
dry density (ASTM D-698 Method A). The compacted moisture content of the clays
during placement should be at optimum and not exceeding 6 percentage points above the
optimum moisture content. Recommendations for preparation and compaction of soils
within the upper 6 inches below the pavement sections are discussed in Section 4.6.
Materials brought in from oft-site and used as select fill beneath the building should
consist of a uniform, homogeneous, non-expansive sandy clay or clayey sand soil with
a liquid limit (LL) between 20 to 35 and have a plasticity index (PI) of not less than 5
or greater than 15. All select fill should be moisture processed within -3 to +3 _
percentage points of the materials optimum moisture content and compacted to a dry
density of at least 95 percent of the Standard maximum dry density.
Compaction should be accomplished by placing the fill in 6 to 8 inch thick loose lifts and
compacting each lift to at least the specified minimum dry density. It is imperative that
the fill materials not exceed four inches in maximum size. If larger fragments or clods
are encountered during grading, then these clods must be broken down prior to final
placement and compaction in the fill.
-- In order for the fill materials to perform as intended, the fill material must be placed in
a manner which produces a good uniform fill compacted within the density and moisture
ranges outlined in the preceding paragraphs. Density testing must be performed on fill
soils to confirm this performance as construction progresses. In the building area fills,
-- we recommend that each lift be tested at a frequency of no less than 1 test per lift per
each 5,000 square feet. In remaining areas on-site, a testing frequency of 1 test per lift
per each 10,000 square feet should be sufficient.
5.4 Groundwater
As was stated in Section 5.2, we anticipate that temporary shaft casing will be required
at nearly all of the drilled shaft locations. It is anticipated that minor groundwater
seepage in drilled shaft excavations can be generally handled by temporary casings and
conventional dewatering equipment. If shallow groundwater seepage is encountered
during placement of select fill or utility trench excavations, the water should be collected
at low points in the excavation and then be removed by pumping.
6.0 QUALIFICATIONS OF RECOMMENDATIONS
Our evaluation of foundation design and construction conditions has been based on an
understanding of the site and project information and data obtained during our field investigation.
The general subsurface conditions utilized have been based on interpolation of the subsurface
data between the borings. Regardless of the thoroughness of a subsurface investigation, there
is always the possibility that conditions between borings will be different from those at the
19
boring locations, that conditions are not as anticipated by the designers, or that the construction
process has altered the soils conditions. Therefore, experienced geotechnical engineers or their
representative should inspect the earthwork and foundation construction to confirm that the
conditions anticipated in design actually exist. Otherwise, we assume no responsibility for
construction compliance with the design concepts, specifications or recommendations.
In our experience, ATEC has found it beneficial that once the final construction plans and --
specifications have been completed, that we be allowed to review such plans and related
documents. The purpose of the review will be to confirm that the design documents and details -"*
are consistent with the recommendations included in this report.
The design recommendations presented in this report have been developed on the basis of the
previously described project characteristics and subsurface conditions. If there is any change
in these project criteria, including project location on the site, a review should be made by this
office to determine if any modifications in the recommendations will be required. The findings
of such a review should be presented in a supplemental report.
The nature and extent of variation between the borings may not become evident until the course
of construction. If significant variations then appear evident, it will be necessary to reevaluate
the recommendations of this report after performing on-site observations during the construction
period and noting the characteristics of any variation. However, only minor variations that can
be readily evaluated and adjusted for during construction are expected.
Our professional services have been performed, our findings obtained and our recommendations
prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering principles and practices.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties either expressed or implied. This company is not
responsible for the conclusions, opinions or recommendations made by others based on these
data.
20
As the client of a consulting ge~t~hnical engineer, you MOST GEOTECHNICAL FINDINGS ARE
should know that site subsurface conditions cause more PROFESSIONAL JUDGMENTS
_ construction problems than any other factor. ASFE/The Site exploration identifies actual subsurface conditions
Association of Engineering Firms Practicing in the only at those points ,where samples are taken. The data
Geoscences offers the following suggestions and were ~_xtrapotated by '/our geotechnical engineer ,who
observations to help you manage your risks, then applied judgment to render an opinion about
- overall subsurface conditions. The actual interface
A GEOTECHNICAI. ENGINEERING REPORT IS BASED between materials may be far more gradual or abrupt
ON A UNIQUE SET OF PROJECT-SPECIFIC FACTORS than your report indicates. A~uat conditions in areas
Your ~eote,-,.hnical engineering report is based on a not sampled may differ from those predi~ed in your
-- subsurface exploration plan designed to consider a report. While nothing can be done to prevent such
unique set oF praiect-sl;edfic factors. These factors situations, you and your geotechnical engineer can work
t,/pically include: the general nature oF the structure together to hetp minimize their impac. Retaining your
involved, its size. and configuration; the location of the geotechnical engineer r.o obse.,'~e construction can be
structure on the site: other improvements, such as particularly bene.~ciai in this respec.
access roads, parking lots. and underground utilities;
and the additional risk created by scope-oF-se~ice A REPORT'S RECOMMENDATIONS
-- limitations imposed by the client. To help avoid costly CAN ONLY BE PRELIMINARY
problems, ask your geotechnical engineer to evaluate The constru~lon recommendations included in your
how favors that change subsequent to the date of the geotechnical ~.~g.ne,.~ ~,'-~ report are preliminary, because
report may affect the reporrs recommendauons, they must be based on the assumption that conditions
'-' revealed through se!e~ive exploratory sampling are
Unless your geotechnicai engineer indicates otherwise, indicative of actual conditions throughout a site.
do not use 7our geotechnical engineering report: Because actual subsurface conditions can be discerned
~ only during earthwork, you should retain your geo-
· when the nature of the proposed structure is technical engineer to observe actuai conditions and to
changed, for example, if an office building will be finalize recommendations. Only the geotechnical
erected instead ora parking ~arage. or a refrigerated engineer ,*,ho prepared the report is ~lly familiar with
~ warehouse will be built instead of an unreFrigerated the background information needed to determine
one: whether or not the report's recommendations are valid
· when the size. elevation, or configuration oF the and whether ar not ~he contractor is abiding by appli-
proposed structure is altered: cable recommendations. The 8eotechnical engineer ,who
· when the !ocadon or orientation oF the proposed deve!oped your report cannot assume responsibility or
structure is modified: liability for the adequac/of the report's recommenda-
· when there is a change oF ownership: or tJons if another party is retained to observe construction.
,~ · for application to an adiacent site.
GEOTECHNICAL SERV]CES ARE PERFORMED
Geotechnical engineers cannot accept responsibility for FOR SPECIFIC PURPOSES AND PERSONS
problems that may occur iF they are roi: consulted after Consulting 8eotechnical engineers prepare reports to
· factors considered in their report's development have meet the specific needs of specific individuals. A report
changed, prepared for a civil engineer may not be adequate for a
construction contractor or even another civil engineer.
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS CAN CHANGE Unless indicated othe.~*,ise, your gectechnical engineer
A geotechnical engineering report is based on condi- prepared your report expressly for you and expressly for
tions that existed al: the ~ime oF subsurface exploration, purposes you indicated. No one other than you should
Do not base construction decisions on a geotechnical apply this report for its intended purpose without first
. engineering report whose adequacy may have been conferring with ~he geol:echnical engineer. No part7
affected by time. Speak with your geotechnical consult- should apply this report for any pu~ose other than that
ant to learn if additional tests are advisable before originally contemplated without first conferring with the
construction starts Note. too. that additional tests may geotechnical engineer.
~. be required '*,hen subsurface conditions are affected by
construction operations at or adiacent to the site. or by GEOENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS
natural events such as floods, earthquakes, or ground ARE NOT AT ISSUE
water f]u~ua[ions. Keep your geotechnical consultant Your gectechmcal engineering report is not Iikely to
--- apprised of any such e,/en~s, re!ate any findings, conclusions or recommefldations
about ~.he potential for hazardous materials existing at mates 'oas not one of the specific pu~oses for which it -
the site. The equipment, techniques, and personne! was prepared. In other words, while a contractor may
used to perform a geoenvironmental exploration differ gain important knowledge from a report prepared for
substandalIy From those applied in geotechnical another pare/, the cont;-ac:or would be we!l-advised :o
engineenng Contamination can c~eate major risks. If discuss the report with your geotechnical engineer and
you have no information about the potential for your to pe.~orm the additional or alternative work that the
site being contaminated, you are advised to speak with contra~or be!ieves may be needed to obtain the data
your geotec~hnical consultant for information retadng to spec:ficatly appropriate for construction cost estimating
ge~environmental issues, purposes.) Some clients betieve that it is unwise or
unnecessary to give contractors access to their geo-
A GEOTECHNlCAL ENGINEF_RING REPORT IS technical engineering reports because they hold the
SUBJECT TO MISINTERP~ATION mistaken impression that simply disclaiming responsi-
Costly problems can oceJr when other design profeso bilit~ for the accurac/of subsurface information always
sionals deve!op their plans based on misinte.~retadons insulates them from attendant liability. Providing the
of a ge~technical engin~ring r~port. To help avoid best available information to contractors helps prevent
misinterpretations, retain your geotechnical engineer to costly construction problems. It also he!ps reduce the
work with other project design professionals who are adve~ariai attitudes that can agffravate problems to
affected by the ge~technical report. Have your ge~tech- disproportionate scale.
nical engineer explain report implications to design
professionals affected by them. and then review those READ RESPONSIBILITY CLAUSES CLOSELY
design professionals' plans and spedfications to see Because geotechnical engineering is based extensive!y
haw they have incorporated ge~technical favors, on iudgment and opinion, it is far !ess e~act than other
Although certain other design professionals may be faro- design disciplines. This situatien has resulted in wholly
iliar with geotechnical concerns, none knows as much unwarranted claims being lodged against geetechnicat
about them as a competent ge~technical engineer, engineers. To help prevent this probiem, ge~technicat
engineers have developed a number of clauses for use in
BORING LOGS SHOULD NOT BE SEPARATED their contracts, reports, and other documents. Responsi-
FROM THE REPORT bility clauses are not exculpatory clauses designed to
Geotechnical engineers develop final bodng Iogs based transfer g_~atechnical engineers' liabilities to other
upon their interpretation of the field logs (assembled by parties. Instead, they are definitive douses that ide~ti~y
site personne!) and laboratory evaluation of fietd where geotechn/cat engineers' responsibilities begin and
samples. Geotechnical engineers customarily include end. Their use helps all parties involved recognize their
only final bodng logs in their reports. F~nal bodng logs individual responsibilities and take appropriate action.
should nat under any circumstances be redrawn for Some of these definitive clauses are likely to appear in
inclusion in architectural or other design drawings, your geotechnical engineering report. Read them
because drafters may commit errors or omissions in the close!y. Your geotechnical engineer will be pleased to
transfer process. Although photographic reproduction give full and frank answers to any questions.
eliminates this problem, it does nothing to minimize the
possibility of contractors misinterpreting the logs during RELY ON THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER
bid preparation. When this occurs, delays, disputes, and FOR ADDITIONAL ASSISTANCE
unanticipated costs are the all-too-frequent result. Most ASFE-member consulting geotechnical engineer-
ing firms are familiar with a variety of techniques and
To minimize the likelihood of bodng log misinterpreta- approac~hes that can be used to help reduce dsks for all
Man, give contractors ready access to the complete parties to a construction project, from design through
geotechnical engineering report prepared or authorized construction. Speak with your geotechnical engineer not
for their use. (fl access is provided only to the report only about geotechnicat issues, but others as well, to
prepared for you. you should advise contractors of the 'learn about approaches that may be of genuine benefit.
report's limitations, assuming that a contractor was nat You may also wish to obtain certain ASFE publications.
one of the specific persons for whom the report was Contact. a member of ASFE of.-\SFE for a complimentary
prepared and that developing construction cost esti- director/o~ ASFE publications.
PROFESSIONAL
FIRMS PRACTICING
IN THE GEOSCIENCES
881 I COLESVILLE ROAD/SUITE g 106/SI LVER SPRING. M D 209 [ 0
TELEPHONE: 301/56%2733 FACSIMILE 3011589-2017
APPENDIX
Figure 1 - Boring Location Plan
Field Investigation Procedures
Laboratory Investigation Procedures
Table 1 - Free Swell Test Results
Table 2 - Unconfined Compressive Strength Test Results on Gray Shale Specimens
Record of Subsurface Exploration Sheets (Boring Logs)
Key to Soil Symbols and Classification
FIELD INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES
Using standard continuous flight auger drilling equipment, a total of eight test borings were
drilled for this investigation at the approximate locations shown in the Boring Location Plan,
Figure 1. included in this Appendix. The number and general location of the borings were
chosen by Phillips Swager Associates. The depths of the test borings was determined by ATEC
Associates. The test boring locations were staked in the field by an ATEC representative using
standard taping procedures.
Relatively undisturbed samples of the cohesive subsurface materials were obtained by
hydraulically pressing 3 inch O.D. thin-wall tubes into the underlying soils at selected depths
(ASTM D-1587). These samples were removed from the sampling tubes in the field and
examined visually. One representative portion of each sample was sealed in a plastic bag for
use in future visual examinations and possible testing in the laboratory.
Representative samples of the subsurface materials were also obtained employing split-spoon
sampling procedures (ASTM D-1586). Relatively disturbed samples were obtained at a selected
depths in the borings by driving a standard 2 inch O.D. split-spoon sampler 18 inches into the
subsurface material using a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches. The number of blows required
to drive the split-spoon sampler the final 12 inches of penetration (N-value) is recorded in the
appropriate column of the logs.
Samples of the underlying gray shale bedrock were obtained in two of the eight test borings
initiated for this study using conventional NX rock coring equipment and techniques. The rock
core samples were retained and transported to our laboratory in appropriate core boxes. Selected
core samples were field wrapped for preservation of moisture content.
In addition, the underlying gray shale bedrock was tested using Texas Highway Department
(THD) cone penetrometer test methods. The cone penetrometer test is performed by driving a
45° metal cone into the bedrock materials using a 140 pound hammer falling 36 inches. The
cone is hammered lO0 blows and the number of inches of penetration driven is then recorded.
This value is provided on the appropriate boring logs.
Logs of all borings (Record of Subsurface Exploration Sheets) have been included in this
Appendix. The logs show visual descriptions of the soil and rock strata encountered using the
Unified Soil Classification System. Sampling information, pertinent field data, and field
observations are also included.
LABORATORY INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES
The soil and rock samples were inspected and classified by a geotechnical engineer in accordance
with the Unified Soil Classification System and the boring logs were edited as necessary.
Natural moisture content tests (ASTM D-2216) and Atterberg limit tests (ASTM D-43 !8) were
performed on selected samples to aid in classifying the subsurface materials and to determine
_ the engineering characteristics of the materials. In addition, hand penetrometer strength tests
were performed on selected soil samples. Results of all laboratory tests described above are
_ provided on the accompanying boring logs.
The expansive properties of the upper clay layer was further analyzed by performing a free swell
test. The free swell test was performed by placing a selected sample in the consolidometer
-- apparatus with a predetermined overburden pressure and allowing the sample to expand by
absorbing water. When the sample exhibits very little tendency for further expansion, the final
-- height was recorded and the percent swell and total moisture gain calculated. The result of this
test is listed in Table I in this Appendix.
Unconfined compressive strength tests were performed on selected rock core samples in
accordance with ASTM Method D-2983-86 in order to evaluate the allowable end bearing and
skin friction design values for the gray sandy shale bedrock. The results of these tests are listed
in Table 2 in this Appendix and on the accompanying boring logs.
_ GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION
PROPOSED POLICE STATION
Parkway Boulevard
_ Coppell, Texas
25-02-95-00092
-- ~: ~ Table: 1 .. st,nmia~Y °r Fiiee SWell T~ ReSUlt : : i ::::i :i;~ ::i~!i::::
Overburden Initial Final Free
-- Boring Depth, (ft) Pressure, (tst') Moisture, (%) Moisture, (%) Swell, (%)
B-3I 2-4 0.191 21.4 [ 22.7 1.0
:::. ii i" Gray Shale SPellmensi I : :
Moisture Unconfined Compressive
Boring Depth, (ft) Content, (%) Strength, {'tst)
B-I 19.5 - 20.5 13 17.5
B-1 25 - 26 13 10.1
B-4 21 - 22 5 24.2
-- B-4 25 - 26 16 23.1
l~ 11350 Mathia Avenue RECORD OF
~ Dallas, Texas 75229
(2~ 4) s56-2204 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
Metro 263-1681
_ Client City of Coppell Boring # B-1 (Page 1 of 1)
Architect Engineer Job # 25-02-95-00092
Project Name PROPOSED POLICE STATION Drawn By SS/CRF
.~ Pro.iect Location Parkway Boulevard/Coppell, Texas Approved By DPZ
DRILLING end SAMPMNG INFORMATION TEST DATA
Date Started 4-28-95 Hemmer Wt. N/A lbs.
Date Completed 4-28-95 Hamrne~ Drop N/A in.
Drill Foreman RDC Spoon Sampler OD N/A in.
Inspector Rock Core Da. 2.125 in.
-- Boring Method CFA Shetby Tube OD 3.0 in.
Client ID # 0151 Continuoum Tube OD N/A in.
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
-- SURFACE ELEVATION '
Dark brown, stiff, SILTY CLAY to
- CLAY (CL-CH)
_ - -stiff to very stiff with trace sand
below 1'
- -very stiff below 2'
-medium stiff to stiff with trace sand
-- below 4'
-dark gray with trace calcareous
- deposits below 8'
-- -tan and gray with gravel below 13'
- -Dark gray, hard, SHALY CLAY (CH)
- -Dark gray SHALE
Bottom of boring at 29'
SAMPLER TYPE GROUNDWATER DEPTH BORING METHOD
SS - SPLIT SPOON-SPT _~ AT COMPLETION 16.00 FT. HSA- HOLLOW STEM AUGER
ST - PRESSED SHELBY TUBE ~ AFTER HRS. FT. CFA- CONTINUOUS FLIGHT AUGERS
-- RC - ROCK CORE · WATER ON RODS 13.00 FT. DC - DRIVING CASING
THD - TEXAS HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT CONE -t- AT SURVEY FT. RW - ROTARY WASH
CU - CUTTINGS HPA- HAND POWER AUGER
CT - CONTINUOUS TUBE
V 11356 Mathi~ Avenue RECORD OF
Dallas, Texas 75229
(214) 556-2204 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
Metro 263-1681
Client City of Coppell Boring # B-2 (Page 1 of 1)
Architect Engineer Job # 25'02-95-00092
Project Name PROPOSED POLICE STATION Drawn ay SS/CRF
Project Location Parkway Boulevard/Coppellr Texas Approved By. DPZ
DRILLING a~d SAMPENG INFORMATION TEST DATA
Date Started 4-28-95 Hemmer Wt. N/A lbs.
Date Completed 4-28-95 Hammer Drop N/A in. ~
Drill Forernan RDC Spoon Sampler OD 2.0 in. ~ .z.
c ~ ~ x
Inspector Rock Core Die. N/A in. ~ o . >
c~ient ~D # 0151 Continuoua Tube OD N/A in. ~ ~ ~. ~ .~ .o ~ ~ c
Dark brown, stiff to ve~ stiff, SIL~
- CLAY to C~Y (CL-CH) - ~ ST 80 2.O 2O.O ssz~_
-vew stiff with trace calcareous -
- deposits below 2' _ 2 ST 80 2,5 23.0 _
-stiff below 4' -
5 3 ST 70 1.5
-brownish gray, stiff to vew stiff
- below 8' _ 4 ST 100 1.7 2.0 109.3 19.0
10
-tan and gray, medium stiff to stiff -
- with gravel below 13' _ s ST 70 0.9 1.o 119.4 14.0 _
15
. 18.0
Dark gray, hard, SHALY C~Y (CH)
- _ e ST ~0 4.5 + 22.0 _
20
25
8 THD :00/1.5~ _
Bottom of boring at 29'
~A~PLER ~PE GROUNDWATER DEPTH BORING ~ETHOD
SS - SPLIT $POON-S~ ~ AT COMPL~ION 8.50 ~. HSA- HOLLOW STEM AUGER
ST - PRESSED SHELBY TUBE ~ ~ER HRS. 8.00 ~. CFA- CONTINUOUS FUGHT AUGE~
RC - ROCK CORE · WATER ON RODS 1~.00 ~. DC - DRIVING CASING
THD - T~AS HIGHWAY DEP~T~ENT CONE + AT SURVEY ~. ~W - ROT~Y W~H
CU - CU~INGS HPA- H~D POWER AUGER
CT - CONTINUOUS TUBE
V 11358 Mathie Avenue RECORD OF
Dallas, Texas 75229
(2~4~ 55e-22o4 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
Metro 263-1681
Client City of Coppell Boring # B-3 (Page 1 of 1)
Architect Engineer Job # 25-02-95-00092
Proiect Nm'ne PROPOSED POLICE STATION Drawn ay SS/CRF
Project Location Parkway Boulevard/Coppellt Texas Approved By DPZ
DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION TEST DATA
Date Started 4-21~-95 Hammer Wt. 140 lbs.
Date Completed 4-28-95 Hammer Drop 30 in. ~ o
Drill Foreman RDC Spoon Samplm' OD 2.0 in. I- -->
Boring Method CFA Shelby Tube OD 3.0 ~. ~ S & = =
Client ID it 0151 Continuoua Tube OD N/A in.
SOIL
CLASSIFICATION
SURFACE ELEVATION' ~ "' (-) Z~ ~ ~: = ~ '3 '
POSSIBLE FILL, Dark to reddish brown,
- very stiff, SANDY CLAY (CL) - 1 ST 40 3.25 12.0 ~ ~7~a_
2.0
Dark brown, very stiff, SILTY CLAY to
- CLAY(CL. CH) - 2 ST 5O 3.0 21.0 ~o~_
-stiff to very stiff below 4' --
5 3 ST 50 2.0 26.0
-gray, stiff, with trace calcareous --
- nodules below 8' _ 4 ST 50 1.5 --
10
- -light brown and gray with gravel e --
- below 13' _ 5 ST 70 ~_ 1.2 1.5 126.3 14.0 _
15
Dark gray, hard, SHALY CLAY (CH) - ~- -
20
_ 23.0
Dark gray SHALE
Bottom of boring at 25' 25 7 THD~ 00/2.5
SAMPLER TYPE GROUNDWATER DEPTH BORING METHOD
SS - SPLIT SPOON-SPT ~ AT COMPLETION 18.20 FT. HSA- HOLLOW STEM AUGER
ST - PRESSED SHELBY TUBE ~ AFTER HRS. 14.10 FT. CFA- CONTINUOUS FLIGHT AUGERS
RC - ROCK CORE · WATER ON RODS 15.00 FT. DC - DRIVING CASING
THD - TEXAS HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT CONE -t- AT SURVEY FT. RW - ROTARY WASH
CU - CUTTINGS HPA- HAND POWER AUGER
CT - CONTINUOUS TUBE
V 11356 Mathia Avenue
- Da,a,, Taxa, 75229 RECORD OF
(214) s66-2204 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
Metro 263-1 681
-- C~ient City of Coppell Boring # B-4 (Page 1 of 1)
Architect Engineer Job # 25'02'95'00092
Project Name PROPOSED POLICE STATION Orawn By SS/CRF
__ Project Location Parkway Boulevard/Coppell, Texas Approved By DPZ
DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION TEST DATA
Date Started ~3-;/-~H3 Hammer Wt. N/A lbs.
Date Completed 5-2-95 Hammer Drop N/A in.
Drill Foremen RDC Spoon Sampler OD N/A in.
__ Boring Method CFA Shelby Tube OD 3.0 m~
Client ID # 0151 Continuous Tube OD N/A in.
SOIL CLASSIFICATION =E .= ~ ~. ~. _ _ ..~ - u
o
zd "' ~ o~. . . " ,
SURFACE ELEVATION u) ~ c3 u) u)
Dark brown, stiff, SILTY CLAY to
- CLAY (CL-CH) - 1 ST 90 1.5 16.0 _
-- _very stiff below 2' -
- _ 2 ST 70 3.0 221.0 --
-stiff to very stiff with trace calcareous -
-- deposits below 4' 5 3 ST 60 2.0
-brownish gray and stiff below 8' -
-- _ 4 ST 80 1.75 17.0 ~o~2~_
10
- - -stiff to very stiff with some gravel ~ -
- below 13' _ 5 ST ao~_ 2.o ~.o _
15
18.0
- -D~-k-gray, hard SHALY CLAY (CH) 19.0 e ST 100 4.5+ --
Dark gray SHALE -
20
-- 24.2 --
127.2 5.0
-- _ 7 RC 91 --
- ~ 25 75
113.6 16.0
-- 23.1 --
Bottom of boring at 29'
-- SAMPLER TYPE GROUNDWATER DEPTH BORING METHOD
SS - SPLIT SPOON-SPT _~ AT COMPLETION 14.40 FT. HSA- HOLLOW STEM AUGER
ST - PRESSED SHELBY TUBE ~ AFTER HRS. 13.00 FT. CFA- CONTINUOUS FLIGHT AUGERS
~ RC - ROCK CORE · WATER ON RODS 13.00 FT. DC - DRIVING CASING
THD - TEXAS HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT CONE -i- AT SURVEY FT. RW - ROTARY WASH
CU - CUTTINGS HPA- HAND POWER AUGER
CT - CONTINUOUS TUBE
I 1356 Mathis Aver~ua RECORD OF ~
Dallaa, Texaa 75229
(214} 556-2204 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
Metro 263-1681
Client City of Coppell Boring # B-5 (Page 1 of 1)
A~chitect Engineer Job # 25-02-95-00092
Project Name PROPOSED POLICE STATION Drawn By SS/CRF
Project Location Parkway Boulevard/Coppell, Texas Approved By. DPZ
DRILLING end SAMPMNG INFORMATION TEST DATA
Date Started 4-28-95 Hammer Wt. N/A lbs.
Date Completed 4-28-95 Hammer Drop N/A in.
Drill Foremen RDC Spoon Sampler OD N/A in.
Inspector Rock Core Die. N/A in.
Boring Method CFA Shelby Tu~ OD 3.0 in.
Client ID # 0151 Continuoua Tube OD N/A in.
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
SURFACE ELEVATION '
Dark brown, very stiff, SILTY CLAY to
- CLAY (CL-CH)
-stiff to very stiff below 2'
-very stiff below 4'
Bottom of boring at 5'
- (Dry upon completion)
-- SAMPLER TYPE GROUNDWATER DEPTH BORING METHOD
~Z AT COMPLETION FT. HSA- HOLLOW STEM AUGER
SS - SPMT SPOON-SPT =
ST - PRESSED SHELBY TUBE =~ AFTER HRS. FT. CFA - CONTINUOUS FUGHT AUGERS
__ RC - ROCK CORE · WATER ON RODS FT. DC - DRIVING CASING
THD - TEXAS HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT CONE -i- AT SURVEY FT. RW - ROTARY WASH
CU - Cu3'rlNGS HPA- HAND POWER AUGER
CT - CONTINUOUS TUBE
V 1135e Mathia Avenue RECORD OF
Dallas, Texas 75229
(214) 556-2204 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
Metro 263-1 681
Client City of Coppell Boring # B-6 (Page 1 of 1)
Architect Engineer Job ~ 25-02-95-00092
Project Name PROPOSED POLICE STATION Drawn By SS/CRF
Project Location Parkway Boulevard/Coppell, Texas Approved By DPZ
DRILIJNG end SAMPUNG INFORMATION TEST DATA
Date Started 4-28-95 Hammer Wt. N/A lbs.
Date Completed 4-28-95 Hammer Drop. N/A
Drill Foraman RDC Spoon Sampler OD N/A in.
Client ID · 0151 Continuoue Tube OD N/A in. ~' " ' o
SOIL
CLASSIFICATION
Dark brown, stiff, SILTY CLAY to
- CLAy (CL-CH) - ~ ST 100 1.5 --
-dark brown and tan below 2'
_ _ 2 ST 70 1.5 lB.0 _
-reddish brown and hard below 4' 3 ST ~00 4.5+ 7.O
5
Bottom of boring at 5'
- (Dry upon completion) - -
10
15
20
25
SAMPLER TYPE GROUNDWATER DEPTH BORING METHOD
__~ AT COMPLETION FT. HSA- HOLLOW STEM AUGER
SS - SPLIT SPOON-SPT I' AFTER HRS. FT. CFA- CONTINUOUS FLIGHT AUGERS
ST - PRESSED SHELBY TUBE
RC - ROCK CORE ~ WATER ON RODS FT. DC - DRIVING CASING
THD - TEXAS HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT CONE '1- AT SURVEY FT. RW - ROTARY WASH
CU - CUTTINGS HPA- HAND POWER AUGER
CT - CONTINUOUS TUBE
11356 Mathia Avenue
-- Della=, Texas 75229 RECORD OF
{214) 55~-2204 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
Metro 263-1681
_ c~iant City of Coppell Boring # B-7 {Page 1 of 1}
Architect Engineer Job # 25'02'95-00092
Project Name PROPOSED POLICE STATION Drawn By SS/CRF
~ Project Location Parkway Boulevard/Coppell, Texas A~proved By DPZ
DRILLING and SAMPUNG INFORMATION TEST DATA
Date Started ~-Z-~3 Hammer Wt. N/A Iba.
Date Completed 5-2-95 Hammer Drop N/A in.
Drill Foremen RDC Spoon Sampler OD N/A in.
c ~ ~ x
Inspector Rock Core Dia. N/A in. ~3 o . >
'--
-- Boring Method CFA Shelby Tube OD 3.0 in.
Client ID # 0151 Continuous Tube OD N/A i~.
SOIL
CLASSIFICATION
SURFACE ELEVATION ' = · ~u u z
Dark brown, hard, SILTY CLAY to
- CLAy (CL-CH) - ~ ST $o 4.5+ ~3.0 _
- .very stiff below 3' - 2 ST SO *.0/2.5 -
_ -stiff below 4' 3 ST 9O 1.5 -
Bottom of boring at 5' 5
- (Dry upon completion) - -
_ 10
15
20~
25
SAMPLER TYPE GROUNDWATER DEPTH BORING METHOD
SS - SPUT SPOON-SPT _~ AT COMPLETION FT. HSA- HOLLOW STEM AUGER
ST - PRESSED SHELBY TUBE ~ AFTER HRS. FT. CFA- CONTINUOUS FUGHT AUGERS
~ RC - ROCK CORE ~ WATER ON RODS FT. DC - DRIVING CASING
THD - TEXAS HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT CONE 't' AT SURVEY FT. RW - ROTARY WASH
CU - CuI-rlNGS HPA- HAND POWER AUGER
CT - CONTINUOUS TUBE
'~P'J 11356 Mathi. Avenue RECORD OF
Dallas, Texas 75229
(2141 556-2204 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
Metro 263-1681
Clmnt City of Coppell Boring /t B-8 (Page 1 of 1)
Architect Engineer Job # 25'02-95-00092
Proiect Name PROPOSED POLICE STATION Drawn By SS/CRF
Project Location Parkway Boulevard/Coppell, Texas Approved By DPZ
DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION TEST DATA
Date Started 5-;~-95 Hemmer Wt. N/A Ib~.
Data Completed 5-2-95 Hemmer Drop N/A in.
Drill Foremen RDC Spoon Sampler. OD N/A in. ~ '->
Inspector Rock Core Dia. N/A in.
Boring Method CFA Shelby Tube OD 3.0 ~. ,,, ~ ~- ' g : _~ 8 --
Client ID # 0151 Continuoua Tube OD N/A i,.
Dark ight brown, hard, SII. TY CL~¥
- to CL~ {GL-CH} - 1 ST I0~ 4.~+ 1~.0 _
-reddish brown, medium stiff to stiff -
-brownish gray and ve~ stiff below 4' a ST 10~ a.~ --
Bottom of boring at 5' 5
- (Dry upon completion) - -
15
20
-- 25
SAMPLER TYPE GROUNDWATER DEPTH BORING METHOD
SS - SPUT SPOON-SPT _~ AT COMPLETION FT. HSA- HOLLOW STEM AUGER
ST - PRESSED SHELBY TUBE ~ AFTER HRS. FT. CFA- CONTINUOUS FUGHT AUGERS
RC - ROCK CORE ~ WATER ON RODS FT. DC - DRIVING CASING
THD - TEXAS HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT CONE -i- AT SURVEY FT. RW - ROTARY WASH
CU - CUTTINGS HPA- HAND POWER AUGER
CT - CONTINUOUS TUBE
ATE¢
KEY TO SOIL SYMBOLS AND CLASSI2FICATION
The abbreviation.s commonly employed on each 'Record of Subsurface Exploration' sheet on the figures and in the
text of the report are as follows:
L SOIL DESCRIPTION V. SOIL PROPERTY SYMBOLS
(A) Cohesionless Soils N: Standard Penetration Resistance:
number of blows by a 140 lbs. hammer
~elative Density N. blows/ft, dropped 30 inches required to drive a 2'
Very Loose 0 to 4 O.D. split-spoon sample one foot.
Loose 5 to 10 Qu: Unconfined compressive strength, tsf
Medium Dense 11 to 30 Qp: Penetrometer unconfined compressive
Den.se 31 to 50 strength, tar
Very Dense Over 50 Id: Natural density, pcf
v: Apparent groundwater level immediately
at completion
(B) Cohesive Soils ·: Groundwater level several hours after
completion of drilling
Consistency Qu. tsf ®: water level noted on drilling tools
Very Soft Less than 0.25 Mc: Water Content
Soft 0.25 to 0.50 LL: Liquid Limit. %
Medium Stiff 0.50 to 1.00 PL: Plastic Limit. %
Stiff 1.00 to 2.00 SL: Shrinkage Limit
Very Stiff 2.00 to 4.00 PI: Plasticity Index (LL-PL)
Hard Over 4.00 Lh Liquidity Index (M¢-PL/PI)
e: Void ratio
Il. P~C1TY Gs: Specific gravity of solid particles
k: Coefficient of permeability
Degree of Plasticity i: Hydraulic gradient
?lasticitv Index q: Rate of discharge
None to Slight 0 to 4 h: Hydraulic head or potential
Slight 5 to 10
Medium 11 to 30 VI. DRII_I_ING AND SAMPLING SYMBOI~
High to Very High Over 30
AU': Auger Sample
1TI'. RELATIVE PROPORTIONS CB: Ca'bide Bit
DB: Diamond Bit
Descrivtive Term Percent SS: Split-Spool 1 1/8' I.D. and 2' O.D.
Trace I to 10 except where noted
Little 11 to 20 ST: Shelby Tube = 3' O.D. except where
Some 21 to 35 noted
And 36 to 50 WS: Washed Sample
IV. PARTICLE SIZE IDENTIFICATION
NOTE: ALL SOILS ARE CLASSIFIED
Boulders - 8 inch diameter or more ACCORDING TO THE UNIFIED SOII~
Cobbles - 3 to 8 inch diameter CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Gravel: - Coarse - 3/4 to 3 inch
- Fine - 5.0 mm to 3/4 inch
Sand: - Coarse - 2.0 mm to 5.0 mm
- Medium - 0.4 mm to 2.0 mm
- Fine ; 0.07 mm to 0.4 mm
Silt: - 0.002 mm to 0.07 mm
Clay: - up to 0.002 mm
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
DOCUMENT 00300 - PROPOSAL FORMS
To: Date:
We hereby submit our Proposal(s) for construction and completion of all work for Criminal Justice Center for the City
of Coppell, Texas.
1. Stipulated Sum: Having examined all drawings and specifications for the Construction and Completion of
all work for Criminal Justice Center including Addenda numbered through , the
Undersigned proposes to fimxish all labor and materials called for by said documents for the work indicated
in the following Base Bid, for "All Work", all as set forth in the Bidding Documents, for the following sums:
Base Bid: All Work for the construction of Criminal Justice Center as set forth in the Bidding Documents,
for the stipulated sum of:
DoUars ($ ).
Alternate Bids:
Alternate No. 1: Provide Rye Grass hydromulching in addition to Buffalo Grass hydromulcing.
(Add) (Deduct) the sum of
Alternate No. 2: Provide audio monitoring in the cell area.
(Add) (Deduct) the sum of
Unit Prices: (NOTE: All unit prices must be bid.)
1. Provide a unit price (per cubic yard) for addition of or deletion of soil excavation.
dollars ($. .).
2. Provide a unit price (per cubic yard) for addition of or deletion of rock excavation.
dollars ($ ).
This proposal consists of 4 pages.
NAME OF BIDDER:
PROPOSAL FORMS 00300 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- g. Swivel hose ell dollars ($ .).
h. 70 series valve box dollars ($ ).
i. 1419 valve box dollars ($ ).
9. Provide unit prices (per each) for addition of or deletion of the following landscape items.
a. Shumard Red Oak dollars ($. .).
_ b. Cedar Elm dollars ($. 3.
c. Crape Myrtle dollars ($. ).
d. Wax Myrtle dollars ($. ).
e. Dwarf Yaupon Holly dollars ($ ).
f. Liriope 'Big Blue' dollars ($. ).
_ g. Liriope 'Silvery Sunproof' dollars ($, ).
h. Asian Jasmine dollars ($ ).
-- 10. Provide a unit price (per square foot) for addition of or deletion of Buffalo Grass.
dollars ($ ).
11. Provide a unit price (per linear foot) for addition of or deletion of steel edging.
dollars ($ ).
-- 2. Completion of Work: If the Undersigned receives written notification of acceptance of this Proposal within
30 days after above date, he agrees to execute a contract for the above work for above compensation and
to guarantee completion of the work within __ calendar days after Notice to Proceed.
3. Bonds: The Undersigned agrees, if awarded the contract, to furnish and deliver to the Owner; a Surety
-- performance Bond and a Labor and Materials Payment Bond, each in amount equal to One Hundred Percent
(100%) of the contract amount. The premiums shall be paid by the Contractor.
This proposal consists of 4 pages.
NAME OF BIDDER:
PROPOSAL FORMS 00300 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
The surety company writing the bonds shall be subject to the approval of the Owner, and if the Owner does
not approve the surety company, for good and sufficient reason, then the Contractor shall furnish bonds with
another surety company acceptable to the Owner.
(IF AN INDIVIDUAL)
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER:
Business Address:
(Phone No. .)
(IF A COPARTNERSHIP)
FIRM NAME: ,(SEAL)
By: (Signature) (SEAL)
Business Address:
Names and Addresses of all Members of the Firm:
(Phone No. 3
(IF A CORPORATION)
CORPORATE NAME:
By: Signature must be an officer
ATTEST: other than Secretary)
Corporate Secretary
(CORPORATE SEAL)
Names of Officers:
President:
Secretary:
Treasurer:
This proposal consists of 4 pages.
NAME OF BIDDER:
PROPOSAL FORMS 00300 - 4
BID AFFIDAVIT
The undersigned certifies that the bid prices contained in this bid have been carefully reviewed and are
- submitted as correct and final. Bidder further certifies and agrees to furnish any and/or all commodities
upon which prices are extended at the price offered, and upon the conditions contained in the Specifications
of the Invitation To Bid. The period of acceptance of this bid will be calendar days from the
date of the bid opening. (Period of acceptance will be ninety (90) calendar days unless otherwise indicated
by Bidder.)
STATE OF COUNTY OF
-- BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, a Notary Public in and for the State of , on
this day personally appeared who after being by me
'- duly sworn, did depose and say:
"I, am a duly authorized officer/agent for
-- and have been duly authorized
to execute the foregoing on behalf of the said
I hereby certify that the foregoing bid has not been prepared in collusion with any other Bidder or
-- individual(s) engaged in the same line of business prior to the official opening of this bid. Further, I certify
that the Bidder is not now, nor has been for the past six (6) months, directly or indirectly concerned in any
pool, agreement or combination thereof, to control the price of services/commodities bid on, or to influence
-- any individual(s) to bid or not to bid thereon."
Name and address of Bidder:
Telephone: ( ) by:
Title: Signature:
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me by the above named
on this the day of 1994.
Notary Public in and for the State of
CITY OF COPPELL · PURCIIASING DEPARTMENT · 255 PARKWAY BOULEVARD * COPPELL, TEXAS 75019
-- BID NC.BID NO.~(~-16~q~'OI
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
TO BE COMPLETED BY APPROPRIATE INSURANCE AGENT
I, the undersigned agent, certify that the insurance requirements
contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the
below identified bidder. If the below identified bidder is
-- awarded this contract by City of Coppell, I will be able, withi~
ten (10) days after bidder is notified of such award, to furnish
a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the
_ requirements contained in this IFB.
Agent (Signature) Agent (Print)
-- Name of Insurance Carrier
Address of Agency
City/State
Phone Number Where Agent May Be Contacted
Bidder's Name (Print or Type)
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me by the above named on this the
_ day of , 19 .
Notary Public in and for the
-- State of
NOTE TO AGENT:
If this time requirement is not met, the City reserves the right
to deciare this bidder non-responsible and award the contract to
the next lowest bidder meeting the specifications. If you have
any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the
Purchasing Agent at (214) 462-0022.
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
DOCUMENT 00500 - AGREEMENT FORMS
A. OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT:
The form of Contract shall be the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, the
American Institute of Architects Document Al01, 1987 Edition.
END OF SECTION 00500
AGREEMENT FORMS 00500 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
DOCUMENT 00600 - BONDS AND CERTIFICATES
A. PERFORMANCE/PAYMENT BONDS:
The forms of Bonds shall be Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond, The American
Institute of Architects Document A311, February, 1970 Edition.
B. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE:
1. The form of the Certificate shall be Certificate of Insurance, the American Institute of Architects
Document G705, 1987 Edition, with limits and additional coverage in accordance with the
Supplementary Conditions and sample Certificate bound within.
2. Two (2) Certificate of Insurance forms shall be submitted with other Contract papers. Forms will
be supplied by the Architect.
C. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
The form of "Substantial Completion" shall be American Institute of Architects Document G704, April,
1978 Edition.
D. BID BOND:
The form of Bid Bond may be the American Institute of Architects Document A310, February, 1970 Edition
o.~r the Bonding Company Standard Form.
E. CONSENT OF SURETY TO REDUCTION IN OR PARTIAL RELEASE OF RETAINAGE:
The Form of "Consent of Surety to Reduction in or Partial Release of Retainage" shall be the American
Institute of Architects Document G707A, June, 1971 Edition.
F. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS:
The form of "List of Subcontractors" shall be the American Institute of Architects Document G805, 1970
Edition.
G. CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT:
The Form of Contractor's Qualification Statement shall be the Contractor's Qualification Statement, the
American Institute of Architects Document A305, 1986 Edition.
H. GENERAL CONTRACTOR - ASSIGNED FORM:
Contractor - Subcontractor Agreement Form, American Institute of Architects A401, 1987 Edition.
I. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
Application and Certificate for Payment, American Institute of Architects Document G702, 1983 Edition.
END OF SECTION 00600
BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00600 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
DOCUMENT 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. GENERAL CONDITIONS:
The General Conditions for this Project are the "General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction", American Institute of Architects Document A201, 1987, including all supplements.
END OF SECTION 00700
__ GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
DOCUMENT 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201,
Fourteenth Edition, 1987. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary
Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.
ARTICLE 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS:
1.1 Basic Definitions
1.1.1 Delete "Specifications" from line 4 and
Insert in lieu thereof "Project Manual".
Delete "do not" from line 11.
Pursuant to Subparagraph 1.1.1, enumeration of Drawings, Project Manual and Addenda is as
follows:
A. ADDENDA: Contract will include such Addenda as may be issued during the bidding
period and acknowledged in the Proposal forms.
B. PROJECT MANUAL: Dated November 3, 1995. Refer to "Table of Contents - Bidding
Requirements and Contract Documents" bound hereinbefore.
C. DRAWINGS: See Document 00850.
Add the following new Subparagraph I. 1.3.1:
1.1.3.1 For the purposes of Article 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT "Work" is defined as the
completed construction contemplated by the Drawings and Specifications and modifications thereto.
Add the following new Subparagraphs 1.1.8 and 1.1.9:
1.1.8 PRODUCT
The term "product" as used in the Contract Documents includes materials, systems and equipment.
1.1.9 PROVIDE
Where the word "provide" appears, it shall be taken and interpreted to mean, "the Contractor shall
furnish all labor, material, equipment and accessory/appurtenances or materials necessary to install
and/or complete the Work".
1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
1.2.2 Add at the end of the Subparagraph:
"By executing the Contract, the Contractor acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the
nature and location of the Work, the general and local conditions, including those bearing upon
transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electric
power, roads and uncertainties of weather, ground water table or similar physical conditions of the
ground, the character, quality and quantity of all surface and sub-surface materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed prior to and during the prosecution
of the Work and all other matters which can in any way effect the Work or the cost thereof under
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
this Contract. Any failure by the Contractor to acquaint himself with all the available information
concerning these conditions will not relieve him from any obligations with respect to his Contract."
Add the following new Subparagraph 1.2.6:
1.2.6 "Should discrepancies appear among the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents
and existing conditions, the Contractor shall request an interpretation from the Architect before
bidding. If the Contractor fails to make such request, it is presumed that both provisions were
included in the bid and the Architect shall determine which of the conflicting requirements shall
govern. The Contractor shall perform the Work at no additional cost to the Owner in accordance
with the Architect's determination. Where conflicts exist between or within the Contract
Documents or between the Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes, ordinances or
manufacturer's recommendations, and clarification has not been requested from the Architect prior
to bidding as provided for above, the more stringent or higher quality standard shall prevail."
Add the following new paragraph 1.2.7:
1.2.7 "The Contractor shall provide all work and materials which any section or part of the Drawings,
Specifications or conditions require him to provide regardless of whether such requirement is or is
not faithfully repeated in other parts of documents thereof to which the provision might be
appropriate."
ARTICLE 2: OWNER
2.1 DEFINITION
2.1.2 Delete Subparagraph 2.1.2 in its entirety.
2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
2.2.1 Delete Subparagraph 2.2.1 in its entirety.
2.2.2 Insert "as required by the nature of the Project" after "site" on line 3.
2.2.5 Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5, and
Insert in lieu thereof:
"The Contractor will be furnished free of charge ten (10) copies of Drawings and Project Manuals.
Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of reproduction, postage and handling. Drawings and
Project Manuals turned in to the Architect or Owner by unsuccessful bidders shall be distributed
first."
2.3 OWNER'S RIGI-rr TO STOP THE WORK
2.3.1 Delete ", except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3." from lines 11 and 12, and
Insert "." in lieu thereof.
Ad~l at the end of the Subparagraph:
"These rights shall be in addition to and not a restriction or derogation of Owner's rights under
Article 14. The Owner's right to stop the work shall not relieve the Contractor from his sole and
exclusive responsibility for site safety. The Owner's exercise of the right to stop the work shall be
solely for Contractor's failure to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents and
shall in no way be construed as placing the Owner in charge of the work or in any way responsible
for site safety."
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.4 OV~NER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
2.4.1 Insert "as well as testing, engineering, accounting, consulting services or attorneys' fees and
expenses" after "failure" on line 17.
ARTICLE 3: CONTRACTOR
3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONI)rrIONS BY CONTRACTOR
3.2.1 In~er[ "or should have recognized" after "recognized" in line 8.
Delete "knowingly" from line 9.
Add at the end of the Subparagraph:
"The exactness of grades, elevations, dimensions, or locations given on any drawings issued by the
Architect or the Work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by the Architect or Owner.
In all cases of interconnection of his work with existing or other Work, Contractor shall verify at
the site all dimensions relating to such existing or other Work· Any errors due to the Contractor's
failure to so verify all such grades, elevations, locations or dimensions shall be promptly rectified
by him without extra cost to the Owner."
3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
3.3.1 Delete Subparagraph 3.3.1 and
Inser~ in lieu thereof:
"The Contractor shall supervise and direct the performance of the Work, using his best skill and
attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the
Contract. The Contractor shall engage workmen who are skilled in performing the Work and all
Work shall be performed with care and skill and in a good workmanlike manner under the full-time
supervision of an approved engineer or foreman. The Contractor shall be liable for all property
damage including repairs and replacements of the Work and economic losses which proximately
result from the breach of this duty."
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
Add the following new Subparagraphs 3.4.3, 3.4.4 and 3.4.5:
3.4.3 "After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request
for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth below
and in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications).
· 1 Required for compliance with subsequent interpretation of code requirements or insurance
regulations.
.2 Unavailability of specified products, through no fault of the Contractor·
.3 Subsequent information discloses inability of specified products to perform proPerly or to
fit in designated space.
.4 Manufacturer/fabricator refuses to certify or guarantee performance of specified product as
required.
.5 When it is clearly seen, in the judgment of the Architect, that a substitution would be
substantially to the Owner's best interest, in terms of cost, time or other consideration."
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.4.4 "By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.3 above, the Contractor:
.1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and
determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; _~
.2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the
Contractor would for that specified;
.3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under the
Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs
related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and
.4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be
required for the Work to be complete in all respects."
3.4.5 "Substitution requests shall be written, timely and accompanied by complete technical and cost data.
Requests shall include a complete description of the proposed substitution, name of the material or
equipment for which it is to be substituted, drawings, cuts, performance and test data, and any other
data or information necessary for a complete evaluation by the Architect."
3.5 WARRANTY
3.5.1 Insert "of good quality" between "be" and "free" in line 4.
Delete .... not inherent" in the quality required or permitted" in line 5.
Add the following new Subparagraphs 3.5.2 through 3.5.4:
3.5.2 "All Work included under this Specification unless extended elsewhere herein, shall be guaranteed
against defect in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the date of final
acceptance of the Work as evidenced by the issuance of the Final Certificate of Payment and
payment by the Owner.
3.5.3 "Any defective Work or material shall be replaced or corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner
immediately upon notification by the Owner at no cost to the Owner. The guarantee of repair or
replacement items shall be renewed for an additional one (1) year upon the completion of the repair
or replacement."
3.5.4 "Certain guarantees are required under various sections of the specifications. At the completion
of the Work, all such guarantees covering materials, workmanship, maintenance, etc., as specified,
shall be secured from the various Subcontractors and Material Suppliers of the Contractor, and
forwarded to the Architect, together with a letter addressed to the Owner summarizing the
guarantees, stating the character of the Work, the Subcontractor, name of material or equipment
Seller, period of guarantee and conditions of guarantee."
3.6 TAXES
3.6.1 Delete subparagraph 3.6.1 and
Insert in lieu thereof:
"The Owner, a public body, is exempt from all applicable federal, state and local sales tax. Retail
sales tax shall not be included in the contract amount."
3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
3.7.1 Delet~ Subparagraph 3.7.1 and
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Insert in lieu thereof:
"The Contractor will apply for, obtain and pay for the building permit for the entire project. In
addition, the Contractor shall pay for other permits, inspection fees, utility connections, curb
opening fees, etc., as required for all work installed both permanent and temporary and shall obtain
and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of inspection prior to the acceptance of the work by the
Architect."
Add. the following new Subparagraph 3.7.1.1:
3.7.1.1 "Certificates of inspection and occupancy shall be delivered to Architect promptly upon receipt."
3.8 ALLOWANCES
3.8.2.4 Delete "(1)" in line 4.
Insert "." after "Clause 3.8.2.2" in line 5 and
Delete the remainder of the sentence.
3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
-- Add the following new Subparagraph 3.9.2:
3.9.2 "The Project Superintendent shall attend periodic meetings held at such time and place as the
_ Architect or Owner shall designate."
3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
3.10.2 Add at the end of the Subparagraph:
"Neither the Contractor's preparation nor the Architect's receipt or review shall modify the
Contractor's responsibility to make required submittals or to do so in a timely manner to provide
for review in accordance with Subparagraph 4.2.7 as modified herein."
_ 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES:
Add the following new Subparagraphs 3.12.12 and 3.12.13:
-- 3.12.12 Refer to Section 01300 - "Submittals" of this Project Manual for instructions relating to quantity
and form of shop drawings, product data and sample submittal.
.- 3.12.13 "The Contractor shall prepay all shipping costs and otherwise be responsible for the transporting
of all shop drawings and samples to the Architect's Office for review and approval by the
Architect."
3.18 INDEMNIHCATION
Add the following new Subparagraph 3.18.4:
3.18.4 "None of the foregoing provisions of Paragraph 3.18 shall deprive the Owner or the Architect of
any action, right or remedy otherwise available to them, or either of them, at common law" .Add
-- the following new Paragraph 3.19:
3.19 "STATUTORY AND REGULATORY COMPLIANCE"
3.19.1 "In addition to all other requirements set forth in the Contract Documents which require compliance
- SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
by the Contractor with specific statutes, ordinances, rules or regulations, the Contractor's services
will be performed pursuant to, and in strict conformity with, all applicable federal, state and local
statutes, ordinances, rules, regulations and guidelines ("Governmental Requirements") in force and
effect at the time such services are performed, including, without limitation, all such Governmental
Requirements relating to asbestos matters, and in accordance with such requirements as may, from
time to time, be reasonably directed by the Architect."
ARTICLE 4: ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 ARCHITECT
4.1.3 Delete "against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection and" from lines 2 and 3.
4.1.4 D~1¢~¢ entire Subparagraph 4.1.4.
4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.2.6 Insert "or recommend to the Owner to reject Work" between "Work" and "which" on line 1.
Add at the end of the Subparagraph:
"The Architect will have the right to recommend to the Owner rejection of Work which does not
conform to the Contract Documents, but will not have the authority to stop the Work. See
paragraph 2.3. Neither the Owner or Architect are in charge of the work or responsible for the use
of supporting devices in connection with the contract. The Contractor is solely and exclusively
responsible and in charge of site safety."
4.2.7 Insert "scheduled" between "Contractor's" and "submittals" in line 2.
Delete "unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect," from lines 19 and 20.
4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.3.2 Delete "arbitration or" in line 5 and line 11.
4.3.3 Substitute "7" for "21" in line 2 and line 3.
4.3.4 Delete "including arbitration" in line 2.
4.3.6 Inscrl; "to Owner and Contractor in writing" between "recommend" and "an" in line 15.
Substitute "determinations" for "determination" in line 21.
Substitute "7" for "21" in line 11 and line 22.
4.3.8 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME
4.3.8.1 Insert "within 7 days after event giving rise to the claim." in line 3 after "given".
4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.4.4 Delete "but subject to arbitration" in line 6.
4.5 Delete Paragraph 4.5 in its entirety.
ARTICLE 5: SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1 DEFINITIONS
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
5.1. I Add at the end of the Subparagraph:
"The subcontractor may be identified throughout the Contract Documents where such identification
is desirable for clarity, as painting subcontractor, Installer, Painting Contractor, and the like. In
the latter example, the term Contractor shall be construed to mean subcontractor."
ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 CHANGES
7.1.1 Delete "." in line 5 and
Insert in lieu thereof: "and subject to the limitations imposed by Law."
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
7.3.4 Delete "agreement or" from line 4.
Add to the end of the Subparagraph: "Failure to advise the Architect in writing within seven (7)
days shall constitute acceptance as submitted."
7.3.5 Delct¢ Subparagraph 7.3.5 in its entirety and
Insert in lieu thereof:
"A Construction Change Directive shall become a Change Order when a final adjustment to the
Contract Sum and Contract Time is established and the Construction Change Directive is signed by
the Contractor."
7.3.6 DeDte "does not respond promptly or" from line 1.
Delete "a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" in lines 6 and 7
Insert in lieu thereof: "an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with the schedule set
forth in Subparagraph 7.3.10 below".
Add the following new Subparagraph 7.3.10:
7.3.10 In Subparagraphs 7.3.3 and 7.3.6, the allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the
total cost to the Owner, shall be based upon the following schedule:
.1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, ten (10)
percent of the cost.
.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, five (5) percent of the
amount due the Subcontractor.
.3 For each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by that
Subcontractor's own forces, ten (10) percent of the cost.
.4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractors five (5) percent of the
mount due the Subcontractor.
.5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with
Subparagraph 7.3.6.
.6 In order to facilitate checking quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those
so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accomplished by a complete
itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontractors. Labor and materials
-- shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Subcontractor's, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change be approved without
such itemization.
.7 For deleted work the credit shall be the net cost.
ARTICLE 8: TIME
8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
8.2.2 Delete last sentence of the Subparagraph.
8.2.3 Insert "including working overtime without additional compensation" after "Time" in line 3.
ARTICLE 9: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
9.2.1 Insert "verified" between "a" and "schedule" on line 2.
9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
9.3.1 Delete "ten" in line 1 and
In$¢r~ "twenty (20)" in lieu thereof.
Insert "or in accordance with the Owner's established schedule," between "payment," and "the" in
line 2.
Add the following new Subparagraphs 9.3.2.1 and 9.3.2.2:
9.3.2.1 "The Owner in making payment for materials stored off site will pay the cost of the material and equipment
stored plus Contractors' overhead and profit for material only."
9.3.2.2 "When materials and equipment are stored off site, and when the Owner authorizes or requires the Architect
to inspect said materials and equipment, the Contractor shall pay all costs for wages, transportation, lodging,
meals and miscellaneous expenses incurred by the Architect relative to said inspection."
Add the following new Subparagraphs 9.3.4, 9.3.5, 9.3.6 and 9.3.7:
9.3.4 Promptly after execution and delivery of the Contract, and before the first-partial payment is made,
the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect for approval the following:
.1 List of subcontractors and suppliers on AIA Document G805, "List of Subcontractors."
.2 Contractors Schedule of Values (CSV) as it will appear on Certificate of Paymem (AIA
Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment" and G703, "Continuation
Sheet.") itemizing line items for General Conditions, Overhead and Profit Bonds and
Insurance, and Division of Work, separating Material and Labor. When, for any reason,
the Contractor desires to change the approved contractor's schedule of values mounts as
submitted above, he must resubmit revised CSV to the Architect, and receive approval prior
to submitting a subsequent pay request.
.3 Preliminary Progress Schedule indicating commencement dates and durations for the various
phases of the work along with a Schedule for Submission of Shop Drawings.
.4 Estimates of Payout Schedule indicating "Net" amount which will be anticipated on each
monthly request for payment for the duration of construction.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 9.3.5 Requests for payments shall be made on AIA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for
Payment." The first request shall be accompanied by Contractors' Partial Waiver of Lien in the
net amount of the pay request. Samples of the Certificate forms will be furnished by the Architect.
9.3.6 Each subsequent request for payment shall also be accompanied by Partial Waivers of Lien from
each Subcontractor and Supplierwho were included on the preceding payment request to the extent
of that payment in addition to a current Partial Waiver of Lien by the Contractor for the full amount
-- of the current net payment.
.1 Prior to final payment, and with the fmal Certificate of Payment (as prepared by the
-- Architect), the Contractor shall provide Final Waivers of Lien (including Subcontractors),
AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment", Bonds, Guarantees,
etc., as required by the Specifications.
9.3.7 "Payments will be made in accordance with the following procedures:
· 1 Rough drafts of the Requests for Payment shall be provided by the Contractor to the
-- Architect seven (7) days prior to the Monthly Progress, Coordination, and Pay Meetings.
The rough drafts will be approved by the Architect and the Owner at the Monthly Pay
meetings.
.2 Certificates of Payment (typed copies) along with accompanying documents certifying to the
work performed during the preceding month shall be submitted to the Architect's office
_ within seven (7) days after the Monthly Pay Meeting date. The Architect will check the
Certificates, and if in proper form and just, will transmit the Certificates for payment to the
Owner with a recommendation for Payment."
-- 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
Add the following new Subparagraph 9.6.1.1:
9.6.1.1 "No progress payment will be made by Owner until such time as the Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any
other persons or parties performing the Work or furnishing material and equipment for the Project, furnishes
such documents as Owner may require (including Sworn Statement, affidavits and waivers). In the event the
Architect is required to provide additional inspections in order to inspect the Work and to issue a certificate
of substantial completion, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for amounts charged by Architect for such
additional inspections."
9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
.... 9.7.1 Delete "or awarded by arbitration" on line 6.
Insert "unless non-issuance of the Certificate for Payment or nonpayment relates to an unresolved
dispute concerning Contractor's performance of the Work," after the comma in line 7.
9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
9.8.1 Ad~l at the end of the Subparagraph:
AIA Document G704, "A Certificate of Substantial Completion, will be issued to the Contractor
upon satisfactory completion of the preliminary punch list items in accordance with the provisions
stated thereon."
9.8.2 Add at the end of the Subparagraph:
The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all Architect's fees for additional services
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
necessitated by the Architect being required to make substantial completion inpsections beyond the
initial inspection and one reinspection."
Add the following new Subparagraph 9.8.4:
9.8.4 "If the Architect determines, in response to the foregoing Subparagraphs 9.8.1 and 9.8.2 and 9.8.3
that the Work is not sufficiently completed or corrected to justify said inspection, he may decline
to make said inspections until the work has been more fully completed or corrected.'
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
9.10.1 Add at the end of the Subparagraph:
"The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all Architect's fees for additional services
necessitated by the Architect's being required to make f'mal completion inspections beyond one
initial inspection."
9.10.2 Insert after "payment" in line 15:
"(5) final prints for record drawings use marked by Contractor with record information as set forth
in the Contract Documents; (6) a f'mal Contractor's sworn statement duly executed and
acknowledged showing all Subcontractors to be fully paid and similar sworn statements from
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors."
Substitute "(7)" for "(5)" in line 15.
Insert in line 21 "upon demand by Owner" between "Owner" and "the".
SubstitUte "shall" for "may" in line 21.
Insert "or other security" between "bond" and "satisfactory" in line 21.
9.10.3 Insert after "accepted" in line 8: "provided however retainage held following such payment shall
be an amount equal to two hundred percent (200%) of the cost of finally completing the Work."
Delete last sentence of Subparagraph 9.10.3 and
Insert in lieu thereof:
"The making of final payment shall not constitute a waiver of any claims by Owner".
Add the following new Paragraph 9.11:
9.11 "LIQUIDATED D~GES"
9.11.1 "All on-site work is to be started immediately upon Notice to Proceed, and shall be completed in
accordance with the following completion schedule."
9.1 i. 1.1 "All work will be completed to "Substantial Completion" in accordance with the requirements as
set forth in Section 00100 - "Instructions to Bidders."
9.11.2 "It is further agreed that said completion schedule is reasonable, and the Contractor and the
Contractor's surety, if any, shall prosecute said work regularly, diligently and continuously at such
rate of progress as will insure full completion thereof within the time specified, that time is of the
essence of this Contract, and that if the Contractor or the Contractor's surety shall neglect, fail, or
refuse to complete the work within the time specified, then the Contractor or the Contractor's surety
does hereby agree, as a partial consideration for the awarding of this Contract, to pay the Owner,
not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages, for such breach of contract, the sum of five hundred
dollars ($500.00) for each and every calendar day the contract shall be in default after the time
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 10 --
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
stipulated for completing the work."
9.11.3 "It is further agreed that said amount is fixed and agreed upon because of the impracticability and
extreme difficulty of determining actual damages for lack of a precise pecuniary standard; that said
sum is considered to be a fair measure of the actual loss which the Owner would in such event
sustain; and that the Owner shall have the right to retain from the contract payments any such
liquidated damages due."
9.11.4 "Provided however, that the contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages due to:
.1 Any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the United States Government.
.2 Any unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the
Contractor, or of a public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of another Contractor in
performance of a separate contract with the Owner, fire, floods, epidemics, quarantine
restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather. The criteria on which
the "unusually severe weather" shall be based is the normal average amount of precipitation
received in the project area, as recorded over a period of the last five (5) years at the local
area United States Weather Station. Any extension of time due to unusually severe weather
must be requested by the Contractor on the basis of documented records of the actual
precipitation for a minimum period of three (3) months time, compared with the normal
average for the area. Also, the criteria shall include the number of excessive precipitation
days over the same period and whether or not the Contractor's force worked on said days
or stage of construction was affected. Any request for extension of time shall be made
within seven (7) days of such occurrence."
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS:
Delete entire ARTICLE 11.
Insert the following Paragraphs 11.1 through 11.5 in lieu thereof:
11.1 "CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE"
11.1.1 "The Contractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to
do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, such insurance as will protect the
contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's
operations under the Contract, and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such
operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
· 1 claims under workers' or workmens' compensation, disability benefit and other similar
employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed;
.2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of
the Contractor's employees;
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person
other than the Contractor's employees;
.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained
(1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such
person by the Contractor, or (2) by other person;
.5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of
tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 11
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
.6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising
out of ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle; and
.7 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations
under this Contract."
1 I. 1.2 "The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following
limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents, or greater if required by law, whichever
coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be
maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final
payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment.
Notwithstanding the above, the insurance required by Paragraph 11.1 shall be on an occurrence
basis."
11.1.2.1 "Such insurance shall be written to include the following coverages and for not less than the
minimum limits indicated on the attached Insurance Coverage Limits, or greater if required by law:
.1 Worker's Compensation, Occupational Disease and Employer's Liability Insurance:
A. State: State of Texas - Statutory limits: Refer to attached Workers Compensation
Insurance for Building or Construction Projects.
B. Applicable Federal (if any) - Statutory limits.
C. Employer's Liability -
- Bodily Injury by Accident
- Bodily Injury by Disease each employee
Bodily Injury by Disease policy limit
.2 Commercial General Liability Insurance including as minimum coverages:
Premises - Operations Liability
Independent Contractor's Protective Liability
Products and Completed Operations Liability
Broad Form Property Damage Endorsement
Blanket Contractual
Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted
A. Special Requirements:
a. Property Damage Liability Insurance will provide "X, C, and U"
(Explosion, collapse and underground hazard) coverage as applicable.
b. Products and completed Operations to be maintained for one (1) year
after final payment. Damage to material, product or item of equipment
itself shall be covered by an Installation Floater on a legal liability basis
or by an extension of the manufacturer' s warranty.
c. The term "caused by accident", if used in bodily injury coverage, shall
be replaced by the term "occurrence".
d. The term "caused by accident", if used in property damage coverage,
shall be replaced by the term "occurrence".
e. The Owner and the Architect shall be named as "additional insureds" on
the commercial general liability policy of the general contractor and/or
subcontractor of any tier.
B. Limits of Liability: As indicated.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 12
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
.3 Automobile Liability Insurance:
A. Special requirements:
a. all owned, hired, and nonowned vehicles including the loading or
unloading thereof.
b. The term "caused by accident", if used in bodily injury coverage, shall
be replaced by the term "occurrence".
B. Limits of Liability: As indicated.
.4 Owner's and Architect's Protective Liability Insurance:
A. The Contractor will furnish and maintain during the entire period of construction
an Owner's Protective Liability Policy written in the name of the Owner and
Architect with not less than the limits indicated in "Insurance Coverage Limits"
of this Project Manual:
.5 Umbrella/Excess Liability Insurance:
A. In addition to the insurance coverages set forth in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall maintain an umbrella/excess liability policy with coverages for
the same hazards as covered under the primary policies, including any special
requirements.
B. Subparagraph 11.5.1 conditions apply."
11.1.3 "Certificates of Insurance for the above coverages and the Owner's Protective Policy shall be
submitted to the Architect for the transmittal to the Owner for his approval prior to the start of
construction. The Contractor shall certify to the Owner that he has obtained or will obtain similar
certificates of insurance from each of his Subcontractors before their work commences. Each
Subcontractor must be covered by insurance of the same character and in the same amounts as the
Contractor unless the Contractor and Owner agree that a reduced coverage is adequate~ Each
Subcontractor's insurance shall cover the Owner, Architect, their agents, and employees. The
Contractor shall submit a statement with each monthly affidavit stating that he has obtained
certificates of insurance, or other satisfactory evidence, that all required insurance is in force for
each of the Subcontractors listed on his affidavit. If the "additional insureds" have other insurance
which is applicable to the loss, it shall be on an excess or contingent basis. The amount of the
company's liability under this policy shall not be reduced by the existence of such other insurance.
Contractors certificates shall be in duplicate on AIA Document G705, "Certificate of Insurance -
Construction", or a Commercial General Liability Policy Form, ACORD form 355.
11.1.3.1 "Certificate of insurance shall contain a statement therein or a rider attached thereto incorporating
the indemnity clause stated in Paragraph 3.18 (Indemnification) and Subparagraphs 3.18.1,
3.18.1.1, 3.18.2, and 3.18.3 of the General Conditions, and including the changes and additions
made in those Subparagraphs, including the addition of Subparagraph 3.18.4, within these
Supplementary Conditions."
11.1.3.2 "These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a
provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until
at least thirty (30) days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner and Architect. If any of
the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are
reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be
submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information
concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable prompmess
in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief."
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 13
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
11.1.4 "The obligations of the Contractor under the provisions of this article shall not extend to the liability
of the Architect, his agents or employees arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps,
drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs, or specifications, or (2) the giving
of or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect, his agents or employees to the
extent that such giving or failure to give is the cause of the injury or damage."
11.2 "OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE"
11.2.1 The Contractor shall obtain, pay for and maintain at all times during the prosecution of the work
under this contract, an Owner's protective liability insurance policy naming the Owner and the
Architect as insureds for property damage and bodily injury, including death, which may arise in
the prosecution of the work or Contractor's operations under this contract. Coverage shall be on
an "occurrence" basis, and the policy shall be issued by the same insurance company that carries
the Contractor's liability insurance. Limits of liability shall be as follows:
Bodily Injury $300,000 each occurrence
Property Damage $300,000 each occurrence
1 I. 3 PROPERTY INSURANCE
11.3. I "The Contractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to
do business in the jurisdiction in which the project is located, property insurance in the amount of
the initial Contract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the entire Work at the site
on a replacement cost basis without voluntary deductibles· Such property insurance shall be
maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing
by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been
made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an
insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.3 to be covered, whichever is
earlier. This insurance shall include interest of the Owner, Architect, the Contractor,
Subcontractors and sub-Subcontractors in the Work.
· 1 The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value· If the Owner is damaged
by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance, then the Contractor shall bear
all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on all-risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and
extended coverage and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft,
vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false-work, temporary buildings and debris removal
including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall
cover reasonable compensation for Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such
insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
· 1 Property Insurance shall not cover any tools, apparatus, machinery, scaffolding, hoists,
forms, staging, shoring and other similar items commonly referred to as construction
equipment, which may be on the site and the capital value of which is not included in the
Work. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for any insurance he may require
on such construction equipment.
11.3.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance: The Contractor shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery
insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such
insured objects during installation and until fmal acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall
include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work,
and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 14
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance: The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such
insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fke or other
hazards, however caused. The Owner waives ail rights of action against the Contractor for losses
of use of the Owner's property, including consequentiai losses due to fzre or other hazards, however
caused.
11.3.4 If, during the Project construction period, the Owner insures properties, real or personai or both,
adjoining or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring
the Project, or if, after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project
through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the
Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11.3.7 for damages
caused by fn:e or other perils caused by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall
provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
11.3.5 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Contractor shall file with the Owner two certified copies
of the policy or policies providing this Property Insurance coverage, each obtaining those
endorsements specifically related to the project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the
policy will not be canceled or ailowed to expire until at least 60 days' prior written notice has been
given to the Owner.
11.3.6 Waivers of Subrogation: If permitted by the Owner's and Contractor's insurance companies,
without penalties, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their
Subcontractors, Sub-Subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect,
Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their
Subcontractors, Sub-Subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other
perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.3 or other
property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such
insurance held by the Contractor as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall
require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any,
and the Subcontractors, Sub-Subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate
agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other
parties enumerated herein. The policies shail provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement
or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shail be effective as to a person or entity even though that
person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise did not
pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an
insurable interest in the property damaged.
I 1.3.7 A loss insured under this property insurance shall be adjusted by the Contractor as fiduciary and
made payable to the Contractor as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interest may appear, subject
to requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.10. The Contractor
shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by
appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors
to make payments to their Sub-Subcontractors in similar manner.
I 1.3.8 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Contractor as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of
an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Contractor's duties. The cost of required
bonds shall be charged agaimt proceeds received as fiduciary. The Contractor shall deposit in a
separate account proceeds so received, which the Contractor shall distribute in accordance with such
agreement as the parties in interest may reach or in accordance with an arbitration award. If after
such loss no other speciai agreemem is made, replacement of damaged property shall be covered
by appropriate Change Order.
11.3.9 The Contractor as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of
the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the
Contractor's exercise of this power; if such objection be made, arbitrators shall be chosen. The
Contractor as fiduciary shall, in that case, make settlement with insurers in accordance with
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 15
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
directions of such arbitrators. If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the
arbitrators will direct such distribution.
11.3.10 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance
company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or
use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Comractor shall take reasonable steps to
obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent,
take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or
reduction of insurance."
11.4 "PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND"
11.4.1 "The Contractor, before commencing the Work, shall furnish a Performance Bond and a Labor and
Material Payment Bond. The Performance Bond shall be in an amount equal to one hundred
percent (100%) of the full amount of the Contract Sum as security for the faithful performance of
the obligations of the Contract Documents, and the Labor and Material Payment Bond shall be in
an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the full amount of the Contract Sum as Security
for the payment of all persons performing labor and furnishing materials in connection with the
Contract Documents. Such bond shall be on AIA Document A311, "Performance Bond" and AIA
Document A311, "Labor and Material Payment Bond" issued by the American Institute of
Architects, shall be issued by a surety satisfactory to the Owner and shall name the Owner as a
primary co-obligee."
11.4.2 "Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering
payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of
the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made."
11.5 "MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS"
11.5.1 "Ail insurance coverage shall be provided by insurance companies having policy holder ratings no
lower than "A" and financial ratings not lower than "XlI" in the Best's Insurance Guide, latest
edition in effect as of the date of the Contract."
11.5.2 "The contractor is responsible for determining that Subcontractors are adequately insured against
claims arising out of or relating to the Work. The premium cost and charges for such insurance
shall be paid by each Subcontractor."
11.5.3 "The limits of liability as stated, may be arrived at using a Split-Limit or a Combined Single Limit
basis. However, the total limit of liability shall not be less than stated in the requirements."
ARTICLE I2 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
Delete Subparagraph 12.1.1 and
Insert in lieu thereof:
12.1.1 "If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the request of the Architect or any authorized
testing agency employed by the Owner or contrary to the Contract Documents, it must, if required
in writing by the Architect, be uncovered and remain unaltered for the Architect's observation and
replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time."
12.2.1 Delete last sentence and
Insert in lieu thereof:
"The Contractor shall bear the costs of correcting such rejected Work including additional
architectural, engineering, consulting, inspecting, testing and legal fees and expenses incurred and
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 16
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
made necessary thereby. Approval of any material or work at any time or stage of construction will
not prevent its subsequent rejection for cause. No election by the Owner to correct work shall
constitute a waiver of any obligation of a surety upon its Performance and Labor and Material
Payment Bonds."
12.2.4 Insert ", attorney's fees" in line 13 between "services" and "and".
ARTICLE 14: TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CQNTRACT
14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
14.1.2 Delete all words after the word "Work" on line 4 and
Insert in lieu thereof: "properly executed until that time."
14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE
14.2.1 Delete Subparagraph 14.2.1 in its entirety and
Irl~ert in lieu thereof:
"A. The Owner may terminate the Contractor if:
1. The Contractor shall institute proceedings or consent to proceedings requesting
relief or arrangement under the Federal Bankruptcy Act or any similar or
applicable federal or state law, or if a petition under any federal or state
bankruptcy or insolvency law is filed against the Contractor and such petition is
not dismissed within sixty (60) days from the date of said f'fling, or if the
Contractor admits in writing his inability to pay his debts generally as they
become his due, or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his
creditors, or if a receiver, liquidator, trustee or assignee is appointed on account
of his bankruptcy or insolvency;
2. A receiver of all or any substantial portion of the Contractor's properties is
appointed;
3. The Contractor abandons the Work;
4. The Contractor fails, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to
prosecute promptly and diligently the Work or to supply enough properly skilled
workmen or proper materials for the Work;
5. The Contractor submits an Application for Payment, sworn statement, waiver of
lien, affidavit or document of any nature whatsoever which is intentionally
falsified;
6. The Contractor fails to make prompt payment to subcontractors or for materials
or labor or otherwise breaches his obligations under any subcontract with a
subcontractor;
7. A mechanic's or material man's lien or notice of lien is fried against any part of
the Work or the site of the Project and not promptly bonded or insured over by
the Contractor in a manner satisfactory to the Owner;
8. The Contractor disregards any laws, statutes, ordinances, rules, regulations or
orders of a governmental body or public or quasi-public authority having
jurisdiction of the Work or the site of the Project;
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 17
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
9. The Contractor otherwise violates any provision of the Contract Documents.
B. The Owner, without prejudice to any right or remedy available to the Owner under the
Contract Documents or at law or in equity, may, after giving the Contractor and the Surety
under the Performance Bond and under the Labor and Material Payment Bond described in
Paragraph 11.4 seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor.
If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall remove any part or all of his equipment,
machinery and supplies from the site of the Project within seven (7) days from the date of
such request, and in the event of the Contractor's failure to do so, the Owner shall have the
right to remove and store such equipment, machinery and supplies at the Contractor's
expense. In case of such termination, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any
further payment for Work performed by the Contractor through the date of termination. The
Owner's right to terminate the Owner-Contractor Agreement pursuant to this Subparagraph
14.2.1 shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any rights or remedies existing
hereunder or pursuant hereto or at law or in equity."
14.2.4 Delete Subparagraph of 14.2.4 in its entirety and
Insert in lieu thereof:
"If the unpaid balance of the contract Sum exceeds all costs to the Owner of completing the Work,
then the Contractor shall be paid for all Work performed by the Contractor to the date of
termination. If such costs to the Owner of completing the Work exceed such unpaid balance, the
Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner immediately upon the Owner's demand. The costs
to the Owner of completing the Work shall include (but not be limited to) the cost of any additional
architectural, managerial and administrative services required thereby, any costs incurred in
retaining another Contractor or other subcontractors, any additional interest or fees which the
Owner must pay by reason of a delay in completing of the Work, attorneys' fees and expenses, and
any other damages, costs and expenses the Owner may incur by reason of completing the Work or
any delay thereof. The amount, if any, to be paid to the Contractor shall be certified by the
Architect, upon application, in the manner provided in paragraph 9.4, and this obligation for
payment shall survive the termination of the Contract."
Add the following new Paragraph 14.4:
14.4 "TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE"
14.4.1 "The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without
cause."
14.4.2 "Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,
the Contractor shall:
· 1 Cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2 Take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation
of the work; and
.3 Except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated
in the Notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no
further subcontracts and purchase orders."
14.4.3 "In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive
payment from the Owner on the same basis provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2."
END OF SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 18
INSURANCE REQUIRED: The Contractor shall not commence Work under this Contract until he/she
has obtained all insurance required under this paragraph and Item 1.26 of the North Central Texas
Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction as amended September 21, 1989, and such
insurance has been approved by the City, nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence
Work on his Subcontract until all similar insurance of the Subcontractor has been so obtained and
approved.
COMPENSATION INSURANCE: The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life of this
Contract Worker's Compensation Insurance for all of his/her employees at the site of the project and in
case any Work is sublet, the Contractor shall require the Subcontractors similarly to provide Worker's
Compensation Insurance for all of the latter employees unless such employees are covered by the
protection afforded by the Contractor. In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work under
this Contract at the site of the project is not protected under the Worker's Compensation statute, the
Contractor shall provide and shall cause each Subcontractor to provide adequate and suitable insurance
for the protection of his/her employees not otherwise protected. The amount of insurance shall be as
follows:
Each Accident $100,000.00
Disease Each Employee $100,000.00
Disease Policy Limit $500,000.00
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: Contractor shall take out and maintain during
the life of this Contract such General Liability Insurance (including explosion, collapses and underground
damage coverage) as shall protect him/her and any Subcontractor performing Work covered by this
Contract, from claims for damages for personal injury, including accidental death, as well as from claims
for property damages, which may arise from operations under this Contract, including blasting, when
blasting is done on or in connection with the Work of the Contract, whether such operations be by
him/herself or by any Subcontractor or by any one directly or indirectly employed by either of them.
The amount of insurance shall be as follows:
General Aggregate $1,000,000.00
Products - Components/Operations Aggregate $1,000,000.00
Personal and Advertising Injury $ 600,000.00
Each Occurrence $ 600,000.00
Fire Damage (any one fire) $ 50,000.00
Medical Expense (any one person) $ 5,000.00
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE: The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life
of this Contract such Automobile Liability Insurance for owned, hired and non-owned vehicles as shall
protect him/her and any Subcontractor performing Work covered by this Contract. The amount of such
insurance shall be as follows:
Combined Bodily Injury and Property Damage $600,000.00 per occurrence
Bodily Injury $250,000.00 per person
Bodily Injury $200,000.00 per accident
Property Damage $100,000.00
BID NO
PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE: The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life
of this Contract an owners protective liability insurance policy. Coverage shall be on an "occurrence"
basis and the policy shall be issued by the same insurance company that carries the Contractors liability
insurance. The amount of such insurance shall be as follows:
Combined Bodily Injury $ 600,000.00 per occurrence --
and Property Damage $I,000,000.00 per aggregate
PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE: The Contractor shall furnish the City with satisfactory proof
of carriage of the Insurance required.
~21T~ OF COPI~:IJ, · PURCIIASi~G DEZ*ARTMEIqT ® 2.~ PARKWAY BOULiO/ARD ® COPI~LL, 'tlOL~S 7S019 ~
WORKERS COMPENSATION INSURANCE
FOR
BUILDING OR CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
TEXAS WORKERS COMPENSATION COMMISSION RULE 28, §110.110
As required by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission Rule 28, §110.110, the
Contractor shall accept the following definitions and comply with the following provisions:
Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage
A. Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of
authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-
82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers compensation insurance coverage for
the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the
project.
-- Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until
the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the City of
Coppell.
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons
or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the
-- project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with contractor and regardless of
whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors,
subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such
entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project.
"Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials,
or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not
- include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply
deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
B. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory
.._ requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the
contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project.
C. The contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the City of Coppell prior to
being awarded the contract.
_ D. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage
period, file a new certificate of coverage with the City of Coppell showing that coverage
has been extended.
E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and
provide to the City of Coppell:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so
the City of Coppell will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage
for all persons providing services on the project; and
(2) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project.
F. The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the
project and for one year thereafter.
G. The contractor shall notify the City of Coppell in writing by certified mail or personal
delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change
that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the
project.
H. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, forma, and manner
prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons
providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how
a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage.
I. The contractor shall contractually require each person with who it contracts to provide
services on a project, to:
(1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory
requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees
providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(2) provide to the contractor,prior to that person beginning work on the project, a
certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees
of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project.
(3) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(4) obtain form each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the
contractor:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and
(b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the
end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current
_ certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project,
_ and for one year thereafter;
(6) notify the City of Coppell in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within
_ 10 days after the person knew of should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on
the project; and
(7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required
by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the
- person for whom they are providing services.
J. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage,
-- the contractor is representing the City of Coppell that all employees of the contractor
who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation
coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper
- reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements
will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with
the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading
-' information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties,
civil penalties, or other civil actions.
-' K. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provision s is a breach of contract
by the contractor which entitles the City of Coppell to declare the contract void if the
contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach
-- from the City of Coppell.
As defined by the Texas Labor Code, Chapter 269, Section 406.096(e), building or construction
is defined as:
1. Erecting or preparing to erect a structure, including a building, bridge, roadway,
public utility facility, or related appurtenance;
2. Remodeling, extending, repairing, or demolishing a structure; or
3. Otherwise improving real property or an appurtenance to real property through
similar activities.
The employment of maintenance employee who is not engaging in building or construction as
the employer's primary business does not constitute engaging in building or construction.
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
DOCUMENT 00850 - DRAWINGS INDEX
Cover Sheet
Civil
C I Dimensional Control Plan
C2 Grading and Drainage Plan
C3 Site Utility Plan
C4 Detail Sheet and Pollution Control
Landscape
L1 IrrigationPlan
L2 Landscape Plan
L3 Sidewalk Paving Plan
Architectural
A010 Architectural Site Plan
Al00 Overall Plan and Dimensions
A110 Finish Plan and Schedule
A211 Reflected Ceiling Plan and Details
A300 Roof Plan and Details
A400 Elevations
A401 Building Sections
A500 Wall Sections
A501 Plan Details
A502 Wall Sections
A600 Door Schedule, Door and Window Elevations
A601 Door and Window Details
A700 Enlarged Plans
A900 Interior Elevations
A901 Casework Sections
A902 Interior Elevations
A903 Interior Elevations
Detention Equipment and Systems
Df00 Plans, Schedules and Details
Structural
S100 General Notes and Details
S200 Foundation Plan
S300 Details
S400 Roof Framing Plan
S500 Details
S501 Sections
S502 Sections
Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing
MEP1 Site Plan
M1 HVAC Floor Plan
M2 HVAC Details
M3 HVAC Schedules
E1 Electrical Power Plan
E2 Electrical Lighting Plan
E3 Electrical Panel Schedules
P1 Underfloor Plumbing Plan
P2 Plumbing Floor Plan
P3 Plumbing Details
P4 Plumbing Riser Diagrams
P5 Plumbing Riser Diagrams
END OF DOCUMENT 00850
- DRAWINGS INDEX 00850 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
DOCUMENT 00861 - DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY
1.1 GENERAL
A. This Section is a schedule summary of the Design Selections for items technically specified in the various
technical Sections of this Project Manual.
B. References in this present Section to specific manufacturer, model name, model number, etc., are to establish
a preferred design selection standard only. Other listed "Acceptable Manufacturers", if qualified, are allowed
to submit substitutions for Architect's approval in accordance with Section 01631 - Substitutions and Product
Options.
C. Each item is back-referenced by Section name and number to where it is technically specified.
1.2 SELECTIONS
04200 - UNIT MASONRY
Brick
BK-1 Manufacturer: Interstate Brick Or Acme Brick
Description: Face Brick Face Brick
Color: Arctic White 186 Dowskin (light)
Size: 8" x 8" 8" x 8"
BK-2. Manufacturer: Interstate Brick Or Acme Brick
Description: Face Brick Face Brick
Color: Park Rose 112 Twilight Pink (medium)
Size: Modular Modular
BK-3 Manufacturer: Interstate Brick Or Acme Brick
Description: Face Brick - Accent Face Brick
Color: Ironstone Banding (Dark)
Size: Modular Modular
06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Plastic Laminate
PL-1 Manufacturer: Nevamar PL-3 Manufacturer: Nevamar
Description: Description:
Number: EL-5-1T Number: ES-2-3T
Pattern: ARP Surface Pattern: ARP Surface
Color: Elinvar Color: Sienna Essence
Finish: Finish:
Thickness Grade: Thickness Grade:
Location: Worksurfaces Location: Casework, Toilet Partitions
PL-2 Manufacturer: Nevamar
Description:
Number: PT-2-1T
Pattern: ARP Surface
Color: Terra Patina
Finish:
Thickness Grade:
Location: Casework and Countertops
in Restrooms
DESIGN SELECTIONS 00861 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
07410 - METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS
Manufacturer: Berridge Manufacturing Co.
Description:
Color: Hemlock Green
Type: Full Strength Kynar 500
Location: Roof and Soffit Panels
09300 - TILE
CT-2 Manufacturer: American Olean CT-5 Manufacturer: American Olean
Description: Description:
Style: Style:
Color: Al4- Almond Color: S17 Navy
Size: 2 x 2 Size: 4-1/4 x 4-1/4
Finish: Finish:
Grout: Grout:
Location: General Location: Wall Accent
CT-3 Manufacturer: American Olean CT-6: Manufacturer: American Olean
Description: Description:
Style: Style:
Color: A55 - Doe Color: 56 - Matte Coral
Size: 2 x 2 Size: 4-1/4 x 4-1/4
Finish: Finish:
Grout: Grout:
Location: Floor Accent Location: Wall Accent
CT-4: Manufacturer: American Olean
Description:
Style:
Color: 87 - Almond
Size: 4-1/4 x 4-1/4
Finish:
Grout:
Location: Wall Field
09385 - DIMENSION STONE TILE
S-1 Manufacturer: American Olean
Description:
Style:
Color: Green Slate
Size: 12" x 12"
Finish:
Grout:
Location: Floor Lobby
09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
AT-1 Manufacturer: Armstrong
Description: Designer Minaboard
Pattern:
Color: White
Type: Designer Texture
Size: 24" x 24" x 5/8"
Location:
09521 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
Refer to 09950 - Wallcovering, Type WC-2
DESIGN SELECTIONS 00861 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
09660 - RESILIENT FLOORING
Vinyl Composite Tile
VCT-1 Manufacturer: Azrock VCT-2 Manufacturer: Azrock
Description: Description:
Number: TQ o 289 Number: VS-292
Pattern: Thru-Quartz Pattern: Solid
Color: Toast Color: Burgundy
Size: 12" x 12" Size: 12" x 12"
Thickness: i/8" Thickness: 1/8"
Location: General Field Location: Accent
09678 - RESILIENT WALL BASE
Rubber Base
RB-1 Manufacturer: Burke
Description:
Size: 4"
Color: 701P - Black
Type: Topset Base
Thickness: 1/8"
Location: Throughout
09680 - CARPET
C- 1 Manufacturer: Stratton C-3 Manufacturer: Network
Description: Description:
Pattern: Arrowhead Pattern: Synthesis
Color: Canadian Pine Color: Cranberry Wine
Number: 34330 Number: 90850
Construction: Patterned Loop Construction: Loop Pile
Width: 12' Width: 18"
Fiber: 100% type 6.6 Fiber:
solution dyed nylon Pile:
Pile: .148 inch Gauge:
Gauge: 1/10 Face Weight:
Face Weight: 2802 Primary Backing:
Primary Backing: Polypropylene Secondary Backing:
Secondary Backing: AcfionBac Stitches:
Stitches: 10.7 per inch Location: Court Area
Location:
C-2 Manufacturer: Stratton C-4 Manufacturer: Network
Description: Description:
Pattern: Arrowhead Pattern: Synthesis
Color: Canadian Pine Color: Stillwater
Number: 34330 Number: 59090
Construction: Patterned Loop Construction: Loop Pile
Width: 6' Width: 18"
Fiber: 100% type 6.6 solution Fiber:
dyed nylon Pile:
Pile: .148 inch Gauge:
Gauge: 1/10 Face Weight:
Face Weight: 2802 Primary Backing:
Primary Backing: Polypropylene Secondary Backing:
Secondary Backing: ActionBac Stitches:
Stitches: 10.7 per inch Location: Police Area
Location:
DESIGN SELECTIONS 00861 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
09900 - PAINT
PT- 1 Manufacturer: Devoe PT-5 Manufacturer: Devoe
Description: Description:
Color: Love Lace Color: Yosemite
Number: 2H24P Number: 2D36C
Finish: Finish:
Location: General Location: Police Area Accent
PT-2 Manufacturer: PT-8 Manufacturer: Devoe
Description: Epoxy Paint Description:
Color: Color: Arden Green
Number: Number: 1U25B
Finish: Finish:
Location: CMU Location: Columns, HM. Windows
PT-3 Manufacturer: Devoe PT-9 Manufacturer: Devoe
Description: Description:
Color: Culver Beige Color: Black
Number: 2 M44D Number:
Finish: Finish:
Location: Location: Door Frames
PT-4 Manufacturer: Devoe PT-10 Color: To match roof'mg, Berridge
Description: Manufacturing "Hemlock
Color: Eldorado Green"
Number: ID43C Location: Exterior pipe columns,
Finish: dumpster gates
Location: Court Area Accent
09921 - MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS
PT-6 Manufacturer: Zolatone PT-7 Manufacturer: Zolatone
Description: Description:
Color: Color:
Number: 43-19989 Number: 43-27579
Finish: Finish:
Location: Courtroom Location: Lobby, Accent
09950 - WALLCOVERING
WC-1 Manufacturer: Koroseal WC-2 Manufacturer: Guilford of Maine
Description: Description: Acoustical Surface
Pattern: Carrera Pattern: FR 701, Style 2100
Number: U321-77 Number: 422
Color: Mistral Color: Cinnabar
Wallcovering Type: II Wallcovering Type: II
Location: Restrooms Location: Courtroom
END OF DOCUMENT 00861
DESIGN SELECTIONS 00861 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
-- 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or indicated
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Project consists of construction of a new Criminal Justice Center. The complex will be a single story,
15,000 sf building containing a courtroom, court offices, public lobby, offices for the police department, and
-- a lock-up area. Site work consists of utilities, concrete paving, hard and soft landscape, chainlink fencing,
and a vehicle sallyport.
1. Project Location: The project is located near the intersection of Denton Tap Road and Parkway
-- Boulevard.
2. Owner: City of Coppell, 255 Parkway Boulevard, Coppell, Texas.
B. Contract Documents, dated November 3, 1995 were prepared for the Project by Phillips Swager Associates,
12402 Park Central Drive, Suite 240, Dallas, Texas.
-- C. The Work Consists of:
1. General Construction Work: The construction of the new facility, in general, consists of earthwork,
grading and paving, utilities, fencing, concrete piers, grade beams, and concrete slab; concrete masonry
-- units, brick masonry veneer, structural steel frame with bar joists and metal deck, metal stud framing,
millwork, built-up roofmg system, aluminum storefronts, overhead sectional doors, interior finishes, and
building specialties.
2. Plumbing Work: Provide a complete system of supply and waste water piping; plumbing fixtures, floor
drains, and all other materials, specialty items and labor specified, shown, or required by the
Construction Documents.
3. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Work: Provide a complete system of heating, ventilating and
air conditioning, and miscellaneous specialty equipment and systems, as shown, specified, or required
by the Construction Documents.
4. Electrical Work: Provide a complete system of electrical distribution, conduit, panels, switches, wiring,
fixtures, etc., including all special equipment and systems as shown, specified, or required by the
Construction Documents.
D. The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the premises for construction
operations, including use of the site. The Contractor's use of the premises is limited only by the Owner's
.... right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of the Project.
1.40CCEIpANCY REQUIREMENTS
- A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in
completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere
with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute
acceptance of the total Work.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - I
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. The Owner will furnish items scheduled in Part 3 of this section. The Work includes providing support
systems to receive Owner's equipment, and mechanical and electrical connections.
1. The Owner will arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product data, and samples to the
Contractor.
2. The Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to the Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
3. Following delivery, the Owner will inspect items delivered for damage.
4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, the Owner will arrange for replacement.
5. The Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for the delivery of manufacturer's
warranties to the appropriate Contractor.
6. The Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in the Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
7. The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples and return them to the Architect
noting discrepancies or problems anticipated in use of the product.
8. The Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-fiaxrished items at the site.
9. The Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage, including damage from
exposure to the elements. The Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result of his
operations.
1.6 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Telephone System
END OF SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2 --
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- SECTION 01026 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
-- 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or indicated
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
-- B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.
2. Division 1 Section "Quality Control Services" for general inspection requirements.
-- 3. Division 2 Section "Caissions" for procedures for measurement for concrete piers.
4. Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for procedures for measurements for payment
for concrete paving.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for
materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the
estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, profit, and
applicable taxes.
-- B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment
of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.
..... C. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of
established unit prices, and to have this work measured, at the Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor
acceptable to the Contractor.
D. Schedule: A "Unit Price Schedule" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced
in the Schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE
A. Unit Price No. 1 - Concrete Piers:
.... 1. Description: Change in length of pier from lengths indicated aCCording to Division 2 Section "Caissions."
2. Unit of Measurement: Lin. ft. of concrete pier.
B. Unit Price No. 2 - Temporary Pier Casings:
1. Unit of Measurement: Lin. ft. including placement and removal.
2. Basis of Payment:
-- a. Cost of pier casings is not to be included in contract sum.
UNIT PRICES 01026 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
b. If pier casings are required Contract sum will be adjusted based on actual depth measured from top
of pier to top of bearing strata.
C. Unit Price No. 3 - Irrigation piping according to Division 2 Section"Underground Sprinkler Irrigation System"
1. Description: Addition or deletion of the following sizes of PVC Class 200, SDR-21 solvent weld pipe:
a. 2.0 inch diameter.
b. 1.5 inch diameter.
c. 1.25 inch diameter.
d. 1.0 inch diameter.
e. .75 inch diameter.
2. Unit of Measurement: LF of piping installed.
D. Unit Price No. 4 - Irrigation sleeves according to Division 2 Section"Underground Sprinkler Irrigation
System"
1. Description: Addition or deletion of the following boring and installation of Sch. 40 PVC sleeves:
a. 4.0 inch diameter.
b. 3.0 inch diameter.
c. 2.5 inch diameter.
2. Unit of Measurement: LF of boring and installation.
E. Unit Price No. 5 - Irrigation equipment according to Division 2 Section"Underground Sprinkler Irrigation
System"
1. Description: Addition or deletion of the following irrigation equipment:
a. 4" pop-up
b. 12" pop-up
c. Gear driven rotary
d. Quick coupling valve
e. Remote control valve
f. Coupler key
g. Swivel hose ell
h. 70 series valve box
i. 1419 valve box
2. Unit of Measurement: each.
F. Unit Price No. 6 - Landscape items according to Division 2 Section"Plant List"
1. Description: Addition or deletion of the following Landscape items:
a. Shumard Red Oak
b. Cedar Elm
c. Crape Myrtle
d. Wax Myrtle
e. Dwarf Yaupon Holly
f. Liriope 'Big Blue'
g. Liriope 'Silvery Sunproof'
h. Asian Jasmine
2. Unit of Measurement: each.
G. Unit Price No. 7 - Buffalo grass according to Division 2 Section"Plant List"
1. Description: Addition or deletion of Buffalo grass
UNIT PRICES 01026 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Unit of Measuremem: sq. ft. of sod.
H. Unit Price No. 8 - steel edging according to Division 2 Section"Plant List"
1. Description: Addition or deletion of steel edging
2. Unit of Measuremem: LF of edging.
END OF SECTION 01026
UNIT PRICES 01026 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.I RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or indicated
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications
for Payment.
1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction
Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.
1. Schedules: The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are specified in Division 1
Section "Submittals."
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms,
including:
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
b. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets.
c. List of subcontractors.
d. Schedule of alternates.
e. List of products.
f. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
g. Schedule of submittals.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before
the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules: Where Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide
subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the
Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of the Architect.
c. Project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each
item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of Work.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1) Percemage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of
Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents.
Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.
4.Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for
Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include requirements for
insurance and bonded warehousing, if required.
6. Provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent
stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Unit-Cost Allowances: Show the line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost,
multiplied by the measured quantity. Estimate quantities from the best indication in the Contract
Documents.
8. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs and margins on actual costs only when such items
are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications
for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and
profit margin for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may
be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead
expense, at the Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next Applications for
Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the
Architect and paid for by the Owner.
1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and
the f'mal Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment-Application Times: Each progress-payment date is indicated in the Agreement. The period of
construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment-Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the' 15th day of each month. The period
covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and ends
15 days prior to the date for each progress payment.
D. Payment-Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for
Applications for Payment.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and execution by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use
updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the
construction period covered by the application.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect
by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and
similar attachments, when required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information
related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
G. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics liens from
subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous
application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on each
item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
-- 3. The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.
4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with the Contractor's waiver of mechanics lien
for the period of construction covered by the application.
a. Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved
with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to the Owner.
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with
submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
3. Schedule of Values.
-- 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. Schedule of principal products.
6. Schedule of unit prices.
~_ 7. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final).
8. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
9. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
10. Copies of building permits.
-- 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work.
12. Initial progress report.
13. Report of preconstruction meeting.
14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
-- 15. Performance and payment bonds.
16. Data needed to acquire the Owner's insurance.
17. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required.
I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment.
_. 1. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner
occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
2. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include:
-- a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals.
b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
c. Test/adjust/balance records.
d. Maintenance instructions.
-- e. Meter readings.
f. Startup performance reports.
g. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
_ h. Final cleaning.
i. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
j. Advice on shifting insurance coverages.
k. Final progress photographs.
1. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
J. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with
submittal of the fmal Application for Payment include the following:
1. Completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.
3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled.
4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay.
5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner.
6. Certified property survey.
7. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
8. Removal of temporary facilities and services.
9. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
10. Change of door locks to Owner's access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01027
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplemen~u'y Conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or indicated
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work
defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner
decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the
products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that
Work into the Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental
to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the
status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later
consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract.
D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced
in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each
alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: Provide Rye Grass hydromulching as defined in Section 02932 in addition to Buffalo Grass
hydromulching.
B. Alternate No. 2: Provide an audio monitoring system as defined in Section 11198 in Rooms 183, 186 and 187.
END OF SECTION 01030
- ALTERNATES 01030- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- SECTION 01035 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
-- and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or indicated
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
-- 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing contract
modifications.
1. Multiple Prime Contracts: Provisions of this Section apply to the work of each prime contractor.
_ B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of
allowances.
-- 2. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices.
3. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
4. Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" for administrative procedures governing Applications for
Payment.
~- 5. Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions" for administrative procedures for handling requests for
substitutions made after award of the Contract.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving
adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, on AIA Form G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions.
1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in
..... the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. If necessary, the description
will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider them as an
instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within 20 days of receipt of a proposal request, submit an estimate of cost necessary to execute the
change to the Architect for the Owner's review.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total mount of purchases to
be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
-- c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract
Time.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforseen conditions require modifications to the Contract,
the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.
Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on
- the Contract Sum and Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be
made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
.... 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Comply with.requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed change requires substitution
MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
of one product or system for a product or system specified.
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Change Order Proposal Requests.
D. Proposal Request Form: Use forms provided by the Owner for Change Order Proposals. Sample copies are
included at the end of this Section.
1.5 ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: For allowance-cost adjustment, base each Change Order Proposal on the difference
between the actual purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by the final measurement of work-in-place.
Where applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product
imperfections, and similar margins.
1. Include installation costs in the purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.
2. When requested, prepare explanations and documentation to substantiate the margins claimed.
3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work claimed in the Change Orders related to unit-cost
allowances.
4. The Owner reserves the right to establish the actual quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity
survey, measure, or count.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the
Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or the Contractor's handling, labor, installation,
overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change
Directive authorizing work to proceed. The Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days.
1. Do not include the Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount
unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been
foreseen from information in Contract Documents.
2. No change to the Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher or lower-priced
materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and the Contractor disagree on the terms of a Proposal
Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714. The Construction
Change Directive instructs the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in
a Change Order.
1. The Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of the change in the Work. It also
designates the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction
Change Directive.
1.After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate
cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
1.7 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of
the Owner and the Contractor on AIA Form G701.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01035
MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035 - 2 _
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified
or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction
operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. General project coordination procedures.
2. Conservation.
3. Coordination Drawings.
4. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
5. Cleaning and protection.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Field Engineering" specifies procedures for field engineering services, including
establishment of benchmarks and control points.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" for progress meetings, coordination meetings, and
preinstallation conferences.
3. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
4. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" for coordinating general installation.
5. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" for coordinating contract closeout.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient
and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under
different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
l. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation
of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own
installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required
maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work
is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with
other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such
administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of schedules.
2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
3. Delivery and processing of submittals.
4. Progress meetings.
5. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with
COORDINATION 01040- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the
Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for
installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where
limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different
components.
1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals."
B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list of the
Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance
at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and
telephone numbers.
1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each temporary
telephone.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS
A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and
conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in an acceptable manner.
B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of
uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and
installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration
at Substantial Completion.
B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder
of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without
damaging effects.
C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed
or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the
construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Excessive static or dynamic loading.
2. Excessive internal or external pressures.
3. Excessively high or low temperatures.
4. Thermal shock.
5. Excessively high or low humidity.
6. Air contamination or pollution.
7. Water or ice.
8. Solvents.
9. Chemicals.
COORDINATION 01040 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
10. Light.
11. Radiation.
12. Puncture.
13. Abrasion.
14. Heavy traffic.
15. Soiling, staining, and corrosion.
16. Bacteria.
__ 17. Rodent and insect infestation.
18. Combustion.
19. Electrical current.
20. High-speed operation.
-. 21. Improper lubrication.
22. Unusual wear or other misuse.
23. Contact between incompatible materials.
24. Destructive testing.
t. 25. Misalignment.
26. Excessive weathering.
27. Unprotected storage.
28. Improper shipping or handling.
- 29. Theft.
30. Vandalism.
END OF SECTION 01040
- COORDINATION 01040 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
-- Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
-- 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating cutting and patching
with other construction activities.
2. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the
building for alterations.
3. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
-- patching individual parts of the Work.
a. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations.
Refer to Division 15 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable
-- to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the
time cutting and patching will be performed if the Owner requires approval of these procedures
before proceeding. Request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as
_ applicable, in the proposal:
1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed and
indicate why it cannot be avoided.
-- 2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes
to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's
appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.
4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List
utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate
how long service will be disrupted.
6. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit
details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original
structure.
_ 7. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the
Architect's right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory
work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that
would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the
following structural elements:
a. Foundation construction.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
b. Bearing and retaining walls.
c. Structural concrete.
d. Structural steel.
e. Lintels.
f. Timber and primary wood framing.
g. Structural decking.
h. Stair systems.
i. Miscellaneous structural metals.
j. Exterior curtain-wall construction.
k. Equipment supports.
1. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
m. Structural systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.
B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a
manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch
operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance
or decreased operational life or safety.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the
following operating elements or safety related systems:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment.
b. Air or smoke barriers.
c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
d. Membranes and flashings.
e. Fire protection systems.
f. Noise and vibration control elements and systems.
g. Control systems.
h. Communication systems.
i. Conveying systems.
j. Electrical wiring systems.
k. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied
spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.
Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and
patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
1. If possible retain the original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch the exposed Work
listed below. If it is impossible to engage the original Installer or fabricator, engage
another recognized experienced and specialized firm.
a. Processed concrete finishes.
b. Stonework and stone masonry.
c. Ornamental metal.
d. Matcbed-veneer woodwork.
e. Preformed metal panels.
f. Firestopping.
g. Window wall system.
h. Stucco and ornamental plaster.
i. Acoustical ceilings.
j. Terrazzo.
k. Finished wood flooring.
1. Fluid-applied flooring.
m. Carpeting.
n. Aggregate wall coating.
o. Wall covering.
p. Swimming pool finishes.
q. HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.
1.5 WARRANTY
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods
and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually
match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable
or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of
existing materials.
B. Plaster: Comply with ASTM C 842.
1. Base Coat: Ready-mixed, sand aggregate gypsum plaster base.
2. Finish Coat: Ready-mixed gypsum finish plaster.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be
performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective
action before proceeding.
1. Before proceeding, meet at the Project Site with parties involved in cutting and patching,
including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and
conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed
during cutting and patching operations.
C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed
or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
i. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original Installer;
comply with the original Installer's recommendations.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,
not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side
into concealed surfaces.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw
or a diamond-core drill.
4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching
requires excavating and backfilling.
5. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility
services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or
partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or
conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and
cutting.
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained
adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and
refinishing.
3. Where removing walls or partitions extends one f'mished area into another, patch and
repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform
color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new
materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over
entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer
and second coat.
4. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface
of uniform appearance.
D. Plaster Installation: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and install thickness and coats as
indicated.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 3-coat work.
2. Finish gypsum plaster to match existing adjacent surfaces. Sand lightly to remove trowel
marks and arrises.
3. Cut, patch, point-up, and repair plaster to accommodate other construction.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features
before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original
condition.
END OF SECTION 01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining
to required items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field-engineering
services including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Land survey work.
2. Civil-engineering services.
3. Damage surveys.
4. Geotechnical monitoring.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering
with other construction activities.
2.Division 1 Section "Submittals" for submitting Project record surveys.
3. Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents and recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines
and levels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the land surveyor or professional engineer certifying
-- the location and elevation of improvements.
B. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies of the final property survey.
C. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data as
required under provisions of "Submittals" and "Project Closeout" Sections.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surveyor Qualifications: Engage a land surveyor registered in the state where the Project is
located, to perform required land-surveying services.
B. Engineer Qualifications: Engage an engineer of the discipline required, licensed in the state
where the Project is located, to perform required engineering services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Identification: The Owner will identify existing control points and property line comer st~es.
B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing
benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks
FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction.
1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval.
Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points or requirements to relocate reference
points because of necessary changes in grades or locations.
2.Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the
original survey control points.
C. Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data
established by survey control points.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
D. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities
and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction.
1. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping.
3.2 PERFORMANCE
A. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and
markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate
each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or
recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions.
1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided
for their use.
2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and plumb.
B. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this log
available for reference.
1. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when
deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project
Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected.
2. On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring
field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for
grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations,
column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for mechanical and
electrical work.
E. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing structures,
utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction.
Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Final Property Survey: Prepare a f'mal property survey showing significant features (real
property) for the Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by the surveyor, that
principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of the Project are accurately positioned as shown on
the survey.
1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the f'mal property survey recorded by or
with local governing authorities as the official "property survey."
FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
END OF SECTION 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01095 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic represemations, notes, or schedules on the
Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the
Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to
help the reader locate the reference. Location is not limited.
C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved,"
"required," and "permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar
phrases.
D. "Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the
Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and
responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued
by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, convemions, and agreemems within the
construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading,
unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading,
unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing,
curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended
use.
I. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an
employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity,
including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be
experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.
1. The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having a minimum
of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the
special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities
must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic
name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply
exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.
3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific
construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those
operations. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are
requirements over which the Contractor has no option. However, the ultimate
responsibility for fulfilling contract requirements remains with the Contractor.
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes
and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere
with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
J. "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either
exclusively or in conjunction, with others performing other work as pan of the Project. The extent
of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description
of the land on which the Project is to be built.
K. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific
inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to
interpret results of those inspections or tests.
1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION
A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on
CSI's 16-Division format and MasterFormat's numbering system.
B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language
and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations
or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents
is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied,
but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be
interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the
context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Streamlined Language: The Specifications generally use the imperative mood and
streamlined language. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be
performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used
for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulffiled indirectly by the Contractor or
by others when so noted.
a. The words "shall be" are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or
phrase.
1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound
or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made
a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.
C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,
comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer to the Architect before proceeding for a decision
on requirements that are different but apparently equal, and where it is uncertain which requirement
is the most stringent.
1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
shall be the minimum acceptable. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable
limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or
maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the
Architect for a decision before proceeding.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar
with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the
Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.
E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently
abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating
organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text
provision. Refer to Gale Research Co.'s "Encyclopedia of Associations," available in most
libraries.
i .5 SUBMITTALS
A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established in conjunction
with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01095
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
'- 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining
to required items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
~.~ 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Preconsrruction conferences.
2. Preinstallation conferences.
3. Progress meetings.
~ 4. Coordination meetings.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating project meetings
with other construction activities.
2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
~ 3. Division 7 Section "Built-Up Asphalt Roofmg" for preinstallation roof'mg conferences.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
~ A. Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the
Owner and the Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the
conference at the Project Site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review
responsibilities and personnel assignments.
B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other
concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
1. Tentative construction schedule.
2. Critical work sequencing.
3. Designation of responsible personnel.
4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
6. Distribution of Contract Documents.
7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
-- 8. Preparation of record documents.
9. Use of the premises.
10. Parking availability.
11. Office, work, and storage areas.
12. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
13. Safety procedures.
14. First aid.
15. Security.
16. Housekeeping.
17. Working hours.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES
PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
A. Conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity that
requires coordination with other construction.
B. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular
activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements
for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples.
g. Review of mockups.
h. Possible conflicts.
i. Compatibility problems.
j. Time schedules.
k. Weather limitations.
1. Manufacturer's recommendations.
m. Warranty requirements.
n. Compatibility of materials.
o. Acceptability of substrates.
p. Temporary facilities.
q. Space and access limitations.
r. Governing regulations.
s. Safety.
t. Inspecting and testing requirements.
u. Required performance results.
v. Recording requirements.
w. Protection.
2. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference,
and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone
concerned, including the Owner and the Architect.
3. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work
and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.
1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals. Notify the Owner and the
Architect of scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the
payment request.
B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Architect, each subcontractor,
supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination,
or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the
Work.
C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to the status of the Project.
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule,
whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind
PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so.
Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure that current and subsequent
activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
a. Interface requirements.
b. Time.
c. Sequences.
-- d. Stares of submittals.
e. Deliveries.
f. Off-site fabrication problems.
~ g. Access.
h. Site utilization.
i. Temporary facilities and services.
j. Hours of work.
__ k. Hazards and risks.
1. Housekeeping.
m. Quality and work standards.
n. Change Orders.
-- o. Documentation of information for payment requests.
D. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each meeting, distribute minutes of the meeting to each
party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in
narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report.
1. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
_ meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.6 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals convenient for all parties involved.
Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such
as regular progress meetings and special preinstallation meetings.
B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or
planning for the construction activities involved.
C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by
decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Comract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for
performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submittal schedule.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Shop Drawings.
5. Product Data.
6. Samples.
7. Quality assurance submittals.
B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division ! Sections and other Contract Documents for
requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Permits.
2. Applications for Payment.
3. Performance and payment bonds.
4. Insurance certificates.
5. List of subcontractors.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" specifies requirements for submittal of the
Schedule of Values.
2. Division 1 Section "Coordination" specifies requirements governing preparation and
submittal of required Coordination Drawings.
3. Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" specifies requirements for submittal and distribution
of meeting and conference minutes.
4. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" specifies requirements for submittal of inspection and
test reports.
5. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies requirements for submittal of Project
Record Documents and warranties at project closeout.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that
require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or to
function as intended.
1. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 1 Section "Coordination"
and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product
Data.
B. Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or f'mish
materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
C. Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or operation;
SUBMITTALS 01300- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
they are not Samples.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related
construction activities to avoid delay.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so
processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received.
3. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to
process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for
resubmittals.
a. Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the Architect must
delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.
b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal.
c. Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal.
d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit
processing.
B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block.
1. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on the label or beside the
title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and
the action taken.
2.Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken.
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of the Architect.
d. Name and address of the Contractor.
e. Name and address of the subcontractor.
f. Name and address of the supplier.
g. Name of the manufacturer.
h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
3. All submittals shall be identified, in C.S.I. Format, by specification division number, and
the number of the submittal in a specific division, i.e. 04.01 would be the f'trst submittal
in Division 4 and 04.02 would be the second submital in Division 4 and so on. Any
submittal not properly identified as described on the drawings, product data, specifications,
and the transmittal will be subject to return marked "Revise and Resubmit". All re-
submittals will be identified in the same format with an alphabetical suffix, starting with
"a" for each re-submittal.
C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit
each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using a transmittal form. The Architect will
not accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.
1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or
separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
- variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies
with Contract Document requirements.
2. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810.
- 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction
schedule. Submit within 30 days after the date established for "Commencement of the Work."
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous
vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of
_ units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values."
2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments.
As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion.
3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other
~- reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period.
4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities;
include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper
-- sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions
of the Work.
5. Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
_ subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules.
6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate
Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
B. Phasing: On the schedule, show how requirements for phased completion to permit Work by
separate Contractors and partial occupancy by the Owner affect the sequence of Work.
--- C. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,
including submittal review, testing, and installation.
D. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for each
-- major portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced or integrated
with other activities.
E. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned
and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of Work performed as of the dates used for
preparation of payment requests.
- ~ 1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" for cost reporting and payment
procedures.
F. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in
the Project meeting room and temporary field office.
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.
Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the
Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.
G. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a complete
schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for submittal of the
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and the
list of products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information:
a. Scheduled date for the first submittal.
b. Related Section number.
c. Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples).
d. Name of the subcontractor.
e. Description of the part of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for resubmittal.
g. Scheduled date for the Architect's final release or approval.
B. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post
copies in the Project meeting room and field office.
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.
Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the
Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.
C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.7 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS
A. Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at the site,
and submit duplicate copies to the Architect at weekly intervals:
1. List of subcontractors at the site.
2. Approximate count of personnel at the site.
3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.
4. Accidents and unusual events.
5. Meetings and significant decisions.
6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
7. Meter readings and similar recordings.
8. Emergency procedures.
9. Orders and requests of governing authorities.
10. Change Orders received, implemented.
11. Services connected, disconnected.
12. Equipment or system tests and startups.
13. Partial Completions, occupancies.
14. Substantial Completions authorized.
1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise
indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy
standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific
reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns,
templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 36 by
48 inches (890 by 1220 mm).
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 7. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and one blue- or
black-line print for the Architect's review. The Architect will return the reproducible print.
8. Final Submittal: Submit 3 blue- or black-line prints and 2 additional prints where required
_ for maintenance manuals, plus the number of prints needed by the Architect for
distribution. The Architect will retain 2 prints and return the remainder.
a. One of the prints returned shall be marked up and maintained as a "Record
. _ Document."
9. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken.
-- 1.9 PRODUCT DATA
A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product
_ Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts,
standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and
performance curves.
~ 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data
includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the
applicable information. Include the following information:
.- a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
b. Compliance with trade association standards.
c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
d. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
m e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
f. Notation of coordination requirements.
2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents
~- has been confirmed.
3. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection
of options is required.
__ 4. Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit 4 copies where required
for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one and will return the other marked
with action taken and corrections or modifications required.
~- a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the
submittal may serve as the f'mal submittal.
5. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers,
-- manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities.
Show distribution on transmittal forms.
a. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's
possession.
b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with
construction.
1.10 SAMPLES
A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical
with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or
fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern.
-- 1. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare
Samples to match the Architect's sample. Include the following:
a. Specification Section number and reference.
b. Generic description of the Sample.
_ SUBMITTALS 01300 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
c. Sample source.
d. Product name or name of the manufacturer.
e. Compliance with recognized standards.
f. Availability and delivery time.
2. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for
a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these
characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and
installed.
a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the
material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show
approximate limits of the variations.
b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate
workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation,
and similar construction characteristics.
c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Comractor for
incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On
the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample
submittals.
d. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner's
property, are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site
prior to Substantial Completion.
3. Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for
selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard
choices.
a. The Architect will review and return preliminary submittals with the Architect's
notation, indicating selection and other action.
4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. The
Architect will return one set marked with the action taken.
5.Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons
throughout the course of construction.
a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the
submittal may serve as the final submittal.
b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated
with each set.
B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers,
fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show
distribution on transmittal forms.
1. Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish
materials and to establish the Project standard.
a. Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process
transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.
1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS
A., Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions,
manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections
of the Specifications.
B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product,
material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from
the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements.
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- I. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other
individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from
-- independent testing agencies are specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."
1.12 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the
Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and remm promptly.
~ 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform action stamp. The Architect
will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows:
I. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Reviewed", the Work
covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the
Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.
~- 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Furnish as Noted,"
the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or
corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment
· depends on that compliance.
3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Revise and Resubmit,"
do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication,
delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations;
-- resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit" at
the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
4. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special
processing or other activity, the Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not
Required."
C. Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will return unsolicited submittals to the sender without
action.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART ! - GENERAL
~' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
._ 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control services.
-- B. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed
by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
-- C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract
Document requirements.
D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not
production of standard products.
__ 1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in
the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover
production of standard products.
2. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control
- procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect,
Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
..... E. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" specifies requirements for repair and restoration
of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities.
-- 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for development of a schedule of
required tests and inspections.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified
entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specified
.~ elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for
these services are included in the Contract Sum.
1. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other
- quality-control services are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor shall employ and
pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality-control services. Costs for
these services are included in the Contract Sum.
2. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other
' quality-control services are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will employ and pay a
qualified independent testing agency to perform those services.
3. where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other
_ quality-control services are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will engage the services
of a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services. Payment for these
services will be made from the Inspection and Testing Allowance, as authorized by Change
Orders.
a. where the Owner has engaged a testing agency for testing and inspecting pan of
_ QUALITY CONTROL 014~-1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
the Work, and the Contractor is also required to engage an entity for the same or
related element, the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the Owner,
unless agreed to in writing by the Owner.
B. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests~ or other
quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document
requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility.
1. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the
Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction
indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements.
C. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar
services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in
advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but
are not limited to, the following:
1. Provide access to the Work.
2. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist
the agency in taking samples.
4. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.
5. Deliver samples to testing laboratories.
6. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that
require control by the testing agency.
7. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.
D. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling,
and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the
Architect and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall
provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.
1. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the
Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
E. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a
minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples,
and similar activities.
! .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Unless the Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing agency shall submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to the Architect.
If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of
each inspection, test, or similar service through the Contractor.
1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when
the authority so directs.
2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a. Date of issue.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
QUALITY CONTROL 014~-2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
f. Designation of the Work and test method.
g. Identification of product and Specification Section.
h. Complete inspection or test data.
i. Test results and an interpretation of test results.
j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies
with Contract Document requirements.
1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
m. Recommendations on retesting.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including
independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of
Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification"
and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.
1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized
by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document
requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired
construction.
C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility
for inspection, testing, or similar services.
END OF SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including
temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection.
B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Water service and distribution.
2. Temporary electric power and light.
3. Temporary heat.
4. Ventilation.
5. Telephone service.
6. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
7. Storm and sanitary sewer.
C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Field offices and storage sheds.
2. Temporary roads and paving.
3. Dewatering facilities and drains.
4. Temporary enclosures.
5. Hoists and temporary elevator use.
6. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards.
7. Waste disposal services.
8. Rodent and pest control.
9. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Temporary fire protection.
2. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
3. Sidewalk bridge or enclosure fence for the site.
4. Environmental protection.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures
performed on temporary utilities.
B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of the date established for
commencement of the Work, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each
temporary utility.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Building code requirements.
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Utility company regulations.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules.
5. Environmental protection regulations.
B. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and
Demolition Operations," ANSI Al0 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and
Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."
1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric
Code."
C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility
before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of
each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over
from use of temporary service to use of permanent service.
B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate
in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses.
Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention
measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to
develop or persist on-site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged,
previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
1. For job-built temporary offices, shops, and sheds within the construction area, provide UL-
labeled, fire-treated lumber and plywood for framing, sheathing, and siding.
2. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior-type, Grade B-B high-density concrete
form overlay plywood of sizes and thicknesses indicated.
3. For fences and vision barriers, provide minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick exterior
plywood.
4. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch- (16-
mm-) thick exterior plywood.
C. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide gypsum wallboard on interior walls of temporary offices.
D. Roofing Materials: Provide UL Class A standard-weight asphalt shingles or UL Class C mineral-
surfaced roll roofing on roofs of job-built temporary offices, shops, and sheds.
E. Paint: Comply with requirements of Division 9 Section "Painting."
I. For job-built temporary offices, shops, sheds, fences, and other exposed lumber and
plywood, provide exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer.
2. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over
exterior primer.
3. For interior walls of temporary offices, provide 2 coats interior latex-fiat wall paint.
F. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL-labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of
15 or less. For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon-reinforced, laminated polyethylene
or polyvinyl chloride, fire-retardant tarpaulins.
G. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
H. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) thick, galvanized 2-inch (50-mm) chainlink
fabric fencing 6 feet (2 m) high with galvanized barbed-wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe
posts, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) I.D. for line posts and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) I.D. for comer posts.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use
undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use
intended.
B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch (19-mm), heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100
feet (30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution
system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.
C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of
110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-
fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment.
D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed
to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords
if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed
safe length-voltage ratio.
E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for
adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to
breakage. Provide exterior fLxtures where exposed to moisture.
F. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or
another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed.
G. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction with
lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air-conditioned
units on foundations adequate for normal loading.
H. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the chemical,
aerated recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with
a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.
I. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for
temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated,
Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended
classes for the exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size
required by location and class of fire exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will
serve the Project adequately and result in mimmum interference with performance of the Work.
Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required.
Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed
permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with
matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations.
1. Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if
necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility
availability, provide trucked-in services.
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements
cannot be used for that purpose.
4. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner
or Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis
of claims for Change Orders.
B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for
construction until permanent water service is in use.
1. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use.
C. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and
distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period.
Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault iaterrupters,
and main distribution switch gear.
1. Install electric power service underground, except where overhead service must be used.
2. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed
to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac 20 Ampere
rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overhead and
exposed for surveillance.
D. Temporary Lighting: When overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary
lighting with local switching.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements
without operating the entire system. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate
illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.
E. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or drying
of completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low
temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce
the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy.
F. Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system, provide
vented, self-contained, LP-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is
prohibited.
G. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service throughout the construction period
for all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install telephone on a separate line for each
temporary office and first-aid station.
1. Separate Telephone Lines: Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Where an office has more than 2 occupants, install a telephone for each additional
occupant or pair of occupants.
b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for a fax machine in the field office.
c. Provide a separate line for the Owner's use.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
H. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of
fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the Project's needs.
1. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each
"- facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material.
I. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit-type privies
will not be permitted.
1. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel.
.~_ J. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for
personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition.
Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition.
-- 1. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety,
and sanitation of personnel.
K. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units,
-- including paper cup supply.
1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water
temperature at 45 to 55 deg F (7 to 13 deg C).
L. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent
that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage
_~ ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities
can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent
off-site in a lawful manner.
- 1. Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar
contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
2. Connect temporary sewers to the municipal system, as directed by sewer department
officials.
-- 3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition.
Following heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.
M. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade
- construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy
access.
- _ 1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Owner.
- B. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within the construction area
or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241.
C. Field Offices: Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to accommodate
-- required office personnel at the Project Site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small
progress meetings. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Furnish with a desk and chairs, a 4-drawer file cabinet, plan table, plan rack, and a 6-shelf
bookcase.
2. Equip with a water cooler and private toilet complete with water closet, lavatory, and
medicine cabinet unit with a mirror.
D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished, and equipped
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may
be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building or elsewhere on-site.
E. Temporary Paving: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paving to support the indicated
loading adequately and to withstand exposure to traffic during the construction period. Locate
temporary paving for roads, storage areas, and parking where the same permanem facilities will be
located. Review proposed modifications to permanent paving with the Architect.
1. Coordinate temporary paving development with subgrade grading, compaction, installation
and stabilization of subbase, and installation of base and finish courses of permanent
paving.
2. Install temporary paving to minimize the need to rework the installations and to result in
permanent roads and paved areas without damage or deterioration when occupied by the
Owner.
3.Extend temporary paving in and around the construction area as necessary to accommodate
delivery and storage of materials, equipment usage, administration, and supervision.
F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations
not directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with
dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections. Where feasible, utilize the same
facilities. Maintain the site, excavations, and construction free of water.
G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress
and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
1. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide
temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat.
Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid
dangerous conditions and effects.
2.Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close
openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar materials.
3. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing,
wood-framed construction.
4. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. (9.2 sq. m) in area, use
UL-labeled, fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing.
H. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees. Truck cranes
and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not
temporary facilities.
I. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project identification and other signs of size
indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the
Project. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. Do not permit
installation of unauthorized signs.
1.Project Identification Signs: Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics.
Comply with details indicated.
2.Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction
personnel and visitors.
J. Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior yard and sign lights so signs are visible when Work
is being performed.
K. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily.
Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris.
Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or
3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Handle hazardous,
dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properiy.
Dispose of material lawfully.
L. Rodent and Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local
exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Employ this service to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so the Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
~- M. Stairs: Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of
temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or
longer, as requested by the Architect.
B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install
and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably
predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire
-- Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and
Demolition Operations."
1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but
_L not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection
facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in
-- hazardous fire-exposure areas.
4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and
similar sources of fire ignition.
C. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project, complete
installation of the permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into
operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection
of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to
inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and
-- needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
E. Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates.
Locate where indicated, or enclose the entire site or the portion determined sufficient to
- accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other
animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates.
__ 1. Provide open-mesh, chainlink fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of gravel and
earth.
F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas
.... of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and
similar violations of security.
1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for
--- theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and
release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.
G. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
-- construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the
possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other
undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise.
Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from
persons or firms near the site.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage
by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
2. Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground
lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.
C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each
temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent
facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent
construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair
damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property.
The Owner reserves the right to take possession of project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent
paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate
fill that do not comply with requirements for ~l or subsoil in the area. Remove materials
contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other
substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street
paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as required by the governing
authority.
3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the
construction period including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings.
b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
c. Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use.
END OF SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's
selection of products for use in the Project.
1. Multiple Prime Contracts: Provisions of this Section apply to the construction activities
of each prime contractor.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the applicability of
industry standards to products specified.
2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submittal of the Contractor's
Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule.
3. Division 1 Section "Substitutions" specifies administrative procedures for handling requests
for substitutions made after award of the Contract,
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the
Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and
similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the
construction industry.
1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the
Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms
"material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
a. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name,
including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in the
manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
b. "Foreign Products," as distinguished from "domestic products," are items
substantially manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside the United States
and its possessions. Products produced or supplied by entities substantially owned
(more than 50 percent) by persons who are not citizens of, nor living within, the
United States and its possessions are also considered to be foreign products.
2. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or
otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.
3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated,
that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: A list of products required is included at the end of this Section. Prepare a schedule
in tabular form showing each product listed. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary
product names for each item listed.
B. Product List: Prepare a list showing products specified in tabular form acceptable to the Architect.
Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
product names for each item listed.
1. Coordinate product list with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of
Submittals.
2. Form: Prepare product list with information on each item tabulated under the following
column headings:
a. Related Specification Section number.
b. Generic name used in Contract Documents.
c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
d. Manufacturer's name and address.
e. Supplier's name and address.
f. Installer's name and address.
g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of an initial product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and
for known variations from Contract requirements.
a. At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product
selections and designations that must be established early in the Contract period.
4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies
of the completed product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for
known variations from Contract requirements.
5. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 2 weeks
of receipt of the completed product list. No response within this period constitutes no
objection to listed manufacturers or products but does not constitute a waiver of the
requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Architect's response will
include a list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons
for this action.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single
source.
1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot, produce
a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the
Architect to determine the most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities
may include attributes, such as visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility.
When a determination has been made, select products from sources producing products that
possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible.
B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more
products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1. Each prime contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods that
are compatible with products and construction methods of other prime or separate
contractors.
2. If a dispute arises between prime contractors over concurrently selectable, but incompatible
products, the Architect will determine which products shall be retained and which are
incompatible and must be replaced.
C. Foreign Product Limitations: Except under one or more of the following conditions, provide
domestic products, not foreign products, for inclusion in the Work:
1. No available domestic product complies with the Contract Documents.
2. Domestic products that comply with the Contract Documents are available only at prices
or terms substantially higher than foreign products that comply with the Contract
Documents.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's
or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products that will be exposed to
view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where
required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous.
._ 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected
or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous
in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other
essential operating data:
a. Name of product and manufacturer.
b. Model and serial number.
c. Capacity.
-- d. Speed.
e. Ratings.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means
and methods that will prevem damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding
of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that
_ are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
~- handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of
-- quantity or counting of units.
6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger
the supporting construction.
_. 7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a
weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain
temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.
__ PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION
-- A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices
and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.
2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been
produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product
selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following:
_ 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single product
or manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.
2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more
products or manufacturers, provide 1 of the products indicated. No substitutions will be
-- permitted.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
a. Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, accompanied
by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal," cemply with the Contract
Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an
unnamed product.
3. Nonproprietary Specifications: When Specifications list products or manufacturers that are
available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use
of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies
with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning
"substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or
assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade
name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise
complies with Contract requirements.
5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with
performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are
recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.
a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature
or by the manufacturer' s certification of performance.
6. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require
compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies
with the standards, codes, or regulations specified.
7. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily
and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the
Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching
product in another product category.
8. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase '... as selected
from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures ..." or a similar phrase, select a
product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect
will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected.
9. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and ~Allowance" provisions in
Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for
processing such selections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the
applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with
other Work.
1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 01600
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01631 - SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for
substitutions made after award of the Contract.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division I Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the applicability of
industry standards to products specified.
2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submitting the Contractor's
Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule.
3. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" specifies requirements governing the
Contractor's selection of products and product options.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract
Documents.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by
the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to
be requests for substitutions. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions:
1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to
award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to
requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.
2.Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.
3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract
Documents.
4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders
issued by governing authorities.
1.4 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
A. Architect will not consider substitution requests prior to execution of Contract; Contract is to be
based upon products and standard of quality established in Contract Documents.
B. Submit list of proposed substitutions within 30 days after execution of Contract.
C. Submit substitution requests within 60 days after Notice to Proceed. Substitutions other than those
listed on proposed substitutions listing will not be considered.
D. Substitutions due to non-availability of specified items:
_ 1. Architect will consider requests for substitutions due to non-availability of specified item
throughout duration of project if due to:
a. Lockouts.
__ b. Strikes.
c. Bankruptcy.
_ SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
d. Discontinuation of product.
e. Proven shortage.
f. Similar occurrences.
2. Notify Architect in writing as soon as non-availability becomes apparent, in time to avoid
delays to project; include substantiating data.
E. Do not substitute products unless such substitution has been specifically approved in writing by
Architect.
F. Information Required: Contractor alone shall be responsible for substantiating acceptability of
proposed substitutions. Submit full documentation along with substitution request, including:
1. Data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents:
a. Product identification, including name and address of manufacturer.
b. Product description, performance and test data, and reference standards.
c. Sample, if requested.
2. Describe any anticipated effect that acceptance of proposed substitution will have on:
a. Construction schedule.
b. Construction methods.
c. Other items of Work.
3. Describe any differences between specified product and proposed substitution, including:
a. Warranty.
b. Dimensions.
c. Cost savings.
d. Others, as applicable.
G. Substitution Request Form:
1.Submit substitution requests on copy of form provided by Architect, with attachments as
necessary to fully document proposed substitution.
2.Number of Copies Required: Two for Architect, one for Owner, and additional as needed
for Contractor's use.
H. Representation: In submitting substitution request, Contractor represents that he:
1.Has investigated proposed substitution and determined that it is equal or superior to
specified product in all aspects.
2.Shall coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, making changes as may
be required to complete Work in all aspects.
3.Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which may subsequently
become apparent.
1.5 CONSIDERATION, ACCEPTANCE AND REJECTION
A. Substitutions will not be considered if:
1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or data submittals without formal request.
2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents, without additional
compensation to Architect.
3. Substitution request has not been reviewed and approved by Contractor, with his signature
affixed thereto.
B. Substitutions will be considered on basis of design, concept of the Work, and overall conformance
with information given in Contract Documents.
C. Architect's decision on acceptance or rejection of substitutions will be f'mal.
SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 2 _
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- D. Owner will retain cost for review of substitutions that are not approved from payments to
Contractor, in an amount agreed to by Owner and Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01631
SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 3
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
DATE:
-- TO:
ATTENTION:
PROJECT:
We submit for your consideration the following product as a Substitution for the specified project:
Section No. Paragraph Specified Product
-- Proposed Substitution:
Product Data:
Attach complete technical data for the proposed Substitution. Include information on changes to Contract Documents which
proposed Substitution will require for its proper installation.
Samples:
[ ] Attached [ ] Will be furnished upon request
Does the Substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings?
[ ] No [ ] Yes (explain)
Effects of proposed Substitution on other Work:
Differences between proposed substitution and specified Product:
Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed Substitution and specified Products are:
[ ] Same [ ] Different (explain)
Substitution Request Form SRF-1 COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER
PSA Project No. 4087.20
Maintenance service and spare parts are available for proposed substitution from:
Previous installations where proposed Substitution may be seen:
Project: Project:
Owner: Owner:
Architect: Architect:
Date Installed: Date Installed:
Cost savings to be realized by Owner, if proposed Substitution is accepted:
Change to Contract Time, if proposed Substitution is accepted:
[ ] No change [ ] Add days [ ] Deduct __ days
Submittal constitutes a representation that Contractor has read and agrees to the provisions of Section 01600.
Submitted By Contractor:
Signature
Firm
For Use by Architect:
Based on the information supplied by the Contractor, the Architect has reviewed the proposed Substitution on the basis of
design concept of the Work and conformance with information given in Contract Documents.
[ ] Accepted [ ] Accepted as Noted [ ] Rejected
[ ] Submit Additional Information:
By: Date:
Substitution Request Form SRF-2 COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER
PSA Project No. 4087.20
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project record document submittal.
3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal.
4. Submittal of warranties.
5. Final cleaning.
B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections
in Divisions 2 through 16.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion,
complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial
Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed
as substantially complete.
a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract
Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract
Sum.
b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the
value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.
2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or
settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete starmp testing of systems and instruction of the Owner's operation and
maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along
with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting.
10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes.
B.' Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with
inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the
Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction
that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.
1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is
substantially complete.
2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for fmal
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
acceptance.
1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of fmal acceptance and
final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not
previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and
completed operations where required.
2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for f'mal additional changes to the Contract
Sum.
3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or
corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state
that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be
endorsed and dated by the Architect.
4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data
as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and
assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
5.Submit consent of surety to final payment.
6.Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the
Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items
whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Architect.
1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final
acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work
that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final
acceptance.
2.If necessary, reinspection will be repeated.
!.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from
deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for
the Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation
varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of
showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference
at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed
elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.
1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
variations in separate categories of the Work.
2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract
Drawings or Shop Drawings.
3. Note related change-order numbers where applicable.
4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover
sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.
C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda.
Include with the Project Manual one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change
Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction.
1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in
comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications.
2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on
concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct
observation.
3. Note related record drawing information and Product Data.
4. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Owner's records.
D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Note related Change
Orders and markup of record drawings and Specifications.
1. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in
comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site
and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot
otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.
3. Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Architect
for the Owner's records.
E. Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet
with the Architect and the Owner's personnel at the Project Site to determine which Samples are
to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with the Owner's instructions
regarding delivery to the Owner's Sample storage area.
F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of
miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work.
Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records
and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for
continued use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records.
G. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable
size. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch (51-mm), 3-ring, vinyl-covered
binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on frotu
and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information:
1. Emergency instructions.
2. Spare parts list.
3. Copies of warranties.
4. Wiring diagrams.
5. Recommended "mm-around" cycles.
6. Inspection procedures.
7. Shop Drawings and Product Data.
8. Fixture lamping schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires
regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation
and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not
experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following
items:
1. Maintenance manuals.
2. Record documents.
3. Spare parts and materials.
4. Tools.
5. Lubricants.
6. Fuels.
7. Identification systems.
8. Control sequences.
9. Hazards.
10. Cleaning.
11. Warranties and bonds.
12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Starmp.
2. Shutdown.
3. Emergency operations.
4. Noise and vibration adjustments.
5. Safety procedures.
6. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
7. Effective energy utilization.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site
cleaning is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.'
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance
program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion.
a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-
obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged
transparent materials.
c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition,
free of stains, ~ms, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces
to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted
surfaces.
d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess
lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition.
Clean light fixtures and lamps.
e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and
other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills,
and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a
smooth, even-textured surface.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests.
D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the
Work during construction.
E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for
cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's
property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems.
Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully.
1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become
the Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the
Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special
warranties.
1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor' s period for correction of the
Work.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittals~ specifies procedures for submitting warranties.
2. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies contract closeout procedures.
3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are
specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do
not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products.
Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers,
manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
D. Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime contractor is responsible for warranties related to its own
contract.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers
for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the
Owner.
1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove
and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and
replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.
B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by
replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty
shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or
rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work
regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its
anticipated useful service life.
D. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties
and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law.
_ WARRANTIES 01740- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner
can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit
selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or
part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor
presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion.
If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for
warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of
the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect.
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner,
by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly
executed warranties to the Architect within 15 days of completion of that designated
portion of the Work.
B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor,
supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains
appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to
the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution.
C. Forms for special warranties are included at the end of this Section. Prepare a written document
utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Comractor, or by the Comractor,
subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for
approval prior to final execution.
1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
D. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile 2 copies of each required warranty properly
executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer.
Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered loose-
leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate coments, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
(115-by-280-mm) paper.
1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
the tab to idemify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product
or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone
number of the Installer.
2. Idemify each binder on the from and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project title or name, and name of the Contractor.
3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide
additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required
manual.
PART 2 - iSRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable)
END OF SECTION 01740
WARRANTIES 01740 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises
where indicated or directed.
1.4 EXISTING SERVICES
A. General: Indicated locations are approximate; determine exact locations before commencing Work.
B. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services. Notify affected
utility companies in advance and obtain approval before starting this Work.
C. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping locations
on Project Record Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CLEARING
A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required,
to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as
specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off-site disposal of stumps and roots.
1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where
such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches.
Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in
diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material.
1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying
subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before
stripping.
a. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip
lines to prevent damage to root system.
2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide
free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion.
3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil as specified for disposal of waste material.
C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, except for those indicated to
be left standing.
1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris PrOtruding through ground surface.
2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain.
3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless
further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
D. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated
SITE CLEARING 02110 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
and as necessary to facilitate new construction.
1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical
or electrical drawings and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16 Sections.
Removing abandoned underground piping or conduits interfering with construction is included
under this Section.
3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property.
B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from
Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02110
SITE CLEARING 02110 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, and landscaping.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage and moisture-control fill course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for walks and pavements.
5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
6. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.
7. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and appurtenances.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.
1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, topsoil removal, and tree
protection.
2. Division 2 Section "Soil Stabilization - Lime" for subgrade stabilization.
3. Division 2 Section "Landscape Work" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil
for lawns and planting.
4. Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for concrete encasings, cradles, and appurtenances
for utility systems.
1.3 UNIT PRICES
A. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in Original position, but not to exceed
the following:
1. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
2. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
3. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
4. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.
5. 6 inches beneath invert elevation of pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe
diameter or 42 inches wide.
B. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. ' Excavation consists of the removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the reuse or
disposal of materials removed.
B. Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately
below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
EARTHWORK 02200- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not available from
excavations.
D. Subbase Course: The layer placed between the subgrade and base course inca paving system or the layer
placed between the subgrade and surface of a pavement or walk.
E. Base Course: The layer placed between the subbase and surface pavement in a paving system.
F. Drainage Fill: Course of washed granular material supporting slab-on-grade placed to cut off upward
capillary flow of pore water.
G. Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or
dimensions without direction by the Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work
directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground
surface.
I. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services
within building lines.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according m the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for the following:
1. Each type of plastic warning tape.
2. Filter fabric.
C. Samples of the following:
1. 20-lb samples, sealed in air-tight containers, of each proposed fill and backfill soil material from
on-site or borrow sources.
2. 12-by-12-inch sample of filter fabric.
D. Test Reports: In addition to test reports required under field quality control, submit the following:
1. Laboratory analysis of each soil material proposed for fill and backfill from on-site and borrow
sources.
2. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each soil material.
3. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each stratum
tested.
E. Photographs of existing adjacent structures and site improvements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ a qualified independent geoteclmical engineering
testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified
requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division
1 Section "Project Meetings."
1. Before commencing earthwork, meet with representatives of the governing authorities, Owner,
Architect, consultants, Geotechnical Engineer, independent testing agency, and other concerned
entities. Review earthwork procedures and responsibilities including testing and inspection
- procedures and requirements. Notify participants at least 3 working days prior to convening
conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each participant.
_ 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others
except when permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility
services have been provided.
1. Provide a minimum 48-hours' notice to the Architect and receive written notice to proceed before
-- interrupting any utility.
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed.
_ Coordinate with utility companies to shutoff services if lines are active.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
-- 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved soil materials
-- are not available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM;
free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation
and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH,
-- OL, OH, and PT.
D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Subbase and Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve
and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
F. Select Fill: Uniform, homogeneous, non-expansive sandy clay or clayey sand
-- 1. Liquid Limit: Between 20 and 35.
2. Plasticity Index: Between 5 and 15.
__ G. Bedding Material: Subbase or base materials with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than
8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM
- D 448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than
5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
- I. Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and natural sand,
EARTHWORK 02200 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 50 sieve.
J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick minimum, continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion
protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 2'-6" deep.
1. Tape Colors: Provide tape colors to utilities as follows:
a. Red: Electric.
b. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
c. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
d. Blue: Water systems.
e. Green: Sewer systems.
B. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven pervious geotextile fabric of polypropylene, nylon or
polyester fibers, or a combination.
1. Provide filter fabrics that meet or exceed the listed minimum physical properties determined
according to ASTM D 4759 and the referenced standard test method in parentheses:
a. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D 4632): 100 lb.
b. Apparent Opening Size (ASTM D 4751): #100 U.S. Standard sieve.
c. Permeability (ASTM D 4491): 150 gallons per minute per .sq. ft.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective
insulating materials as necessary.
C. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing
water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
D. Tree protection is specified in the Division 2 Section "Site Clearing."
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on
prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required subgrade
elevations regardless of the character of materials and obstructions encountered.
3.4 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain
stable excavations.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to 3'-8" below finish floor elevation within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot. Extend
excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, installing
services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to f'mal
grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to
leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Appurtenances:
Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot.
Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface.
3.Excavated material may be used for grade raise fill outside the building area.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades.
3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit.
Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes
and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for
joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp objects fo avoid point loading.
1. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-duct
conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed
subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support
bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.
3. Where encountering rock or another unyielding bearing surface, carry trench excavation 6 inches
below invert elevation to receive bedding course.
3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. Proofroll entire subgrade beneath building area. When Architect determines that unforeseen
EARTHWORK 02200 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as
directed.
I. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the Contract
provisions for changes in Work.
C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction
activities, as directed by the Architect.
D. At building area, the exposed subgrade clay soils should be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, wetted to
within 3 % of optimum moisture content and compacted to at least 95 % of Standard maximum dry density
for the subgrade materisl (ASTM D-698 Method A).
3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated bottom elevation
of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean
concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position when acceptable to the Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction as directed by the Architect.
B. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation
procedures, as required by the Architect.
3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borrow
materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain
surface water. Cover to prevent wind-blown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do nbt store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.11 BACKFILL
A. Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofmg,
waterproofmg, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Testing, inspecting, and approval of underground utilities.
4. Concrete formwork removal.
5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation.
6. Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized
excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes
and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
B. Concrete baclffill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are excavated within 18 inches
of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Provide 4-inch-thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 2'-6" below surface of
roadways. After installation and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches
of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
D. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of particles larger
than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and
along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system.
E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is removed.
G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below fmisbed grade, except 6 inches below
subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.13 FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and
deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills.
1. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will
bond with existing surface.
B. When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for fill,
break up ground surface to depth required, pulverize, moisture-condition or aerate soil and recompact
to required density.
C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below.
1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material, or satisfactory excavated or borrow
soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use subbase material.
4. Under building slabs, use select fill material.
3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to
within 3 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact
to specified density.
a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material.
3.15 COMPACTION
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted
by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by
hand-operated tampers.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B.Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place backfill and
fill tmiformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following
percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557:
1.Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade
and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density.
2.Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill
material at 95 percent maximum dry density.
3.Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill
or fill material at 90 percent maximum dry density.
3.16 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with
compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface tolerances.
B.Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading Inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot
straightedge.
3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A.Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material on prepared subgrades. Place base course
material over subbases to pavements.
1. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross
sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D 4254 relative density.
2. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
3. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a
single layer.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal
layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.
B. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral
movement. Construct shoulders at least 12 inches wide of acceptable soil materials and compact
simultaneously with each subbase and base layer.
3.18 SELECT FILL
A. Under slabs-on-grade, place select fill course on prepared subgrade.
1. Compact select fill at optimum moisture content plus or minus 3 % to required grades, lines, cross
sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D 698 relative density.
2. When compacted thickness of drainage fill is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 3. When compacted thickness of drainage fill exceeds 6 inches thick place materials in equal layers,
with no layer more than 8 inches thick nor less than 3 inches thick when compacted.
_ 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or backf'fll
layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with
-- requirements.
1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D
-- 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder method), as applicable.
a. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to
ASTM D 2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to
correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. With each density calibration check,
check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 3017.
b. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration
-- checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of
material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect.
_ 2. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, perform at least one test of each soil stratum to verify
design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may
be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to the
Architect.
-- 3. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer,
perform at least one field in-place density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or
building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.
-- 4. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place
density test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests along a wall face.
5. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least one field
_ in-place density test for each 150 feet or less of trench, but no fewer than two tests.
B. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and
moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact and retest until required
.... density is obtained.
3.20 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces
become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather
conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architect; reshape and recompact
at optimum moisture content to the required density.
C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing, backfill
' with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it
off the Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02200
EARTHWORK 02200- 10
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02240 - SOIL STABILIZATION: LIME
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or indicated
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Stabilization of subgrade for pavement.
B. Fine grading of subgrade.
C. Compaction of subgrade.
D. Maintaining subgrade before paving.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Other sections of the specifications not referenced below, shall also apply to the extent required for proper
performance of this work.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D698 - Tests for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils, using 5.5 lb. Rammer and 12 inch Drop.
B. North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG): Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction, North Central Texas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIME
A. Hydrated Lime Type A (dry) - NCTCOG Item 2.5.2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Inspect rough grading for required compaction of fill and surface tolerances. Provide complete drainage of
subgrade during construction.
B. Obtain representative samples of the subgrade material and perform lime-series testing of the samples to
determine the optimum lime concentration to reduce the Plasticity Index to 15 or below and to raise pH levels
to a minimum of 12.4.
3.2 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE
A. Treat a mirtimum of top 6-inches of subgrade by mixing with amount of hydrated lime as determined by the
lime-series tests.
B. Construction methods and equipment in accordance with NCTCOG Item 4.6 for dry placing.
C. Allow subgrade to cure three (2) days after initial mixing before final mixing and compaction begins.
D. Provide gradation tests at the rate of one test every 10,000 square feet of paving area and at least one test per
day. Gradation percentages outlined in NCTCOG Item 4.6 shall be used. Any areas out of conformance shall
SOIL STABILIZATION: LIME 02240- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
have lime added and be remixed until in conformance.
E. Stabilization shall extend a minimum of (1) foot back of proposed curb.
3.3 GRADING AND COMPACTION
A. Compact top 6-inches to a minimum of 95 % ASTM D-698 density. Compact fill areas below top 6-inches
to a minimum of 92%. Moisture content shall be maintained at +0% to +3% above optimum moisture.
3.4 MAINTAINING SUBGRADE
A. Maintain in smooth compacted condition until concrete pavement is placed. Only paving equipment will be
allowed on completed subgrade. Maintain moisture content in treated subgrade by sprinlding or other
approved methods until pavement is placed.
END OF SECTION 02240
SOIL STABILIZATION: LIME 02240 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- SECTION 02282 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
-- 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
-- of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control and building extermination at substantial
completion.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
' B. Product data and application instructions.
C. Certification that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations
-- for termiticides.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for preparing substrate and application.
_ B. Engage a professional pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of governing
authorities to apply soil treatment solution.
C. Use only termiticides that bear a federal registration number of the EPA and are approved by local
-- authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
-' A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling, and grading operations are
completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations.
B. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement
-- weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Furnish written warranty, executed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that applied soil
termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity
is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused
-- by termite infestation.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Project Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and nm concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
TERMITE CONTROL 02282 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION
A. General: Use an emulsible, concentrated termiticide that dilutes with water, specially formulated to
prevent termites infestation. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a solution consisting of
one of following chemical elements.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Chloropyrifos:
a. Dursban TC, Dow Chemical Co.
2. Permathrin:
a. Dragnet FT, FMC Corp.
b. Torpedo, ICI Americas, Inc.
3. Cypermethrine:
a. Prevail FT, FMC Corp.
b. Demon, ICI Americas, Inc.
4. Fenvalerate:
a. Gold Coast Tribute, Du Pont.
5. Isofenphose:
a. Pryfon, Mobay Corp.
C. Dilute with water to concentration level recommended by manufacturer.
D. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if approved for intended application by local
authorities having jurisdiction. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be
treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and
foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by
toxicant manufacturer.
B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows:
1. Under slab-on-grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the following
application rates:
a. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per l0 linear feet to soil in critical areas under slab,
including entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition
walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior
column footers.
b. Apply 1 gallon of chemical solution per l0 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under slab and
attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical
solution to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material.
c. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet of trench for each foot of depth
from grade to footing, along outside edge of building. Dig a trench 6 to 8 inches wide
TERMITE CONTROL 02282 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 12 inches. Punch holes to top of
footing at not more than 12 inches o.c. and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical
solution with the soil as it is being replaced in the trench.
2. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 4
gallons per 10 linear feet of penetration.
C. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied.
Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction.
D. Reapply soil treatmem solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other
construction activities following application.
3.2 BUILDING EXTERMINATION
A. Exterminate building interior, perimeter, and roof one (1) week prior to occupancy.
END OF SECTION 02282
TERMITE CONTROL 02282 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
" SECTION 02380 - CAISSONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
-- 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
_ Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
-- 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes drilled, cast-in-place reinforced concrete under-reamed, belled caissons.
- B. Extent of caissons is shown on drawings, including locations, diameters of shafts, diameters of bells
where required, estimated bottom elevations, top elevations, and details of construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Concrete Materials Test Reports as proposed for use in concrete mixes.
C. Certified Caisson Report for each caisson, recording actual elevation at bottom and top, elevation
of rock (if any), final centerline location at top, variation of shaft from plumb, results of tests
performed, actual allowable bearing capacity of bottom, depth of socket (if applicable), levelness
of bottom, seepage of water, still water level (if allowed to flood), elevation of bottom and top of
any casing left in place, any unusual conditions, variation of bell dimensions (if applicable) from
-~ original design, dates of starting excavation, completion of excavation, inspection, testing, and
placement of concrete (include any delays in concreting and location of construction joints in shafts).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of American Concrete Institute ACI 336.1 "Standard
Specification for the Construction of End Bearing Drilled Piers," and as herein specified.
--' B. Where provisions of above standard conflict with building regulations in effect for this Project,
building regulations will govern, but only to establish minimum requirements.
C. Caisson Installer Qualifications: Not less than three successfully completed contracts with similar
soil conditions, shaft sizes, depths, and volumes of Work contained in this Project.
D. Owner will employ separate testing laboratory to perform field quality control tests.
E. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work.
Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities. Tests not specifically indicated to be done
at Owner's expense, including retesting of rejected materials and installed work, are Contractor's
-~ responsibility.
F. Certificates of material properties, indicating, compliance with specified requirements, may be
submitted in lieu of testing when acceptable to Architect. Certificates of compliance must be signed
by materials producer and Contractor.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions is not intended as representations or
warranties of continuity of such conditions. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be
responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Data are made
available for convenience of Contractor and are not guaranteed to represent conditions that may be
encountered.
CAISSONS 02380- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no additional
cost to Owner.
C. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before starting caisson excavation
operations. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during caisson
operations.
D. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation,
consult Architect immediately for directions as to procedure. Cooperate with Owner and utility
companies in keeping services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction
of utility owner.
E. Do not interrupt existing utilities except when permitted in writing by Owner and after acceptable
temporary utility services have been provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE AND RELATED MATERIALS
A. Concrete and related materials are specified in Division 3 Sections.
1. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33, but which have shown by test or actual
service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability, may be used when
acceptable to Architect.
2. Maximum Aggregate Size: Not larger than three-fourths of minimum clear spacing
between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars.
B. Water: Drinkable.
C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
D. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing no set-accelerating or set-retarding
compounds, chlorides, fluorides, or nitrates.
E. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
F. Reinforcing Bars and Dowels: ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
2.2 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. General: Use independent testing facility for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs and
placement methods. Testing facility shall not be same as used for field quality control testing.
B. Design mix to produce concrete for caissons with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000
psi.
C. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trail batch or field experience methods using materials and
placement methods to be employed on Project for each class of concrete required, complying with
ACI 211.1.
D. Submit written reports to Architect of proposed mix for concrete at least 15 days prior to start of
work. Do not begin concrete production until mix design has been reviewed by Architect.
E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when
characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant at
no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix
design and strength results must be accepted by Architect before using in Work.
F. Use water-reducing admixtures in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. Admixtures
to increase cement dispersion, or provide increased workability for low-slump concrete, may be
used at Contractor's option.
CAISSONS 02380 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
- G. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at
time of placing concrete. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to maintain quality control.
H. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement of not
-- less than 3 inches and not more than 5 inches.
2.3 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as herein specified.
1. Delete references for allowing additional water to be added to batch for material with
_ insufficient slump. Addition of water to batch will not be permitted.
B. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing
time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; and when air temperature is
above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
2.4 STEEL CASING
A. Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 252, Grade 2 or ASTM A 36.
B. Corrugated Steel Casings: ASTM A 444.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CAISSON EXCAVATION
-- A. General: Excavate holes for caissons to required bearing strata or elevations shown on drawings.
Excavate holes for closely spaced caissons, and those occurring in fragile or sand strata, only after
adjacent holes are filled with concrete and allowed to set.
B. Caisson design dimensions shown are minimums. The design of caissons is based on assumed strata
bearing capacity. If bearing stratum is not capable of maintaining bearing capacity assumed,
foundation system will be revised as directed by Architect. Revisions will be paid for in accordance
with Contract conditions relative to changes in Work.
C. If required, install casings as excavation proceeds so that earth walls are maintained without spilling
into shaft.
1. When assumed elevation of top of bell portion is reached, casing may be stopped, with a
smaller inner section carried down to bearing stratum. Do not extend inner section beyond
actual top of bell to maintain designed caisson shaR diameter.
D. Construction Tolerances: Locate centerline of caissons within the following tolerances:
1. Maximum permissible variation of location not more than 1/24th of shaft diameter or 3
- inches, whichever is less.
2. Shafts out of plumb not more than 1.5 percent of length nor exceeding 12.5 percent of
shaft diameter or 15 percent, whichever is less.
3. Concrete cut-off elevation, plus 1 inch to minus 3 inches.
E. If above tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction to compensate for excessive
eccentricity. Submit proposed corrective construction methods to Architect for review before
proceeding.
F. Temporary Shaft Protections: When required, provide full-length watertight steel casings of
sufficient thickness to withstand compressive, displacement, and withdrawal stresses and to maintain
_ shaft walls. Temporary casings may be left in place or may be withdrawn as concrete is placed at
Contractor' s option.
CAISSONS 02380 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
G. Obstructions: If rock, boulders, or other unforeseen obstructions are encountered which cannot be
removed by standard caisson excavation methods, and if such obstructions are not indicated by
available subsurface data, removal of such obstructions will be paid for in accordance with terms
of Contract relative to changes in Work.
H. Remove such obstructions by hand labor using air-powered tools or by other methods recognized
in construction industry.
I. The work of this Section includes demolition and removal of rock boulders, concrete, masonry, and
other subsurface obstructions which are clearly indicated by Contract Documems, or by available
subsurface exploration data, and is not considered a change in Work.
J. Dewatering: Provide and maintain pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water before
placing concrete. If excessive water is encountered and drilling operations must be halted, consult
with Architect before using alternate methods of construction.
K. Conduct water to general site mn-off ditches and disposal areas with discharge lines. Provide
ditching as required to conduct water to site drainage facilities.
L. Bells: Excavate caissons to provide shape of belled-out portions, thickness of base of bells, and
angle of slope for conical portion of bells as shown on drawings.
M. Inspection: Each caisson must be inspected and tested before placing concrete.
N. Provide and maintain facilities with equipment required for inspection and testing of excavations.
Cooperate with inspecting and testing personnel to expedite Work.
O. Notify Architect and testing facility at least 6 hours prior to time excavations will be ready for
inspection and tests.
P. Depth of Bearing Stratum: If indicated depth of shaft excavation is reached without developing
required stratum bearing capacity, immediately suspend excavation operations and inform Architect.
Architect will determine procedures to be followed.
Q. Where changes in indicated depth or dimensions are required, or additional soil borings are
required, proceed with such work when directed in writing by Architect.
R. Overexcavation: No paymem will be made for extra length, when caisson shafts are excavated to
a greater depth than required or authorized by Architect, due to overdrilling by Contractor.
Complete caisson and fill extra depth with concrete if other conditions are satisfactory.
Overexcavated shafts will be measured and paid for to original design or authorized depth.
S. Excavated Material: Remove excavated material and legally dispose off site.
3.2 REINFORCING STEEL AND DOWELS
A. Fabricate and erect reinforcing cages in shafts as one continuous unit using inner ring resteel. Place
reinforcement accurately and symmetrically about axis of hole and hold securely in position during
concrete placement.
B. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished under work of
other sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during concrete
placement.
C. Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcing, dowels, or anchor bolts from mechanical damage and
exposure to weather.
3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General: Fill caissons with concrete immediately after inspection and approval by testing
laboratory. Use protection sheets (cut out to receive concrete) over excavation openings, extending
at least 12 inches beyond edge.
CAISSONS 02380 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Place concrete continuously and in a smooth flow without segregating. Provide mechanical
vibration for consolidation of at least top 25 feet of each shaft.
-- C. Place concrete by means of bottom discharge bucket, flexible drop chute, elephant trunk hopper,
or tremie. Use chutes or tremies for placing concrete where a drop of more than 25 feet is
required, or pump concrete into place.
D. Place concrete in-the-dry unless placing under water is acceptable to Architect. If water occurs,
and it is impracticable to dewater caisson excavation, and reasonable attempts to seal off water flow
have failed, allow water level to attain its normal level and place concrete by tremie method.
_ Control placement operations to ensure that tremie is not broken during continuous placing from
bottom to top. Other methods of depositing concrete under water may be used, if acceptable to
Architect.
-- E. Maintain a sufficient head of concrete to prevent reduction in diameter of caisson shaft by earth
pressure and to prevent extraneous material from mixing with fresh concrete. Coordinate
withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement operations to maintain a head of concrete
approximately 5 feet above casing bottom.
F. Stop concrete placement at cut-off elevation shown, screed level, and apply a scoured, rough finish.
Where cut-off elevation is above ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft
to required elevation.
G. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which
could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures in compliance with ACI 306 and as
_ herein specified.
H. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C) uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg
-. F (10 deg C), and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.
I. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
J. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators, unless accepted by Architect.
-- K. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would' seriously impair quality and
strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.
_ L. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg
F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control concrete
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated into total amount of mixing water.
Cooling concrete mixture by use of liquid nitrogen may be used if acceptable to Architect.
M. Place concrete immediately upon delivery. Keep exposed concrete surfaces and formed shaft
extensions moist by fog sprays, wet burlap, or other effective means.
N. Do not use retarding admixtures without acceptance of Architect.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Sample and test concrete for quality control during
placement as follows:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with
'-' ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge, and one for
each set of compressive strength test specimens.
_ 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each set of compressive strength
test specimens.
CAISSONS 02380 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
4. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.
5. Concrete Temperature: Test when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, and
when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and each time a set of compression test specimens
made.
6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set of four cylinders per drilled pier but
not more than one set per truck. One specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at
28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
a. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
B. Report test results, in writing to Architect and Contractor on same day tests are made. Include in
reports Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of contractor,
name of concrete supplier and truck number, name of concrete testing service, concrete type,
location of caisson, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials,
compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day test and 28-day test.
C. Additional Concrete Tests: Testing service may take core samples of in-place concrete when test
results indicate such that there is reasonable doubt that specified concrete strengths have not been
attained.
D. Inspection and Tests for Caissons: Soil testing facility shall perform and report specified tests and
additional tests which may be required. Conduct tests and provide reports as soon as possible so
as not to delay concreting operations for acceptable excavations.
E. Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of caissons as shown on drawings are estimated
from available soil data. Actual elevations and caisson lengths, and bearing capacities will be
determined by soil testing facility from conditions found in excavations. Final evaluations and
acceptance of data will be determined by Architect.
F. Take undisturbed rock core samples from selected caisson bottoms. Conduct compression test for
each sample and report results and evaluations to Architect.
3.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Basis of Bids: Bids shall be based on number of caissons, design length from top elevation to
bottom of shaft (extended through the bell, if applicable), and diameter of shaft and bell, as shown
on drawings.
B. Basis for Payment: Payment for caissons will be made on actual net volume of caissons in place
and accepted. The actual length, shaft diameter, and bell diameter (if applicable) may vary to
coincide with elevations where satisfactory bearing strata are encountered, and with actual bearing
value of bearing strata determined by testing services, and with stability and characteristics of soil
strata. Adjustments will be made on net variation of total quantities, based on design dimensions
for shafts and bells.
C. There will be no additional compensation for excavation, concrete fill, reinforcing, casings, or other
costs due to unauthorized overexcavating of shafts or bells. No payment will be made for rejected
caissons.
D. Prices quoted include full compensation for labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals
required for excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete, and other
items for complete installation.
E. Unit Prices: Unit prices for the following items, as set forth in Contract conditions, will apply in
event additions to or deductions from Work are required and authorized by written order from
Architect to Contractor.
1. Soil excavation (per cu. yd).
CAISSONS 02380 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-~ 2. Rock excavation (per cu. yd).
3. Permanem steel casings, installed (per lineal ft).
4. Reinforcing steel and dowels, installed (per lb).
5. Concrete (per cu. yd).
END OF SECTION 02380
_ CAISSONS 02380 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior portland cement concrete paving for the following:
1. Roadways.
2. Parking lots.
3. Curbs and gutters.
4. Walkways.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading and subbase course.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.
3. Division 7 Section "Paving Joint Sealants" for joint fillers and sealants within concrete
paving and at joints with adjacent construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by
Architect.
C. Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics of
materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
D. Laboratory test reports for evaluation of concrete materials and mix design tests.
E. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Material
certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each material item
complies with or exceeds requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that
chloride content complies with requirements.
F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Concrete Standards: Comply with provisions of the following standards, except where more
stringent requirements are indicated.
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings."
2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
B. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying
with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform materials
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
D. Field-Constructed Mockup: Cast mockup of size indicated or as required to demonstrate typical ~
joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship.
1. When Architect determines that mockup does not meet requirements, demolish and remove
it from the site and cast another until the mockup is accepted. M
2. Keep accepted mockup undisturbed during construction as a standard for judging
completed paving. Undamaged mockup may be incorporated into the Work.
3. Demolish accepted mockup and remove from site when directed by Architect.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" and the following:
1. Before installing portland cement concrete paving, meet with representatives of authorities --
having jurisdiction, Owner, Architect, consultants, independent testing agency, and other
concerned entities to review requirements. Notify participants at least 3 working days
before conference. ~.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other acceptable panel-type materials
to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a 100-foot or less radius.
B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form-release agent with a maximum of 350
g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete
surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775 with ASTM A 615, Grade 60 deformed steel bars.
C. Plain, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.
D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185.
1. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497.
F. Fabricated Bar Mats: Welded or clip-assembled steel bar mats, ASTM A 184. Use ASTM A 615,
Grade 60 steel bars, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends
square and free of burrs.
H. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775 with ASTM A 615, Grade 60 plain steel bars.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
I. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt
joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations,
and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.
J. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, dowel bar supports and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Use wire bar-
type supports complying with CRSI specifications.
1. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support
chair legs.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
I. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4, and as follows. Provide aggregates from a
single source.
1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Do not use £me or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling.
3. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce
concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used
when acceptable to Architect.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Fiber Reinforcement: Synthetic fibers engineered and designed for secondary reinforcement of
concrete slabs, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
required admixtures.
C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
D. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type O.
E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd.,
complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.
1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. White burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class
A or B, wax free.
__ PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.
1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.
E. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab
surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Boiled Linseed Oil Mixture: Combination of boiled linseed oil and mineral spirits, complying with
AASHTO M-233.
B. Traffic Paint: Alkyd-resin ready-mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type S.
1. Color: White
Red (Fire Lane).
C. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery as the abrasive
aggregate for a nonslip f'mish, with emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum
oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded, packaged,
rustproof, nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.
D. Bonding Agent: Acrylic or styrene butadiene.
E. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for dry or damp surfaces.
Provide material type, grade, and class to suit requirements.
2.7 CONCRETE MIX
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete by either laboratory trial
batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use a
qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
1. Do not use the Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing
agency.
2. Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent of cement content by weight.
B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and AC1301 to provide normal-weight concrete with the
following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28-Day): as shown on plans.
2. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50.
3. Slump Limit at Point of Placement: 3 inches.
a. Slump limit for concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture
(superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to site-verified
2-to-3-inch slump concrete.
C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content as follows with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent:
1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch maximum aggregate.
2. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 1-inch maximum aggregate.
3. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 3/4-inch maximum aggregate.
4. Air Content: 7.0 percent for 1/2-inch maximum aggregate.
D. Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate of 1.5 lb per cu. yd., unless manufacturer recommends
otherwise.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when
characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from I-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above
90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional
compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to
receive paving.
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to required
lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms
can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances:
1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing
Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either
direction.
E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free
of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as required before
placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats.
.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct contraction, construction, and isolation joints tree to line with faces
perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the
centerline, unless indicated otherwise.
1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints,
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
unless indicated otherwise.
B. Contraction Joints: Provide weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
shown on Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete
thickness, as follows:
1. Tooled Joints: Form contraction joints in fresh concrete by grooving and f'mishing each
edge of joint with a radiused jointer tool.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inchowide joints into hardened concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
development of random contraction cracks.
3. Inserts: Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard
strips into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with paving surface. Radius each
joint edge with ajointer tool. Carefully remove strips or caps of two-piece assemblies after
concrete has hardened. Clean groove of loose debris.
C. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations
where paving operations are stopped for more than I/2 hour, unless paving terminates at isolation
joints.
1. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms
with keys, unless indicated otherwise. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless indicated otherwise. Do not
continue reinforcement through sides of strip paving unless indicated.
3. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated.
4. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete.
D. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch
basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch
below f'mished surface where joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with
finished concrete surface when no joint sealant is required.
3.Fumish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible.
Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.
4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both
sides of joint.
E. Installation of joint fillers and sealants is specified in Division 7 Section "Paving Joint Sealants."
F. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one
half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel,
and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcing before placing concrete. Do not
place concrete on surfaces that are frozen.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not
place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and
alignment.
D. Comply with requirements and with ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing
concrete.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or
drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
1. When concrete placing is interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint.
F. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
G. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding,
or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete complying with ACI 309R.
-- 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an intemal
vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use
only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to
prevent dislocating reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.
H. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to form a smooth
surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
concrete surfaces prior to beginning f'mishing operations.
I. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the
required depth below f'mish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in
_ final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.
1. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than
15 minutes without being covered by top layer or use bonding agent if acceptable to
-- Architect.
J. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement,
submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce
~ curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed
concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete.
K. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for paving, submit revised mix
design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce paving to required
thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed paving.
_ 1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of
paver machine during operations.
L. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete
-- until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.
M. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or
--~ low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C),
~_. Uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C)
at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
N. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified when hot
-~ weather conditions exist.
I. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to
below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of
mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel
temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding
in concrete.
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has
stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-
floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a
tolerance of 1/4 inch in I0 feet as determined by a 10-foot-long straightedge placed anywhere on
the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately
to a uniform granular texture.
1.Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across concrete, perpendicular to line
of traffic, to provide a uniform gritty texture f'mish.
2.Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across concrete
surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform f'me line texture f'mish.
3.Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse f'mish by striating surface
1/16 inch to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.
B. Final Tooling: Tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints formed in fresh concrete with a
jointing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface
finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
1. Radius: 3/8 inch.
3.7 SPECIAL FINISHES
A. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Apply nonslip aggregate finish to paving surfaces indicated.
1. After completing float finish, uniformly spread 25 lb of dampened nonslip aggregate per
100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not
force below surface.
2.After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone, and water
to expose nonslip aggregate.
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with the recommendations ofAC1306R for cold weather protection and ACI
305R for hot weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss
before and during f'mishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to
manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing
compound, or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with a 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least
12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or
-- tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3
hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during
-- curing period.
E. Boiled Linseed Oil Treatment: Apply boiled linseed oil mixture no sooner than 28 days after
placement to clean dry concrete surfaces free of oil, dirt, or other foreign material. Apply in 2
-- sprayed applications at rate of 40 sq. yd. per gallon for the first application and 60 sq. yd. per gallon
for the second application. Allow complete drying between applications.
_. 3.9 i TRAFFIC PAINT
A. Traffic Paint: Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to
produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a 15-mil
-- minimum wet fill thickness.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
-- A. The Owner will employ a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests,
and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may
include the following:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C 94.
_ a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-
strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete.
Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes.
b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-
strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-
entrained concrete.
c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one
-- test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for
each compressive-strength test, unless directed otherwise. Mold and store
__ cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test
specimens are required.
e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each
concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each
--- additional 50 cu. yd. Test one specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 28 days,
and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required.
2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of
--~ concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch
if fewer than five are used.
3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., Architect may
waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
4. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for
protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
_ 5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
- PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no
individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500
psi.
B. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within
24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and
class, location of concrete batch in paving, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix
proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day and 28-
day tests.
C. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
D. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete when test results
indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as
directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by
cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet the
requirements of this Section.
B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or
defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete
bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement.
When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface
stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep
concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion
inspections.
END OF SECTION 02520
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 10
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02665 - WATER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water systems fire protection service outside the building.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Sections for water distribution systems inside building.
C. Utility-furnished products incluse water meters that will be furnished to the site and ready for installation.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure Ratings: Except where otherwise indicated, the following are minimum
pressure requirements for water system piping.
1. Underground Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
2. Underground Piping, Downstream of Fire Department Connections: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data, including pressure rating, rated capacity, and settings of selected models for the following:
1. Backflow preventers.
2. Valves.
3. Fire hydrants.
C. Record drawings at Project closeout of installed water system piping and products according to Division 1
Section "Project Closeout."
D. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water. Include tapping of water main.q and backflow
prevention.
B. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire protection systems. Include materials,
hose threads, installation, and testing.
C. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable water piping and plumbing systems.
Include materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, for shipping as follows:
WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - I
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld ends.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B. Storage: Use the following precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, during storage:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient
dew point temperature. Support valves off ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when
outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants whose size requires handling by crane or lift.
Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging
points.
D. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
E. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor when storing inside.
F. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
G. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Comact
utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
B.Verify that water system piping may be installed in compliance with original design and referenced
standards.
C. Site Information: Reports on subsurface condition investigations made during the design of the Project
are available for informational purposes only; data in reports are not intended as representations or
warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions (between soil borings). Owner assumes no
responsibility for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.
B. Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of building fire
protection systems piping.
C. Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of building water
distribution systems piping.
D. Coordinate with other utility work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
A.Refer to Part 3 Article "Piping Applications" for identification of systems where pipe and tube materials
specified below are used.
B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: AWWA C900; Classes 150 and 200; with bell end and elastomeric
gasket, with plain end for cast-iron or ductile-iron fittings, or with plain end for PVC elastomeric gasket
fittings.
WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pvc cto only."
2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Refer to Part 3 Article "Piping Applications" for identification of systems where pipe and tube fitting
materials specified below are used.
B. Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Pipe Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron, 250-psig (1725 kPa)
minimum pressure rating; or AWWA C 153, ductile-iron compact fittings, 350-psig (2400 kPa) pressure
rating.
1. Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar.
2. Gaskets: AWWA C 111, rubber.
C. Ductile-Iron Pipe, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47 malleable-iron or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron,
AWWA-pipe-size, grooved-end fittings having cement lining or Food and Drug Administration
(FDA)-approved interior coating, designed to accept AWWA C606 couplings, for AWWA-size
grooved-end piping joints.
D. Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Flanged Fittings: AWWA Cll0, 250-psig (1725 kPa) minimum pressure
rating, with AWWA C 104 cement-mortar lining.
E. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and
mechanical-joint ends conforming to AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Units have 2 gasketed ball-joint
sections and 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for 250-psig (1725 kPa) minimum working
pressure and with FDA-approved epoxy interior coating, for offset and expansion indicated.
F. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections, gaskets,
and restrained-joint ends conforming to AWWA Cll0 or AWWA C153. Units rated for 250-psig
(1725 kPa) minimum working pressure, and with cement lining or FDA-approved epoxy interior coating,
for up to 20 degrees (0.34 rad) deflection.
G. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: 3-piece assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and
restrained-type, ductile-iron bell-and-spigot end sections conforming to AWWA C 110 or AWWA C 153.
Units rated for 250-psig (1725 kPa) minimum working pressure, and with cement lining or
FDA-approved epoxy interior coating, for expansion indicated.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 Article "Piping Applications" for identification of systems where joining materials
specified below are used.
B. Ductile-Iron Pipe and Ductile-Iron or Cast-Iron Fittings: The following materials apply:
1. Push-On Joints: AWWA C111 rubber gaskets and lubricant.
2. Mechanical Joints: AWWA C 111 ductile-iron or gray-iron glands, high-strength steel bolts and
nuts, and rubber gaskets.
3. Flanged Joints: AWWA Cl15 ductile-iron or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and
high-strength steel bolts and nuts.
a. Gaskets: Rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick except where other thickness is
indicated; and full-face or ring type except where other type is indicated.
b. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is
indicated.
2.4 VALVES
A. Nonrising Stem Gate Valves 3 Inches (80 mm) and Larger: AWWA C500, cast-iron double disc, bronze
WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
disc and seat rings, bronze stem, cast-iron or ductile-iron body and bonnet, stem nut, 200-psig (1380 k_Pa)
working pressure, mechanical joint ends.
B. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron box having top section and cover with lettering "WATER," bottom section with
base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches (124 mm) in diameter, and adjustable
cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve.
1. Provide a steel tee-handle operating wrench with each valve box. Wrench shall have tee handle
with one pointed end, stem of length to operate valve, and socket-fitting valve-operating nut.
C. Tapping Sleeve and Tapping Valve: Complete assembly, including tapping sleeve, tapping valve, and
bolts and nuts. Use sleeve and valve compatible with tapping machine.
1. Tapping Sleeve: Cast-iron or ductile-iron 2-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch
connection. Sleeve may have mechanical joint ends with rubber gaskets or sealing rings in sleeve
body. Use sleeve that mates with size and type pipe material being tapped. Outlet flange shall
be size required for branch connection.
2.5 FIRE HYDRANTS
A. General: Cast-iron body, compression-type valve, opening against pressure and closing with pressure,
6-inch (150 mm) mechanical joint inlet, 150-psig (1035 kPa) working pressure.
B. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. Include cast-iron
caps with steel chains.
C. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) point to flat.
D. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to the left, or counterclockwise.
E. Finish: As required by City.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Extend water system piping and connect to water supply source and building water distribution and fire
protection systems at outside face of the building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.
1. Terminate water system piping at building wall until building water systems are installed.
Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections
to building water systems when those systems are installed.
B. Water distribution systems and fire protection systems are specified in Division 15 Sections. Sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
C. Install restrained joints for buried piping within 5 feet (1.5 m) of building. Use restrained-joint pipe and
fittings, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fittings products listed below. Use
pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications. Piping in pits and inside
building may be joined with flanges or couplings, instead of joints indicated, for grooved-end
AWWA-size piping.
WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods according to following applications.
1. 4 Inches (i00 mm) to 8 Inches (200 mm): AWWA C900, Class 150 polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic pipe, AWWA Cll0 or AWWA C153, Class 150 minimum, ductile-iron or gray-iron
fittings, and mechanical or push-on joints.
3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following
requirements apply:
1. Buried Valves 3 Inches (80 mm) and Larger: AWWA, gate valves, nourising stem, with valve
box.
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ductile-Iron Piping Gasketed Joints: Construct joints according to AWWA C600.
3.6 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated except where
deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install piping at indicated slope.
C. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
D. Install piping free of sags and bends.
E. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
G. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below.
1. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.
2. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals.
3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Water Main Connection: Arrange for tap in water main, of size and in location indicated, from water
utility.
B. Water Main Connection: Tap water main with size and in location as indicated according to requirements
of water utility.
1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve.
3. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with AWWA C600. Install valve with stem
pointing up and with cast-iron valve box.
4. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove tapping
machine and connect water service piping.
C. Comply with requirements of NFPA 24 for materials and installation.
D. Install ductile-iron pipe and ductile-iron and cast-iron fittings according to AWWA C600.
WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for 3-inch (80 mm) and larger buried installation.
Use threaded- and flanged-end valves for installation in pits and inside building. Use nonrising stem
UL/FM gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use bronze corporation stops and valves, with
ends compatible with piping, for 2-inch (50 mm) and smaller installation.
B. AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried valves with stem pointing up
and with cast-iron valve box.
3.9 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION
A. AWWA-Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17. Install with gate valve and provision for
drainage as indicated.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened
sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only
potable water.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours.
1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350 kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments.
Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure
and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100
joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within above
limits.
3. I 1 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:
1.Purge new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered,
extended, or repaired prior to use.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or, if method
is not prescribed by that authority, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or as described
below:
a. Comply with NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable
water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet.
b. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per
million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) system or part thereof and allow to stand for
24 hours.
c. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and reffil with water/chlorine solution
containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
d. Following allowed standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does
not remain in water coming from system.
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authority having jurisdiction, Repeat procedure
if biological examination made by authority shows evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
END OF SECTION 02665
WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02685 - GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes natural gas distribution systems piping, specialties, and accessories outside the
building.
B. Related Sections: The following Section contains requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Natural Gas Piping Systems" for natural gas piping inside building.
C. Owner-Furnished Products: Gas meters will be furnished to the site ready for installation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this Section are nominal pipe size (NPS) specified in inches. SI (metric) pipe sizes are
indicated in millimeters (mm) in parentheses.
B. Gas Main or Distribution Main: Piping to convey gas from gas source to individual gas services or other
gas mains.
C. Gas Service: Pipe from gas main or other source to building being served. Piping includes gas service
piping, gas valve, service pressure regulator, meter bar or meter support, and gas meter.
D. Gas Piping System: Pipe inside building that conveys gas from gas service to points of use.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure Ratings: Except where otherwise indicated, the following are minimum
pressure requirements for natural gas distribution systems piping.
1. Gas Main: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
2. Gas Service: 60 psig (415 kPa).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data including pressure rating in psig (kPa), rated capacity in cu. ft./hour (mL/s), and settings
of selected models for the following:
1. Gas valves.
2. Piping specialties.
3. Identification materials and devices.
GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02685 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Coordination drawings showing pipe sizes, and valves, gas meters, and specialties. Include details of
underground structures and piping. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from natural gas
piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures.
D. Record drawings at Project closeout of installed water system piping and products according to Division 1
Section "Project Closeout."
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under
"Quality Assurance" Article of this Section.
F. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.
G. Maintenance data to include in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1 Section
"Project Closeout.' Include data for the following:
1. Gas pressure regulators.
2. Specialty valves.
H. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of utility supplying natural gas. Include tapping of gas mains.
B. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for natural gas piping systems. Include
materials, installation, and testing.
C. Comply with NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code" for gas piping materials and components; installations;
and inspection, testing, and purging.
D. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical connections between wiring and
electrically operated control devices.
E. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marlcing on equipment made to specified standards.
F. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
G.Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved
and that certification is current.
H. Product Options: Gas distribution systems specialties, valves, and accessories are based on specific
types, manufacturers, and models indicated. Components having equal performance characteristics by
other manufacturers may be considered, provided that deviations in dimensions, operation, and other
characteristics do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The
burden of proof of equality of products is on the Contractor. Refer to Division I Section "Product
Substitutions."
GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02685 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
'- 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas piping.
-- Handle liquids cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify gas supplier. Handle flammable liquids
used by Installer with proper precautions. Do not leave on the premises overnight.
B. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
I. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld ends.
-- 3. Set valves in the best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
C. Storage: Use the following precautions for valves during storage:
1. Do not remove end protectors, unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors and maintain a temperature higher than
ambient dew point temperature. Support valves off the ground or pavement in watertight
enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.
D. Handling: Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid
'~- damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
E. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
_ handling to prevent damage and entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
F. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor when stored inside.
G. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
-- H. Store plastic pipes and valves protected from direct sunlight. Support pipes to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact
utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
B. Verify that natural gas distribution systems piping may be installed in compliance with original design
and referenced standards.
C. Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during design of Project. Reports of these
investigations are available for informational purposes only; data in reports are not intended as
representations or warranties of accuracy continuity of conditions (between soil borings). Owner assumes
no responsibility of interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information.
D. Approximate values of natural gas that will be supplied for these systems are as follows:
1. Heating Value: 1000 Btu/cu. ft. (37.3 MJ/cu. m).
2. Specific Gravity: 0.6.
_ 3. Gas Distribution Line Pressure: 40 psig (275 kPa) to 75 psig (520 kPa).
4. Gas Service Line Pressure: 15 psig (100 kPa) to 20 psig (140 kPa).
GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02685 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate connection to gas main with utility company.
B. Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of building natural gas
piping systems.
C. Coordinate with other utility work.
D. Notification of Interruption of Service: Notify each affected user when gas supply will be turned off.
E. Work Interruptions: Leave natural gas distribution systems in a safe condition when interruptions in work
occur while alterations or repairs are being made to existing gas piping systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Gas Valves, 2 Inches (50 mm) and Smaller:
a. Homestead by Olson Technologies, Inc.
b. Lancaster by National Meter Pans, Inc.
c. Lunkenheimer Co.
d. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
e. Milliken Valve Co., Inc.
f. Mueller Co., Grinnell Co.
g. Mueller Steam Specialty Div., Core Industries, Inc.
h. Nordstrum Valves, Inc.
i. Resun by J.M. Huber Corp., Equipment Div.
j. Rockford-Eclipse Div., Eclipse, Inc.
2. Gas Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (65 mm) and Larger Gas Valves:
a. Homestead by Olson Technologies, Inc.
b. Milliken Valve Co., Inc.
c. Mueller Steam Specialty Div., Core Industries, Inc.
d. Nordstrum Valves, Inc.
e. Resun by J.M. Huber Corp., Equipment Div.
f. Xomox Corp.
3. Plastic Gas Valves:
a. Kerotest Manufacturing Corp.
b. Perfection Corp., Gas Products Div.
4. Earthquake-Actuated Automatic Gas Shutoff Valves:
a. Koso by Pacific Seismic Products, Inc.
b. Pacific Seismic Products, Inc.
c. Quake Defense, Inc.
d. Quake Master, Inc.
GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02685 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 5. Solenoid Valves:
a. Atkomatic Valve Co., Inc.
_ b. Automatic Switch Co.
c. ITT General Controls, ITT Technology Corp.
d. Lexair, Inc.
e. Magnatrol Valve Corp.
f. Skinner Valve Div., Honeywell, Inc.
2.2 PIPES
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for pipe materials required for each system.
_ B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E, Electric-Resistance Welded or Type S, Seamless; Grade B;
Schedule 40; black.
C. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2513, polyethylene (PE), DR 11 or DR 11.5.
2.3 PIPE FITTINGS
-- A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for pipe-fitting materials required for each system.
B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threads conforming
to ASME B1.20.1.
C. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, black malleable iron; female pattern; brass-to-iron seat; ground joint.
-~ D. Cast-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250.
E. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought-steel buttwelding type; and ASME B16.11, forged steel.
F. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
G. Plastic Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2513, polyethylene, butt-fusion type; and ASTM D 2683, polyethylene,
socket-fusion type.
H. Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
_ A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for joining materials required for each system.
B. Welding-Joint Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe.
C. Threaded-Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
- D. Steel-Pipe, Flanged-Joint Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.
E. Steel-Pipe, Flanged-Joint Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is
indicated.
F. Plastic-Pipe, Fusion-Joint Procedure: According to plastic pipe and valve manufacturers' written
instructions.
GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02685 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
G. Plastic-Pipe, Flanged-Joint Gasket Material, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer for natural gas service, except where other type or material is indicated.
2.5 GAS VALVES
A. Manual Valves: Conform to standards listed, or where appropriate, valves according to ANSI Z21.15
and ANSI Z21.15a are acceptable.
B. Gas Valves, 2 Inches (50 mm) and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 150 psig (1035 kPa) WOG, bronze body,
bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type, and threaded ends.
1. Option: Include locking (tamperproof) feature.
C. Gas Valves, 2 Inches (50 mm) and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 125 psig (1035 kPa) WOG, cast-iron body,
bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type, and threaded ends.
1. Option: Include (tamperproof) locking feature.
D. Gas Valves, 2 Inches (50 mm) and Smaller: 125 psig (1035 kPa) WOG minimum, equivalent to
ASME B16.33, lubricated, straightaway pattern, cast-iron or ductile-iron body. Include tapered plug,
O-ring seals, square or flat head, and threaded ends.
1. Option: Include locking (tamperproof) device feature.
E. Gas Valves, 2 Inches (50 mm) and Smaller: 125 psig (1035 kPa) WOG minimum, equivalent to
ASME B16.33, nonlubricated plug type with PTFE lining or sleeve, straightaway pattern, cast-iron body,
square or flat head, and threaded ends.
1. Option: Include (tamperproof) locking device feature.
F. Gas Valves, 2-I/2 Inches (65 mm) and Larger: MSS SP-78, Class 125 or 175 WOG, lubricated plug
type, semisteel body, wrench operated, and flanged ends.
1. Option: Include (tamperproof) locking device feature.
G. Gas Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (65 mm) and Larger: MSS SP-78, Class 125 or 175 WOG, nonlubricated plug
type with PTFE lining or sleeve, semisteel body, wrench operated, and flanged ends.
1. Option: Include (tamperproof) locking device feature.
H. Plastic Gas Valves: ASME B16.40, polyethylene (PE), SDR 11.
I. Valves for connection to existing gas mains include fittings that are compatible to the existing main and
new branches. Pressure rating is 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum.
J. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron 2-section box. Top section includes cover with "GAS" lettering. Bottom section
includes base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter. Valve
box includes adjustable cast-iron extension of length required for depth to bury valve.
1. Furnish 1 steel operating wrench with each valve box. Include tee-handle with 1 pointed end,
stem of length required to operate valve, and socket fitting valve-operating nut.
2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Automatic Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.21 or ANSI Z21.21a for operation by appliance automatic shutoff
GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02685 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
device; 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller with threaded ends, and 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and larger with
flanged ends.
1. Operation: Mechanical.
2. Operation: Electrical.
B. Earthquake, Automatic Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.70, mechanical operation, with threaded ends for 2
inches (50 mm) and smaller and flanged ends for 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and larger.
C. Solenoid Valves: Bronze, aluminum, or cast-iron body; 120 volts a.c., 60 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty
molded coil; UL labeled and FM approved. Include ISC 6, NEMA 4 coil enclosure; and electrically
opened and electrically closed, dual coils; valve position is normally closed; with threaded ends for 2
inches (50 mm) and smaller and flanged ends for 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and larger.
2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined metal piping to prevent
galvanic action and stop corrosion.
1. Description: Combination of copper alloy to ferrous or ferrous to ferrous; threaded and weld-neck
end types and matching piping system materials.
2.Insulating Material: Suitable for natural gas at system operating pressure and temperature.
3. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig (1725kPa) minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C) temperature.
4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150-psig (1035kPa)
minimum pressure to suit system pressures.
5. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring
type. Include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150-psig (1035kPa)
minimum working pressure.
B. Service Line Risers: Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe with coated (annodeless) steel pipe casing on riser
section. Include inlet for heat-fusion connection to PE service pipe and outlet for connection to gas valve.
C. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24 or ANSI Z21.24a.
D. Strainers: Y pattern, full size of connecting piping. Include Type 304 stainless-steel screens with
3/64-inch (1.2mm) perforations except where other screens are indicated.
1. Pressure Rating: 125-psig (860kPa) minimum steam or 175-psig (1200kPa) WOG working
pressure except where otherwise indicated.
2. Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.
3. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches (65 mm) and Larger: Cast-iron body, with flanged ends.
4. Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown and pipe plug.
2.8 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, polyethylene coating for corrosive
atmospheres. Coating properties include the following:
1. Applied to pipe and fittings treated with a compatible primer prior to tape application.
2. Overall Thickness: 20 mils (0.51 mm).
3. Adhesive: Synthetic.
GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02685 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
4. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: 0.10-gallon maximum per 24 hours per 100 sq. in. (5.9 L
maximum per 24 hours per sq. m).
5. Water Absorption: 0.02 percent maximum.
B. Field-Applied Coating: ASTM D 4397, polyethylene tape in number of layers and procedure required
to provide properties equivalent to factory-applied coating above.
2.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped and permanently
fastened to equipment.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power
characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
B. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate
engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white (letter color) melamine
subcore, except when other colors are indicated.
1. Fabricate in sizes required for message.
2. Engraved with engraver's standard letter style in sizes and with wording to match equipment
identification.
3. Punch for mechanical fastening.
4. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), for units up to 20 square inches (0.25 sq. m) or 8 inches
(200 mm) long; 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for larger units.
5. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.
C. Metallic-Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6
inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (.01 mm) thick, solid yellow color with continuously printed caption in
black letters "CAUTION - GAS LINE BURIED BELOW."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation, trenching, and backf'flling is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same or higher than
system's pressure rating may be used in the following aboveground applications except where specified
otherwise.
B. Underground Gas Distribution and Service Piping: Use plastic pipe, plastic pipe fittings, and fusion
joints.
C. Underground Containment Conduits: Use steel pipe, butt-welding-type fittings, and welded joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Use gas valves of sizes indicated for gas service piping, meters, mains, and where indicated.
B. Use plastic gas valves on plastic gas distribution piping. Install on buried piping with valve box.
GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02685 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping gas mains for connections to existing gas mains.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Use materials suitable for natural gas service.
B. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut threads full
and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter.
Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends and proximity of internal seat or wall
to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
2. Apply tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
3. Align threads at point of assembly.
4. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded.
5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are corroded or damaged.
Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
C. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12 "Recommended Practices and Procedures for
Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe" using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality
Assurance" Article.
D. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and
thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing
bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.
E. Plastic Pipe and Fitting Heat-Fusion Joints: Prepare pipe and fittings and join with heat-fusion equipment
according to pipe manufacturer's printed instructions.
i. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Butt joining.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket-Type Fittings: Socket joining.
F. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below.
1. Install unions, in piping 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment having a 2-inch (50mm) or smaller threaded pipe
connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at f'mal
connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.
3. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
4. Install dielectric fittings downstream of gas meters. Use the following type:
a. Ferrous to Ferrous Type: When connected to steel gas system piping downstream of
meter.
b. Ferrous to Copper-Alloy Type: When connected to copper gas system piping downstream
of meter.
3.5 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Install buried gas distribution system piping with a 3-foot (900mm) minimum cover. Include underground
warning tape.
B. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including gas meter
outlets. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where
GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02685 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
condensate would be subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using a tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use
minimum length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long and same size
as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor to remove plug or cap.
C. Install unions in pipes 2 inches (50 nun) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
D. Install dielectric fittings (unions and flanges) with 1 ferrous and 1 brass or bronze end connection
separated by insulating material where piping of dissimilar metals are joined.
E. Install dielectric fittings (unions and flanges) with 2 ferrous end connections separated by insulating
material at outlet from gas meter, and where indicated, for ferrous piping.
F. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch (65mm) and larger connections.
G. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, gas pressure regulator, solenoid valve, and
where indicated.
H. Terminate vent piping with turned-down reducing elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens
in large end.
I. Install containment conduits for buried gas piping where indicated. Vent conduits to atmosphere.
Terminate vents with turned-down reducing elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large
ends. Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal tar epoxy-polyamide paint according to
SSPC Paint 16.
J. Install underground, plastic, gas distribution piping according to ASTM D 2774.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves where indicated and on each branch connection to existing gas main. Install buried valves
with valve boxes.
B. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with metal tag attached
with metal chain indicating piping systems supplied.
C. Install specialty valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Extend and connect natural gas distribution piping to gas source and to the building. The building's
natural gas systems are specified in Division 15 Section "Natural Gas Piping Systems."
1. Terminate gas distribution system piping at building wall until building's natural gas piping
systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges, as required for piping
material. Make connections to building's gas systems when those systems are installed ....
3.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each gas meter, gas
pressure regulator, and specialty-type valve.
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch- (6.4mm) high lettering for name of unit where viewing
GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02685 - 10
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- distance is less than 2 feet (600 mm), 1/2-inch- (12.8 mm) high lettering for distances up to 6 feet
(1.8 m), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering
2/3 to 3/4 the size of principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide text to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational
requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper
operations, in addition to name of identified umt.
B. Install continuous, plastic, underground warning tape during back-filling of trench for underground gas
piping. Locate 6 inches (150 mm) to 8 inches (200 mm) below finished grade, directly over piping.
3.9 PAINTING AND FINISHING
_ A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting requirements.
1. Use materials and procedures specified in "Exterior Paint Schedule" Article, "Ferrous Metal"
Paragraph, and "Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel" Subparagraph. Color is gray except where indicated
-- otherwise.
B. Paint exposed metal pipe, fittings, valves, and supports.
C. Paint exposed metal meters, regulators, specialties, accessories, and supports, except units with
factory-applied paint or protective coating. Restore damaged f'mish to original condition.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems according to NFPA 54, Part 4 "Gas Piping Inspection,
- Testing, and Purging" and local gas utility company requirements.
B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained.
C. Report test results promptly in writing to the Architect and the authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of gas meters, regulators, valves, and specialties.
E. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.
-- F. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices.
- END OF SECTION 02685
GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02685 - 11
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02700 - SEWERAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sewerage and drainage systems outside the building. Systems include the following:
1. Sanitary sewerage.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.
1. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for foundation drain connecting to storm drainage
system.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete structures.
3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Piping" for building drains.
4. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Systems" for building drains.
5. Division 15 Section "Laboratory Systems" for building chemical-waste and containment-conduit piping.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Drainage Piping: System of sewer pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of storm drainage.
B. Sewerage Piping: System of sewer pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of sanitary sewage.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for the following:
1. Plastic, channel drainage systems.
2. Backwater valves, cleanouts, and drains.
3. Storm-water disposal systems.
C. Shop Drawings for precast concrete manholes and other structures. Include frames, covers, and grates.
D. Inspection and test reports specified in the "Field Quality Control" Article.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Environmental Agency Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage and storm
drainage systems.
B. Utility Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage and storm drainage systems.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirement of system
components and are based on specific manufacturer types indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal
performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Divison 1 Section "Product Substitutions."
SEWERAGE 02700- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic structures in direct sunlight.
B. Do not store plastic pipe or fittings in direct sunlight.
C. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
D. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's rigging instructions.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except
when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide acceptable temporary
utility services.
1. Notify Architect not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving Architect's written permission.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate sanitary sewerage system connections to utility company's sanitary sewer.
B. Coordinate with interior building drainage systems.
C. Coordinate with other utility work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS
1. Compact-Pattern, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C153, for push-on joints.
2. Pipe and Fitting Interior Coating: AWWA C104, asphaltic-material seal coat, minimum 1-mil (0.025-mm)
thickness.
3. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
A. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M), Class III, Wall B, for gasketed
joints.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443CM), rubber
2.20UTFALLS
A. Construct headwall, apron, and tapered sides of cast-in-place, reinforced concrete.
B. Riprap: Broken stone, irregular size and shape, weighing 15 to 50 pounds (7 to 23 kg) each.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installation of
green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures.
SEWERAGE 02700 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
I. Use warning tapes or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.
2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
3.3 SEWERAGE PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Include watertight joints.
B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe,
fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications.
C. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): Acrylonitrileobutadiene-styrene (ABS), SDR 35, sewer pipe and
fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints.
3.4 DRAINAGE PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Include watertight, silttight, or soiltight joints, except where watertight or silttight joints are indicated.
B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe,
fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications.
3.5 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general location and
arrangement of underground sewerage and drainage systems piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout
take into account many design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings
according to manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation
requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.
C. Install gravity-flow-systems piping at constant slope between points and elevations indicated. Install straight
piping runs at constant slope, not less than that specified, where slope is not indicated.
D. Extend sewerage piping and connect to building's sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations indicated.
Terminate piping as indicated.
E. Extend drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate
piping as indicated.
3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to the following.
B. Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: As follows:
1. Join pipe, tubing and fittings with couplings for soiltight joints according to AASHTO "Standard
Specifications for Highway Bridges," Diviion II, Section 26.4.2.4 "Joint Properties" and manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Join pipe, tubing, and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals for watertight joints according to ASTM
D 2321 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Install according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: As follows:
1. Join solvent-cement-joint pipe and fittings with solvent cement according to ASTM D 2855 an ASTM F
402.
2. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals according to ASTM D 2321.
3 Join profile sewer pipe and ribbed drain pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals according to
ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instruction.
SEWERAGE 02700 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
4 Install according to ASTM D 2321.
D. Concrete Pipe and FiRings: Install according to ACPA "Concrete Pipe Handbook." Use the following seals:
l. Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubbers gaskets.
E. System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, except where otherwise specified.
F. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use couplings
that are compatible with and fit both systems' materials and dimensions.
3.7 STORM DRA1NAGE 1NLET AND OUTFALL INSTALLATION
A. Construct outlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.
3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and as indicated.
3.9 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated.
3.10 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in
sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping
so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in a cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450
by 300 mm) deep. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding earth grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete paving with tops flush with surface of paving.
3.11 DRAIN INSTALLATION
A. Install type drains in locations indicated.
B. Embed drains in a 4-inch (100-mm) minimum depth of concrete around bottom and sides.
C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated.
D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with surface of paving.
3.12 TAP CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so f'mished work conforms as nearly as
practical to requirements specified for new work.
B. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, sizes 4 to 20 inches (100 to 500 mm) by removing
a section of existing pipe and installing a wye fitting into existing piping. Encase entire wye with not less than
6 inches (150 mm) of 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day, compressive-strength concrete.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as the work progresses. Maintain swab
or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed.
1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.
2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and whenever work stops.
SEWERAGE 02700 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
_. 3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, to
remove collected debris.
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after
-- approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of the Project.
I. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visual between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of a ball or cylinder of a size not
_ less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances
specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
C. Test new piping systems and pans of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired for leaks
and defects.
-- 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests, and their inspections by authorities having jurisdiction, with at least 24 hours' advance
notice.
4 Submit separate reports for each test.
5. Where authorities having jurisdiction do not have published procedures, perform tests as follows:
-- a. Sanitary Sewerage: Perform air test according to UNI-B-6.
END OF SECTION 02700
SEWERAGE 02700 - 5
SECTION 02811 - UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
-- The General Conditions of the contract and all Supplemental
and Special Conditions are a part of these Specifications
and should be consulted in detail for instructions pertain-
_ ing to the work.
1.02 SCOPE:
-- Furnish all work, material, appliances, tools, equipment,
facilities, transportation and services necessary for and
incidental to performing all operations in connection with
-- the installation of the underground sprinkler irrigation
system complete as shown on the drawings and/or specified
herein. When the term "Contractor" is used in this section,
it shall refer to the Irrigation Contractor.
1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
-- ASTM - D2241 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe
(SDR-PR)
_ ASTM - D2464 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Threaded, Schedule 40
ASTM - D2466 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe
-- Fittings, Socket Type, Schedule 40
ASTM - D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM - D2855 - Making Solvent Cemented Joints with Poly
_ Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
1.04 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE:
-- A. The Contractor shall guarantee material and workmanship
and shall provide maintenance for one year after final
acceptance including repair and replacement of defective
materials, workmanship and repair of backfill settlement.
B. Guarantee and maintenance shall include but not
necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Adjustment of sprinkler height and plumb to compensate
for settlement and/or plant growth.
2. Backfilling of all trenches.
02811-1
1.04 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE: (Cont'd)
3. Adjustment of coverage (arc of spray) as necessary.
4. Unstopping heads plugged by foreign material.
5. Adjustment of controller as necessary to insure
proper sequence and watering time.
6. All maintenance necessary to keep the system in
good operating order.
C. Guarantee and maintenance after final acceptance does not
include alterations as necessitated by re-landscaping,
re-grading, addition of trees or the addition and/or
changes in sidewalks, walls, driveways, etc.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect two (2)
copies of shop drawings or manufacturer's "cut sheet"
for each type of sprinkler head, pipe, controller,
valves, check valve assemblies, valve boxes, wire,
conduit, fittings and all other types of fixtures and
equipment which he proposes to install on the job. The
submittal shall include the manufacturer's name, model
number, equipment capacity and manufacturer's install-
ation recommendation, if applicable, for each proposed
item.
B. A contract will not be issued to the Contractor until
he has submitted the required information. No partial
submittal will be accepted and submittals shall be
neatly bound into a brochure and logically organized.
After the submittal has been approved, substitutions
will not be allowed except by written consent of the
Architect.
C. Shop drawings shall include dimensions, elevations,
construction details, arrangements and capacity of
equipment as well as manufacturer's installation
recommendations.
1.06 "APPROVED EQUAL SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Several items in this section and on the plans are
specified by a manufacturer's brand name and catalog
,number followed by the phrase "or approved equal".
This is not intended to unduly restrict competitive
procurements or bidding but it is done to assure a
minimum standard of quality which is believed to be
02811-2
1.06 "APPROVED EQUAL SUBSTITUTIONS: (Cont'd)
best for the item specified. If a bidder wishes for
a substitute item to receive consideration as an
"approved equal", the bidder and each item must meet
-- all of the following requirements without exceptions:
1. An item, to be considered a substitute, must meet
-- the same specifications of materials, fabrication
or construction, dimension or size, shape, finish,
performance standards, warranty or guarantee, and
any other pertinent and salient features of quality
-- as indicated in manufacturer's specifications for
original specified item.
- 2. A sample of the item, along with a written request
for consideration, shop drawings and written speci-
fications, must have been received by the Architect
_ a minimum of ten (10) days before the bid opening
date. The item shall then be examined and the bidder
shall be notified in writing seven (7) days later
whether or not the item is an "approved equal". The
- Architect shall be the final judge of whether or not
an item submitted for consideration qualifies as
being an acceptable substitute.
B. Under no circumstances shall an item be given consider-
ation as an "approved equal" substitute no later than
ten (10) days before the bid opening. After that date,
all items shall be bid per the original specifications.
Likewise, unless certified as an "approved equal" per
the time frame and the requirements above, the successful
-- bidder, known as Contractor after signing the contract,
shall install all items per the original plans and
specifications.
C. The Contractor alone shall bear complete responsibility
for the installation and operation of any material or
equipment installed on the job, as a substitute for any
specified equipment or material, should such substituted
material prove defective, inoperable or inapplicable.
1.07 CODES/PERMITS:
A. All work under this contract shall comply with the provi-
sions of these specifications, as illustrated on the.
accompanying drawings or as directed by the Architect,
and shall satisfy all applicable local codes, ordinances
or regulations of the governing bodies and all author-
ities having jurisdiction over this project.
02811-3
1.07 CODES/PERMITS: (Cont'd)
B. Installation of equipment and material shall be done in
accordance with the requirements of the National Electric
Code, city plumbing codes and standard plumbing proce-
dures. The drawings and these specifications are intended --
to comply with all the necessary rules and regulations;
however, some discrepancies may occur. Where such discre-
pancies occur, the Contrator shall immediately notify the
Architect in writing of the discrepancies and apply for
an interpretation. Should the discovery and notification
occur after the execution of a contract, any additional
work required for compliance with the regulations shall
be paid for as covered by these contract documents.
1.08 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain
all permits and pay all costs in connection with his
work; file with all governmental departments having
jurisdiction; obtain all required certificates of
inspection for his work and deliver to the Architect
before request of acceptance and final payment for the
work.
B. The Contractor shall include in the work any labor,
materials, services, apparatus or drawings in order to
comply with all applicable laws, ordiances, rules and
regulations whether or not shown on the drawings and/or
specified.
C. The installation of the irrigation system shall be made
by an individual or firm duly licensed under Article No.
8751 VTCS, Titled "Licensed Irrigators Act", S.B. No. 259
as passed by the 66th Texas Legislature.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work per-
formed under this contract. No subcontractor shall re-
lieve the Contractor of liability to complete the work
shown on the drawing and indicated in the specifications.
E. The Contractor shall at all times protect his work from
damage and theft and replace all damaged or stolen parts
at his expense until the work is accepted in writing by
the Owner.
F. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's property from
injury or loss. All damage to existing property, such as
buildings, utilities, etc., or plantings such as trees or
lawns, caused by the Contractor during his operation or
02811-4
1.08 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES: (Cont'd)
as a result of a malfunction of installed work during
the guarantee period shall be repaired at his expense.
-- G. The Contractor shall carefully note all finish grades
before commencing work. Any finish grade changed during
the course of work shall be restored to the original
_ contours.
H. The Owner shall not be responsible for damage, caused by
labor or materials furnished by the Contractor under this
-- contract, which might have been prevented by the Contrac-
tor's prudence.
- 1.09 SUPERINTENDENT:
A. A superintendent satisfatory to the Architect shall be
_ present on the site at all times during progress of the
work.
B. The superintendent shall not be changed except with the
-- consent of the Architect.
C. The superintendent shall be authorized to represent the
_ Contractor.
1.10 NOTIFICATION OF ARCHITECT:
-- The Architect shall have free access to the work whenever it
is in preparation or progress and the Contractor shall pro-
vide safe, convenient and proper facilites for such access
-- and inspection. The Contractor shall notify the Architect
when he will and will not be on the job. Should the Contrac-
tor work periodically on the job, the Architect shall have
_ the right to require the Contractor to give a 24 hour notice
of each and every day or partial day that he intends to work
on the project. The Contractor shall perform no work unless
the Architect has been properly notified. Failure to notify
the Architect may require the Contractor to redo, uncover
DiDe, exDose for insDection, etc. all that the Architect was
unable to inspect.
1.11 EXISTING UTILITIES - LOCATION AND ELEVATIONS:
A. Locations and elevations of various utilities included
with the scope of this work have been obtained from the
. most reliable sources available and should serve as a
general guide without guarantee to accuracy. The
-- Contractor shall examine the site and verify to his own
satisfaction the locations and elevation of all utilities
02811-5
1.11 EXISTING UTILITIES - LOCATION AND ELEVATIONS: (Cont'd)
and availability of utilities and services required. The
Contractor shall inform himself as to their relation to
the work and the submission of bids shall be deemed as
evidence thereof. The Contractor shall repair at his own
expense, and to the satisfaction of the Architect, for
damage to any utility shown or not shown on the plans.
B. Should utilities not shown on the plans be found during
excavation, Contractor shall promptly notify the
Architect for instructions as to further action.
C. Contractor shall make necessary adjustments in the layout
as may be required to connect to existing water and
electrical stubouts and sleeves, should such stubouts and -
sleeves not be located exactly as shown, at no increase
in cost to the Owner. All such work shall be recorded on
record drawings and turned over to the Architect prior to _
final acceptance.
1.12 CO-OPERATION OF TRADES:
Work under this contract may be accomplished with other
contractors and trades on the project site at the same time.
The Contractor shall allow each contractor and trade --
adequate time at the proper stage of construction to fulfill
his contract.
1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS:
A. Record dimensioned locations and depths for each of the
following:
1. Point of connection to city water supply.
2. Sprinkler pressure line routing. Provide dimensions
for each 100 lineal feet (maximum) along each
routing and for each change in directions.
3. Isolation (gate/ball) valves.
4. Remote control valves.
5. Control wire routing.
6. Other related items as may be directed by the
Architect.
B. Locate all dimensions from two permanent points such -
as buildings, monuments, sidewalks, curbs or pavements.
02811-6
1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS: (Cont'd)
C. Record all changes which are made from the Contract
Drawings, including changes in the pressure and non-
pressure lines.
D. Record all required information on a set of blackline
prints of the drawings. Do not use these prints for any
-- other purpose.
E. Maintain information daily. Keep drawings at the site at
all times and available for review by the Architect.
F. When record drawings have been approved by the Architect,
transfer all information to a set of reproducible mylars
- using permanent india ink. Changes using ball-point pen
are not acceptable. Make dimensions accurately at the
same scale used on original drawings, or larger. If
_ photo reduction is required to facilitate controller
chart housing, notes or dimensions must be a minimum 1/4
inch in size.
- G. Reproducible mylars will be furnished by the Architect at
cost for printing and handling.
-- 1.14 CONTROLLER CHARTS:
A. Do not prepare charts until record drawings have been
_ approved by the Architect.
B. Provide one controller chart for each automatic
controller installed.
1. Chart may be a reproduction of the Record Drawing,
if the scale permits fitting the controller door.
If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduc-
tion to maximum size possible to retain full
legibility.
2. Chart shall be blackline print of the actual system,
showing the area covered by that controller.
C. Identify the area of coverage of each remote control
valve using a distinctly different pastel color, drawn
over the entire area of coverage.
D. Following approval of charts by the Architect, they
shall be hermetically sealed between two layers of 20
mil thick plastic sheet.
02811-7
1.14 CONTROLLER CHARTS: (Cont'd)
E. Charts must be completed and approved prior to final
acceptance of the irrigation system.
1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: --
A. Provide two individually bound manuals detailing
operating and maintenance requirements for irrigation --
systems.
B. Manuals shall be delivered to the Architect no later
than 10 days prior to completion of work.
C. Provide descriptions of all installed material and
systems in sufficient detail to permit maintenance -
personnel to understand, operate and maintain the
equipment.
D. Provide the following in each manual:
1. Index sheet, stating Irrigation Contractor's name,
address, telephone number and name of person to
contact.
2. Duration of guarantee period.
3. Equipment list providing the following for each
item:
a. Manufacturer's name.
b. Make and model number.
c. Name and address of local manufacturer's
representative.
d. Spare parts list in detail.
e. Detailed operating and maintenance instructions
of major equipment.
1.16 CHECKLIST:
A. Provide a signed and dated checklist and deliver to the
Architect prior to final acceptance of the work.
B. Use the following format:
1. Plumbing permits: if none required, so note.
02811-8
1.16 CHECKLIST: (Cont'd)
2. Materials approvals: approved by and date.
3. Pressure line test: by whom and date.
4. Record drawings: received by and date.
- 5. Controller charts: received by and date.
6. Operation and maintenance manuals: received by
and date.
7. Manufacturer's warranties: received by and date.
-- 8. Written guarantee: received by and date.
1.17 ELECTRIC POWER:
Electric power to operate the controller shall be furnished
by the General Contractor at location shown on the drawings.
Service wiring to the controller cabinet from the power
-- source shall be furnished by the Contractor.
1.18 WATER FOR TESTING:
The Contractor shall furnish all water necessary for
testing, flushing, jetting and general operation until
.... final acceptance.
1.19 SLEEVES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS:
- Sleeves and electrical conduits for irrigation needs shall
be installed by the General Contractor or as noted on the
drawings. Contractor shall be responsible for locating all
sleeves and conduits at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.20 PROGRESS MEETINGS:
- Contractor shall atttend all progress meetings as requested
by the Architect during installation (max. of one per week).
1.21 STORAGE:
The Contractor shall be allocated space on the site for
storage of material but he shall coordinate such storage
with the General Contractor and shall in no way impede
execution of the work of the General Contractor through the
use of this space. He shall keep such strorage areas clean
and neat at all times. The Owner assumes no responsibility
for protection of this storage area or materials within it.
02811-9
PART II - MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL:
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, all materials shall be
new and unused. The irrigation equipment catalog numbers
used for reference in these specificatons are to establish
minimum quality standards and may be substituted with an
"approved equal" as outlined in Section 1.06.
2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (PVC PIPE):
PVC pipe manufactured in accordance with ASTM standards
noted herein.
A. Marking and Identification: PVC pipe shall be contin-
uously and permanently marked with the following
information: Manufacturer's name, size, type of pipe
and material, SDR number, Product Standard number and
the NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) Seal.
B. PVC Pipe Fittings: Shall be of the same material as the
PVC pipe specified and compatible with PVC pipe
furnished. Solvent weld type shall be Schedule 40.
C. PVC Pipe: Shall be Class 200 solvent weld, SDR-21, PS
22-70 for all sizes 3/4" - 2 1/2". All 1/2" pipe shall
be solvent weld SDR-13.5, Class 315.
D. Flexible PVC Risers (Nipples): All flexible PVC nipples
shall be made from virgin PVC material, shall comply
with ASTM D2287, shall be tested at 200 P.S.I. static
pressure for 2 hours and have a quick burst rating of a
minimum 400 P.S.I. Flexible PVC pipe nipples shall be
"Excalibur" or approved equal.
2.03 SWING JOINTS:
Swing joints shall be Lasco O-ring seal type or approved
equal.
2.04 WIRE AND SPLICES:
All wire shall be single strand solid copper, minimum 14
guage with type UF insulation which is Underwriters
Laboratory approved for direct underground burial when
used in a National Electrical Code Class II Circuit (30
volts AC or less) as per Articles 725 and 300. Voltage drop
shall be taken into consideration. All wire shall be color
coded so that the common wire shall have white insulation
and the signal wires shall have red insulation.
02811-10
2.04 WIRE AND SPLICES: (Cont'd)
All wire connectors shall have a two-piece PVC housing
which, when filled with resin epoxy and pressed together,
forms a permanent, one-piece, moisture-proof wire splice.
- All connectors shall be U.L. listed, rated 600 volt, for
PVC insulated wire. No wire splices shall be buried. All
wire connectors shall be Rainbird ST-03UL/PT-S5 or
_ approved equal.
2.05 QUICK COUPLING VALVES:
Quick coupling valves shall be Rainbird Model 44RC or
approved equal, composed of a bronze cast body with a yellow
rubber cover. The valve shall accept a single lug one (1)
-- inch bronze valve key for operation. Provide one (1) 44K
coupler and one (1) SH-2 hose swivel ell for each two (2)
quick coupling valves shown on the plans.
2.06 BALL VALVES:
A. Ball valves 2 1/2" and larger in size shall be made of
- PVC, have a non-shock rating of 150 psi, have ball seals
made of Teflon, have Viton o-rings and socket end
connectors. Ball valves shall be Spears "Safe-T-Shear"
_ True Union or approved equal.
B. Ball valves 2" and smaller shall be made of PVC, have a
non-shock rating of 200 psi, have ball seals made of
Teflon, have Viton o-rings and socket end connectors.
Ball valves shall be Spears "Safe-T-Shear" Compact or
approved equal.
2.07 VALVE BOXES:
A box shall be provided for all valves. Valve boxes shall
be made of high-strength plastic suitable for turf irriga-
tion purposes. Boxes shall be suitable in size and
configuration for the operability and adjustment of the
valve. Extension sections will be used as appropriate to
the depth of piping. All valve box covers shall bolt down
or have locking mechanisms and shall be colored green or
- black as selected by the Architect.
A. ELECTRIC VALVES - Boxes for electric valves 2" and
smaller shall be Brooks 1220 jumbo series with snaplock
cover or approved equal.
B. WIRE SPLICES - Boxes for quick coupling valves and wire
- splices shall be Brooks 1100 series with snaplock cover
or approved equal.
02811-11
2.07 VALVE BOXES: (Cont'd)
C. QUICK COUPLING VALVES - Boxes for quick coupling valves
shall be Brooks 1100 series with snaplock cover or
approved equal.
2.08 ROTARY HEADS:
Rotary pop-up sprinklers shall be in-line combination type
with positive drive by means of a water-driven gear motor.
Nozzles shall be readily accessible without removing the
upper head assembly. Sprinkler head shall rotate uniformly
at a speed not to exceed one-fifth (1/5) revolution per
minute. Heads shall have rubber covered tops. Gear driven
rotary pop-up heads shall meet the requirements stated on
the plans and shall be Hunter PGP series or approved equal. --
2.09 4" POP-UP SPRAY HEADS:
Spray heads shall have a minimum 4" pop-up. The sprinkler
body and all related parts shall be plastic, cycolac or
polycarbonate. They shall have a spring retraction for
positive return action of the pop-up nozzle. The spring for
retraction and the adjustable nozzle screw shall be made of
corrosion resistant materials. 4" pop-up spray heads shall
be Rainbird 1804-SAM-PRS or approved equal.
2.10 12" POP-UP SPRAY HEADS:
Shrub type spray heads shall have a minimum 12" pop-up.
The sprinkler body and all related parts shall be plastic,
cycolac or polycarbonate. They shall have a spring retrac-
tion for positive return action of the pop-up nozzle. The
spring for retraction and the adjustable nozzle screw shall
be made of corrosion resistant material. 12" pop-up spray
heads shall be Rainbird 1812-SAM-PRS or approved equal.
2.11 RLRCTRIC CONTROLLER:
A. Electric irrigation controller shall be capable of
operating the number of stations as indicated on the
drawings. The system is designed to operate only one
section valve at a time, unless otherwise noted.
B. Power source shall be standard 120 volt, 60 Cycle AC.
Output for operation of companion solenoid actuated
valves shall be 24 volt, 60 Cycle AC.
02811-12
2.11 ELECTRIC CONTROLLER: (Cont'd)
C. Operation of the controller shall be fully automatic,
incorporating one 24 hour clock and 14 day calendar per
controlled number of electric valves shown on the plan
-- to start the sprinkling cycle any hour or hours of the
day or night of any day or days over a repeating 14 day
period.
D. The controller shall be capable of repeating watering
cycles as required with a maximum delay between the
ending of one cycle and the beginning of the next not
to exceed 2 hours. Controller shall provide optional
semiautomatic operation whereby the automatic cycle may
be started independent of the clock and manual operation
.... whereby any station may be operated by hand independent
of all timing mechanism. The choice of automatic day or
hour programming shall be available to the operator on
the face of the control panel without the use of tools.
E. The automatic controller shall be Hardie MC Plus-B series
or approved equal.
2.12 ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES:
-- Electric remote control valves shall have plastic bodies and
covers and shall be globe-type diaphram valves of normally
closed design. Operation shall be accomplished by means of
an integrally mounted heavy-duty 24-V AC solenoid complying
with National Electrical Code, Class II Circuit. Solenoid
coil shall be potted in epoxy resin within a plastic coated
stainless steel housing. Solenoids shall be completely
- waterproof, suitable for direct underground burial. A flow
stem adjustment, shall be included in each valve. Electric
remote control valves shall Hardie 200 series or approved
equal.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL:
A. Design Pressure: This irrigation system has been
-- designed to operate with a minimum static inlet water
pressure of 65 psi at the point of connection to the
proposed 2" water meter. The Contractor shall take a
pressure reading prior to beginning construction. If
the pressure reading is less than the number shown
above, the Contractor shall notify the Architect for
further instructions.
02811-13
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL: (Cont'd)
B. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall not
willfully install the irrigation system as shown on
the drawings when it is obvious in the field that
obstructions, grade differences or discrepencies in
equipment usage, area dimensions or static water
pressure exist that might not have been considered in
the design. Such obstructions or differences shall be
brought to the attention of the Architect. In the event
this modification is not performed, the Contractor shall
assume full responsiblity for any revision necessary at
Contractor's expense.
C. Staking: Before installation is started, place a stake
or flag where each sprinkler is to be located, in
accordance with drawing. Staking shall be approved by
the Architect before proceeding.
D. Piping layout: Piping layout is diagrammatic. Route
piping around existing site feature in such a manner to
avoid any damage. Do not dig within the ball of newly
· planted trees or shrubs. In areas where trees are
present, trenches will be adjusted on site to provide
a minimum clearance of four times the trunk diameter of
the tree (at its base) between any tree and any trench.
E. All material and equipment shall be delivered to the job-
site in unbroken reels, cartons or other packaging to
demonstrate that the material is new and of a quality and
grade in keeping with the intent of these specifications.
3.02 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING:
A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation to the depth
indicated in these specifications and drawings. The banks
of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical practicable.
Trenches shall be wide enough to allow a minimum of 4"
between parallel pipelines or where stones are uncovered
in the bottom of the trench that would create a concen-
trated pressure on the pipe, the rock or stones shall be
removed to a depth of six (6) inches minimum below the
trench depth indicated. The overdepth rock excavation and
all excess trench excavation shall be backfilled with
loose, moist earth or sand, thoroughly tamped. Whenever
wet or otherwise unstable soil, that is incapable of
properly supporting the pipe, is encountered in the
trench bottom, such soil shall be removed to a depth and
length required and the trench backfilled to trench
bottom grade as hereinafter specified with course sand,
fine gravel or other suitable material.
02811-14
3.02 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING: (Cont'd)
B. Bottom of trench grade shall be continued past ground
surface deviations to avoid air pockets and low collec-
tion points in the line. The minimum cover specifications
shall govern regardless of variations in ground surface
profile and the occasional deeper excavation required at
banks and other field conditions. Excavation shall be
-- such that a uniform trench grade variation will occur
in all cases where variations are necessary.
C. Trench excavation shall comprise the satisfactory
removal and disposition of all materials and shall
include all shoring and sheeting required to protect
the excavation and to safeguard employees.
D. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling
shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner a sufficient
.... distance back from edge of trenches to avoid overloading
and prevent slides or cave-ins. Material unsuitable for
backfilling shall be wasted as directed by the Architect.
When excavated material is of a rocky nature and the
topsoil or any other layer of excavated material is
suitable for pipe bedding and backfill in the vicinity
of the pipe, such material shall be seperately stock-
piled for use in such bedding and pipe backfill opera-
tions, unless satisfactory imported material is used.
E. All excavations and backfill shall be unclassified and
covered in the basic bid. No additional compensation
will be allowed for rock encountered.
F. Restore all surface, existing underground installations,
etc. damaged or cut as a result of the excavations to
their original conditions in a manner acceptable to the
Architect.
3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION:
A. Sprinkler Mains: Sprinkler mains are that portion of
piping from water source to electric valves and quick
coupling valves. This portion of piping is subject to
surges since it is a closed portion of the sprinkler
system. Sprinkler mains shall be installed in a trench
with a minimum of 18" of cover.
B. Lateral Piping: Lateral piping is that portion of piping
, from electric valve to sprinkler heads. This portion of
piping is not subject to surges since it is an "open end"
- portion of the sprinkler system. Lateral piping shall be
installed in a trench with a minimum of 12" of cover.
02811-15
3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION: (Cont'd)
C. Remove lumber, rubbish and rocks from trenches. Provide
firm, uniform bearing for entire length of each pipe
line to prevent uneven settlement. Wedging or blocking
of pipe will not be permitted. Remove foreign matter or
dirt from inside of pipe before welding and keep piping
clean during and after laying of pipe.
D. PVC pipe shall not be installed when there is water in
the trench, nor shall PVC pipe be laid when temperature
is 40 degrees or below or when rain is imminent. PVC
pipe will expand and contract as the temperature changes.
Therefore, pipe shall be snaked from side to side of
trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction.
3.04 PVC PIPE AND FITTING ASSEMBLY:
A. Solvent: Use only solvent recommended by manufacturer
to make solvent-welded joints following standards noted
herein. Thoroughly clean pipe and fittings of dirt,
dust and moisture with an approved PVC primer before
applying solvent.
B. PVC to Metal Connection: Work metal connections first.
Use a non-hardening pipe dope such as Permatex No. 2 or
"Teflon" tape on threaded PVC to metal joints. Use only
light wrench pressure.
C. Threaded PVC Connections: Where required, use threaded
PVC adaptors into which pipe may be welded.
3.05 HYDROSTATIC TESTS:
Pressure Test: After the pipe is laid, the joints completed
and the trench partially backfilled leaving the joints
exposed for examination, the newly laid piping or any valved
section of main pressure line piping shall, unless otherwise
specified, be subjected for four hours to a hydrostatic
pressure test of normal city water pressure. Each valve
shall be opened and closed during the test. Exposed pipe,
joints, fittings, and valves shall be carefully examined
during the partially open trench test. Joints showing
visible leakage shall be replaced or remade as necessary.
Cracked or defective pipe, joints, fittings, or valves
discovered in consequence of this pressure test shall be
removed and replaced with sound material, and the test
results are satisfactory. All replacement and repair shall
be without additional expense to the Owner.
02811-16
3.06 CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION:
A. All control wire less than 500 feet in length shall be
continuous without splices or joints from the controller
to the valves. Connections to the electric valves shall
be made within 18 inches of the valve using connectors
specified.
_ B. All control wires shall be installed at least 18 inches
deep. Contractor shall obtain the Architect's approval
for wire routing when installed in a seperate ditch.
Control wires may be installed in a common ditch with
piping; however, wires must be installed a minimum of
4 inches below or to one side of piping.
C. All wire passing under existing or future paving,
sidewalk construction, etc. shall be encased in PVC
Schedule 40 conduit extending at least 2 feet beyond
.... edges of paving, sidewalks or constrution.
3.07 ROTARY HEADS:
- Rotary pop-up heads shall be installed with the top of head
flush with the finished grade.-Rotary pop-up heads shall be
installed on a swing-joint assembly as detailed on the
.... drawings. Under the warranty, the contractor shall return
after grass is established and adjust heads to proper grade.
Locate all rotary heads four (4) inches from the edge of
pavement or hardscape.
3.08 POP-UP SPRAY HEADS:
Provide heads and nozzles as specified and install in
]Locations as shown on the drawings. Pop-up spray heads
~hall be installed on a flexible PVC nipple directly on to
..... ]Lateral piping as detailed on the drawings. Heads shall be
installed with the top of head flush with the finished
grade. Contractor will be required to adjust heads as
necessary after establishment of grass or other plant
z~terial.
3.09 ~UICK COUPLING VALVES:
Quick coupling valves shall be installed on a swing-joint
assembly as detailed on the drawings. Under the warranty,
the Contractor shall return after grass is established and
adjust valves boxes to proper grade.
02811-17
3.10 VALVE AND VALVE BOX PLACEMENT:
All manual, electric and quick coupling valves shall be in
boxes as specified and shall be set with a minimum of six
(6) inches of space between their top surface and the bottom
of the valve box. Valves shall be fully opened and fully
closed to ensure that all parts are in operating condition.
Valve boxes shall be set plumb, vertical and concentric with
the valve stem. Any valve box which has moved from this
required position so as to prevent the use of the flow
alignment of the valve shall be reset by the Contractor at
his own expense.
3.11 IRRIGATION CONTROLLER:
A. Irrigation controller shall be located as shown on the
plans and shall be capable of operating the number of
stations indicated. The system is designed to operate
only one section at a time unless otherwise noted on
the plans. The Contractor shall install the size
controller specified on the plans in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's published installation
instructions including earth grounding if so specified
by the manufacturer. ~
B. Controller shall be located where shown on the plans
and oriented in such a manner as to allow the operator
to view a maximum area of the irrigation system, unless
required to be installed inside a structure.
3.12 ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES:
A. Remote control valves shall be located and sized as shown
on the plans. All electrical connections shall be made
when the weather is dry with connection kits as specified
in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommended
procedures. All remote control valves shall be installed
in a horizontal position and according to the
manufacturer's published installation instructions.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
furnish and install the proper size wire on each of the
low voltage circuits from the irrigation controller to
the various electric remote control valves.
C. Consideration shall be given to each circuit for
allowance of voltage drop and economy consistent with
accepted practices of electrical installation. Under no
circumstances shall the voltage of any branch circuit be
reduced more than proper due to length of run exceeding
the maximum allowable for the wire size used.
02811-18
3.13 BACKFILL AND COMPACTION:
A. After system is operating and required tests and
inspections have been made, the trenches shall be
carefully backfilled with the excavated materials
approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam
sandy clay, sand, gravel, soft shale or other approved
materials, free from large clods of earth or stone.
-- Rock, broken concrete or pavement and large boulders
shall not be used as backfill material. The backfill
shall be thoroughly compacted and evened with the
adjacent soil level.
B. Compact trenches in areas to be planted by thoroughly
flooding the backfill. Compact all other areas by
flooding or hand tamping. The jetting process may be
used in areas when flooding.
C. Backfill for all trenches, regardless of the type of
pipe covered, shall be compacted to a minimum of 90%
density.
D. Any trenches improperly backfilled, or where settlement
occurs, shall be reopened to the depth requir.~d for
compaction, then refilled and compacted with the surface
- restored to the required grade and left in a completed
surface condition as described above.
E. Specifically tamp backfill under heads and around the
flange of heads for one foot (1') by a suitable means
after trench backfill has dried from flooding to
prevent heads loosening in the ground.
3.14 FINAL ADJUSTMENT:
A. After installation has been completed, make final
adjustment of sprinkler system prior to Architect's
final inspection.
B. Completely flush system to remove debris from lines by
removing nozzle from heads on ends of lines and turning
on system.
C. Check sprinklers for proper operation and proper
alignment for direction of throw.
D. Check each section for operating pressure and balance to
other sections by use of flow adjustment on top of each
valve.
02811-19
3.14 FINAL ADJUSTMENT: (Cont'd)
E. Check nozzling for proper coverage. Prevailing wind
conditions may indicate that arc or angle of spray should
be other than as shown on drawings. In this case, change
nozzles to provide correct coverage and furnish record
data to Architect with each change.
F. After system is thoroughly flushed and ready for opera-
tion, each section of sprinklers shall be adjusted to
control pressure at heads. Use the following method one
section at a time:
1) Remove last head on section and install a temporary
riser above grade. Install tee with pressure gauge
attached on top of riser and re-install head with
nipple onto tee.
2) Correct operating pressure at last head of each
section as follows:
a) Spray Heads - 30 psi
b) Rotary Heads - 40 psi
3) After replacing head at grade, tamp thoroughly around
head.
3.15 CLEAN-UP:
The project sight shall be thoroughly cleaned of all waste
materials and all unused or salvaged materials, equipment,
tools, etc. After completion of the work, areas disturbed
shall be leveled and the site shall be raked clean and left
in an order condition.
END OF SECTION 02811
02811-20
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02831 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART ! - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and
all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in
the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Galvanized-steel chain link fabric.
2. Galvanized-steel framework.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for filling and grading work.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete for post footings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data in the form of manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and ~zstallation instructions for
fence and gate posts, fabric, gates, gate operators, and accessories.
C. Shop drawings showing location of fence, gates, each post, and details of post installation, extension
arms, gate swing, hardware, and accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has at least three years' experience and has
completed at least five chain link fence projects with same material and of similar scope to that indicated
for this Project with a successful construction record of in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chain link fences and gates, including accessories, fittings, and
fastenings, from a single source.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for fences and gates shown on the Drawings in relation
to the property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRIC
A. Selvage: Knuckled on both selvages.
B. Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric: Fabricated in one-piece widths for fencing 12 feet and less in height to
comply with Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) "Product Manual" and with
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
requirements indicated below:
1. Mesh and Wire Size: 2-inch mesh, 0.148-inch diameter (9 gage).
2. Coating: ASTM A 817, Type 2, Class 1, zinc-coated (galvanized) applied after weaving.
2.2 FRAMING
A. Type I Round Posts: Standard weight (schedule 40) galvanized-steel pipe conforming to ASTM F 1083,
according to heavy industrial requirements of ASTM F 669, Group IA, with minimum yield strength of
25,000 psi, not less than 1.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. Type A coating inside and outside according to
ASTM F 1234, as determined by ASTM A 90, and weights per foot as follows:
Actual OD Weight (lb/fl~ NP$ $iz~
1.315 1.68 1
1.660 2.27 1-1/4
1.900 2.72 1-1/2
2.375 3.65 2
2.875 5.79 2-1/2
3.500 7.58 3
4.000 9.11 3-1/2
6.625 18.97 6
8.625 28.55 8
B. Roll-Formed Steel: Rolled form steel shapes (e.g., C section) produced from structural-quality steel
conforming to ASTM A 570, grade 45, or ASTM A 446, grade D, galvanized, conforming to heavy
industrial requirements of ASTM F 669, Group II, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi.
Protective coating system according to ASTM F 1234, Type A, hot-dip galvanized with a minimum of
2.0 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. according to ASTM A 123, 4.0 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. according to ASTM A
525; or Type C, a minimum of 1.0 oz. of zinc-5 percent aluminum-mischrnetal alloy per sq. ft. according
to ASTM A 875.
C. Roll-Formed Steel: Hot-rolled steel shape H section with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi
conforming to ASTM F 669, group III. Protective coating system according to ASTM F 1234, Type A,
hot-dip galvanized with a minimum of 2.0 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. of according to ASTM A 123, or 4.0
oz. of zinc per sq. ft. according to ASTM A 525.
D. Square Tubing: Cold-formed steel structural tubing conforming to ASTM A 500, Grade B with minimum
yield strength of 42,000 psi and not less than 1.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. Type A coating inside and outside
according to ASTM F 1234, as determined by ASTM A 90.
E. Top Rail: Manufacturer's longest lengths (17 to 21 feet) with swedged-end or expansion-type coupling,
approximately 6 inches long for joining. Provide rail ends or other means for attaching top rail securely
to each gate comer, pull, and end post.
1. Round Steel: 1.660-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
F. Steel Posts:
1. Round Line or Intermediate Posts: 2.875-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
'2. Round End, Comer, and Pull Posts: 4.000-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
G. Swing Gate Posts: Furnish posts to support single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double-gate installation,
according to ASTM F 900, sized as follows for steel and aluminum pipe posts:
1. Steel posts for gate leaf width:
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
a. Under 8 Feet: 4.000-inch OD pipe weighing at least 9.11 lb per ft.
b. Over 8 to 18 Feet: 6.625-inch OD pipe weighing at least 18.97 lb per ft.
2.3 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Material: Comply with ASTM F 626. Mill-f'mished aluminum or galvanized iron or steel to suit
manufacturer's standards.
1. Steel and Iron: Unless specified otherwise, hot-dip galvanize pressed steel or cast-iron fence
fittings and accessories with at least 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft. as determined by ASTM A 90.
B. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace. Use material specified below for brace,
and truss to line posts with 3/8-inch-diameter rod and adjustable tightener. Provide manufacturer's
standard galvanized-steel, cast-iron or cast-aluminum cap for each end.
1. Round Steel: 1.660-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.
C. Bottom and Center Rail: Same material as top rail. Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel,
cast-iron or cast-aluminum cap for each end.
D. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum length 2 inches less than the full
height of fabric, a minimum cross section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch, and a minimum of 1.2 oz. of zinc
coating per sq. ft. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each comer and pull post,
except where fabric is integrally woven into the post.
E. Tension and Brace Bands: 3/4-inch-wide minimum hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum of 1.2 oz.
of zinc coating per sq. ft.
1. Tension Bands: 0.074 inch thick (14 gage) minimum.
2. Brace Bands: 0.105 inch thick (12 gage) minimum.
F. Tension Wire: 0.177-inch-diameter metallic-coated steel marcelled tension wire conforming to ASTM
A 824 with finish to match fabric.
1. Coating Type II zinc in the following class as determined by ASTM A 90.
a. Class 1, with a minimum coating weight of 0.80 oz. per sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface.
G. Tie Wires: 0.106-inch-diameter (12-gage) galvanized steel with a minimum of 0.80 oz. per sq. ft. of zinc
coating according to ASTM A 641, Class 3 or 0.148-inch-diameter (9-gage) aluminum wire alloy
1350-H19 or equal, to match fabric wire.
2.4 CONCRETE
A. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33,
and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
3000 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch
maximum slump.
2.5 GATES
A. Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from same material and finish as fence framework. Assemble gate
frames by welding. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and
attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame members maximum of 8 feet apart unless
otherwise indicated.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Fabric: Same as for fence unless otherwise indicated. Secure fabric at vertical edges with tension
bars and bands and to top and bottom of frame with tie wires.
B. Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM F 900.
1. Steel: Gates up to 8 feet wide:
a. Over 6 Feet High: Fabricate perimeter frames of 1.90-inch minimum OD Type I or II
steel pipe.
2. Gate Hardware: Provide galvanized hardware and accessories for each gate according to the
following:
a. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180-degree
gate opening. Provide two pair of hinges for each leaf over 6-foot nominal height.
b. Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with
padlock eye as an integral part of latch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3. i INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fence to comply with ASTM F 567. Do not begin installation and erection before final
grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted.
1. Apply fabric to outside of framework. Install fencing at locations as indicated on plans.
B. Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate (using post-hole digger) holes for posts to diameters and spacings
indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil.
1.If not indicated on Drawings, excavate holes for each post to minimum diameter recommended
by fence manufacturer, but not less than four times the largest cross section of post.
2.Unless otherwise indicated, excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches lower than post bottom,
with bottom of posts set not less than 36 inches below finish grade surface.
C. Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Space a maximum
of 10 feet o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts and
vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in
position during placement and finishing operations.
a. Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 2 inches above grade and trowel to
a crown to shed water.
D. Top Rails: Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved hms and at other
posts terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail. Provide expansion
couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer.
E.Center Rails: Install center rails in one piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using rail
ends and special offset fittings where necessary.
F. Brace Assemblies: Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of comer and pull posts. Locate
horizontal braces at midheight of fabric on fences with top rail and at two thirds fabric height on fences
without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
G. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric before stretching fabric
and tie to each post with not less than same gage and type of wire. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten
fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch-diameter (11-gage) hog rings of same material and f'mish as fabric
wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches o.c.
H. Fabric: Leave approximately 2 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage unless otherwise
indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of
fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.
I. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, coruer, pull, and gate posts with
tension bands spaced not over 15 inches o.c.
J. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to secure fabric firmly to posts and rails. Bend ends of wire to
minimize hazard to persons or clothing.
1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches o.c. and to rails and braces 24 inches o.c.
K. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric
side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts for added security.
3.2 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in
concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. Install
gates according to manufacturer's instructions, plumb, level, and secure.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Gates: After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic,
readjust gates for optimum operating condition and safety. Lubricate operating equipment and clean
exposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 02831
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02910 - GENERAL PLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work under this section consists of furnishing all labor materials, equipment and services
~' required to complete fine grading, planting, and necessary appurtenances as shown on drawings
and described herein.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02812 - Irrigation System.
B. Section 02911 - Plant List.
C. Section 02921 - Tree Planting.
D. Section 02923 - Small Shrub and Groundcover Planting.
_~ E. Section 02932 - Seeded Lawns.
i .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish certificates of inspection of landscape materials, to accompany shipments, as required
by governmental authorities. Comply with applicable Federal, state, county and local
regulations governing landscape materials.
B. Contractor shall have at least three years experience in installing projects of similar size and be
able to furnish a list of previous jobs and references if requested by the Owner's Representative.
Contractor shall employ only skilled personnel and provide adequate supervision.
C. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit to Owner's
Representative proof of non-availability and proposal for use of equivalent material. When
authorized, adjustment of contract amount will be made.
1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Nursery Standards Institute Z60.1, Standards for Nursery Stock, May, 1986.
B. Hortus Third, 1976 - Cornell University. (plant nomenclature)
C. National Arborist Association Standards, National Arborist Association, latest edition.
-~ D. Federal Specification FS O-F-41 - Fertilizer, Mixed, Commercial.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Guarantee: Submit 3 copies of written guarantee, in the terms specified under guarantee
provisions of these specifications, signed by the Contractor.
B. Samples:
1. Submit samples of each plant for Owner's Representative approval. When approved,
· .- tag and maintain as representative samples for finally installed plant materials. Samples
may be used to complete installation, provided they remain tagged until final acceptance
GENERAL PLANTING 02910 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
of entire installation. Samples are to be brought to the project for Owner's
Representative approval.
2.Plants noted as "Specimen" on the plant schedule must be individually approved by the
Owner's Representative.
3. Submit for approval sufficient representative quantities of topsoil, prepared soil, and
product information on package materials and fertilizer. Samples shall be approved by
Owner's Representative before use on project.
4. Certification: For information only, submit 2 copies of certificates of inspection as
required by governmental authorities to accompany shipments. Submit manufacturer's
or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. Submit
other data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.
5. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of typewritten instructions recommending
procedures to be established by the Owner for the maintenance of landscape work for
one full year. Submit prior to expirations of Contractor's maintenance period(s)
required under the contract.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer.
Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site.
B. Plant Materials: Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed
and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and
shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist as follows:
1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, or other acceptable
material.
2. Do not remove container grown stock from containers until planting time.
3. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached
waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
C. Damage: Protect plant material in transit and at the site. Material not properly protected and
which is damaged will be rejected.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.
B. Cooperate with other Contractor's and trades working in and adjacent to the landscape work
areas. Examine drawings which show the development of the entire site and become familiar
with the scope of other work required.
C. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill,
adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Owner's Representative before planting.
D. Site Utilities:
1. Determine locations of underground utilities, especially site lighting, and perform work
in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Do not permit heavy equipment such as
trucks to damage utilities. Hand excavate, as required to minimize possibility of
damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is
mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned.
2. Coordinate work with the Irrigation Contractor and Electrical Contractor to prevent
damage to underground piping or conduit and similar obstruction work located in
landscape areas.
GENERAL PLANTING 02910 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E. Protections: Do not move any equipment over existing or newly placed concrete without
approval of Owner's Representative. Provide necessary protections such as board-roading as
required.
1.8 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee plants for one year after final acceptance. Replace dead materials and materials not
in vigorous, thriving condition as soon as weather permits and on notification by Owner's
Representative. Replace plants, including trees, which have partially died thereby damaging
shape, size or symmetry. Annual plants will be guaranteed for a period coinciding with their
normal season of growth.
B. Replace plants with same kind and sizes as originally planted, at no cost to the Owner. Provide
one year guarantee on replacement plants. At direction of Owner's Representative, plants may
be replaced at start of next year's planting or digging season. In such cases, remove dead plants
immediately. Protect irrigation system and any other piping, conduit or other work during
replacement. Repair any damage immediately.
C. Plants will be guaranteed to be true to species and variety or cultivar specified.
D. Guarantee excludes replacement of plants destroyed by catastrophic acts of nature.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Until final acceptance, maintain all plantings and trees by watering, cultivating, weeding,
controlling pests and diseases, cleaning and replacing as necessary to keep landscape in a
vigorous, healthy condition. Rake bed areas as required.
1. Watering: As necessary to promote growth. Water will be available on site. Provide
necessary hoses and other watering equipment required to complete work.
2. Watering Trees: Tree balls to be kept moistened to the depth of the tree ball.
3. Weeding: Remove weeds and foreign grass over plant areas at least once a week.
Herbicides may be used only when approved by Owner's Representative.
4. Cultivating: Cultivate bed areas to a depth of approximately three inches twice a
month. Care should be taken not to damage plant roots.
5. Mowing and Edging: Mow and edge newly planted lawns weekly when growth reaches
2 1/2 inches. Maintain at this height weekly.
1.10 PROTECTION
A. All items required to complete this contract remain the property and responsibility of the
Contractor until f'mal acceptance. Take adequate precautions to protect all work and materials
against damage. Cooperate fully with other trades to insure a satisfactory completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANTS
A. General: Plants shall be equal to well-formed No. 1 grade or better nursery stock, in
accordance with requirements of applicable standards as noted hereafter, subject to Owner's
Representative approval. The listed plant heights are from the top of the root ball to the nominal
top of the plant.
B. Plants shall conform to the sizes and quality notes in the plant list and/or indicated, with the
exception of that larger plants than those specified may be used if approved by the Owner's
Representative. Use of larger plants shall not increase the contract price. Specified sizes shall
GENERAL PLANTING 02910 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
be after pruning, and plants shall be measured with their branches in normal position.
C. Plants shall have normal, well-developed branches and vigorous, fibrous root systems, which
shall conform to the specifications of the last edition of ANSI Z60.1, Standards for Nursery
Stock published by the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. (A.A.N.).
D. Plants shall be healthy, vigorous and free from defects, decay, girdling roots, sun-scald injuries,
abrasions of the bark, plant diseases, and insect pests, their eggs and larvae.
E. Plants shall be hardy under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project.
F. If the Contractor becomes aware of any condition that will aversely affect the long-term survival
of any plant, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative before installation of the
plant(s).
G. Size: Provide trees and shrubs of the sizes shown or scheduled. Trees and shrubs of larger size
may be used if acceptable to Owner's Representative, in which case, increase size of roots or
balls proportionately.
H. Ornamental and Shade Trees: Healthy, vigorous, full-branched, well-shaped, with trunk
diameter and height requirements as specified. Balls shall be firm, neat, slightly tapered and
well-burlapped. Trees with loose or broken balls at time of planting shall be rejected. Trees
will be individually approved by the Owner's Representative. Balls shall be at least 10" in
diameter for each 1" of caliper measured 12" above the tree ball. Containers shall be of heavy
gauge plastic and wooden boxes only. Provide trees with full rounded crowns, meeting height
and spread standards after priming. No fiat sided trees or trees with open areas on any side will
be acceptable. Trees shall be consistently superior in form and branching, and typical of the
growth habit of their species unless otherwise specified.
I. Caliper is calculated as shown in the Section 02911 - Plant List.
J. Multi-trunk Trees: Measure multi-trunk tree caliper as follows. Add the caliper of the largest
trunk to one-half the calipers of the remaining trunks. (Example: an 8" caliper, multi-trunk
could be three trunks of 5"/4"/2" or 5"/3"/3").
K. Shrubs, Groundcovers: Nursery grown, healthy, vigorous, and of normal habit of growth for
the species.
L. Turf Grass Seed: Grass seed shall be free from weeds and foreign grasses, and shall meet
Texas State Seed Law requirements. Seed batch specifications shall be available for
examination. Seeding rates refer to pure live seed (PLS).
2.2 SOIL PREPARATION MATERIALS
A. Sandy Loam: Fertile, dark sandy loam free of rubble, stones, lumps, plant roots and
reasonably free of weeds.
B. Sharp Sand: Clean, washed sand, fine to coarse sizes.
C. Pine Bark: Decomposed pine bark shall have a pH between 6.0 and 7.0. The decomposed pine
bark shall be sterilized and contain no harmful active residues, i.e.. pesticides, disease
organisms and foreign chemicals. Pine bark will be screened to particle size of 1" or smaller.
D. Commercial Fertilizer: Complete fertilizer with an organic base, uniform in composition, dry
and free-flowing. Deliver fertilizer to site in original unopened containers, each bearing
manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis. Fertilizer shall contain 10 % nitrogen, 10 %
GENERAL PLANTING 02910 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- phosphoric acid, 5 % potash, unless otherwise specified or approved.
2.3 TREE STAKING AND GUYING MATERIALS
A. Hose: New 3/4" rubber hose.
B. Wire shall be #10 guage, galvanized.
C. Wood: Stakes shall be 2' x 2" pressure treated (LP 22 or better) southern yellow pine.
~-~ D. Warning tubes shall be orange plastic wire covers. The plastic sleeves shall cover the entire
wire.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Steel edging: Steel edging shall be 4 inches wide, 1/8" thick, painted dark green with
rust-resistant paint. Spikes shall be similar material, 18 inches long. Edging shall be equivalent
to that manufactured by Ryerson Company.
2.4 PLANT LIST
A. See Section 02911 - Plant List
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
-'- A. Contractor must examine the subgrade upon which work is to be performed, verify subgrade
elevations noted on the plans, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed, and
notify the Owner's Representative of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work
_ until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Contractor and
Owner's Representative.
3.2 CLEAN UP
A. During work, keep premises neat and orderly including organization of storage areas. Remove
trash, including debris resulting from removing weeds or rocks from planting areas, preparing
beds, or planting plants, from site daily as work progresses. Keep walk and driveway areas
clean by sweeping or hosing.
3.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. When the above requirements of the specifications have been fulfilled, the Contractor will
request Final Acceptance of the work. Areas that are not acceptable at this time shall continue
' under the Contractor's maintenance until Final Acceptance is given by the Owner's
Representative.
B. Refer to individual Sections 02921 - 02940 for specific installation requirements.
END OF SECTION 02910
GENERAL PLANTING 02910 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02911 - PLANT LIST
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The following is a list of all plant material required for this project.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02910 - General Planting.
B. Section 02921 - Tree Planting.
C. Section 02923 - Small Shrub and Groundcover Planting.
D. Section 02932 - Seeded Lawns.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANT LIST
A. Caliper shall be measured 6" above the root ball for trees less than 4" in caliper and 12" above the
rootball for tree 4" and above in caliper.
B. All trees may be either container grown or balled and burlapped unless only container is noted.
Botanic Name Common Nam~ Size Desgripti011
LARGE TREES
Quercus Shumardii Shumard Red Oak 4" - 4 1/2" cal. Balled and Burlapped.
Type 1 14' -16' height Single straight leader.
8' - 10' spread
Quercus Shumardii Shumard Red Oak 2" - 2 1/2" cal. Balled and Burlapped.
Type 2 9' -10' height Single straight leader.
4' - 5' spread
Ulmus crassifolia Cedar Elm 3 1/2" - 4" cal. Balled and Burlapped.
Type 1 15' - 17' height
12' - 14' spread
Ulmus crassifolia Cedar Elm 2 1/2" - 3" cal. Balled and Burlapped.
Type 2 I0' - 12' height
5' - 6' spread
ORNAMENTAL TREES
Lagerstroemia indica Single tnmk Natchez 6'-8' height Balled and Burtapped.
'Natchez White' Crape Myrtle 4'-5' spread Single tnmk.
Myrica cerifera Wax Myrtle 30 gallon Container.
1 1/4" - 1 1/2" cal.
7' - 9' height
5' - 6' spread Multi-trunk
SHRUBS
Ilex vomitoria 'Nana' Dwarf Yaupon Holly 3 gallon 24" on center
PLANT LIST 02911 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Botanic Name Common Name Size Description
GROUNDCOVER
Liriope Muscari 'Big Blue' Big Blue Liriope 4" pot 12" on center
Liriope Muscari Silvery Sunproof 4" pot 12" on center
'Silvery Sunproof' Liriope
Trachelospermum asiaticum Asian Jasmine 4" pot 12" on center
Minimum 4 runners
per pot
TURF
Buchloe dactyloides '609' 609 Buffalo grass Hydromulch
See Sect. 02931-02932 for description.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Refer to individual Sections 02921-02940 for specific installation requirements.
END OF SECTION 02911
PLANT LIST 02911 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- SECTION 02921 - TREE PLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 See Section 02910 - General Planting
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 See Section 02911 - Plant List
~ PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SOIL PREPARATION
A. General: Refer to the drawings for tree locations. The following backfill shall be done by
Contractor.
~ B. Backfill Soil: Unless noted in Plant List
1 part select native topsoil
1 parts decomposed pine bark
~- 1 part sharp sand
Add 4//fertilizer per 100 square feet of bed area and cultivate 6" deep.
3.2 TREE PLANTING
A. Location: Refer to planting plans for location of trees. Stake position of trees before pits are dug,
and label. Receive approval from Owner's Representative before proceeding.
B. General: Excavate pit. During pit excavation, if pit walls are glazed, roughen sides to allow for
good bond with backfill. Center trees, with root flare at or above finish grade and with trunk
_._ plumb. Position tree and receive approval from Owner's Representative before removing burlap
or backfilling. Remove top 1/3 of ball burlap immediately prior to backfilling pit (2 hour
maximum) and gently roughen exposed soil around ball, being careful not to damage feeder roots.
C. Size of tree pits: Plant in tree pits twice the diameter of the root balls and no deeper. Root ball
shall rest on undisturbed soil. Carefully settle by watering to prevent air pockets.
-- D. Do not lift trees by the trunk. Lift trees by the root ball only. If the contractor is observed lifting
trees by the trunk, the tree will be rejected.
_ 3.3 STAKING
A. Refer to planting details for placement of stakes.
'- B. Inspect hose and wire attachments regularly to evidence of girdling or other damage, and adjusted
before such damage occurs.
C. At direction of Owner's Representative, some trees shall be left unstaked for reasons of sheltered
location or large relative size of root ball.
D. Trees under 6" caliper: Use three or more wires with turnbuckles, attached to the tree by loops of
wire covered by 3/4" rubber hose, and secured around the lowest crotch. Wire shall be anchored
to the ground by 2" x 2" treated pine stakes, 24" in length minimum, driven into the ground to a
depth of 20" minimum.
TREE PLANTING 02921 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.4 MULCHING
A. After work of planting has been completed and approved by Owner' s Representative, mulch
soil in and around tree pit with 2" of shredded cypress bark, lightly cultivated into area. Do
not disturb watering saucer, and do not cover root flare. Delay this operation until near f'mal
inspection.
END OF SECTION 02921
TREE PLANTING 02921 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02923 - SMALL SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 See Section 02910 - General Planting
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 See Section 02911 - Plant List
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SOIL PREPARATION
A. Backfill Soil: Unless noted in Plant List
1 part select native topsoil
1 parts decomposed pine bark
1 part sharp sand
Add 4# fertilizer per 100 square feet of bed area and cultivate 6" deep.
B. Soil is at final grade. Contractor is responsible for removing excess topsoil. Excess topsoil may
be distributed on site.
3.2 SPACING AND PLANTING SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS
A. Place plants in position on bed areas before containers or burlap have been removed. Obtain
approval from Owner's Representative. Remove cans, remove top 1/3 burlap from balled and
burlapped plants. Plant where located and approved, setting plants with root flares or surface of
soil in container at or slightly above finish grade, and compact soil carefully around each plant
ball. Water each plant thoroughly with hoses to eliminate air pockets. Carefully prune plants to
remove dead or broken branches and hand-rake bed areas to smooth, even surfaces. Owner's
Representative reserves the right to interchange or shift locations of plants prior to planting.
3.3 MULCHING
A. After work of planting has been completed and approved by Owner' s Representative, mulch soil
in and around planting with 2" of shredded cypress bark, lightly cultivated into area. Delay this
operation until near final inspection.
END OF SECTION 02923
SMALL SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING 02923 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02932 - SEEDED LAWNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 See Section 02910 - General Planting
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 See Section 02911 - Plant List
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINE GRADING
A. Lawn areas shall be loosened and fine raked to break up lumps and produce a smooth,
even grade free from unsightly variations, ridges or depressions. Stones 1/2" or larger,
sticks, root or other debris that is exposed during this operation shall be removed from the
site and legally disposed of by the Contractor. Fine grading shall be subject to approval
by the Owner's Representative. Contractor to insure positive drainage away from
building at all lawn areas adjacent to the building.
3.2 TILLING/GRADING
A. The Contractor shall provide sufficient final grading and seed bed preparation to provide a
smooth, even grade suitable for a f'me, even lawn, graded approximately 1" below top of
curbs and walks. Note that a lawn sprinkler system may have been installed, in which
case it will be necessary to stake heads and to take necessary measures to prevent damage
to system. Unless it has rained at least one inch within 24 hours prior to planting, water
lawn areas thoroughly to provide a moist, not wet, bed before planting. Lawn areas will
be mechanically graded by other trades.
3.3 LAWN SEEDING
A. Preparing soil: Remove rocks, weeds, debris from area to be seeded. Work up soil to a
depth of 4 inches, and break up all clods. Soil prep all areas as noted elsewhere in
specifications.
B. Grading and Rolling: Carefully smooth all surfaces to be seeded. Roll area to expose soil
depressions or surface irregularities.
C. Fertilizing: Spread Turf Fertilizer (10-20-10) onto the soil evenly at the rate of ten
pounds per 1,000 square feet of lawn area. Rake in lightly. Be sure soil is level and
smooth before seeding. Avoid seeding on dry soil.
D. Buffalo Grass Hydromulching.
1. Hydromulch to insure to 100% coverage:
2. Do not seed Buffalo before 1 May or after 15 August.
3. Do not seed Buffalo on any slope over 5 % slope unless noted on the drawings.
4. Eliminate weeds from all areas to be seeded either mechanically or chemically.
5. Hydromulch Buffalo grass seed over entire area to be grassed using five (5)
pounds P.L.S. per 1,000 square feet.
6. Rake seed into soil to a depth of 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch.
7. Water all seeded areas in a fashion that will keep the seeds moist 24 hours a day,
for a period of 15-25 days. Do not allow areas to become dry, or water to the
extent that seed will be lost by erosion.
SEEDED LAWNS 02932 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E. Alternate Bid Item: Rye Grass Hydromulching.
1. Hydromulch to insure to 100% coverage:
2. Seed rye before 15 March, 1995.
3. Do not seed Rye on any slope over 10% slope unless noted on the drawings.
4. Eliminate weeds from all areas to be seeded either mechanically or chemically.
5. Lightly till the soil to a depth of 2", removing all rocks and smooth grade.
6. Hydromulch Rye grass seed over entire area to be grassed using eight (8) pounds
P.L.S. per 1,000 square feet.
7. Rake seed into soil to a depth of 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch.
8. Water all seeded areas in a fashion that will keep the seeds moist 24 hours a day,
for a period of 15-25 days. Do not allow areas to become dry, or water to the
extent that seed will be lost by erosion
9. Chemically remove all rye grass after 1 June, 1995 (not before). Turn off water
to all lawn areas.
10. Install Buffalo grass as specified above.
3.4 COMPLETION
A. Seeded lawns shall not be accepted until a full and complete stand of grass is established
in the project area. The Contractor shall reseed areas which are incomplete.
END OF SECTION 02932
SEEDED LAWNS 02932 - 2
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design,
placement procedures, and f'mishes.
B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:
1. Grade beams and piers.
2. Slabs-on-grade.
3. Equipment pads and bases.
4. Slab over cells.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for concrete paving and walks.
2. Division 2 Section "Caissons" for concrete piers.
3. Division 3 Section "Special Concrete Finishes" for mechanically processed finishes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake f'mish
materials, and others if requested by Architect.
C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement.
Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures"
showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete
reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures.
1. Architect's review is for general architectural applications and features only. Designing
formwork for structural stability and efficiency is Contractor's responsibility.
D. Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, sources, and descriptions, as
follows:
1. Normal weight aggregates.
2. Vapor retarder/barrier.
E. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards,
except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings."
2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
B. Concrete Testing Service: Owner to engage a testing agency acceptable to Architect to perform
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work.
Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's
expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other
acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish
in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on
drawings.
B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Carton Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture-resistance, structurally sufficient
to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed
to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will
leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,
and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports
complying with CRSI specifications.
1.For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material
will not support chair legs.
2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms,
provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class l) or stainless steel
(CRSI, Class 2).
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single
source for exposed concrete.
1.For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use f'me or coarse aggregates that contain substances
that cause spalling.
2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce
concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used
when acceptable to Architect.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
required admixtures.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Air-Tite, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
b. Air-Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co.
c. Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace & Co.
_ d. MB-VR or Micro-Air, Master Builders, Inc.
e. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
f. Sika AER, Sika Corp.
-- F. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
-- a. Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp.
b. PSI N, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
c. Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co.
d. WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co.
e. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
f. Metco W.R., Metalcrete Industries.
g. Prokrete-N, Prokrete Industries.
_ h. Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp.
G. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
-- 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Super P, Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.
b. Cormix 200, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
-- c. Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Co.
d. WRDA 19 or Daracem, W.R. Grace & Co.
e. Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
f. Superslump, Metalcrete Industries.
-- g. PSPL, Prokrete Industries.
h. Sikament 300, Sika Corp.
_ H. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
__ a. Q-Set, Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co.
b. Lubricon NCA, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
c. Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co.
d. Daraset, W.R. Grace & Co.
~-- e. Pozzutec 20, Master Builders, Inc.
f. Accel-Set, Metalcrete Industries.
I. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
1. Products: Subject to complia~nce with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. PSI-R Plus, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
b. Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co.
c. Daratard-17, W.R. Grace & Co.
d. Pozzolith R, Master Builders, Inc.
e. Protard, Prokrete Industries.
f. Plastiment, Sika Corporation.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Reglets: Where sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are terminated in reglets, provide reglets
of not less than 0.0217-inch-thick (26-gage) galvanized sheet steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening
to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
B. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.0336 inch thick (22 gage)
with bent tab anchors. Fill slot with temporary filler or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of
concrete or debris.
C. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand.
D. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested according to
ASTM E 154, as follows:
1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 10 mils thick.
2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sealtight Premoulded
Membrane by W.R. Meadows, Inc.
E. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery as the
abrasive aggregate for a nonslip finish, with emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent
aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded,
packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.
F. Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Packaged dry combination of materials consisting of portland
cement, graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments, and plasticizing admixture. Use coloring
pigments that are finely ground nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement. Color as
selected by Architect from manufacturers' standards, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Conshake 600 Colortone, Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co.
b. Floorcron, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
c. Quartz Tuff, Dayton-Superior.
d. Surflex, Euclid Chemical Co.
e. Colorundum, A.C. Horn, Inc.
f. Quartz Plate, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
g. Colorcron, Master Builders, Inc.
h. Floor Quartz, Metalcrete Industries
i. Lithochrome Color Hardener, L.M. Scofield Co.
j. Harcol Redi-Mix, Sonneborn-Chemrex.
k. Hard Top, Symons Corp.
G. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing compound
complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq, meter
when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. A-H 3 Way Sealer, Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.
b. Spartan-Cote, The Burke Co.
c. Conspec #1, Couspec Marketing & Mfg. Co.
d. Sealco 309, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
e. Day-Chem Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp.
f. Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co.
g. Horn Clear Seal, A.C. Horn, Inc.
h. L&M Cure R, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
i. Masterlcure, Master Builders, Inc.
j. CS-309, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
k. Seal N Kure, Metalcrete Industries.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
1. Kure-N-Seal, Sonneborn-Chemrex.
m. Stontop CS2, Stonhard, Inc.
H. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.
1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Highseal, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
b. Sealco - VOC, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
c. Safe Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp.
d. Aqua-Cure, Euclid Chemical Co.
e. Dress & Seal WB, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
f. Masterkure 100W, Master Builders, Inc.
g. Vocomp-20, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
h. Metcure, Metalcrete Industries.
i. Stontop CS1, Stonhard, Inc.
3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field
experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing
agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.
2. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight.
B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days
prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been
reviewed by Architect.
C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as indicated on
drawings and schedules:
1. 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.58 maximum (non-air-
entrained), 0.46 maximum (air-entrained).
D. Water-Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water-cement
(W/C) ratios as follows:
1. Subjected to freezing and thawing: W/C 0.45.
E. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as
follows:
1. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 3 inches and not more than 5 inches.
2. Other concrete: Not more than 5 inches.
F. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when
characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant,
as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be
submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work.
2.6 AI~MIXTURES
A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in
concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10
deg C).
- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
C. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-
entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement
having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within the following limits:
1. Other concrete not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure, or to receive a
surface hardener: 2 to 4 percent air.
D. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict compliance with
manufacturer's directions.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is
above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with
placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
3.2 FORMS
A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static,
and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct
formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the
following ACI 347 limits:
1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view.
2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.
B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment,
location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets,
sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds,
bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials
to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste
from leaking.
C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide
crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top
forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf
wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for. easy removal.
D. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set
tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at
inconspicuous locations.
E. Chamfer exposed comers and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of
other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing
such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete.
Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms
and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
alignment.
3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing
Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as
specified.
1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and
concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or
destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.
D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either
direction.
3.4 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or
appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.
B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between
walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs.
C. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-grade to
form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8-inch wide by two-inch slab depth.
1. Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible
after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate.
2. If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 20 feet in either direction and
located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays,
third bays).
3.Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.5 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,
diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.
B. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through-wall
flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels,
relieving angles, and other conditions.
C. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated on drawings.
D. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
3.6 PREPARING FORM SURFACES
A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating
compound before placing reinforcement.
B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-
place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to
manufacturer's instructions.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel,
and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.
B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete," and as specified.
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on
concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot
be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid
segregation at its final location.
D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers,
place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-
spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete
complying with ACI 309.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the
machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into
preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to
set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete
and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix
to segregate.
E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section.
1.Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement, other embedded items and into comers.
2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or
darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to
beginning finishing operations.
3.Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or
Iow temperatures.
G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg
F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.
1.Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
2.Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
H. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength
of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placemem to
below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to
control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amoum of
-- mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Comractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel
temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding
in concrete.
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
_ humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable, to Architect.
3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
-- A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to
view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having
texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and
patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed f'mish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to
view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material
applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or
another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing
material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch defective areas with f'ms and other projections completely removed and smoothed.
C. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth-rubbed finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have
received smooth-formed finish treatment not later than I day after form removal.
-- 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until
producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created
by the rubbing process.
-- D. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Provide grout-cleaned finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have
received smooth-formed finish treatment.
1. Combine one pan portland cement to one and one-half parts frae sand by volume, and a
-- 50:50 mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding admixture and water to form
the consistency of thick paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement
in amounts determined by trial patches so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent
surfaces.
2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes.
Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray
for at least 36 hours after rubbing.
E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed
· surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping
or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious
finish flooring material, and where indicated.
1. After placing slabs, fimsh surface to tolerances of F(F) 15 (floor flatness) and F(L) 13
(floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains
where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes,
__ brooms, or rakes.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other
finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing,
membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated.
1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready
for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has
disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-
driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if
area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor
flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down
high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after
leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces
to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin ~m-fmish
coating system.
1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin fmal
troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by fmal hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor
flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind
smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar,
apply a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly scarifying the surface with
a fmc broom.
E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and
ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-
bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with
Architect before application.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades,
unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure
concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete
filling shown or required to complete Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green
and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with comers, intersections, and terminations
slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown
on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and
during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's
instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.
B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and
finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.
C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover
curing, or by combiulng these methods, as specified.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
-- D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
2. Use continuous water-fog spray.
-- 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with
water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete
surfaces and edges, with a 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
E. Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows:
1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest
-- practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape
or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
-- F. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as
follows:
1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete
-- (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions.
Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain
.~ continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish
materials applied directly to concrete.
__ G. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure u_n. formed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat
surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method.
1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive f'mish flooring with a moisture-retaining cover,
-- unless otherwise directed.
3.12 REMOVING FORMS
- A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and
similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10
deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged
by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
3.13 REUSING FORMS
._ A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new
form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.
B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins
and laltance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use
patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.
3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after
removing forms, when acceptable to Architect.
B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts f'me aggregate passing
h No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left
by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with
~ _. water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar
before bonding agent has dried.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement
so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at
inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects
cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture
irregularities, cracks, spails, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on
the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form
tie holes and f'fll with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding
agent.
1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the
concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness
and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as
specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using
a template having the required slope.
1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability.
Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to
the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width,
spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
2.Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14
days.
3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface
f'mishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish
repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may
be used when acceptable to Architect.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance ail around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix
patching concrete of same materiais to provide concrete of same type or class as original
concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in
same manner as adjacent concrete.
E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack method.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles.
Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Place dry-pack before bonding
agent has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep
patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
F. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using
specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.
G. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
3.15 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports.
B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following, as
directed by Architect.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C 94.
a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each
type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have
changed.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight
concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for
each day' s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
for each set of compressive-strength specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for
each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store
cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test
specimens are required.
e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding
5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu. yd. of
each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two
specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing
if required.
2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of
concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch
if fewer than five are used.
3. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for
protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
4. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no
individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500
psi.
C. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, and
Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing
service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength
at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of
break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test
results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the
structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of
concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
END OF SECTION 03300
__ CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 03345 - SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide special finishes on cast-in-place concrete work as scheduled specified.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. See Division 3 Section "Concrete" for standard concrete finishes
1.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect exposed concrete finishes from damage and soiling by other trades. Mask surfaces with
polyethylene film as required.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor must have a minimum of 5 years experience with colored and stained concrete work.
B. The only approved concrete finishers for this project are Mobley Speed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SAMPLES
A. Construct a 8' x 8' panel of flatwork showing the finish types. Include score joints and
expansion joints.
B. Approved sample panel may be incorporated into the completed work.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Chemical stain manufactured by L.M. Scofield 1-800-222-4107. 1. Special paving No. 1 - Pecan Tan
2. Special paving No. 2 - Terra Cotta
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE FINISHES
A. Preparation: As soon as forms are removed, remove undesired f'ms and other projections.
Immediately saturate voids or damaged places with water and repair with mortar of same
composition as used in mix. Apply applicable finish as specified below, where scheduled and
shown on drawings.
B. Broom Finish: Surfaces will be jitterbugged or tamped, screeded to proper elevation, then
floated with wood floats to obtain a tight wood float finish. Prior to f'mal set of concrete, brush
concrete surfaces with a soft bristly broom with grain runmng as directed, to a texture as
approved by Landscape Architect.
C. Expansion Joints: As per City of Coppell Standard Specifications, sizes noted on plans.
D. Score Joints: Score joints shall be troweled and as noted on plans.
SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES 03345 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E. Install concrete per manufacturer's requirements.
F. See plan for locations of special f'mishes.
3.3 PATCHING
A. Patch defective areas which do not match approved finish samples.
B. Clean damaged areas, chip out defective areas, and patch with a mixture of white and
gray cement, aggregate and bonding agent, so as to match color of surrounding areas.
Finish to match adjacent surfaces, and cure.
END OF SECTION 03345
SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES 03345 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY
PART ! - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
__ Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
-- 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
-- 1. Concrete unit masonry.
2. Brick unit masonry.
3. Reinforced unit masonry.
_ 4. Masonry waste disposal.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
~ 1. Division 4 Section "Glass Unit Masonry" for glass block.
2. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for exposed sheet-metal flashing installed
in masonry.
3. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for gutter and downspout for mockup.
-- 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joint.
5. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for wall vents.
C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include the following:
1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors installed under Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
_ 2. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame installed
under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
D. Products installed but not furmshed under this Section include the following:
1. Steel lintels for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
2. Steel shelf angles for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
3. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry specified in Division 6 Section "Rough
· -- Carpentry."
4. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing specified in Division 7 Section
"Flashing and Sheet Metal."
5. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section "Standard
Steel Doors and Frames."
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days.
1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: As follows, based on net area:
a. f'm = 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).
2. For Brick Unit Masonry: As follows, based on gross area:
a. f'm = 1500 psi (10.3 MPa).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each different masonry umt, accessory, and other manufactured product specified.
C. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement"
showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry
reinforcement.
D. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing the full range of
exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction.
a. Include size-variation data for Type FBX and Type FBS brick, verifying that
actual range of sizes for brick falls within ASTM C 216 dimension tolerances.
2. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color.
3. Accessories embedded in the masonry.
E. Material certificates for the following, signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each
material complies with requirements.
1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of
manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery.
2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
3. Each type and size of joint reinforcement.
4. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
F. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by Contractor
or manufacturer, indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following
proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated:
1. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270.
2. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.
3. Masonry units.
G. Qualification data for fro'ns and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified professional engineer to provide a survey and inspection
of foundations for compliance with dimensional tolerances.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming
to ASTM C 1093, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing
indicated without delaying the Work.
C. Preconstruction Testing: Employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the
following preconstruction testing to establish compliance of proposed materials and construction
with specified requirements:
1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each different clay masonry unit indicated, test units per
ASTM C 67.
2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each different concrete masonry unit indicated, test units
for strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 140.
3. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, test masonry prisms per
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- ASTM E 447, Method B.
4. Test mortar properties per test methods of ASTM C 270.
5. Evaluate mortar composition and properties per ASTM C 780.
6. Test grout compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.
D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting
_ agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
E. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform
-- texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one
source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required.
F. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
-- including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and
from one source or producer for each aggregate.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other
~ causes. If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air-dried condition.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
-- C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and
-- oil.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof
sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not
in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely
in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
-- secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe
and hold cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3
days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
_ exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on
-- ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
-- 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
- frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Cold-Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within the limits indicated,
use the following procedures:
a. 40 to 32 deg F (4 to 0 deg C): Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C).
b. 32 to 25 deg F (0 to -4 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials
to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C).
Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry.
c. 25 to 20 deg F (-4 to -7 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials
to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C).
Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masoury. Heat masonry
units to 40 deg F (4 deg C) if grouting. Use heat on both sides of walls under
construction.
d. 20 deg F (-7 deg C) and Below: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials
to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C).
Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry
units to 40 deg F (4 deg C). Provide enclosures and use heat on both sides of
walls under construction to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C)
within the enclosures.
2. Cold-Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within the limits indicated,
provide the following protection:
a. 40 to 25 deg F (4 to -4 deg C): Cover masonry with a weather-resistant
membrane for 48 hours after construction.
b. 25 to 20 deg F (-4 to -7 deg C): Cover masonry with insulating blankets or
provide enclosure and heat for 48 hours after construction to prevent freezing.
Install wind breaks when wind velocity exceeds 15 mi./h (25 kin/h).
c. 20 deg F (-7 deg C) and Below: Provide enclosure and heat to maintain
temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosure for 48 hours after
construction.
3. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less
than 7 days after completion of cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and bnmidity conditions
produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind
breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures
of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Concrete Masonry Units:
a. Any manufacturer meeting the requirements.
2. Brick:
a. Acme Brick Co.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
b. Belden Brick Co.
c. Cherokee Sanford Group, Inc.
d. Cushwa: Victor Cushwa & Sons, Inc.
e. D'Hanis Brick and Tile Co.
f. Endicott Clay Products Co.
g. Glen-Gery Corporation.
h. Henderson Brick.
i. Merry Brothers Brick & Tile Co.
j. Pacific Coast Building Products; Interstate Brick Div.
k. Robinson Brick Co.
1. Summit Brick & Tile.
3. Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime:
a. Essroc Materials, Inc.
b. Glen-Gery Corporation.
c. Lafarge Corporation.
d. Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
e. Riverton Corporation (The).
4. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors:
a. AA Wire Products Co.
b. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
c. Heckman Building Products, Inc.
d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
e. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America.
f. National Wire Products Industries.
g. Southern Construction Products.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding,
and other special conditions.
2. Provide bullnose units for outside comers, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength indicated below:
a. 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).
b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit
masonry construction of compressive strength indicated.
2. Weight Classification: Normal weight.
3. Aggregates: Do not use aggregates made from pumice, scoria, or mfr.
4. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units.
5. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within tolerances specified in
the applicable referenced ASTM specification) for the corresponding nominal sizes
indicated on Drawings:
a. 8 inch (200 mm) nominal: 7-5/8 inch (194 mm) actual.
6. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 BRICK
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
I. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills
and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick
surfaces.
B. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed
surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
1.Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special
conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.
2.Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in
sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
C. Face Brick: ASTM C 216 and as follows:
1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with grade and minimum average
net-area compressive strength indicated below:
a. Grade: SW.
b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce clay masonry
construction of compressive strength indicated.
2.Initial Rate of Absorption: Between 5 and 20 g/30 sq. in. (g/194 sq. cm) per minute when
tested per ASTM C 67.
3. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand-f'mished brick,
shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable
difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet (3 m).
4.Type: FBX.
5.Size: Bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within tolerances specified
in ASTM C 216:
a. Modular: 3-I/2 to 3-5/8 inches (89 to 92 mm) thick by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm)
high by 7-1/2 to 7-5/8 inches (190 to 194 mm) long.
b. 3-1/2 to 3-5/8 inches (89 to 92 mm) thick by 7-1/2 to 7-5/8 inches (190 to 194
mm) high by %1/2 to 7-5/8 inches (190 to 194 mm) long.
6. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Color and Texture: Refer to Section 00861 - DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm), use aggregate
graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve.
1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other
sound stone, as required to match Architect's sample.
D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
E. Ready-Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements
specified in this Article; combined with set-controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar
complying with ASTM C 1142.
F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
G. Water: Potable.
H. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cold-Weather Admixture:
a. Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Morset; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co.
2.5 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows:
1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 615M).
2. Epoxy-coated billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 615M) and
ASTM A 775 (ASTM A 775M).
a. Grade 60 (Grade 400).
B. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A 496, with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 zinc coating.
C. Welded-Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185.
2.6 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following:
1. Galvanized carbon-steel wire, coating class as follows:
a. ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1, for interior walls; and ASTM A 153,
Class B-2, for exterior walls.
b. ASTM A 153, Class B-2, for both interior and exterior walls.
B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross
rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated comer and tee units, and
complying with requirements indicated below:
1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 nun).
2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm).
C. For single-wythe masonry, provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:
1. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm)
D. For multiwythe masonry, provide type as follows:
1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
a. Number of Side Rods for Multiwythe Concrete Masonry: One side rod for each
face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches (100 mm) in width, plus
1 side rod for each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 nun) or less in width.
b. Provide integral drips on cross rods at cavity walls.
2. Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box-type cross ties spaced not
more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c., with side rods spaced for embedment within each face
shell of back-up wythe and ties extended to engage the outer wythe by at least 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm).
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements
for metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wire: As follows:
1. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.
2. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm).
C. Steel Sheet: As follows:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 60 (ASTM A 526M, Z 180) (commercial
quality), steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication,
for sheet-metal ties and anchors in interior walls and in exterior walls when completely
embedded in mortar.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet Thickness: For steel sheet hot-dip galvanized by continuous process prior
to fabrication:
1. 0.0635 inch (1.6 mm).
E. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM
A 153, Class B-l, B-2, or B-3, as applicable to size and form indicated.
2.8 BENT WIRE TIES
A. Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to comply with requirements indicated below:
1.Tie Shape for Hollow Masonry Units Laid with Cells Vertical: Rectangular with closed
ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide.
2.Type for Masonry Where Coursing Between Wythes Aligns: Unit ties bent from one piece
of wire.
3. Type for Masonry Where Coursing Between Wythes Does Not Align: Adjustable ties
composed of 2 parts; one with pintles, the other with eyes; maximum misalignment of 1-
1/4 inches (32 mm).
2.9 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STRUCTURAL FRAME
A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies as described below, allowing vertical or horizontal differential
movement between wall and frame parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression
forces perpendicular to it.
1. For anchorage to steel framing, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with crimped 1/4-
inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and triangular-shaped
wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face and as follows:
a. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm).
2.10 RIGID ANCHORS
A. General: Fabricate from steel bars as follows:
1. 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick by 24 inches (600 mm) long, with
ends turned up 2 inches (50 mm) or with cross pins.
2.11 ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS
A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between
wall and wall framing parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces
perpendicular to it, for attachment over sheathing to metal studs, and with the following structural
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- performance characteristics:
1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-1bf (445-N) load
in either tension or compression without deforming over, or developing play in excess of,
'- 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
B. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal
_ anchor section complying with the following requirements:
1. Wire Tie Shape: Triangular.
2. Wire Tie Length: As required to extend 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into masonry wythe of
-- veneer face.
3. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet-metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, 0.0747
inch (1.9 into) thick by 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) wide by 3 inches (75 mm) high; fabricated
into tee shape with 2 projecting tabs, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide by 1 inch (25 mm) long; with
-- slotted holes for connection of vertical legs of triangular wire tie specially formed to fit
anchor section.
C. Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and
neoprene washer, No. 10 (4.8-mm) diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by not
less than 3 exposed threads, and with the following corrosion protective coating:
1. Organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per
ASTM B 117.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron inserts of type and size indicated.
B. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from
-- 0.0336-inch (0.85-mm), galvanized steel sheet.
C. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class
4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip
galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the
following configurations:
- 1. Headed bolts.
2. Nonheaded bolts, straight.
3. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated.
- D. Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, load
imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
- 1. Type: Expansion anchors.
2. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying.with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A,
- Grade 1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the
following material:
1. Neoprene.
- 2. Urethane.
3. Polyvinyl chloride.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block
'-- and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Styrene-Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805.
2. Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade, Type PVC-65406.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Weep Holes: Provide the following:
1. Rectangular Plastic Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3 inches (9 by 38 by 76 mm).
2. Wicking Material: Material as indicated below, in length required to produce 2-inch (50-
mm) exposure on exterior and 18 inches (450 mm) in cavity between wythes:
a. Cotton sash cord.
2.14 INSULATION
A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular, polystyrene thermal insulation with closed
cells and integral high-density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an
extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV; in manufacturer's standard lengths and
widths; and in thicknesses indicated.
B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.
2.15 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium
polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of
water.
B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner designed
for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new
masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masom'y surfaces;
expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a
concentrated blend of surface-acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents.
2. For dark-colored masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation
consisting of a liquid blend of surface-acting acids and special inhibitors.
3. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid
blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors.
4. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be used
to clean unit masonry surfaces include, but are not limited to, the following:
5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. 202 New Masonry Detergent; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. 200 Lime Solv; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
c. 202V Vana-Stop; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
d. Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc.
e. Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent; ProSoCo., Inc.
f. Sure Klean Vana Trol; ProSoCo, Inc.
2.16 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,
water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of weather
conditions, in order to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification, for job-mixed
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 10
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
mortar; and ASTM C 1142 for ready-mixed mortar, of types indicated below:
1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
2. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use type indicated
below:
a. Type: S.
3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use type indicated below:
a. Type: S.
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions, and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use type indicated below:
a. Type: N.
C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, of consistency (f'me or coarse) at time of placement that will completely fill
spaces intended to receive grout.
1. Use f'me grout in grout spaces less than 2 inches (50 mm) in horizontal dimension, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2 inches (50 mm) or more in least horizontal dimension,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.17 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested per ASTM C 67 except
5 bricks will be selected at random for each 100,000 units or fraction thereof installed.
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be
tested for strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 140.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of unit masora'y.
B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of
thickness indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the
Specifications.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 11
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as
required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without
cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless
wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges
concealed.
E. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce
uniform blend of colors and textures.
F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick prior to laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.
(g/194 sq. cra) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb the water so they
are damp but not wet at the time of laying.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arrises, do not exceed
1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet (I0 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet
(12 mm in 12 m) or more. For external comers, expansion joints, control joints, and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm
in 12 m) or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in
10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor I/2 inch
in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch (3
mm) in 10 feet (3 m), nor 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) within width of a single unit.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns,
walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet (12 mm in 6 m), nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19
mm in 12 m) or more.
D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions
shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) nor plus 1/2 inch (12 mm).
E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated by more than
plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not
vary bed-joint thickness from bed-joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Do not vary from head-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do
not vary head-joint thickness from adjacent head-joint thickness by more than I/8 inch (3 mm). Do
not vary from collar-joint thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) or plus 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths
and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use
of less-than-half-size units at comers, jambs, and where possible at other locations.
B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and
coordinated with other construction.
C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not
use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs.
1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above
and below.
2. Stack bond at 8inch by 8 inch by 8 inch units.
D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than
2 inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at comers. Do not use units with
less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 12
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back l/2-unit length for one-half running bond
or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry,
wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to
laying fresh masonry.
F. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other Sections
of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
G. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. At exterior frames, insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of frame
in thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) to act as a thermal break between
frame and masonry.
H. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal
lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
I. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above and as follows:
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
2. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,
or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches
final position.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and
pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed,
including areas under cells.
4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8-inch (10-mm) joints.
B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
1. At cavity walls, slope beds toward cavity to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As
work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against cavity face of brick.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls that are to receive plaster or other direct-applied f'mishes (other
than paint), unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY
A. Use individual metal ties installed in horizontal joints to bond wythes together. Provide ties as
shown, but not less than 1 metal tie for 4 sq. ft. (0.37 sq. m) of wall area spaced not to exceed 24
inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally and vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide
additional ties within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and space not more than 36 inches (915 mm)
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 13
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than
24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically.
B. Use continuous horizontal-joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie
between wythes.
C. Use either of the structural bonding systems specified above.
D. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at comers, unless otherwise
shown.
1. Provide continuity with horizontal-joint reinforcement at comers by using prefabricated
"L" units in addition to masonry bonding.
E. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture,
provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and space as follows:
1. Provide continuity with horizontal-joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units.
3.7 CAVITIES
A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing
cavkies flush.
1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work
progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.
2. Provide temporary opening by omitting 1 brick every 48 inches (1200 mm) at bottom of
cavity and in first course above flashing. After wall has been built to top of cavity and
mortar has set, flush out cavity with a hose, allow to dry, and then close temporary
opening.
B. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with continuous horizontal-joint reinforcing.
3.8 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. On units of plastic board insulation, place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches
(300 mm) o.c., both ways on inside face or attach to inside face with plastic fasteners designed for
this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity,
with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other
construction as shown.
1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and
masonry.
3.9 HORIZONTAL-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide continuous horizontal-joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of
longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of
walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet
walls.
3. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond opening.
a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 14
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- C. Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections.
Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets,
column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
-- 3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply
with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in width between masonry and
structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other
_ rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints
and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36
-- inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.
3.11 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
-- A. Anchor masonry veneers to metal studs with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following
requirements:
_ 1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to metal studs with 2 metal fasteners of type
indicated.
2. Fasten anchors through sheathing to metal studs with metal fasteners of type indicated.
3. Insert anchor section in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each
_ stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards.
4. Embed tie section in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2-inch (50-mm) air space
between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
5. Locate anchor section relative to course where tie section is embedded to allow maximum
-- vertical differential movement of tie up and down.
6. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 24
inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq.
m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at
-- intervals around perimeter not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm).
3.12 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated below. Build-in
related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints
unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.
1. Provide control joints at no more than 30 feet on center for walls less than 17 feet tall.
2. Provide control joints at no more than 50 feet on center for walls greater than 17 feet tall.
- B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
I. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of control
__ joint. Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.
Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint.
4. Install temporary foam plastic filler in head joints and remove when unit masonry is
complete.
C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:
1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches (100 mm)
in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal
expansion joints, if any.
--- 2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 15
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3. Build-in joint fillers where indicated.
4. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) for installation of
sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Maintain joint free
and clear of mortar.
D. Build-in horizontal pressure-relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an
air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod
specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Locate horizontal pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer
and attached to structure behind masonry veneer.
3.13 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for
brick size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block size units are shown without structural steel or
other supporting lintels.
1. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color,
texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcement bars indicated or required to
support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by same method as CMU.
2. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam
units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure
precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels
until cured.
3. Provide either of above at Contractor's option or provide precast or formed-in-place
concrete lintels complying with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.14 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other
obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated.
B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing.
Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in
flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering
with mortar.
C. Install flashing as follows:
1. At composite masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of
outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches (100
mm), and through the inner wythe to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of the interior face of the
wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring,
carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and mm up approximately 2 inches (50
mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through the veneer,
up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm), and behind air-infiltration barrier/building
paper.
3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) into masonry
at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and mm up not
less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan.
4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet-metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with
elastomeric sealant complying with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for
application indicated.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 16
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 5. Extend sheet-metal flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn
down to form a drip.
6. Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
-- D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing and as follows:
~_ 1. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section.
2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. maximum.
3. In cavities, place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2
inches (50 mm), immediately above top of flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry
-- construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage.
4. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities.
5. In insulated cavities, cover cavity side of open weep holes with copper or plastic insect
screening before placing loose-fill masonry insulation in cavity.
E. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.
F. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity. Space vents and close off
-- cavities vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.
1. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
G. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where shown to be built into
masonry.
-- 3.15 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry
elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently
tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain
__ position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient
strength to resist grout pressure.
~- 1. Do not exceed the following pour heights for frae grout:
a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3/4 inch (19 mm) or for minimum grout
space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches (38 by 51 mm), pour height of 12
inches (305 mm).
b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches (51 mm) or for minimum grout
space of hollow umt cells of 2 by 3 inches (51 by 76 mm), pour height of 60
~_ inches (1524 mm).
c. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) or for minimum
grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches (63 by 76 mm), pour height
of 12 feet (3.6 m).
-- d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches (76 mm) or for minimum grout
space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm), pour height of 24 feet
(7.3 m).
~- 2. Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout:
a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-i/2 inches (38 mm) or for minimum
grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches (38 by 76 mm), pour height
-- of 12 inches (305 mm).
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 17
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches (51 mm) or for minimum grout
space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches (63 by 76 mm), pour height of 60
inches (1524 nun).
c. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) or for minimum
grout space of hollow unit ceils of 3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm), pour height of
12 feet (3.6 m).
d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches (76 mm) or for minimum grout
space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 4 inches (76 by I01 mm), pour height of 24 feet
(7.3 m).
3. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches (76 mm) in least dimension for grout pours over
60 inches (1524 mm) in height.
a. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar.
b. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches (813
mm) O.c.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed during
construction for each 5000 sq. ft. (460 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.
B. Mortar properties will be tested per property specification of ASTM C 270.
C. Mortar composition and properties will be evaluated per ASTM C 780.
D. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.
E. Prism-Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated, masonry prisms will be tested
per ASTM E 447, Method B, and as follows:
1. Prepare 1 set of prisms for testing at 7 days and 1 set for testing at 28 days.
F. Evaluation of Quality-Control Tests: In the absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from construction quality-control
tests comply with minimum requirements indicated.
3.17 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged
or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh
mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely
fill with mortar. Point-up joints, including comers, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide
a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for application of sealants.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar
f'ms and smears prior to tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3.Protect adjacent stone and nonmasom'y surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene f'flm, or waterproof masking tape.
4.Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 18
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 5. Clean brick by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note
No. 20 Revised, using the following masonry cleaner:
a. Job-mixed detergent solution, or
-- b. Proprietary acidic cleaner, applied in compliance with directions of acidic cleaner
manufacturer.
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to
type of stain present on exposed surfaces.
E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without
_. damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.18 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
-- A. Recycling: Undamaged, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property and shall be removed
from the Project site for his use.
B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's
property.
END OF SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 19
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- SECTION 04270 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
-- 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
-- 1. Exterior panels.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
-- 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for brick and concrete unit masonry.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealants installed in joints of glass unit masonry.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified including glass block, cementitious materials,
waterproofing admixtures for mortar, and glass umt masonry accessories.
-- c. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's actual glass block units for each form,
pattern, and color indicated.
1. Samples showing full range of mortar colors available.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
_ A. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass Block: Obtain each type and pattern of glass block from a single
source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying progress of the Work.
_ B. Single-Source Responsibility for Accessory Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality
from one manufacturer for each cementitious, admixture, and accessory component, and from one source
or producer for each aggregate.
- 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glass block during storage and construction from damage, soiling, and moisture. Store unopened
cartons in a clean, dry area in which temperatures are controlled to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Protect aggregate during storage and construction from wetting by rain, snow, and ground water, and
from intermixture with earth or other materials.
C. Protect cementitious materials and metal accessories from deterioration and corrosion by moisture and
other causes. Store in a dry location and in original packages.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Conditions: Proceed with installation of glass unit masonry only when ambient and material
~.- temperatures are 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and rising.
GLASS UNIT MASONRY 04270 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence and coordinate completion of glass unit masonry so that sealants and joint fillers can be installed
immediately after mortar has attained final set.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. l MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Hollow Glass Block:
a. Fidenza Vetraria SpA.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corp.
c. Saint-Gobain.
d. A.J. Weck GmbH u. Co.
e. Westerwald A.G.
2.2 GLASS BLOCK
A. Hollow Glass Block: Non-load-bearing blocks made by fusing together two halves of clear, colorless
pressed glass to produce partially evacuated hollow units with manufacturer's standard coating factory
applied on edge surfaces complying with the following requirements for pattern, size, and other
characteristics:
1. Translucent Patterns: Smooth outer faces, inner faces with manufacturer's standard translucent
pattern indicated below:
a. Light-diffusive wavy design.
2. Edge Coating Color:
a. Provide manufacturer's standard white-colored, latex-based edge coating.
3.Square Unit Sizes: Actual sizes as indicated below:
a. 11-3/4 inches square by 3-7/8 inches thick.
2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, color as follows:
1. Cement Color: White.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144 and as follows:
1. For joints 1/4 inch or less in thickness, provide aggregate graded for thin joints.
D. Water: Clean and potable.
2.4 GLASS UNIT MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Panel (Joint) Reinforcement: Ladder-type welded wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side
rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, and complying with the following
requirements:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire and ASTM A 153, Class B2 for
zinc coating applied by hot-dip process to products after fabrication and assembly.
a. Application: Use for reinforcement of exterior panels.
GLASS UNIT MASONRY 04270 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Wire Size: 0.1483-inch diameter.
3. Spacing of Side Rods: 2 inches center to center, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches apart.
B. Panel Anchors: Glass unit masonry manufacturer's standard perforated steel strips, 0.0359-inch uncoated
thickness by 1-3/4 inches wide by 24 inches long, and hot-dip galvanized after perforating to comply with
ASTM A 153, Class B2.
C. Backer rod and sealant are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
D. Plastic Foam Expansion Strips: Polyethylene foam, white in color, complying with requirements of glass
block manufacturer, and 3/8 inch thick by 4 inches wide by 24 inches long.
1. Use plastic foam expansion strips for non-fire-rated assemblies.
E. Dovetail Wire Ties: Trapezoidal-shaped ties of size indicated, fabricated from 3/16-inch-diameter steel
wire, complying with ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire and with ASTM A 641 for Class 3 zinc coating,
attached to 0.1046-inch-thick galvanized strap shaped to engage dovetail slot.
F. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A and, where indicated, fiat
washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal
to 4 times load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted
by a qualified independent testing laboratory.
1. Material: Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F
593 and ASTM F 594.
2.5 MORTAR MIXES
A. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by using admixtures or antifreeze agents. Do not use calcium
chloride.
B. Mortar for Glass Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, proportion specification for Type S
portland cement-lime mortar. Do not use masonry cement.
1. For mortar in exterior panels, include waterproofmg admixture in mortar mix according to
directions of admixture manufacturer.
C. Mix mortar to produce a stiff but workable consistency that is drier than mortar for ordinary unit
masonry; do not retemper mortar after it has taken its initial set.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine sills, jambs, and heads surrounding glass unit masonry panels to verify that they are complete
and of correct size and in correct location to receive glass unit masonry.
B. Do not proceed with installation of glass unit masonry until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Advise Installer of other construction about specific requirements relating to placement of dovetail slots
and other inserts required to anchor and support glass unit masonry. Furnish Installers of other
construction with drawings or templates showing locations of these items.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Construction Tolerances: Set glass unit masonry to comply with the following tolerances:
- GLASS UNIT MASONRY 04270 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Variation from Plumb: For lines and surfaces of vertical elements and arrises, do not exceed plus
or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, plus or minus 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or plus or minus 1/2 inch
maximum.
2.Variation from Level: For grades indicated for bed joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not
exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet or plus or minus i/2 inch maximum.
3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions of walls and
partitions, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, plus or minus 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or
plus or minus 1/2 inch maximum.
4.Variation in Alignment: For alignment between tops of walls and partitions and the bottom of
walls and partitions, do not exceed plus or minus 1/2 inch.
5.Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: For bed joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/8 inch, and
for head joints do not exceed minus 1/4 inch or plus 3/8 inch.
B. Sill, Head, and Jamb Preparation: Apply a heavy coat of asphalt emulsion to sill; allow to dry before
placing mortar. Place expansion strips at jambs and heads taking care to extend them to sill. Trim
4-inch-wide expansion strips to produce width required to fit thickness of glass block and construction
indicated.
3.4 SETTING GLASS UNIT MASONRY
A. General: Set first and succeeding courses of glass unit masonry with completely filled bed and head
mortar joints, with no furrowing.
B. Install glass unit masonry to comply with dimensional tolerances specified with courses accurately spaced
and coordinated with other construction; maintain the following joint widths:
I. Joint Widths: 3/8 inch unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install panel reinforcing in horizontal joints at spacing indicated and to run continuously from end to end
of panels; comply with the following requirements:
1. Vertical Spacing of Panel Reinforcing: As follows:
a. For exterior panels, every other course starting with first course above sill.
2. Do not bridge expansion joints with panel reinforcing.
3. Place panel reinforcing in joints immediately above and below all openings within glass unit
masonry panels.
4. Lap panel reinforcing not less than 6 inches where more than one length is necessary.
5. Embed panel reinforcing in mortar bed by placing lower half of mortar bed first, then pressing
panel reinforcing into place and covering with upper half of mortar bed, and then troweling it
smooth.
D. Install panel anchors at locations indicated and in same horizontal joints where panel reinforcing occurs.
Extend panel anchors at least 12 inches into joints and bend within expansion joints at edges of panels and
across the head. Attach panel anchors as follows:
1. For new unit masonry, embed other ends of panel anchors, after bending portions crossing
expansion joint, in horizontal mortar joints closest in elevation to joints in glass unit masonry
containing panel anchors.
2.For steel members, attach panel anchors with 1/4-inch-diameter steel bolts in tapped holes in steel
members.
E. Use rubber mallet to tap units into position. Do not use steel tools, and do not allow units to come into
contact with metal accessories and frames.
F. Keep expansion joints free of mortar.
G. Rake out mortar from joints in exterior panels to a uniform depth equal to joint width to accommodate
pointing material.
GLASS UNIT MASONRY 04270 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- H. Pointing of joints in exterior walls with sealant, including installation of joint fillers after final mortar set,
is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
I. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint width; perform tooling while mortar
-- is still plastic and before it takes final set.
J. Remove wedges, if used, and fill voids with mortar.
K. Remove surplus mortar from face of glass block at time joints are tooled. Remove mortar while it is still
plastic using a clean wet sponge or an ordinary household scrub brush with stiff bristles. Do not use
harsh cleaners, acids, abrasives, steel wool, or wire brushes when removing mortar or cleaning glass unit
_ masonry.
L. Install expansion strips at jambs, heads, mullions, and other locations indicated.
-- M. Vent Air Space to the outdoor air between double glass block panels through breather tubes located at
both top and bottom of the space. Breather tubes to contain glass wool to act as a filter to keep dust and
dirt out of the air space.
-- 3.5 CLEANING
A. Perform £mal mortar removal by cleaning completed glass unit masonry surfaces with clean wet sponge
or cloth. Rinse sponge or cloth frequently in clean water to remove abrasive particles. Allow any
remaining film on block to dry to a powder.
B. On surfaces adjacent to glass unit masonry remove mortar and other residue resulting from installation
._ of glass block in a manner that is approved by the manufacturers of the materials involved.
C. Remove excess sealants with commercial solvents of type recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Exercise care not to damage sealant in joints.
D. Perform final cleaning of glass unit masonry when surface is not exposed to direct sunlight. Start at top
of panel using generous amounts of clean water. Remove water with clean, dry, soft cloths; change
cloths frequently to eliminate dried mortar particles and aggregate.
E. Remove mortar and/or excess sealant from ends of breather tubes.
-- END OF SECTION 04270
GLASS UNIT MASONRY 04270 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- SECTION 04720 - CAST STONE
PART i - GENERAL
-- 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or indicated
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes all Cast Stone units in shapes as shown on architectural drawings.
B. Install all units in accordance with jointing patterns as shown on architectural drawings and as described in
this specification.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of manufacturer: Shall have a minimum of 5 years continuous operation and have adequate
facilities for producing and curing machine-made Cast Stone as described herein.
B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as
otherwise shown or specified:
-- 1. Cast Stone Institute Standard Specification 04435-90.
2. ASTM C 150 - Specification for Portland cement.
3. ASTM C 33 - Specification for concrete aggregates.
4. ASTM C 979 - Specification for coloring pigments.
-- 5. ASTM C 494 - Specification for concrete admixtures.
6. ASTM C 615 - Specification for reinforcing bars.
7. ASTM C 1194 - Test method for compressive strength of cast stone.
._ 8. ASTM C 1195 - Test method for absorption of cast stone.
9. CIELAB 1976 - Standards for measuring color variation.
C. Testing: Test three specimens per 500 cubic feet at random from plant production in accordance with
-- referenced standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
-- A. Submit for approval the following:
1. Samples of the Cast Stone specified which will be representative of the general range of color and finish
to be furnished.
2. Test results of machine-made stone previously made by the manufacturer.
3. List of jobs furnished by the manufacturer which were similar in scope.
_ B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Copies of shop drawings showing details of the stone shapes to be provided including: profiles, cross-
sections, reinforcement, exposed faces, typical lengths, corner units, anchoring methods, anchors,
-- annotation of stone types and a description of where the unit is to be used.
2. Unless otherwise shown:
a. Provide suitable wash on all exterior sills, coping, projecting courses and pieces with exposed top
surfaces.
b. Provide drips as needed.
c. After approval of shop drawings, submit a schedule of quantities to the setting contractor for
coordination.
CAST STONE 04720 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cast Stone manufactured building stone.
1. Physical properties: Provide the following:
a. Compressive Strength, ASTM C 1194; 6500
b. Absorption, ASTM C 1195: 6% max.
2. Raw Materials:
a. Portland cement - Type I or III, white and/or grey, ASTM C 150.
b. Coarse aggregates - Granite, quartz or limestone, ASTM C 33.
c. Fine aggregates - Manufactured or natural sands. ASTM C33.
d. Colors - Inorganic iron oxide pigments, ASTM C 979.
e. Admixtures - ASTM C 494.
f. Water - potable.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. W.N. Russell and Company, Westmont, NJ.
B. Dallas Cast Stone Company, Inc., Dallas, TX.
C. Other authorized SpecStone manufacturer.
2.3 COLOR AND FINISH
A. Exposed surfaces shall exhibit a fine grained texture similar to natural stone. No bugholes or air voids will
be permitted.
B. Color shall match as specified in Section 00861 - DESIGN SELECTION SUMMARY.
C. Variation:
1. Must match color and finish of approved sample when viewed in direct daylight at a 10 foot distance.
2. CIELAB color variation allowed - 1% hue; 3 % lightness, chroma and hue combined.
2.4 CURING AND FINISHING
A. Cure units in a warm, moist curing chamber at 95 % relative humidity for 24 hours.
B. Yard cure for 350 degrees - days (i.e. 7 days at 50 F degrees or 5 days at 70F) prior to shipment.
C. Acid-etch exposed surfaces to remove cement film prior to packaging for shipment.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Anchors - Non-corrosive; galvanized, brass or stainless steel type 304.
B. Mortar - Type N, ASTM C 270.
C. Sealer - Reference Section 07180 - Water Repellents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TOLERANCES
A. Comply with Cast Stone Institute technical manual//04435-90.
CAST STONE 04720 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- B. Set stones 1/8 inch or less within plane of adjacent unit.
C. Joints, + 1/16 inch, - 1/8 inch.
- 3.2 JOINTING
A. Field cut typical modules as needed to conform to plans using diamond or abrasive saw. Apply zinc primer
_ to exposed ends of re-bar in reinforced units.
B. Joint size:
-- 1. At stone/brick joints - 3/8 inch.
2. At stone/stone joints in vertical position - 1/4 inch (3/8" optional).
3. Stone/stone joints exposed on top side - 3/8 inch.
-- C. Joint material:
1. Use a full bed of mortar at all bed joints.
2. Flush vertical joints full with mortar.
-- 3. Leave all joints with exposed tops open for sealant.
D. Location of joints:
1. As shown on architectural elevation drawings.
2. Unless otherwise shown:
-- a. At control and expansion joints per plans.
b. Joint long window sills at mullions.
c. Align joints in lower courses with joints in upper courses.
d. Short stones are not permitted (less than 1/2 typical length).
3.3 SETTING
_ A. Drench stones with clear, running water just prior to setting.
B. Fill all dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non-shrink grout.
,_ C. Set all stones in a full bed of mortar. Leave head joints in coping and similar stones open for sealant.
D. Rake mortar joints 3/4 inch for pointing. Sponge the face of each stone to remove excess mortar.
-- E. Tuck point stone joints to a slight concave.
F. Sealant joints - Prime the ends of stones. Insert properly sized foam backup rod and gun-in sealant.
-- G. Protect stone shale on ground (and after setting) from splashing, mortar and damage from other trades.
3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean stone by wetting with clear running water and application of a solution of "Sure Clean #600" by
ProSoCo Products, Inc., or equal. Follow manufacturers instructions.
_ B. Repair obvious chips with touch-up material furnished by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 04720
CAST STONE 04720 - 3
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
-- SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
- 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
_ Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
_ 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel.
-- B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" for independent testing agency procedures and
administrative requirements.
-- 2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors.
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for loose steel bearing plates and miscellaneous
steel framing.
_ 4. Division 9 Section "Special Coatings" for surface preparation and priming requirements.
5. Division 9 Section "Painting" for surface preparation and priming requirements.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract Documents
to be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings indicated.
-- 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
_ and show size, length, and type of each weld.
3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identi~ high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing
connections.
D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel work
-'- similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
_ B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work.
__ 1. Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic
Design."
2. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members."
3. ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel
Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use."
4. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS DI.1 "Structural Welding Code--
Steel."
1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of
installation.
B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged
materials from erosion and deterioration.
1.Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry
or 'rusty before use.
2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to
members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the
Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: As follows:
1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36
B. Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
C. Hot-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
D. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As follows:
1. Unheaded Rods: ASTM A 36
2. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel,
hex-head bolts; and carbon-steel nuts.
3. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex
carbon-steel nuts.
4. Washers: ASTM A 36
E. Nonhigh-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property
Class 4.6); carbon-steel, bex-head bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
F. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts,
heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
G. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel
structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers, uncoated.
H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2 PRIMER
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide.
B. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, mst-inhibiting primer.
2.3 GROUT
A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404,
Size No. 2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water
required for placement and hydration.
B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and
water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and
a 30-minute working time.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel
according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings.
1. Camber structural steel members where indicated.
2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) and maintain
markings until steel has been erected.
3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
4. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling
of structural steel.
5. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-
priming operations.
6. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded.
C. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bearing.
D. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel framing. Weld
exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure
removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine screws, uniformly spaced
not more than 10 inches (250 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage
of other work through steel framing members, as shown on Shop Drawings.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or
enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. Shop install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are indicated.
B. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1. Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Connection Type: Tensioned shear/bearing connections.
C. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
I. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without warp.
2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally
exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface
bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet
welds 1/2 inch (13 mm) and larger. Grind flush butt welds.' Dress exposed welds.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members
to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications as follows:
1. SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5
mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges, and
exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change
color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
D. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC's "Painting System Guide
No. 7.00" to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 nun).
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop inspections and
tests and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test
specimens comply with or deviate from requirements.
2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being fabricated
or produced so required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports
indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected
Work with specified requirements.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
-- D. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be inspected and tested according to
AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
_. A. Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete and
masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with requirements.
B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel
-- secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity
to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and
bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
-- 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-
place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC
specifications referenced in this Section.
B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials
and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and
bearing plates.
1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required.
2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not
-~' remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate
prior to packing with grout.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish exposed
surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.
a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proprietary grout materials.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently
.... fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent
contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and
alignment.
.--~ 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of
structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and
mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
G. Finish sections thermally cut during erection equal to a sheared appearance.
. H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must
be enlarged to admit bolts.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. Install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are indicated. _
B. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1. Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Connection Type: Tensioned shear/bearing connections.
C. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and --
methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of
temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field '-
welds.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without warp.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field inspections and _
tests and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
Work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports
indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected
Work with specified requirements.
D. Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for --
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
3.6 CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry ~m thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on structural steel are included in Division 9 Section "Painting." -~
END OF SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 6
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
-- SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
-- 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including' General and Supplementary
_ Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
-- 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
-- 1. K-series open-web steel joists.
2. Joist accessories.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" for independent testing agency procedures and
administrative requirements.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchors set in concrete.
3. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing anchors set in unit masonry.
4. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for field quality-control procedures and tests.
5. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for loose, steel bearing plates and miscellaneous
-- steel framing.
6. Division 9 Section "Painting" for surface preparation and prime painting.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect joists and connections to withstand design
loads within limits and under conditions required.
1. Design Loads: As indicated.
2. Design joists to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:
_ a. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a joist manufacturer who utilizes a qualified professional
engineer to prepare design calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data for steel joists.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
- ~ Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of joist, accessory, and product specified.
C. Shop Drawings showing layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include
joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories, splice and connection details, and
attachments to other units of Work.
D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified
under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
-- E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 1
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those
indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
1. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists conforming to SJI standard
specifications and load tables.
B. SJI Design Standard: Comply with recommendations of SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables
and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders," applicable to types of joists indicated.
C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D 1.1 "Structural Welding Code--
Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."
B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel: Comply with requirements of SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web section material.
B. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class
4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened
steel washers.
1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.
C. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural
bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain, noncoated.
D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.2 PRIMERS
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide; Federal Specification TT-P-636, red oxide; or
manufacturer's standard shop primer meeting the performance requirements of either of these red-
oxide primers.
2.3 STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture joists according to SJI's "Specifications," with steel angle top and bottom chord
members, and as follows:
1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists.
2. End Arrangement: Underslung.
3. End Arrangement: Underslung with bottom chord extensions.
4. Top Chord Arrangement: Parallel (K Series).
B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds,
and methods used in correcting welding work.
STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 2
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
C. Provide holes in chord members where shown for securing other work to steel joists.
D. Extend top chords of joists with SJI Type S top chord extensions where indicated, complying with
SJI's "Specifications" and load tables.
E. Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's
"Specifications" and load tables.
F. Camber K-series steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications."
G. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes when joist
slope exceeds 1/4 inch in 12 inches (1:48).
2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES
A. Bridging: Fabricate bridging as indicated and according to SJI requirements.
1. Supply additional bridging to ensure stability of structure during construction period.
B. Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom chord elements or a separate extension unit of
sufficient strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of
f'mished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by the joist
manufacturer to complete the joist installation.
2.5 SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and
accessories to be primed as follows:
1. Surface Preparation: Power tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
B. Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous,
dry paint film thickness of not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm).
C. Surface preparation and painting of joists and joist accessories are included under Division 9 Section
"Painting."
PART PART 3 - - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of joists. Do not proceed with installation' until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting
construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's recommendations, and the
requirements of this Section.
1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure joists are
stabilized during construction.
STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 3
COPPELL POLICE AND COURT 4087.20
C. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework and steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding
sequence and procedure with placing of joists.
1. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Comply with the Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural
bolt installation and tightening requirements.
E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied.
Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or beams.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform
field quality-control testing.
B. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to contractor and Architect.
C. Testing and verification procedures will be required of high-strength bolted connections and field
welds.
1. Bolted connections will be visually inspected.
2. Field welds will be visually inspected.
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that inspections and test reports have indicated are not in compliance
with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified
requirements.
3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Touch Up Painting: Following installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, accessories, bearing plates,
and abutting structural steel.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power tool cleaning,
SSPC-SP 3.
2. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as the shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field connections, rust spots, and abraded
surfaces of shop-painted joists, accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel are included
in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05210
STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel roof deck.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop-welded shear connectors.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing openings with miscellaneous steel
shapes.
3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for touchup and repair painting of deck.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of deck, accessory, and product specified.
C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels,
pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of steel deck certifying that their products comply with
specified requirements.
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified
under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Product test reports from qualified independent testing agencies evidencing compliance with
requirements of the following based on comprehensive testing:
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed steel deck similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect' s satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming
to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing
indicated without delaying the Work.
C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS DI.1 "Structural Welding
Code--Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
D. FM Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by Factory Mutual and listed in Factory Mutual
"Approval Guide" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.
...... STEEL DECK 05310 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof
covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. ! MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Buildings Co.
2. ASC Pacific Inc.
3. Bowman Metal Deck Armco, Inc.
4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
5. Epic Metals Corp.
6. Marlyn Steel Products, Inc.
7. Robertson A United Dominion Co.
8. Roof Deck, Inc.
9. United Steel Deck, Inc.
10. Verco Manufacturing Co.
11. Vulcraft Div. of Nucor Corp.
12. Walker Div. of Butler Manufacturing Co.
13. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp.
2.2 ROOF DECK
A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels without top-flange stiffening grooves conforming to SDI
Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck" and the following:
1. Shop Primer: Grey or white baked-on, lead- and chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer,
conforming to the performance requirements of Fed. Spec. TT-P-664.
2. Span Condition: Triple span or more.
3. Side Joints: Overlapped.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide accessory materials for steel deck that comply with requirements indicated and
recommendations of the steel deck manufacturer.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, powder-actuated
or pneumatically driven carbon steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side Lap Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head;
self-drilling, carbon steel screws, No. 10 (4.8 mm) minimum diameter.
D. Rib Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, 0.0359-inch- (0.91-mm-) thick minimum ridge
and valley plates, finish strips, and reinforcing channels, of same material as roof deck.
F.' Recessed Sump Pans: Manufacturer's standard size, single piece steel sheet 0.071-inch- (1.8-mm-)
thick minimum, of same material as deck panels, with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) minimum deep level
recessed pans and 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide flanges. Cut holes for drains in the field.
G. Flat Receiver Pan: Manufacturer's standard size, single-piece steel sheet, 0.071-inch- (1.8-mm-)
thick minimum units, of same material as deck panels. Cut holes for drains in the field.
STEEL DECK 05310 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel deck.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary of SDI
Publication No. 28, manufacturer' s recommendations, and requirements of this Section.
B. Place deck panels on supporting framing and adjust to f'mal position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting framing before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side lap interlocks.
C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting framing without warp or deflection.
D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through
or adjacent to the decking.
E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity
of decking, and support of other work.
F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
G. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners
and install according to deck manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the Surface
diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) long, and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space welds an average of 12
inches (305 mm) apart, with a minimum of two welds per unit at each support or as
indicated.
B. Side Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between
supports, at intervals not exceeding 36 inches (910 mm), using, one of the following methods:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No. 10- (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger carbon steel
screws.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting framing with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum.
D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof decking, and weld flanges
to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one weld at each
coruer.
E. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plates,
end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's recommendations. Weld
STEEL DECK 05310 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated.
Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's instructions to ensure complete closure.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform
field quality-control testing.
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified
requirements.
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on both
surfaces of installed deck panels.
i. Touch up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.
2.Where shop-painted surfaces are exposed in-service, apply touchup paint to blend into
adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK 05310 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior nonload-bearing steel-stud curtainwall.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for gypsum board and nordoad-bearing
metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing applied to exterior steel
framing and for installation of air-infiltration barrier.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AISI "Specifications": Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing according
to AISI's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members" and the following:
1. Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (CCFSS) Technical Bulletin, Vol. 2, No. 1,
February 1993 "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections."
B. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect cold-formed metal framing to withstand
design loads within limits and under conditions required.
1. Design Loads: As indicated.
2. Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the
following:
a. Exterior Nonload-Bearing Curtainwall: Lateral deflection of 1/360 of the wall
height.
3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage
or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and
anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature
change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C).
4. Design framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and
construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings.
C. Design exterior nonload-bearing curtainwall framing to accommOdate lateral deflection without
regard to contribution of sheathing materials.
D. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who assumes undivided responsibility for
engineering cold-formed metal framing by employing a qualified professional engineer to prepare
design calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of cold-formed metal framing, accessory, and product specified.
C. Shop drawings showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal
framing, fabrication, fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show
reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging,
splices, accessories, connection details, and attachments to other units of Work.
1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include
structural analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer who was
responsible for its preparation.
D. Mill certificates signed by manufacturers of cold-formed metal framing certifying that their
products comply with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile
strength, total elongation, and galvanized-coating thickness.
1. In lieu of mill certificates, submit test reports from a qualified independent testing agency
evidencing compliance with requirements.
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
G. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance with
requirements of the following based on comprehensive testing:
1. Expansion anchors.
2. Powder-actuated anchors.
3. Mechanical fasteners.
H. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code orgamzation acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction that evidence cold-formed metal framing's compliance with building code in
effect for Project.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed cold-formed metal
framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria
conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the
testing indicated without delaying the Work.
C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--
Steel'' and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fa:e-resistance-rated assemblies are indicated, provide
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
- cold-formed metal framing identical to that tested as part of an assembly for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
.... 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by design designations listed in UL "Fire
Resistance Directory," or by Warnock Hersey or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the
jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated that have resulted in the installation of cold-formed metal framing similar to this Project
_. in material, design, and extent and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division I Section "Project Meetings."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during
-- delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid
condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
-- 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-
formed metal framing that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
- following:
1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp.
2. American Sm&o, Inc.
3. Angeles Metal Systems.
4. California Metal Systems, Inc.
5. Clark-Cincinnati, Inc.
6. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.
7. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
8. Dale//Incor Industries of Florida.
9. Dale Industries, Inc.
-- 10. Design Shapes in Steel.
11. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
12. Incor Plant Dale Industries.
13. Knorr Steel Framing Systems.
14. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc.
15. Studco of Hawaii, Inc.
16. Super Smd Building Products, Inc.
17. Unimast, Inc.
18. United Construction Supply.
19. United States Steel.
20. Western Metal Lath Co.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446 (ASTM A 446M), zinc coated according to ASTM A 525
(ASTM A 525M), and as follows:
1. Coating Designation: G 90 (Z 275).
2. Grade: As required by structural performance.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) or ASTM A 611, cleaned, pretreated,
and primed with manufacturer's baked-on, lead- and chromate-free, mst-inhibitive primer
conforming to the performance requirements of FS TT-P-664.
1. Grade: As required by structural performance.
2.3 WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs of web depths indicated, with lipped
flanges, and complying with the following:
1. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0474 inch (1.20 mm).
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).
3. Web: Punched.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, unpunched, of web depths indicated,
with straight flanges, and complying with the following:
1. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Matching steel studs.
2. Flange Width: Manufacturers standard deep flange where indicated, standard flange
elsewhere.
2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members,
with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa).
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicated, as follows:
1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
3. Web stiffeners.
4. Gusset plates.
5. Deflection track and vertical slide clips.
6. Stud kickers and girts.
7. Reinforcement plates.
2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), zinc coated by the hot-dip process
according to ASTM A 123.
B. Cast-in-Place Anchor Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class
4.6); carbon-steel hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened-steel washers.
Zinc coated by the hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153.
C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 5 times the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Powder-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to Sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10
times the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paim 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum
of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and
water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and a 30-minute
working time.
C. Thermal Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber blankets produced by combining
glass or slag fibers with thermosetting resins.
2.7 AIR-INFILTRATION BARRIER
A. Provide the following product:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I, No. 15 asphalt felt,
unperforated.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements
of this Section.
I. Fabricate framing assemblies in jig templates.
2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard
with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-framed metal framing
manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less
than 3 exposed screw threads.
4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw
fastening, according to manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from
plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)
from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements
of sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-
square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 nun).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements,
including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cold-formed metal
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
flaming. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or'track webs
on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements
of this Section.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard
with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-framed metal framing
manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less
than 3 exposed screw threads.
C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or
tension members.
D. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized.
E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
F. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and
double studs, inaccessible upon completion of framing work.
G. Fasten reinforcement plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard
punched openings.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing to a maximum allowable tolerance
variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.4 NONLOAD-BEARING CURTAINWALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to
supporting structure as indicated.
B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and
bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped
surfaces and similar requirements.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of vertical
loads while providing lateral support.
1. Install deflection track and anchor to building structure.
2. Connect studs with vertical slide clips to continuous angles or supplementary framing
anchored to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in curtainwall studs, spaced in rows not more than 48 inches (1219 mm)
apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Install additional row of horizontal bridging in curtainwall stud beneath deflection track
when curtainwall studs are not fastened to an additional top track.
2. Bridging: Flat, steel-sheet straps of width and thickness indicated, fastened to stud
flanges.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles,
continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtainwall-
framing system.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will
perform field quality-control testing.
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified
requirements.
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed
cold-formed metal framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and mst spots on fabricated
and installed prime-painted, cold-formed metal framing.
1. Touchup painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.
C. Protect gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather for more than one month as follows:
1. Protect cutouts, coruers, and joints in the sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or
by applying tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at the time sheathing is
applied.
D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer to ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at the time
of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05400
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division i Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified
or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following metal fabrications:
I. Rough hardware.
2. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
3. Loose steel lintels.
4. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following:
a. Overhead doors.
b. Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other sections.
5. Miscellaneous steel trim.
6. Structural steel door frames for overhead doors.
7. Pipe bollards.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural steel framing system components.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and grout.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory
items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections.
1. Where installed metal fabrications are indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include
structural computations, material properties, and other information needed for structural analysis
that has been signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for their
preparation.
D. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect.
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under
"Quality Assurance" article.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of
Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that
indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing
delay in the Work.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this section by same firm
that fabricated them.
C.Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code
- Steel," D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel", and D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
D. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed to practice in jurisdiction where project is located
and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful
installation of metal fabrications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications
must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and
proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure
that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and
fitting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide
materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use
materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, roiled trade names, roughness,
and, for steel sheet, variations in flamess exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-
leveled sheet.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
C. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, grade as indicated below:
a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required for design loading.
2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
a. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized coating
per ASTM A 53.
D. Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: Product type (manufacturing method), quality, and grade, as follows:
1. Cold-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, grade as follows:
a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading.
E. Uncoated Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, product type (method of manufacture) as follows:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366.
F. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Quality as follows:
1. Structural Quality: ASTM A 446; Grade A, unless another grade required for design loading, and
G90 coating designation unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
G. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A
47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per
ASTM A 153.
H. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for the metal alloy to
be welded.
2.2 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with CE CRD- C 621. Provide grout specifically recomraended by manufacturer for interior
and exterior applications of type specified in this section.
B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-prepackaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic controlled
expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching,
and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without need
for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is recommended for exterior use by manufacturer.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include but are not limited to the following:
1. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts:
a. "Bonsai Construction Grout"; W. R. Bonsai Co.
b. "Diamond-Crete Grout"; Concrete Service Materials Co.
c. "Euco N-S Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co.
d. "Kemset"; Chem-Masters Corp.
e. "Crystex"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
f. "Masterflow 713"; Master Builders.
g. "Sealtight 588 Grout"; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
h. "Sonogrout"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rex. nord Chemical Products, Inc.
i. "Stoncrete NMI"; Stonhard, Inc.
j. "Five Star Grout"; U. S. Grout Corp.
k. "Vibropruf #11 "; Lambert Corp.
2. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement:
a. "Super Por-Rok"; Minwax Construction Products Division.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners
for the type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A.
C. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.
D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
E. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111.
F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
G. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors,
expansion, Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS
FF-B-575, Grade 5.
H. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
2.4 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal
modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with
finish paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats
despite prolonged exposure complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with
dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or
SSPC-Paint-20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Palnt 12 except containing no asbestos
fibers.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed
to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop
drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for
various components of each metal fabrication.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.
C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature
in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of
joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures
of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F (55.5 deg C).
D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal
coruers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
G. Weld coruers and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness
shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever
possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space
anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.
J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where
water may accumulate.
2.6 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other
miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring
or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items
are specified in Division 6 sections.
B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and
nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
2.7 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made
flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor
bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication.
2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of one inch per foot of clear span but not less than 8 inches bearing at
each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel flaming and supports for applications indicated or which are not a part of structural
steel framework, as required to complete work.
B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other construction
retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded
construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,
hangers, and similar items.
1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry.
Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in the following locations:
1. Exterior locations.
2. Interior locations where indicated.
2.10 STRUCTURAL STEEL DOOR FRAMES FOR OVERHEAD DOORS
A. Fabricate steel door frames from structural shapes and bars of size and to dimensions indicated, fully
welded together, with 5/8 inch x 1-1/2 inch steel bar stops, unless otherwise indicated. Plug weld built-up
members and continuously weld exposed joints. Secure removable stops to frame with countersunk
machine screws, uniformly spaced at not more than 10 inches o.c. Reinforce frames and drill and tap as
required to accept fmish hardware.
B. Provide steel strap anchors for securing door frames into adjoining concrete or masonry, using 1/8 inch
x 2 inch straps of the length required for a minimum 8 inch embedment, unless otherwise indicated. Weld
anchors to frame jambs no more than 12 inches from both bottom and head of frame and space anchors not
more than 30 inches apart.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C.Extend bottom of frames to floor elevation indicated with steel angle clips welded to frames for anchoring
frame to floor with expansion shields and bolts.
D. Galvanize frames and anchors in the following locations:
1. Exterior locations.
2. Interior locations where indicated.
2.11 PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe of size indicated.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter comers and use concealed field splices
wherever possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required to coordinate assembly and installation with other
work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not
more than 6 inches (150 mm) from each end, 6 inches (150 mm) from comers, and 24 inches (600 mm)
o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations:
a. Exterior locations.
b. Interior locations where indicated.
2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and
designations of finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by the hot-dip process
compliance with the following requirements:
1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of
uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure
conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone lB): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone lA): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning:
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized f'mish or to be
embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproof'rog, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
requirements of SSPC-PA1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having
integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such
items to project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing
miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of
miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or
similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be
left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut,
or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are
intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness
shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
3.3 SETTING LOOSE PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond
to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if
protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonmetallic nonshrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS
A. Anchor bollards in concrete footing at least three inches larger than pipe on all sides. Fill pipe with
concrete, dome top.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting" of these
specifications.
B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
I. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork specially fabricated
for this Project.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not
exposed, unless otherwise specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for the following products:
i. Metal framing anchors.
2. Construction adhesives.
C. Material certificates for dimensional lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.
Indicate species and grade selected for each use as well as design values approved by the Board of Review
of American Lumber Standards Committee.
D. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling,
storing, installation, and finishing of treated material:
1. For each type of preservative treated wood product include certification by treating plant stating
type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and
compliance with applicable standards.
2. For water-borne treated products include statement that moisture content of treated materials was
reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site.
3. For fire-retardant-treated wood products include certification by treating plant that treated material
complies with specified standard and other requirements.
4. Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test
results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with requirements indicated.
,5. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment.
E. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction evidencing compliance of the following wood products with specified requirements and
building code in effect for Project.
1. Metal framing anchors.
2. Power driven fasteners.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Single-Source Responsibility for Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant-treated
wood products from one source for both treatment and fire-retardant formulation.
B. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing laboratory must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory-submitted criteria conforming
to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated
without delaying the progress of the Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and
contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air
circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar
materials.
1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each
bundle to provide air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. i LUMBER, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Sofiwood Lumber
Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber
Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber
grades and species include the following:
1. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service.
2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian).
3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency
evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,
moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece; or
omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection
agency.
D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by
PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.
1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and
shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for
sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. For light framing provide "Stud," "No. 3," or "Standard" grade lumber for stud framing (2 to 4 inches
thick, 2 to 4 inches wide, 10 feet and shorter) and "Stud" or "No. 3" grade for other light framing (2 to
4 inches thick, 2 to 6 inches wide), any species.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- B. For light framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide) provide the following grade and species:
1. "Construction" grade.
2. "Standard" grade.
-- 3. "Utility" grade.
4. Any species of specified grade.
5. Any species graded under WWPA or WCLIB rules.
6. Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules.
7. Spruce-Pine-Fir graded under NLGA rules.
C. For structural light framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide), provide the following grade and
_ species:
1. "Select Structural" grade.
2. "No. 1" grade.
-- 3. "No. 2" grade.
4. "No. 3" grade.
5. Any species of specified grade.
6. Same species as indicated for structural framing grade below.
D. For structural framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 5 inches and wider), provide the following grade and species:
1. "Select Structural" grade.
~- 2. "No. 1" grade.
3. "No. 2" grade.
4. "No. 3" grade.
_. 5. Douglas Fir-Larch graded under WCLIB or WWPA rules.
6. Hem-Fir graded under WWPA rules.
7. Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules.
8. Spruce-Pine-Fir graded under NLGA rules.
~- 9. Redwood graded under RIS rules.
10. Any species and grade that complies with the following requirements for species group as defined
in Table 8. la of N.F.P.A National Design Specification, for extreme fiber stress in bending "Fb"
for single and repetitive members, and for modulus of elasticity "E":
a. Group II species, "Fb" of 1200 psi for single member use and of 1400 psi for repetitive
member use, and "E" of 1,600,000 psi.
b. Group III species, "Fo" of 875 psi for single member use and of 1000 psi for repetitive
-- member use, and "E" of 1,300,000 psi.
2.3 BOARDS
A. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber of 19 percent
maximum moisture content (S-DRY or KD-19) and of following species and grade:
-- 1. Redwood "Construction Common" per RIS rules, Southern Pine "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules,
or any species graded "Construction Boards" or "No. 3 Common" per WCLIB or WWPA rules.
B. Board Sizes: Provide sizes indicated or, if not indicated (for sheathing, subflooring and similar uses),
- provide 1-inch by 8-inch boards.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
'- A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop equipment
curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar
members.
B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown.
C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative
~_~ treatment.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061~-3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Grade: "Standard" grade light-framing-size lumber of any species or board-size lumber as required.
"No. 3 Common" or "Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB
rules.
2.5 CONSTRUCTION PANELS, GENERAL
A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial
Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions,
with APA PRP-108.
B. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory-marked with APA trademark evidencing
compliance with grade requirements.
2.6 CONCEALED PERFORMANCE-RATED CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. General: Where construction panels are indicated for the following concealed types of applications,
provide APA Performance-Rated Panels complying with requirements designated under each application
for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail (where applicable), and
thickness.
B. Wall Sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING.
1. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR.
2. Span Rating: As required to suit stud spacing indicated.
3. Span Rating: 12/0, 16/0, 20/0 or Wall-16 oc for stud spacing of 16 inches or less.
2.7 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING
A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant-treated
plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1, in thickness indicated, or,
if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this
article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304
stainless steel.
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where
indicated, flat washers.
2.9 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, metal, and finish indicated that comply with
requirements specified including the following:
1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which model code evaluation/research
reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of
metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building code in effect for this Project.
2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable design
loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and that are
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication
to comply with ASTM A 525 for Coating Designation G60 and with ASTM A 446, Grade A (structural
-- quality); ASTM A 526 (commercial quality); or ASTM A 527 (lock-forming quality); as standard with
manufacturer for type of anchor indicated.
_ 1. Use galvanized steel framing anchors for rough carpentry exposed to weather, in ground contact,
or in area of high relative humidity, and where indicated.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is
approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturer.
-- B. Water Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl
butyl carbonate (IPBC) as its active ingredient.
2.11 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative-treated wood or is specified herein to
be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood).
Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements.
B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf.
For interior uses, after treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content,
_ respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members
in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
- 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
C. Pressure-treat wood members in contact with the ground or fresh water with water-borne preservatives
to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf.
'- D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut
surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard
damaged or defective pieces.
2.12 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. General: For all interior wood, pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire-retardant chemicals
~- to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated; identify "fire-retardant-
treated wood" with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing,
Timber Products Inspection, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide fire-retardant-treated wood for which a current
model code evaluation/research report exists that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
and that evidences compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood for application indicated.
B. Interior Type A: For interior locations use fire-retardant chemical formulation that produces treated
lumber and plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation:
1. No reduction takes place in bending strength, stiffness, and fastener holding capacities below
values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation that are based on tests by a qualified
independent testing laboratory of treated wood products identical to those indicated for this Project
_ under elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions.
2. No other form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to manufacture
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
and treatment. --
3. No corrosion of metal fasteners results from their contact with treated wood.
C. Exterior Type: Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
D. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fire-retardant-treated wood products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Interior Type A Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood:
a. "Dricon," Hickson Corporation.
b. "Pyro-Guard," Hoover Treated Wood Products.
c. "Flameproof LHC-HTT," Osmose Wood Preserving Co, Inc.
2. Exterior Type Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood:
a. "Exterior Fire-X," Hoover Treated Wood Products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too
small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted.
C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location
of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction.
D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.
E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners
of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish
materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill
as required.
3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS
A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or
attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work
to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where
possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches
wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved.
Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL
A.Framing Standard: Comply with N.F.P.A. "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install framing composed of engineered wood products to
comply with manufacturer's directions.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Install framing members of size and spacing indicated.
D. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with the following:
1. National Evaluation Report No. NER-272 for pneumatic or mechanical driven staples, P-Nails,
and allied fasteners.
2. Published requirements of manufacturer of metal framing anchors.
3. "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with N.F.P.A. "National
Design Specifications for Wood Construction."
4. "Table No. II - Recommended Nailing Schedule" of the Uniform Building Code.
5. "Appendix C - Recommended Nailing Schedule" of the BOCA National Building Code.
6. "Table 1705.1 - Fastening Schedule," of the Standard Building Code.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports.
F. Firestop concealed spaces of wood framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at the ceiling line
of the top story. Where firestops are not automatically provided by the framing system used, use closely
fitted wood blocks of nominal 2-inch-thick lumber of the same width as framing members.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30, "APA
Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercial," for types of construction panels and
applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Sheathing: Nail to framing.
2. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail to supports.
END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061~-7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Laminate-clad cabinets (casework).
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
B. Flush wood paneling.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed flaming and for furring, blocking, and
other carpentry work concealed in the wall.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for doors specified by reference to architectural
woodwork standards.
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for cabinet locks.
4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of installed interior architectural
woodwork.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of
architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
C. Fire-retardant-treatment data for material treated to reduce combustibility. Include certification
by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
D. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcing specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap
dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork.
4. Apply WlC Certified Compliance Label to first page of shop drawings.
E. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color,
pattern, and surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core.
2. Corner pieces as follows:
a. Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as exposed end pieces,
18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm)
deep.
b. Miter joints for standing trim.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit for each type and finish.
4. Wood-veneer-faced panel products, with or for transparent fimsh, 8 by 10 inches (200
by 250 mm), for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish
one-half of face as specified.
a. Step finish materials on sample to show and clearly defme each coat.
b. Provide separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core.
F. Product certificates signed by woodwork fabricator certifying that products comply with specified
requirements.
G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for interior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that
can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type
and quality to those required for this Project.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking
firm to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating, f'mishing, and installing woodwork
specified in this Section.
D. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard:
1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the
Architectural Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork,
construction, finishes, and other requirements.
a. Provide AWI Certification Labels or Certificates of Compliance indicating that
woodwork meets requirements of grades specified.
E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials with the following fire-test-response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM test method indicated below
by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify fure-retardant-treated material with appropriate markings of applicable testing
and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities
having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after
installation.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding values indicated below, tested per
ASTM E 84 for 30 minutes with no evidence of significant combustion. In addition, the
flame from shall not progress more than 10-1/2 feet (3.2 m) beyond the center line of the
burner at any time during the test.
a. Flame Spread: 25.
b. Smoke Developed: 450.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and
deterioration.
B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in
other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements
specified in "Project Conditions."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Obtain and comply with woodwork fabricator's and Installer's
-- coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its
storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and
stabilized so that woodwork will be within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content
from date of installation through remainder of construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual
dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show
recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support
_ woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements
on final shop drawings.
2. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide
-- allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
_ supported and installed as indicated.
B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved schedule for cabinet hardware specified
in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate
.... cabinet shop drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
- 2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWl quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of
-- interior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product
characteristics indicated:
~_ 1. Softwood Plywood: PS 1.
B. Particleboard: ANSI A208. I, Grade M-2 made with phenol-formaldehyde resins.
.... C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
-- offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated in the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
- b. Laminart.
c. Nevamar Corp.
d. Pioneer Plastics Corp.
_ e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.
f. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.
-- INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.
2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical formulations
indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to
produce products with fire-test-response characteristics specified.
B. Fire-Retardant Chemicals: Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from
untreated material.
C. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber: Comply with the following:
1. Low-Hygroscopic Formulation: Interior Type A per AWPA C20.
2.Nonpressure-Treatment Formulation: Nontoxic, water-soluble product applied by dip,
spray, roller, curtain coating, vacuum chamber, or soaking.
3. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and
drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from
drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated
woodwork.
4.Kiln-dry material before and after treatment to levels required for untreated material.
5. Discard treated material that does not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, discolored, or otherwise
damaged or defective material.
6. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Low-Hygroscopic Formulation (Type A):
1) D-Blaze; J. H. Baxter Co.
2) D-Blaze; Chemical Specialties, Inc.
3) Pyro-guard; Continental Wood Preservers, Inc.
4) Dricon; Hickson Corp.
5) Pyro-guard; Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
b. Nonpressure-Treatment Formulation:
1) Gala Process; Fibretech, Inc.
D. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from
softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to
achieve products identical to those tested for flame spread of 25 or less and for smoke developed
of 25 or less per ASTM E 84 by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. For panels 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and less and 45-1b/cu. ft (720-kg/cu. m) density,
comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties:
modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2000 MPa);
internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 lbf
(1100 N) and 225 lbf (1000 N) respectively.
2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches (20 to 32 mm) thick and 44-1b/cu. ft (705-kg/cu. m)
density, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum
properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi
(1700 MPa); linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and
edge, 250 lbf (1100 N) and 175 lbf (780 N) respectively.
3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Duraflake FR by Willamette
Industries, Inc.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets,
except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this Section for cabinet hardware
required for architectural cabinets.
C. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA
numbers or referenced to this standard.
-- D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.
1. Dull Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
E. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements of BHMA A156.9.
-' 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried
_. to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with
ASME B18.6.1 for applicable requirements.
1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal-framing
manufacturer.
--' C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and f'mish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105
for applicable requirements.
D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls
and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt
- devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
--, A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality
standard and of the following grade:
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and
in installation areas.
C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, proffies, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
' 1. Comers of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick
or less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
_ 3. Comers of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members and rails: 1/16 inch (1.5
. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, f'mishing, and hardware application, before shipmem
to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Trial fit assemblies at the fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved shop
drawings before disassembling for shipment.
F. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts
and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating.
G. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing" and of FGMA
"Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.
2.6 LAMINATE-CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK)
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate-clad cabinets.
i. Grade: Custom.
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay.
1. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the
following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops: GP-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm) nominal thickness.
2. Postformed Surfaces: PF-42, 0.042-inch (l.067-mm) nominal thickness.
3. Vertical Surfaces: GP-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm) nominal thickness.
4. Edges: GP-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm) nominal thickness.
D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade GP-28.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood lumber, shop finished.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood, shop finished.
E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. Match color, pattern, and finish indicated by reference to laminate manufacturer's
standard designations for these characteristics.
F. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments
and drawers except where located directly under tops.
2.7 COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops.
B. Type of Top: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following:
1. Grade: GP-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm) nominal thickness.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and
textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
a. As noted in Section 00861 - DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY.
3. Edge Treatment: As indicated.
4. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood.
2.8 FLUSH WOOD PANELING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 requirements for flush wood paneling.
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Species: Birch, plain sliced.
1. Lumber Trim and Edges: At panelwork fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as
solid wood (except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible
with grain and color of veneered panels.
C. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Random match.
D. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Running match.
E. Panel-Matching Method: Match panels within each separate area by the following method:
1. Sequence-matched, uniform-size sets.
F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels composed of wood veneer and fire-retardant
particleboard that are identical in construction to units tested for the following surface-burning
characteristics per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify panels with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.
1. Flame Spread: 75 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
2.9 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated.
B. General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section,
regardless of whether shop applied or applied after installation.
1. Shop Finishing: The extent to which the final finish is applied to architectural woodwork
at the fabrication shop is the Contractor's option, except shop apply at least the
prime/base coat to the greatest extent possible before delivery.
C. General: The priming and shop finishing (if any) of interior architectural woodwork required to
be performed at the fabrication shop are specified in this Section. Refer to Division 9 Section
"Painting" for f'mal finishing of installed architectural woodwork and for material and application
requirements of prime coats for woodwork not specified to receive f'mal finish in this Section.
D. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for f'mishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each trait of work.
I. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to
concealed surfaces of woodwork, including backs of trim, cabinets, paneling, and
ornamental work and the underside of countertops. Concealed surfaces of plastic
laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
or thermoset decorative overlay.
E. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
F. Transparem Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining,
and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
1. Grade: Custom.
2. AWI Finish System TR-2: Catalyzed lacquer.
3. Sheen: Satin 30-50 gloss units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installing.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and
level (including tops).
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and ref'mish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish
at cuts.
D. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply
with recommendations of chemical treatment manufacturer, including those for adhesives used to
install woodwork.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to
grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as
required for complete installation. Use fme finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and
filled flush with woodwork and matching f'mal f'mish where transparent f'mish is indicated.
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 nun in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
G. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Caulk space between
backsplash and wall with specified sealant.
1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow,
or other variation from a straight line.
2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
H. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips and by blind
nailing on backup strips, splined-connection strips, and similar associated trim and framing. Do
not face nail unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1.5 mm in 2400-mm)
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
vertical cup or bow and I/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) horizontal variation from
a true plane.
I. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to the extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified
finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime
coats were applied in the shop.
J. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects;
where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore
damaged or soiled areas.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer
that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
3.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. BHMA numbers are used below to designate hardware requirements, except as otherwise
indicated.
B. Cabinet Hinges: Blum No. 71M2550 - self closing.
C. Pulls: Stanley #4484 wirepull, approximately 4 inches by 5/16 inches diameter.
D. Adjustable Shelf Standards: Knape & Vogt #255.
1. Shelf Rests for Standards: Knape & Vogt #256.
E. Drawer Slides: Knape & Vogt #1428 - Rated for 50 pounds per pair.
F. Cabinet Locks: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". 1. Locks keyed alike in each room.
2. Provide three keys for each lock.
3. Master key and Grand Master key.
END OF SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or
indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cold-applied asphalt emulsion dampproof'mg.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Section
"Submittals."
I. Product Data: Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements for each
dampproofing material specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed bituminous dampproofmg work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and that has resulted in construction with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary dampproof'mg materials and primers from a single
manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofmg work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have
been completed.
B. Weather: Proceed with dampproofmg work only when existing and forecast weather conditions will permit
work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COLD-APPLIED ASPHALT EMULSION DAMPPROOFING
A. Asphalt Emulsion: Asphalt-and-water-emulsion coating, compounded to penetrate substrate and build to
moisture-resistant coating.
1. Provide semifibrated-type semimastic asbestos-free emulsion; ASTM D 1227, Type II, except
containing nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement and filler materials.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering asphalt emulsion
products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Celotex Corporation.
2. ChemRex, Inc./Sonneborne Building Products Div.
3. GS Roofing Products Company, Inc.
4. J & P Petroleum Products, Inc.
5. Karnak Chemical Corporation.
6. Koch Materials Company.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
7. Koppers Company, Inc.
8. Lunday Thagard Company.
9. Manville Building Materials Corporation.
10. Tamko Corporation.
11. Tremco, Inc.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Grout: Comply with ASTM D 147.
B. Plastic Cement: Asphalt based, complying with ASTM D 491, except provide coal tar base where
specifically recommended by manufacturer of bituminous dampproofmg materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of prime
materials manufacturer.
B. Install cant strips and similar accessories as recommended by prime materials manufacturer even though not
shown.
C. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers (if any) as recommended by prime materials manufacturer,
with particular attention at construction joints.
D. Install separate flashings and comer protection stripping as recommended by prime materials manufacturer,
where indicated to precede application of dampproof'mg. Comply with details shown and manufacturer's
recommendations. Give particular attemion to requirements at building expansion joints, if any.
E. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer.
F. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and
conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work, by masking or otherwise protecting
adjoining work.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations, except where more stringent requirements are indicated or
specified and where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory
performance of work.
3.3 ASPHALT EMULSION ON EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR SURFACES
A. Apply coat of semifibrated, semimastic, asphalt emulsion dampproofmg materials, by brushing or spraying -.
at rate of 5.0 gallons per 100 sq. ft., to produce uniform, dry film thickness of not less than 30 mils.
END OF SECTION 07160
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 07180 - WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of clear water repellent coating to the following
vertical and nontraffic horizontal exposed surfaces:
1. Exterior cast stone.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section for cast stone.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint fillers and sealants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data including manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application instructions,
recommendations for water repellents for each surface specified, and protection and cleaning instructions.
Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated
and comply with requirements.
C. Certification by water repellent manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC).
D. Material test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
relative to compliance of water repellents with Performance Requirements specified in the "Quality
Assurance" article.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who employs only persons trained and approved
by water repellent manufacturer for installation of manufacturer's products.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing products similar to those indicated for
this Project and that has a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of the pollution-control regulatory agency
' having jurisdiction in the Project locale regarding volatile organic compounds (VOC) and use of
hydrocarbon solvents.
D. Performance Requirements: Indicate test results for water repellents on substrate simulating Project
conditions, as close as possible. Use same materials and methods of application to be used on the Project.
WATER REPELLENTS 07180 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Absorption Tests: Comparison of treated and untreated specimens: --
a. Cast Stone: ASTM C 1195.
2.Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96. Comparison of treated and untreated specimens:
a. Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry: ASTM E 514.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent (except with
written recommendation of manufacturer) under any of the following conditions: m
1. Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F (4 deg C).
2. Substrate surfaces have cured for less than one month.
3. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C) are predicted for a period of 24 hours.
4. Earlier than 24 hours after surfaces became wet.
5. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40 deg F (4 deg C).
6. Windy condition such that repellent may be blown to vegetation or substrates not intended. --
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Applicator and water repellent manufacturer
covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail to provide water repellency
within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other
rights the Owner may have against the contractor under the contract documents.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Siloxane:
a. Prime-A-Pell 200, Chemprobe Corporation.
b. Euco Weather-Guard, The Euclid Chemical Company.
c. Dynatrete, Huls America, Inc.
d. Shed OX, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. _.
e. Klere-Seal 908-SX, Pecora Corporation.
f. Weather Seal Siloxane, ProSoCo, Inc.
g. Stontite SX9, Stonhard, Inc.
h. Baracade SMS 250, Tamms Industries Co.
i. Rainstopper 1500, Textured Coatings of America, Inc.
2.2 WATER REPELLENTS
A. Siloxanes: Penetrating water repellent. Alkylalkoxysiloxanes that are oligomerous with alcohol, ethanol,
mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier.
WATER REPELLENTS 07180 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents.
Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's instructions to ensure that surface is
sufficiently dry.
B. Test for pH level, according to repellent manufacturer's instructions to ensure chemical bond to silicates
minerals.
C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent.
Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where there is the possibility of the water
repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass. Immediately clean water repellent
from adjoining surfaces, complying with manufacturer's cleaning recommendations.
D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until the sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces
receiving water repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
1. Water repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility
have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to
those used in the work.
E. Test Application: Prior to performing water repellent work, including bulk purchase or delivery of
products, prepare a small application in an unobtrusive location and in a manner acceptable to the
Architect to demonstrate the f'mal effect (visual, physical, and chemical) of planned installation. Proceed
with work only after Architect accepts test application or as otherwise directed.
1. Revisions of planned installation, if any, and as requested by Architect, will be by change order
where it constitutes a departure from requirements of contract documents at time of contracting.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply a heavy-saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using
low-pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations using
airless spraying procedure unless otherwise indicated.
1. Precast Work: At Contractor's option, first application of water repellent on precast concrete
units may be completed prior to installing units. Mask sealant-bond surfaces to prevent water
repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces.
B. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's
instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between
coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if printed recommendations are not applicable to
Project conditions.
C. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION 07180
WATER REPELLENTS 07180 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building insulation in batt form.
2. Sheet vapor retarders.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 7 Roofing Section indicated below for roof insulation specified as part of roofing
construction:
a. "SBS-Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing".
2. Division 4 Masonry Section for board cavity wall insulation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products are designated by "r-values,"
they represem the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-values). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat
flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the
temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow
through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of insulation product specified.
C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory
evidencing compliance of insulation products with requirements including r-values (aged values for plastic
foam insulations), fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings, and other
properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
D. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that evidence compliance of plastic foam insulations with building code in effect for the
Project.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire
performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or
other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
.... BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a
single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying progress of the Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other
sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling,
storage, and protection during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation
products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corp.
b. Manville: Building Insulations Div., Manville Sales Corp.
c. Owens/Coming Fiberglas Corp.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
B. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Baa Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral fibers
of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A
(blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less);
foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face, and as follows:
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and
50, respectively.
2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
A.Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6.0 mils thick, with a maximum permeance rating of 0.13
perms.
B. Tape for Vapor Retarder: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer
for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of the
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting
, performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of projections
that might puncture vapor retarders.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If
printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's
technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation.
B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up
total thickness.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant
to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed
installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure
in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose fiber insulation.
B. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or tape per vapor retarder manufacturer's
printed directions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with tape of type recommended by vapor
retarder manufacturer. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by
vapor retarder manufacturer.
D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with
tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarder.
E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover
with tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be
subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
- SECTION 07270 - FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
m 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
.... Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes firestopping for the following:
1. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated roof construction including both empty openings and
openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.
2. Penetrations through tn:e-resistance-rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and
openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.
'-' 3. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas involving
both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.
4. Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for joint fillers for non-fire-resistive-rated masonry
z:- construction.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive-rated joint sealants.
3. Division 15 Sections specifying ducts and piping penetrations.
4. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire,
-- according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.
B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F
ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the
"- fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated.
C. T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with T
ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated and where systems
protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T-rated
assemblies are required where the following conditions exist:
1. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities.
2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.
3. where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors required to
have a temperature-rise rating.
~- 4. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4-inch-diameter nominal pipe or
16 sq. in. in overall cross-sectional area.
D. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined
per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the f'rre-resistance rating of the construction
in which the joint occurs.
_ E. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not
deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant
__ through-penetration firestop systems.
2. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not
FIRESTOPPING 07270- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
requiring removal of insulation.
F. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread values of less than 25 and
smoke-developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
1. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants.
C. Shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining construction for
each through-penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and kind of
penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing
compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that
is applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration for construction and penetrating
items.
2. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's
illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration approved
by firestopping manufacturer's fire protection engineer with modifications marked after review
and approval of local authorities.
D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their products comply
with specified requirements.
E. Product test repons from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting agency
evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current
products.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of
Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements
and those specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article:
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing
and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and
follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 under
conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained
at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test
assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to
through-penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance
Directory," by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.
3. Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response characteristics per
ASTM E 119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0.01 inch
of water, as measured 0.78 inch from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems
complying with the following requirements:
FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations
listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
b. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of qualified testing
and inspection agency.
B. Information on drawings referring to specific design designations of through-penetration firestop systems
is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions that are expected to exist during
installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems require the Architect's prior approval.
Submit documentation showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of
the systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed firestopping that is similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and that has performed successfully.
D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind of penetration
and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
b. Accepted mockups in an undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may
become part of completed unit of Work.
E. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified
in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
F. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated
through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements.
G. Owner will employ and pay a qualified inspection agency to check installed firestopping systems for
compliance with requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and
legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number;
shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to
Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are
outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost,
condensation, or other causes.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural means or,
where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Notify Owner's inspection agency at least 1 week in advance of firestopping installations; confirm dates
and times on days preceding each series of installations.
B. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behind other construction until
Owner's inspection agency and authorities having jurisdiction, if required, have examined each
installation.
.~ FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.! FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the
substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials
and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Pan 1. Use only components
specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency
for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following
items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following:
a. Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation.
b. Ceramic fiber.
c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of
fill materials in liquid state.
d. Fire-rated formboard.
e. Joint fillers for joint sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that comply
with system performance and other requirements.
2.2 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with mastic coating,
and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating.
B. Ceramic-Fiber Sealant: Single-component formulation of ceramic fibers and inorganic binders.
C. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single-component, endothermic, latex formulation.
D. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation.
E. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no solvents, inorganic
fibers, or silicone compounds.
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side.
G. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl-based powder product for mixing with water at Project
site to produce a paintable compound, passing ASTM E 136, with flame-spread and smoke-developed
ratings of zero per ASTM E 84.
H. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and lightweight
aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonsbxinking, homogenous mortar.
I. Pillows/Bags: Re-usable, heat-expanding pillows/bags composed of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a
combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives.
J. Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures
in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
K. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealant
FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces
and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/
-- gunnable sealant, unless indicated flrestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening
conditions.
2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) grade for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces.
'- 3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag grade for openings in vertical and other surfaces.
L. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant: Solvent-release-curing, single-component,
~ ~ synthetic-polymer-based sealant of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces
and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/
._ gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening
conditions.
2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) grade for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces.
-- 3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag grade for openings in vertical and other surfaces.
M. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
N. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
. 1. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating:
a. FireMaster Bulk and FireMaster Mastic, Thermal Ceramics.
~ 2. Ceramic-Fiber Sealant:
a. Metacaulk 525, The RectorSeal Corporation.
-- 3. Endothermic, Latex Sealant:
a. Fyre-Shield, Tremco Inc.
.... 4. Endothermic, Latex Compounds:
a. Flame-Safe FS500/600 Series, International Protective Coatings Corp.
b. Flame-Safe FS900/FST900 Series, International Protective Coatings Corp.
5. Intumescent Latex Sealant:
a. Metacaulk 950, The RectorSeal Corporation.
b. Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
6. Intumescent Putty:
a. Pensil 500 Intumescent Putty, General Electric Co.
b. Flame-Safe FSP1000 Putty, International Protective Coatings Corp.
c. Fire Barrier Moldable Putty, 3M Fire Protection Products.
7. Intumescent Wrap Strips:
a. Dow Coming Fire Stop Intumescent Wrap Strip 2002, Dow Coming Corp.
b. CS2420 Intumescent Wrap, Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
c. Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip, 3M Fire Protection Products.
FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
8. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound:
a. USG Firecode Compound, United States Gypsum Co.
9. Mortar:
a. K-2 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc.
b. Novasit K-10 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc.
c. KBS-Mortar Seal, International Protective Coatings Corp.
10. Pillows/Bags:
a. Firestop Pillows, Bio Fireshield, Inc.
b. KBS Sealbags, International Protective Coatings Corp.
11. Silicone Foams:
a. Dow Corning Fire Stop Feam 2001, Dow Corning Corp.
b. Pensil 200 Foam, General Electric Co.
12. Silicone Sealants:
a. Dow Corning Firestop Sealant 2000, Dow Corning Corp.
b. Dow Corning Firestop Sealant SL 2003, Dow Corning Corp.
c. Pensil 100 Firestop Sealant, General Electric Co.
d. CS240 Firestop Sealant, Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
e. Metacaulk 835, The RectorSeal Corporation.
f. Metacaulk 880, The RectorSeal Corporation.
g. Fyre-Sil, Tremco Inc.
h. Fyre-Sil S/L, Tremco Inc.
13. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealants:
a. Biostop 500 Intumescent Firestop Caulk, Bio Fireshield, Inc.
b. Fire Barrier CP 25N/S Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
c. Fire Barrier CP 25S/L Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
2.3 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants
of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for
Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint
sealants.
B. Sealant Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for
products of type indicated.
C.Single-Componem, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use
NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
1. Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the following
percentage changes in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and
cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with
other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated:
a. 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent
movement.
D. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT,
and joint-substrate-related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-~- 1. Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the following
percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and
cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with
other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated:
a. 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 ~percent
movement.
E. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A, and
(as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
~_ F. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing, Silicone Sealant:
a. Dow Corning 790, Dow Corning Corp.
b. Dow Corning 795, Dow Corning Corp.
c. Silprnf, General Electric Co.
-- d. Ultraglaze, General Electric Co.
e. 864, Pecora Corp.
2. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant:
a. Vulkem 922, Mameco International Inc.
b. Dynflex, Pecora Corp.
c. Dynatred, Pecora Corp.
d. Dynatrol II, Pecora Corp.
e. Sikaflex 2cn NS, Sika Corp.
f. Sonolastic NP 2, Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.
g. Dymeric, Tremco Inc.
3. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant:
-- a. Isoflex 880 GB, Harry S. Peterson Co., Inc.
b. Isoflex 881, Harry S. Peterson Co., Inc.
c. Vulkem 921, Mameco International Inc.
d. Sikaflex--15LM, Sika Corp.
2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufacturer's
directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment,
selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce
firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application
- indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening
configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply
with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating
items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.
FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
operation.
3.Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's
recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and
migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will
remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged
by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from f~restopping materials. Remove tape
as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS
A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the
through-penetration fzrestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products
and applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to
achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials,
remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items.
2.Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating
items.
3.For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining f'mishes.
3.4 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1, with ASTM C 1193,
and with the sealant manufacturer's installation imtructions and drawings pertaining to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce
the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required.
C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint
substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform,
cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability.
Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed.
D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing begins.
Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire-resistance rating, as
well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants
or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspecting agency employed and paid by Owner will examine completed firestopping to determine, in
general, if it is being installed in compliance with requirements.
FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Comractor and Architect.
C. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until reports of examinations are issued.
D. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with requirements.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which
opening and joints occur.
B. Protect ftrestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to
produce firestopping complying with specified requirements.
-- END OF SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
- SECTION 07410 - MANUFACTURED ROOF AND WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
~- 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes manufactured roof panels of the following type:
-~ 1. Standing seam roof panels to be machine seamed.
B. This Section includes manufactured wall panels, for use at soffits, of the following type:
1. Field-assembled wall panels with concealed fasteners.
C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Sections for structural and light gage framing.
2. Division 7 Section "Insulation" for roof and soffit insulation.
3. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for roof and soffit flashing and other sheet
'~ metal work.
4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied panel sealants.
D. Wood framing and decking are specified in a Division 6 section.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
_ A. Provide certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in accordance with
specified test methods for each system.
B. Air Infiltration: Provide roof panel system with no air leakage when tested in accordance with
.... ASTM E 283 at pressure differentials up to 1.57 psf.
C. Air Infiltration: Provide wall panel systems with an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 cfm
per sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure
~- differential of 1.57 psf.
D. Water Penetration: Provide panel systems with no water penetration as def'med in the test method
__ when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward static air pressure differential of not less
than 6.24 psf and not more than 12.0 psf.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data including manufacturer's product specifications, standard details, certified product test
results, installation instructions, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and
finishes for each component and for total panel system.
C. Samples for verification purposes of roof and wall panels. Provide sample panels 12 inches long
by actual panel width, in the prof'fle, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, battens,
fasteners, closures, and other panel accessories.
MANUFACTURED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Shop Drawings showing layouts of panels on walls and roofs, details of edge conditions, joints,
corners, panel profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details.
Distinguish between factory and field assembly work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wind Uplift: Provide roof panel system including supports meeting requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. for Class 90 wind uplift resistance.
B. Field Measurements: Where possible, prior to fabrication of panels, take field measurements of
structure or substrates to receive panel system. Allow for trimming panel units where final
dimensions cannot be established prior to fabrication.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain primary products, including each type of roof and wall panel,
from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary products as recommended by manufacturer of
primary products for use with system specified.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package wall and
roof panels for protection against transportation damage.
B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall and roof covering panels to
prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight
ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that they will not accumulate water. Do
not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Finish Warranty: Furnish panel manufacturer's written warranty covering failure of the factory-
applied exterior finish on metal wall and roof panels within the warranty period. This warranty
shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor
under the Contract Documents.
1. Warranty period for factory-applied exterior finishes on wall and roof panels is 20 years
after the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. ! MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal
roof or wall panel systems that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the
following:
1. Steel Roof and Wall Panels:
a. AEP-Span.
b. Allied Roof System.
c. Architectural Panels, Inc.
d. ASC Pacific, Inc.
e. Atlas Aluminum Corp.
f. Berridge Manufacturing Co.
g. Butler Manufacturing Co.
h. Cheney Flashing Company.
i. ECI Building Components, Inc.
j. Fashion, Inc.
MANUFACTURED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
"- k. Flexospan.
1. Inryco Architectural Products.
m. Metal Building Components, Inc. (MBCI).
n. Merchant & Evans, Inc. CZip-Rib").
o. Molenco.
p. Morin Building Products Co., Inc.
q. MM Systems Corp.
~- r. Petersen Aluminum Corp.
s. H.H. Robertson Company.
t. E.G. Smith Construction Products, Inc.
u. Steelite, Inc.
~ v. Vincent Metals.
w. Vin-Cor Steel Corp.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Structural Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip zinc-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 446 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A 525, Grade C or to suit manufacturer's
_ standards.
2.3 METAL FINISHES
-~ A. General: Apply coatings either before or after forming and fabricating panels, as required by
coating process and as required for maximum coating performance capability. Protect coating either
by application of strippable film or by packing plastic film or other suitable material between panels
in a manner to properly protect the finish. Furnish air-drying spray finish in matching color for
~ · touch-up.
1. Color: As indicated in Section 00861 - DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY.
B. Fluoropolymer Coating: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermo-cured, full-strength 70 percent
"Kynar 500" coating consisting of a primer and a minimum 0.75-mil dry film thickness with a total
minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 mil and 30 percent reflective gloss when tested in accordance
. · with ASTM D 523.
1. Durability: Provide coating that has been field tested under normal range of weathering
conditions for mimmum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack, or
check in finish; without chalking in excess of No. 8 in accordance with ASTM D 659; and
without fading in excess of 5 NBS units.
2.4 THERMAL INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Unfaced, preformed, rigid, cellular, polyurethane thermal
insulation complying with ASTM C 591, Type 2 with aged r-values of 6.2 at 75 deg F (23.9 deg
. c).
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Laminated Backer Board: Hardboard that complies with ANSI A135.4, Class 1 tempered, 1/4 inch
thick except as otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end-welded studs,
and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Use aluminum, corrosion-resistant steel, or stainless steel fasteners for exterior application
and galvanized or cadmium-plated fasteners for interior applications.
C. Felts: Provide asphalt-saturated organic felts conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 226,
Type II (No. 30).
MANUFACTURED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Accessories: Except as indicated as work of another specification section, provide components
required for a complete roof or wall panel system, including trim, copings, fascias, gravel stops,
mullions, sills, comer tmits, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters, louvers,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of panels.
1. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, self-extinguishing, expanded cellular rubber or cross-linked
polyolefm foam flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of roof and
wall panels. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight
construction.
2. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive 100 percent solids polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining
tape.
3.Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone rubber sealant
as recommended by the building manufacturer.
E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC paint 12, compounded for 15 mil dry film
thickness per coat.
2.6 PANEL FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and f'mish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as required to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and dimensional
requirements and with structural requirements.
B. Apply bituminous coating or other permanent separation materials on concealed panel surfaces
where panels would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are noncompatible
or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finishes.
C. Fabricate panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips, which provide a tight seal and prevent
metal-to-metal contact in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel system.
2.7 ROOF AND WALL PANELS
A. Face Sheets: Fabricate wall panel face sheets to the profile or configuration indicated from 24-gage
(0.0239-inch) zinc-coated or aluminum-zinc-coated steel sheets.
1. Design is based on FW-12 Panel as manufactured by Berridge Manufacturing Co.
B. Standing Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory-formed standing-seam roof panel
system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to roof purlin using a concealed clip. Form
panels of 24-gage (0.0239-inch) zinc-coated or aluminum-zinc-coated steel sheets.
1. Design is based on Curved Tee Panel as manufactured by Berridge Manufacturing Co.
2. Clips: Provide 16-gage (0.0598-inch) panel clips designed to meet negative load
requirements.
3. Cleats: Factory-calked, mechanically seamed cleats formed from 24-gage (0.0239-inch),
Grade C, zinc-coated steel sheets.
2.8 PANEL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Secondary Framing: Provide the following secondary fraraing members:
1. Roof Purlin and Wall Girts: "C"- or "Z"-shaped sections fabricated from 16-gage (0.0598-
inch) shop-painted, roll-formed steel. Purlin spacers shall be fabricated from 14-gage
(0.0747-inch) cold-formed galvanized steel sections.
2. Eave Struts: Unequal flange "C"-shaped sections formed to provide adequate backup for
both wall and roof panels. Fabricate from 16-gage (0.0598-inch) shop-painted, roll-formed
steel.
3.Flange and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8- by 1-5/8-inch angles fabricated from 16-gage (0.0598-
inch) shop-painted, roll-formed steel.
MANUFACTURED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 4. Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 14-gage (0.0747-inch) cold-formed galvanized steel
sections.
5. Secondary structural members, except columns and beams, shall be the manufacturer's
_ standard sections fabricated from 14-gage (0.0747-inch) cold-formed galvanized steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PANEL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Girts, purlin, and other secondary structural panel support members and anchorage shall be installed
in accordance with AISC Manual of Steel Construction "Code of Standard Practice."
3.2 PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for installation, as
applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of
the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Install panels with concealed fasteners.
3. Install roof panels over minimum 3:12 pitch solid substrate with one ply of felt installed
from lower edge up with at least 3-inch side laps and 4-inch end laps.
B. Accessories: Install components required for a complete roof or wall panel system, including trim,
copings, fascias, gravel stops, mullions, sills, coruer units, ridge closures, clips, seam covers,
battens, flashings, gutters, louvers, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of panel systems. Provide types of gaskets, sealants, and fillers indicated
or, if not otherwise indicated, types recommended by panel manufacturer.
1. Provide weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with
rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather.
2. Refer to other sections of these specifications for product and installation requirements
applicable to indicated joint sealers.
D. Joint Sealers: Refer to other sections of these specifications for post-installation requirements on
joint sealers; not work of this section.
E. Standing Seam Roof Panel System: Fasten roof panels to supports with concealed clip in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install clips at each support with self-drilling/self-tapping fasteners.
2. At end laps of panels, install tape caulk between panels.
3. Install factory-calked cleats at standing-seam joints. Apply snap-on batten to the panels to
provide a weathertight joint.
4. Seaming: Complete seaming of panel joints by operation of portable power-driven
equipment of type recommended by panel manufacturer to provide a weathertight joint.
F. Wall Panels: Apply elastomeric sealant continuously as necessary for waterproofmg. Handle and
apply sealant and backup in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Align end of wall panels and fasten panels with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws.
Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.
2. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress
neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install
screws in predrilled holes.
3.Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating soffit.
MANUFACTURED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
G. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20'-0"
on level/plumb/slope and location/line as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and
of alignment of matching profiles.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the work that have been damaged or have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of finish touch-up or similar minor repair
procedures.
B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films (if any) as soon as each
panel is installed. Upon completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended
by panel manufacturer, and maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07410
MANUFACTURED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 07527 - SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Modified bituminous sheet with mineral granule surfacing.
2. Vapor retarder.
3. Roof insulation.
4. Roof'mg asphalt.
5. Roof membrane surfacing material.
6. Temporary roofing.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for treated wood nailers, curbs, and wood cants.
2. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for metal counter flashings.
3. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Systems" for roof drains.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definitions of terms related to roof'mg work not
otherwise defined in this Section.
B. Thermal Resistivity (r-value) is the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value) which is the rate of heat
flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivity (r-value) is expressed by
the temperature difference in degrees F between two parallel surfaces required to cause 1 Btu to flow
through 1 sq. ft. of a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick per hour at the mean temperature
indicated.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install modified bituminous sheet roof'mg to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather, without failure.
B. UL Listing: Provide modified bituminous sheet roofing system and component materials that have been
tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for
Class B external fire exposure.
1. Provide roof-covering materials bearing UL Classification Marking on bundle, package, or
container indicating that materials have been produced under UL's Classification and Follow-up
Service.
2. Provide modified bitumen sheet roo£mg system that can be installed to comply with UL
requirements for Fire Classified and Class 90 wind-uplift requirements.
C. Insulation Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials that are identical to materials
whose fire-performance characteristics have been determined for the assemblies of which the insulation
materials are a part, per test method listed below, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with
requirements.
1. For asphalt bitumen, provide label on each container or certification with each load of bulk
bitumen, indicating flash point (FP), finished blowing temperature (FBT), softening point (SP),
and equiviscous temperature (EVT).
C. Shop Drawings - Indicate:
1. Setting plan for insulation.
2. Roof slopes.
3. Layout of seams.
4. Base flashing, termination, and special details.
5. Fastener types and locations.
D. Samples of the following:
1. 8-1/2"-by-11-inch-square samples of each color modified, bituminous, mineral-surface cap sheets
to be exposed as finished roof surface.
E. Installer Certification: Submit written certification from manufacturer of modified bituminous sheet
roofing system certifying that Installer is approved by manufacturer to install specified roofing system.
Provide copy of certification to Architect before award of roofing work.
!.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain primary products, including each type of roofing sheet, bitumen,
membrane flashings, and vapor retarder (if any), from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary
products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified.
B. Roof Assembly:
1. FM Class 1-90 Windstorm Classification.
2. Class A Fire Hazard Classification when tested in accordance with ASTM E 108.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer (Roofer) who is certified by modified
bituminous sheet roofing system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's roofing materials.
1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman on job
site during times that modified bituminous sheet roofing work is in progress and who is
experienced in installation of roofing systems similar to type and scope required for this Project.
D. Preliminary Roofing Conference: As soon as possible after award 'of modified bitumen sheet roofing
work, meet with Installer (Roofer), installers of substrate construction (roof decks) and other work
adjoining roof system including penetrating work and roof accessories, Architect, Owner, and
representatives of other entities directly concerned with performance of roof'mg system.
1. Review requirements (Contract Documents), submittals, status of coordinating work, availability
of materials, and installation facilities and establish preliminary installation schedule. Review
requirements for inspections, testing, certifications, forecasted weather conditions, governing
regulations, insurance requirements, and proposed installation procedures.
2. Discuss roofing system protection requirements for construction period extending beyond roofing
installation. Discuss possible need for temporary roofing.
3. Record discussion, including agreement or disagreement on matters of significance; furnish copy
of recorded discussions to each participant. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of
conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening
conference.
SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and handle roofing sheets in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place to ensure no possibility of
significant moisture pickup. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised
surface.
B. Do not leave unused felts and other sheet materials on the roof overnight or when roof'mg work is not in
progress unless protected from weather or other moisture sources.
C. Handle and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roof'mg work only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions will permit unit of Work to be installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations
and warranty requirements.
B. Temporary Roofmg: When adverse job or weather conditions prevent permanent roofmg system from
being installed according to requirements and Contractor determines that roof'mg cannot be delayed
because of need for job progress or protection of other work, install temporary roofing. Engage roofing
Installer to provide temporary roofing and to remove it prior to proceeding with permanent roofing work.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of modified bituminous sheet roofing with related units of Work specified in other
Sections to ensure that roof assemblies, including roof accessories, flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are
protected against damage from effects of weather, corrosion, and adjacent construction activity.
B. Staging of roof membrane application or temporary membrane is not acceptable; install system in f'mal
form each day. If phased roofing occurs as result of emergency conditions, install additional plies over
phased areas.
C. Install water stops at exposed edges of roofing system if work is stopped due to adverse weather
conditions.
D. Complete flashings daily.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit two executed copies of standard 2-year Roofing Warranty, covering
work of this section including roof'mg membrane, membrane flashing, roof insulation, any vapor
retarders, and roof'mg accessories, signed and countersigned by Installer (Roofer) and Contractor.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit executed copy of roof'mg manufacturer's special product Warranty
agreement covering labor and materials including flashing endorsement, signed by an authorized
representative of modified bitumen sheet roofmg system manufacturer, on form that was published with
product literature as of date of Contract Documents, for the following period of time:
1. 20 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY ROOFING
A. Temporary Roofing Membrane: Two plies of asphalt-impregnated glass-fiber felt complying with ASTM
D 2178, Type IV, set in and glaze-coated with hot moppings of ASTM D 312, Type III asphalt.
1. Provide base of rigid perlite board roof insulation over metal deck surfaces of minimum thickness
as required to span between top flutes of deck without deflection, but not less than 3/4 inch.
Attach to deck with FM-approved adhesive.
SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.2 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Bituminous Vapor Retarder: Two plies of asphalt-impregnated glass-fiber felt, complying with ASTM
D 2178, Type IV, set in and glaze-coated with ASTM D 312, Type III asphalt.
1. Provide rigid perlite board roof insulation substrate over metal deck surfaces, thickness as
required to span flutes without deflection, 1-inch minimum thickness. Mechanically fasten to
deck.
2.3 ROOF INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate-Foam Board Insulation: Rigid boards of minimum 2.0-pcf density
polyisocyanurate-based foam core, bonded to roofmg felt facet sheets. Provide in thickness indicated,
with minimum k-value of 0.17 when tested according to ASTM C 518 after insulation is conditioned per
RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure. Provide in manufacturer's standard sizes.
1. Thickness: 2" minimum.
2. Thermal Resistance: Minimum R value of 22, excluding tapered.
3. Provide tapered 24-by-48-inch boards to provide slope-to-drain where indicated, fabricated with
taper of 1/4 inch per foot in the 24-inch dimension.
2.4 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING SYSTEM
A. Insulated-Deck, Modified Bitumen Membrane/Fully Adhered (IMBF):
1. Base Sheet: Styrene Bntadiene Styrene (SBS)-modified bitumen base sheet, with glass-fiber
reinforcing mat, dusted with frae mineral granules both sides.
2. Interply sheet:
a. Modified Bitumen Sheet Membrane/Plain Surfaced: Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS)-
modified asphalt sheets with smooth surface, dusted with t-me mineral granules on both
sides; manufacturer's standard thickness.
3. Top Sheet: Modified Bitumen Sheet Membrane/Mineral Surfaced: Styrene Butadiene Styrene
(SBS)-modified asphalt sheets with continuous layer of mineral granules factory-applied to top
exposed surface. Provide manufacturer's standard thickness. Granule color: White.
a. Sheet Reinforcing: Composite polyester and glass-fiber mat.
4. Flashing Sheet: Manufacturer's standard reinforced modified bitumen flashing sheet consisting
of styrene butadiene (SBS) modified bitumen reinforced with minimum
250 g/sq m polyester mat, heat welding grade, with ceramic granule surfacing in color to match
roof membrane.
5. Bituminous Materials:
a. Bitumen: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV as applicable to slope.
b. Primer: ASTM D 41.
c. Roof cement: ASTM D 2822, Type I.
6. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Nord Bitumi U.S., Inc.
b. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation
c. Soprema Roof'mg and Waterproofing, Inc.
d. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Wood Members: Comply with requirements of Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood
members indicated as roof'mg system work.
SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Cant Strips: Preservative treated wood, specified in Section 06100, 4 inch nominal vertical
height, 45 degree face.
2. Nailers and Curbs: Preservative treated wood, specified in Section 06100.
B. Tapered Edge Strips: Rigid perlite board, ASTM C 728.
C. Walkway Protection Boards: Mineral-surfaced bituminous composition boards, approximately 1/2 inch
thick, manufactured specifically for hot bituminous application on modified bitumen sheet roof'mg as a
protection course for foot traffic.
D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Carey-Tread, Celotex Corp.
2. J-Walk, Manville Sales Corporation.
3. White Walk, W. R. Meadows, Inc.
E. Substrate Joint Tape: 6-inch- or 8-inch-wide, coated, glass-fiber joint tape.
F. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene (plain or bituminous modified), nonhardening, nonmigrating,
nonskinning, and nondrying.
G. Fasteners: Provide mechanical fasteners for modified bitumen sheet roof'mg system work, tested by
manufacturer for required pull-out strength where applicable and compatible with deck type and roof'mg
products used. Provide either 1-inch-diameter nail heads or 1-3/8-inch-diameter by 30-gage sheet metal
caps for nails used to secure base sheets, felts, or insulation boards.
H. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, fluoropolymer-coated steel, or nonferrous metal screws. Size, length, and
type recommended by manufacturer as suitable for material to be fastened, substrate, and that will comply
with requirements of governing authorities and listing agencies.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive modified bitumen sheet roof'mg system and associated work and
conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roof'mg until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
1. Verify that flatness and fastening of metal roof decks comply with installation tolerances specified
in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck."
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Cooperate with inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with
installing modified bitumen sheet roofing system.
B. Protect other work from spillage of modified bitumen roofing materials, and prevent liquid materials from
entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of
modified bituminous sheet roofing system work.
C. Insurance/Code Compliance: Where required, install and test modified bitumen sheet roofing system to
comply with governing regulations and specified insurance requirements.
D. Coordinate installing roof'mg system components so that insulation and roof'mg plies are not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed overnight. Provide cut offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed ply
sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed with roofing cement.
Remove cut offs immediately before resuming work.
E. Asphalt Bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen according to EVT Method as recommended by
NRCA. Do not raise temperature above minimum normal fluid-holding temperature necessary to attain
SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
EVT (plus 5 deg F or 14 deg C, at point of application) more than I hour prior to time of application.
Determine flash point, finished blowing temperature, EVT, and fire-safe handling temperature of bitumen
either by information from manufacturer or by suitable tests. Do not exceed recommended temperature
limits during bitumen heating. Do not heat bitumen to a temperature higher than 25 deg F (14 deg C)
below flash point. Discard bitumen that has been held at temperature exceeding finished blowing
temperature (FBT) for more than 3 hours. Keep kettle lid closed except when adding bitumen.
F. Bitumen Mopping Weights: For interply mopping, apply bitumen at the rate of 25 lb of asphalt per roof
square (plus or minus 25 percent on a total-job average basis).
G. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Prevent bitumen from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or
damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. Where mopping is applied
directly to substrate, tape substrate joints or, where steep asphalt is used, hold asphalt back 2 inches from
both sides of the joint.
H. Cutoffs: At end of each day's roof'mg installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including
ply sheets and any insulation. Provide temporary covering of two plies of No. 15 roof'mg felt set in full
moppings of hot bitumen; remove at beginning of next day's work.
3.3 TEMPORARY ROOF INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Roofmg on Steel Decks: Apply continuous ribbons of Type III hot asphalt to deck at 6 inches
o.c.; thickness sufficient to spread to 2 inches in width when insulation is placed. Install one course of
perlite board roof insulation in hot asphalt; thickness as required to span deck flutes but not less than
1/2-inch thick. Apply two plies of roof'mg felts, lapping each felt 19 inches over preceding one, using
solid moppings of Type III asphalt at a rate of 20 lb per square (plus or minus 25 percent). Glaze-coat
completed surface with Type III asphalt at rate of 20 lb per square (plus or minus 25 percent).
1. Comply with NRCA "Low-Slope Roof'mg Manual" Specification 10-TR and Diagram TR-SI.
B. Remove temporary roof completely prior to installing permanent roofmg system.
3.4 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Vapor Retarder on Steel Decks: Mechanically fasten one course of perlite board roof insulation in
thickness as required to span deck flutes, but not less than 1 inch thick. Use FM-approved fasteners
specifically designed for securing insulation boards to steel roof deck and driven through metal discs.
Space fasteners in accordance with FM requirements for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
Locate end joints of insulation over deck flutes.
B. Over insulation board, apply two plies of vapor retarder felts, lapping each felt 19 inches over the
preceding one. Fully adhere each ply to deck using Type III asphalt at the rate of 20 lb per square (plus
or minus 25 percent). Glaze-coat completed surface with Type III asphalt at rate of 20 lb per square (plus
or minus 25 percent).
1. Comply with "NRCA Low-Slope Roofmg Manual" Specification 11-VR and Diagram VR-SI.
2. Apply two-course stripping of glass-fiber fabric and roof'mg cement at obstructions and
penetrations through vapor retarder.
3.5 INSTALLING INSULATION
A. General: Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the handling,
installation, and bonding or anchorage of insulation to substrate.
B. Set insulation in hot solid mopping of Type III asphalt, applied within temperature range of EVT plus or
minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) and at rate of 25 lb per 100 sq. ft. (plus or minus 15 percent on total-job
basis). Run long joints of insulation in continuous straight line, perpendicular to roof slope, with end
joints staggered between rows.
C. Two-Layer Installation: Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install required
thickness in two layers with joints of second layer staggered from joints of first layer a minimum of 12
SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
inches each direction. Install second layer in full mopping of hot Type III asphalt.
D. Fit boards to moderate contact with other boards and at projections. Fill voids over 3/8 inch wide with
scrap insulation.
E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush with ring of drain.
F. Nailers: Where insulated substrates slope more than 1/2 inch per foot, install wood nailers of same
thickness as insulation, spaced not more than 20 to 21 feet apart and between insulation boards, depending
on board size. Anchor nailers to substrate. Run nailers perpendicular to slope of roof unless otherwise
indicated.
3.6 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Shingling Plies: Install membrane with ply sheets shingled uniformly to achieve required number of
membrane plies throughout. Shingle in proper direction to shed water on each large area of roofing,
where slope is significant (over 1/2 inch per foot).
B. Nailing, General: Comply with governing regulations, insurance requirements, roofing materials
manufacturer's recommendations, and recognized industry standards, but not less than one nail per 1.5
sq. ft. of roofing area.
C. Cant Strips/Tapered Edge Strips: Install preformed 45-degree cant strips at junctures of modified
bituminous sheet roof'mg system membrane with vertical surface. Provide preformed, tapered edge strips
at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.
D. Base Sheets: Install two plys of base sheet. Spot mop first ply to insulation with steep asphalt, solid mop
second ply of base sheet to first. Follow manufacturer's instructions for lapping courses.
E. Interply Sheets: Install one single ply sheet of type indicated, lapped amount as recommended by
manufacturer to form a continuous, uniform membrane with continuous bitumen moppings between sheets
so that ply sheets do not touch.
F. Top Sheet: Install top sheet using hot bitumen at the same rate as interply sheets to form a continuous
bonded membrane.
1. Extend modified bituminous sheet to 2 inches above top edge of cant strip and terminate.
2. Nail edges of membrane to wood blocking at perimeter edges of roof prior to installing metal
gravel stops/fascias. Space nails at minimum 8 inches o.c.
G. Set-On Accessories: Where small roof accessories are set on modified bituminous sheet roofing, set
metal flanges in a bed of roofing cement and seal penetration of membrane with bead of roofmg cement
to prevent flow of bitumen from membrane.
3.7 MEMBRANE FLASHING AND STRIPPING
A. Install modified bituminous flashing at cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges,
and at penetrations through roof. Install one ply of flashing sheet material by mopping substrate and back
of flashing sheet with Type III asphalt and embedding flashing solidly against substrate. Extend flashing
a minimum of 6 inches onto modified bituminous sheet roofing.
1. Construct in accordance with NRCA Roofing Manual and manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Horizontal to vertical surfaces:
a. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces with primer at rate of 1 gallon per square.
b. Install cant strip at juncture of vertical surfaces and roof; embed in hot bitumen.
c. Extend roofing over cant and minimum 8 inches up vertical surfaces.
d. Apply flashing sheet; extend 2 inches onto roof beyond cant and up vertical surface.
e. Apply heat to underside of sheets; press to full bond with substrate without voids,
wrinkles, bridging, or fishmouths. Seal ends and edges.
f. Mechanically fasten top edge of flashing to substrate and seal with metal flashing, or
.- SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
extend over top of wall.
B. Install modified bituminous stripping where metal flanges are set on roofing. Install one ply of modified
bituminous stripping in a continuous mopping of Type III asphalt and extend stripping a minimum of 6
inches out onto the roof membrane.
C. Metal Flashings:
1. Prime metal flanges; set on top of roof membrane.
2. Nail flanges 3 inches on center, in line 1 inch from edge of flange. Strip with one ply of roofing
membrane. Extend membrane minimum 3 inches past edge of sheet metal.
D. Allow for expansion of running metal flashing and edge trim that adjoins roofing. Do not seal or bond
membrane or modified bituminous flashing or stripping to metal flanges over 3 feet in length.
E. Counter-Flashings: Counter-flashings, cap flashings, expansion joints, and similar work to be
coordinated with modified bitumen roofmg work are specified in other Sections.
F. Roof Accessories: Miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including piping vents, insulation vents
and other devices to be coordinated with modified bituminous roof'nag system work, are specified in other
Sections.
G. Cap Sheet Surfacing: Promptly after completing base sheet (same day where possible), apply one lapped
course of cap sheet of type indicated. Set cap sheet in uniform mopping of same hot bitumen used in
ply-sheet course, at average rate of 15 lb per square, with 1/4-inch bitumen flow exposed along cap sheet
edge. Lap edges 4 inches and sheet ends 6 inches minimum.
3.8 INSTALLING PROTECTED ROOF MEMBRANE INSULATION
A. General: Only install the quantity of insulation that can be ballasted or secured within each work day or
before the start of unacceptable weather for roofing.
B. Lay insulation boards over membrane, with joints tightly butted and end joints staggered. Cut and trim
boards to fit snugly at edges, projections, and penetrations.
C. Install fabric overlay over insulation boards; overlap ends and edges a mimmum of 6 inches.
D. Install securement system at edges and projections as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with
T. Clear Corporation Technical Data Sheets No. 4.3.2 and 4.3.3.
3.9 ROOF WALKWAYS
A. Composition Board Walkways: Provide walkway protection boards at locations shown, using units of
size shown or, if size not shown, using units of manufacturer's standard size, 1/2 inch thick. Set units
in additional pour coat of hot bitumen after aggregate surfacing of modified bitnmirtous sheet membrane.
3.10 PROTECTING ROOFING
A. Protect roofiag during remainder of construction period. At end of construction period, or at a time when
remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing and prepare a written
report, with copies to Architect and Owner, describing nature and extent of deterioration or damage
found.
B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at time of above inspection to a
condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty
requirements.
END OF SECTION 07527
SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07527 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART ! - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:
1. Roof-drainage systems.
2. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fasciae.
3. Copings.
4. Metal flashing.
5. Reglets.
6. Shower pans.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Sections for through-wall flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified
as part of masonry work.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants.
3. Division 7 Roof'mg Sections for flashing and roofing accessories installed integral with
roof'mg membrane as part of roof'mg-system work.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.
B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of FM Loss
Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the following wind zone:
1. Wind Zone 1: Wind pressures of 10 to 20 psf (0.48 to 0.96 kPa).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general
recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product.
C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage
details.
D. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish
involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units
showing the full range of variations expected.
1. 8-inch- (200-mm-) square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished
surfaces.
2. 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work.
Provide complete with specified factory finish.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
_ SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing
and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each
installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials
and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Copper: ASTM B 370; temper H00, cold rolled except where temper 060 is required for forming;
not less than 16 oz./sq, ft. (0.55 mm thick), unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90 (ASTM A 526M, Z 275), commercial quality, or
ASTM A 527, G 90 (ASTM A 527M, Z 275), lock-forming quality, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet
with 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch
(1.0 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 CONCEALED THROUGH-WALL SHEET METAL FLASHING
A. Material: Fabricate from the following metal:
1. Copper: 10 oz. (0.34 mm thick) for fully concealed flashing; 16 oz. (0.55 mm thick)
elsewhere.
2. Fabricate through-wall metal flashings embedded in masonry as follows:
a. With ribs formed in dovetail pattern at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of
flashing to provide a 3-way integral mortar bond and weep-hole drainage.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cheney Flashing (Dovetail); Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.
2. Keystone Three-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing; Keystone Flashing Co.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux.
B. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by
sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.
C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and
containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.
D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of
components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-
resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.
G. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-1b/square (0.244 kg/sq, m) red rosin, sized building paper conforming to
FS UU-B-790, Type I, Style lb.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
H. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397, minimum 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick black polyethylene
film, resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E 154.
I. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed;
noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.
J. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design,
dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.
B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result
in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of
surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and
that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
form seams, and solder.
E. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed
within 24 inches (610 mm) of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion
provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form
expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with
mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant
to comply with SMACNA standards.
G. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at
locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on
faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
I. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.
1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application
but never less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.5 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance
requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal.
B. Downspouts: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
C. Conductor Heads: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Scuppers: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
E. Exposed Trim, Gravel Stops, and Fasciae: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
F. Copings: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
G. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
H. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
I. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
J. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
K. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
L. Shower Pans: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Copper: 12 oz./sq, ft. (0.4 mm thick).
M. Roof-to-Wall Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and
verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for
thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and
level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weatherproof.
B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and
that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet
metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet
metal.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data
Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone.
D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space
movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm)
of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be
._ used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant
(concealed within joints).
E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of
sheets to be soldered to a width of I-I/2 inches (38 mm), except where pretinned surface would
show in f'mished Work.
-- 1. Do not solder the following metals:
a. Coil-coated galvanized steel sheet.
-- 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
_ F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant
to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal
sealant.
-- 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
form seams, and solder.
H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed
surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended
by manufacturer.
1. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
I. Counterfiashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be
protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a
waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant,
__ interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2
inches (50 mm) and bed with sealant.
J. Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives,
-- and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the
most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system
installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roof'mg
installation.
K. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofmg and
equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member.
L. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roof'mg and
installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
. 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with
flashing.
2. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or
deterioration of finishes.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work
during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
c. Joints between different materials listed above.
d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
e. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and
partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and
elevator entrances.
f. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
g. Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
c. Other joints as indicated.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for sealing joints related to flashing and sheet metal
for roofing.
2. Division 8 "Glass and Glazing" for sealants used in glazing.
3. Division 9 Section "Tile" for sealing tile joints.
4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for acoustical sealant.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and
maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint
substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.
1. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for
sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of
strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view.
D. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification
requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
E. Qualification data complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" article. Include list of
completed projects with project names addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information
specified.
F. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials
forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with
joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance
and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
G.Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements
specified.
H. Preconstruction field test repons indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrate
acceptable adhesion to joint substrates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single
manufacturer for each different product required.
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers samples of
materials that will contact or affect joint sealants for compatibility and adhesion testing as indicated
below:
1. Use test methods standard with manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific joint
preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.
2.Submit not less than 9 pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint
sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3.Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the
Work.
4.Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain joint sealant manufacturer's
written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.
D. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealant based on tests conducted
by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within a 24-month period
preceding date of Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect.
1. Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920. Include test results for hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under
cyclic movement (per ASTM C 719), low-temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
percent strain, effects of heat aging, and effects of accelerated weathering.
E. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint
substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected.
4. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below:
a. Install joint sealants in 5-feet joint lengths using same materials and methods for joint
preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work. Allow sealants to
cure fully before testing.
b. Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to the other followed by 2 vertical cuts
approximately 2 inches long at side of joint and meeting horizontal cut at top of 2-inch
cuts. Place a mark 1 inch from top of 2-inch piece.
c. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant just above 1-inch mark; pull firmly down at
a 90-degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of
joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability,
but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold
this position for 10 seconds.
5. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and
joint substrate.
6. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence
of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not
use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than
allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated..
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable
of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after completion
of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for
products of type indicated.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants
that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data
Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for
Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in
Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet, provide products with the capability, when tested for
adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the
specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in
compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for Uses indicated.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Elastomeric
Sealant Data Sheet.
2.3 SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing acrylic terpolymer
sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S-00230 or both, with capability when tested for adhesion
and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage
change in joint width existing at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for
Project without failing cohesively:
1. 12-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 25 percent.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, solvent-release-curing joint sealants that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acrylic Sealant:
a. "PTI 738," Protective Treatments, Inc.
b. "PTI 767," Protective Treatments, Inc.
c. "Mono," Tremco, Inc.
2.4 PREFORMED FOAM SEALANTS
A. Preformed Foam Sealants: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated open-cell
foam sealant manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water
repellent agent; factory-produced in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths
indicated and to develop a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by
manufacturer; and complying with the following requirements:
1. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew-resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatible
with joint substrates and other joint sealants.
2. Impregnating Agent: Latex-modified asphalt.
3. Density: 9-10 pcf.
4. Backing: None.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
5. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, preformed foam sealants that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. "Emseal," Emseal Corp.
2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding
strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant
depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Open-cell polyurethane foam.
2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in tmruptured
state.
3. Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a density of 2.5 pcf and
tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D 1623, and with water absorption less than 0.02 gms/cc per
ASTM C 1083.
4. Any material indicated above.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer
for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of
joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way
joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants
with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent
to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate
surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these
methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint
sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or
blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
3.Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
· -- JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous
surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave
residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant
manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required
to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products
and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at
position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint ftllers.
c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and
replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and
joint fillers or back of joints.
D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting
and fully wetting joint substrates, completely ftlling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and
providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets,
and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces
adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved
by sealant manufacturer.
1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing
protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, and to comply with sealant manufacturer's
directions for installation methods, materials, and tools that produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and
intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires
acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in conformance with sealant manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with new sealant,
ensure that repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.6 JOINT SEALER SCHEDULE
DESCRIPTION OF JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND
SEALANT LOCATION WHERE JOINT SEALER IS
DESIGNATION JOINT SEALER TYPICALLY APPLIED (SEE NOTE BELOW)
ES1 Multi-Part Pourable Urethane Sealant Exterior and interior joints in horizontal surfaces of
concrete; between metal and concrete, mortar, stone and
_ masonry.
ES2 Two-Part Nonsag Polyurethane Exterior and interior joints in vertical
Sealant. surfaces of concrete and masonry; between
- concrete masonry and stone; between metal
and concrete, mortar, or stone; interior
and exterior perimeter joints of metal
frames in exterior walls; and exterior
-- overhead joints.
ES3 One-Part Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant Exterior and Interior joints in vertical surfaces of metal
trim and steel or metal framing; between metal frames
~-- and glass and/or glass block.
ES4 One-part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Interior joints in vertical surfaces of
._ Sealant ceramic tile in toilet rooms.
AS Acrylic Sealant Interior joints in field-painted vertical and overhead
surfaces at perimeter of hollow metal door frames; in
.... gypsum drywall, plaster and concrete or concrete
masonry; and all other interior joints not indicted
otherwise.
SS 1 Security Sealant, Flexible Interior joints within and between dissimilar materials in
-- cells, holding cells and wherever inmates are held
unattended.
Interior control and expansion joints in masonry and
__ concrete substrates subject to movement in cells, holding
cells and wherever inmates are held unattended.
Interior joints between hollow metal framing and
adjacent wall construction.
- Joints within and between same or similar metal
components.
SS2 Security Sealant, Rigid Interior joints within and between the same materials in
cells, holding cells and wherever inmates are held
-- unattended where the joints can be ground smooth (ie
joints in and between concrete, and concrete masonry
units).
Note: Install joint sealer indicated in joints fitting descriptions and locations listed as well as in locations identified on Drawings
by designations indicated above.
_ JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT DATA SHEET
Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES1
Base Polymer: Urethane Sealant.
Type: M (multicomponent).
Grade: P (pourable).
Class: 25.
Additional Movement Capabili[y: 25 percent movement in extension and 25 percent in compression for a total
of 50 percent movement.
Usetsl Related to Exposure: T (traffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
Use O Joint Substrat0$: Clear anodized aluminum, galvanized steel, brick, granite, ceramic tile, and wood.
Available Products:
1. NR-200 Urexpan, Pecora Corp.
2. Sonolastic SL2, Sonneborn Building Product Division.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES2
Base Polymer: Urethane Sealant.
Type: M (multicomponent).
Grade: NS (nonsag).
Class: 25.
Additional Movement Capabili _ty: 25 percent movement in extension and 25 percent in compression for a total
of 50 percent movement.
Use[sl Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
Use O Joint Substrates: Clear anodized aluminum, galvanized steel, brick, and granite.
Available Products;
1. "Dymeric", Tremco.
2. "Dynatrol II", Pecora Corp.
3. "Sonolastic NP2", Sonneborn Building Product Division.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT DATA SHEET
Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES3
Base Polymer: Neutral-curing silicone.
Type: S (single component).
Grade: NS (nonsag).
Class: 25.
Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent in compression for a total
of 50 percent movement.
Use[sl Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: (G, A,) )M, G, A,) and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
Use O Joint Substrates: Clear anodized aluminum, galvanized steel, granite, metal trim, ceramic tile, and wood.
Available Products:
1. 795, Dow Coming.
2. Silglaze N, GE.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES4
Base Polymer: Acid-curing silicone.
Type: S (single component).
Grade: NS (nonsag).
Class: 25.
Additional Movement Capabili _ty: 25 percent movement in extension and 25 percent in compression for a total
of 50 percent movement.
Use[sl Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
UsesRelated to Joint Substrates: G,A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
Use O Joint Substrates: Clear anodized aluminum, granite, and ceramic tile.
-- Availabl~ Prod~t~:
1. "786", Dow Corning.
2. "Sanitary 1700", GE.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
JOINT SEALANT DATA SHEET
Joint Sealant Designation: SS1
Base P01yrnCr: Epoxy.
Type: M (multi component).
Grade: NS (nonsag) and SL(self leveling).
Class: 0.
Additional Movement Capabili_ty: 0.
Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
Use O Joint Substrates: galvanized steel, steel.
Available Products:
1. Sikadur 51 NS of SL by Sika.
2. Masterflow CJ by Master Builders.
3. Euco 700 by Euclid Chemical Co.
4. Poxy-Fil (J-52) by Dayton Superior.
Joint Sealant Designation: SS2
Base Polymer: Epoxy.
Type: M (multi component).
Grade: NS (nonsag).
Class: 0.
Additional Movement Capability: 0.
Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
Use O Joint Substrates: galvanized steel, steel.
Available Products:
1. Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel by Sika.
2. TSI-123 GEL by Tremcrete Systems West.
2. Concressive 1441 by Master Builders.
3. Eucopoxy No. 452 Gel by Euclid Chemical Co.
4. Sure Anchor Epoxy (J-50) by Dayton Superior.
END OF SECTION 07901
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 10
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steel doors and frames.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for building anchors into and grouting frames in
masonry construction.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for solid-core wood doors installed in steel
frames.
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weatherstripping.
4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass in steel doors and sidelights.
5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot grouting frames in gypsum board
partitions.
6. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting primed doors and frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials,
dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of
each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction,
location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details
of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and
openings as those on Contract Drawings.
1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
E. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples not less than
3 by 5 inches (75 by 125 mm) and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work.
Where f'mishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full
range of variations expected.
F. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding
limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design,
materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
1.4 QIJALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI I00 "Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame
assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and listed
_ STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,
provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
doors conform to all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-rated
door assemblies except for size.
2.Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise
rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job
storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and
frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided
refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace
damaged items as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-)
high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity
chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide
minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel Doors and Frames:
a. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
b. Benchmark Commercial Doors.
c. Ceco Door Products.
d. Copco Door Co.
e. Curries Co.
f. Deansteel Manufacturing Co.
g. Fenestra Corp.
h. Kewanee Corp.
i. Mesker Door, Inc.
j. Pioneer Industries.
k. Republic Builders Products.
1. Steelcraft.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Conunercial-quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying
with ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M).
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M),
commercial quality, or ASTM A 620 (ASTM A 620M), drawing quality, special killed.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M),
commercial quality, or ASTM A 642 (ASTM A 642M), drawing quality, hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 525, with A 60 or G 60 (ASTM A 525M, with Z 180 or ZF 180) coating
designation, mill phosphatized.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick steel sheet; '
0.0516-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into
exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
2.3 DOORS
A. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and
models specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules:
1. Exterior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 1, full flush design, minimum 0.0516-inch-
(1.3-mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet faces.
~ 2.4 FRAMES
A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings,
according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal
-- fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 0.0478-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick
cold-rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded coruers.
-- 2. Form exterior frames from 0.0635-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet.
B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs
_ of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames.
C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick steel plaster guards or mortar
boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware
_ operation and to close off interior of openings.
D. Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry."
-- 2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp,
or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work
'-- that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project
site. Comply with ANSI/SDI i00 requirements.
1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials
according to SDI standards:
a. Vertical steel stiffeners.
2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than
1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm)
at bottom.
a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80.
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only
-- cold-rolled steel sheet.
C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
' D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either
cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
_ E. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors, panels,
and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors
flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635-inch- (1.6-mm-)
thick galvanized steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal
__. joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
1. At exterior locations.
_ STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
G. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled,
provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to
ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
I. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value rating of 0.41
Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.33 W/sq. m x K) or better.
H. Sound-Rated (Acoustical) Assemblies: Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame
assemblies fabricated as sound-reducing type, tested according to ASTM E 1408, and classified
according to ASTM E 413.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide acoustical assemblies with STC sound ratings of 33
or better.
I. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware
according to fmal door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply
with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame
preparation for hardware.
1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing, and provisions
for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
J. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-
applied hardware may be done at Project site.
K. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and
Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames."
L. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359-inch- (0.9 mm) thick steel.
1.Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors for glass, louvers, and other
panels in doors.
2.Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other
panels in doors.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for steel sheet finishes.
C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication.
2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or
other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic
coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply
galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in
galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and
complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
B. Factox~ Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply
air-dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Shop Primer: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer paint complying with performance
requirements of FS TT-P-641, Type II.
2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease,
and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from
uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling).
B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to
organic coating applied over it.
C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1
acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide
a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3. I INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
data, and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces
smooth and undamaged.
1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly
construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location
on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include
masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.
3. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors
per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike
jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masomry anchorage
devices.
4. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels.
In steel-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
5.In in-place gypsum board partitions, install knock-down, slip-on, drywall frames.
6.Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in
ANSI/SDI 100.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80.
2. Smoke-Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors
and frames.
END OF SECTION 08110
.._ STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid core doors with wood veneer faces.
2. Louvers for flush wood doors.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and
louvers, and factory-f'mishing specifications.
C. Shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of
construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for veneer matching and
factory finishing and other pertinent data.
1. For factory-machined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts
adjacent to light and louver openings.
D. Samples for verification in the form and size indicated below:
1. Corner sections of doors approximately 12 inches (300 mm) square with door faces and edgings
representing the typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.
Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.
2. Louvers consisting of blade and frame, 6 inches (150 nun) long, for each material and finish specified.
3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard:
1. AWl Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork
Institute for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements.
B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors that comply with NFPA 80; are identical in materials and
construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152; and are labeled and listed by UL,
Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Oversized, Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide
manufacturer's certificate stating that doors conform to all standard construction requirements of tested
and labeled fire-door assemblies except for size.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer.
_ FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with
requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers as designated on shop drawings, using temporary,
removable, or concealed markings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC
system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by
manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow,
cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section or that show
telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm) span,
or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement
of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after date of Substantial Completion.
a. Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering doors that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Solid Core Doors:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
b. Ampco Products, Inc.
c. Buell Door Co.
d. Chappell Door Co.
e. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc.
f. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division.
g. Fenestra Corporation.
h. Graham Manufacturing Corp.
i. Haley Brothers, Inc.
j. Ideal Wood Products, Inc.
k. IPIK Door Co., Inc.
1. Marlite.
m. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
n. Poncraft Door Co.
o. Ragland Manufacturing Co., Inc.
p. V-T Industries Inc.
q. Weyerhauser Co.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Faces: White birch, plain sliced.
2. Grade: Custom.
3. Construction: 5 plies.
m 4. Core: Particleboard core.
5. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.
B. Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Faces and Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non-fire-rated doors in same area of building, unless
otherwise indicated.
_ 2. Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as required to provide fire-resistance rating
indicated.
3. Blocking: Provide composite blocking designed to maintain fire resistance of door but with improved
screw-holding capability of same thickness as core and with minimum dimensions as follows:
a. 5-inch (125-mm) top rail blocking.
b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom rail blocking.
c. 5-by-18-inch (125-by-450-mm) lock blocks.
d. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking.
4. Edge Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction for improved
screw-holding capability and split resistance as compared to edges composed of a single layer of treated
lumber.
5. Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles that are labeled and listed for kinds of applications
indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals.
2.3 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid wood louvers, unless otherwise indicated, and of size
indicated.
B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.0478-inch-
(!.2-mm-) thick cold-rolled steel sheet, factory primed, and approved for use in doors of fire-rating indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate flush wood doors to comply with following requirements:
1. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels:
a. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with
requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-resistance-rated doors.
2. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with f'mal hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings, DHI A115-W series
standards, and hardware templates.
a. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before proceeding with factory machining.
B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced
standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing.
B. Finish wood doors at factory.
C. Transparem Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect, and sheen.
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance requirements comparable to either AWI System
TR-2 catalyzed lacquer or AWI System TR-4 conversion varnish.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
4. Effect: Filled f'mish.
5. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3. ! EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door:
1. Verify that flames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics
and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and referenced
quality standard and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to requirements of NFPA 80.
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.i RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes access doors for installation in the following types of construction:
1. Gypsum drywall.
2. Masonry.
B.Building-in of anchors and grouting of frames set in masonry construction is specified in
Division 4.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
1. Product data in form of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type
of access door assembly, including setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for
installation of anchorage, devices.
a. Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling
construction details, finishes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to
installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire project from one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may vary
slightly from sizes indicated.
C. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be built into other work for installation
of access doors. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verification: Obtain specific locations and sizes for required access doors from trades requiring access
to concealed equipment, and indicate on submittal schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering access doors
'that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Bar-Co., Inc.
2. Cesco Products
3. J.L. Industries
4. Karp Associates, Inc.
5. Milcor, Inc.
ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
6. Nystrom, Inc.
7. The Williams Brothers Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. General: Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts,
and ready for installation.
B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction unless otherwise
indicated. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and
fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of support shown.
C. Frames: Fabricate from 16-gage,//4 satin-finished stainless steel.
1. Fabricate frame with exposed flange nominal 1-inch wide around perimeter of frame for units
installed in the following construction:
a. Exposed masonry.
b. Drywall finish.
c. Ceramic tile finish.
2. For gypsum drywall, furnish perforated flames with drywall bead.
3. For installation in masonry construction, furnish frames with adjustable metal masonry anchors.
D. Flush Panel Doers: Fabricate from not less than 14-gage,//4 satin-finished stainless steel, with concealed
spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees.
E. Provide one cylinder lock per access door. Furnish 2 keys per lock. Key all locks alike, unless
otherwise scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access doors.
B. Coordinate installation with work of other trades.
C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level in
relation to adjacent finish surfaces.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08305
ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes overhead coiling metal doors.
B. Types of overhead coiling doors include the following:
1. Overhead counter doors.
2. Overhead counter fire doors.
C. Operation of overhead coiling doors include the following:
1. Chain operation at overhead counter door.
2. Electric motor operationat overhead counter fire door.
D. Provide complete operating door assemblies including door curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanism,
hardware, operators, and installation accessories.
E. Field painting is specified in Division 9.
F. Electrical connections for powered operators and accessories are specified in Division 16.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data, roughing-in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead
coiling door.
I. Provide operating instructions and maintenance information.
2. Provide information describing fire-release system including electrical rough-in instructions.
C. Shop drawings for special components and installations that are not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's data sheets.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Furnish each overhead coiling door as a complete unit produced by one
manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components.
1. Furnish overhead coiling door units by one manufacturer for entire Project.
B. Fire Door Assemblies: Furnish fire door assemblies that comply with NFPA No. 80 and have been fire
tested, rated, and labeled according to ASTM E 152. Furnish each door with a metal UL label as
evidence of rating, with label indicating rating in hours of duration of exposure to fire, and a letter
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
designation of location for which the assembly is designed.
C. Oversized Fire Doors: Where fire door assemblies exceed size for which testing and labeling service is
offered, furnish UL "Certificate of Inspection" for oversized doors in lieu of label, certifying that design,
materials, and construction are equal to doors tested and labeled by UL.
D. Automatic Closing: Provide electromechanical door-holder-release device interconnected with fire alarm
system where indicated. Construct governor unit to be inoperative during normal door operations.
Design release mechanism to reset easily.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Apton Rolling Doors, A Gichner Systems Group, Inc.
2. Atlas Roll-Lite Overhead Doors/Div. of MASCO.
3. Ceco/Windsor Door--Div. of the Ceco Corp.
4. The Cookson Co.
5. Cornell Iron Works Inc.
6. Dynamic Closures Corp.
7. Mahon Door Corp.
8. Overhead Door Corp.
9. Pacific Rolling Door Co.
10. Raynor Garage Door.
1 I. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co.
12. Wayne-Dalton Corp.
13. J.G. Wilson Corp.
2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats in a continuous length for
width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material gage recommended
by door manufacturer for size and type of door required, and as follows:
1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets complying with
ASTM A 446, Grade A, with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 525.
a. Furnish manufacturer' s standard "flat-face" slats.
B. Endlocks: Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized
rivets. Provide locks on alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral
movement.
C. Bottom Bar: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-I/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick, either
galvanized or stainless steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats.
1. Provide a replaceable gasket of flexible vinyl or neoprene between angles as a cushion bumper
unless shown as an overlapping joint.
D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles, or channels and angles with
sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain loading. Build up units with minimum 3/16-inch-thick steel
sections, galvanized after fabrication. Slot bolt holes for track adjustment.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E. Secure continuous wall angle to wall framing with a minimum of 3/8-inch bolts at not more than 30
inches o.c., unless closer spacing recommended by door manufacturer. Extend wall angles above door
opening head to support coil brackets, unless otherwise indicated. Place anchor bolts on wall guides so
they are concealed when door is in closed position. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent
over-travel of curtain.
2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a
steel shaft and in a spring barrel, and connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Use
grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed structural-quality carbon steel, welded or
seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support roll-up of curtain without distortion
of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 inch per foot of span under full load.
C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size
springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel.
Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.
D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel in size required to hold fixed spring
ends and carry torsional load.
E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled
steel plate with bell mouth guide groove for curtain.
F. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head and act as
weather seal. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom
edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and any portion of between-jamb
mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag.
1. Fabricate steel hoods for doors of not less than 0.0276-inch-thick (24-gage) hot-dip galvanized
steel sheet with G 90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 525.
2. Furnish automatic drop baffle to guard against passage of smoke or flame.
2.4 PRIME PAINTING
A. General: Shop-clean and -prime ferrous metal surfaces, exposed and unexposed, except tightly joined
and lubricated surfaces and galvanized metal, with door manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer.
Use primer that is compatible with finish painting.
2.5 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
A. Provide manual operators except where electric door operators are indicated. When not shown, provide
chain hoist operator unit.
B. Chain Hoist Operator: Provide manual chain hoist operator consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain
pocket wheel and guard, and geared reduction unit with a maximum 35-1b pull for door operation.
Furnish alloy steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide.
2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Furnish electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by
door manufacturer; complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, gear-reduction
unit, solenoid-operated brake, remote control stations, control devices, conduit and wiring from controls
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
to motor and central stations, and accessories required for proper operation.
B. Provide hand-operated disconnect or a mechanism for automatically engaging a sprocket-and-chain
operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation. Mount disconnect and operator so they
are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating
when emergency operator is engaged.
C. Design operator so that motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without
affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
D. Door Operator Type: Provide wall- or bracket-mounted door operator units consisting of electric motor,
worm gear drive from motor to reduction gear box, chain or worm gear drive from reduction box to gear
wheel mounted on counterbalance shaft, and a disconnect-release for manual operation. Provide motor
and drive assembly of horsepower and design as determined by door manufacturer for size of door
required.
E. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, Class A insulated electric motors with overload
protection. Size motor to move door in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3 foot nor
more than 1 foot per second.
1. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of motors with building electrical
system.
2. Furnish open drip-proof type motor.
F. Remote Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button
controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
1. Provide interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty, with general-purpose NEMA
Type 1 enclosure.
G. Automatic Reversing Control: Furnish each door with an automatic safety switch, extending the full
width of door bottom, and located within neoprene or rubber astragal mounted to bottom door rail.
Contact with switch before fully closing will immediately stop downward travel and reverse direction to
fully opened position.
1. Connect to control circuit through retracting safety cord and reel, or self-coiling cable.
2. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.
H. Coordinate with fire alarm system for automatic closing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold
strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to final shop drawings,
manufacturer's instructions, and as specified.
1. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
B. After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust doors to operate
easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion.
1. Test door closing when activated by smoke-detector fire-release system. Reset door-closing
mechanism after successful test.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- C. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to door operation, servicing,
preventive maintenance, and procedures for resetting closing devices after activation.
END OF SECTION 08331
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 08360 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sectional overhead doors, as follows:
1. Aluminum frame and aluminum panels.
2. Electric motor-operated doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data, roughing-in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead door.
Include manufacturer's operating instructions and maintenance data.
C. Shop drawings for special components and installations which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer' s data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide each sectional overhead door as a complete unit produced by a
single manufacturer, including frames, sections, brackets, guides, tracks, counterbalance mechanisms,
hardware, operators, and installation accessories.
B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into
masonry for unit installation. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of
anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
C. See concrete and masonry Sections for instruction on installing inserts and anchorage devices.
D. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce sectional overhead doors to withstand a 20-psf wind-loading
pressure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Overhead Door Corp.
2. Atlas Roll-Lite Overhead Doors.
3. Ceco/Windsor Door.
2.2 ALUMINUM SECTIONS
A. Construct door sections with extruded aluminum shapes of 6063-T6 alloy, with wall thickness not less
than 0.065 inch for door section 1-3/4 inch deep. Join stiles and rails together with concealed 1/4-inch
minimum diameter aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel through-bolts, full height of section.
Fabricate panels of aluminum sheet set in continuous vinyl channels and retained with rigid snap-in
extruded moldings.
1. Finish doors with manufacturer's standard thermosetting paint system.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.3 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Tracks: Provide manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system, sized for door size and weight,
and designed for clearances shown. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing and
reinforcing for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical
sections of track at 2 inches o.c. for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical,
or otherwise design to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. Weld or bolt to track
supports. __
B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Provide galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members.
Secure, reinforce and support tracks as required for size and weight of door to provide strength and
rigidity without sag, sway, and vibraion during opening and closing of doors.
C. Support and attach tracks to opening jambs with continuous angle welded to tracks and attached to wall.
Support horizontal (ceiling tracks) with continuous angle welded to track and supported by laterally
braced attachments to overhead structural members at curve and end of tracks.
D. Weather Seals: Provide continuous rubber, neoprene, or flexible vinyl adjustable weatherstrip gasket at
tops and compressible astragal on bottoms of each overhead door.
1. In addition, provide continuous flexible seals at door jamb edges for a fully weathertight
installation.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide heavy-duty, rust-resistant hardware, with galvanized or cadmium-plated or stainless
steel fasteners, to suit type of door.
B. Hinges: Provide heavy steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, per manufacturer's
recommendations for size of door. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and
lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not
possible. Provide double-end hinges, where required, for doors exceeding 16 feet in width, unless
otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.
C. Rollers: Provide heavy-duty rollers, with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with
varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges
are required. Provide roller tires to suk size of track (3-inch diameter for 3-inch track; 2-inch diameter
for 2-inch track) and as follows:
1. Case-hardened steel tires for normal installations.
D. Fabricate locking device assembly with mortise lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, chromium-plated operating
handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks.
1. Lock cylinder is specified in another Division 8 Section.
2.5 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. Torsion Spring: Operation by torsion-spring counterbalance mechanism, consisting of adjustable-tension,
tempered-steel torsion springs mounted on a cross header tube or steel shaft. Connect to door with
galvanized aircraft-type lift cables. Provide springs calibrated for 10,000 cycles minimum.
B. Provide cast-aluminum or grey-iron casting cable drums, grooved to receive cable. Mount
counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of shaft.
Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long and two additional brackets at
one-third points to support shafts over 16 feet long, unless closer spacing recommended by door
~nanufacturer.
C. Include a spring-loaded, steel or bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side,
designed to automatically stop door if either cable breaks.
D. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Furnish electric door-operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by
door manufacturer; complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, gear-reduction
unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations and control devices.
B. Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechamsm for automatically engaging sprocket-chain operator and
releasing brake for emergency manual operation. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor
from operating when emergency sprocket is engaged.
C. Design operator so that motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without
affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
D. Door Operator Type: Provide the following:
1. Trolley or drawbar type, V-belt and roller chain-and-sprocket primary drive, and
chain-and-sprocket secondary drive.
E. Electric Motors: Provide high-starling torque, reversible, constant-duty, Class A-insulated electric
motors with overload protection, sized to move door in either direction, from any position, at not less
than 2/3 foot or more than 1 foot per second.
1. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of motors with building electrical
system.
2. Provide open-drip-proof type motor, and controller with NEMA Type 1 enclosure.
F. Remote Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with push button
controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
1. Provide interior units, full-geared, desktop-mounted, heavy-duty, with general purpose NEMA
Type 1 enclosure.
2. Provide one remote control for each operator at room 125.
G. Automatic Reversing Control: Furnish each door with automatic safety switch, extending full width of
door bottom, and located within neoprene or rubber astragal mounted to bottom door rail. Contact with
switch will immediately reverse downward door travel. Furnish manufacturer's standard take-up reel
or self-coiling cable.
1. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head
mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to shop drawings,
manufacturer's instructions, and as specified.
B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24 inches o.c. Hang horizontal track from
structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers, welded and bolt-fastened in place. Provide
sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcing as required for rigid installation of track and
door-operating equipment.
C. After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust doors to operate
easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.
END OF SECTION 08360
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified
or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum entrance and storefrom work:
1. Exterior entrance doors.
2. Vestibule doors matching entrance doors.
3. Transoms.
4. Sidelights.
5. Frames for entrances.
6. Storefront4ype framing system.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefront, including entrances specified to be
factory glazed, are included in Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing."
2. Lock cylinders and exit devices are included in Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware."
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with performance
characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock assemblies
according to test methods indicated.
B. Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum entrance and storefront framing systems to provide for
expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors shall function normally over the
specified temperature range.
1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface temperature range of 180 deg F (100 deg
C) without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on
fasteners, reduction of performance, stress on glass, or other detrimental effects.
C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems that comply with structural
performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated.
1. Wind Loads: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies capable of withstanding wind
pressures of 20 psf inward and 20 psf outward acting normal to the plane of the wall.
D. Structural Performance: Conduct tests for structural performance in accordance with ASTM E 330. At
the conclusion of the tests there shall be no glass breakage or permanent damage to fasteners, anchors,
hardware or actuating mechanism. Framing members shall have no permanent deformation in excess of
0.2 percent of their clear span.
1. Deflection Normal to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressure required to measure deflection of framing
members normal to the plane of the wall shall be equivalent to the wind load specified above.
Deflection shall not exceed 1/175 of the clear span, when subjected to uniform load deflection test.
2. Deflection Parallel to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressures required to measure deflection parallel
to the plane of the wall shall be eqUal to 1.5 times the wind pressures specified above. Deflection of
any member carrying its full dead load shall not exceed an amount that will reduce glass bite below
75 percent of the design dimension and shall not reduce the edge clearance between the member and
the fixed panel, glass or other fixed member above to less than 1/8 inch. The clearance between the
member and an operable door or window shall be at least 1/16 inch.
E. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront framing system with an air infiltration rate of
not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area (excluding operable door edges) when tested in
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward test pressure differential of 1.57 psf. -
F. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no uncontrolled water penetration (excluding operable
door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test ....
pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft.
G. Condensation Resistance: Where framing systems are "thermal-break" construction, provide units tested
for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503 showing condensation resistance factor (CRF)
of not less than 45.
H. Thermal Transmittance: Provide framing systems that have an overall U-value of not more than 0.65
BTU/(hr. x sq. ft. x deg. F) at 15 mph exterior wind velocity when tested in accordance with --
AAMA 1503.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
1. Product data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including:
a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods.
b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories.
c. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces ....
2. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including:
a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work.
b. Elevations at 1/4-inch scale.
c. Detail sections of typical composite members.
d. Anchors and reinforcement.
e. Hardware mounting heights.
f. Provisions for expansion and contraction. --
g. Glazing details.
3. Hardware Schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule organized into sets based on hardware
specified. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete
designations of every item required for each door opening.
4. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing
that aluminum entrance and storefront systems have been tested in accordance with specified test
procedures and comply with performance characteristics indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installations of aluminum
storefront and entrances similar in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems produced by a firm
experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a
record of successful in-service performance.
C.Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance and storefront systems from one source and from
a single manufacturer.
D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional requirements of aluminum
entrance and storefront work required and are based on the specific types and models indicated.
Aluminum entrance and storefront by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in
dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The
burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging.
~- B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete. Cover
components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation
of air.
1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent
damage.
~ 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded
measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delay of the work.
1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication
tolerances to ensure proper fit.
1.8 WARRANTY
~ A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units
that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
necessarily limited to:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air inffitration.
~ 2. Faulty operation.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal f'mishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.
B. Warranty Period: 3 years after the date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties
made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
_ 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering entrance and
storefront systems that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
· 1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer Company, Inc.
3. United States Aluminum Corp.
4. Vistawall Architectural Products.
2.2 MATERIALS
~ A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion
resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions,
ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire.
B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM A 36 for structural
shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet
and strip.
.... C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these
specifications.
D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material
· warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware,
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
anchors and other components.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than O. 125 inches thick,
reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or
provide standard noncorrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware. For application
of hardware, use Phillips flat-head machine screws that match the finish of member or hardware
being fastened.
E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch-thick
minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other
components
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use
of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with
ASTM A 123.
G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel inserts
complying with ASTM A 123.
H. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible weatherstripping
gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with
ASTM D 2287 ....
2.3 HARDWARE
A.General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware items other than
those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer.
B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door,
including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service
required; finish to match door.
1. Offset Pivot Sets: Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Provide exposed parts of cast aluminum
alloy. Provide an intermediate pivot for doors over 7 feet 6 inches high.
2. Single-Acting, Independently Hung, Concealed Overhead Closers: Comply with ANSI A156.4,
Grade 2. Provide concealed ann and track. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for closer
size, depending on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. Include the
following:
a. Selective hold-open.
3. Door Stop: Floor-mounted door stop, as appropriate, with integral rubber bumper; comply with
ANSI A156.6, Grade 1.
4. Cylinders are supplied under another Division 8 Section for keying into the building system.
5. Deadlocks: Mortised maximum security deadlock, with minimum 1-inch-long pivoted bolt and
stainless steel strike box; comply with ANSI A156.5, Grade 1, with zinc-plated threshold bolt in
combination with deadlock to create a two-point deadlock. Provide dust-proof strike at locations
without metal thresholds.
6. Panic Hardware- - - · · ,,o ~,,,; ..... n ~,,, ,&dll wi~,,~. ,,,-oeh hat. Comply
7. Pull Handles: Manufacturer" ' 's standard pull handle.
8. Push Bars: Manufacturer's standard full-door-width single-bar push bar.
9. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum threshold of size and design indicated in mill finish, complete with
anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Storefrom Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance framing systems fabricated from extruded
aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include subframes and other reinforcing members of
the type indicated. Provide for flush glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
stops. Shop-fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. Provide storefront frame
sections without exposed seams.
1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive resilient elastomeric
glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make provisions to drain moisture
accumulation to the exterior.
B. Entrance Door Frames: Provide tubular and channel frame entrance door frame assemblies, as indicated,
with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Reinforce as necessary
to support required loads.
C. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints
using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts.
1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of stiles
and rails. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for
nonremoval.
2.Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of design indicated.
a. Medium stile (3-1/2-inch nominal width).
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses
indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the
drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required, to
achieve design requirements and coordination with other work.
I. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate storefront framing system with an integrally concealed,
low-conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and exposed interior members
to eliminate direct metal-to-metal contact. Use manufacturer's standard construction that has been
in use for similar projects for period of not less than 3 years.
B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the
greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation.
1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal
work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware prior
to application of finishes.
2. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site.
3. Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible.
C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and
welding oxides. Restore mechanical fmish.
1. Welding behind £mished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize distortion and
discoloration on the finished surface.
D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements,
sag resistance and rigidity.
E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a
nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing
lead.
F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members.
G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
H. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fLxed stops. At other
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.
1.Provide EPDM or vinyl-blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with
threshold.
2. At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops
to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
2.6 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application
and designations of finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for
designating aluminum finishes.
C. High Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42Rlx (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited
chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment;
Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fluorocarbon 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat thermo-cured system,
composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color topcoat containing not less
than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; comply with AAMA 605.2 ....
2.Color and Gloss: As indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard color and sheen designations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated,
installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts.
Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the installation.
1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels.
Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide
proper support and anchor securely in place.
C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with the following
tolerances:
1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or 1/4 inch in any total length.
2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members
abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch ....
3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements shall not exceed 1/8
inch.
4. Offset at Coruers: The maximum out-of-plane offset of framing at comers shall not exceed 1/32
inch.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action
at points of contact with other materials.
1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication.
2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum.
3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with alkali resistant
coating.
4. Paint wood and similar absorptive material in contact with aluminum and exposed to the elements or
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
otherwise subject to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint. Seal joints between the
materials with sealant.
E. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as
indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for. sealants,
fillers, and gaskets.
F. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to
be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight
closure.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage
to coatings.
B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing"
Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other
substances from aluminum surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that
aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering,
at time of acceptance.
3.6 SCHEDULE
Description Qty.. Product
Doors 105, 124B, 133B
Offset Pivots 1 set Manufacturer's standard
Concealed Overhead Closer 1 Rixson - Firemark 600 Series
Door Stop (at doors 105 & 133B only) 1 Trimco 1231 Series
Threshold 1 Manufacturer's standard
Weatherstripping 1 set Manufacturer's standard
Door 119A, 119B
Offset Pivots 2 sets Manufacturer's standard
Concealed Overhead Closer 2 Rixson - Firemark 600 series
Deadlock 2 Adams Rite MS-18515 with 4015 drop bolt
Pull Handle 2 Manufacturer's standard
Push Bar 2 Manufacturer's standard
Threshold 1 Manufacturer' s standard
Weatherstripping 1 set Manufacturer's standard
Door 12lA
Offset Pivots 2 sets Manufacturer's standard
Concealed Overhead Closer 2 Rixson - Firemark 600 series
Pull Handle 2 Manufacturer's standard
Push Bar 2 Manufacturer's standard
Threshold i Manufacturer's standard
Weatherstripping 1 set Manufacturer's standard
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Door 12lB
Offset Pivots 2 sets Manufacturer's standard
Concealed Overhead Closer 2 Rixson - Firemark 600 series
Pull Handle 2 Manufacturer's standard
Threshold 1 Manufacturer's standard
Weatherstripping 1 set Manufacturer's standard
Door 124A, 175
Offset Pivots 1 set Manufacturer's standard
Concealed Overhead Closer 1 Rixson - Firemark 600 series
Door Stop (at door 175 only) 1 Trimco 1231 series
Deadlock 1 Adams Rite MS-18515 with 4015 drop bolt
Pull Handle 1 Manufacturer's standard
Push Bar 1 Manufacturer's standard
Door 129A, 174A, 174B
Offset Pivots 1 set Manufacturer's standard
Concealed Overhead Closer 1 Rixson - Firemark 600 series
Door Stop 1 Trimco 1231 series
Pull Handle 1 Manufacturer's standard
Push Bar 1 Manufacturer's standard
END OF SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing,
sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the
doors and door frames on which they are installed.
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Hinges.
2. Key control system.
3. Lock cylinders and keys.
4. Lock and latch sets.
5. Electro-magnetic locks.
6. Bolts.
7. Exit devices.
8. Push/pull units.
9. Closers and door control devices.
10. Door trim units.
11. Protection plates.
12. Weatherstripping for exterior doors.
13. Smoke stripping for interior doors.
14. Automatic drop seals (door bottoms).
15. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors.
16. Thresholds.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for cabinet hardware.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for factory prefitting and factory premachining of doors
for door hardware.
3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts" for aluminum entrance door hardware,
except cylinders.
4. Division 8 Section "Sectional Overhead Doors" for overhead door hardware, except cylinders.
5. Division 8 Section "Overhead Coiling Doors" for overhead door hardware, except cylinders.
6. Division 11 Section "Security Hardware" for security hardware.
D. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include:
1. Cylinders for locks on entrance and overhead doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
sections.
B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation
instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show
compliance with requirements.
C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into
"hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.
Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Keying information.
2. Submittal Sequence: Submit f'mal schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance
of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project
construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other
work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of
schedule.
3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final
instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
D. Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for
coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of f'mal hardware schedule.
1. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through
submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be
incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.
E. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door
hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating
and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.)
from a single manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities
in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door
hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this ?roject and that employs an
experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and
Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.
1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final
instructions in writing.
C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fa:e-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard
No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are
listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Waruock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting
organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in
compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include
basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware
set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be
packed in same container.
C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until
each is satisfied that count is correct.
D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site).
E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling
and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work
will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance
instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of
door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Butts and Hinges:
a. Bommer Industries, Inc.
b. Cai-Royal Products, Inc.
c. Hager Hinge Co.
d. Lawrence Brothers, Inc.
e. McKinney Products Co.
f. H. Soss & Company.
g. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.
2. Key Control System:
a. Key Control Systems, Inc.
b. Telkee Inc.
3. Cylinders and Locks:
a. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co
b. Best Lock Corporation
c. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
d. Falcon Lock Co.
e. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
f. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
g. Yale Security Inc.
4. Bolts:
a. Builders Brass Works Corp.
b. Glynn-Johnson Corp.
c. Hager Hinge Co.
d. H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
e. Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc.
f. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
5. Exit/Panic Devices:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.
b. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co.
c. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
d. Dor-O-Matic.
e. Monarch Hardware & Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc.
f. Precision Hardware, Inc.
g. Reed Exit Hardware, Div. Yale Security Inc.
h. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
i. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
j. Yale Security Inc.
6. Push/Pull Units:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corp.
b. Brooldine Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc.
c. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
d. Hager Hinge Co.
e. Hiawatha, Inc.
f. H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
g. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).
7. Overhead Closers:
a. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co.
b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
c. Dorma Door Controls International.
d. International Door Closers, Inc.
e. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
f. Monarch Hardware & Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc.
g. Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc.
h. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc.
i. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
j. Yale Security Inc.
8. Door Trim Units:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corp.
b. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc.
c. Builders Brass Works Corp.
d. Hager Hinge Co.
e. H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
f. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).
9. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corp.
b. Brooldine Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc.
c. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
d. Hager Hinge Co.
e. Hiawatha, Inc.
f. H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
g. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).
10. Door Stripping and Seals:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- e. Sealeze Corp.
f. Ultra Industries.
g. Zero International, Inc.
'- i 1. Thresholds:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
e. Sealeze Corp.
~ f. Zero International, Inc.
12. Automatic Drop Seals:
- a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
c. Pernko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
e. Zero International, Inc.
13. Sound Stripping:
a. National Guard Products, Inc.
b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
-- d. Zero International, Inc.
2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
'~ A. Requirements for design, grade, function, £mish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish
hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified
by using hardware designation numbers of the following:
1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer
are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under
the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of
the other manufacturers that complies with requirements.
2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe hardware
items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide products
- complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this Section.
a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1.
b. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2.
.... c. Exit Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.3.
d. Door Controls - Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4.
e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5.
f. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6.
g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7.
h. Door Controls - Overhead Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8.
i. Interconnected Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.12.
_ j. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.13.
k. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.15.
1. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16.
m. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSI/BHMA A156.17.
n. Materials and Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18.
2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required
fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. ~ ·
B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's
standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially
recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series
standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations
indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as
otherwise specified.
C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for
machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal
screws, except as specifically indicated.
D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as
otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or,
if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match f'mish of this other work as closely as possible including
"prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.
E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent
no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only
means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as
a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS
A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and
frames, provide only template-produced units.
B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:
1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws.
3. For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws.
4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins.
2. Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins.
3. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.
4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT)
indicated.
D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors
90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with
same rule for additional hinges.
2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Standard System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide new masterkey system for Project.
B. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or
great-grandmaster), either new or integrated with Owner's existing system.
C. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinders.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
E. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide
individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
1. Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key
symbol, and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
F. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
G. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5
grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system.
1. Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
2. Deliver keys to key control system manufacturer.
3. Deliver keys to Owner.
2.6 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms,
3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as
recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks required
for the Project.
1. Provide complete cross index system set up by key control manufacturer, and place keys on
markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the fmal key schedule.
2. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.
2.7 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip
extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide fiat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, antifriction latchbolts as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Provide extra long strike lips for locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into head frames, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides
nonrecessed strike for bolt.
5. Provide roller type strikes where recommended by manufacturer of the latch and lock units.
B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL
requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.
1. Provide l/2-inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and preassembled types of locks and
3/4-inch minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1-inch minimum throw for all dead
bolts.
C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch-diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum
12-inch-long rod for doors up to 7'-0" in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding
7'-0" in height.
D. Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire-rated doors where closers are provided on doors equipped with exit
devices, equip the units with keyed dogging device to keep the latch bolt retracted, when engaged.
2.8 PUSH/PULL UNITS
A. Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's special concealed fastener system for installation,
thru-bolted for matched pairs but not for single units.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.9 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's
recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and
anticipated frequency of use.
1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than
recommended for use with standard arms.
2. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible
to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door
opening force and delayed action closing.
C. Combination Door Closers and Holders: Provide units designed to hold door in open position under
normal usage and to release and close door automatically under fire conditions. Incorporate an integral
electromagnetic holder mechanism designed for use with UL listed £nre detectors, provided with normally
closed switching contacts.
D. Provide black resilient parts for exposed bumpers.
2.10 DOOR TRIM UNITS
A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either
machine screws or self-tapping screws.
B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height of
protection plates.
C. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more
than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated.
1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage).
2. Plastic Plates: Clear acrylic plastic, 1/8 inch thick.
2.11 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on
interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and
elsewhere as indicated.
B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert and metal retainer strips,
surface applied unless shown as mortised or semimortised, and of following metal, finish, and resilient
bumper material:
1. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and
flanges.
2. Solid neoprine conforming to MIL R 6855, Class II, Grade 40.
a. Flexible, hollow bulb or loop insert.
D. Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold consisting of contact-type resilient insert and metal
housing of design and size shown and of following metal, finish, and resilient seal strip:
1. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and
flanges.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Solid neoprene wiper or sweep seal complying complying with MIL R 6855, Class II, Grade 40.
2.12 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and proffie
as shown or scheduled.
B. Exterior Hinged or Pivoted Doors: Provide units not less than 4 inches wide, formed to accommodate
change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door
frames, and as follows:
1. For out-swinging doors provide rabbeted type units with replaceable weatherstrip insert in stop.
2.13 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or
push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).
B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's
sample.
C. Provide quality of f'mish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and
other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced
standards for the applicable units of hardware.
D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum,
except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no
lacquer."
E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the
industry-recognized standard commercial f'mishes, except as otherwise noted.
1. Rust-Resistant Finish: For iron and steel base metal required for exterior work and in areas
shown as "High Humidity" areas (and also when designed with the suffix -RR), provide
0.2-mil-thick copper coating on base metal before applying brass, bronze, nickel, or chromium
plated f'mishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect.
1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the
Door and Hardware Institute.
2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1.7, "I-Iardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted
or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface
protection with f'mishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items
until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.
C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as
necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and
anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent
installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function
of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the
application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a
space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and
make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating
items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door
control devices to compensate for f'mal operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware
finishes.
D. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer,
accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door control
devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work:
1.Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and
hardware to comply with specified requirements.
2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance
procedures.
3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or
installation of hardware units.
4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the
performance of the hardware.
3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware,"
hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets.
1. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable.
2. The following manufacturer's product designations are used in the schedule. Equivalent products
of other manufacturers as noted elsewhere in this section are acceptable.
a. Butts and Hinges Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works
b. Cylinders and Locks Best Lock Corporation
c. Electro-magnetic Locks Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware
Group.
d. Bolts Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco)
e. Exit/Panic Devices Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware
Group.
f. Push/Pull Units Triangle Brass ManufactUring Company (Trimco).
g. Overhead Closers LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
h. Magnetic Hold-Opens LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
i. Door Trim Units Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).
j. Kick, Mop and Armor Plates Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).
k. Door Stripping and Seals Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
1. Thresholds Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
m. Sound Stripping Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3. Lockset Designs: Provide one of the lockset designs designated below or, if by another
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 10 _
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- manufacturer, one that matches those designated:
a. Cylindrical Locks: Best Lock Corporation, Series 35H
-- B. Hardware Sets
Hardware Set No. I
Door No's. 100B, 101, 114, 129B, 131, 132, 141, 144, 145, 146
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-E-3H 626
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
-- 1.0 each Closer 4011 SNB AL
1.0 set Smoke seals S88 White
1.0 each Door Bottom 209AV AL
Hardware Set NO. la
Door No's. 109, 115, 152, 153, 154, 163
Each opening to receive
-- 1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-E-3H 626
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No. lb
Door No. 159
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-E-3H 626
1.0 each Closer 4011 SNB AL
-- 3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No. lc
Door No's. 125, 151, 179
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-E-3H 626
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
_ DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 11
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Hardware Set NO. 2
Door No's. 102, 136, 137
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-F-3H 626
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
1.0 each Closer 4011 SNB AL
1.0 set Smoke seals S88 White
1.0 each Door Bottom 209AV AL
Hardware Set No. 2a
Door No's. 103, 104, 189
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-F-3H 626
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No. 3
Door No's 105, 133B
Each opening to receive
1.0 each Power Transfer EPT-218 24VDC SP28
1.0 each Exit Device EL33L 03 626
1.0 each Cylinder 1E72 626
1.0 each Position Switch MS766 24VDC 630
Note 1. Card reader allows authorized entry.
2. Position switch activates "buzzer" in control room.
3. Balance of hardware provided by aluminum and glass door manufacturer.
4. Electrical contractor to supply all non-scheduled components to complete circuit design
(card reader, 24VDC to hinge jamb junction box/head-mounted junction box/card
reader junction box, alarm "buzzer", wiring, conduit, etc.).
Hardware Set No. 4
Door No. 107
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-0-LF-3H 626
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 12
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- Hardware Set No. 4a
Door No's. 106, 128
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-0-LF-3H 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set NO. 5
Door No's. 125A, 125B, 164, 176, 188B, 196
Each opening to receive
-- 1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-EW-3H 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No. 5a
Door No's. 108, 126, 139A, 139B, 149, 150, 155, 170, 181
Each opening to receive
-- 1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-EW-3H 626
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No. 6
Door No. 111
Each opening to receive
1.0 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 626
0.5 pair Electric Hinge CEFBB179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Electric Lockset 35H-7-EWEL-3H-24VDC 626
1.0 each Closer 4011 SNB AL
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
1.0 set Smoke seals S88 White
1.0 each Door Bottom 209AV AL
1.0 each Position Switch MS766 24VDC 630
Note 1. Card reader allows authorized entry.
2. Position switch activates "buzzer" in control room.
3. Electrical contractor to supply all non-scheduled components to complete circuit design
(card reader, 24VDC to hinge jamb junction box/head-mounted junction box/card
reader junction box, alarm "buzzer", wiring, conduit, etc.).
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 13
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Hardware Set No. 6a
Door No. 162A
Each opening to receive
1.0 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 626
0.5 pair Electric Hinge CEFBB179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Electric Lockset 35H-7-EWEL-3H-24VDC 626
1.0 each Closer 4011 SNB AL
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
1.0 each Position Switch MS766 24VDC 630
Note 1. Card reader allows authorized entry.
2. Position switch activates "buzzer" in control room.
3. Electrical contractor to supply all non-scheduled components to complete circuit design
(card reader, 24VDC to hinge jamb junction box/head-mounted junction box/card
reader junction box, alarm "buzzer", wiring, conduit, etc.).
Hardware Set No. 7
Door No's. li2A, 133A
Each opening to receive
3.0 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 626
2.0 each Exit Device 9947L 03 626
2.0 each Cylinder 1E72 626
2.0 each Closer 4111 H-Cush-N-Stop SNB AL
2.0 each Door Stop W1210 626
2.0 each Kick Plate 1025 10" x (door width - 2") B3E 630
4.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
1.0 set Smoke seals S88 White
1.0 set Meeting Stile Seal 305CN AL
2.0 each Door Bottom 209AV AL
Hardware Set No. 8
Door No. l12B
Each opening to receive
3.0 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 626
2.0 each Exit Device 9947L 03 626
2.0 each Cylinder 1 E72 626
2.0 each Closer 4111 Cush-N-Stop SNB AL
2.0 each Kick Plate 1025 10" x (door width - 2") B3E 630
4.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
1.0 set Smoke seals S88 White
1.0 set Meeting Stile Seal 305CN AL
2.0 each Door Bottom 209AV AL
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 14
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Hardware Set No. 9
Door No's. 117, 118
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges FBB168 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Push Plate 1001-3 630
1.0 each Pull Plate 1017-3B 630
1.0 each Closer 4011 SNB AL
1.0 each Kick Plate 1025 I0" x (DW - 2") B3E 630
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No. 9a
Door No. 168
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges FBB168 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Push Plate 1001-3 630
1.0 each Pull Plate 1017-3B 630
1.0 each Closer 4011 SNB AL
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
1.0 each Kick Plate 1025 10" x (DW - 2") B3E 630
-.- 3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No. 10
Door No's. 119A, 119B
Each opening to receive
2.0 each Cylinder 1E74 (confirm compatibility) 626
2.0 each Position Switch MS766 24VDC 630
Note 1. Position switch activates "buzzer" in control room.
2. Balance of hardware provided by aluminum and glass door manufacturer.
3. Electrical contractor to supply all non-scheduled components to complete circuit design
· (24VDC to head-mounted junction box, alarm "buzzer", wiring, conduit, etc.).
Hardware Set No. 11
Door No. 12lA
Each opening to receive
1.0 each Magnetic Lock DS4010 24VDC 630
1.0 each Exit Device 9947L 03 626
Note 1. Magnetic lock released by card reader at door or by pushbutton in control
room.
2. Doorbell accesses control room; two-way speaker system allows
communications between control room and doors.
3. Balance of hardware by aluminum and glass door manufacturer.
4. Electrical contractor to supply all non-scheduled components to complete circuit design
(24VDC to head-mounted magnetic lockset, doorbell, two-way speaker system, card
reader, wiring, conduit, etc.).
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 15
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Hardware Set No. 12
Door No. 122
Each opening to receive
3.0 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 pair Flush Bolts W3917-12" 626
1.0 each Dustproof Strike 3910 630
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-EW-3H 626
4.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No. 13
Door No. 123
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-EW-3H 626
1.0 each Threshold 17lA Alum
1.0 set Weatherstrip 303AV (head & jambs) Alum
1.0 each Door Sweep 315CN Alum
1.0 each Rain Drip 346C x (DW + 4") Alum
1.0 each Position Switch MS766 24VDC 630
Hardware Set NO. 14
Door No. 124B
Each opening to receive
1.0 each Exit Device 33L 03 626
1.0 each Cylinder IE72 626
1.0 each Position Switch MS766 24VDC 630
Note 1. Position switch activates "buzzer" in control room.
2. Balance of hardware provided by aluminum and glass door manufacturer.
3. Electrical contractor to supply all non-scheduled components to complete circuit design
(24VDC to head-mounted junction box, alarm "buzzer", wiring, conduit, etc.).
Hardware Set No. 15
Door No. 133D
Each opening to receive
3.0 pair Hinges FBB168 4.5 x 4.5 626
2.0 each Push Plate 1001-3 630
2.0 each Pull Plate 1017-3B 630
2.0 each Closer 4011 SNB AL
1.0 set Smoke Seals S88 White
1.0 set Meeting Stile Seal 305CN AL
2.0 each Door Bottom 209AV AL
2.0 each Magnetic Hold-Open SEM 820 120VAC AL
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 16
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Hardware Set No. 16
Door No. 188A
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-WW-3H 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No. 16a
Door No's. 156, 158
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-WW-3H 626
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
1.0 each Kick Plate 1025 i0" x (door width - 2") B3E 630
Hardware Set No. 16b
Door No's. 157A, 157B
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-WW-3H 626
1.0 each Closer 4011 SNB AL
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
1.0 each Kick Plate 1025 10" x (door width - 2") B3E 630
Hardware Set No. 17
Door No. 127
Each opening to receive
1.0 each Power Transfer EPT-218 24VDC SP28
1.0 each Exit Device EL33L 03 626
1.0 each Cylinder 1E72 626
1.0 each Position Switch MS766 24VDC 630
1.0 each Door Bottom 209AV AL
1.0 set Smoke Seals S88 White
Note 1. Card reader allows authorized entry.
2. Position switch activates "buzzer" in control room.
-- 3. Balance of hardware provided by aluminum and glass door manufacturer.
4. Electrical contractor to supply all non-scheduled components to complete circuit design
(card reader, 24VDC to hinge jamb junction box/head-mounted junction box/card
reader junction box, alarm "buzzer"., wiring, conduit, etc.).
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 17
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Hardware Set NO. {$
Door No. 116
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-EW-3H 626
1.0 each Closer 4111 SNB AL
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
1.0 each Door Bottom 209AV AL
1.0 set Smoke Seals S88 White
Hardware S¢$ No. 19
Door No. 162B
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-EW-3H 626
1.0 each Deadlock 34H-7-T 626
1.0 each Closer 4111 SNB AL
1.0 each Kick Plate 1025 10" x (door width - 2") 630
1.0 each Threshold 171A Alum
1.0 set Weatherstrip 303AV (head & jambs) Alum
1.0 each Door Sweep 315CN Alum
1.0 each Position Switch MS766 24VDC 630
Note 1. Position switch activates "buzzer" in control room.
2. Electrical contractor to supply all non-scheduled components to complete circuit design
(24VDC to head-mounted junction box, alarm "buzzer", wiring, conduit, etc.).
Hardware Set No. 20
Door No. 166A, 166C, 199A, 199B
Each opening to receive
1.0 each Cylinder 1E72 (confh'm compatibility) 626
Note 1. Balance of hardware by overhead steel door manufacturer.
Hardware Set No. 21
Door No. 166D
Each opening to receive
1.0 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 626
0.5 pair Electric Hinge CEFBB179 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 626
1.0 each Electric Lockset 35H-7-EWEL-3H-24VDC 626
1.0 each Closer 4111 SNB AL
1.0 each Kick Plate 1025 10" x (door width - 2") B3E 630
1.0 each Threshold 171A Alum
1.0 set Weatherstrip 303AV (head & jambs) Alum
1.0 each Door Sweep 315CN Alum
1.0 each Rain Drip 346C x (DW + 4") Alum
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 18
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.0 each Position Switch MS766 24VDC 630
Note 1. Card reader allows authorized entry.
2. Position switch activates "buzzer" in control room.
3. Electrical contractor to supply all non-scheduled components to complete circuit design
(card reader, 24VDC to hinge jamb junction box/head-mounted junction box/card
reader junction box, alarm "buzzer", wiring, conduit, etc.).
Hardware Set No. 22
Door No. 167
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-E-3H 626
1.0 each Closer 4111 SNB AL
1.0 each Kick Plate 1025 10" x (door width - 2") B3E 630
1.0 each Threshold 171A Alum
1.0 set Weatherstrip 303AV (head & jambs) Alum
1.0 each Door Sweep 315CN Alum
1.0 each Position Switch MS766 24VDC 630
Note 1. Position switch activates "buzzer" in control room.
2. Electrical contractor to supply all non-scheduled components to complete circuit design
(24VDC to head-mounted junction box, alarm "buzzer", wiring, conduit, etc.).
Hardware Set NO. 23
Door No. 192
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-EW-3H 626
1.0 each Closer 4111 SNB AL
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
1.0 each Kick Plate 1025 10" x (door width - 2") B3E 630
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No. 24
Door No. 193
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-EW-3H 626
1.0 each Closer 4011 SNB AL
1.0 each Kick Plate 1025 10" x (door width - 2") 630
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 19
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Hardware Set No. 25
Door No. 195
Each opening to receive
3.0 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 626
1.0 pair Flush Bolts W3917-12" 626
1.0 each Dustproof Strike 3910 630
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-EW-3H 626
1.0 each Closer 4111 SNB AL
1.0 each Threshold 17 lA Alum
1.0 set Weatherstrip 303AV (head & jambs) Alum
2.0 each Door Sweep 315CN Alum
Hardware Set No. 26
Door No. 100A
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 626
1.0 each Exit Device 33EO 626
1.0 each Closer 4111 SNB AL
1.0 each Threshold 171A Alum
1.0 set Weatherstrip 303AV (head & jambs) Alum
1.0 each Door Sweep 315CN Alum
1.0 each Rain Drip 346C x (DW + 4") Alum
1.0 each Position Switch MS766 24VDC 630
Note 1. Position switch activates "buzzer" in control room.
2. Electrical contractor to supply all non-scheduled components to complete circuit design
(24VDC to head-mounted junction box, alarm "buzzer", wiring, conduit, etc.).
Hardware $~t No. 27
Door No. D178A, D178B, D182, D183, D185A, D185B, D186, D187A, D187B
Note 1. All hardware supplied and scheduled under "Detention Hardware" Section.
Hardware Set No. 28
Door No. 147
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Latchset 35H-0-N-3H 626
1.0 each Closer 4011 SNB AL
1.0 set Smoke Seals S88 White
1.0 each Door Bottom 209AV AL
Hardware Set No, 29
Door no's. 124A, 174A, 174B, 175
Note 1. All hardware provided by aluminum and glass door manufacturer.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 20
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Hardware Set No. 30
Door No. 110
1.5 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Latchset 35H-0-N-3H 626
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No.30a
Door No. 133C
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Latchset 35H-0-N-3H 626
1.0 each Closer 4111 SNB AL
1.0 each Door Stop W1274CCS 626
3.0 each Silencers 1229A Gray
Hardware Set No. 31
Door No's. l13A, l13B, 138
Each opening to receive
1.5 pair Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 626
1.0 each Lockset 35H-7-E-3H 626
1.0 each Closer 4111 SNB AL
1.0 set Smoke Seals S88 White
1.0 each Door Bottom 209AV AL
Hardware Set No. 32
Door No. 12lB
Each opening to receive
2.0 each Exit Device 3347L 03 626
2.0 each Cylinder 1E74 626
-'- Note 1. Balance of hardware proviked by aluminum and glass door manufacturer.
Hardware Set No. 33
Door No. 129A
~_ Each opening to receive
1.0 each Cylinder 1E74 626
-- Note 1. Balance of hardware proviked by aluminum and glass door manufacturer.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 21
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Hardware Set No. 34
Cabinet Drawer Locks
Each opening to receive
1.0 each Cabinet Lock 5L-7-R-D-2-T (verify compatibility) 626
Note I. Balance of hardware by millwork manufacturer.
Hardware Set No. 35
Exterior Gate Padlocks
Each opening to receive
1.0 each Padlock 41B-7-72-T-M3 (verify compatibility) Brass
Note 1. Balance of hardware by gate manufacturer.
Har~twar~ $~t No. 36
Key Comrol System
1.0 each Key Cabinet 1201 Steel
Note 1. Hardware supplier to supply key cabinet in accordance with Specification Section
08710, Paragraph 2.5, Items A thru G.
END OF SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 22
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART i - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified
or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where
glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Vision lites.
2. Entrances and other doors.
3. Storefront construction.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section "Mirrors" for mirrors and transparent mirrors.
2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefront" for aluminum frames.
3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for steel frames.
4. Division 11 Section "Security Glass and Glazing" for glass-clad polycarbonate glazing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as
def'med in the referenced glazing standard.
B. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to causes other than
glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of failure
is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices
for maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directions.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal
movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or glass
breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects
in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses
by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for the various size openings in the
thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Tinted and heat-absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated are the same throughout Project.
2. Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat-treated glass, are selected
so the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the following:
a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300. For other
than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of
analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass.
b. 1 lite per 1000 for lites set over 15 degrees off vertical and under action of wind or snow.
GLAZING 08800- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures acting on glass-framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on
materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1.Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated.
C. Samples for verification purposes of 12-inch-square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear
monolithic glass products, and 12-inch-long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of
sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material
representative in color of the adjoining framing system.
D.Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with
specified requirements.
1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels
designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a
recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were
tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation
of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed for adhesion.
F. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that glass edge
sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets,
setting blocks, and edge blocks.
G. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing compliance with
requirements specified.
H.Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual
specified in Division 1.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications
for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual."
2. SIGMA Publications: TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines".
B.Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for
Category II materials.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification
label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
GLAZING 08800 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers
or at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency
indicated below:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI).
3. National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL).
D. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below:
_ 1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated.
2. Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated.
3. Insulating glass of each construction indicated.
F. Single-Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each
product and installation method indicated.
G. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to sealant manufacturers, samples of each
glass, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect glazing sealants for
compatibility and adhesion testing as indicated below:
1. Use test methods standard with sealant manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific
preparation techniques are required for rapid, optimum glazing sealants adhesion to glass and glazing
channel substrates.
a. Perform tests under normal environmental conditions during installation.
-- 2. Submit not less than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing members and each type, class,
kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic, laminated, insulating units) for adhesion testing, as well
as one sample of each glazing accessory (gaskets, setting blocks and spacers) for compatibility testing.
3. Schedule sufficient time to test and analyze results to prevent delay in the Work.
4. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and get sealant manufacturer's written
recommendations for corrective measures, including using special primers.
5. Testing is not required when glazing sealant manufacturer can submit required preparation data that is
-- acceptable to Architect and is based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to and
compatibility with submitted glazing materials.
__ 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass
and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating glass
fabricator's recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are
wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
GLAZING 08800 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with
other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. In addition to
standard one year construction warranty against failure and defective glass, warranty shall also cover
"Breakage of Glass" attributed to factors other than vandalism and accidental breakage.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating
glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions"
article, f.o.b, point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated
below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing,
protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in Product Data Sheets at end of this Section.
2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS
A.Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class as indicated below, and Quality q3
(glazing select).
1. Class as indicated in each Product Data Sheet at end of this section.
B.Refer to Primary Clear Float Glass Product Data Sheet for Class I uncoated tinted glass for monolithic
glazing.
C. Refer to Primary Tinted Float Glass Product Data Sheet for tint color and nominal performance
characteristics of Class 2 uncoated tinted glass for monolithic glazing relative to visible light transmittance,
U-values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance.
D. Refer to requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of assembled units
composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light transmittance, U-values, shading
coefficient, and visible reflectance.
2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller-hearth) process, at manufacturer's option,
except provide horizontal process where indicated as tongless or free of tong marks.
2.4 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS
A. Uncoated, Clear, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I
(transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below.
1. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.
B. Uncoated, Tinted, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I
(transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat-absorbing and light-reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), with
GLAZING 08800 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
tint color and performance characteristics for 6.0-mm-thick (0.23-inch-thick) glass matching those indicated
for annealed primary tinted float glass; kind as indicated below:
1. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering heat-treated
glass products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following
companies.
1. Cardinal IG.
2. Saint-Gobain.
3. Falconer Glass Industries.
4. PPG Industries, Inc.
5. Tempglass.
6. Viracon, Inc.
2.5 WIRED GLASS
A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q8
(glazing); 6 mm (0.23 inch) thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below:
1.Polished Wired Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows:
a. Mesh m2 (square).
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering wired glass
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following companies.
1. Polished Wired Glass:
a. Ashai Glass Co.
b. Central Glass Co., Ltd.
c. Nippon Sheet Glass Ltd.
d. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd.
2.6 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated
by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated, including
those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section.
1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this
Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating
glass units.
2. Provide heat-treated, float glass of kind indicated: Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is
designated or required.
3. Performance characteristics designated for insulating glass are nominal values based on manufacturer's
published test data for units with lites 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) thick and nominal 1/2-inch dehydrated space
between lites, unless otherwise indicated.
4.U-values are expressed as Btu/hour x sq. ft. x deg F.
2.7 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will
GLAZING 08800 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under
conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing
sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of
installation.
3.Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
a. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products
of type indicated.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric
sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920 requirements indicated on each
Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section, including those referencing
ASTM classifications for Type, Grade, Class and Uses.
2.8 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids contem of 100
percent, nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as
recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release
paper backing, and complying with AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.1.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, polyvinyl chloride foam tape, factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces, packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive, and complying with AAMA 800
for product 810.5.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, glazing tape that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod:
a. PTI 303 Glazing Tape (shimless), Protective Treatments, Inc.
b. S-M 5700 Poly-Glaze Tape Sealant, Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
c. Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco Inc.
d. Extru-Seal, Pecora Corp.
e. PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc.
f. Dyna-Seal, Pecora Corp.
g. PTI 626 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc.
h. S-M 5710 H.P Poly-Glaze Tape Sealant, Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
i. SST-800 Tape, Tremco, Inc.
2. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape With Spacer Rod:
a. PTI 303 Glazing Tape (with shim), Protective Treatments, Inc.
b. Pre-shimmed Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco, Inc.
c. PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc.
3. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape:
a. Norseal V-980 Closed-Cell Glazing Tape, Norton Company.
2.9 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated
GLAZING 08800 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- below, complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black, and of profile and hardness required to maintain
watertight seal:
1. EPDM.
2. Silicone.
3. Thermoplastic polyolefm rubber.
4. Any material indicated above.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following companies.
1. Preformed Gaskets:
-- a. Advanced Elastomer Systems, L.P.
b. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
c. Tremco, Inc.
2. i0 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side-walking).
F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonextruding, nonoutgassing,
strips of closed-cell plastic foam of density, size, and shape to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute
to produce optimum sealant performance.
2.11 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with
edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at comers.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
GLAZING 08800 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.2 PREPARATION
A.Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove
coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing
materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing
publications.
B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and
face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project
conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows:
1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with
metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a
pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top
of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label.
2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with
edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction
sealant-substrate testing.
E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant
suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows:
1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to
preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have
demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance
requirements.
2.Provide l/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With
glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
H.Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise
required by glass manufacturer.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A.Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges are flush with or
protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to
GLAZING 08800 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads
and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at comers of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in
tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
-- G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression
gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at
comers and work toward centers of openings.
H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with
stretch allowance during installation.
B. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at comers to compress gaskets producing a
weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended
by gasket manufacturer.
.... C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to
prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place
and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant
..... performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant
to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets
to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing
held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean
surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including
weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent
intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or
stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
GLAZING 08800 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including
natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections
that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.
3.8 SCHEDULE
A. Glazing Type GL-l: 1/4 inch clear wired glass.
B. Glazing Type GL-2: One inch insulated, tinted glass
1. Classification of Units: Class CBA per ASTM E 774.
2. Air Space Width: Nominal i/2 inch measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass lites at unit's
edge.
3. Gas Filling: Fill air space with argon.
4. Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary sealants: manufacturer's standard sealants.
5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard metal.
a. Dessicant: Either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both.
b. Comer Construction: Manufacturer's standard comer construction.
c. Color of Spacer: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
6. Glass Specifications: Comply with the following requirements:
a. Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm (0.23 inch).
b. Uncoated Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass.
c. Uncoated Tinted Outdoor Lite: Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing) float glass with
a tint color of green.
d. Nominal Performance Characteristics are as indicated below:
1) Visible Light Transmittance: 60%
2) Summer Daytime U-Value: .58
3) Winter Nighttime U-Value: .48
4) Shading Coefficient: .46
5) Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 10%
C. Glass Type GL-3:1/4 inch clear float glass.
1. Class: Class 1 clear float glass.
D. Glass Type GL-4: Polycarbonate glazing as specified in Section 11195 - Security Glass and Glazing.
E. Glass Type GL-5: Transparent mirror glazing as specified in Section 08830 - Mirrors.
END OF SECTION 08800
GLAZING 08800- 10
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 08830 - MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified
or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Mirrors.
2. Transparent (Two-way) Mirrors.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass.
2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefront" for frames for transparent mirror.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive data for each type of mirror and setting materials;
recommended installation instructions.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with
other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Submit manufacturer's warranty of mirrors against defects in materials and workmanship for five years.
C. Submit manufacturer's warranty on transparent mirrors against the reflective coating peeling for a period
of ten years
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Mirrors:
1. Glass: FS DD-G-451, Type I, Class I, Quality q2, 1/4" thick clear plate.
2. Coating: Silver backing, copper protective coating and paint coating complying with CS 27.
B. Transparent Mirrors:
1. Glazing: polycarbonate plastic, 1/4" thick gray.
2. Coating: Pyrolytic coating.
a. Visible light transmittance of 13 per cent.
b. Visible reflectance of 60 per cent.
c. Light ratio of 10:1 (subject side: observer side).
C. Mirror Mastic:
1. Combination of asphaltic bitumens, fibers and mineral spirits.
-- MIRRORS 08830- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Acceptable Product:
a. 7HR4 Bedding Compound, Pecora.
b. Mirro-Mastic, Palmer Products Corporation.
3. Setting Angles: 0.060" aluminum Z-clips or T-angles sized as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Glass Mirrors:
1. Apply one additional coat of moisture-resistant paint, type recommended by manufacturer, to back of
mirror.
2. Allow to dry.
3. Apply mirror mastic to cover not more than 25 % of back mirror, 1/8" to 1/2" thickness of setting bed.
4. Set mirror on concealed shelf angle.
5. Press mirror against substrate to bond.
6. Leave open ventilation space, 1/8" minimum between mirror and substrate.
7. Do not seal off ventilation space at edge of mirror.
B. Transparent Mirrors:
I. Install as specified in Section 08400 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.
END OF SECTION 08830
MIRRORS 08830 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and
all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in
the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing.
3. Gypsum board bonded adhesively to interior concrete and masonry substrates.
4. Glass-mat, water gypsum backing board installed with gypsum board assemblies.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for steel wall framing walls covered with
gypsum sheathing on exterior.
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for the following:
a. Wood furring.
3. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping systems and fire-resistive-rated joint sealants.
4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Sheathing" for installations over steel framing.
5. Division 9 Section "Tile" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms
related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies indicated to have STC ratings,
provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined
per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide
materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by
an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire
Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the
listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board
assemblies from a single manufacturer.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel
products from a single manufacturer.
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same
manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to
gypsum board manufacturer.
E. Field Samples: On actual gypsum board assemblies, prepare field samples of at least I00 sq. ft. in
surface area for the following applications. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place
unit of Work.
I. Wall surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes.
2. Ceiling surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes.
3. Surfaces indicated to receive textured paint finishes.
4. Surfaces indicated to receive textured finishes specified in this Section.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of
manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum
panels flat to prevent sagging.
C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage
metal comer beads and trim.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and
t~mishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than
40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95
deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources.
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts
during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Clark Steel Framing.
b. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
c. Dale Industries, Inc.
d. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
e. Marino Industries Corp.
f. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
g. Unimast Inc.
h. .United States Gypsum, Co.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 2. Grid Suspension Assemblies:
a. Chicago Metallic Corp.
b. National Rolling Mills Co.
~ c. USG Interiors, Inc.
3. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. Domtar Gypsum.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
c. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
_ d. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
-- A. General: Provide components of sizes indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM
C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
C. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.05980-inch-minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and
7/16-inch-wide flanges, and as follows:
1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 lb per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lb per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Finish: Rust-inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated.
_ 4. Finish: G-60 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525 for framing for exterior soffits and
where indicated.
D. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges bent back 90 deg and doubled over
-- to form 3/16-inch minimum lip (return), minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth
as follows:
1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
-- 2. Depth: As indicated.
3. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.
E. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of
-" base (uncoated) metal as follows:
1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
_ 2. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.
F. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard direct-hung grid
suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular
.-~ supporting network.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
- A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements:
1. Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with
ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions:
a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per sq. ft.
2. Protective Coating: Manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant coating.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over
to form 3/16-inch-wide minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for
_ minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Thickness: 0.0270 inch.
2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal as follows:
1. Depth: 7/8 inch.
2. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates
involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications
indicated.
2.4 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end
butt joints.
1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, in either
1/2 inch or 5/8 inch thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 840 for application system and support
spacing indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies.
3. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces.
4. Edges: Tapered.
5. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
6. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
in the Work where proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Gyprock Fireguard C Gypsum Board, Domtar Gypsum.
b. Firestop Type C, Georgia-Pacific Corp.
c. Fire-Shield G, Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
d. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core, United States Gypsum Co.
e. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, ULTRACODE Core, United States Gypsum Co.
C. Glass-Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1178, of type and thickness indicated
below:
1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 5/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated
in the Work is Dens-Shield Tile Backer units manufactured by Georgia Pacific Corp.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM
C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
1.Material: Formed metal, plastic, or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the
following requirement:
a. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process.
2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047:
a. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound.
Use LC-beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- c. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of
joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated.
d. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot
opening.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of
both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached open-weave glass-fiber reinforcing tape with compatible
joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment
materials for application indicated.
C. Joint Tape for Cementitious Backer Units: Polymer-coated, open glass-fiber mesh.
D. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening
-- powder products formulated for uses indicated.
1. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and
_ filling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it.
2. For prefflling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer
for this purpose.
3. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for
._ ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose.
4. For topping compound, use sandable formulation.
E. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying
-- with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
2. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.
F. Joint Compound for Cementitious Backer Unit: Material recommended by cementitious backer unit
manufacturer.
2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,
nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings
in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.
2. Product has flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E 84.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to
" reduce transmission of airborne sound.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant:
a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant, Pecora Corp.
b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant, United States Gypsum Co.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. BA-98, Pecora Corp.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant, Tremco, Inc.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced
standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum panels.
C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot grouting hollow metal
door frames.
D. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum panels to steel
framing.
E. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.03 inch thick.
2. Fastening gypsum board to wood members.
3. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
F. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033
to 0.112 inch thick.
G. Corrosion-resistant-coated steel drill screws of size and type recommended by board manufacturer for
fastening cementitious backer units.
H. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
I. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral
fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I
(blankets without membrane facing):
1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag.
J. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, thickness and maximum permeance rating as follows:
1. 6.0 mils, 0.13 perms.
K. Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for
sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.9 TEXTURE FINISH PRODUCTS
A. Primer: Of type recommended by texture finish manufacturer.
B. Polystyrene Aggregated Finish for Ceilings: Factory-packaged proprietary powder product formulated
with polystyrene aggregates for mixing with water at Project site to produce the texture indicated below
by spray application, with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of not more than 25 per ASTM E
84:
1. Medium textured f'mish.
C. Aggregate Finish: Factory-packaged proprietary drying-type powder product formulated with aggregate
for mixing with water at Project site for spray application to produce texture indicated below:
I. Light-spatter finish.
2. Spatter knockdown finish.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, texture finishes that may be incorporated
in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Polystyrene Aggregated Finish for Ceilings:
a. Perfect Spray Medium, Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
b. IMPERIAL QT Spray Texture Finish (P-Medium), United States Gypsum Co.
2. Aggregate Finish:
a. G-P Ceiling Texture--Vermiculite, Georgia-Pacific Corp.
_ b. USG Spray Texture Finish, United States Gypsum Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
-- 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames,
cast-in-anchors, and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead
structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have
been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to
support ceilings.
3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM
C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
-- B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to
support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar
construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer
or, if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co.
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed
by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings.
1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling.
2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure except at floor.
~- a. Provide slip- or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial
loading.
D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members.
-.~ Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated.
3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
- A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
I. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where
required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying,
or other equally effective means.
2. where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
___ interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,
install su. pplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance
limits established by referenced standards.
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a
manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
temperatures.
4. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not
cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5.Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
6.Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
7.Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit.
B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that
required by the referenced steel framing installation standard.
1. Wire Hangers: 0.1620-inch (8-gage) diameter, 4 feet o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1-1/2 inch, 4 feet o.c.
3. Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.
D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross-furring
members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet as measured both lengthwise
on each member and transversely between parallel members.
E. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated.
F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets
vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut
to fit into wall track.
3.5 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud
assemblies abut other construction.
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs
and wall.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not
vary more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except
where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height.
Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
1. For STC-rated and fa:e-resistive-rated partitions requiring partitions to extend to the underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install
framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as
needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
D. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.
E. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by the
referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum deflection and minimum loading
requirements specified:
1. Single-Layer Construction: Space studs at 16 inches o.c.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
F. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and so that leading edges or ends of each
gypsum board can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G. For curved partitions install steel framing as follows:
1. Cut top and bottom runners through leg and web at 2-inch intervals for arc length. In cutting
_ lengths of runners allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12 inches at ends of arcs.
2. Bend runners to uniform curve of radius indicated and locate straight lengths so they are tangent
to arcs.
3. Support outside (cut) leg of runners by clinching a 1-inch-high by 0.0209-inch (25-gage)-thick
-- sheet steel strip to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners.
4. Attach runners to structural elements at floor and ceiling with fasteners located 2 inches from ends
and spaced 24 inches o.c.
5. Attach runners to suspended ceilings with toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors located 2 inches
-- from ends and spaced 16 inches o.c. in between where attached to suspended ceilings.
6. Position studs vertically with open sides facing in same direction and engaging floor and ceiling
runners. Begin and end each arc with a stud and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at
stud spacing recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for radiuses indicated. Attach studs
to runners with 3/8-inch-long pan head framing screws. On straight lengths at ends of arcs, place
studs 6 inches o.c. with last stud left free standing.
~_ H. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219, and with applicable published
recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either
directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs)
at head and secure to jamb studs.
1. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof
structure above.
'- I. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, in same
manner as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required
above door heads.
J. Install thermal insulation as follows:
1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced
24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior comers, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending
beyond comer; on adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of furring channel to web of
attached channel. Start from this furring channel with standard width insulation panel and
continue in regular manner. At interior comers, space second member no more than 12 inches
from comer and cut insulation to fit.
4. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10-inch staples fabricated from
0.0625-inch (16-gage)-diameter tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member.
K. Install polyethylene vapor retarder where indicated to comply with the following requirements:
1. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in
place with mechanical fasteners or adhesives. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids
in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose mineral-fiber insulation.
2. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten
vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings, and at
lap joints; space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
3. Seal joints in vapor retarders caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items
penetrating vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape.
4. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarder immediately before concealing it with the
installation of gypsum board or other construction.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with
ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and avoid
abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not
less than one framing member.
D. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or avoid them emirely.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. At stairwells
and other high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting joints over studs and staggered.
E. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels
together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels.
Do not force into place.
F. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports
or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining panels so that tapered
edges abut tapered edges, and field-cut edges abut field-cut edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges
against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible.
G. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so that the leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
I. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32
inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into
frames.
J. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges
of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels.
K. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chase walls that are braced internally.
1.Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2.Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members
projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed
by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4-to-1/2-inch-wide joints to install
sealant.
L. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as
detailed. Provide 1/4-inch-to-i/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge
trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural
surfaces with acoustical sealant.
M. , Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control
and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including
a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations
for location of edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board
assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
N. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing
standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 10
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 3.7 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS
A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
-- 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints.
B. Wall Tile Substrates: For substrates indicated to receive thin-set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied
wall finishes, comply with the following:
1. Install glass-mat water-resistant gypsum backing board panels to comply with manufacturer's
installation directions.
2. Install glass-mat water-resistant gypsum backing board panels at showers, tubs, and where
-- indicated to comply with board manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Install gypsum wallboard panels with tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat surface
except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.
C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
-- D. Direct-Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other
than studs, joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board
manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive
has set.
3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
_ A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten
gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for
type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
~- B. Install comer beads at external corners.
C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semiexposed. Provide
edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except where other types are indicated.
1. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can
be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
2. Install U-bead where indicated.
3. Install aluminum edge trim and other accessories where indicated.
D. Install control joints at locations indicated, and where not indicated according to ASTM C 840, and in
locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
- A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of comer bead, edge
trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to
prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim accessories having concealed face
flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from developing in joint treatment at flange edges.
D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to trim accessories with concealed face flanges as
recommended by trim accessory manufacturer and as required to prevent cracks from developing in joint
~_ compound at flange edges.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 11
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-214.
1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of
finish is required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.
2. Level 2 where water-resistant gypsum backing board panels form substrates for tile, and where
indicated.
3. Level 3 for gypsum board surfaces to receive wall covering.
4. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
F. For level 4 gypsum board f'mish, embed tape in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint
compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and
after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. Use the
following joint compound combination:
1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound.
2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound.
3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound.
G. Where level 3 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compounds specified for first and second coat
in addition to embedding coat.
H. Where level 2 gypsum board fmish is indicated, apply joint specified for first coat in addition to
embedding coat.
I. Where level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound specified for embedding coat.
J. Finish glass-mat water-resistant gypsum backing board to comply with board manufacturer's directions.
3.10 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving
texture finishes according to texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer only to surfaces
that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to gypsum panels and other surfaces indicated to
receive texture f'mish according to texture finish manufacturer's directions. Using powered spray
equipment acceptable to texture finish manufacturer, produce a uniform texture matching approved field
samples and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by
covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If despite these precautions,
texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray as recommended
by texture f'mish manufacturer to prevent damage.
3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, that ensures gypsum
board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09255
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 12
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
__ SECTION 09262 - GYPSUM SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
-- 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes gypsum sheathing attached to steel framing members in exterior walls (behind
-- exterior finish).
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry veneer anchors.
2. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for steel wall framing walls covered with
gypsum sheathing on exterior and for air-infiltration barrier.
3. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for flashing applied in conjunction with gypsum
sheathing.
4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied in conjunction with gypsum sheathing.
-- 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for gypsum wallboard on interior.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology Standard: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 for definitions
of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this Section or other referenced
standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
-- A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
_ B. Product data for each grade of gypsum sheathing indicated.
C. Research reports or evaluation reports from the model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction evidencing compliance of air-infiltration barrier with building code in effect for Project.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
- A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum sheathing for Project from a single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver gypsum sheathing board and related materials in original packages bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer.
B. Store gypsum sheathing board so that it is protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface
contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, or other causes. Neatly stack gypsum sheathing boards
_. flat on leveled supports off the ground under protective covering.
GYPSUM SHEATHING 09262 - !
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Handle gypsum sheathing board to prevent damaging edges, ends, backs, or faces.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installing gypsum sheathing board with installing exterior cladding to comply with requirements
indicated below:
1. Do not leave gypsum sheathing board exposed to the weather for longer than 1 month.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD
A. Gypsum Sheathing Board with Water-Resistant Core: Gypsum sheathing board consisting of
noncombustible gypsum core incorporating a water-resistant material surfaced on face, back, and long
edges with water-repellent paper bonded to the core. Comply with ASTM C 79 and requirements
indicated below:
1. Type: Regular.
2. Edge and End Configuration: V-shaped tongue-and-groove long edges, square ends.
3. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
4. Size: 2 feet by 8 feet.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, gypsum sheathing boards that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Gypsum Sheathing Board with Water-Resistant Core, Regular Type:
a. Gyproc Gypsum Sheathing, Domtar Gypsum Co.
b. G-P Gypsum Sheathing, Georgia-Pacific Corp.
c. Gold Bond Regular Gypsum Sheathing, Gold Bond Building Products Div., National
Gypsum Co.
d. USG Gypsum Sheathing, United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Type S steel drill screws, 1 inch long, with organic-polymer coating or other
corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117, and
as follows:
1. Provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 to attach sheathing to steel framing from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
B. Elastomeric Sealant: Medium-modulus, neutral-curing silicone sealant compatible with joint substrates
formed by gypsum sheathing and other related materials and complying with requirements for elastomeric
sealants specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow Coming 795 Silicone Building
Sealant.
C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Product complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sealant tape and
gypsum sheathing, recommended by manufacturers of both sheathing and tape for use with glass-fiber
sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Elmer's Siliconized Acrylic Latex
Caulk, Borden, Inc.
GYPSUM SHEATHING 09262 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Sheathing Tape: Tape specifically designed and manufactured to seal joints in gypsum sheathing against
water and air infiltration, formulated with an adhesive that permanently bonds to gypsum sheathing
substrates, and as indicated below:
1. Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, 2 inches wide, 10-by-10 or 10-by-20 threads per inch, of type
recommended by tape manufacturer to use with siliconized emulsion sealant in sealing joints and
fasteners for gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use.
2.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Perma-Tite Tape--PGM 207A, PermaGlas-Mesh, Inc.
b. Quik-Tape, Quik-Tape, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3. i INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gypsum sheathing to comply with manufacturer's instructions, GA-253, and the
following:
1. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of the work; fit tightly against abutting
construction, except provide a 3/8-inch setback where non-load-bearing construction abuts
structural elements.
2. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so that these combined
materials are installed in the sequence and manner that prevents exterior moisture from passing
through completed exterior wall assembly.
3. Apply fasteners so that screw heads bear tightly against face of gypsum sheathing boards but do
not cut into face paper.
4. Do not bridge building expansion joints with gypsum sheathing; cut and space edges to match
spacing of structural support elements.
B. Horizontal Installation: Install 2-foot-wide gypsum sheathing boards horizontally with V-grooved edge
down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of
adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of stud flanges and stagger end joints
of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing, two where possible. Screw-attach boards at perimeter
and within field of board to each steel stud as follows:
1. Fasteners spaced approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back 3/8 inch minimum from edges and ends
of boards.
2. Apply air-infiltration barrier to Gypsum sheathing at all brick veneer walls.
3. Apply air-infiltration barrier to cover upstanding flashing with a 4-inch overlap.
C. Sheathing Tape Application: Apply sheathing tape to joints in sheathing; overlap tape by not less than
the tape width at joint intersections.
1. For glass-fiber tape, apply approximately a 3/8-inch bead of siliconized emulsion sealant to tapes
along joints and embed sealant into tapes along their entire surface with a trowel. In addition,
apply sealant with a trowel to each exposed fastener so that fasteners are completely covered.
END OF SECTION 09262
__ GYPSUM SHEATHING 09262 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09300 - TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified
or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints
in tile surfaces.
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for backer units installed as part of gypsum wallboard
systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
1. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by measuring, record measurements on shop
drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations, in consultation with Architect.
D. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared on samples of size and construction
indicated, products involve color and texture variations, in sets showing full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches square,
mounted on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
E. Master grade certificates for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and
Installer.
F. Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test results
relative to compliance of tile and tile setting and grouting products with requirements indicated.
G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of
Architects and Owners, plus other information specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of
tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying progress of the Work.
.... TILE 09300- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer
for each aggregate.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time
of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.
C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from
contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these precautions coating does contact bonding surfaces
of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced
standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.
B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup.
C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after
completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's
instructions.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below,
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for
each type, composition, color, pattern, and size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile:
a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
b. Dal-Tile Corp.
c. Mid-State Tile Co.
d. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc.
e. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
f. United States Ceramic Tile Co.
g. Villeroy &Boch (U.S.A.) Inc.
h. Wenczel Tile Co.
i. Winburn Tile Manufacturing Co.
2. Glazed Wall Tile:
a. American Marrazzi Tile, Inc.
b. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
c. Buchtal Corp. USA
TILE 09300 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
.... d. Dal-Tile Corp.
e. International American Ceramics/Laufen
f. Mid-State Tile Co.
g. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc.
h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
i. United States Ceramic Tile Co.
j. Villeroy &Boch (U.S.A.) Inc.
_ k. Wenczel Tile Co. of Florida
3. Dry-Set Mortars and Grouts:
-- a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
b. Boiardi Products Corp.
c. Bostik Construction Products Div.
d. Custom Building Products
-- e. C-Cure Chemical Co.
f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp.
g. L & M Mfg. Inc.
h. Laticrete International Inc.
i. Mapei Corp.
j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
k. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
_ 1. Syracuse Adhesives Co.
4. Latex-Emulsion-Based Latex-Portland Cement Mortars:
-- a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
b. Boiardi Products Corp.
c. Bostik Construction Products Div.
d. Custom Building Products
-- e. C-Cure Chemical Co.
f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp.
g. L & M Mfg. Inc.
h. Laticrete International Inc.
i. Mapei Corp.
j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
k. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
-- 1. Syracuse Adhesives Co.
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
-- A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications
for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated.
1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated.
B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and
materials indicated for setting and grouting.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and
other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics,
provide specific products or materials compling with the following requirements:
1. Match color, texture, and pattern indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard designations for
these characteristics.
2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals,
blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range
in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.
TILE 09300 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E.Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as
standard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated.
1. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools, on exteriors or in wet areas, do not use
back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies that this type of mounting
is suitable for these kinds of uses and has been successfully used on other projects.
F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces
of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of petroleum
paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying with the following
requirements:
1. Composition: Porcelain.
2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: As indicated in Section 00861.
3. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch.
4. Face: As indicated in Section 00861.
B. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:
1. Nominal Facial Dimensions: As indicated.
2. Nominal Thickness: 5/16 inch.
3. Face: As indicated.
4. Mounting: Factory back-mounted.
C. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with
following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved.
b. Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose cap.
c. External Comers for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape with a radius of
at least 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated.
d. Internal Comers: Field-butted square comers, except use coved base and cap angle pieces
designed to member with stretcher shapes.
2.4 WATERPROOFING FOR THINSET TILE INSTALLATIONS
A. Latex Rubber Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard factory-prepackaged, job-mixed, proprietary two-
part formulation consisting of liquid latex robber and powder for trowel application and glass fiber fabric
reinforcing.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Latex Rubber Waterproot'mg:
a. "Laticrete 301/335 Waterproof Membrane"; Laticrete International Inc.
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI Al08.1 and as
specified below.
1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), or polyethylene sheeting ASTM
D 4397, 4.0 mils thick.
TILE 09300 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
- 2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2 inches by 2 inches - WO.3 by WO.3
(16 ASW gage or 0.0625 inch diameter); comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for
minimum wire size.
_ 3. Expanded Metal Lath: Provide diamond mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847 for requirements
indicated below:
a. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Fabricate lath from uncoated or zinc-coated
~- (galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath.
b. Configuration Over Solid Surfaces: Self-furring.
c. Weight: 3.4 psf.
~ 4. Latex additive (water emulsion) described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging
water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for use with job-mixed
portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
a. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI All8.1.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al18.4, composition as follows:
1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry
- polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site.
a. Dry Polymer Additive: Manufacturer's standard.
-' 2. Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below, serving as replacement for part or all of
gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex
additive manufacturer.
a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard.
2.6 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Dry-Set Grout: ANSI Al18.6, color as indicated.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI Al18.6, color as indicated, composition as follows:
1. Prepackaged dry grout mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry
polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site.
a. Dry Polymer Additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate.
2. Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, added at
job site with dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows:
a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard.
b. Dry Grout Mixture: Dry-set grout specified or supplied by latex additive manufacturer. Use
latex additive without retarder with dry-set grout.
1) Application: Use dry-set grout combined with latex additive for grouting joints in
glazed wall tile.
2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including
- those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing equipment,
selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars
and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
- TILE 09300 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.
1.Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and
curing compounds.
2.Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of
work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify
that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package
show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not
factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
B. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent
adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence
of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating indicated
below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces:
1. Petroleum paraff'm wax or grout release.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with pans of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards
included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply
to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA
installation methods indicated.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering
without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints.
Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers
overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each
space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
shown.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets
so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in f'mished work.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction,
and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not
saw cut joints after installation of tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
TILE 09300 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
--- 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
H. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards:
-- 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and latex-
portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI Al08.10.
2. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
3. For chemical-resistant furan grouts, comply with ANSI A108.8.
I. At showers, mbs and similar wet areas, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with
manufacturer's instructions for type of application indicated.
3.4 WATERPROOFING FOR THINSET TILE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install waterproofing in compliance with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions to produce a waterproof
membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
B. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is
watertight.
3.5 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS
~ A. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed methods,
TCA installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout types:
1. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1
a. Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement mortar on cured bed, ANSI A108.5.
b. Concrete Subfloors, Interior, Waterproofmg Membrane: TCA Fl21.
c. Grout: Latex-portland cement.
3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS
A. Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with requirements indicated below for setting-
bed methods, TCA installation methods related to subsurface wall conditions, and grout types:
1. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5.
a. Masonry, Exterior: TCA W202.
b. Masonry, Interior: TCA W202.
c. Wood or Metal Studs, Interior: TCA W243.
· - d. Cementitious Backer Units, Interior: TCA W244.
e. Shower Receptors, Cementitious Backer Units: TCA B415.
f. Grout: Latex-portland cement.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of
_ foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal
surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with
clean water before and after cleaning.
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is
- acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging
drains.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and
-' otherwise defective tile work.
TILE 09300 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that -
ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to
completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering
during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
2.Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09300 ----
TILE 09300 - 8 _
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09385 - DIMENSION STONE TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes dimension stone tile and related setting materials.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in stone tile with elastomeric sealants.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension stone tiles are fabricated from natural stone to produce modular units that are less than 3/4
inch thick.
B. Manufacturer is the term used in this Section to refer to firms that either fabricate dimension stone tiles
or are the major distributors of dimension stone tiles. Some firms may also own the quarry from which
the dimension stone for tiles is obtained.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Abrasion Resistance: Minimum abrasive hardness of 10, as determined per ASTM C 241.
B. Static Coefficient of Friction: Minimum 0.6, as determined per ASTM C 1028.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications
Sections.
B. Product data for the following:
1. Each stone tile type.
2. Setting and grouting materials.
3. Waterproof membrane materials.
C. Maintenance data to include in Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."
D. Shop drawings indicating stone tile sizes, dimensions, sections and profiles, joint patterns, and details
showing relationship of tile units to adjacent work. Show installation details at any special conditions.
E. Samples for verification purposes in the form of 12-inch-square samples of each type of stone tile
required, showing full range of colors, textures, finishes, and other variations related to visual
characteristics to be expected in the finished Work.
1. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work.
DIMENSION STONE TILE 09385 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in supplying products similar to those indicated for this
Project with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who employs only persons trained in installing
stone tile products similar to those required for this Project.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide material produced by a single manufacturer for each stone tile
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in factor~ wrappings, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer
and lot number. Store materials in an area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme
temperatures, and humidity. Store tiles off the ground in the boxes in which they were shipped.
B. Comply with instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and
handling requirements.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 deg F (10 deg C) during installation and for 7 days after
completion, unless higher temperatures are required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.Sequence stone tile installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during
remainder of construction period.
B. Install stone tile and accessories only after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer, and the
Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace stone tile that fails in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period. This warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent
with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Warranty Period: 2 years after date of Substantial Completion.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra full-sized stone tiles matching installed tile in a quantity
equal to 2 percent of the amount of each tile type installed, packaged with protective covering for storage
and identified with labels clearly describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, producers/quarriers offering
DIMENSION STONE TILE 09385 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Slate:
a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
b. Buckingham-Virginia Slate Corp.
c. Granite & Marble World Trade, Inc.
d. Hilltop Slate, Inc.
e. Valley Marble & Slate Corp.
2.2 STONE TILE, GENERAL
A. Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated for each material.
B. Provide stone tiles that are free of cracks, seams, starts, and other defects impairing their function for
use indicated; are from a single quarry for each type, variety, color, and quality of stone specified; and
have the following characteristics:
1. Finished Face: As indicated for each material and complying with industry standards.
2. Tile Size: 12 by 12 inches.
3. Nominal Tile Thickness: 3/8 inch.
4. Tile Edges: Square.
5. Match tile colors, finishes, textures, and other distinguishable characteristics indicated by
reference to manufacturer's standard designations for these characteristics.
2.3 SLATE TILE
A. Slate Dimension Stone Standard: ASTM C 629.
1. Classification: II, Interior.
B. Finished Tile Face: As follows:
1. Natural Cleft: Natural cleaved face.
2.4 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al18.4, composition as follows:
1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix with either polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate dry polymer
additive.
2. Water Emulsion Latex Additive: Add at Project site to prepackaged dry mortar mix specified or
recommended by latex manufacturer.
2.5 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Grout Colors: Where manufacturer's standard grout products are indicated, provide colors to comply
with the following requirement:
1. Match color indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard color designations.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, composition as follows:
1. Prepackaged dry grout mix with either polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate dry polymer
additive.
2. Water Emulsion Latex Additive: Add at Project site to prepackaged dry grout mix, with type of
DIMENSION STONE TILE 09385 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
latex and dry grout mix specified or recommended by latex manufacturer.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Buttons: Plastic buttons of thickness required for joint size indicated to maintain uniform joint
width.
B. Cleaner: As recommended by stone tile manufacturer.
C. Sealer for Floors: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant sealer, not affecting color or physical properties
of stone surfaces as recommended by stone tile manufacturer for application indicated.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Flatness Tolerances: The maximum variation on polished, honed, and fine-rubbed surfaces at bed and
joint arris lines is 3/64 inch or 1/16 of specified joint width, whichever is greater. For surfaces having
other f'mishes, the maximum variation from true plane is 1/4 of specified joint width.
B. Module Variation: The maximum variation in dimensions of any piece is 1/4 of specified joint width.
C. Beds and Joints: Pieces bedded and jointed as shown on approved shop drawings; bed and joint surfaces
cut or sawn full square for specified minimum thickness of the piece.
D. Backs of Pieces: Backs of all pieces sawn or roughly dressed to approximately true planes.
E. Incidental Cutting and Drilling: Holes and sinkages for anchors, clamps, dowels, according to approved
shop drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate conditions over which stone tile will be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Before installing stone tile, clean substrates to remove dust, debris, sealers, coatings, oil, curing
compounds, and loose particles.
B. Ascertain that substrates are free of previous surface-applied material. Prepare substrate surfaces to
accept new material.
C. Illuminate areas of installation using building's permanent lighting system; temporary lighting alone will
not be acceptable.
D. Verify that materials are those specified before installing.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI Al08 series of tile installation standards in
"American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" applicable to type of
setting bed and grouting method indicated.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: Comply with requirements indicated by reference to installation methods
DIMENSION STONE TILE 09385 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
in TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation."
C. Install stone tile only on sound substrates. Maintain exposed surfaces free of setting materials at all
-~ times.
D. Do not use tile units with chips, cracks, voids, stains, and other defects that are not naturally present in
the stone and might be visible in the finished Work.
E. Expansion and Control Joint Installation Method: Comply with TCA EJ171. Joint sealant materials and
installation are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Set stone tile to comply with Drawings and final shop drawings. Adjust accessories for the stone to set
properly.
G. Adhere stone tiles to substrates with setting materials indicated, and fall joints with grout as recommended
by setting material manufacturer. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tiles from cartons in same
sequence as manufactured and packaged.
H. Set individual stone tiles into setting material, taking care to maintain accurate joint alignment and
spacing. Beat-in stone to obtain 100 percent contact between back of stone tile and setting material.
~.- Scribe and cut tile as necessary around obstructions to produce closely fitted, neat joints of uniform width
throughout Project.
.~. I. Grout stone tile to comply with the following:
1. For sand-portland cement, dry-set, and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI
Al08.10.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
-- A. Variation from Plumb: For surfaces of columns and walls, as well as for arrises, external corners, joints,
and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
B. Variation in Level: For grades shown on lintels, stools, horizontal joints, and other conspicuous lines,
do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.
C. Variation in Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns and wall
facing, do not exceed 1/2 inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum, or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.
D. Variation in Surface Plane of Flooring: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level or slope indicated
when tested with a 10 foot straight edge.
E. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls from dimensions shown,
do not exceed minus 1/4 inch or plus 1/4 inch.
3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION METHODS
A. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al08.1.
1. Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement mortar on cured bed.
a. Latex-portland cement mortar.
2. Concrete Subfloors with Waterproof Membrane: TCA Fl21.
-- 3. Grout: Latex-portland cement.
DIMENSION STONE TILE 09385 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS
A. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al08.1.
1. Solid Backing, Interior: TCA W222 (one-coat method).
2. Grout: Sand-portland cement.
3. Grout: Latex-portland cement.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace material that is broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged or that does not
match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in manner to eliminate
evidence of replacement.
B. Clean stone tiles after setting and grouting is complete; use procedures recommended by stone producer
and manufacturer for types of application indicated.
C. Apply sealer to cleaned stone tile flooring according to sealer manufacturer's instructions.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from stone tile after installation is completed for the following time periods:
1. For tile set with any form of portland cement mortar, 72 hours and allow heavy traffic only after
a minimum of 14 days curing time.
B. Protect stone tile flooring during construction period with kraft paper or other heavy covering of type that
will not stain or discolor stone.
C. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective covering and clean surfaces using
procedures and materials recommended by grout and stone manufacturers.
END OF SECTION 09385
DIMENSION STONE TILE 09385 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or indicated
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceilings composed of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and
ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension system members.
2. Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers; and special
moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining
construction.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.
D. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below.
Where f'mishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of
variations expected.
1. 6-inch- (150-mm-) square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color.
2. Full-size samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color.
3. Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for
each color and system type required.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
F. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency that are based on its testing of current
products for compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with requirements.
G. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that show compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with the building code in effect
for the Project.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following
requirements:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Fire-response tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. Qualified testing and
inspecting agencies include Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock Hersey, or another agency that is
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow-up services.
2. Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as
determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84.
3. Acoustical panel ceilings indicated are identical in materials and construction to those tested for fire
resistance per ASTM E 119.
4. Fire-resistance-rated, acoustical panel ceilings are indicated by design designations listed in the UL "Fire
Resistance Directory," in the Warnock Hersey "Certification Listings," or in the listing of another
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
5. Products are identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel from a single
source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single
source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
1. Obtain both acoustical panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages
and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when
occupied for its intended use.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system components with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment,
fire-suppression system components (if any), and partition assemblies (if any).
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering
for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of mount installed.
2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity .of each exposed component equal to 2.0
percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. i MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated, Water-Felted, Mineral-Base Panels:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. The Celotex Corporation.
c. USG Interiors, Inc.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply
with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Type E-400 (plenum mounting
in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches [400 mm] away from the test surface) per ASTM E 795.
2. Test Method for Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Where acoustical panel ceilings are specified to have
a CAC, provide units identical to those tested per ASTM E 1414 by a qualified testing agency.
2.3 CEILINGS OF WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Panel Characteristics: Type III, Form 2 acoustical panels per ASTM E 1264, with painted f'mish, complying
with pattern and other requirements indicated below:
1. Pattern: Panels matching pattern indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard product designations
in Section 00861 - DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY.
2. Color/Light Reflectance Coefficient: White/LR 0.80.
3. Color: Match color indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard color designations.
4. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.55.
5. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: CSTC 35.
6. Edge Detail: Square.
7. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
8. Size: 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm).
B. Suspension System Type: As described below and specified in Part 2 "Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated,
Direct-Hung Suspension Systems" Article:
1. Wide-face, single-web, steel suspension system.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types,
structural classifications, and f'mishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
i. Zinc-Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2. Nickel-Copper Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper alloy UNS N04400.
3. Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1,
Direct Hung) will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-)
diameter wire.
E. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated, or if not indicated, manufacturer's standard
moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated;
formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system
runners.
1. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
penetration exactly.
F. Hold-Down Clips for Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Ceilings: For interior ceilings composed of acoustical panels
weighing less than 1 lb per sq. ft. (4.88 kg per sq. m), provide hold-down clips spaced 24 inches (610 mm)
o.c. on all cross tees.
G. Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system design to absorb impact
forces against acoustical panels.
2.5 NON-FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED, DIRECT-HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Wide-Face, Single-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from prepainted or
electrolytic zinc-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, with prepainted 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide flanges; other
characteristics as follows:
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2. Finish: Painted white.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining
latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in
building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.
2. Product has flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E 84.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce
transmission of airborne sound.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be incorporated
in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Company.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. BA-98; Pecora Corp.
b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling instal- lafion
and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation
is specified in other Sections.
1. Furnish cast-in-place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time
needed for coordinating other work.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and conform to the layout shown
on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's
instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.
2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580.
3. CISCA Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA "Recommendations for
Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings."
4. CISCA Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA "Guidelines for
Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies."
5. U.B.C. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems: U.B.C. Standard No. 47-18.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are
not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Splay hangers only where required, and if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss
obtructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere
with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install
supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size
supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits
established by referenced standards and publications.
5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of 3 tight
turns. Connect hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are
secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age,
corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to
which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not
cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
7. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of 4 tight tums.
Fasten bracing wires to concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
8. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger
inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in anchors that extend through forms into concrete.
9. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
10. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
11. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise shown; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of
each member.
C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary
to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they
are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3
inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet
(3.18 mm in 3.66 m). Miter comers accurately and connect securely.
3.Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and
replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge
moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. In the manner indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
2.For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system
runners and moldings.
3.Paint the cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using
coating recommended for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.
4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated and in areas required by governing regulations, or for
fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or
required.
5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated
assembly.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform field
quality-control services.
B. Extent and Testing Frequency: Testing will take place in successive stages in areas of extent described below.
Do not proceed with installation of acoustical panel ceilings until test results for previously installed hangers
show compliance with requirements.
1. Extent of Each Test Area: When the installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached
20 percent completion but no panels have been installed.
2. Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 powder-actuated fasteners and postinstalled
anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 Ibf (890 N) of tension; it will also
select I of every 2 postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for
440 lbf (1957 N) of tension.
3. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will
test those anchors not previously tested until 20 consecutively pass, and then will resume initial testing
frequency.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace those fasteners and anchors that test results indicate do not comply with requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system
members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor f'mish damage.
Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently
eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 6 _
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09521 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division i Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Back-mounted acoustical wall panels.
B. Installation of unmounted fabric furnished by manufacturer of acoustical wall panels is specified in
Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of acoustical wall panel specified.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of acoustical wall panels including plans, elevations,
sections, details of components, and attachments to other construction.
D. Samples for verification in 12-inch- (300-mm-) square units of each type of acoustical wall panel required
and in each color, texture, and pattern indicated or selected for facing materials. Include representative
samples of installation devices and accessories.
E. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, evidencing that acoustical wall panels comply with
requirements specified for fire-test-response characteristics and sound absorption performance.
F. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of acoustical wall panels certifying that their products
comply with specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to
ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct Satisfactorily the testing indicated
without delaying the Work.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical wall panels with surface-burning characteristics
as indicated below, as determined by testing assembled materials composed of facings and backings
identical to those required in this Section, per ASTM E 84, by a'testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical wall panels with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Acoustical Wall Panels: Obtain each type of acoustical wall panel from
a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying the Work.
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect acoustical wall panels from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver in
unopened bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to
building until wet-work, such as concrete and plaster, has been completed and cured to a condition of
equilibrium.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not begin installation until spaces for acoustical wall panels have been
enclosed and maintained at approximately the same humidity and temperature conditions as planned for
occupancy. Maintain temperature and humidity as recommended by panel manufacturer.
B. Field Measurements: Check actual wall surfaces by accurate field measurements before fabrication and
show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening
dimensions and proceed with fabricating acoustical wall panels without field measurements.
Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed
dimensions.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,
and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or
replace components of acoustical wall panel system that fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period.
C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed,
are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels:
1. Acoustical Wall Panels: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of the amount
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations indicated; attach facing materials to cores to produce installed
panels with visible surfaces fully covered and free from waves in fabric weave, wrinkles, sags, blisters,
seams, adhesive or other foreign matter.
1. Fabricate back-mounted panels in factory to exact sizes required to fit wall surfaces based on field
measurements of completed substrates indicated to receive acoustical wall panels.
B. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Overall height and width of panels: Plus or minus 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm).
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Sound Absorption Performance: Provide acoustical wall panels with minimum noise reduction
coefficients (NRC) indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM C 423 for mounting type specified
under individual product requirements.
2.2 BACK-MOUNTED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
A. Back-Mounted, Edge-Reinforced Acoustical Wall Panels: Manufacturer's standard panel construction
consisting of facing material laminated to front, edges, and back border of molded glass fiberboard core;
with edges chemically hardened to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage; and complying
with the following requirements:
1. Core Density: 6-7 lb/cu, ft. (96-112 kg/cu, m).
2. Thickness and NRC: Nominal overall panel thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) and NRC of not less
than 0.80 for Type A (ABPMA No. 4) mounting.
3. Facing Material: As specified in Section 00861 - DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY.
4. Panel Size: As indicated.
5. Edge Detail: Square.
6. Comer Detail: Square.
B. Back-Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's standard or recommended accessories for securely
mounting panels of type and size indicated to substrates provided, and complying with the following
requirements:
1. Mechanically Mounted Edge-Reinforced Panels: Metal panel clip and base support bracket system
consisting of 2-part panel clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of panel
and the other part to wall substrate, designed to support panels laterally; and base support brackets
designed to support full weight of panels; with both designed to allow panel removal.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Back-Mounted, Edge-Reinforced Acoustical Wall Panels:
a. Standard AcousTech Wall Panel; AVL Systems, Inc.
b. PAS Standard Acoustical Wall Panels; Designer Acoustics.
c. Respond ACT; Conwed.
d. Reflect Panels; Sound Concepts.
e. Varitone; Industrial Acoustics Company.
f. Hardside; Kinetics Noise Control.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical wall panels. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level
and in alignment with other panels, scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.
Comply with panel manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of panels using type of mounting
accessories indicated or, if none indicated, as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Cut units to be at least 50 percent of unit width, with facing material extended over cut edge to
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
match uncut edge. Scribe acoustical wall panels to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tightly.
B. Construction Tolerances: As follows:
1. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
2. Variation of Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
C. Remove and replace panels that are damaged and are unacceptable to Architect.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean panels with fabric facing, upon completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign
materials from the facing, using a dry brush, a vacuum, or both.
B.Clean panels with vinyl facing, upon completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign
materials from the facing, using warm water and a clean sponge; wipe dry.
C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from acoustical wall panel installation, upon
completion of the Work, and leave areas of installation in a neat and clean condition.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that
ensures that acoustical wall panels are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
B. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner acceptable to the Architect, prior to the
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09521
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09660 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.
B. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles are specified
in Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
1. Certification by tile manufacturer that products supplied for tile installation comply with local
regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC' s).
C. Samples for verification purposes in full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile
specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
D. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by
manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements.
E. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in
Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single
source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying progress of the Work.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient floor tile with the following fire performance
characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver tiles and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and
containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and
handling instructions.
B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours
prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period,
maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C).
B. Do not install tiles until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
B. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with
adhesive as determined by tile manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described
below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each class, wearing
surface, color, pattern and size of resilient floor tile installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, resilient floor tiles that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in Section 00861 -
DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY.
2.2 RESILIENT TILE
A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066, Composition 1 (nonasbestos
formulated), and with requirements specified in Section 00861 - DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated.
C.Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit resilient floor tile
products and substrate conditions indicated.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect
exposed edge of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur, with Installer present, to verify that
substrates and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with tile manufacturer's
requirements and those specified in this Section.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 2 _
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials
whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by tile manufacturer.
2. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring.
3.Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive
tile.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes,
and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum
sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.
D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before tile installation. Following
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive.
Apply according to manufacturer's directions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that
are applicable to each type of tile installation included in Project.
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at
opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter
that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and
packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or
deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.
D. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished tile floor,
install tile before these items are installed.
E. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including
cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
F. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
H. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finished floor
areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers.
Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers.
I. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed tile installation.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
J. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile manufacturer's directions
including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
K. Hand roll tiles where required by tile manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing tile installation:
1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by tile
manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop tile to remove black marks and soil.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and
placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods
indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to tile surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface
blemishes.
a. Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to tile
manufacturer.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. Cover tiles with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels over
tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without
moving panels.
C. Clean tiles not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of
Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean tiles using method recommended by manufacturer.
1. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation prior to cleaning.
2. Reapply floor polish after cleaning.
END OF SECTION 09660
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09678 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Resilient wall base.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches long, of
each different color and pattern of product specified.
D. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by
manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product specified from a single
source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying progress of the Work.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire performance characteristics
as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing
names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between
50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).
C. ' Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive products specified in this
Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after
installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C).
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as that of the space where they are to be
installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products specified in this Section.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installing products specified in this Section with other construction to minimize possibility of
damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described
below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
1. Furnish not less than i0 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof of each different
type and color of resilient wall base installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, those specified in each Section 00861 - DESIGN SELECTIONS
SUMMARY.
2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I, and requirements specified in Section
00861 - DESIGN SELECTION SUMMARY.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product and
substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur, with Installer present,
to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's
requirements and those specified in this Section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications for preparing substrates indicated to
receive products indicated.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per manufacturers directions to fill cracks, holes, and
depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum
sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing products specified in this
Section. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive.
Apply according to manufacturer's directions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to manufacturer's
installation directions.
B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms
and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wall
base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and
vertical substrates.
1. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
2.Install inside and exterior corners before installing straight pieces.
3. Form inside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting an
inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of
base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate.
4. Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving back
of base at point where bending will occur. Remove a strip perpendicular to length of base and
only deep enough to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more than half the
thickness of wall base.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation:
1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by
manufacturers of resilient product involved.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and
placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods
indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product involved.
1. Apply protective floor polish to resilient accessories that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and
surface blemishes.
a. Use commercially available metal, cross-linked, acrylic product acceptable to resilient
accessory manufacturer.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
C. Clean products specified in this Section not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products using method
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation, prior to cleaning.
2. Reapply floor polish after cleaning.
END OF SECTION 09678
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. carpet and installation.
2. carpet tile and installation.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 3 Sections for curing compounds and other concrete treatments compatibility with
carpet adhesives.
2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for materials and installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory specified. Submit
manufacturer's printed data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-
response characteristics. Submit methods of installation for each type of substrate.
C. Shop Drawings showing columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and
locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Indicate the following:
1. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
2. Locations where dye lot changes occur.
3. Seam locations, types, and methods.
4. Type of subfloor.
5. Type of installation.
6. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
7. Pile direction.
8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
I0. Transition details to other flooring materials.
D. Samples for verification of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the
full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same
material to be used for the Work. Label each sample with manufacturer's name, material type,
color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and carpet schedule. Submit the following:
1. 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples of each type of carpet material required.
2. 12-inch (300-mm) Samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item.
E. Schedule of carpet using same room designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Maintenance data for carpet to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including manufacturer's recommended frequency for
maintaining carpet.
CARPET 09680- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and
performance. Include cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board (FCIB) or who can demonstrate compliance with FCIB certification program
requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm whose carpet materials comply with the U.S.
Departmem of Housing and Urban Development's (HUD) "Use of Materials Bulletin UM-44D" and
are currently listed on HUD's "Certified Products Directory" and so identified by imprint on back
of carpet.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of carpet from one source and by a single
manufacturer.
D. Carpet Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide carpet with the following fire-test-response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630.
2. Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84.
3. Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and Handling."
B. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with
identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number.
C. Store materials on-site in original undamaged packages, inside well-ventilated area protected from
weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, with continuous blocking
off ground.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6: "Site Conditions."
B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and
weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values
near those indicated for final occupancy.
C. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24 hours
(14.6 kg/1000 sq. m/24 hours) when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with
CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor temperatures not less than 55 deg F (12.7 deg C).
D. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water
and pHydrion paper is applied.
1.7 WARRANTY
A.' General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by carpet manufacturer and Installer
agreeing to repair or replace carpet that does not meet requirements or that fails in materials or
CARPET 09680 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more
than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
C. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full-width units equal to 5 percent
of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. i CARPET
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in Section 00861 - DESIGN
SELECTIONS SUMMARY.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete-Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: As recommended by the following:
I. Carpet manufacturer.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as
recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer
for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at
seams.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine subfloors and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of carpet. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with
requirements specified in this Section and those of the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
3.2 PI~EPARATION
A. General: Comply with carpet manufacturer's installation recommendations to prepare substrates
indicated to receive carpet installation.
B. Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), noncumulative, in all directions. Sand or
grind protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill depressions.
CARPET 09680 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subfloor as
recommended by the following:
a. Carpet manufacturer.
C. Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible
with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone.
D. Broom or vacuum clean subfloors to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning, examine subfloors
for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
E. Concrete-Subfloor Preparation: Apply concrete-slab primer, according to manufacturer's
directions, where recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Direct Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8: "Direct Glue-Down."
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet;
maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in
closed position. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet.
C. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of finished carpet
floor, install carpet before installation of these items.
D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges,
alcoves, and similar openings.
F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation.
I. Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove protruding yarns from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation."
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure carpet is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 09680
CARPET 09680 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09800 - SPECIAL COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes applying special coating systems to items and surfaces scheduled, including surface
preparation, prime coats, and topcoats.
B.Types of special coating systems required for the Project include the following:
1.Special coatings for interior use include the following:
a. Two-component, epoxy emulsion.
C.Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. General painting is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each coating system specified, including block fillers and primers.
1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for
handling, storing, and applying each material proposed for use.
2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application.
Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling
use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied with texture
to simulate actual conditions on representative samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block f'fllers and primers. Use
representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until the required sheen,
color, and texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to
location and application.
3. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect' s review of color and texture only.
a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch-square samples for each color and finish.
b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 8-inch-square samples of masonry, with mortar joint in
the center, for each f'mish and color.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has successfully completed coating
system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat material produced by the same
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
manufacturer as the finish coats for each type of coating. Use only thinners recommended by the
manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other interior and exterior components, duplicate f'mishes of
prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until the required
sheen, color, and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for reviewing in-place work.
1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples.
2. The Architect will select one room, area, or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each
type of coating and substrate to be coated. Apply coatings in this room, area, or surface according
to the schedule, or as specified. After finishes are accepted, this room, area or surface will be
used for evaluation of coating systems of a similar-nature.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, new, unopened packages, and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient
temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures
to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from
handling, mixing, and applying the coatings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.Apply coatings only when the temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are
between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain the temperature and conditions specified before
proceeding with or continuing the coating operation.
2. Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be coated are enclosed
and the temperature within the area can be maintained within limits specified by the manufacturer
during application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Carboline Company (Carboln).
2. Devoe and Raynolds Company (Devoe).
3. The Glidden Company (Glidden).
4. Porter International (Porter).
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 5. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG).
6. Rust-Oleum Corporation (R-O).
7. Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).
-- 8. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec).
2.2 SPECIAL COATING MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat material, and related materials that
are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application
as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide the highest grade of the various coatings as regularly manufactured by
acceptable coating manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a best-grade
_ product will not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or
materials are not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion
of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and
certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to the manufacturer's standard color designations.
2.3 MASONRY-BLOCK FILLERS
_ A. Masonry Block Fillers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated concrete masonry
block fillers that are compatible with the f'mish materials indicated.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, block fillers that may be incorporated in
- the Work include, but are not limited to:
1. Block Fillers under Epoxy Emulsion Coatings:
a. Carboln: Flexxide Masonry Block Filler.
b. Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Int/Ext Acrylic Latex Block Filler.
c. Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler.
d. Porter: 895 Unifill Epoxy Ester.
e. PPG: 16-90 High Performance Acrylic Block Filler.
f. S-W: Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46.
-- g. Tnemec: 130-6601 Envirofill.
2.4 INTERIOR FINISH-COAT MATERIALS
A. Interior Finish-Coat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated, interior,
finish-coat materials.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, interior finish coat materials that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to:
1. Epoxy Emulsion Coatings:
a. Devoe: 129XX Tru-Glaze-WB Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating.
~._ b. Porter: 9310 Dura-Glaze H.D. Waterborne Polyamide Epoxy.
c. PPG: 16-801/16-802 Pitt-Glaze Low Odor High-Solids Acrylic Epoxy.
d. S-W: Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series/B60V15.
e. Tnemec: Series 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat.
-- f. Glidden: 5585 Glid-Guard Water Borne Polyamide Epoxy.
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
g. PPG: 16-901/16-902 Pitt-Glaze Low Odor High Solids Acrylic Epoxy.
h. S-W: Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series B60V25.
i. Tnemec: Series 114 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.Examine substrates and conditions under which coatings will be applied for compliance with requirements
on applying coatings. Surfaces to receive coatings must be thoroughly dry before coatings are applied.
1. Do not proceed with coating application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Start of application will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within that
particular area.
B. Coordinating Work: Review sections in which other coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of the
total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on the characteristics of specified
finish materials to ensure compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the coatings specified over substrates primed
by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already in place that are not to be coated, or provide surface-applied protection prior to
surface preparation and coating. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely coat the items and
adjacent surfaces. Following the coating operations in each space or area, have removed items reinstalled
by workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that
could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning
and coating application so dust and other contaminates from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,
newly coated surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to the manufacturer's
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers, or remove and reprime. Notify the Architect
in writing of problems anticipated when using the specified finish-coat material with substrates
primed by others.
2. Cementitious Surfaces: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and similar
surfaces to receive special coatings. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and
release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used
to improve concrete curing, use mechanical methods to prepare surface.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the coating system manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be coated by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish coats to blister and
bum, correct this condition before application. Do not apply coatings over surfaces where
the moisture content exceeds that permitted in the manufacturer's printed directions.
c. Acid-etch concrete floor surfaces scheduled to receive special coatings with a 5 percent
solution of muriatic acid or other proprietary cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to
remove acid, and neutralize with ammonia and rinse; allow to dry, then vacuum.
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials according to the coating manufacturer's
directions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of coatings according to the manufacturer's
directions.
2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface f'dm into the material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain the
coating material before using.
3.Use only the type of thinners approved by the manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identifying each coat where multiple coats of
the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply special coatings by brash, roller, spray, squeegee, or other applicators according to the
manufacturer's directions. Use brushes best suited for the material being applied. Use rollers of carpet,
velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture
required.
1. Do not apply coatings over dirt, mst, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to forming a durable coating film.
2.Coating colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the Schedules.
3.Provide f'mish coats compatible with the primers used.
4. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method.
Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the
manufacturer. Where sanding is required, according to the manufacturer's directions, sand
between applications to produce a smooth, even surface.
5. When undercoats or other conditions show through the final coat, apply additional coats until the
cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to edges,
comers, crevices, welds, exposed fasteners, and similar surfaces to ensure that they receive a dry
film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
6. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector
covers, covers for fumed tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend
coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired
protection.
a. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces.
b. Coat the back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items
to match exposed surfaces.
c. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted.
B. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for coating as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient drying time between successive coats. Do not recoat until the coating has dried
so it feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where
applying another coat does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brash, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the
manufacturer's directions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3.Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer
for the material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer.
E. Block Fillers: Apply block fdlers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with
pores filled.
F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to the material required to be coated or finished that has not been prime-coated by others.
1. Recoat primed and sealed substrates where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in
the first coat to ensure a finish coat with no bum-through or other defects caused by insufficient
sealing.
G. Brush Application: Brush-out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even t'dm. Eliminate cloudiness,
spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw
glass lines and color breaks.
1. Apply primers and first coats by brush unless the manufacturer's instructions permit using
mechanical applicators.
H. Mechanical Applications: Use mechanical methods to apply coating when permitted by the
manufacturer's recommendations and governing regulations.
1. Wherever using spray application, apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of
brush-applied coats. Do not double-back with spray equipment building-up film thickness of two
coats in one pass, unless recommended by the manufacturer.
I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat
work not complying with specified requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the
Owner deems necessary during coating operations.
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the coating being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified
in the presence of the Contractor.
2.The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by
the Owner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Absorption.
c. Accelerated weathering.
d. Accelerated yellowness.
e. Color retention.
f. Alkali and mildew resistance.
g. Abrasion resistance.
h. Apparent reflectivity.
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
i. Washability.
j. Dry Opacity.
k. Recoating.
1. Skinning.
3. If results show materials being used do not comply with requirements, the Contractor may be
directed to stop work and remove noncomplying materials, pay for testing, recoat surfaces coated
with rejected materials, or remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, upon
recoating with specified materials, the two coatings are not compatible.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials
from the site.
i. After completing work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating operation.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as acceptable to the Architect. Leave
in an undamaged condition.
1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations.
2. At completion of other trades' construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
coated surfaces.
3.7 INTERIOR SPECIAL COATING SCHEDULE
A. Provide the following coating systems for substrates indicated:
1. Where undercoats or other conditions show through £mal coat, apply additional coats until the
cured film is of uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
B. Concrete:
1. Epoxy Emulsion Coatings: Provide one coat block filler or epoxy emulsion, as recommended by
coating manufacturer, and one finish coat epoxy emulsion.
a. Filler Coat: Block filler or epoxy emulsion.
b. Finish Coat: Epoxy emulsion.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Two-Component, Epoxy Emulsion Coating with Gloss Finish: Provide two f'mish coats of gloss,
epoxy emulsion over concrete masonry block filler.
a. Filler Coat: Concrete masonry block filler.
b. First and Second Coats: Gloss, epoxy emulsion.
END OF SECTION 09800
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART ! - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior
items and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a surface or
material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface
is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or
finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available.
1. Painting includes field-painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color
coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment.
C. Painting is not required on prefmished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating
parts, and labels.
1. Prefmished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components:
a. Acoustic materials.
b. Architectural woodwork and casework.
c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
d. Light fixtures.
e. Switchgear.
f. Distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following
generally inaccessible areas:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
c. Pipe spaces.
d. Duct shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Chromium plate.
d. Copper.
e. Bronze.
f. Brass.
4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment, such as the
following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
PAINTING 09900- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
b. Linkages.
c. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other
code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature
plates.
D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop-priming structural steel.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop-priming ferrous metal.
3. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop-priming interior architectural
woodwork.
4. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for shop-priming steel doors and
frames.
5. Division 9 Section "Special Coatings" for special coatings.
6. Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings.
7. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15
and 16, respectively.
! .3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers.
1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for
handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use.
2.List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application.
Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with
texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers.
Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required
sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2.Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample
as to location and application.
3.Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture
only:
a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch-square samples for each color and f'mish.
b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of masonry, with mortar
joint in the center, for each finish and color.
c. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch-square samples of each color and material on
hardboard.
d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of natural and stained
wood finish on actual wood surfaces.
e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch-square samples of flat metal and two
8-inch-long samples of solid metal for each color and f'mish.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a
construction record of successful in-service performance.
PAINTING 09900 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
-- C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior componems, duplicate f'mishes of
prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required
sheen, color, and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place
_ work.
1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples.
2. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each
-- type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in this room or surface according
to the schedule or as specified.
a. After finishes are accepted, this room or surface will be used to evaluate coating
-- systems of a similar nature.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
_ 1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
-- 5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
-- B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient
temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
-- temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prOducts of one of the following:
1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe).
2. Fuller O'Brien (Fuller).
PAINTING 09900 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3. The Glidden Company (Glidden).
4. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore).
5. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG).
6. Pratt and Lambert (P & L).
7. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials
that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various
coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification
will not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's
material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to the manufacturer's standard color designations.
2.3 MASONRY BLOCK FILLER
A. Filler Coat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated, latex-type
concrete masonry block fillers that are compatible with the finish materials indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. High-Performance Latex Block Filler:
a. Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Block
b. Fuller: 280-00 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler.
c. Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler.
d. Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler//173.
e. PPG: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler.
f. P & L: Pro-Hide Plus Block Filler.
g. S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler B42W46.
2. Block Fillers under Two-Component, High-Performance, Polyamide-Epoxy Coatings:
a. Carboln: Sanitile C.B. Base.
b. Devoe: 52901 Bloxffi Int/Ext Acrylic Latex Block Filler.
c. Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler.
d. Porter: 895 Unifill Epoxy Ester.
e. PPG: 16-90 High Performance Acrylic Block Filler.
f. R-O: Surfa-Sele 5199 Block Filler.
g. S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler, B42W46.
h. Tnemec: 130-6601 Enviroffll.
i. Carboln: Sanitile C.B. Base.
j. Devoe: 11502 Wonder-Pruf Int/Ext Waterproof'rog Masonry
Coating.
k. Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler.
I. Porter: 895 Unifill Epoxy Ester.
m. PPG: 97-685/97-686 Aquapon Polyamide-Epoxy Block Filler.
n. R-O: Surfa-Sele 5199 Block Filler.
o. S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler, B42W46.
p. Tnemec: 130-6601 Envirof'fll.
PAINTING 09900 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.4 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primers that are compatible
with the substrate and finish coats indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Concrete and Masonry Primers: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.
a. Devoe: 51701 Wonder-Prime Interior All Purpose Latex Primer
Sealer & Vapor Barrier.
b. Fuller: 202-XX Interior - Exterior Acrylic Latex Wall Paint.
c. Glidden: 5300 Ultra-Hide Flat Wall Paint.
d. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201.
e. PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint.
f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish.
g. S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Flat B30W200.
2. Gypsum Drywall Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer.
a. Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer and Sealer.
b. Fuller: Pro-Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer.
c. Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer.
d. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal//201.
e. PPG: 6-2 Quick-Dry Latex Primer Sealer.
f. P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001.
g. S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.
3. Ferrous Metal Primers: Synthetic, quick-drying, mst-inhibiting primers.
a. Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Cover Up Rust Penetrating Primer.
b. Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer.
c. Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast-Dry Metal Primer.
d. Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
e. PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Me[al Primer.
f. P & L: Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer.
g. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W 1.
4. Galvanized Metal Primers:
a. Devoe: 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer.
b. Fuller: 621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer.
c. Glidden: 5229 Gild-Guard All-Purpose Metal Primer.
d. Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155.
e. PPG: 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer.
f. P & L: P & L Interior Trim Primer.
g. S-W: Galvite B50W3.
2.5 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS
A. Undercoat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated undercoat
materials that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel.
a. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
b. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
c. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel.
d. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
PAINTING 09900 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
e. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater.
f. P & L: Interior Trim Primer.
g. S-W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel B34W200.
2.6 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL
A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat materials that
are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying, flat, acrylic paint.
a. Devoe: 15XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House
Paint.
b. Fuller: 262-XX 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat Finish.
c. Glidden: 3525 Spred Glide-On.
d. Moore: Moore's Flat Exterior Latex Masonry & House Paint
/7105.
e. PPG: 72 Line Sun-Proof Acrylic Latex House Paint.
f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat House Paint.
g. S-W: A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A-6 Series.
2. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather-resistant, ak-drying, high-gloss enamel.
a. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd-Urethane Gloss
Enamel.
b. Fuller: 312-XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel.
c. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel.
d. Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133.
e. PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel.
f. P & L: Effecto Enamel.
g. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
2.7 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL
A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat materials that
are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Interior, Flat, Latex-Based Paint: Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for a flat f'mish.
a. Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint.
b. Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall Paint.
c. Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint.
d. Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215.
e. PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint.
f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish.
g. S-W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10.
2. Interior, Semigloss, Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Semigloss, low-odor, alkyd enamel.
a. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
b. Fuller: 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
c. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel.
d. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
e. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
f. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
g. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series.
PAINTING 09900 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3. High-Performance, Polyamide-Epoxy Coating: High gloss.
a. Carboln: Carboline 890 Epoxy.
b. Devoe: 124XX Tru-Glaze 4 Epoxy Gloss.
c. Glidden: 5240 Chemical-Resistant Epoxy.
d. Moore: Ironclad Chemical and Water Resistant Epoxy Enamel
182.
e. Porter: 43 l0 M.C.R.-43 Gloss Epoxy.
f. PPG: 97-1 Series Aquapon Polyamide-Epoxy.
g. R-O: 9300 Series Epoxy.
h. S-W: Tile-Clad II Epoxy Enamel B62 Series/B60V70.
i. Tnemec: Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD-FINISHING MATERIALS
A. Wood-Finishing Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated,
wood-finishing materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, wood-finishing materials that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain: Slow-penetrating, oil-type wood stain.
a. Devoe: 96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain.
b. Fuller: 640-XX Pen-Chrome Interior Oil Base Wood Stain.
c. Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain.
d. Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain.
e. PPG: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base.
f. P & L: S-Series Tonetic Wood Stain.
g. S-W: Oil Stain A-48 Series.
2. Cut Shellac: Quick-drying, rosin-free, clear, general-purpose shellac varnish.
a. Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick-Dry Sealer.
b. Fuller: No recommendation.
c. Glidden: 5035 Ultra-Hide Sanding Sealer.
d. Moore: 413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding
Sealer.
e. PPG: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer.
f. P & L: No recommendation.
g. S-W: ProMar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3.
3. Paste Wood Filler: Solvent-based, air-drying, paste-type wood filler.
a. Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler.
b. Fuller: 680-00 Pen Chrome Paste Wood Filler.
c. Glidden: Glidden Paste Wood Filler.
d. Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238.
e. PPG: (none required)
f. P & L: No recommendation.
g. S-W: Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler.
4. Oil Rubbing Varnish: Clear, oil-type, rubbing varnish for use on interior stained or
natural-finished woodwork:
a. Devoe: 4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Satin Varnish.
b. Fuller: 653-01 EPA Compliant Clear Polyurethane Satin Finish.
c. Glidden: 82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish.
d. Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish//404.
e. PPG: 77-7 Rez Satin Varnish.
f. P & L: Clear Finish Gloss.
PAINTING 09900 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
g. S-W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91. --
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint
application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied, m
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator' s acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area. --
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility
of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish
materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates
primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, --
and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection
prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the
items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operatigus in each space or area, have
items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. --
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that
could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule
cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,
newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect
in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with substrates
primed by others.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk,
dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If
hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface
preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces axe sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where
moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 perce.nt solution of muriatic acid or
other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize
with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac
or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill
holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.
PAINTING 09900 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet
wall construction occurs on backside.
e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures
Painting Council (SSPC).
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and
according to requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and
touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so that
the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's
directions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of un/form density; stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary,
strain material before using.
3.Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple
coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best
suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as
recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required
to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions.
4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through fmal coat of
paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure that surfaces, including edges, coruers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners,
receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in f'Lxtures,
convector covers, covers for fumed tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and
PAINTING 09900 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
provide desired protection.
6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fLxed equipment
or furniture with prime coat only.
7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat,
nonspecular black paint.
8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match
exterior.
10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces.
1 i. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted.
C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until
paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift
or lose adhesion.
D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to the manufacturer's directions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orific~ size as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer.
F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed
in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
G. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2. Heat exchangers.
Tanks.
4. Ductwork.
5. Insulation.
6. Supports.
7. Motors and mechanical equipment.
8. Accessory items.
H. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Conduit and fittings.
2. Switchgear.
I. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage
with pores filled.
J. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-coated
by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in
first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient
PAINTING 09900- 10
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
sealing.
K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence
of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.
L. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform
finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs,
sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with specified requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the
Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint
material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified,
sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.
2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required
by the Owner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Abrasion resistance.
c. Apparent reflectivity.
d. Flexibility.
e. Washability.
f. Absorption.
g. Accelerated weathering.
h. Dry opacity.
i. Accelerated yellowness.
j. Recoating.
k. Skinning.
1. Color retention.
m. Alkali and mildew resistance.
3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the
Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing,
repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously
painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from the site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint
by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repamting, as acceptable to Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
PAINTING 09900-I1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated.
B. Concrete:
1. Lusterless (Flat) Acrylic Finish: Two coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5
mils.
a. First and Second Coats: Exterior acrylic emulsion.
C. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items.
1. Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibiting primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel.
D. Zinc-Coated Metal:
1. High-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel.
3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following palm systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
B. Concrete and Masonry (other than concrete masonry units):
1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils.
a. Primer: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.
c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.
2. High-Performance, Polyamide-Epoxy Coating: Provide two coats with total dry film
thickness not less than 4 mils.
a. First and Second Coats: High-performance, polyamide-epoxy coating.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Semigloss, Alkyd, Enamel Finish: Two coats over filled surface with total dry film
thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat.
a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler.
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.
c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.
2. High-Performance, Polyamide-Epoxy Coating System: Provide two finish coats with total
dry film thickness not less than 4 mils over concrete masonry block filler.
a. Filler Coat: Concrete masonry block filler.
b. First and Second Coats: High-performance, polyamide-epoxy coating.
D. Gypsum Drywall Systems:
1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two coats.
PAINTING 09900- 12
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer.
b. Finish Coat: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.
E. Woodwork and Hardboard:
1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats.
a. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.
b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.
F. Stained Woodwork:
1. Stained-Varnish Rubbed Finish: Three £mish coats over stain plus filler on open-grain wood.
Wipe filler before applying first varnish coat.
a. Stain Coat: Oil-type interior wood stain.
b. First Coat: Cut shellac.
c. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler.
d. Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish.
G. Ferrous Metal:
1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than
2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer.
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.
c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.
H. Zinc-Coated Metal:
1. Semigloss Finish: Two coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5
mils.
a. Primer: Glavanized metal primer.
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.
c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.
END OF SECTION 09900
_ PAINTING 09900- 13
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09921 - MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Surface preparation.
2. Applying multicolored coatings to interior surfaces scheduled.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. High-performance architectural coatings (HIPAC) are specified in Division 9 Section "Special
Coatings."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of primer and coating specified.
1. Include technical information, basic materials analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and
application.
2. List each coating material and cross-reference the specific coating application. Identify each
material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
3. Certification by the elastomeric coating system manufacturer that the products supplied comply
with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
C. Samples for verification purposes of each color to be applied with texture to simulate actual conditions
on representative samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped samples, defining block fillers, primers and finish coats. Use representative
colors when preparing samples for review for verification purposes.
2. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.
3. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture:
a. Gypsum Board: Two 8-inch-square samples of each color on gypsum board.
4. Resubmit samples as requested until the required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
D. Maintenance data for multicolored interior coating to include in "Operating and Maintenance Manual"
specified in Division 1.
1. Methods for maintaining coating.
2. Precautions for using cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to the finish and
performance.
E. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of multicolored
coatings with the requirements indicated based on comprehensive testing within the last 3 years of the
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
current product formulations.
F. Material certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by the Architect, signed by the
manufacturer certifying that multicolored coatings comply with the requirements specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed multicolored coating
system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for the Project that have resulted in
a construction record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat material produced by the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using coating systems specified.
C. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide coatings with the following surface-burning characteristics
as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other testing and inspecting
agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify coatings with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
D. Field Samples: The Architect will select one room or wall surface for each substrate to represent
surfaces and conditions. Apply multicolored coatings to each surface according to the schedule, or as
specified. Provide full-coat samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of wall surface until the required color and
texture are obtained. Simulate finished lighting conditions to review the field samples.
1. After finishes are accepted, these surfaces will be used to evaluate the coating system. Final
acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Deliver multicolored coating materials to the Project site in the manufacturer's new, original, unopened
packages or containers bearing the manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Manufacturer's name, stock number, and date of manufacture.
3. Contents by volume.
4. Thinning instructions, if permitted.
5. Application instructions.
6. Color name and number.
7. Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly closed, covered containers at a minimum ambient temperature
of 45 deg F (7 deg C) in a well-ventilated area. Keep containers used in storage in a clean condition, free
of foreign materials and residue.
' 1. Protect coating materials from freezing. Keep the storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily
rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are
protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Establish and maintain environmental conditions in spaces to receive
_ multicolored coatings that comply with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide adequate natural
or induced ventilation, as necessary, for curing and as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Temperature Conditions: Apply multicolored coatings only when the temperature of the surface to be
coated, the ambient temperature, and the temperature of the materials to be used are above 50 deg F (10
deg C).
-- C. Weather Conditions: Do not apply coatings when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Extra Materials: Furnished from same production run as materials applied. Package materials with a
protective covering and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Multi-Color Interior Coating: Furnish quantity equal to 5 percent of amount applied.
-- PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide multicolored coatings manufactured
by one of the following:
-- 1. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado).
2. Multicolor Specialties, Inc. (Multispec).
3. Polomyx Industries. (Polomyx).
-- 4. Seagrave Coatings Corp. (Plextone).
5. Vitracon Corp. (Vitricon).
6. Zolatone Process, Inc. (Zolatone).
2.2 MULTICOLORED COATING MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block ~lers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that
- are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application,
as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
. B. Material Quality: Provide the best-quality grade of multicolored coatings. Materials not displaying
manufacturer's identification as a best-grade product will not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Using manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or
materials is not intended to imply that products of named manufacturers are required to be used
to the exclusion of equivalem products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's
material data and certificate of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. Colors: Match colors indicated by referring to manufacturer's standard color designations for
multicolored coating systems as noted in Section 00861 - DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY.
2.3 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated, latex-type primers that are
-- compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated.
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Gypsum Drywall Primers:
a. Coronado: Toll-O-Fect Primer/Sealer 120/11.
b. Multispec: Multispec 100 Primer.
c. Polomyx: Polomyx No. 202 Basecoat.
d. Plextone: Seagrave Duramel-X Primer.
e. Vitricon: Vitricolor Primer.
f. Zolatone: Zo-Cryl Sealer 92.
2.4 MULTICOLORED COATING MATERIALS
A.Multicolored Coatings: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated, multicolored
coating materials that are compatible with the substrate and prime coat materials indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Multicolored Coatings:
a. Coronado: Toll-O-Fect Multicolor Wallcoating.
b. Multispec: Multispec 86 Multicolor Paint.
c. Polomyx: Polomyx Multi-color Finish.
d. Plextone: Plextone MultiColor System.
e. Vitricon: Vitricolor.
f. Zolatone: Zolatone System 43.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to receive multicolored coatings and conditions under which the coatings will be
applied to conform to the manufacturer's application requirements. Do not begin coating application until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Start of coating application will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If such items cannot be removed,
provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and coating. After coating operations have
been completed in each space or area, reinstall the items removedusing worlcers sl(illed in the trades
involved.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to the manufacturer's
instructions for each particular substrate condition, and as specified.
1. Cleaning: Clean surfaces to receive multicolored coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to
cleaning. Schedule cleaning so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning operations do
not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove the primer and reprime. Notify the
Architect in writing about anticipated problems if the multicolored coating system is applied over
substrates primed by others.
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply multicolored coatings according to the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques
best suited for the substrates and material being applied.
B. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or other conditions
detrimental to the formation of a coating.
C. Prime Coats: Before applying multicolored coatings, apply a prime coat as recommended by the
manufacturer to substrates required to be coated that have not received a prime coat by others. Reprime
surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas appear.
D. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded coating
materials from the site.
B. Remove multicolored coatings from adjacent surfaces not intended to be coated.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be coated or not, against damage caused by multicolored
coatings.
B. Provide temporary closure to confine spraying operation and to prevent polluting surrounding
environment.
C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated surfaces. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations.
3.6 MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATING SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following interior multicolored coating systems for substrates indicated.
B. Gypsum Drywall: One-coat, flat, multicolored coating system over a primer.
1. Prime Coat: Latex primer sealer.
2. First Coat: Two-step, flat, multicolored coating.
END OF SECTION 09921
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division ! Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl wall covering.
2. Acoustical wall covering.
B. Prime coats for substrates are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade
resistance, and flame resistance characteristics.
C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of each wall covering type. Indicate termination points.
D. Samples for verification purposes of each type, color, texture, and pattern of wall covering and molding
accessory required, prepared on samples of size indicated below:
1. Full-width sample, not less than 36 inches long, of each wall covering specified. Show complete
pattern repeat.
2. 12-inch long sample of each molding accessory.
E. Product certificates signed by wall covering manufacturer certifying materials furnished comply with
specified requirements.
F. Certified test reports showing compliance with requirements for fire performance characteristics and
physical properties.
G. Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1. Include
the following:
1. Methods for maintaining wall covering.
2. Precautions for use of cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and
performance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other testing and
, inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify wall coverings with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a constant temperature not less than 60 deg F (16 deg C) in installation areas for at least 10 days
before and 10 days after installation.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials from same production runs as wall covering installed. Package materials with
protective covering and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Rolls: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL COVERING MATERIALS
A.Refer to Section 00861 - DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY for manufacturer, style, color, pattern,
size, and related requirements for wall covering materials.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, wall coverings that may be incorporated
in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in Section 00861 - DESIGN
SELECTIONS SUMMARY.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. General: Manufacturer's standard for use with specific wall covering and substrate application.
B. Characteristics: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, and strippable.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Molding: Comply with ASTM B 221, aluminum alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions, finish
AA-M31A31, with one-piece cap and wall flange tapering to feather edge.
B. Wall Liner: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven, synthetic underlayment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less
than 24 hours before installation.
B. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for surface preparation.
1. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, and defects.
2. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.
3. Metals: If not factory-primed, clean and apply rust inhibitive zinc primer.
4. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units
when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
5. Prime new gypsum board with a recommended primer.
C. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semi-gloss, and eggshell finishes with f'me
sandpaper.
D. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall covering manufacturer. Form smooth
wrinkle-free surface for f'mished installation. Do not begin wall covering installation until wall liner has
dried.
WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.
B. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps.
C. Match pattern 6 feet above finish floor.
D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners.
No horizontal seams.
E. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
F. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams.
G. Install metal moldings in longest practical lengths. Adhere to substrate. Butt end joints and miter
corners.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
B. Use cleaning methods recommended by the wall covering manufacturer.
C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
3.4 WALL COVERING SCHEDULE
A. Wall covering materials are scheduled in Section 00861 - DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY.
END OF SECTION 09950
WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 10001 - SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
m Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
-- 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for
performance of the Work, including;
1. Deal Trays.
2. Package Depositories.
-- 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. In accordance with Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Manufacturer's Data:
I. Submit manufacturer's data, color charts, detail drawings and installation instructions for
-- each type of specialty item, indicating anchorage and anchorage devices, and special
reinforcing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Available Manufacturers: Manufacturers listed within this Section are design selections and
- minimum required standards. Other manufacturers and products may be submitted per Section
01631 - Product Substitutions.
2.2 DEAL TRAY
A. Provide Stainless Steel deal tray as manufactured by Creative Industries, Inc.
__ B. Model 1210 - S.
2.3 PACKAGE DEPOSITORY
-- A. Provide package depository as manufactured by Mosler Inc.
B. Model 1112.
- PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and the conditions under which specialties are to be installed. Notify the
Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do
not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been completed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install specialty items and accessories at locations shown and in accordance with the manufacturer's
.- instructions.
SPECIALTIES 10001 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Provide cups, grounds, backing materials, brackets, anchors, trim and accessories for complete
installation.
C. Touch-up paint finish after completion of installation using field-applied paint to match shop applied
paint. Replace items that cannot be satisfactorily touched up as directed by the Architect.
D. Provide adequate protection of specialty items until f'mal completion.
END OF SECTION 10001
SPECIALTIES 10001 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 10100 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified
or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of visual display boards:
I. Porcelain enamel markerboards (for liquid chalk).
2. Hinged conference (lecture) units.
3. Natural cork tackboards.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's data substantiating that tackboard materials comply with
requirements indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for each type of markerboard and tackboard required. Include
sections of typical trim members and dimensioned elevations. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement,
accessories, layout, and installation details.
D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each product for verification of compliance with requirements
indicated.
I. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected, and compliance with requirements
indicated.
a. Markerboards and Tackboards: Sample panels not less than 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches for
each type of markerboard and tackboard indicated. Include a sample panel for each color,
texture, and pattern required.
b. Aluminum Trim and Accessories: Samples of each fmish type and color, on 6-inch-long
sections of extrusions and not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate. Where finishes
involve normal color and texture variations, include sets showing the full range of variations
expected.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide tackboards with surface burning characteristics indicated below,
as determined by testing assembled materials composed of facings and backings identical to those required
in this section, in accordance with ASTM E 84, by a testing organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 10 or less.
B. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of visual display
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
boards. Other visual display boards having equal performance characteristics with minor deviations from
indicated dimensions and profiles may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept
or intended performance. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to
ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
1. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay
the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products may
be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Porcelain Enamel Marker Boards:
a. Alliancewall Corp.
b. Best-Rite Chalkboard Co.
c. Carolina Chalkboard Co.
d. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
e. Greensteel, Inc.
f. Weber Costello Co.
2. Tackboards:
a. Best-Rite Chalkboard Co.
b. Carolina Chalkboard Co.
c. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
d. Greensteel, Inc.
e. Weber Costello Co.
3. Wall-Mounted Conference Units:
a. Best-Rite Chalkboard Co.
b. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
c. Greensteel, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Natural Cork Tackboards: Provide single-layer, 1/4-inch-thick, seamless, compressed frae-grain bulletin
board quality natural cork sheet, face sanded for natural finish, complying with MS MIL-C-15116, Type
II.
1. Backing: Make panels rigid by factory laminating cork face sheet under pressure to 1/4-inch-thick
hardboard backing.
2.3 CONFERENCE UNITS
A. Hinged Conference Units: Provide the manufacturer's standard wall-mounted, two-door conference unit,
fabricated to size indicated, consisting of two-door cabinet with perimeter frame, sides, and back, with
interior writing surface and tackboard panels. Provide unit completely assembled with concealed hangers.
Comply with the following requirements for design and construction:
1. Cabinet: Provide the manufacturer's standard red oak cabinet, with frame constructed of solid wood
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
with integral chalktray. Construct hinged door panels with solid frame and finished red oak veneer
exterior surface, hung on full-length piano hinges.
_ 2. Writing Surface: Provide manufacturer's standard porcelain enamel markerboard for liquid chalk
markers, mounted on the inside back panel of the unit.
3. Bulletin Boards: Provide manufacturer's standard natural cork tackboard insert with map rail and
__ spring clips attached to the inside surface of each door panel.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
-- A. Metal Trim and Accessories: Fabricate frames and trim of not less than 0.062-inch-thick aluminum alloy,
size and shape as indicated, to suit type of installation. Provide straight, single-length units wherever
possible; keep joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure.
m 1. Where the size of boards or other conditions exist that require support in addition to the normal
trim, provide structural supports or modify the trim as indicated or as selected by the Architect from
the manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit the condition indicated.
._ 2. Field-Applied Trim: Provide the manufacturer's standard snap-on trim, with no visible screws or
exposed joints.
3. Chalktray: Furnish the manufacturer's standard continuous, solid extrusion-type aluminum
chalktray with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends, for each markerboard.
.- 4. Map Rail: Furnish map rail at the top of each unit, complete with the following accessories:
a. Display Rail: Provide continuous cork display rail approximately 1 or 2 inches wide, as
indicated, integral with the map rail.
'~ b. End Stops: Provide one end stop at each end of the map rail.
c. Map Hooks: Provide 2 map hooks for each 4 feet of map rail or fraction thereof.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Laminate facing sheet and backing sheet to core material under pressure
with manufacturer's recommended flexible, waterproof adhesive.
B. Assembly: Provide factory-assembled chalkboard and tackboard units, except where field-assembled units
are required.
-- 1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with the
minimum number of joints, balanced around the center of the board, as acceptable to the Architect.
2. Provide the manufacturer's standard vertical joint system between abutting sections of chalkboard.
3. Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between chalkboard and tackboard.
2.6 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application
and designations of finishes.
._ B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for
designating aluminum f'mishes.
C. Class II Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular;
- Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class II Architectural, clear film thicker than
0.4 mil).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
_ A. Deliver factory-built markerboard and tackboard units completely assembled in one piece without joints,
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
wherever possible. Where dimensiom exceed panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal length as
acceptable to the Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components
at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. Use splines at joints to maintain
surface alignment.
B. Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials,
adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for a complete installation.
C. Coordinate job-site assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts with a neat, precision
fit.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed and that operating units function
properly.
B. Clean units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Break in chalkbeards only as recommended
by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 10100
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes stock, manufactured toilet compartments.
B. Types of toilet compartments include:
1. Metal, baked enamel fmish.
C. Styles of toilet compartments include:
1. Floor-anchored, overhead-braced.
D. Supports for attaching compartments to overhead structural system are specified in a Division 5 Section.
E. Toilet accessories, such as toilet paper holders, grab bars, and purse shelves, are specified in another
Division 10 Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for materials, fabrication, and installation including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware,
fastenings, and accessories.
C. Shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet compartment assemblies not fully described by
product drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other work.
D. Samples of full range of colors for each type of unit required. Submit 6-inch-square samples of each
color and finish on same substrate to be used in work, for color verification after selections have been
made.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication,
where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments where taking of field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet
compartments and related items. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel - Baked Enamel Finish:
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
a. Accurate Partition Corp.
b. All American Metal Corp.
c. American Sanitary Partition Corp.
d. Ampco Products, Inc.
e. Flush-Metal Partition Corp.
f. General Partitions Manufacturing Corp.
g. Global Steel Products Corp.
h. Knickerbocker Partition Corp.
i. Lambaton-Universal Metal Products.
j. Metpar Steel Products Corp.
k. The Mills Company.
1. Monarch Toilet Partitions, Inc.
m. Sanymetal Products Co.
n. Weis/Robart Partitions, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed
surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core
material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
B. Steel Sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM A 591, Class C, galvanized-bonderized, of following
minimum thicknesses:
1. Pilasters (overhead-braced): 0.0396 inch (20 gage).
2. Panels and Screens: 0.0396 inch (20 gage).
3. Doors: 0.0336 inch (22 gage).
C. Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 0.108 inch (12 gage), galvanized steel sheet.
D. Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 0.0785 inch (14 gage), galvanized steel sheet.
E. Core Material for Metal Partitions: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of impregnated
Kraft paper in thickness to provide finished dimension of 1 inch minimum for doors, panels, and screens
and 1-1/4 inches minimum for pilasters.
1. For wall-supported "V" shaped units, use manufacturer's standard sound-deadening core material
bonded to inner face of panel sheets.
F. Pilaster Shoes and Caps: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, not less than 3 inches high, 0.0396
inch thick (20 gage), finished to match hardware.
G. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels to walls and pilasters, either
chromium-plated nonferrous cast alloy CZamac") or anodized aluminum.
H. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy duty operating hardware and
accessories of chromium-plated, nonferrous cast alloy CZamacD.
I. Overhead Bracing: Continuous extruded aluminum, antigrip profile, with clear anodized finish.
J. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chromium-plated
steel, or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads and nuts. For concealed
anchors, use hot-dip galvanized, cadmium-plated, or other rust-resistant protective-coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system.
Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition-mounted
hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for ordinary toilet
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
stalls and 32-inch-wide (clear opening) out-swinging doors for stalls equipped for use by handicapped.
C. Metal Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core material and
seal edges with continuous interlocking strip or with lapped and formed edges. Weld edges and corners
with exposed welds ground smooth.
D. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel supports and leveling bolts at pilasters as
recommended by manufacturer to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing
continuous, extruded, aluminum, antigrip, overhead bracing at top of each pilaster. Provide shoe at each
pilaster to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
E. Floor-and-Ceiling Anchored Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel anchorage devices complete with
floor and ceiling closures.
F. Wall-Supported Compartments: Fabricate divider panels of two steel sheets with internal reinforcing to
form unit which is "V" shaped in plan, approximately 6 inches wide at wall and tapered to approximately
1 inch at pilaster. Furnish complete with anchorages and supporting framework for installation in other
work. Provide anchorage system with mechanical adjustment for leveling panels.
G. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with ANSI A117.1 for handicapped
accessibility and as follows:
1. Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide
gravity type, spring-action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type to suit manufacturer's
standards.
2. Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit, designed for emergency access, with combination
rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to
prevent door hitting mounted accessories.
4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit for out-swinging doors. Provide pulls on both faces of
handicapped compartment doors.
2.4 FINISH
A. Color: One of manufacturer's standard colors in each room, as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install
compartment units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch
between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls
with not less than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so
that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure panels to pilasters with not less
than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with
manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
B. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten installation with
devices furnished. Secure overhead brace to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors
and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging
doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on
out-swinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer,
and provide pr.otection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
END OF SECTION 10155
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.This Section includes the following:
1. Fixed metal wall louvers.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints between louver
frames and adjoining construction.
2. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow metal doors
and frames.
3. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in wood doors.
4. Division 15 Section "Metal Ductwork" for ductwork connected to metal wall louvers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Refer to Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) 501 for definitions
of terms for metal louvers not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install exterior metal wall louvers to withstand
the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing
permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal
fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf per sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting
inwards or outwards.
2. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from the following maximum change
(range) in ambient temperature. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures
of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
a. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F (56 deg C).
B. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, and Air-Leakage Ratings: Provide louvers complying with
performance requirements indicated as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units of height
and width indicated. Test units according to AMCA 500.
1. Perform testing on unpainted, cleaned, degreased units.
2. Perform water-penetration testing on louvers without screens.
3. Equivalent Ak-Performance Ratings: Louvers having less free area than that specified or
having a lower free area velocity at the static pressure loss specified may be considered for
the Work provided their total air performance is equivalent to that specified. The burden
of proof of equivalency is on the Contractor. For louvers to be considered equivalent, the
product of their free area, for the size specified, and their free area velocity at the static
pressure loss specified must be at least equal to the product of the specified free area and
velocity. Also, their free area velocity at the static pressure loss specified must not result
in water penetration of more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. (3.1 g/sq. m) of free area, and they
must meet all other requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Shop drawings of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details
showing profiles, angles, and spacing of louver blades; unit dimensions related to wall openings and
construction; free areas for each size indicated; profiles of frames at jambs, heads, and sills; and
anchorage details and locations.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural
analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible
for their preparation.
D. Samples for verification of each type of metal finish required, prepared on samples of same
thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and
texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
E. Product test reports evidencing compliance of units with performance requirements indicated.
F. Product certificates signed by louver manufacturers certifying that their products comply with the
specified requirements and are licensed to bear the AMCA seal based on tests made according to
AMCA 500 and complying with the AMCA Certified Ratings Program.
G. Qualification data for fa'ms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain louvers and vents from one source and by a single
manufacturer where alike in one or more respects regarding type, design, and factory-applied color
finish.
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of D1.2 "Structural Welding
Code--Aluminum," and D 1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
C. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction
where the Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated
that have resulted in the installation of louvers similar to this Project in material, design, and extent
and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
D. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual louver openings by accurate field measurements before
fabrication, and show recorded measurements on f'mal shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening
dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field measurements. Coordinate
construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
PART PART 2 - - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A., Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Louvers:
a. Airline Products Co.
b. Airolite Co.
c. Airstream Products Div., Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.
d. All-Lite Louver Co.
e. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
f. Arrow United Industries.
g. Construction Specialties, Inc.
h. Greenheck Fan Corp.
i. Industrial Louvers, Inc.
j. Reliable Metal Products, Div. of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
k. Ruskin Mfg., Tomkins Industries, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with joined materials.
1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for type of loading and installation
indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations
and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for
drilled-in-place anchors.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 except containing
no asbestos fibers.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Fabricate louvers and vents to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
materials, joinery, and performance.
B. Assemble louvers in shop to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary
for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and
sill, to produce uniform appearance.
D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made
for fabrication and installation tolerances of louvers, adjoining construction, and perimeter sealant
joints.
E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated but not more than recommended by
manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less. At horizontal joints between louver
units, provide horizontal mullions except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated.
G. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers where indicated or required
for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior.
H. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades as follows, unless otherwise indicated
or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary:
1. With fillet welds, concealed from view.
2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM WALL LOUVERS
A. Horizontal, Drainable, Fixed-Blade Louvers: Extruded-aluminum frames and louver blades,
designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of blades
and channels in jambs and mullions, complying with the following requirements:
1. Louver Depth: 4 inches (100 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Frame Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.06 nun), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Blade Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.06 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
4. Blade Angle: 45 degrees, unless otherwise indicated.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
5. Performance Requirements: As follows, determined by testing units 48 inches (1220 mm)
wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high per AMCA 500:
a. Free Area: Not less than 7.50 sq. ft. (0.697 sq. m).
b. Static Pressure Loss: Not more than 0.14 inch wg (35 Pa) at an airflow of 900
fpm (4.57 m/s) free area intake velocity.
c. Water Penetration: Not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. (3.1 g/sq. m) of free area
at an airflow of 900 fpm (4.57 m/s) free area velocity when tested for 15 minutes.
6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.5 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide each exterior louver with louver screens complying with the following
requirements:
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Screening Type: Insect screening where indicated.
B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced 6 inches (150 mm)
maximum from each comer and at 12 inches (300 nun) o.c. between.
C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate screen frames with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated and
to comply with the following requirements:
1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver frames to which screens are
attached.
a. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at coruers with clips.
2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.
3. Type: Rewireable frames with a driven spline or insert for securing screen mesh.
D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: Fit aluminum louver screen frames with screening
covering louver openings and complying with the following requirements:
1. Insect Screening: 18-by-16 (1.4-by-l.6-mm) mesh formed with 0.012-inch- (0.30-mm-)
diameter aluminum wire.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Finish louvers after assembly.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association
for designating aluminum finishes.
B. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42Rlx (Chemical Finish: cleaned with
inhibited chemicals). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured
system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with
AAMA 605.2.
a. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's color and gloss designations.
PART PART 3 - - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of
such items to Project site.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where
required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding operations required for fitting
and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items that cannot
be refinished in the field to the shop, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit, or provide
new units.
F. Protect galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying
a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or
dissimilar metals.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses,
where required to make louver joints weathertight. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"
for sealants applied during installation of louver.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect louvers and vents from damage of any kind during construction period including use of
temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove
protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction period, so that no evidence
remains of correction work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as judged by Architect,
remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color
and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied f'mish coating.
C. Test operation of adjustable wall louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that
comply with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary
covering to remove £mgerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until
final cleaning.
B. Before f'mal inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful
to finishes. Rinse surfaces thoroughly and dry.
-- END OF SECTION 10200
-- LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 10270 - ACCESS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Gravity-held panels on bolted stringer understructure.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete floor sealer.
2. Division 9 Section "Carpet" for carpet tiles applied over access flooring panels.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Performance Requirements, General: Provide access flooring systems that comply with the
following requirements:
1. Access flooring systems are proprietary portable systems composed of modular floor panels
on elevated supports (understrucmres) forming accessible underfloor cavities (air spaces)
to accommodate electrical and mechanical services.
2. Access flooring systems comply with performance requirements specified as determined
by testing manufacturers' current standard products representing those indicated for this
Project.
B. Structural Performance per CISCA A/F: Provide access flooring systems capable of supporting the
following loads, within limits and under conditions indicated, as demonstrated by testing according
to the referenced procedures in Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association's (CISCA)
"Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors." This publication and its procedures are
referenced elsewhere in this Section as CISCA A/F.
1. Concentrated-Load Performance: Capability of floor panels, including those with cutouts,
to support concentrated design loads of the following magnitude, with a top-surface
deflection under load and a permanent set not to exceed, respectively, 0.08 and 0.010 inch
(2.54 and 0.25 mm), according to CISCA A/F Section I.
a. 1000 lbf (4448 N).
2. Ultimate-Load Performance: Capability of access flooring systems to support a minimum
ultimate concentrated load equal to the value obtained by multiplying the specified
concentrated floor panel design load by the factor indicated below, without failing,
according to CISCA A/F Section II. Failure is defined as the point at which the access
flooring system will not take any additional load.
a. Factor: 2.
3. Rolling-Load Performance: Capability of access flooring system to withstand rolling loads
of the following magnitude applied to panels, with a combination of local and overall
deformation not to exceed 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) after exposure to rolling load over
CISCA A/F path A or B, whichever path produces the greatest top-surface deformation,
according to CISCA A/F Section III.
ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - i
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
a. CISCA A/F Wheel 1 rolling load indicated below:
1) 800 lbf (3559 N).
4. Stringer Concentrated-Load Performance: Capability of stringers, without panels in place,
to support a concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) at center of span with a permanent set
not to exceed 0.010 inch (0.25 mm), as determined per CISCA A/F Section IV.
5. Pedestal Axial-Load Performance: Capability of pedestal assemblies, without panels or
other supports in place, to withstand the following axial load per pedestal, according to
CISCA A/F Section V.
a. 5000 lbf (22.24 kN).
6. Pedestal Overturning-Moment Performance: Capability of pedestal assemblies, without
panels or other supports in place, to withstand the following overturning moment per
pedestal, according to CISCA A/F Section VI.
a. 1000 Ibf x inches (113 N x m).
C. Floor Panel Impact-Load Performance: Capability of access flooring system to withstand the
following impact load when dropped from 36 inches (900 mm) onto a 1-sq. in. (6.5-sq. cm) area
located anywhere on panel, without failing. Failure is defmed as the point at which the access
flooring system will not take any additional load.
1. 100 lbf (445 N).
D. Seismic Performance: Capability of access flooring to withstand lateral forces (Fp) in the seismic
zone applicable to this Project, according to requirements of the building code in effect for this
Project's building type.
E. Static-Dissipative Floor Covering Resistance: Not less than 150,000 ohms, nor more than 20,000
megohms, as determined by testing identical products according to the method for conductive
flooring specified in Chapter 12 of NFPA 99 but modified to place 1 electrode on floor surface and
to attach the other electrode to understructure.
F. Static-Conductive Floor Covering Resistance: Not less than 25,000 ohms, nor more than 1
megohm, as determined by testing identical products according to the method for conductive
flooring specified in Chapter 12 of NFPA 99 but modified to place 1 electrode on floor surface and
to attach the other electrode to understructure.
G. Panel to Understrucmre Resistance: Not more than l0 ohms.
! .4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of access flooring specified.
C. Shop Drawings showing complete layout of access flooring based on field-verified dimensions;
include dimensional relationships to adjoining work and installation tolerances. Include details, with
descriptive notes indicating materials, finishes, fasteners, typical and special edge conditions,
accessories, understructure, and other data to permit a full evaluation of entire access flooring
system.
D. Samples for verification in full-size units of each type of floor covering and exposed finish
indicated.
1. In addition, submit one complete full-size floor panel, pedestal, and understructure unit for
ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
'- each type of access flooring system required.
E. Qualification data for fn'ms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
- addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
F. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of access
_ flooring with system performance requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products
performed either by the qualified independent testing agency or by the access flooring manufacturer
and witnessed by the qualified independent testing agency.
.- G. Data on earthquake-load resistance in the form of structural computations that have been signed and
sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Include structural
computations, material properties, and other information needed for structural analysis and for
verification that system will withstand earthquake loads indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is approved by the access flooring
manufacturer for installing the types of access flooring indicated for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency must
~ demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming
to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing
indicated without delaying the Work.
-- C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access flooring from one source and by a single manufacturer.
D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice
in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are def'med as those performed for installations of access
flooring systems that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
_ E. NFPA Standard: Provide access flooring complying with NFPA 75 requirements for raised
flooring.
F. Provide floor panels that are clearly and permanently marked on their underside with the panel type
.~ and concentrated-load rating.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division i Section "Project Meetings."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver access flooring components in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled with
manufacturer's name and item description.
B. Handle and store packages containing access flooring in a manner which avoids overloading building
structure.
1,7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
· - A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of access flooring until installation area
is enclosed and has an ambient temperature of between 40 and 90 deg F (4 and 32 deg C) and a
relative humidity of not more than 70 percent.
B. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which access
flooring must fit by accurate field measurements before preparing Shop Drawings; show recorded
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
dimensions and proceed with preparing Shop Drawings for access flooring without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions.
1.8 COORDINATING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate location of mechanical and electrical work in underfloor cavity
to prevent interference with access flooring pedestals.
B. Mark pedestal locations with a grid of size indicated below on concrete subfloor so that mechanical
and electrical work can proceed without interfering with pedestals.
1. 120 by 120 inches (3048 by 3048 nun).
C. Do not proceed with installation of access flooring until after Substantial Completion of other
construction within affected spaces.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Field Panels and Understructure: Furnish quantity of standard field panels and
understructure components equal to 2 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering access
flooring that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Systems with Steel-Covered Wood-Core Panels:
a. C-TEC, Inc.
b. GHInternational, Inc.
C. Mult-A-Frame Corporation.
d. USG Interiors, Inc.; Access Floor Systems.
FLOOR PANELS
B. General: Provide modular field panels complying with the following requirements that one person,
using a portable lifting device, can interchange with other field panels without disturbing adjacent
panels or understrucmre and that are free of exposed-metal edges with floor covering in place.
1. Nominal Panel Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
2. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate panels to the following tolerances with squareness
tolerances expressed as the difference between diagonal measurements from comer to
comer.
a. Size and Squareness: Plus or minus 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) of required size, with
a squareness tolerance of plus or minus 0.015 inch (0.38 mm), unless tolerances
are otherwise indicated for a specific panel type.
b. Flatness: Plus or minus 0.020 inch (0.50 mm), measured on a diagonal on top
of panel.
3. Panel Attachment to Understructure: By gravity.
C. Steel-Covered Wood-Core Panels: Panels with 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick high-density particleboard
ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
core, laminated to top and bottom face sheets of zinc-coated steel sheet, and with a flame spread
of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. Provide core edges enclosed with upturned, die-formed edge of
bottom sheet or with perimeter steel channel welded to top sheet and welded or bonded to bottom
sheet.
2.2 FLOOR PANEL COVERING
A. General: Provide factory-applied floor coverings of type indicated that are laminated by the access
flooring manufacturer to tops of floor panels.
B. Colors and Patterns: Provide floor covering materials in colors and patterns as indicated below:
1. Match colors and patterns indicated by referencing manufacturer's standard designations
for these characteristics.
C. Carpet: As specified in Section 09680 and as follows:
1. Installation: Die cut and adhesively bonded in factory to panel face; edge condition as
follows:
a. Trim edge.
2. Groundable Path: Grounding clip/bolt.
D. Edging: Manufacturer's standard form of edge trim. For applied edge trim, use method standard
with manufacturer to attach edge trim to perimeter of each panel. Provide size and profile of
applied edge trim that fits floor covering selected.
2.3 UNDERSTRUCTURE
A. Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base, column with provisions for height adjustment, and head
(cap); made of steel or aluminum or a combination of both.
1. Base: Square or circular base with not less than 16 sq. in. (103 sq. cm) of bearing area.
2. Provide vibration-proof leveling mechanism for making and holding frae adjustments in
height over a range of not less than 2 inches (50 mm). Include means of locking leveling
mechanism at a selected height that requires deliberate action to change height setting and
prevents vibratory displacement.
3. Provide units of sufficient height to achieve underfloor clearance indicated.
4. Head: Designed for direct, nonbolted support of panels.
a. Provide sound-deadening pads or gaskets at contact points between heads and
panels.
5. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: Where required to comply with performance
requirements, provide expansion anchors for bolting pedestal bases to subfloor that have
the capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that specified under Part 1
Article "Performance Requirements."
B. Stringer Systems: Modular steel stringer systems made to interlock with pedestal heads and form
a grid pattern placing stringers under each edge of each floor panel and a pedestal under each comer
of each floor panel. Protect steel components with manufacturer's standard galvanized or corrosion-
resistant paint finish.
1. Bolted Stringers: System of main and cross stringers connected to pedestals with threaded
fasteners accessible from above.
a. Provide continuous gasket at contact surfaces between panel and stringers to
deaden sound, to seal off underfloor cavity from above, and to maintain panel
alignment and position.
ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
b. Provide stringers that support each edge of each panel where required to meet
design-load criteria.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Colors and Finishes: For exposed accessories available in more than one standard color or finish,
provide color or finish complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections made from manufacturer's full range of available colors and
finishes.
B. Cutouts: Provide cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets. Comply with
requirements indicated for size, shape, number, and location. Provide reinforcement or additional
support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with standard performance requirements.
1. Fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets in sizes indicated or, where size of
cutouts exceed maximum grommet size available, trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer's
standard plastic molding having tapered top flange.
a. Furnish removable twist-close covers.
2. Seal cutouts to comply with manufacturer's requirements.
3. Provide foam-rubber pads for sealing annular space formed in cutouts by cables and trim
edge of cutout with molding having flange and ledge for capturing and supporting pads.
c. Service Outlets: Standard UL-listed and -labeled assemblies, for recessed mounting flush with top
of floor panels, for power, communication, and signal services, and complying with the following
requirements:
1.Structural Performance: Cover capable of supporting a 1000-1bf (4448-N) concentrated
load.
2. Cover and Box Type: Hinged polycarbonate cover with opening for passage of cables
when cover is closed and including frame and steel box or formed-steel plate for mounting
electrical receptacles.
3.Location: Locate outlets in center of panel quadrant.
4.Receptacles and Wiring: Electrical receptacles and wiring for service outlets are specified
in Division 16 Sections.
D. Perforated Panels: Standard load-bearing perforated metal panels interchangeable with standard
field panels and complying with the following requirements:
1. Air-Distribution Characteristics of Units Without Dampers: Capable of delivering 722 cfm
at 0.10-inch wg (341 L/s at 25-Pa) static pressure.
2. Air-Distribution Characteristics of Units with Dampers: Provide units with air-volume
control dampers, adjustable from top surface, capable of delivering 540 cfm at 0.10-inch
wg (255 L/s at 25-Pa) static pressure with damper full open.
3. Structural Performance: Capable of supporting a 1000-1bf (4448-N) concentrated load.
4. Floor Covering: Same as standard field panel.
5. Number of Grilles: As indicated.
E. Cavity Dividers: Provide manufacturer's standard metal dividers located where indicated to divide
underfloor cavities.
F. Vertical Closures (Fascia): Where underfloor cavity is not enclosed by abutting walls or other
construction, provide manufacturer's standard metal-closure plates with factory-applied finish.
G. Ramps: Manufacturer's standard ramp construction of width and slope indicated, but not steeper
than 1 in 12, with raised-disc rubber or vinyl floor covering, and of same materials, performance,
and construction requirements as the access flooring.
ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- H. Railings: Standard extruded-aluminum railings, at ramps and open-sided perimeter of access
flooring where indicated. Include handrail, intermediate rails, posts, brackets, end caps, wall
returns, wall and floor flanges, plates, and anchorages where required. Provide railings that comply
~_ with structural performance requirements specified in the following Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications".
._. I. Panel Lifting Device: Manufacturer's standard portable lifting device of type and number required
for lifting panels with floor covering provided.
1. Provide 4 lifting devices of each type required.
J. Vinyl Base: Vinyl wall base complying with FS SS-W-40, Type II, with matching end stops and
preformed or molded comer units, with topset cove, and of height and thickness indicated.
-- K. Perimeter Support: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard method for supporting panel
edge and form transition between access flooring and adjoining floor covering at same level as
access flooring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Preinstallation Adhesive Field Test: Prior to installing pedestals, field test their adhesion to subfloor
surfaces as follows:
-- 1. In areas representative of each subfloor surface, set typical pedestal assemblies in same
adhesive and methods required for completed work.
2. Allow test installation to cure for 30 days, with a pressure of 25 lbf (111 N) applied
vertically to pedestals during this period.
-- 3. After curing, apply lateral load against a straight steel bar inserted 2 inches (50 mm) into
pedestal stems. Measure the force needed to cause adhesive failure of pedestal base.
4. Do not proceed with installation until tests show compliance with the performance
_ requirement specified for pedestal's capability to resist overturning moment.
B. Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum clean the subfloor
to remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install access flooring system and accessories under supervision of the access flooring
-- manufacturer's authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with
performance requirements and is free of vibration, rocking, rattles, and squeaks.
. B. Set pedestals in adhesive as recommended by the access flooring manufacturer to provide full
bearing of the pedestal base on the subfloor.
C. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at the floor perimeter to a
minimum. Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids
greater than 1/8 inch (3 nun) where panels abut vertical surfaces.
I. To prevent dusting, seal cut edges of the following panel type with sealer recommended
by panel manufacturer:
a. Steel-covered wood-core panels.
"' 2. Connect grounding strips embedded in static-conductive floor covering to connector clips
attached to pedestals at the intervals needed to comply with performance requirements for
electrical resistance of floor covering.
ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Secure stringers to pedestal heads according to the access flooring manufacturer's instructions.
E. Scribe underfloor-cavity dividers to closely fit against subfloor surfaces and seal with mastic to
maintain plenum effect within underfloor cavity.
F. Scribe vertical closures to closely fit against subfloor and adjacent finish floor surfaces. Set in
mastic and seal to maintain plenum effect within underfloor cavity.
G. Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, including vacuuming the
subfloor area, as installation of floor panels proceeds.
H. Do not cut and trim access flooring components or perform other dirt-or-debris-producing
operations in the rooms where the floor is being installed.
I. Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt-or-debris-producing operations as remotely as
possible from installation area and to prevent contamination of subfloor under access flooring
already installed.
J. Level installed access flooring to within 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) of true level over the entire access
flooring area and within 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) in any 10-foot (3-m) distance.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. After completing installation, vacuum clean access flooring and cover with continuous sheets of
reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until the time of Substantial Completion.
B. Replace access flooring panels that are stained, scratched, otherwise damaged, or not complying
with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 10270
ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - 8 --
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Ground-Set, Fixed, Cone Tapered Flagpoles:
a. Aluminum.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data and installation instructions for each type of flagpole required.
1. Include details of foundation system for ground~set poles.
C. Samples of each f'mished metal for flagpoles and accessories as requested by Architect.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer,
including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices.
B. Design Criteria: Provide flagpoles and installations constructed to withstand a 90-mph wind velocity
minimum when flying flag of appropriate size. Use heavy pipe sizes if required for flagpole type and
height shown.
C. Pole Construction: Construct pole and ship to site in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is
necessary, provide snug-fitting, precision joints with self-aligning, internal splicing sleeve arrangement
for weather-tight, hairline field joints.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy Kraft paper or other weather-tight wrapping and prepare for
shipment in hard fiber tube or other protective container.
B. Deliver flagpoles and accessories completely identified for installation procedure. Handle and store
flagpoles to prevent damage or soiling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Aabec Pole Div., Morgan-Francis Co.
2. American Flagpole Div. of Keamey-National, Inc.
3. Baartol Co., Inc.
4. Concord Industries, Inc.
FLAGPOLES 10350- 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
5. EMC Div., Eder Manufacturing Corp.
6. Eder Flag Manufacturing Co., Inc.
7. John Ewing and Co., Inc.
8. Pole-Tech, Inc.
2.2 FLAGPOLE TYPES
A. Aluminum Flagpoles: Fabricate from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241, alloy
6063-T6, having a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch (0.1875 inch), tensile strength not less than
30,000 psi, and a yield point of 25,000 psi. Heat-treat and age-harden after fabrication.
1. Provide cone-tapered aluminum flagpoles.
2. Height: 30'- 0".
B. Acceptable Product: Concord Concealed Halyard System, Concord Industries, Inc.
2.3 FLAGPOLE MOUNTING
A. Provide manufacturer's standard base system for the type of flagpole installation required.
B. Foundation Tube: For ground-set flagpoles, provide 16-gage minimum galvanized corrugated steel tube,
or 12-gage rolled steel tube, sized to suit flagpole and installation. Furnish complete with welded steel
bottom base and support plate, lightning ground spike, and steel centering wedges, all welded
construction. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top for plumbing pole after erection. Galvanize steel
parts after assembly, including foundation tube.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard flash collar, f'mished to match flagpole.
2.4 SHAFT FINISH
A.General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application
and designations of finishes.
B. Aluminum: Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the Aluminum Association system for
designating aluminum finishes. Provide frae, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32), t-m/shed as
follows:
1. Natural clear anodized finish complying with AA-C22A41, Class I (0.7 mil).
2.5 FITTINGS
A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, size to match pole butt diameter.
1. 14-gage spun aluminum f'm/shed to match pole shaft.
B. Truck: Ball-bearing, nonfouling, revolving, internal halyard type truck assembly of cast metal finished
to match pole shaft.
C. Halyards: Provide two piece halyards for each flagpole, as follows:
I. Stainless steel aircraft cable.
2. Size: 1/8".
D. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two swivel snaps per halyard, as follows:
1. Chromium plated bronze.
E.Counterweight and Retainer Ring: Provide neoprene coated counterweight and beaded nylon retainer
ring.
F. Internal Halyard System: Furnish pole with internal halyard system consisting of a manually operated,
geared stainless steel winch with control stop device and removable handle. Provide stainless steel
FLAGPOLES 10350 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
braided aircraft-type cable and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic-coated counter balance
and sling. Provide reinforced, flush access door, secured with cylinder lock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION FOR GROUND-SET POLES
A. Excavation: Excavate for foundation concrete to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Provide forms
where required due to unstable soil conditions. Remove wood, loose soil, rubbish, and other foreign
matter from excavation; and moisten earth before placing concrete. Back fill open excavation after
concreting with original excavated material.
B. Concrete: Provide concrete composed of portland cement, coarse and f'me aggregate, and water mixed
in proportions to attain 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi, complying with
ASTM C 94.
C. Place concrete immediately after mixing. Compact concrete in place by use of vibrators. Moist-cure
exposed concrete for not less than 7 days, or use a nonstaining curing compound in cold weather.
D. Finish trowel exposed concrete surfaces to smooth, dense surface. Provide positive slope for water
runoff to base perimeter.
3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Prepare and install flagpoles where shown and in compliance with accepted shop drawings and
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Provide positive lightning ground for each flagpole installation.
2. Paint below-grade portions of ground-set flagpole with heavy coat of bituminous paint.
END OF SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLES 10350 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- SECTION 10425 - SIGNS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and
all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in
the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
_ A. This Section includes the following types of signs:
1. Panel signs.
2. Dimensional letters and numbers.
3. Cast metal plaques.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities" for temporary project identification signs.
2. Division 10 Section "Exterior Post and Panel Signs" for freestanding exterior signs.
_~ 3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical
equipment.
4. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical
equipment.
-' 5. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated exit signs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
-- C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale
sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement,
accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering
layout.
2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit
of Work in other Sections.
3. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and
numbers.
4.Furnish full-size rubbings for metal plaques.
D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and
surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated.
1. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with requirements
.... indicated:
SIGNS 10425 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
a. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Provide a sample panel not less than 8-1/2
inches by 11 inches for each material, color, texture, and pattern required. On each panel
include a represemative sample of the graphic image process required, showing graphic
style, and colors and finishes of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices.
b. Aluminum: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6-inch-long sections of extrusions
and not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate. Where finishes involve normal color and
texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
c. Dimensional Letters: Provide full-size representative samples of each dimensional letter
type required, showing letter style, color, and material finish and method of attachment.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this
Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce
sign units required without causing delay in the Work.
B.Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a
single manufacturer.
C. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are
based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered
provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept as judged by the
Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to
ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers of Panel Signs:
a. ABC Architectural Signing System.
b. Allenite.
c. Andco Industries Corp.
d. APCO Graphics, Inc.
e. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
f. Best Manufacturing Company.
g. Charleston Industries, Inc.
h. DGS Corp.
i. Diskey Sign Corp.
j. Environmental Graphic Systems, Inc.
k. Modulex.
1. Mohawk Sign Systems.
m. Poblocki & Sons, Inc.
n. Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
o. The Supersine Company.
SIGNS 10425 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
'- p. Vomar Products, Inc.
2. Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters:
a. Andco Industries Corp.
b. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
d. Gemini, Inc.
e. Matthews International Corp.
f. Metal Arts.
-- g. Metallic Arts, Inc.
h. The Southwell Company.
i. Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
_ j. Vomar Products, Inc.
3. Manufacturers of Cast Plaques:
a. Andco Industries Corp.
b. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
~ d. Best Manufacturing Company.
e. Gemini, Inc.
f. Matthews International Corp.
_ g. Metal Arts.
h. Metallic Arts, Inc.
i. OMC Industries, Inc.
j. The Southwell Company.
-- k. Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
1. Vomar Products, Inc.
_ 2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate monomer plastic
sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested
according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F (80
deg C), and of the following general types:
~-- 1. Transparent Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "clear," provide colorless sheet in matte
finish, with light transmittance of 92 percent, when tested according to the requirements of ASTM
D 1003.
_ 2. White Translucent Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "white," provide white translucent
sheet of density required to produce uniform brightness and minimum halation effects.
3. Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "opaque," provide colored opaque acrylic
sheet in colors and finishes indicated.
B. Aluminum Sheet: Provide aluminum sheet of alloy and temper recommended by the sign manufacturer
for the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties
specified in ASTM B 209 for 5005-H15.
C. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide aluminum extrusions of alloy and temper recommended by the sign
manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063oT5.
D. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by the sign
~ manufacturer for the casting process used and for the use and finish indicated.
SIGNS 10425 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
E. Vinyl Film: Provide opaque nonreflective vinyl film, O.0035-inch minimum thickness, with
pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior as well as interior applications.
F. ABS Plastic: Provide high-impact thermoplastic composed of copolymers of acrylonitrile, butadiene, and
styrene.
G. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and
mounting surface.
H. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior
installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt
devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry
work.
I. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use colored coatings, including inks and paints for copy and
background colors, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic
surface and are nonfading for the application intended.
2.3 PANEL SIGNS
A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs,
shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain fiat under installed
conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.
B. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with
the following requirements:
1. Edge Condition: Square cut.
2. Corner Condition: Square corners.
C. Laminated Sign Panels: Permanently laminate face panels to backing sheets of material and thickness
indicated using the manufacturer's standard process.
D. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size,
style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic
devices.
E. Engraved Copy: Machine-engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices into sign panel
on the face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth. Use high-speed cutters
mechanically linked to master templates in a pantographic system or equivalent process capable of
producing characters of the style indicated with sharply formed edges.
I. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel.
2. Face-Engraved Clear Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel. Apply opaque background
color coating to the back face of acrylic sheet.
a. Engrave the copy to produce a minimum indentation depth of 1/32 inch and a minimum
stroke width of 1/4 inch.
3. Subsurface-Engraved Acrylic Sheet: Reverse-engrave the back face of clear acrylic sheet. Fill
resulting copy with enamel. Apply opaque background color coating over enamel-filled copy.
F. Subsurface Copy: Apply copy to the back face of clear acrylic sheet forming the panel face by process
SIGNS 10425 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
indicated to produce precisely formed opaque images free from rough edges.
1. Use reverse silk-screen process to print copy; overspray the copy with an opaque background
color coating.
2. Use Dupont Chromalin heat- and pressure-laminated photopolymer film system to form copy and
background color.
a. The manufacturer has the option of selecting either process indicated above, or using
subsurface engraving process, as appropriate to the copy form and the economics of
production.
G. Raised Copy: Machine-cut copy characters from matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet and chemically weld
onto the acrylic sheet forming sign panel face. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut
edges free from burrs and cut marks.
1. Panel Material: Matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet.
2. Raised Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.
H. Applied Copy: Die-cut characters from vinyl f'tim with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy
to the exposed face of the sign panel.
1. Panel Material: Matte-finished clear acrylic sheet with opaque color coating subsurface applied.
2.4 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS
A. Cast Letters and Numbers: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with
smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand
holes, or other defects. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs.
Comply with requirements indicated for f'mish, style, and size.
1. Metal: Aluminum.
B. Fabricated Letters and Numbers: Fabricate letters and numbers to required sizes and styles, using metals
and thicknesses indicated. Form exposed faces and sides of characters to produce surfaces free from
warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and attachment of mounting accessories.
Comply with requirements indicated in schedule for finish, style, and size.
1. Aluminum Sheet: Not less than 0.090 inch thick. Fabricate by the heliarc welding process.
2.5 CAST METAL PLAQUES
A. Plaques: Castings shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Comply with requirements
specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and with requirements shown for
thickness, size, shape, and copy. Hand-tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce the
manufacturer's standard satin polished finish. Refer to the "Finishes" Article for other finish
requirements.
1. Metal: Aluminum.
2. Border Style: Raised flat band.
3. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard leatherette finish.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral
or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches
SIGNS 10425 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards.
B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and applications
recommendations.
C. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
I. Class II Clear Anodized Medium Satin Finish: AA-M31C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin
directional textured; Chemical Finish: Medium matte etched finish; Anodic Coating: Class II
Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.4 mil).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type
described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or
other defects in appearance.
B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below:
1.Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces.
Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the sign manufacturer
to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape
where recommended by the sign manufacturer to hold the sign in place until the adhesive has fully
cured.
C. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods
recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition
of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for
fasteners.
1. Projected Mounting: Mount letters at the projection distance from the wall surface indicated.
D. Cast Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using the standard method recommended by the manufacturer for
the type of wall surface indicated.
1. Concealed Mounting: Mount the plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on the back
of the plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units
from damage until acceptance by the Owner
SIGNS 10425 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.3 SCHEDULE
A. Dimensional Letters and Numbers
Location Message Letter Height Letter Style Lug Location
Main Entry COPPELL CRIMINAL 12" equivalent to bottom
canopy JUSTICE CENTER Andco Industries
(refer A400) 'Bolta 123'
Courts entry COURT 8" equivalent to bottom
(refer A401) Andco Industries
'Bolta 123'
Police entry POLICE 8" equivalent to bottom
(refer A401) Andco Industries
'Bolta 123'
West Elevation [Address] 6" equivalent to back
(refer A400) Andco Industries
'Bolta 123'
END OF SECTION 10425
SIGNS 10425 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 10436 - EXTERIOR POST AND PANEL SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified or
indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Nonilluminated single panel type post and panel exterior signs.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Temporary project identification signs are included in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities."
2. Concrete fill in post holes is included in Division 3 Section "Concrete Work."
3. Wall-mounted and interior panel signs are included in Division 10 Section "Signs."
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design Criteria: Design, fabricate, and install exterior post and panel-type signs to withstand a wind
pressure of i00 mph on the total sign area in all directions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual
components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign required. Provide manufacturer's recommendations
for maintenance and cleaning requirements for exterior sign surfaces.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and not less than 3/4-inch scale sections of typical members and
other components. Show anchors, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details.
1. Indicate required location of connections to electrical service provided as a unit of work under other
sections.
2. Provide message list, including not less than half-size details of wording and lettering layout. Include
full-size details of special graphics.
a. Furnish full-size templates for cutout letters, numbers, and other graphic symbols.
3. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors
to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections.
D. Samples: For each sign component provide the following samples showing £1rfishes, colors, and surface
texture.
1. For verification of color, pattern, and texture selected, and compliance with requirements indicated:
a. Aluminum: Samples of each f'mish type and color, on 6-inch-long sections of extrusions and
not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate. Where finishes involve normal color and texture
variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1) In each panel include a representative sample of the graphic image process required,
showing graphic style and colors and finishes of letters, numbers, and other graphic
devices.
EXTERIOR POST AND PANEL SIGNS 10436 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is an authorized representative of the sign
manufacturer and has completed installation of exterior post and panel signs similar in material, design, and
extent to those indicated for the Project and that has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-
service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain exterior post and panel signs from one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Design Concept: The drawings indicate the size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of post and panel
signs and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Signs by other manufacturers may be
considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept
as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
1.6 DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Proved protective covering or crating as recommended by the manufacturer to protect sign
components and surfaces against damage during transportation and delivery.
1. Coordinate time of delivery so that pylon signs can be installed within 24 hours of receipt at the
project site.
B. Handle signs carefully to prevent breakage, surface abrasion, denting, soiling, and other defects. Comply
with the manufacturer's handling instructions for unloading components subject to damage.
1. Inspect sign components for damage upon delivery. Do not install damaged sign components. Repair
minor damage to signs, provided the finished repair is equal in all respects to the original work and
is acceptable to the Architect; otherwise remove and replace damaged sign components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. ABC Architectural Signing System
2. Andco Industries Corp.
3. APCO Graphics Inc.
4. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
5. Diskey Sign Corporation.
6. Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
7. The Supersine Company.
8. Vomar Products, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet or Plate: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the aluminum producer or f'misher
for the type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified
in ASTM B 209 for 5005-H15.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the aluminum producer or f'misher for
the type of use and f'mish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in
ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5.
C. Concrete: Provide concrete for post holes consisting of Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
aggregates complying with ASTM C 33, and clean water. Mix the materials to obtain concrete with a
minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi. Use at least 4 sacks of cement per cubic yard, 1-inch
maximum size aggregate, maximum 3-inch slump, and 2 to 4 percent entrained air.
EXTERIOR POST AND PANEL SIGNS 10436 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
D. Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are noncorrosive
to either the sign material or the mounting surface.
E. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior
installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt
devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Posts: Provide the manufacturer's standard 0.125-inch-thick structural aluminum tubing extruded from 6063-
T5 alloy, with vertical slots to engage sign panels. Provide stop blocks in slots to hold panels in position.
Include post caps, fillers, spacers, junction boxes, access panels, and related accessory items required for
a complete installation. Comply with the following requirements for post shape, finish, and mounting
method:
1. Post Shape: 2-inch by 2-inch square.
2. Finish: Match sign panel face.
3. Post Mounting Method: Provide sign posts of length required for permanent installation by the
direct-burial mounting method.
B. Panels: Provide smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions
within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from comer to comer.
1. Unframed Single-Sheet Panels: Provide unframed single-sheet sign panels with edges mechanically
and smoothly t-m/shed to conform with the following requirements:
a. Panel Material: 0.125-inch-thiek aluminum plate.
1) Finish: Baked enamel.
b. Edge Condition: Square cut.
c. Coruer Condition: Square coruers.
C. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy to comply with the requirements indicated for sizes, styles,
spacing, content, positions, materials, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic
devices.
I. Surface-Applied Die-Cut Vinyl Copy: Provide die-cut characters from nonreflective vinyl film with
pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to the exposed face of the sign panel.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide the manufacturer's standard double post, single-panel-type post and panel signs. The
completed sign assembly shall consist of a message panel supported between two posts. Comply with
requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, fro/shes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of
construction.
1. Allow for thermal movement resulting from a maximum ambient temperature change (range) of 100
deg F (55.5 deg C). Design, fabricate, and install post and panel sign assemblies to prevent buckling,
opening up of joints, and overstressing welds and fasteners.
a. Base design on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and aighttime
sky heat loss.
2. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide
welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of the exposed side. Clean exposed
welded surfaces of welding flux and dress on all exposed and contact surfaces.
3.Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to the weather to exclude water penetration.
4. Preassemble post and panel signs in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field
assembly. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and installation, in a location not exposed to view after final assembly.
5.Conceal fasteners where possible; otherwise locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.
EXTERIOR POST AND PANEL SIGNS 10436 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Posts: Fabricate posts to lengths required for mounting method indicated. --
1. Direct Burial: For permanent sign installation, provide posts 36 inches longer than height of sign
indicated to permit direct embedment in concrete foundations. _
C. Panels: Form panels to required size and shape. Comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, finish, color, and details of construction.
1. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods to produce message panels with closely fitting joints.
Align edges and surfaces with one another in the relationship indicated.
2. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners or backing materials as required to
produce surfaces without distortion, buckles, warp, or other surface deformations. ~
3. Continuously weld joints and seams except where other methods are indicated; grind, fill, and dress
welds to produce smooth flush exposed surfaces with welds invisible after final finishing.
2.5 FINISHES -'~
A. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and application
recommendations.
B. Baked Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42Rlx (Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply in compliance with
paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.
1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting modified acrylic enamel primer and topcoat system complying with
AAMA 603.8, except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss.
2. Color: As indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard color designations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Furnish templates, anchor bolts, internal reinforcing, and other items required to be set in concrete post
foundations at proper time for setting.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described
and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Excavation: In firm undisturbed or compacted soil, drill or (using a post-hole digger) hand-excavate holes
for each post to the minimum diameter recommended by the sign manufacturer, but not less than 4 times the
largest post cross-section.
1. Excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches lower than the required post bottom, with bottom of
posts set not less than 36 inches below f'mished grade surface.
C. Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3 inches above bottom of the excavation.
1. Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts and vibrate
or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment and hold in position until
concrete has achieved its initial set.
D. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects
in appearance.
3.3 CLEANING
A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled surfaces of sign units in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
EXTERIOR POST AND PANEL SIGNS 10436 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed sign units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 10436
- EXTERIOR POST AND PANEL SIGNS 10436 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wardrobe lockers, including the following:
a. Single-tier.
b. Double-tier.
c. Multiple-tier.
2. Locker room benches.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring and grounds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data including materials, accessories, construction, finishes,
assembly, and installation instructions for lockers and benches.
C. Shop Drawings: Layout and dimensions of metal lockers and benches. Indicate relationship to adjoining
surfaces. Show locker elevations and details, fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories. Include
locker numbering sequence. Indicate installation and anchorage requirements.
D. Samples for Color Verification: Samples showing actual colors prepared on same material to be used
for the Work.
E. Maintenance Instructions: Instructions for cleaning lockers and for adjusting, repairing, and replacing
locker doors and latching mechanisms.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain locker units and accessories from one manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for locker installati°n.
B. Protect lockers from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation.
C. Deliver master keys, control keys, and combination control charts to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. American Locker Security Systems, Inc.
2. Art Metal Products, Div. of Fort Knox Storage Co.
3. De Bourgh Manufacturing Co.
4. Hadrian Inc.
5. The Interior Steel Equipment Co.
6. List Industries Inc.
7. Lyon Metal Products Inc.
8. Medart, Inc.
9. Penco Products.
10. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc.
11. Steiner Company, Inc.
12. Tiffin Metal Products Co.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Dip Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526/A 526M, commercial-quality, zinc-coated, carbon-steel
sheet, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 525 (A 525M) with A 60 (ZF 180) or G 60 (Z 180)
coating designation.
B. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel; slotless-type exposed bolt heads; self-locking nuts or lock washers
for nuts on moving parts.
C. Equipment: Manufacturer's standard plated steel hooks or coat rods.
2.3 WARDROBE LOCKERS
A. Body: Form backs, tops, bottoms, sides, and intermediate partitions of flanged 0.0239-inch (0.61-mm)
minimum steel sheet.
B. Frames: Form channel frames of 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum steel sheet. Form continuous integral
strike on vertical frame members or weld 0.0897-inch (2.3-mm) minimum latch hooks to latch strike
frame.
1. Cross Frames: Form intermediate channel cross frames to double- or triple-tier lockers of
0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum steel sheet.
2. Frame Vents: Fabricate vertical face frames with vents.
C. Shelf: Form 0.0239-inch (0.61-mm) minimum steel sheet hat shelf in single-tier units.
D. Door: One-piece steel sheet, flanged at all edges, constructed to prevent springing when opening or
closing. Fabricate to swing 180 degrees.
1. Thickness: 0.0747 inch (1.9 mm) minimum.
E. Acoustical Treatment: Fabricate lockers for quiet operation with manufacturer's standard rattle-free
latching mechanism and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
1. Reinforce inner face of door with a steel sheet panel filled with sound-deadening insulation.
F. Louvered Vents: Stamped, louvered vents in door face, as follows:
1. Single-Tier Lockers: No fewer than 6 louver openings top and bottom.
2. Double-Tier Lockers: No fewer than 3 louver openings top and bottom.
3. Multiple-Tier Lockers: No fewer than 2 louver openings top and bottom, or 3 louver openings
top and bottom.
G. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard steel continuous hinge mounted to door and frame.
H. Projecting Handle and Latch: Positive automatic, prelocking, pry-resistant latch and pull with rubber
silencers; chromium-plated, heavy-duty, vandalproof lift-up handle, containing strike and eye for padlock;
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
and with latching action as follows:
1. Single-Tier Lockers: Not less than 3-point latching.
2. Double-Tier Lockers: Not less than 2-point latching.
3. Multiple-Tier Lockers: Not less than 1-point gravity or spring latch with padlock lugs.
2.4 LOCKS
A. Fabricate lockers to receive the following locking devices:
1. Built-In, Combination Lock: Key-controlled, 3-number dialing combination lock, with
combination change made automatically with a control key. Provide bolt operation as follows:
a. Bolt Operation: Automatically locking springbolt.
2.5 LOCKER ACCESSORIES
A. Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items, unless otherwise shown:
1. Lockers 18 Inches (457 mm) Deep or Greater: Provide coat rod in lieu of ceiling hook.
B. Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped, nonferrous-metal number plates
with numerals not less than 3/8 inch (9 mm) high. Number lockers in sequence indicated. Attach plates
to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least 2 fasteners of same finish as number plate.
C. Continuous Metal Base: Steel sheet, channel or zee profiled for stiffness, fabricated in lengths as long
as practicable to enclose base and base ends of lockers without additional fastening devices.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm).
D. Continuously Sloping Tops: Manufacturer's standard continuously sloped top, not less than 0.0359-inch
(0.91-mm) steel sheet. Provide closures at ends and sloped corner fillers.
E. Recess Trim: Manufacturer's standard 0.0478-inch (1.2-mm) minimum steel sheet trim with concealed
fastening clips.
F. Filler Panels: 0.0478-inch (1.2-mm) minimum steel sheet, factory fabricated.
2.6 LOCKER BENCHES
A. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard 1-piece units with laminated maple top approximately 9-1/2 inches
(240 mm) wide by 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick. Round all corners, sand smooth, and apply
manufacturer's standard transparent sealer coating.
B. Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard steel pedestal supports. Furnish all fastenings and anchorages.
Apply manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish to pedestals.
1. Type: Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty pedestal with top flange and base, floor anchored.
2. Color: To match locker units.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion.
Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. Weld frame members
together to form a rigid, 1-piece structure.
1. Form locker body panels, doors, shelves and accessories from 1-piece steel sheet unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Preassemble lockers by welding all joints, seams, and connections. Grind exposed welds flush.
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Finish all steel surfaces and accessories, except prefinlshed stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces.
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary
protective covering prior to shipment.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable
if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.9 GALVANIZED-STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants followed by a
conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical
connections, and abraded areas and follow with an application of the galvanizing repair paint,
specified below, to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard
baked-enamel finish consisting of a thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's
instructions for application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 1.1 mils (0.028
mm) on doors, frames, and legs, and 0.7 mil (0.018 mm) elsewhere.
1. Color and Gloss: To match Lyon Metal Products, Inc. No. 62, Midnight Blue.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal lockers complete with accessories according to manufacturer's recommendations. Install
plumb, level, rigid, and flush.
B. Assemble knock-down lockers with standard fasteners according to manufacturer's recommendations with
no exposed fasteners on door faces and face frames.
C. Connect together welded locker groups with standard fasteners according to manufacturer's
recommendations, with no exposed fasteners on face frames.
D. Anchor lockers to floors and walls at intervals recommended by manufacturer but no greater than 36
inches (910 mm). Install anchors through back-up reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal
distortion, using concealed fasteners.
E. Install recess trim to recessed lockers using concealed fasteners. Provide hairline joints and concealed
splice plates.
F.Install sloping top units to lockers using concealed fasteners. Provide hairline joints and concealed splice
plates.
G. Install locker benches complying with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Uniformly space pedestals not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) apart. Securely fasten to bench
top and anchor to floor.
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices are
operating properly.
B. Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces and polish stainless-steel and nonferrous metal surfaces.
C. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit locker use during
construction.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace locker units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance.
Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.
3.3 SCHEDULE
A. LOCATION LOCKER SIZE LOCKER TYPE
Locker 169 6 ft by 12 inch by 18 inch single tier
Locker 172 6 ft by 12 inch by 18 inch single tier
Lab Drop 159 6 ft by 12 inch by 12 inch single tier
3 ft by 12 inch by 12 inch double tier
12 inch by 12 inch by 12 inch six high multiple tier
Booking 191 3 ft by 12 inch by 18 inch single tier
END OF SECTION i0505
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fire extinguishers.
2. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Standpipe and Sprinkler Systems" for fire protection standpipe and hose
systems.
2. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for fire extinguisher location lights.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for cabinets include rough-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships
of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door
construction, panel style, and materials.
C. Samples for verification purposes in full-size units of each type of cabinet finish indicated, and in sets for
each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Coordination: Verify that cabinets are sized to accommodate type and capacity of extinguishers indicated.
C. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and
classification of extinguisher.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Ansul Fire Protection.
2. Badger-Powhatan.
3. American Specialties Inc.
4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
5. Croker Div., Fire-End and Croker Corp.
6. Filtrine Manufacturing.
7. Lyon Metal Products.
8. J.L. Industries.
9. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
10. Moderu Metal Products by Muckle.
11. Potter-Roemer, Inc.
12. Samson Metal Products, Inc.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes
selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, that comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:10:B:C, 5-lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel
container.
2.3 CABINETS
A. Construction: Manufacturer's standard box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type,
trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door
frames.
B. Fire-Rated Cabinets: UL listed with UL listing mark with fire-resistance rating of wall where it is
installed.
C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing the following:
1. Fire extinguisher.
D. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:
1. Semirecessed: Cabinet box (tub) partially recessed in walls of shallow depth.
2. Surface-Mounted: Cabinet box (tub) fully exposed and mounted directly on wall.
E. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material indicated,
coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1.Enameled Steel: Manufacturer's standard finish, hollow steel door construction with tubular stiles
and rails.
2.Door Glazing: Fully tempered float glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I,
Quality q3, Kind FT, Class as follows:
a. Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing), bronze tint.
F. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with FIRE EXTINGUISHER lettering applied to door. Provide
lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location.
1. Application Process: Silk screen.
G. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design.
1. Duo Panel.
H. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch,
or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge
permitting door to open 180 deg.
2.4 FINISyIES FOR CABINETS, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying temporary strippable protective
covering prior to shipping.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.5 STEEL CABINET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces complying with SSPS-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and
other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated
steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5 (white metal blast cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (pickling).
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply manufacturer's standard
two-coat baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint
manufacturer's instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry trim thickness of 2.0 mils.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard choices for color and
gloss. Paint the following:
a. Exterior of cabinet, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.
b. Interior of cabinet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to verify cabinet depth and mounting
prior to cabinet installation.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with
applicable regulations of governing authorities.
1. Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and
to comply with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION 10522
_ FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 10655 - ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Manually operated accordion folding partitions.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Concrete floor tolerances are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2. Metal framing and supports are specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
3. Sound traps and baffle ducts are specified in a Division 15 Section.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Acoustical Performance: Provide accordion folding partitions tested by a qualified independent testing
agency for the following acoustic properties according to the following test method:
1. Sound Transmission Requirements: Accordion folding partition tested for laboratory sound
transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413 and rated
for a STC plus or minus 1 as follows:
a. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 44.
2. Noise Reduction Requirements: Accordion folding partition tested by a qualified independent
agency for compliance with ASTM C 423 and rated for an NRC as follows:
a. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.50.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of accordion folding partition and accessory specified. Include installation
methods for each type of substrate.
C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of accordion folding partitions. Include plans, elevations,
large-scale details of anchorages, and accessory items. Indicate unit conditions at openings, location and
installation requirements for hardware, and direction of travel.
D. Template drawings prepared by manufacturer showing location of items supported or anchored by
permanent construction.
E. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors, textures, and patterns available for each finish indicated.
F. Product certificates signed by accordion folding partition manufacturers certifying that their products
comply with specified requirements.
ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS 10655 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
G.Maintenance data for partition to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in
Division 1.
1. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to f'mishes and
performance.
H. Acoustical test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing agency
certifying that products and materials furnished comply with specified requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing by the accordion
folding partition manufacturer as qualified to install the manufacturer's partition systems.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide a partition finish face with the following surface-burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other testing and
inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to the Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming
to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated
without delaying progress of the Work.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Extra Materials: Furnished from same production run as materials installed. Package materials with
protective covering and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
I. Finish Face Material: Furnish a quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of the amount
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Curtition.
2. Custom Fold Doors, Inc.
3. Foldoor/Holcomb & Hoke Mfg. Co.
4. Hufcor/AirWall.
5. Modernfold, Inc.
6. Panelfold, Inc.
7. Rolscreen Co., Pella
8. Woodfold-Marco Mfg. Co.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Carriers: Four-wheel ball-bearing carriers at lead post and two-wheel ball-bearing carriers at
intermediate spacing as required for type, size, and weight of partition.
B. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum or steel track with factory-applied
corrosion-resistant finish. Track deflection, independent of structural supporting system, shall be no
more than 80 percent of bottom clearance.
1. Track: Recessed with prefmished ceiling guard.
ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS 10655 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.3 POSTS AND SEALS
A. Lead Posts and Jamb Posts: Formed to provide rigidity for partition and light seal at adjacent
construction.
1. Post Type: Floating or attached multiple meeting post with two-way meeting arrangements.
B. Seals: Perimeter sweep strips for each side, top, and bottom, providing continuous contact with head and
sill surfaces for positive light and sound seal. Include manufacturer's standard male and female sound
and light seal at lead post and jamb.
2.4 FINISH SURFACE
A. Material: Manufacturer's standard mildew-resistant vinyl, complying with CCFA-W-101-A for Type
II material.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty manually operated pulls and latches.
1. Latches: Operable from both sides of closed partitions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine flooring for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting the performance of accordion folding partitions.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install accordion folding partitions and accessories complying with ASTM E 557 after other finishing,
including painting, has been completed.
B. Repair or replace accordion folding partitions within areas where test results indicate partitions do not
comply with requirements, and retest partitions.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts. Adjust to ensure smooth, easy operation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean all accordion folding partition surfaces and adjacent surfaces. Avoid abrasive cleaners or solutions
containing corrosive solvents. Use cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer.
-- END OF SECTION 10655
_ ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS 10655 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
~ 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items as scheduled.
J B. Mirrored glass for frameless applications is specified in Division 8 Section "Mirrored Glass."
C. Toilet compartments and related accessories are specified in Division 10.
-- 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications
Sections.
B. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to materials,
dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified options, and finishes.
C. Samples of each toilet accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable
full-size samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
-- D. Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet accessory
item to be provided for project.
E. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate preparation
-- instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices.
F. Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices that
_ must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and
for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid
-- interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet
accessory items.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any mirrors
that develop visible silver spoilage defects within warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of
.... the ContraCt Documents and will be in addition to and mn concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering toilet
accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co.
6. McKirmey/Parker.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 f'mish, 0.034-inch (22-gage) minimum
thickness.
B. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel
where concealed.
2.3 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS
A. A.Roll-In-Reserve Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Fabricate of stainless steel for mounting indicated below,
size to store and dispense either 4-1/2-inch-diameter or 5-inch-diameter core tissue rolls, with reserve
roll placed in service by automatic release or by action of manual release bar. Hinge front of unit with
pivot hinge and secure with tumbler lockset.
1. Mounting:
a. Semirecessed for nominal 4-inch wall depth.
b. Surface mounted, concealed anchorage.
c. Partition mounted, designed to service two adjacent toilet compartments, two rolls for
each.
2.4 COMBINATION TOWEL DISPENSER/WASTE RECEPTACLE UNITS
A. Recessed Unit: Stainless steel combination unit fabricated for nominal 4-inch wall depth with continuous,
seamless wall flange. Towel compartment in upper portion of unit designed to dispense not less than 400
C-fold or 700 multifold paper towels. Waste receptacle in lower portion of unit provided with reusable,
heavy-duty vinyl liner, minimum 13-gallon capacity. Provide flush doors with piano hinges and tumbler
locks on upper and lower compartments.
B. Surface Mounted Unit: Stainless steel, combination unit fabricated for surface mounting. Provide towel
compartment in upper portion of unit designed to dispense not less than 400 C-fold or 700 multifold paper
towels. Waste receptacle in lower portion of unit provided with reusable, heavy-duty vinyl liner,
minimum 13-gallon capacity. Provide flush doors with piano hinges and tumbler locks on upper and lower
compartments.
2.5 GRAB BARS
A. Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 0.05 inch (18 gage) and as
follows:
1. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages.
2. Clearance: 1-1/2-inch clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar.
3. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard nonslip texture.
4. Medium-Duty Size: Outside diameter of i-1/4 inches.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.6 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNITS
A. Recessed Type: Fabricate of stainless steel for nominal 4-inch wall depth. Provide self-closing door and
removable stainless steel receptacle of all-welded construction.
B. Sanitary Napkin Disposal, Partition-Mounted, Dual-Access: Fabricate units of stainless steel equipped
with adjustable flanges to permit partition mounting to service two toilet compartments. Provide
self-closing door and all-welded stainless steel receptacle removable from one side.
2.7 SOAP DISPENSERS
A. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Deck-Mounted: Deck-mounted piston and spout-type unit with a minimum
16-fluid-ounce capacity, polyethylene reservoir concealed below deck. Piston and 4-inch-long spout of
stainless steel with brightly polished finish with chrome-plated deck escutcheon.
1. Provide unit designed for mounting on vanity deck.
2. Equip unit with valve for dispensing soap in liquid form.
B. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Horizontal-Tank Type: Fabricate for surface mounting, sized for 40-fluid-ounce
minimum capacity. Provide stainless steel piston, springs, and internal parts designed to dispense soap
in measured quantity by pump action. Provide cover of type 304 stainless steel in No. 4 f'mish, with
unbreakable window-type refill indicator.
1. Equip unit with push-type valve for dispensing soap in liquid form.
2.8 SHOWER CURTAIN RODS
A. Shower Curtain Rod, Heavy-Duty: 1-1/4 inches o.d., 0.050-inch (18-gage) stainless steel, satin finish;
furnish with 3 inches o.d., minimum 0.04-inch (20-gage) stainless steel flanges with satin finish, designed
for exposed fasteners.
2.9 FRAMED MIRROR UNITS
A. Stainless Steel Angle-Framed Mirror Units: Fabricate frame with angle shapes not less than 0.05 inch
(18 gage), with square corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. Provide in No. 4 satin polished
finish.
2.10 FOLDING SHOWER SEAT
A. Heavy-duty hinged seat designed to fold up against wall when not in use. Provide support braces, hinges,
frame, and fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. Construct frame of all-welded tubular construction for
maximum strength. Provide seat with configuration and seating surface material as follows:
1. Configuration: L-shaped seat, designed for easy wheelchair access.
2. Seat Material: Phenolic or polymeric composite of either slat type or one-piece construction.
Color as selected from manufacturer's standard selections.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Mop and Broom Holder/Utility Shelf: Combination unit with 0.05-inch (18-gage), Type 304, stainless
steel shelf with 1/2-inch returns, 0.062-inch (16-gage) support brackets for wall mounting. Provide
0.062-inch (16-gage) stainless steel hooks for wiping rags on front of shelf, together with spring-loaded,
rubber hat, cam-type mop/broom holders; 1/4-inch-diameter stainless steel drying rod suspended beneath
shelf. Provide unit 36 inches long and complete with four mop/broom holders and three hooks.
B. Double-Prong Robe Hook: Heavy-duty satin finished stainless steel double-prong robe hook; rectangular
wall bracket with backplate for concealed mounting.
2.12 FABRICATION
A. General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units. On either
interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory item
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
either by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product
model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with
tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel
piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded
construction, without mitered comers. Hang doors or access panels with full-length, stainless steel piano
hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.
D. Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate wood, felt,
plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that will
permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture accumulation, as follows:
1. Provide galvanized-steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (22 gage) and full mirror size,
with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material.
E. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing,
resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to
substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in
locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws.
Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions for type
of substrate involved.
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, complying with ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace
damaged or defective items.
B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after
removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- SECTION i 1132 - PROJECTION SCREENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
-- 1.! RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
-- 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
-- 1. Electrically operated front projection screens.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for suspension systems for projection screens.
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood backing for recessed screen installation.
3. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood trim for recessed screen
installation.
4. Division 16 Sections for electrical wiring, connections, and installation of remote control switches
for electrically operated projection screens.
-- 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of screen specified.
C. Wiring diagram for electrically operated units.
D. Shop drawings showing layout and types of projection screens. Show the following:
_ 1. Location of screen centerline.
2. Location of wiring connections.
3. Seams in viewing surfaces.
4. Connections to suspension systems for pendant-mounted and recess-mounted screens.
- 5. Anchorage details.
6. Accessories.
7. Frame details for front projection screens.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen required from a single manufacturer
_ as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories.
B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with other construction
supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment,
fire-suppression system, and partitions.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
- A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where
screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to take place.
B. Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation.
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. Store rear projection screens in manufacturer's protective packages in a position that complies with screen
manufacturer's directions. Keep units in manufacturer's protective packages until time of installation.
D. Protect surfaces of rear projection screens from damage due to abrasion, dust, and other conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PROJECTION SCREEN SURFACES, GENERAL
A. Measurement of Gain of Screen Viewing Surface: Measure gain of screen viewing surface against that
of a magnesium carbonate surface by means of a photogoniometer using test methods and test apparatus
per FS GG-S-00172D(1) for determining effect of reflected light at various viewing angles on screen
surfaces. Ratings of 1.0 refer to those viewing surfaces having a reflectivity equal to the magnesium
carbonate surface.
B. Material and Viewing Surface of From Projection Screens: Obtain screens manufactured from mildew-
and flame-resistant fabric of type indicated for each type of screen specified and complying with the
following requirements:
1. Matte white viewing surface with minimum gain characteristics complying with FS
GG-S-00172D(1) for Type A screen surface.
a. Application: Provide matte white surfaces.
2. Seamless Construction: Provide screens in sizes indicated without seams.
3. Mildew Resistance: Provide mildew-resistant screen fabrics as determined by Federal Standard
191A/5760.
4. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide projection screen fabrics identical to those materials
that have undergone testing and passed requirements for flame resistance as indicated below:
a. NFPA 701 per small-scale test.
b. Federal Standard 191A/5903 for test method. FS GG-S-00172D(1) for flame resistance.
2.2 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard UL-listed and UL-marked units consisting of case, screen,
motor, controls, mounting accessories, and other components required for a complete installation and to
comply with requirements indicated for screen surface and controls and for case, motor, and screen under
description of operation and type. Remotely control operation of each screen to comply with the
following:
1. Single Station Control: Three-position, UL-listed control switch for each screen with metal device
box and cover plate for flush wall mounting and for connection to 120 V a.c. power supply.
B. End-Mounted-Motor-Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure: Units designed and fabricated
for recessed installation in ceiling with bottom of case composed of two panels fully enclosing screen and
motor, one panel hinged and connected to drive mechanism to open and close automatically when screen
is lowered and fully raised and the other panel removable or openable for access to interior of case; and
complying with the following requirements:
1. Screen Case: Wood sides and top with metal-lined motor compartment and wood or aluminum
bottom panels, factory-primed and constructed as follows:
a. Offset mount bottom panels to case in position where their bottom surfaces will align flush
with finished surface of adjoining ceiling and the bottom edges of case surrounding panels
will be recessed by the depth of, and concealed behind, overlapping ceiling finish.
b. Provide single or double top as standard with manufacturer.
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 ~ 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Motor: Instant reversing, gear drive motor of size and capacity recommended by screen
manufacturer with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal overload protection,
preset limit switches to automatically stop screen in "up" and "down" positions, and positive stop
-- action to prevent coasting. Locate motor in its own compartment as follows:
a. On right end of screen, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Screen: As indicated below, with top edge mounted on, and securely anchored to, rigid metal
roller supported by self-aligning bearings in brackets.
-- a. Material: Vinyl-coated glass fiber fabric.
b. Size of Viewing Surface: As indicated.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, electrically operated front projection
-- screens that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. End-Mounted-Motor-Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure:
a. "Executive Electrol," Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc.
b. "Ambassador," Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc.
_ PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
-- A. General: Install projection screens at locations indicated in compliance with screen manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Install front projection screens with screen cases in position and relationship to adjoining construction as
-- indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate, and in manner that produces a smoothly operating
screen with plumb and straight vertical edges and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when screen is
lowered.
1. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen, controls, limit switches, closure and other
operating components are in optimum functioning condition.
_ 3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage during construction. If despite such protection
damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in
their original, undamaged condition.
END OF SECTION 11132
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 11190 - SECURITY/DETENTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
A. Security Equipment Subcontractor:
1. Furnish and install Security/Detention Equipment indicated on drawings and in schedules.
2. Types of Security/Detention Equipment:
a. Bunk (floor mounted)
b. Mirror (wall mounted)
c. Access Panel
d. Pistol Locker
e. Safety clothes hooks
f. Day Room Table with individual seats
g. Hopper Pass
h. Security Screening
i. Door Shutter
3. Furnish to the General Contractor for installation all embedded anchors for Security/Detention Equipment.
4. Coordinate installation of embedded items with General Contractor.
B. General Contractor:
1. Install embedded anchors for Security/Detention Equipment in accordance with manufacturer's and security
equipment subcontractor's shop drawings.
2. Coordinate installation of embedded items with Security Equipment Subcontractor.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere:
1. 04200 - Unit Masonry
2. 09900 - Painting
3. 11196 - Security Hardware
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Security Equipment Subcontractor shall provide all security equipment as described in Sections 11190,
11191, 11195, 11196, 11198, and coordinate this equipment with his manufacturers/fabricators/installers, and
with work by others. Questions on the security equipment must be directed to the Security Equipment
Subcontractor before being directed to the General Contractor, Architect/Engineer or Owner.
B. Manufacturer's. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturers of Security/Detention Equipment shall have not less than five (5) years experience in the
design and fabrication of Detention Equipment.
2. Manufacturers shall have performed five (5) other installations which are commensurate in size and similar
in construction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data:
1. Submit five (5) copies of manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each type
of Security/Detention Equipment.
2. Distribute one approved copy to the Installer.
SECURITY/DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11190 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawing submittals for Security/Detention Equipment shall be submitted as an entire Section.
2. Submit one (1) sepia set and four (4) copies of Security/Detention Equipment showing layout, fasteners,
anchorage details and inserts and dimensional construction details for each type of Security/Detention
Equipment.
C. Owner's Tools:
1. Furnish five security fastener tools for each different type security fastener at time of Substantial
Completion.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A.Protect units and finishes from damage during shipping, storage, handling, installation and construction of other
work in the same area.
B. Wrap, crate and label each item for protection from damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SECURITY EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
A. Acceptable Manufacturer/Supplier of Security/Detention Equipment:
1. Folger Adam Company; Lemont, IL
2. Southern Steel Company; San Antonio, TX
3. Willo Products; Decatur, AL
4. SESCO; Montgomery, AL
5. Chief Industries; Grand Island, NE
6. Universal Security Products, Inc., Hayward, CA
7. Slate Security Systems Inc.; Hartselle, AL
8. ISI Detention Contracting Group Inc.; San Antonio, TX
9. Securtec Detention Equipment; Baton Rouge, LA
10. Southwestern Detention Equipment; Vernon, TX
B. Bunk Bed, Floor Mounted:
1. Model/Manufacturer:
a. No. 503D/Folger Adams (Modified)
b. No. 531/Southern Steel Co.
c. No. 584.00/Willo Products
2. Construction:
a. 10 gauge pressed steel legs.
b. Legs welded to frame.
c. Provide security type, wedge anchors for fastening to floor.
d. 16 gauge perforated sheet bottom.
3. Size: 76"L x 27"W.
4. Assembly shall be provided with one (1) shop coat of zinc chromate primer. Field finish paint, color as
selected by Architect.
C.Mirror with-Embedded Backer Plate:
1. Model/Manufacturer:
a. No. 408/Folger Adam
b. No. 430/Southern Steel Co.
SECURITY/DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11190 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Construction:
a. Mirror frame shall be 10 1/16" x 11 9/16", fabricated from 16 gauge cold finished steel, with 5/16"
-- inner and outer flanges and having a tensile strength of not less than 53,000 pounds per square inch.
Frame to have natural finish, chromium plated.
b. Mirror opening shall be 7 15/16" x 9 7/16", made of .031" sheet steel, polished to a high degree of
reflectivity, and chromium plated.
c. Include eight (8) chromium plated, torx head center pin, flat head machine screws, 1/4" diameter of
proper length for use in backer plate.
_ D. Access Panel ( DAP ):
1. Model/Manufacturer:
-- a. No. 416/Folger Adam
b. No. 590/Southern Steel Co.
c. No. 120.00/Willo Products
-- 2. Construction:
a. Angle Frame shall be fabricated from L 3 x 2 x 3/16" steel angles, with corrugated strap anchors and
~ 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle stops on 3 sides.
b. Door panel to be 3/16" steel with 1 1/4" flange on all four sides.
c. Equip the panel with two (2) hinges:
1) No. 3/Folger Adam
2) No. 201/Southern Steel Co.
3) No. 5013/ADTEC
4) No. W303/Willo Products
d. Equip the panel with one deadlock:
1) No. 12/Folger Adam
2) No. 1010-1/Southern Steel Co.
3) No. 4010/ADTEC
_ 3. Assembly shall be provided with one (1) shop coat of zinc chromate primer. Field finish paint, color as
selected by Architect.
E. Pistol Locker:
1. Model/Manufacturer:
a. Single-module locker system by American Locker Security Systems, Inc. or approved alternate.
F.Safety Shower/Clothes Hook Strip (4 Hooks):
1. Model/Manufacturer:
a. No. 1828/Acorn Engineering Co.
b. No. B-985/Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc.
2. Construction:
a. Provide 14 gauge, satin finish, type 304 stainless steel plate with stainless steel, ball-type collapsible
hooks.
G.Dayroom Table with Individual Seats:
1. Model/Manufacturer
SECURITY/DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11190 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
a. No. 412/Folger Adam
b. No. 514-4/Southern Steel Co.
c. No. 610.00/Willo Products
2. Construction:
a. Size of four (4) man units to be 5'- 3" x 5'- 3" with table height of 30". Table top to be 3'- 2" x 3'-
2" and seat top to be 12" in diameter. Cut table top corners at 45 degrees.
b. Table tops and seats to be smooth, true, level, and free of sharp edges.
c. Tops shall be 10 gauge steel, seats 14 gauge steel.
d. Table top to be reinforced with 3/8" plate. Seats to be reinforced with 1/4" plate.
e. Supports to be 3" x 3" x 3/16" tubing.
f. Base plate at floor with screws for anchoring to floor. (Tack weld nuts.)
g. One-piece, welded assembly; all welds neatly finished.
h. Two (2) man units to be half the size of four man units and be anchored to floor and to wall.
3.All steel components to be provided with one (1) shop coat of zinc chromate primer. Field finish paint,
color as selected by Architect.
H. Hopper Pass:
1. Product/Manufacturer:
a. Model PHE-1/Creative Industries Inc., Indianapolis, Ind.
2. Construction:
a. Size: 16" wide x 10-1/8" high x 7-3/4" deep.
b. Material: Stainless steel.
c. Class 1 bullet-resistant.
d. Hopper locks on staff side with a turn latch knob.
I. Security Screening:
1. Provide security screening as indicated on the drawings and in the schedule. Screening to consist of
tubular main frame, woven rod panels, concealment plates and other fittings to make a complete unit,
either fixed or operating.
2.Panels:
a. Product/Manufacturer:
1) Vantage-Wall/Kane Manufacturing Corp.
2) /Chamberlin-Barnhart Co., Inc.
3) Secure Woven Wire Mesh/Willow Products Co.
b. Main Frame:
1) Tubular 1 1/2" x 2 1/2" consisting of open channel with fixed concealment plates.
2) Open channels shall be formed 10 gauge sheet steel with individual slots to support woven rod
panels.
3) Supply frame braces as required (similar to main frame).
c. Woven Rod Panels:
1) Rod panels shall be fabricated from double crimped, 16-3 low carbon mild steel rod.
2) Panels shall be installed symmetrically into main frame.
3) Each individual rod shall be welded into each slot where it comacts the main frame.
4) Rods to be 1/4" diameter spaced at 2" on center each way.
SECURITY/DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11190 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
d. Concealment Plate:
1) Shall be made of 10 gauge sheet steel welded to the main frame.
3. Finish:
a. After fabrication all surfaces shall be vapor degreased and bonderized.
~_ b. Enclosed surface of the main frame, including concealment plates shall have a heavy coating of rust
inhibitive paint.
c. Exposed surfaces shall be one (1) shop coat of zinc chromate primer. Field finish paint, color as
selected by Architect.
J. Door Shutter:
1. Product/Manufacturer:
a. No. 265/Southern Steel.
2. Construction:
a. Manufacturer's Standard as modified herein.
b. 10 GA. mild steel.
c. Field install unit to door.
d. Fabricate shutter to cover vision panel and speak thru.
e. Door Shutter to include hand pull and positive latching device.
2.2 SECURITY/DETENTION EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Provide accessories, anchorage inserts and security fasteners for a complete tamperproof installation.
~-~' B. Security Fasteners:
1. Provide torx-head (star with center pin) security fasteners for anchoring work in security areas.
_ 2. Finish shall match that specified of the item anchored.
3. Provide tools for fastening devices.
4. Provide round head security screws for anchoring bunks and tables to floors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Security/Detention Equipment is to be installed. Notify the
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
B. Sanding smooth and touch-up painting of factory finished or factory primed items is the Installer's
responsibility.
C. Fill all voids, between materials of the security/detention equipment and embeds or other physical construction,
with low-mod gel, similar to Sikastix 323, by Sika.
D. All expenses carried by the Architect/Engineer in troubleshooting equipment problems caused by inadequate
workmanship or other form of poor performance on the part of a contractor, shall be borne by that Contractor.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect equipment and finishes until Substantial Completion.
SECURITY/DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11190 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Replace damaged equipment as directed by the Architect.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean equipment thoroughly prior to Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 11190
SECURITY/DETENTION EQUIPMENT 11190 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 11191 - CUSTOM/SECURITY HOLLOW METAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
A. Security Equipment Subcontractor:
1. Furnish to the General Contractor for installation:
a. Custom/Security hollow metal door frames and interior glazed frames as indicated.
b. All embedded and strap anchors, fasteners and support angles, as required, for the
installation of custom/security hollow metal frames.
2. Furnish and install Custom/Security hollow metal doors indicated on the drawings and
detention door schedules.
3.Make final electrical hook-ups to devices and control panels.
4. Coordinate hardware requirements, electric hardware and control devices; junction boxes
furnished by steel door manufacturer; and electrical requirements by Electrical Subcontractor.
5. Schedule installation of this work to coincide with erection of the masonry work on the project
so that the masonry contractor can mortar fill the custom/security hollow metal frames as the
masonry is erected. Security Equipment Subcontractor will be responsible for providing grout
holes and grouting of any frames that he can not deliver and erect with the masonry work.
6.Shall provide on-site supervision of hollow metal frame delivery and installation.
B. General Contractor:
1. Install Custom/Security hollow metal door frames and interior glazed frames as indicated.
2. Install all embedded anchors for door frames and interior glazed frames.
3. Receive Custom/Security hollow metal doors, frames and embedded anchors, and store per
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Electrical Subcontractor:
1. Coordinate electrical requirements with General Contractor and Security Equipment
Subcontractor.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere:
1. 04200 - Unit Masonry
2. 07900 - Joint Sealants
3. 09900 - Painting
4. 11195 - Security Glazing
5. 11196 - Security Hardware
6. 11198 - Security Control Systems
7. Division 16 - Electrical
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Security Equipment Subcontractor shall provide all security equipment as described in Sections
11190, 11191, 11195, 11196, 11198, and coordinate this equipment with his manufacturers/
fabricators/installers, and with work by others. Questions on the security equipmem must be
directed to the Security Equipment Subcontractor before being directed to the General Contractor,
Architect/Engineer or Owner.
B. Provide custom/security hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm specializing in the
production of this type of work.
CUSTOM SECURITY HOLLOW METAL WORK 11191 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
C. When a fire resistance classification is shown or scheduled for steel doors and frames, provide fire
rated doors investigated and tested as a fire door assembly, complete with type of hardware to be
used. Identify each fire door with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicated applicable fire rating
of steel doors.
D. When a fire resistance classifications is shown or scheduled for steel doors and/or frames containing
components that have not been tested as an assembly, the manufacturer shall construct the door and
frame components of the assembly in accord with the requirements of the testing laboratory for the
desired fire resistance rating, and certify in writing to the Owner, Enforcing Authority, Contractor
and the Architect that the door and frame components have been constructed in accord with the
testing laboratory requirements in lieu of label.
E. All detention doors for this Contract shall be constructed as specified and to meet the following tests.
The tests described below shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory, with data
attesting to construction of door. Doors for these tests shall be 14 ga. 3 feet by 7 feet (nominal
dimensions) not exceeding 225 lbs. in weight, or the largest door size on job. 4
1. Test A - Static Load Test:
a. Door shall be end supported and loaded at quarter points by a total load of 14,000 --
pounds for a period of one (1) minute. Door shall deflect not more than 3/4 inch and
shall rebound to within 0.25 inch of flatness.
2. Test B - Rack Load Test:
a. Door shall be secured at one short dimension and support at one other short dimension;
unsupported corner shall be loaded for 30 seconds with a load of 7,500 pounds. _',
Results shall be as follows: Unsupported corner's measured deflection shall not exceed
3.55 inches. Rebound to within 1.40 inches of flamess with no visual signs of weld
failure.
3. Impact Load Test:
a. 3'-0" x 7'-0" door, frame, and hardware assembly shall be constructed and rigidly
mounted in the vertical position such that the door and locking hardware are operable.
The door shall swing on 1 1/2 pair of full mortised butt hinges, and shall be locked
using a Folger Adam #60, 70 or 80 series lock or equal with bolt size not to exceed 2"
high x 3/4" wide, and latch throw not to exceed 5/8".
b. A door ram pendulum system capable of delivering consistent impacts of up to 200 ft.
lbf. shall be constructed such that impacts may be delivered to any area of the
assembly. The pendulum ram system shall be positioned opposite the door side of the
assembly such that the door swings away from the ram. While hanging at rest, the ram
shall be positioned such that the striking nose just touches the target area of the door.
The striking nose shall be made from C1010-1020 low carbon steel, the striking surface
area of which shall not exceed 4.0 sq. in.
c. With the door closed and locked and the above testing arrangement secured, the ~
following series of impacts shall be performed from the push side the assembly:
Position and Order Number Impact Energy
of Impacts of Impacts (ft.lbs. ~ --
(1) On the door within 400 200
6" of the bolt
(2) On the door within 50 200
6" of the middle hinge
d. The door shall remain closed and locked throughout the testing procedure, and the ....
assembly shall not be damaged such that the forcible egress can be obtained. After
testing is completed, the door shall be capable of being unlocked and operated such that
normal egress can be obtained.
CUSTOM SECURITY HOLLOW METAL WORK 11191 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
4. References:
a. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
b. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)
c. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA)
d. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's data:
1. Submit five (5) copies of manufacturer's data for fabrication and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawing submittals for Custom/Security Hollow Metal Work shall be submitted as an
entire Section.
2. Submit one (1) sepia set and four (4) copies of shop drawings for the fabrication and
installation of custom/security steel doors and frames. Hollow metal shop drawings shall use
the same door and elevation numbers as indicated on the Contra¢~ Dgcumcnt~.
3. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings,
reinforcement, factory fabricated accessories, details of construction, location and installation
requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections.
4.Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. Certificates:
I. Manufacturer shall submit five (5) certificates certifying that all materials meet specification
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle hollow metal work per manufacturer's requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER OF CUSTOM/SECURITY HOLLOW METAL
A. Chief Industries; Grand Island, NE
B. Habersham Metal Products Co.; Cornelia, GA
C. Trussbilt Inc.; St. Paul, MN
D. Overly Mfg. Co.; Greenburg, PA
E. Southern Steel Co.; San Antonio, TX
F. Sesco; Montgomery, AL
G. Steel Door Industries, Inc.; San Antonio, TX
H. Texsteel Industries; Harlingen, TX.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel fabrications:
1. Cold rolled carbon steel complying with ASTM A366 and ASTM A568.
2. Galvanized steel sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying
with ASTM A526, with ASTM A525, G60 zinc coating mill phosphatized.
B. Supports, anchors and fasteners:
1. Manufacturer's standard, not less than 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel.
2. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be torx-head (star with center pin) security type.
C. Shop Applied Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive enamel.
CUSTOM SECURITY HOLLOW METAL WORK 11191 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or
buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles as shown on drawings.
B. After fabrication, interior doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned, degreased, bonderized and
provided with one coat of primer.
C. Fabricate exterior doors, panels and frames from galvanized sheet steel.
D. Clean, treat, and paint exposed, galvanized surfaces of fabricated hollow metal units.
E. Finish Hardware and Security Items Preparation:
1. Templates for all hardware attachments and security items are to be provided by the hardware
suppliers to the Security Equipment Subcontractor for transmittal to the frame and door
manufacturer.
2. Fabricate frames with mitered corners, welded and ground smooth. Frames and doors shall
be mortised, reinforced, machined and prepared for all hardware.
2.4 STEEL DOORS
A. Provide metal doors of the types and styles indicated on the drawings and schedules.
B. All metal doors shall have a flush closed top edge and bottom edge.
C. Size/Thickness/Type: See Detention Door Schedule
D. Gauge: 14 gauge
E. Coordinate electric hardware requirements to be integrally built into the door with the hardware
requirements.
F. Internal Core Construction: One of the following two (2) types may be used:
1. Steel stiffened by continuous vertically formed steel hat sections which, upon assembly, shall
span the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. These stiffeners shall be of
18 gauge minimum to meet the performance standards established in the quality control section
of this specification, spaced such that the vertical interior webs shall be no more than 4" o.c.
and securely fastened to both face sheets and together by spot welds spaced a minimum of 3"
o.c. vertically. Spaces between stiffeners shall be filled with 3.0 lbs./cu, ft. fiberglass or
mineral rockwool bart-type material.
2. Continuous, inner-reinforcement full height and width shall be true truss design with triangular
form, the shape of which cannot be altered without changing the length of the sides. Flat
apexes shall be resistance spot welded on 2 3/4" centers horizontally and 3" centers vertically.
Each flute of reinforcement to be fire and sound insulated with six (6) pound density Rock
Wool.
G. The top and bottom edges shall be closed with a continuous channel, not less than 12 gauge welded
to both face sheets a minimum of 4" o.c. The 12 gauge closing end channel shall be reinforced with
a full width 12 gauge channel and continuously welded to the vertical edge of the door at all four
corners.
H. Edges: The vertical edges shall be reinforced by a continuous steel channel, not less than 12 gauge,
extending the full length of the door. Edge seams shall be continuously welded and finished smooth
such that there are no visible seams. Lock and hinge edges shall be beveled 1/8" in 2".
I. Exterior Doors:
1. Fabricate exterior doors of two outer, galvanized, stretcher- leveled, steel sheets. Construct
doors with smooth, flush surfaces with-out visible joints or seams or exposed faces or stile
edges, except around glazed or louvered panel inserts. Provide weep hole openings in the
bottom of exterior doors to permit the escape of entrapped moisture.
CUSTOM SECURITY HOLLOW METAL WORK 11191 - 4 _
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
J. Interior Doors:
1. Fabricate interior doors of two outer, cold-rolled, stretcherleveled, steel sheets. Construct
doors with smooth, flush surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces or stile
edges.
K. Finish Hardware Reinforcement: Reinforce doors for required finish hardware, as follows:
1. Hinges: Steel plate 3/16" minimum thick x 10" minimum, secured by spot-welds.
2. Mortise Locksets and Dead Bolts: 3/16" thick steel sheet, welded to inside of door on
detention side (cell side) and 3/16" thick steel lock mounting plate, beveled at edges, applied
to the surface of the door with security screws.
3. Cylinder Locks: 12 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than 2 spot-welds.
4. Flush Bolts: 12 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than 2 spot-welds.
5. Surface-Applied Closers: 12 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than 6 spot-welds.
6. Push Plates and Bars: 16 gauge steel sheet, (except when through bolts are shown or
specified), secured with not less than 2 spot-welds.
7. Surface Panic Devices: 14 gauge sheet steel (except when through bolts are shown or
specified), secured with not less than 2 spot-welds.
8. Automatic Door Bottoms: Reinforce for mortise-type units with 12 gauge steel, and 16 gauge
for surface-applied units.
9. Vision Panels: 12 gauge steel sheet around perimeter, welded 3" o.c., field installed.
10. Removable glass stops shall consist of 10 gauge angle securely fastened to the frame using
torx-head (star with center pin) security screws of the size, strength and spacing necessary to
satisfy impact performance criteria.
2.5 STEEL FRAMES
A. Provide custom/security hollow metal frames of the types and styles indicated on the drawings or
schedules, interior and exterior.
B. Provide custom/security hollow metal frames for doors, windows, transoms, sidelights, borrowed
lights and other openings, as shown on the drawings. Conceal all anchorage unless otherwise noted.
C. Fabricate frames with mitered comers welded through head inside comer and miter ground smooth.
D. All frames shall be provided with approved jamb anchors (4 per jamb minimum), floor knees, plaster
boxes (26 ga. steel minimum) removable angle spreaders, and door silencers (3 Glyun Johnson GJ64
silencers per door minimum) by the manufacturer.
E. Types: See Door Schedule and Frame Elevations
F. Gauge: 12 gauge
G. Finish Hardware Reinforcement: Reinforce frames for required finish hardware, as follows:
1. Hinges and Pivots: Steel plate 3/16" minimum thick x minimum 10" minimum.
2. Provide an additional 3/16" thick angle back up drilled and tapped to accommodate security
screws, welded to reinforcing and inside trim of frame.
3. Strike Plate Clips: Steel plate 3/16" thick x 1 1/2" wide x 3" long.
4. Surface-Applied Closers: 12 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than 6 spot-welds.
H. Provide lock pockets as shown and required.
I. Removable glass stops shall consist of 10 gauge angles securely fastened to the frame using torx-head
(star with center pin) security screws of the size, strength and spacing necessary to satisfy impact
performance criteria. During shipment of these assemblies non-security fasteners shall be substituted
to hold glass stops in place. The security fasteners shall be included in the same shipment but
packaged separately for protection until used to stop in the required glazing.
J. Provide gr.out openings for all vertical hollow metal frames sections that are not accessible for
CUSTOM SECURITY HOLLOW METAL WORK 11191 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
grouting due to steel lintels or other obstructions.
2.6 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Custom/security hollow metal fabricator shall furnish and install junction boxes and conduit between
junction boxes in door frames for electric locks, door position switches, emergency release buttons,
and intercom call stations; coordinate special hardware requirements with the Electrical
Subcontractor and Security Hardware Subcontractor.
B. See Door Schedules, Security Hardware Specification Section and Details.
2.7 SECURITY/DETENTION EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Provide accessories, anchorage inserts and security fasteners for a complete, tamperproof
installation.
B. Security Fasteners:
1. Provide torx-head (star design with center pin) security fasteners for anchoring work in
security areas. Provide one hundred (100) additional security glazing stop fasteners.
2. Finish shall match that specified of the item anchored.
3. Provide five (5) sets of tools for security fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to be installed. Notify the
Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer's
data, and as herein specified.
B. Placing Frames:
1. Comply with the provisions of S.D.I. 105.
2. Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in
position, plumbed and aligned (using metal shims), and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders _
leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
3. Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.
4. Mortar fill solid all custom/security hollow metal frame jambs, sill and head sections. Sill
shall be packed solid with mortar before setting of frame. Provide grout openings in hollow
metal frames where access to fill frames may be restricted due to steel lintels or other
obstructions.
5. Prior to filling frames with mortar, a protective paint coating of bitumastic paint, similar to
Koppers Bimmastic No. 50, shall be applied. -~'
6. In masonry construction, locate 4 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. Setting of
anchors and mortar filling of frames as specified in masonry section.
C. Door Installation:
1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, within clearances specified in
S.D.I. 100.
a. Jambs and head: 3/32"
b. Meeting edges, pair of doors: 1/8"
c. Bottom: 3/8" where no carpet or threshold.
d. Bottom: 1/8" at threshold or carpet.
CUSTOM SECURITY HOLLOW METAL WORK 11191 - 6 ,.~
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.
D. All expenses incurred by the Architect/Engineer in troubleshooting Custom/Security Hollow Metal
Work problems, caused by inadequate workmanship or other form of poor performance onthe part
of a contractor, shall be borne by that Contractor.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Final Adjustments:
1. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged.
2. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas
of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air drying primer.
END OF SECTION 11191
. CUSTOM SECURITY HOLLOW METAL WORK 11191 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 1 ! 195 - SECURITY GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.! WORK INCLUDES
A. Security Equipment Subcontractor:
1. Provide and install security glass and glazing work indicated on the Drawings.
2. Applications of security glass and glazing include the following:
a. Security glazing of doors.
b. Security glazing of interior partitions, and miscellaneous interior security glazing.
B. General Contractor:
1. Coordinate efforts of security glazing with other glazing work and the installation of security hollow
metal work.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere:
1. 07900 - Joint Sealants
2. 11191 - Custom/Security Hollow Metal Work
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Security Equipment Subcontractor shall provide all security equipment as described in Sections 11190,
11191, 11195, 11196, 11198, and coordinate this equipment with his manufacturers/fabricators/installers,
and with work by others. Questions on the security equipment must be directed to the Security Equipment
Subcontractor before being directed to the General Contractor, Architect/Engineer or Owner.
B. Security Glass: Comply with multiple impact and high energy impact test, UL Report No. BP-1154 and
UL Standard No. 972.
C. Bullet Resistant Glass: Tests, listed and labeled by UL for the required rating.
D. Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Material; 42 FR 1428; 16 CFR Part 1201.
E. Testing Requirements for Security Glazing Types SG-7, and SG-8.
1. Temperature and Drop Dart Test:
a. Four (4) coupons shall be tested, one at each temperature of -25 degrees, 0 degrees, +75
degrees, and + 140 degrees F.
b. Each coupon shall be 12" x 12" and shall be soaked in an environment chamber set at the
test temperature (+5 degrees F.) for a minimum of two hours.
c. The impact face of the dart shall be flat and have a nominal diameter of 2". The lite shall
be supported by a 1" maximum shelf along all four (4) edges and shall have a minimum of
2" clearance from the floor. All impacts shall occur in the approximate center of the
coupon.
d. The security glazing shall withstand five (5) hits from a 20 lb. dart falling from 16 ft. (320
ft. lbs. of energy).
e. The first impact shall occur within one minute after removal from the environment chamber
and one minute allowed for each subsequent impact.
f. Should the tested glazing have a plastic core material exposure of over 10% of its surface
after Drop Dart Test, this shall constitute failure.
g. Results:
_ SECURITY GLASS AND GLAZING 11195 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
l) Surface fractures may occur on either surface, however, no part may be fractured
through all layers.
2) The glazing shall not collapse or fold inward. Fold inward will be determined by
firmly mounting the glazing in a vise along one edge, and applying physical pressure
along the opposite edge.
3)The dart shall not be allowed to pass through in any manner whatsoever.
4) Broken glass shall adhere strongly to the adjacent interlayer such that it is not possible
to remove glass shards large enough to be used as a deadly weapon.
2. Edge Disengagement Test, Security Glazing Types SG-7, and SG-8:
a. One security glass lite 3' x 4' shall be mounted with 1" edge engagement on all sides. A
single point ram load of 3,000 lbs. shall be hydraulically applied to the approximate center
of the lite.
b. Results: Edge disengagement of any lite in any area will not be acceptable.
c. The lite shall not collapse, fold inward, or allow the ram to pass through whatsoever.
3. Maintenance Serviceability Test, All Laminated and Glass-Clad Polycarbonate Glazing Types: A
sharp metallic object (key) shall leave no permanent mark when gouged across the surface of
sample. No special procedures shall be necessary for window cleaning.
F. Attack Tests, Security Glazing Types SG-7, and SG-8:
Item Time
1. BALLISTIC ATTACK: 3 random hits with a minimum 12" spacing As required
by a 3.57 magnum revolver with a 2-1/2" barrel using 158 gr. JSP Bullet.
Penetration constitutes failure. Barrel length and bullet weight are
maximum values. Range 15-25 feet.
2. Attack sample with 2 lb. hammer 8 Minutes
3. Attack sample with 2 lb. hammer and cold chisel. 2 Minutes
4. Attack sample with 10 lb. sledge hammer. 7 Minutes
5. Attack sample with claw hammer. 3 Minutes
6. Attack sample with 3' pipe. 6 Minutes
7. Attack sample with 2 lb. hammer and cold chisel. 1 Minute
8. Attack sample with a flammable aerosol can used as a torch; use 1 Minute
safety precautions.
9. Remove source of flame and let material self-extinguish. 5 Minutes
10. Attack sample with 10 lb. sledge hammer. 2 Minutes
Physical Assault 30 Minutes
G. Failure Mode: Cause for Rejection of Part/Design:
1. 8" x 8" HOLE: body passage.
2. Bullet penetration.
3. Foil witness plate penetration - ballistic resistant glazing only.
4. Glass shards large enough to constitute a life threatening weapon as result of test.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data, Glass:
1. Submit FIVE (5) copies of manufacturer' s specifications and installation instructions for each type
of glass, setting blocks, sealants and gaskets required.
2.Include test data substantiating that glass complies with specified requirements.
3.Indicate by copy of transmittal that Glazier has received copy of handling and glazing instructions.
B. Manufacturer's Data, Glazing Materials:
1. Submit five (5) copies of manufacturer's specifications, and installation instructions for each type
SECURITY GLASS AND GLAZING 11195 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
of glazing sealant, tape compound, gasket and associated miscellaneous material required. Include
manufacturer's published data, or letter of certification, or certified test laboratory report indicating
that each material complies with the requirements and is intended generally for the applications
shown.
2. Show by transmittal that one copy of each recommendation and instruction has been distributed to
the Glazier.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawings submittals for Security Glass and Glazing shall be submitted as an entire section.
2. Submit 2, 10" x 12" samples of each type of glass required.
3. Submit 3, 12" long samples of each type of glazing sealant and gasket required.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of liquid sealants under adverse weather conditions,
or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for sealant installation.
1.6 GUARANTEES
A. Security Glass:
1. Provide Owner a five (5) year guarantee for materials and labor from date of Substantial
Completion for all security glazing.
2. Guarantee shall include delamination.
3. The guarantee shall be by the manufacturer, co-signed by the Installer and Security Equipment
Subcontractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS
A. Security Glass:
1. Comply with ANSI standard Z-97.1-1975 Safety Glazing Code.
2. Comply with and pass UL multiple impact test.
3. Comply with and pass UL high energy impact test.
2.2 SECURITY GLAZING
A. Glass Clad Polycarbonate:
1. Glazing Types:
a. Type S(37: 3/4" + thick; consisting of 1/8" tempered or chemically strengthened glass;
1/4" polycarbonate core; 1/8" polycarbonate core, and 1/8" chemically
strengthened glass. Laminated by three layers of special interlayer material.
b. Type SG-8: 7/8" + thick; consisting of 1/8" tempered or chemically strengthened glass;
1/4" polycarbonate core; 1/8" polycarbonate core, and 1/4" wire glass (threat
side). Laminated by three layers of special interlayer material. Interior
applied tinted "Film" to be installed after occupancy to all SG-8. Color to be
selected by Owner under supervision of Architect.
2. Product/Manufacturer:
a. SAFETEE Clad/Falconer Glass industries
b. Secur-Tem Plus Poly/Globe-Amerada glass Co.
c. Toroglas/Advanced Glass Systems Corp., Trumbauersville, PA
d. Madico Window Film/Madico, Inc.; Woburn, MA
e. LLUMAR Solar Control Window Film/Martin Processing, Inc.; Martinsville, VA (703)
62%1711
SECURITY GLASS AND GLAZING 11195 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
f. Texas Detention Glazing.
g. Viracon/Viracon Inc.
2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS/COMPOUNDS
A. Basic Requirements:
1. Provide black exposed glazing materials, unless another color is indicated, or unless another color
as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
2. Provide hardness of materials as recommended by the manufacturer for the required application and
condition of installation in each case.
3. Provide only compounds which are known (proven) to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted.
4. Provide sealants recommended by manufacturer of glazing type specified.
5. Provide sealant bead along entire glazing perimeter, between glazing and stops (removable and
nonremovable), Installed with a substantial "wash" away from the glass, providing a water-tight seal
from detergents and cleaning solutions.
6. Project all glazing materials from paints and primers.
B. Silicone Rubber Glazing Sealant:
1. Silicone rubber, one part elastomeric sealant, complying with FS TTS001543, Class A. Provide
acid-type for porous channel surfaces, and provide non-acid type for porous channel surfaces (where
any of the channel surfaces are porous).
C. Two Component Polysulfide Glazing Sealant:
1. Polysulfide 2 part elastomeric sealant, complying with FS TTS00227, Class A, Type 2 (non-sag);
with container bearing Thiokol Chemical Corp. seal of approval; compounded by manufacturer
specifically for glazing.
D. Butyl Rubber Glazing Tape:
I. Partly vulcanized, self adhesive, non staining, elastomeric butyl rubber tape, 98 % solids, intended
for 35 % compression, nonappreciable deterioration for 3000 hour test in Atlas
Weatherometer.
E. One Component Urethane Glazing Sealant:
1. Solvent based, one component polyurethane; compounded specifically for glazing; complying with
FS TTS00230, Class A, Type 11.
F. Acrylic Latex Glazing Compound:
1. Modified latex rubber and acrylic emulsion polymer, compounded specifically as a glazing sealant
with permanent flexibility (non-hardening), non-staining and non-bleeding.
G. Butyl Rubber Glazing Sealant:
1. Polymerized butyl rubber compound with inert fillers and pigments, solvent based with 75 % solids,
non-sag, tack-free within 24 hours, paintable, non-staining.
H. Preformed Butyl Rubber Glazing Sealant:
1. Tape or ribbon (coiled on release paper) of polymerized butyl, or mixture of butyl and
polyisobutylene, compounded with inert fillers and pigments, solvent based with minimum of 95 %
solids, with thread or fabric reinforcement, tack-free within 24 hours, paintable, non-staining.
2. Provide combination tape and encased continuous rubber shim, of approximately 50 durometer
hardness.
SECURITY GLASS AND GLAZING 11195 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
I. Oil Based Face Glazing Compound:
1. FS TTG410, type and consistency recommended by manufacturer for application shown.
2.4 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Provide glazing gaskets as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Structural Rubber Glazing Gaskets:
1. Neoprene extrusions with injection molded corner units, fabricated into frames, with either integral
or separate locking strips (zippers); comply with ASTM C542, black.
C. Molded Neoprene Glazing Gaskets:
1. Molded or extruded neoprene gaskets of the profile and hardness required for watertight
construction; comply with ASTM D 2000 designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 620, black.
D. Polyvinyl Chloride Glazing Gaskets:
1. Extruded, flexible PVC gaskets of the profile and hardness required for watertight construction
comply with ASTM D 2287.
E. Vinyl Foam Glazing Tape:
1. Closed cell, flexible, self adhesive, non-extruding, polyvinyl chloride foam tape; recommended by
manufacturer for exterior, exposed, watertight, installation of glass, with only nominal pressure in
the glazing channel, comply with ASTM D 1667.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 7090 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used.
B. Spacers: Neoprene 4050 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used.
C. Compressible Backer Rod: Closed cell or waterproof jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic
foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 510 psi compression strength
for 25 % deflection.
D. Self-adhesive, Compressible Filler: Closed cell, polyvinyl cloride foam compressible t'filer, size -1/2" thick
x full depth of intermediate composite tube section (see detail), color - black. Provide with pressure-
sensitive adhesive on one side for attachment to tube section (see detail). Compressible filler as
manufacturered by Tremco.
E. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
F. Exposed Security Fasteners:
1. Provide torx-head center pin security fasteners for anchoring work in exposed security areas.
2. Finish shall match that specified of the item anchored.
3. Provide three (3) sets of tools for security fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and the conditions
under which the glazing is to be performed. Notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental
to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
SECURITY GLASS AND GLAZING 11195 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.2 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE
A. Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass is required, except as otherwise shown. Each
installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash
and doors) without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.
B. Protect glass from edge damage at all times during handling, installation and operations of the building.
C. Glazing channel dimensions are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum
edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. The Glazier is responsible
for correct size for each opening, within the tolerance and necessary dimensions established.
D. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other
materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except
where manufacturer's technical representatives direct otherwise.
E. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown and specified
otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by the manufacturers of the glass and glazing
materials.
F. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate any which have observable edge
damage or face imperfections
G. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible.
Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces.
H. Cut and install colored (tinted) glass as recommended in "Technical Services Report No. 104" by PPG
Industries.
I. Install polysulfide sealants as recommended by Thiokol Chemical Corp., except as otherwise recommended
by the sealant manufacturer.
J. All expenses carried by the Architect/Engineer in troubleshooting Security Glass and Glazing problems,
caused by inadequate workmanship or other form of poor performance on the part of a contractor, shall
be borne by that Contractor.
3.3 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING
A. Clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces
wherever elastomeric sealants are used.
B. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.4 GLAZING
A. Comply with glass, window and frame manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install setting blocks, of proper size, at quarter points of sill rabbet. Set blocks in thin course of the
heelbead compound, if any.
C. Glazing shall be set with equal bearing for entire width.
D. Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 50 inches,
except where gaskets are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use
thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
E. Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or installing filler rods
in the channel at the heel of jambs and head (do not leave voids in the sill channels) except as otherwise
SECURITY GLASS AND GLAZING 11195 - 6 _
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
indicated, depending on light size, thickness and type of glass, and complying with manufacturer's
recommendations.
F. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass which is tempered, heat strengthened, or coated.
G. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass
and channel surfaces.
H. Provide sealant bead along entire glazing perimeter, between glazing and stops (removable and
nonremovable), installed with a substantial "wash" away from the glass, providing a water-tight seal from
detergents and cleaning solutions.
I. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and
eliminate stains and discolorations.
J. Where wedge shaped gaskets are driven into one side of the channel to pressurize the sealant or gasket on
the opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when subjected to
dynamic movement. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesive, including
embedment of gasket tail in cured heel bead.
K. Glaze units at the building site.
L. Gasket Glazing: Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used for channel glazing,
so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in the glazing system.
3.5 CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations,
to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.
B. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers of any type to surfaces of glass.
C. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during
the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
D. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction, so that it will not be damaged by
corrosive action and will not contribute (by washoff) to the deterioration of glazing materials and other
work.
E. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to Owner's acceptance of the work in each
area. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations. Washing shall be done by a professional firm.
END OF SECTION 1 ! 195
SECURITY GLASS AND GLAZING 11195 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 11196 - SECURITY HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
A. Security Equipment Subcontractor:
1. Furnish and install security hardware as indicated in the schedules.
2. See door schedule and door details; Custom/Security Hollow Metal Work Section 11191; and Security
Control Systems Section 11198.
3. Make f'mal electrical hook-up at door and control panels.
4. Install conduit, fittings, speaker back boxes and junction boxes, as directed by Security Controls
Subcontractor.
5. Furnish and install power wiring, conduit, fittings and mortar boxes as required for equipment described
within this section.
B. General Contractor:
1. Coordinate installation of security hardware with Security Equipment Subcontractor and electrical
subcontractor.
C. Electrical Subontractor:
1. Coordinate electrical requirements with General Contractor and Security Equipment Subcontractor.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere:
1. 11190 - Detention Equipment
2. 11191 - Custom/Security Hollow Metal Work
3. 11198 - Security Control Systems
4. Division 16 - Electrical
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Security Equipment Subcontractor shall provide all security equipment as described in Sections 11190,
11191, 11195, 11196, 11198 and the coordination of this equipment with his manufacturers/
fabricators/installers, and with work by others. Questions on the security equipment, must be directed to the
Security Equipment Subcontractor before being directed to the General Contractor, Architect/Engineer or
Owner.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
I. Manufacturer of security hardware shall be nationally recognized firm specializing in the design and
manufacture of this type of equipment for a period of not less than five (5) years.
C. Supplier/Installer Qualifications:
1, Supplier/Installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the business of the distribution and
installation of electro-mechanical and finish hardwares.
D. References:
1. American Society of Testing & Materials (ASTM).
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
3. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA).
4. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).
5. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM).
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
SECURITY HARDWARE 11196 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
7. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data:
1.Submit five (5) copies of product specification, fabrication and installation instructions for each hardware
item used.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings submittals for Security Hardware shall be submitted as an entire section.
2. Submit one (1) sepia set and four (4) copies of a horizontal hardware schedule including all miscellaneous
items. Give openings by door number and location, manufacturer's names, catalog numbers, keying
information, materials, and finish in the scheduling sequence and format as recommended by the security
hardware manufacturer.
3.The Architect/Engineer's approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor or Supplier of responsibility for
errors or omissions which it might contain.
C. Samples:
1. Upon Architect/Engineer's request submit samples showing function, finish and design of proposed
hardware items. All samples remain supplier's property and will be returned to him prior to Project
completion.
D. Samples and Templates:
1. If required, the Hardware Supplier shall furnish physical hardware and backboxes to the door and frame
manufacturer for application.
E. Keying Schedule:
1. Submit keying system schedule for approval by Architect. See Article 2.05, Key Control in this section.
F. Maintenance Manual:
1. Submit a bound complete maintenance and repair parts drawings for all security and electro-mechanical
products supplied in this section.
2. Provide on site review of this manual and spare parts with the Owner's designated representative.
3. Allow one (8-hour) day at Owner's convenience (near Substantial Completion).
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver all items in manufacturer's original package. Each item individually packaged and carefully
marked for intended opening and use. Each item complete with all necessary screws, bolts, keys, instructions,
and where necessary, installation templates.
B. Storage: Store off floor in dry area of building out of way of other work in progress. Provide maximum
protection against loss and damage.
C. Handling: Handle all items in a manner to prevent damage. Marred, defaced, damaged and defective items
will be rejected.
SECURITY HARDWARE 11196 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Catalog numbers of the first manufacturer listed have been used to establish the quality required. The only
other manufacturers approved are listed. Other manufacturers seeking approval shall do so in writing per
General Requirements and shall list exact catalog numbers and description of the items he proposes to furnish.
ITEM _1 2 3 4_
Hinges Folger Adam Southern Steel Hager Stanley
Closers LCN Norton Yale
Stops H.B. Ives Glynn-Johnson
Holders,
Surface
Bolts Glynn-Johnson Checkmate
Push, Pull Hiawatha
Thresholds Pemko Reese Zero
Weatherstrip Pemko Reese Zero
Security
Hardware Folger-Adam Southern Steel ADTEC Brinks
B. DESIGNATIONS: Following abbreviations identify listed manufacturers.
ADTEC ADTEC, Inc.; San Antonio, TX
Brinks R.R. Brink; Shorewood, IL
Checkmate Rixson, Inc.; Franklin Park, IL
Folger Adam Folger Adam Co.; Lemont, IL
Glynn-Johnson Glynn-Johnson Corp.; Chicago, IL
Hager Hager Hinge Co.; St. Louis, MO
Hiawatha Hiawatha Metalcraft, Inc.; Minneapolis, MN
Ives H.B. Ives Div.; New Haven, CT
LCN LCN Closers; Princeton, IL
Norton Norton Closer Div.; Charlotte, NC
Pernko Pemko Mfg. Co.; Emeryville, CA
Reese Reese Enterprises; Rosemount, MN
Southern Steel Southern Steel Co.; San Antonio, TX
Zero Zero Weatherstripping; Bronx, NY
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Screws, Fasteners and Tools:
1. Furnish exposed fasteners to match item fastened. Make fastener of the same metal as item fastened, except
use plated brass or stainless steel for all aluminum items. Provide twenty (20) spares of each type of
fastener used for anchoring hardware.
2. Provide torx-head (star design with center pin) security fasteners for fasteners on all security hardware,
regardless of manufacturer. Furnish five (5) tool holders and five (5) bits for each different size screw.
Holders and bits shall be left at project after installation and become property of the user.
3.Provide two (2) alignment tools for medium security locks.
B. Hinges:
1. Heavy Duty, 4 1/2 FM:
a. Series/Manufacturer:
(1) 4 1/2 FM-ICS/Folger Adam
(2) 204 FM/Southern Steel Co.
(3) 5014 FM/Adtec
b. Description:
SECURITY HARDWARE 11196 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
(1) 4 1/2 x 4 1/2, 3/16" thick leaves.
(2) Cast stainless steel leaves, non-removable stainless steel pins, stainless steel ball bearings, three
knuckle with "HT" hospital tips.
(3) Provide quantities as follows:
(a) Doors less than 5 feet high 1 Pair
(b) Doors over 5 feet to 7 feet 6 inches 1-1/2 Pair
(c) Doors over 7 feet 6 inches to 10 feet 2 Pair
C. Security Locks
1. Maximum Security - Electrical Operation:
a. Series/Manufacturer:
(1) 120 M/Folger Adam
(2) 2124/ADTEC
(3) 5020/Brink
(4) 10120/Southern Steel Co.
b. Frame mounted 24 VDC, continuous duty motor actuated.
c. Bolt is retracted by energized motor by a pushbutton at control panel and remains retracted until door
is opened.
d. Bolt is retracted by energized motor by a push button at control panel in emergency release mode and
remains retracted until emergency release is reset.
e. Bolt is retracted manually by key.
f. Provide galvanized at exterior installations.
g. Provide interlock feature as required.
h. Internal switches monitor status of bolt.
2. Maximum Security - Mechanical Operation: (Plumbing Chase Doors)
a. Series/Manufacturer:
(1) 12/Folger Adam
(2) 1010-1/Southern Steel Co.
(3) 4010/ADTEC
(4) 9010-1/Brinks
b. Door mounted, deadbolt.
c. Lever tumbler, key outside only.
d. Supply with lock mounting, escutcheon and security screws.
D. Closers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. LCN
b. Norton
c. Yale
2. Description:
a. All door closers shall be one manufacturer and carry a five year warranty except electrical components
which carry a two year warranty. All closers shall be inspected after installation by a factory
representative to insure proper adjustment and operation.
b. Spring power shall be adjustable. Spring power shall provide an opening force range of 8 to 15 pounds
from 0 degrees to 90 degrees.
c. Closers shall have separate adjustmems for latch speed, general speed, general speed and back check.
d. Provide all brackets, drop plates, spacer blocks and any accessory required to insure proper
SECURITY HARDWARE 11196 - 4 -
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
installation, including any special arms required for integration with the door position switch.
E. Push Plates:
1. Series/Manufacturer:
a. 1456/Hiawatha
b. 755 Special/Brooldine
2. 3/16" thick stainless steel, 3 1/2" W. x 16" H. with 7/8" lip projection at bottom. Attach with torx head
center pin stainless steel security screws.
F. Pull - Loop:
1. Series/Manufacturer:
a. No. 2/Folger Adam
b. 212-C/Southern Steel Co.
c. S602/Sesco
2. Cast Manganese bronze, satin chrome plated. Overall length 8 3/4" x 1 I/2" clearance. Fasteners shall
be 2-3/8" - 6 x 3/4" stainless steel torx head center pin security screws.
G. Kickplates:
1. Kickplates shall be .050 stainless steel with eased edges. 10 inches high (except reduce height 1/2 inch less
than bottom rail when required) x 2 inches less than door width on singles and 1 inch less on pairs.
Fasteners shall be full threaded, undercut, stainless steel hex-head with center pin security screws. Typical
for all Architectural hardware fastened to a security door and frame.
H. Door Stops:
Glynn-Johnson
1. Floor FB185S
2. Floor stops shall be placed to maintain six (6) inches minimum between the leading edges of the door and
wall when door is fully open.
I. Thresholds:
1. Series/Manufacturer:
a. 271A- 5"/Pemko
b. 5205A - 5'/Reese
c. 655 - 5"/Zero
2. Aluminum, secured with stainless steel, torx-head security screws.
J.Weatherstripping/Sound Seals:
I. Manufacturer:
a. Pemko
b. Reese
c. Zero
2. Extruded anodized aluminum with neoprene seal.
2.3 FINISHES
US Symbol ANSI Symbol Descriptiorl
Hinges, Exterior US32D 630 Satin Stainless Steel
SECURITY HARDWARE 11196 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
Hinges, Interior US26D 626 Satin Chrome
Locks & Pulis US26D 626 Satin Chrome
Closers AL 689 Aluminum Painted
Push, Kick US32D 630 Satin Stainless Steel
Stops US26D 626 Satin Chrome
2.4 CYLINDERS, KEYS AND KEYING
A. The security locks will incorporate two (2) separate keying systems; one for lever tumbler (Paracentric) and
one for pin tumbler (mogul cylinder) locks. Each keying system's keys shall be dye stamped for identification;
corresponding to the hardware supplier's final keying chart.
B. Lever tumbler locks shall be keyed alike or different as directed. Provide cut keys as required.
C. Mogul cylinder locks shall be master keyed as directed. Provide cut change keys, and master keys as required.
D. For all individual key designations, to each required individual Key Cabinet, there shall be two (2) keys
provided. For each master key designation, there shall be three (3) keys for each required individual key
cabinet.
2.5 KEY CONTROL
A.Key control system shall be furnished with a capacity of 1.75 times the number of individual key designations
and shall be a complete dual tag system.
B. Cabinet shall have concealed-type hinge and rounded sides.
C.Panels must have individual hook and label pockets formed as an integral part of the panel, for both paxacentric
and mogul key types, as required.
D.Tags of two types shall be provided, one set for permanent attachment of file key without the use of tools and
the other set with snaphook holding at least four keys.
E. Indexing shall be provided to record information concerning locks and keys alphabetically.
F. Permanent Loan Registry shall be furnished to protect identity of key borrowers while Receipt Tabs shall be
supplied for temporary loan.
G.Provide key cabinets as follows:
1. Jailer Office:
a. Working Storage - Telkee Big Head TBH
H.Keys shall not leave the manufacturer's custody without prior arrangements for delivery and authorization from
the Contractor.
2.6 SECURITY SPARE LOCKS AND LOCK PARTS
A. Shall be provided for the Owners' stock as follows:
2 Motors 120 Series
One repair parts kit for 120 Series locks, containing:
Springs, micro switches, screws, nuts and washers.
One parts kit containing an assortment (minimum 25) of all security screws used on this project.
Five complete sets of security screw drivers for all sizes of security screws used on this project.
One repair parts list and assembly drawings bound in a manual for all security products supplied in this section.
SECURITY HARDWARE 11196 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine doors, frames and hardware for damage, defects, and suitability for intended use. Restore all parts
or items found damaged, defective, or inadequate, or replace with good material before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Heights given are center line heights up from finish floor unless stated; heights given
"Number to Number" indicate that all shall be at one height within limits given. Where heights of items are
not listed, mount in accord with recommendations of DHI.
1. Bottom hinge 10 to 13 inches
2. Top hinge 6 to 8 inches down from head
3. Intermediate hinges Equally spaced
4. Door knob 36 to 40 5/16 inches
5. Door pull 42 to 45 inches
B. Fitting: Fit all hardware accurately and properly. Remove exposed parts until after painter's fmishing is
completed, then reinstall. Securely fasten all fixed parts. Fit faces of mortised parts snug and flush. Make sure
operating parts move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking or excessive clearance.
C. Adjusting and Finishing: After work has been otherwise completed, examine all hardware for complete and
proper installation. Lubricate bearing surfaces of moving parts. Adjust latching and holding devices to proper
function. Adjust door control devices to proper speed and power. Test keys for conformance to approved
keying system. Clean all exposed surfaces, check for surface damage and polish.
D. Thresholds: Install in one continuous piece, full width of opening. Set in full bed of mastic and fasten with
countersunk anchors at 6 inches on center.
3.3 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Where hardware is found defective in materials or installation; rework, restore, replace or otherwise correct
as directed.
B. Following will be considered as defective materials:
1. Unauthorized substitutes.
2. Items delivered with missing, broken, damaged or defaced parts.
3. Items of incorrect hand or function.
C. Following will be considered as defective installation:
1. Items broken, damaged, or defaced after delivery.
2. Items incomplete, misaligned or incorrectly located.
D. All expenses incurred by the Architect/Engineer in troubleshooting Security Hardware problems, caused by
inadequate workmaaship or other form of poor performance on the part of a contractor, shall be borne by that
Contractor.
SECURITY HARDWARE 11196 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.4 SECURITY HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HARDWARE SET #D1
Hinges 4-1/2 FM
1 Lock 126 M; keyed both sides
2 Pulls No. 2
1 Stop
1 Closer LCN 2210 DPS AVB
1 Threshold PEMKO
Weatherstripping PEMKO
1 Kickplate
HARDWARE SET #D2
Hinges 4-1/2 FM
1 Lock 126 M; keyed one side
1 Pull No. 2; hinge side
! Closer LCN 2210 DPS AVB
HARDWARE SET #D3
Hinges 4-1/2 FM
1 Lock 126 M; keyed both sides
1 Pull No. 2
1 Push Plate Hiawatha
I Stop (at doors D185B & D187A only)
1 Closer LCN 2210 DPS AVB
1 Kickplate
1 set Smoke Seals (at door D178A only)
END OF SECTION 11196 --
SECURITY HARDWARE 11196 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 11198 - SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
A. Security Equipment Subcontractor:
1. Provide and install a complete security control system, with all necessary equipment to
control devices as described in the specifications and as indicated on the drawings,
including:
a. Control console annunciation and switching of doors.
b. Intercommunications systems.
c. Sensors, Detectors and Alarms.
d. Systems Accessories.
e. Security control consoles.
f. Closed circuit television (CCTV) systems.
g. Audio Monitoring Systems (Alternate NO. 2).
2. Coordinate the installation and electrical requirements of the security control system with
the general contractor and electrical subcontractor.
3. Coordinate exact location of security equipment, for access and routing, with other trades,
prior to fabrication.
4. Provide complete system check-out by approved personnel, trained in the installation of
this equipment.
5. Furnish and install security control wiring, conduit, fittings, speaker back boxes and
junction boxes.
6. Furnish and install power wiring, conduit, fittings and mortar boxes for security control
system devices and equipment.
B. General Contractor:
1. Coordinate installation of security control system with security equipment subcontractor
and electrical subcontractor.
2. Make every effort to complete dispatch room construction as early as possible to facilitate
completion of control wiring and terminations.
3. Be responsible for conducting periodic coordination meetings between security, electrical,
plumbing, masonry and all other contractors to make everyone aware of critical areas of
construction. Attendance and minutes to be published to Architect and Owner.
C. Electrical Subcontractor:
1. Coordinate electrical power requirements with General Contractor and Security Equipment
Subcontractor.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere:
1. 01030 - Alternates
2. 11191 - Custom/Security Hollow Metal Work
3. 11196 - Security Hardware
4. Division 16 - Electrical
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Security Equipment Subcontractor shall provide all security equipment as described in Sections
11190, 11191, 11195, 11196, 11198, and the coordination of this equipment with his
manufacturers/fabricators/installers, and with work by others. Questions on the security equipment
must be directed to the Security Equipment Subcontractor before being directed to the General
Contractor., Architect/Engineer or Owner.
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS ! 1198 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. The Security Control Systems Supplier shall have been in the business of manufacturing logic
control systems for a minimum of five years.
C. All Security Equipment Subcontractors shall be qualified. Submit to the General Contractor within
five days after Bid Date the following data for review and acceptance.
1. Contractor Qualification Statement.
2. Financial Statement for previous fiscal year.
3. List of completed projects as the Security Equipment Subcontractor.
4. List of projects under construction.
5. Listing of your major supplier.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data:
1. Submit five (5) copies of:
a. Product specifications.
b. Installation instructions.
2. Certification of Fabricator's/Installers qualifications.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawing submittal for security control systems shall be submitted as an entire section.
2. Submit one (1) sepia copy and four (4) copies of shop drawings for all items of equipment
showing:
a. Layout of equipment (large scale plans; e.g., Control Room)
b. Location of equipment.
c. Spacing of anchors, joinery and construction.
d. Finishes.
e. Sizes, shapes and thickness of materials.
f. Joinery details with adjacent work.
g. Control systems' electrical riser diagrams.
h. Cut sheets on all supplied equipment and items.
i. Wiring diagram for locks, intercoms, etc.
C. Operating/Maintenance Manuals:
1. Furnish three (3) copies of operating and maintenance manual for all equipment.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING, STORAGE AND DELIVERY
A. Protect all materials and f'mishes while stored, until installation is complete.
B. Provide a secure, dry, locked storage area or room in the building for all materials.
1. Store all materials in a dry area under cover.
2. Place all material on planking or blocking, at least 2" off floor slab.
3. Do not permit cardboard or paper containers or wrappings to become wet. If this should
occur, remove them immediately.
4. Clean and touch-up scratches or disfigurement caused by shipping or handling with a rust
inhibitive primer, on items to receive a field applied paint f'mish.
5. Clean and repair scratches or disfigurement caused by shipping or handling on factory
finished items.
6. Remove protective materials; clean all finished surfaces using clear water and a
non-abrasive detergent, or as directed by manufacturer.
7. Trademarks: Do not display manufacturer's name or trademark on exposed surfaces of
control system consoles or electronic components.
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 2 _
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 1.6 GUARANTEE
A. The security control system shall be guaranteed for a period of one year beginning on the Date of
Substantial Completion of the project.
B. The guarantee shall include all security control system materials and installation.
._ C. The Security Equipment Subcontractor shall provide all labor and materials to repair or replace
defective security control system work.
D. The Owner and/or Architect shall notify the General Contractor to outline defects in the security
-- control systems.
E. The guarantee shall exclude vandalism, misuse, acts of God or abuse.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRAPHIC CONTROL PANEL
-- A. Furnish and install graphic annunciator and control system of door control and door status
monitoring, and graphic annunciation of intercommunications and other alarms, through paddle,
rocker, and push button switches and LED's as indicated on drawings, mounted in graphic panel.
__ Control panel shall be mounted within metal turret, as indicated on the drawings.
B. Construct panel face of one 1/8", anodized aluminum panel with mylar overlay of graphic and text.
_ C. Provide necessary reinforcing for panel top to prevent bending or flexing.
D. Hinge panels at top with a continuous stainless steel piano type hinge.
E. Secure panel to the turret with keyed locks or security screws in each of the lower coruers.
1. Lock shall be in the edge of the turret with the bolt attaching to the underside of the panels;
assuring a smooth and waterproof panel face.
F. Attach a continuous neoprene gasket to the underside edge of the panel to form a waterproof fit
between the graphic panel and the turret.
G. Punch the necessary holes in the electronic component mounting panel to facilitate the mounting of
components such as indicators and switches.
_ 1. The panel shall have only the necessary holes punched in the aluminum plate to facilitate
indicator light passage in the proper areas. The top of the lamps shall fit flush with the top
of the aluminum panel.
2. The graphic mylar overlay shall have all area, background and accent colors applied to the
back side of the graphic film.
3. There will be a maximum of 10 colors.
4. The base or background color shall be opaque black with lettering, etc. in colors selected
by the Architect/Engineer.
H. Working Surface:
1. The working surface (face) of the graphic shall be of a textured and non-glare nature, with
a velvet or suede finish.
2. Surface shall be non-yellowing, durable and scratch resistant.
3. Surface shall be 0.010" thick.
_ 4. Black background areas shall be silk screened on the rear of the mylar film.
5. Areas, shapes, outlines, spots or legends that are an opaque color shall be screened to the
rear of the film.
6. The illumination of any lamp indicator shall be clearly visible, from in front of the work
_ surface of the graphic, in 100 foot candles of general room illumination.
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
I. Legends shall be photographically produced using approved font. Legends shall be a minimum of
one-eighth inch (1/8") high letters or numerals.
J. Working Surface Mounting:
1. Working surface (mylar overlay) shall be bonded to the aluminum panel with a minimum
two inch wide bonding strip around the perimeter of the working surface, and as required
towards panel center, free from creases, humps or blemishes. Bonding shall be with a
chemical composition that has been proven, in similar applications, not to delaminate.
2.Aluminum panel/working surface shall be trimmed with a metal edge trim, painted black,
with a minimum of 1/4", to protect the edge of the mylar film.
3.Accurately align the film on the aluminum panel.
4.All holes in the aluminum panel shall be accurately sized, so that the aluminum panel will
not be visible at any of the openings.
K. Lamp Indicators:
1. The indication lamps shall be solid state light emitting diode (LED) indicators:
a. Wire leads, internal resister.
b. Polycarbonate lens.
c. 5/16" diameter.
d. IDI Series 2191U.
2. Install lamp indicators on the electronic component panel in the graphic systems
annunciator panel so they are easily accessible for replacement by lifting the hinged panels.
L. Switches:
1. Shall be paddle, rocker, or pushbutton type, as manufactured by Honeywell, Microswitch
(AML 20 Series).
2. Snap-in modular construction of square or rectangular type as indicated.
3. Quick connect, no solder connections allowed.
4. Electronic Switches: 1, 2, or 4 pole with 3 amp 125 volt contacts.
5. Power Switches: 1 or 2 pole with 10 amp, 125 volt contacts.
6. 2 or 3 position, maintained or momentary contact as required for operation.
7. Standard or full guard bezel as indicated.
8. LED lights for indication of color as indicated.
9. Two step activation switch guards, where indicated.
10. Coordinate switch operation with supplier of controlled equipment to insure proper
operation. Change switch characteristics as required for proper operation.
a. Door Control
b. Alarm Indicator
c. Interlock Override
d. Lamp Test
e. Intercom Control
f. Alarm Silence and Reset
11. Switches Function Description:
a. Door Control:
(1) Unlock Switch - activating an unlock switch shall apply and maintain
power to designated deadlatch placing it into its unlocked status until
door is opened and clear of frame.
(2) Emergency Release - Activating an emergency release shall apply and
maintain power to the designated dead latches placing them into an
unlocked status until emergency release is reset.
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- b. Interlock Override Switches:
(1) Interlock override switches, when simul-taneously depressed and
_ continuously held, shall allow the opening or unlocking of any or all
other locks or doors in an interlock group when one or more doors in the
group has previously been opened or unlocked. While the override
function is activated yellow lights shall flash continuously and the panel
_ audio alarm shall continuously sound. Releasing the switches shall return
the system to normal operation.
c. Lamp Test Switch:
(1) The momentary lamp test switch when activated, shall illuminate all
lamps on the graphic panel simultaneously.
-- d. Alarm Silence and Reset Switches:
(1) The audio alarm stops whenever the switch is pressed; in addition, the
flashing LED in alarm will illuminate.
(2) Reset switch must be pressed to reset all alarmed LED's to normal
conditions if they are not of the self-resetting type when the alarm
conditions no longer exists.
12. Graphic Systems Indicator Conditions:
a. Door and Lock/or Status - There shall be red light indicators on the graphic at
-- each door to be monitored, to indicate the status of the door and/or lock. The
lamps shall illuminate any time the door is unsecured or unlocked.
b. Interlock Status - There shall be yellow light indicators at each door in an
interlock group. All yellow lamps in an interlock group shall illuminate when any
~- door in the group is unsecured or unlocked. (See Interlock Groups on drawings).
c. Intercom - A green lamp indicator shall be located on the graphic for imercom
monitoring system.
-- (1) Lamp shall illuminate and flash when intercom station initiates a call and
illuminate steady when the voice path is open.
M. Audio Annunciator:
1. The audio annunciator shall emit a sound at 3500 Hz by utilizing the piezoelectric
principle. All circuitry shall be solid state.
._ 2. Output intensity shall be directly proportional to input voltage and shall range from 55 to
98 dB at 28 milliamps maximum. The unit shall generate no R.F. field and shall
intermittently sound at a fast pulse.
3. The audio annunciator shall activate with all abnormal or alarm conditions that are visually
annunciated on the graphic panel and shall remain activated until the condition is
acknowledged through the silence switch.
N. Wiring:
1. All wiring shall be factory jacketed cables and shall terminate in multiple connectors for
ease in field installation and service.
2. Cables shall be of sufficient length to extend from the graphic annunciator panel to the
electronic control card cage and shall be installed so as not to restrict the opening of the
hinged graphic panel for service.
3. Wiring on the underside of the graphic panel shall be grouped and laced with nylon tie
_ straps, supported at intervals not exceeding eight inches (8"), and shall terminate at each
visual and audible indicator.
O. Miscellaneous:
1. Fabrication shall include studs welded on underside of electronics component panel to
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 5
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
support necessary equipment.
2. This equipment shall include audible signal devices, terminal blocks, wire support devices
and other equipment which must be attached.
2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM NETWORK
A. Acceptable manufacturers.
1. Relay Logic Systems:
a. Wago, Entrelec, Montgomery Technologies, Inc., U. S. Systems, Inc., and
Easter Owens
2. Power Supplies:
a. Power One.
3. Relays:
a. Potter & Brumfield RKS or K-10 series. Equivalent by Magnecraft, IDEC,
Omron.
4. Fuse holders, terminals, etc.: Entrelec, Wago, Phoenix Comact.
5. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Division 1.
2.3 RELAY LOGIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Provide an electronic, relay logic system for control and monitoring of electric operated door and
other control circuits as indicated. System shall use printed circuit board technology, modular in
nature with plug-in components for relays, and switch selections for operations. All components
shall be solid state and UL listed. Relays for interface to electric locking devices shall be electre-
mechanical type.
B. Control system components: The components required for system functions as described in these
specifications shall be made up of relays, diodes, fuse blocks, terminals, etc. that are standard
catalogued components of the manufacturers listed (Entrelec, Wago, Phoenix Contact). System
functions include, but are not limited to:
1. Emergency release
2. Intercom call-in flash and steady indications.
3. Indicator LED latching and flashing.
4. Audible alarms.
5. Lamp test.
C. Custom fabricated circuit boards containing system function capabilities will be considered under
prior approval only. In order to be considered, the custom fabrications shall meet the following
minimum requiremems.
1.All discreet components. No microprocessors or programmable logic chips will be
allowed.
2.Schematic layout indicating all components shall be turned over to the Owner at time of
final completion. Provide tabular listing of components.
3. Manufacturer shall have a stocking distributor within the State of Texas. Such a distributor
shall stock a minimum of five (5) percent of installed boards, but not less than five (5) of
each.
4.System function boards shall be completely separate for door control relay boards as
specified below and shall not duplicate functions assigned to the door control relay boards.
D. Door control relay boards: Provide DIN rail mounting relay modules consisting of printed circuit
board with eight or four relays plus associated components and control busses. The card shall have
the following minimum features.
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS ! 1198 - 6
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
1. Relays:
a. 24VDC motor lock: 24VDC coil, SPDT, 6 amp, 24VDC load contacts.
b. Relays shall be electro-mechanical, plug-in type, P&B RKS series or equivalent.
2. Busses:
a. Individual: One per relay.
b. Group Assign: One per relay.
c. Emergency Release: Two per board.
d. Provide LED indication of each bus energized.
e. Provide dip switch selection of each relay to each Emergency Release bus.
f. Provide diode blocking between busses.
g. Provide LED indication of each relay energized.
h. Provide MOV for surge protection on load side of each relay, from normally open
contact to ground.
i. Provide three (3) input points from field devices for status indication or call-in
with three (3) output points for control panel mounted LEDs. Provide limiting
resistors on board for panel mounted LEDs.
3. Relay modules shall be mounted in universal mounting carrier, with closed bottom.
4. Mount carriers on DIN rail attached to backboards with relay modules arranged for easy
removal for maintenance or replacement. Provide wire management troughs throughout
enclosure. Provide separation between control, load and field wiring.
5. Manufacturer shall stock replacement cards for a minimum of five years after project
completion.
6. Provide test kit to verify operation of each relay module set. Test set to include power
supply, input switches and indicator lights as required to test all functions of the module.
E. Provide terminal blocks to accommodate each and every incoming or outgoing field conductor. All
terminations shall be made on terminal strips or connectors designed for the conductors to be
terminated. Provide terminal strips with integral labeling for identification.
F. Provide fuse holder and fuse for each locking device circuit. Install on unlock circuit conductor
downstream of door relay board.
G. Backboards shall be mounted in Control Consoles.
H. where interlocks are indicated, provide interlock relays with override capability from control panel.
I. Where groups of doors can be activated simultaneously, provide timing relays to limit in-rush
current to capabilities of electrical service provided.
2.4 POWER SUPPLY
A. Provide power supplies as required for control and indication functions. Power supplies shall
conform to requirements of NEC Article 725. Provide overcurrent protection of primary and
distribute secondary overcurrent protection for secondary wiring circuits.
1. Class 1 power supplies shall be provided with overcurrent protection as required by NEC
Article 725. Provide overcurrent protection for all conductors in accordance with ampere
rating. Minimum conductor size served by a Class 1 power supply shall be 18 GA.
2. Class 2 power supplies shall be power limited and/or overcurrent protected in accordance
with NEC Article 725. Nameplate rating of power supply shall not exceed limits indicated
in NEC Article 725. Minimum conductor size served by a Class 2 power supply shall be
22 GA.
B. Provide terminals for all incoming power (120VAC) circuits provided. Distribute load equally
among all circuits provided.
C. Where groups of doors are operated with a single action, divide doors into sub-groups of eight doors
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 7
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
or less and provide time delay between each sub-group.
2.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver spare parts in protective wrapping and packaging for proper storage.
B. Provide the following spare parts.
1. Relay Logic Systems:
a. Relay Modules: two of each type.
b. Terminals: two of each type.
c. Fuse blocks: two of each type
2. Fuses: Two of each type used.
3. Power supply: One of each type used.
4. LED's: Five of each color used.
5. Switches: Five of each type used.
2.6 ELECTRONIC CONTROL RELAY SYSTEM
A. The electronic relay shall do the actual switching of the power to the locks, etc.
1.Relays shall be mounted in NEMA-1 type cabinets with key lockable door and removable
steel mounting plate.
2. Cabinet shall be sized according to the number of relays required by the job and
constructed of code grade steel.
B. Wiring:
1. Wiring that extends from the electronic control relay terminal strips to the locks, etc. shall
be Class 1, 2 or 3 as def'med by Article 725 of the National Electric Code.
2. Conductors shall be a minimum number 14 THHN or THWN, 600 volt rated, and installed
in raceways and equipment enclosures with other conductors, within limitations del'reed by
Article 725 of the National Electric Code. Type "TW" will not be acceptable.
3. Use copper conductors for control wiring systems.
4. Stranded conductors shall be acceptable where all terminations can be made to lugs.
a. When stranded conductors are used all terminations shall be made with crimp type
lugs, correctly sized for termination, and applied to conductor with crimping tool
intended for use with the lug used.
5. Control wiring between relays and terminal strips within the relay cabinets shall be
stripped, tinned and fastened to terminal strips with screws fitted with "seams" pressure
plates.
6.Wiring systems shall be labeled and color coded with labeling and coding shown on shop
drawings.
a. White conductors shall be used only for neutral conductors.
b. Green only for grounding conductors.
7. Conductors within junction boxes, pull boxes and equipment enclosures shall be grouped
and laced with nylon tie straps with identification tab, in individual sets serving individual
locks or groups.
8. Conductor groups shall be identified on the tab with respect to room or area served.
9. Control system conductors shall not be spliced; control conductors shall be continuous
between the control panel and the relay.
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 8
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2.7 CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO SYSTEM
A. Video System:
1. The CCTV system shall utilize a programmable video matrix system to provide control.
2. Model/Manufacturer:
-- a. CM8500/Pelco
b. AD2150/American Dynamics
c. TC8500/Burle
3. Video Control System shall have the following minimum features:
a. Provide camera and control information on monitors.
_ b. Detachable keyboard controller for selection of cameras and monitors.
c. Programming for monitors and cameras.
d. Auxiliary controls and indicators
e. Auto pan selector and indicator
-- f. Motorized lens control.
g. Pan/Tilt/Zoom control.
4. Video equipment shall be of one manufacturer, modular and with all necessary units to
-- accomplish the video scheme (16 cameras x 5 monitors). Installation shall be by
manufacturer approved installers.
5. Camera to monitor assignments shall be determined by the Architect (see schedule).
6. Video system equipment shall be expandable to a minimum of 32 cameras x 8 monitors
-- with two (2) independent keyboard controllers.
7. Video system equipment shall be expandable to provide the following features for future
use:
a. Auxiliary controls and indicators.
b. Motorized lens control.
c. Pan/tilt/zoom control.
B. Cameras:
1. CCTV cameras shall be color CCD-chip type interior, monochrome CCD-chip type,
- exterior, UL listed and shall be the standard product of one manufacturer.
2. Install each camera complete, including appropriate lens, mounting bracket and camera
enclosure (fully compatible with the camera provided).
3. Cameras shall have automatic iris control, for interior or exterior use under normal and
-- low light conditions of illumination. Cameras shall include electronic components for
automatic adjustment of iris to varying levels of illumination including removable air filter.
4. All camera components shall be solid state type with auto-iris lens F 1.4 or lower, with
.~_ focal length as directed by the Architect or shown on the drawings. Final selection of
lenses and views will be determined by an on site evaluation with Architect and Owner.
5. Camera and sensitivity under low light conditions shall be with incandescent, infrared and
high intensity discharge light sources.
._ 6. Power supplies shall be internally protected.
7. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Javelin
b. Vicon
c. Burle
d. EMI
e. Pelco
8. The color cameras shall have the following specifications:
a. Horizontal resolution 330 TV lines
-- b. Signal to noise ratio 44 DB Unweighted
c. Composite video signal 1 volt peak to peak
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 9
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
d. Sensitivity .3 lux
e. Line voltage 24 VAC
f. Color with auto TTL white balance.
9. Monochrome Cameras shall have the following minimum specifications:
a. Resolution 580 TV lines
b. Signal to noise ratio 50 DB Unweighted
c. Composite video signal 1 volt Peak to Peak
d. Sensitivity .15 lux
e. Line voltage 24 lux
f. Monochrome
10. Camera lenses indicated in the camera schedule are for bidding purposes only! Security
Equipment subcontractor shall make final lens selection based upon actual field parameters
and existing conditions to insure proper CCTV lens application.
C. Camera Enclosures and Supports:
1. Camera enclosures and support brackets shall be compatible with CCTV camera specified
to be installed within enclosure and mounted on bracket.
2. Cameras shall be provided with a weatherproof and/or tamperproof enclosure as required.
3. Camera installations shall be securely attached to the mounting surface, at the height and
location as indicated in the camera schedule, with torx head center pin security fasteners.
a. Use lead shields on masonry, toggle bolts for hollow masonry, and machine bolts
for steel.
b. Anchoring devices shall be rated to support not less than five (5) times the total
equipment weight.
4. Exterior weatherproof/tamperproof enclosures shall be fabricated from aluminum and
finish with a weatherproof heat reflecting paint, or as specified.
a. Enclosures shall be provided with a sunshield and glass defroster.
b. Thermostatically-controlled blower or heater shall be automatic when camera
power circuit is energized.
c. Enclosure shall be internally insulated.
d. Removable access cover shall be secured with security type screws.
5. Interior tamperproof enclosures shall be fabricated from 18 gauge sheet steel, or as
specified.
a. Locks shall be keyed alike for similar camera enclosures.
b. All surfaces shall be finished with rust inhibiting primer and baked vinyl finish.
c. All joints of enclosure shall be welded.
d. Access shall be through locked, continuously hinged side panel.
e. Knockouts shall be provided for entry of wiring.
6. Camera mounting brackets shall be heavy duty type or as detailed, provided with locking
swivel and adjustable head for maximum tilt angle of 60 degrees. Brackets shall be
suitable for out-door use, where indicated.
7. Wall mounting brackets shall be suitable for camera and enclosure, and shall be rated for
support of not less than 150 lbs. Brackets with extension of 24" or larger, or cameras with
pan/tilt/zoom, shall be provided with support strut.
D. Camera Schedule:
See End of Section 11198
E. Cabling:
1. Provide corrugated, flexible nonmetallic conduit for power and coax cabling between
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - l0
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- camera enclosure and junction box covers.
a. Model/Manufacturer:
1. XTRAFLEX-LTC/Thomas & Belts
2. Lellems POLYTUFF I/Hubbell
_ b. Description:
1. Corrugated, flexible nonmetallic conduit, type 2, as def'med in the 1984
NEC (ART.351B).
~ 2. Fabricated from weather and corrosion resistant thermoplastic materials.
3. Liquidtight and oiltight for medium-to-heavy resistance to moisture,
abrasion, oil and dust.
4. Temperature range: +60 degrees C to -20 degrees C + 140 degrees F
-- to -4 degrees F).
F. CCTV Monitors:
-- 1. CCTV monitors shall be the standard products of one manufacturer and compatible with
the total system specified.
_ 2. CCTV monitors shall be solid state type with exception of picture tube, mounted as
directed by Owner and as specified.
a. Monitors shall be color.
-- b. Monitor controls shall be on-off, brightness, contrast, vertical hold and horizontal
hold.
c. Controls shall be mounted behind cover on front of unit.
d. Monitors shall contain differential input amplifier, voltage regulation, and shall
-- be rated for continuous duty.
e. All monitors shall be U.L. listed.
3. Thirteen-inch monitors (Monitors 01 and 02) shall be mounted where directed by Owner
-- and shall conform to not less than the following specifications:
a. Resolution: 430 lines
b. Input Impedance: 75 ohms
c. Video Input: 0.7 composite sync
4. Nine-inch monitors (Monitors 03, 04, and 05) shall be mounted where directed by Owner
_ and shall conform to not less than the following specifications:
a. Resolution: 280 Lines
b. Input Impedance: 75 Ohms
-- c. Video Input: 1.0 composite sync
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
-- a. Javelin
b. Vicon
c. Burle
d. Pelco
G. Video Recorder:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Javelin
b. Vicon
-- c. Burle
d,. Burle
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 11
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
2. Provide (one) 1 box of Maxell High Grade VHS Tapes.
3. Recorder shall be micro-processor based, video time-lapse recorder, with the following
features:
a. On screen programming: menu screens and displays.
b. Standard 2-hour 1/2" VHS cassette type.
c. Time/date generator with weekend timer.
d. 72 hour recording time.
e. 7-day programmable timer/8 programs per day.
f. Electronic security lockout.
g. Forward/reverse scan.
h. Alarm input with Alert.
i. 9-Alarm storage
j. 10-day power failure backup built in.
2.8 AUDIO MONITORING SYSTEM
A. Microphones
1. Provide ceiling mounted, omni-directional condenser microphones.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Louroe Electronics.
b. Audio Technica US Inc.
c. Crown International.
3. Specifications:
a. Sensitivity: (microphone elemem) -65 dB + 4 dB.
b. Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 kI-Iz + 1 dB
c. Current Drain: 3 mA.
d. Line Level Output: Zero dB @ 1,000 ohms.
e. Supply Voltage: 12 VDC.
f. Output Impedence: 600 ohms, unbalanced.
B. Audio Pre-Amp
1. Provide audio pre-amp with phantom power for microphones.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Louroe Electronics.
b. Radio Design Labs.
C. Audio Switcher
1. Manufacturer/Model No.:
a. Biamp Systems/Model No. VSX41.
2. Features:
a. Four audio inputs, each with Both BNC and RCA connectors.
b. One audio outpru, with both BNC and RCA connectors.
c. Front panel push buttons select from the four input sources.
d. Front panel infrared receiver for remote control of switching.
e. Two rear panel ports for infrared and/or wall mount controls.
f. Power consumption: less than 8 watts.
g. Warranty: 5 years.
h. Compatible with video recorder provided elsewhere in these specifications.
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 12
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
-- 2.9 SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
A. Intercom System
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: All systems by same manufacturer, having authorized installer
and service organization.
_ a. Communications systems:
(1) Base: Rauland Corp., MPC/Stentofon., Telecenter TCS, Bogen.
(2) Intercom Control Systems; U.S. Systems Inc. and Montgomery
-- Technologies Inc.
2. Systems: Manufacturer factory designed and catalogued systems, designed to operate as
complete, coordinated systems, including interfaces to other systems.
a. Include all components.
b. Include all wire and cable.
3. Operation:
a. Provide two way voice communication between control location and its related
._ stations. Control location shall have a dedicated talk path.
b. Call-in from remote stations shall cause LED indicator on control panel to flash
and audible tone to sound. Acknowledgment at control panel will cause LED
indicator to steady, audio channel to open. Outgoing speech occurs by depressing
-- push-to-talk button and speaking into microphone. Reset shall occur by
pushbutton switch on control panel.
4. Master control equipment:
a. Provide all equipment for switching, annunciation, and amplification as required
for described operation.
b. Provide power supplies as required.
c. House equipment in NEMA 1 enclosure with hinged door and key lock.
d. Provide interface with control panel devices as follows:
_ (I) Master Intercom Microphone
(2) Speaker
(3) Intercom selector
(4) Indicators
-- (5) Monitor switch.
(6) Volume controls.
(7) All Call Switch.
- 5. Security intercom stations: (Horn type: wall mount)
a. Speaker/microphone: Horn type, water and flame resistant mounted on 11 GA
steel plate.
- b. Horn: High efficient driver with frequency response of 400 to 4000 Hz, 8 ohm
magnet voice coil.
c. Recessed pushbutton switch: A single pole, single throw, momentary dry contact,
_ moisture and damage proof.
d. Flush mounting: Dukane 4A1470/Soundolier VPVT-6PB
6. Power amplifiers: With silicon transistors exclusively with output at less than 5 percent
_ distortion.
a. Frequency response 20 to 20,000 Hz plus/minus 2dB.
b. Noise level 75dB below rated output.
-- c. Input 400 microvolt - microphone, 0.3 volt auxiliary.
d. Balanced or single-ended 25 volt and 70 volt outputs at a screw terminal strip.
- SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 13
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work
specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Protection of existing trees indicated to remain.
2. Removal of trees and other vegetation.
3. Topsoil stripping.
4. Clearing and grubbing.
5. Removing above-grade improvements.
6. Removing below-grade improvements.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Conduct site-clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and
other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or
used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing
improvements indicated to remain in place.
1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property.
2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners.
C. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to
remain in place against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark,
smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess
foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect
trees and vegetation to be left standing.
1. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain
their health during course of construction operations.
2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch in diameter that are cut during construction
operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt or other acceptable coating formulated to
use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots
from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible.
3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction
operations in a manner acceptable to Architect. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damage to
trees and shrubs.
D. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing removal and alteration work on property
adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner prior to award of contract.
1. Extent of work on adjacent property is indicated on Drawings.
SITE CLEARING 02110 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
e. Output regulation within 1 dB from no load to full load.
f. Auxiliary voltage of 28 volts DC, 50 ma maximum.
g. Unit rated 105-130 volt, 50-60 Hz.
h. Size amplifiers for load requirements.
7. Control panel devices: Furnish devices and installation on control panels.
a. Microphone
b. Speaker:
(1) Type: Cone, 3 inch, 45 ohm.
(2) Frequency Response: 10 - 20,000 Hz.
(3) Soundolier.
c. Volume controls.
d. Intercom Selector Switches.
e. Indicators
f. Push to Talk Switches.
2.8 B. Visitation Phone Intercom System:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rauland; Skokie, IL
b. Lowell; St. Louis, MO
c. Soudolier; St. Louis, MO
2. Telephone handsets shall be wall type constructed of high impact plastic with heavy duty armored
coil cord which when extended shall not exceed 18" in length.
a. Handset shall not require press-to-talk switch to establish communication; audio
communication shall be established when both hand sets are removed from their respective
hooksets.
b. System shall be wired to be completely free of cross talk with handsets only able to
communicate with their corresponding handset.
c. Hook switch and cable shall be mounted on a two gang stainless steel plate.
3. D.C. power supply/control unit shall provide talk voltage and the power supply shall be located in
adjacent ceiling above a non-secure area for access.
a. Unit shall be for 120 volt A.C. power input with input fuse.
b. Output voltage shall be 24 volt filtered D.C.
2.10 SECURITY CONTROL CONSOLES (See detailed layouts)
A. Equipment consoles shall be located in area designated and in the configuration indicated on the
drawings.
A. Mount security control equipment within consoles, as indicated on the drawings.
B. Turret:
1. Turrets shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with solid sides and fixed panel mounting
angles in all openings with .281 diameter holes spaced in EIA pattern. Paint black.
2. Turrets shall be supplied with open bottom and securely attached to cabinet tops for secure
mounting over access openings for wiring cables.
a. Back panel shall be louvered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine and inspect all surfaces, anchors, and grounds that are to receive materials, fixtures,
SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 14
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
assem-blies, and equipment specified herein. Report all unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the
Architect.
B. Check location, "roughing in", and field dimensions prior to beginning work.
C. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION OF ALL SECURITY PRODUCTS
A. The intercom system shall facilitate shielded audio cable for noise immunity.
1. All audio lines shall be terminated as follows: a continuous shield consistent through all
junction box splices isolated from the conduit system or earth ground; termination of the
shield to the intercom master ground at the central processing rack; and a floating or
unterminated ground connection, and insulated at the field device.
B. Install all fixtures, materials, assemblies and equipment as specified herein and as indicated on the
drawings in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
C. Installation, coordination, and final adjustment of controls, consoles, shall be by Security Equipment
Subcontractor. Make final electrical hook-up at door and control panels.
3.3 INSTRUCTION PERIOD
A. Provide the Owners personnel with structured instruction (8 hours) in the use and maintenance of
the entire security management and control system. The Owner's Representatives must include the
Jail Administrator, Shift supervisors, selected Control Room Correctional officers, and Equipment
Maintenance Personnel.
B. The training sessions will cover the operation and maintenance manuals in detail, stressing all
important operational and service diagnostic information necessary for the maintenance personnel
to efficiently use and maintain the security management and control system. Competency tests will
be given to all attending Representatives at the end of the training time before either the Security
Equipment Subcontractor or the Owner can officially sign off on this training period.
C. Provide three copies each of a bound and illustrated security control console operator's manual and
service manual. The operator's manual shall be written in laymen's language and printed so as to
become a permanent reference documem for the operators, describing all control panel switch oper-
ations, graphic symbol definitions and all indicating illumination functions. The service manual shall
be written in laymen's language and printed so as to become a permanent reference document for
maintenance personnel.
END OF SECTION 11198
-- SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 11198 - 15
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 11452 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of residential appliances:
1. Cooking equipment, including microwave ovens.
2. Refrigerator/freezers.
4. Icemakers.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Kitchen sinks, waste disposers and instant hot water dispensers are specified in Division
15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Plumbing connections for appliances are specified in Division 15.
3. Electrical services and connections for appliances are specified in Division 16.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each appliance type required indicating compliance with requirements, including
installation instructions. Provide complete operating and maintenance instructions for each
appliance.
C. Schedule: Submit schedule of appliances, using the same room designations as shown on drawings.
1. Example of required format for appliance schedule is included in last article of this
Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy cost analysis
(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade
Commission.
B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential
appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
C. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that conform to the following standards of the Association
of Home Appliance Manufacturers:
1. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified according to
ANSI/AHAM HRF-1.
D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain appliances from a single supplier.
1. Provide products from the same manufacturer for each type of appliance required.
2. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire
Project.
E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of residential
- RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
a. Total volume: 18.2 cu. ft.
b. Refrigerator volume: 13.04 cu. ft.
_ c. Total shelf area: 23.4 sq. ft.
2. Energy Consumption: Measured and certified at not more than 3.0 kWh/day under
average conditions.
-- 3. Temperature Controls: Include separate temperature controls for each compartment and
a switch for condensation-control heating element at the freezer opening.
4. Storage Features: Provide the following standard storage features:
-- a. Adjustable glass interior cabinet shelves.
b. Meat compartment.
c. Vegetable crisper.
d. Butter conditioning compartment.
e. Removable egg trays.
f. Two ice cube trays.
_ 5. Optional Accessories: Provide refrigerator/freezers with the following additional features:
a. Automatic icemaker.
--. 2.4 UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR
A. Refrigerator/Freezer: Provide freestanding, single-door, top-mount freezer model
refrigerator/freezer on adjustable rollers, with door shelves.
1. Capacity: Provide the following minimum values, measured according to ANSI/AHAM
HRF-1 and certified by AHAM:
a. Total volume: 3.7 cu. ft.
b. Refrigerator volume: 3.42 cu. ft.
c. Total shelf area: 6.5 sq. ft.
2. Temperature Controls: Include separate temperature controls for each compartment and
a switch for condensation-control heating element at the freezer opening.
3. Storage Features: Provide the following standard storage features:
a. Adjustable wire interior cabinet shelves.
2.6 UNDERCOUNTER ICEMAKER
A. Modular Ice Cuber: Provide water cooled, electric ice maker capable of producing 53 lbs. of
approximately 3/4-inch ice cubes per 24 hours of production and storage capacity of 35 lbs.
.... 1. Product: Scotsman model CSW1AE-1B.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard colors as shown or scheduled. If no color indicated,
provide color samples for Architect's choice.
_._ 4. Wherever residential appliances by more than one manufacturer are installed in the same
space, provide units with color matching largest equipment item.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Built-In Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452 - 3
3.2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 408720
fasteners. Veri~ that clearances arc adequate for proper l'unctioning and rough opcnmgs ;irc
completely concealed.
D.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each
area. Vcri/'y that clearances arc adequate to properly operate equipment.
Utilities: Retbr to Divisions 15 and i6 lk~r plumbing and electrical requirements.
Testing: Test each item of residential equipment to veri~ proper operation. Make necessary
adjustments.
Accessories: Verit}, that accessoo' items required have been l'urnished and installed.
Cleaning: Remove packing material from residential equipment items and leave units in clcarl
condition, ready for operation.
END OF SECTION 11452
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 12511 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required items of work specified
or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes venetian blinds.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting
horizontal louver blinds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of horizontal louver blind specified. Include printed data on physical
characteristics.
C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of blinds. Show installation details at and relationship to
adjoining work. Include elevations indicating blind units. Indicate location of blind controls.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for each type of horizontal louver blind indicated.
1. Louver: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long.
2. Valance: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long.
E. Schedule of horizontal louver blinds using same room designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Maintenance data for horizontal louver blinds to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining horizontal louver blinds and finishes.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and
performance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds identical to those tested for the
following fu:e-test-response characteristics as determined by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Test Method: NFPA 701.
2. Rating: Pass.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of horizontal louver blind from one source and by a single
manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual horizontal louver blind dimensions by accurate field measurements
_ HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 1
COPPELL CRIMiNAL JUSTICE CENTER 41)87 20
before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate Iabrication
schedule with construclion progress to avoid delaying the Work.
Space Enclosure and Envirnnmcntal Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds unlil space is
enclosed attd weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nonrinally dry, work above ceilin2s is
cmnplete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will hc continuousl> maintaiu,)d at
,.alues near those indicated for final occupancy.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged x~.ith protcct~x'c
covernlg for storage, and arc identified wilh labels clearly describing contents.
Horizontal Louver Blinds: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full-size units cquaI to 5
percent of amount of each size installed.
PART2 PRODUCTS
21 MANUFACTL'RERS
AvailaNe Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products Ihat
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, lhe following:
[. Horizontal Louver Blinds:
a. Eastern Standard Corp.
b. Faber.
c. Hunter Douglas, Inc.
d. Joaana Western Mills Co.
e. Kirsch.
f. Lcw)lor Corp.
g. Louverdrape, Inc.
h. Naoik.
i. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; (Bali-Graber).
i. Verosol USA, Inc.
22 HORiZONTALLOUVERBLINDS
A. Louvers: Manufacturer's standard as follows:
Aluminum.
Nominal Louver Width: I inch (25 mm) (miniblinds).
B. Tilt Operation: Manual with wand.
Length of Tilt Control: Full length of blind.
Position of Tilt Control: Left side, unless otherwise indicated.
Tilt: Full.
(7.
Cord Lock Operation: Cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending
travel.
I. Position of Cord Lock: Right side. unless otherwise indicated.
D Cord Equalizers: Self-aligning to maintain horizontal louver blind position.
E. Valance: Match color of louvers.
F. Mounting: Ceiling.
G Colors and Patterns: Where ~nanufacmrer's standard products are indicated, provide horizontal louxcrs
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns for horizontal
louver blinds of type indicated.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Product Standard and Description: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029 for each horizontal louver blind
unit consisting of louvers, rails, cord locks, tilting mechanisms, tapes, and installation hardware.
B. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: Noncorrosive, self-lubricating materials.
C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74
deg F (23 deg C):
1. Blind Units Installed Between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2 inch
(12 mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), less than jamb to jamb dimension of opening in
which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), less
than head to sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed.
D. Installation Fasteners: Not less than 2 fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind
hardware and adjoining construction; support blind units under conditions of normal use.
E. Hold-Down Brackets: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of horizontal louver blinds. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds level, plumb, and located so exterior louver edges in any position are not closer than 1 inch
(25 mm) to interior face of glass lites.
1. Flush Mounted: Install blinds with louver edges flush with finish face of opening jamb and head.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust components and accessories for proper operation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean blind surfaces, according to manufacturer's instructions, after installation.
B. Remove surplus materials, packaging, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation. Leave installation
areas neat, clean, and ready for use.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that
ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. Provide at all exterior windows at the following rooms:
1. 101, 102, 103, 104, 136, 137, 145, 146, 152, 153, 174.
END OF SECTION 12511
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 4
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
SECTION 12512 - VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to locate information pertaining to required
items of work specified or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes vertical louver vane blinds.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting
vertical louver blinds.
2. Division 8 Sections for window walls with vertical louver blinds mounted on window
frames.
3. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for motorized blind operation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of vertical louver blind specified. Include printed data on physical
characteristics.
C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of blinds. Show installation details at and relationship
to adjoining work. Include elevations indicating blind units. Indicate location of blind controls.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of
colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of vertical louver blind indicated.
1. Louver: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long.
2. Louver Material: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square unit, from dye lot used for the Work, with
specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of
material.
3. Valance: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long.
E. Schedule of vertical louver blinds using same room designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Maintenance data for vertical louver blinds to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining vertical louver blinds and finishes.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and
performance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A, Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide vertical louver blinds identical to those tested for the
following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Test Method: NFPA 701.
2. Rating: Pass.
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS 12512 - 1
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
B. Electrical Componem Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 "National
Electrical Code" and that are listed and labeled by UL.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of vertical louver blind from one source and by a
single manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual vertical louver blind dimensions by accurate field measurements
before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install vertical louver blinds until space
is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously
maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Vertical Louver Vanes: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full-size units equal
to 5 percent of amount of each size installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Vertical Louver Blinds:
a. Faber.
b. Hunter Douglas, Inc.
c. Joanna Western Mills Co.
d. Kirsch.
e. Levolor Corp.
f. Louverdrape, Inc.
g. Nanik.
h. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; (Bali-Graber).
i. Verosol USA, Inc.
2. Motors for Electric Blind Operation:
a. Bantex USA, Inc.
b. Silent Gliss USA, Inc.
c. SM Automatic.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, vertical louver blinds that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in Section 00870 -
Design Selections Summary.
2.2 VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS
A. Louvers: Manufacturer's standard as follows:
1. PVC with fabric insert.
2. Nominal Louver Width: 3-1/2 inches (90 mm).
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS 12512 - 2
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3. Louver Profile: Curved.
B. Controls: As follows:
1. Louver Directional Control: Chain.
2. Louver Directional Control: Motor with infrared remote.
3. Traversing Control: None.
C. Louver Bottom: Connecting or spacing chains.
D. Louver Bottom: Rail.
E. Valance: Match color of louvers.
F. Mounting: As indicated.
G. Colors and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated, provide vertical
louvers complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns for
vertical louver blinds of type indicated.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Louver Directional and Traversing Control Mechanisms: Noncorrosive, self-lubricating materials.
B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to Fill window and other openings as follows, measured
at 74 deg F (23 deg C):
1. Blind Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations
between blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical
separations between openings.
C. Louver Spacing: Overlapped for light exclusion when fully closed.
D. Electric Motors: UL-approved, low-voltage motor with thermal overload switch; sized by blind
manufacturer for installation indicated.
E. Installation Fasteners: Not less than 2 fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive
to blind hardware and adjoining construction; support blind units under conditions of normal use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of vertical louver blinds. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds level and plumb. Do not remove warning labels describing hazards of vertical louver
blinds.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust components and accessories for proper operation.
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS 12512 - 3
COPPELL CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER 4087.20
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean blind surfaces, according to manufacturer's instructions, after installation.
B. Remove surplus materials, packaging, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation. Leave
installation areas neat, clean, and ready for use.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer that ensure that vertical louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
3.6 VERTICAL LOUVER BLIND SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide vertical louver blinds to comply with requirements in this Section and with the
following schedule of blinds:
1. Vertical Louver Blind Designation: Fixed Blind
a. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
b. Blind Location: East wall of Room 124 at clerestory.
West wall of Room 121 at clerestory.
East and West walls of Room 124 at storefront.
c. Location of Directional Control: Adjacent to light switch.
d. Mounting: Head mounted between jambs.
2. Vertical Louver Blind Designation: Electric Blind.
a. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
b. Blind Location: North wall of Room 124 at clerestory.
c. Location of Directional Control: Adjacent to light switch.
d. Mounting: Head mounted between jambs.
END OF SECTION 12512
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS 12512 - 4
CRIMINAL JUSTICE CENTER
COPPELL, TEXAS
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
-- CCRD PARTNERS PROJECT NUMBER 295254.00
-- MECHANICAL
SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 15090 - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
SECTION 15180 - INSULATION
SECTION 15300 - UTILITY SERVICES
-- SECTION 15401 - DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
SECTION 15403 - NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
SECTION 15405 - DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
-- SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 15500 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
SECTION 15665 -SINGLE ZONE PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SECTION 15800 -AIR TREATING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 15840 -DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15990 -TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
ELECTRICAL
_ SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16050 - SITE ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16110 - SYSTEMS OF RACEWAYS
SECTION 16120 - SYSTEMS OF CONDUCTORS
-- SECTION 16140- WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 16160 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES
-- SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION I~-,~.,.~,.,70~,~.,F~~ 7
SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
__ SECTION 16470- PANELBOARDS
SECTION 16475- OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SECTION 16500-LIGHTING FIXTURES
SECTION 16620-EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEM
-- SECTION 16670- LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
SECTION 16720- FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 16741 - TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS
-- SECTION 16900-EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND CONTROL WIRING
SECTION 16950-TESTING
INDEX Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL
1.1 SPECIAL NOTES
A. These General Provisions shall be complementary to the Instructions to Bidders and
General Conditions of the Contract, supplements thereto, and other pertinent documents
-- issued by the Architect. All conditions imposed by those documents shall be applicable
to the Contractor(s) and/or Subcontractor(s) for all portions of the work under this Division.
-- B. Each bidder on any portion of the work under this Division shall examine the Architectural,
Structural and Electrical Plans and Specifications and all Addenda issued. Failure to
comply shall not relieve the bidder of any responsibility. The omission of architectural,
structural and electrical details from the Mechanical Drawings shall not be used as a basis
for request for additional compensation.
1.2 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The inter-relation of the specifications, the drawings, and the schedules are as follows:
- 1. The specifications provide the wdtten requirements for the quality, standard, nature
of the materials, equipment and construction systems.
2. The drawings establish the quantities, dimensions, details and;
3. The schedules give the locations.
- B. For any individual project, if there is conflict between the drawings and or specifications,
the specifications shall govern the drawinqs.
_ C. Contractor is responsible to bring any conflicts in drawinqs and/or specifications to the
attention of the Architect, immediately, prior to any work being done.
D. Where the specifications do not fully agree with the schedules, the schedules shall govern.
-'- Fi.qures given on drawings govern scale measurements and lar,qe scale details govern
small scale drawings.
-- 1.3 EXTENT OF WORK
A. The work covered by this Division of the Specifications comprises the furnishing of all
_ labor, materials, transportation, tools, appliances and performance of all operations in
connection with the installation of the new portions of the mechanical systems in
accordance with the applicable Drawings and material contained herein, and subject to the
terms and conditions of the Contract.
B. Refer to other Divisions of the Specifications for related work.
15010-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
1.4 MATERIALS DESCRIPTION
A. In describing an item of equipment, it may be described singularly, even though there may
be a multiplicity of identical items. Also, where a description is only general in nature, the
exact size, duty, space arrangement, horsepower requirement and other data shall be
determined by reference to plans, details and schedules.
B. Equipment called for on the plans and not listed herein shall be provided and installed as
though it were fully described herein.
C. Equipment called for herein shall be completely provided and installed, whether fully
detailed or not on the plans, and/or scheduled.
1.5 DEFINITION OF "CONTRACTOR"
A. Where the word "Contractor" is used under any Section of this Division of the
Specifications, it shall mean the Contractor who is engaged to execute the work included
under that Section, even though he may be technically described as a Subcontractor, or
his authorized representative.
B. If the Contractor, engaged to execute a portion of the work, employs a Subcontractor to
perform some of that work, he shall be completely responsible for the proper execution of
this Subcontractor's work, in full conformity with the Contract Documents.
1.6 TERMINOLOGY
A. Wherever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install", materials and equipment
described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division, complete for operation,
unless specifically noted to the contrary.
B. It is also the intent, unless specifically noted to the contrary, that all materials and
equipment described and specified under this Division, whether or not a phrase as
described in the preceding paragraph has been actually included.
1.7 GENERAL
A. Bidders shall visually examine the existing conditions at the site. The Contractor shall be
responsible for installation of the work as it relates to those conditions.
B. Review all construction details illustrated on the architectural and structural drawings and
be guided thereby.
15010-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
C. Except for the layout of the sprinkler system, including heads, test connections, drains,
etc., the mechanical Drawings diagrammatically show sizes and locations of outlets and
_ equipment items and the sizes of the major interconnecting pipes and ducts, without
delineating exact elevations, offsets, control lines, and other installation details. Carefully
lay out work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to avoid
obstructions, and permit proper grading of lines. In cooperation with other Contractors,
determine exact locations of outlets, apparatus and connections thereto by reference to the
general, detail, equipment and rough-in drawings, and by measurements at the building;
in all cases subject to Architectural approval. Where necessitated by conditions at the site
- or directed by the Architect, make minor relocations without additional cost to the Owner.
D. Run all ducts and pipes concealed in suspended ceilings where they occur and in furrings
_ and chases where shown, except for those connections to plumbing fixtures and
equipment items which must necessarily be exposed. Wherever conditions exist which
would cause any normally concealed materials to be exposed in finished spaces,
immediately call the situation to the attention of the Architect and stop work in those areas
-- until the Architect directs the resumption of the work and the procedures to be followed.
1. Install all concealed pipes and ducts as required by the pace of the general
-- construction.
E. In areas where there are no suspended ceilings, run all ducts and pipes parallel to building
_ surface planes, except grade lines, for proper flow.
F. These Specifications and the accompanying Drawings are intended to describe and
illustrate systems which will not interfere with the building structure and which will fit into
- the available spaces. Prepare an installation drawing for any cdtical area, illustrating the
installation of the work in this Division as related to the work of all other Divisions, and
correct interferences with the other trades or with the building structure before the work
-- proceeds.
1.8 INSTALLATION INSPECTIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS
A. Obtain timely inspections of the installation by the constituted authorities. Remedy any
deficiencies to the satisfaction of the inspecting authority.
-- B. Upon final completion of the work, obtain certificates of acceptance from the constituted
authorities. Deliver the certificates to the Architect for transmission to the Owner.
_ 1.9 ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND CODES
A. It shall be the Contractor's duty to perform the work and provide the materials covered by
these specifications in conformance with all ordinances and regulations of all authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, connection and specification fees as
-- required for the complete installation of the specified systems.
C. All work herein shall conform to all applicable laws, ordinances and regulations of the local
_ utility companies.
15010-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
D. The work shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, the requirements of:
1. National Fire Protection Association
2. National Safety Code
3. City of Coppell
4. Texas Safety Code
E. Codes and standards referred to are minimum standards. Where the requirements of
these specifications or drawings exceed those of the codes and regulations, the drawings
and specifications govern.
1.10 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Following is a list of abbreviations and their meaning which may be used in these
Specifications.
AABC - ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL
AASHO - AMERICAN ASSOCIATED OF STATE HIGHWAY OFFICIALS
ACI - AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE
ADC - AIR DIFFUSION COUNCIL
AGA - AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION
AISC AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
AMCA AIR MOVING AND CONDITIONING ASSOCIATION
ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
APl AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE
ARI AIR CONDITIONING & REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE
ASHRAE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR
CONDITIONS ENGINEERS, INC.
ASME AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
AWSC AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY CODE
AWWA AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION
CISPI CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE
CTI COOLING TOWER INSTITUTE
FM FACTORY MUTUAL
IRI INDUSTRIAL RISK INSURERS
NBS NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS
NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION
PDI PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE
SMACNA SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
UL UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES
15010-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
1.11 INSPECTION OF SITE
-- A. The Contractor shall visit the site, inspect the installations and ascertain the conditions to
be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying existing work and in
installing new work. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute ground for any
_. additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing
installations and/or installing any new work under this Division.
1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS AND SPACE ALLOCATIONS
A. See the material under the Supplementary General Conditions.
_ B. Where the product of a single manufacturer is mentioned by trade name or manufacturer's
name in this Division, it has been done in order to establish a standard rather than to
discriminate against an equal product made by another manufacturer. Where two or more
manufacturers are named, only these manufacturers will be considered or approved.
C. The Architect reserves the right to call for a sample of any item of material offered in
substitution, together with a sample of the specified material when, in the Architect's
-- opinion, the quality of the material and/or appearance is involved, and it is deemed that
an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection.
.. D. If any request for a substitution of material or equipment is rejected, furnish the material
named in the Specifications or Schedules, since repetitive substitutions for the same
material will not be considered.
-- E. Space allocations have been made on the basis of equipment items names by
manufacturer and model number in the Schedules or Specifications. If equipment offered
differs substantially in dimension or configuration from the named equipment, provide
scaled drawings showing that the substitute can be installed in the space available without
interfering with other trades or with access for operation and maintenance in the completed
project, which drawings shall be part of the submission.
F. Where substitute equipment requiring different arrangement or connections from those
shown on the Drawings is accepted by the Architect, install the equipment to operate
properly and in harmony with the intent of the drawings and the Specifications, making all
'- incidental changes in piping, ductwork motors or wiring resulting from the selection of
equipment without increase in the Contract amount. Pay all additional costs incurred by
adjoining to connecting trades.
1.13 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. See the material under the General Conditions.
B. A shop drawing shall be submitted for review on each item proposed for use hereunder,
to include valves, cocks, hangers, insulation and other appurtenances, as well as major
- equipment items.
5010-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
C. Process shop drawing data to insure that it conforms to the requirements of the Plans and
Specifications and that there are no omissions and/or duplications.
D. Each shop drawing submission shall designate the exact item offered; unidentified items
on manufacturer's data sheets are not acceptable.
E. In each case, the various material submissions of related items, procured from a single
manufacturer or supplier, shall be assembled in brochures or in other suitable package
form and shall not be submitted in a multiplicity of loose sheets.
F. The Contractor shall assemble these brochures, checking them for accuracy, and shall
submit them in bound "Project Manuals" for review by the Architect.
G. The shop drawings shall include room by room tabulations of air distribution devices, fire
dampers, etc. They shall not cover detailed lists of plumbing fixtures, carriers, drains,
valves, and similar items.
1.14 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or directed by the Architect to --
coordinate this work with the work of other Divisions, to illustrate changes in this work to
facilitate its concealment in finished spaces, to avoid obstructions, or to illustrate the
installation of a substitute equipment item. .
B. Use these drawings in the field for the installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed,
do not submit these drawings for review, but provide 3 copies to the Architect for
information. --
1.15 LARGE APPARATUS
A. Where any piece of apparatus is too large for ingress through normal building openings,
it shall be placed in its containing space before the enclosing structure is completed.
1.16 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS
A. At all times take every precaution to properly protect apparatus from damage. Include
erecting temporary shelters to protect apparatus shored at the site, cribbing of apparatus
above the floor of the construction, and covering of apparatus in the incomplete building
with plastic sheeting or other protective coating. Failure on the part of the Contractor to
comply with the above to the satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the
rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question.
B. Responsibility for the protection of apparatus shall extend to presently installed apparatus.
Erect temporary sheltering structures, provide temporary bracing and supports, or cover
equipment as required or directed to afford proper protection.
15010-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
1.17 SCHEDULE OF WORK
-- A. Work schedules and completion dates as established must be rigidly adhered to.
Cooperate in establishing these schedules and perform the work under this Division at
such times as directed so as to insure meeting scheduled dates and avoid delaying any
other Contractor.
1.18 SALVAG ED MATERIALS
~ A. Reuse no salvaged material except as noted on the Drawings, specified herein, or directed
by the Architect. Remove from the premises all present materials falling under this Division
which are removed from the existing building. Upon completion, leave no "dead" line or
_ equipment installed in any portion of the area being remodeled.
1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Each Contractor shall, under the Architect's direction, ddll or cut openings as required to
install a new work or to repair or replace defective work; use core drills or power driven
saws. Include channeling walls as required for the installation of wall mounted material
-- and equipment.
B. In cutting masonry walls, provide and install lintels and/or other structural members to
provide adequate protective support for the remaining masonry. Structural members,
supports, etc. shall be of the size and shape and installed as directed by the Architect.
C. Do not cut any structural member in a way to lessen its strength, without specific
- permission.
D. No cutting or drilling of any sort will be permitted in the webs of prestressed, precast
concrete structural elements. Use core ddlls or power driven saws to cut openings in the
flanges of such elements; the use of reciprocating drills will not be permitted.
_ E. Openings cut in the new building to install materials covered by this Division of the
Specifications or to repair or replace defects which may appear up to the expiration of the
guarantee, or to repair damage to the work of other trades occasioned by those cutting
operations, shall be repaired by the trade whose work is disturbed, but payment therefor
shall be by the Contractor cutting the opening or causing the damage.
1.20 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS
A. Unless otherwise noted, concrete foundations, furnished under this Division of the
Specifications, shall be not tess than 6 inches high, poured in forms built of new dressed
lumber with corners chamfered using sheet metal or triangular wood strips nailed to the
form. Use 6x6 No. 3 mesh for reinforcing. Use Decatur Engineering Company's heavy
duty adjustable anchor bolts, set in the form and positioned using templates, prior to
pouring concrete. Allow at least one inch between equipment bases and foundations for
-- alignment, leveling and grouting. Use non-shrinking grout equal to Embeco Pre-Mixed
Grout. After grouting, remove the forms and hand-rub the foundation with carborundum.
_ B. Concrete foundations or pads will be required for all floor mounted equipment.
15010-7 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
;:~ CCRD 295254.00
1.21 CONCRETE WORK
A. Do all concrete work for concrete structures specified to be provided under this Division
in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of Division 3, CONCRETE.
1.22 BURIAL DEPTH FOR EXTERIOR PIPING
A. Except as otherwise indicated or required by conditions at the site, the minimum cover
from the top of the pipe to the finished grade for underground, exterior piping shall be: 24
inch for storm, sanitary drain and sewer lines; and 48 inch for water and gas lines unless
otherwise directed by the Civil Engineer's plans and specifications.
1.23 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A. Do all excavating and backfilling required in installing the work under this Division;
generally use procedures and materials as described in Division 2 under SITE WORK.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting a site specific trench safety system
prepared by a registered engineer which meets OSHA standards and any additional state
and local standards.
1.24 EXTERIOR EXCAVATING
A. Perform all exterior excavating of whatever substances encountered and to the depths
required.
B. During excavation, stack matedal suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient
distance from the banks of the trenches to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all
excavated matedal not required or suitable for backfill, or waste as directed.
C. Control grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and remove any
water accumulating therein by pumping.
D. Use open cut grading and make trenches the necessary width for proper installation of the
line, with banks as nearly vertical as practicable. Provide sheeting and shoring as
necessary for the proper protection of the work and the safety of personnel.
E. Use open cut grading except that short sections of a trench may be tunneled if, in the
Architect's opinion, the line can be safely and properly installed and the tunnel can be
suitably backfilled and tamped. Make trenches the necessary width for proper installation
of the line, with banks as nearly vertical as practicable. Provide sheeting and shoring as
necessary for the proper protection of the work and the safety of personnel.
F. Dig trenches not less than 12 inches nor more than 16 inches wider than the diameter of
the pipe to be installed and excavate true to line so that the pipe may be centered therein.
This trench width applies at and below the level of the top of the pipe. Dig the trench
above that level as wide as necessary for proper installation of the work and protection of
personnel.
15010-8 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
G. Grade trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support for the pipe on undisturbed
soil as every point along its length except for lines excavated in rock and in soil incapable
_ of supporting the pipe and except for excavation for bell holes and for proper sealing of
pipe joints. Following grading of the trench bottom, create a depression at each joint as
required to assemble the joint in accordance with its manufacturer's recommendations and
_ to provide space to physically accommodate the joint. Remove stones to prevent point
bearing. Round bottoms of trenches excavated for sewers so that at least 1/3 of the
circumference of the pipes will rest firmly on undisturbed soil.
-- H. Where rock excavation is required, remove the rock to a minimum overdepth of 8 inches.
Backfill the overdepth excavation with sand, 3/4 inch crushed rock, the equivalent in gravel,
or other approved backfill material, prior to installing the pipe.
I. Where trenches are inadvertently overexcavated, fill to the bottom level of the pipe with
backfill material as specified above, prior to installing the pipe.
- J. Whenever soil is determined to be unstable by the Architect, (incapable of properly
supporting the pipe) remove such soil to a depth required and for the lengths and widths
designated by the Architect and backfill the trench to bottom grade with backfill material,
-- as specified above, prior to installing the pipe.
K. Excavation for underground structures shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear
between outer surface and embankment or timber that may be used to hold and protect
banks. Any overdepth excavation below that may be used to hold and protect banks. Any
overdepth excavation below such appurtenances will be considered unauthorized and shall
be refilled with sand, rock, gravel, or concrete, as directed at the expense of the
- Contractor.
1.25 BRACING, SHORING, AND SHEETING
A. Whenever necessary, support sides and ends of all excavations with braces, sheeting,
shores and stringers of quality and character as required. All timbering shall be put in
place or driven by men skilled in such work and shall be so arranged that it may be
withdrawn as refilling proceeds, without injury to any structures, roadbeds, or property; all
shoring and sheeting shall be in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
B. Whenever required by soft ground, or for protection of any person, structure, or property,
sheeting shall be driven, without extra compensation, to such a depth below bottom of
trench as may be required or directed.
C. Bracing, shoring and sheeting shall be in compliance with the requirements of the State
of Texas Safety Code.
1.26 BACKFILLING OF EXTERIOR EXCAVATIONS
A. Do not backfill a trench until the piping system is installed in conformance with specified
.... requirements and has been tested and accepted.
5010-9 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Except as directed otherwise, bracing, shoring and sheeting shall be removed in a manner
to avoid damage or disturbances to work, and excavations shall be free of forms and
cleaned of trash. Backfill shall be brought up evenly on each side of a pipe and shall not
be placed on surfaces that are muddy, frozen or that contain frost.
C. Backfill material shall be free from trash, putrescible refuse, ashes, large stones and
material. Except as otherwise specified, all backfill shall be uniformly deposited and
carefully compacted in layers not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness by use of vibratory
compaction equipment to at least 90% of maximum density at a moisture content within
2% of optimum in accordance with AASHO Standard T99.
D. Trenches Under Pavement: All trenches beneath existing or proposed roadways,
shoulders, parking areas, curbs, sidewalks or similar use pavements shall be backfilled as
specified above, except that all backfill material shall be compacted to at 95% of maximum
density at a moisture content within 2% of optimum in accordance with AASHO Standard
T99.
E. The top 6 inches of backfill in areas outside of pavements shall be topsoil that is free of
weeds and other unwanted materials.
F. Settling of granular non-cohesive backfill material with water in trenches lying outside of
pavements will be permitted, and will be a requirement when so directed.
G. Trenches improperly backfilled, or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to depth
required for proper compaction, then refilled and compacted as specified, or otherwise
corrected as permitted by the Architect.
1.27 OPENING AND RECLOSING PAVEMENT
A. Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other existing
pavement, including "black topping", cut the pavement as required to install new lines and
to make new connections to existing lines. Hold the size of the cut to a minimum
consistent with the work to be accomplished. After completing the piping installation,
backfill the excavation as hereinbefore specified; replace both the base and surface
courses using materials to match those removed, both in degree of compaction and kind
of material; replace any reinforcing and splice to existing reinforcing. New finished
surfaces shall be level with the original surfaces and thoroughly bond with them.
1.28 INTERIOR TRENCHES AND BACKFILLING
A. For trenches of lines installed below a floor to be poured on grade, follow in general the
procedures set out for exterior lines except install with a minimum amount of cover.
Backfill with a suitable material and compact to no less than 95% Standard Proctor density
immediately prior to the pouring of the floor.
B. Dispose of all surplus materials occasioned by these trenching operations as directed by
the Architect.
15010-10 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
C. Scoop out trenches in the underhouse areas as required to accommodate all equipment
lines, ducts and piping, except waste, drain and sewer lines. Make these trenches
_,, adequate in width and depth to keep any such lines or duct a minimum of 6 inches from
finished earth grade, and slope the sides of such trenches so that there will be no
possibility of the trench walls caving or appreciably sloughing.
D. Waste, drain and sewer lines run in crawl spaces below the floor, may either be
suspended from the construction above or supported by the ground in trenches, using
procedures set out for exterior lines.
E. Sub-soil drain lines installed in underhouse areas shall be laid true to grade and shall be
backfilled using crushed rock completely surrounding the lines as indicated.
F. For trenches of all other lines to be installed below floors, which are to be poured concrete
on grade, follow in general the procedures set out for exterior lines except install with a
minimum amount of cover. Backfill with a suitable material and compact to not less than
95% Standard Proctor density immediately prior to the pouring of the floor.
G. Dispose of all surplus materials occasioned by the trenching operations as directed by the
_ Architect.
1.29 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Where a pipe passes through a floor in a pipe chase which is not a slab on grade, use a
22-gauge galvanized sheet steel sleeve, extending to a height of 11/2 inches above the
floor slab and cemented watertight; make the inside diameter of the sleeve at least 1/2
inch greater than the outside diameter of either the insulation on a covered pipe or of any
bare pipe.
B. Except where a pipe passes through a floor on grade or where noted to the contrary,
provide a pipe passing through a floor and exposed in any space with a standard weight
galvanized steel pipe sleeve set to extend to a height of 3 inches above the floor. Make
the inside diameter of the sleeve at least 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of
either the insulation on a covered line or of any bare pipe.
C. Where a line penetrates a floor that is provided with a waterproof membrane, provide a two
piece standard weight galvanized steel pipe and a cast iron riser sleeve with anchor lugs,
flashing clamping device and inside threads on both ends. The riser sleeve shall be set
in the lower part of the floor and clamped onto the membrane. The steel sleeve members
shall extend through the floor, finishing flush with the underside of any floor above grade
and extending to a height of 3 inches above the floor.
1. The inside diameter of the above sleeve shall be 1/2 inch greater than the outside
' diameter of the pipe. Following installation of the pipe, fill the annular space
between the sleeve and the pipe using a packing and then filling the sleeve with
a mastic which shall set and form a watertight seal under normal use conditions.
15010-11 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
D. Provide a pipe passing through an interior concrete beam or wall with a standard weight
galvanized steel pipe sleeve. Make the inside diameter of the sleeve at least 1/2 inch
greater than the outside diameter of either the insulation on a covered line or of any bare ,~
pipe.
E. Provide a pipe passing through an exterior wall with a non-metallic thermoplastic material
having an inside diameter 11/2 inches larger than the outside diameter of the pipe. Fill the
annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with a mechanical seal; Thunderline "Link-
Seal" or Mason-Dallas "Pipe Linx".
1.30 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES
A. Except as otherwise noted, provide and install a concealed hinge, chrome plated steel floor
and ceiling plate with a spring catch around each pipe passing exposed through any wall,
floor or ceiling in any space, except in mechanical rooms and except where steel pipe
sleeves extend above the floor line. Size the plate to fit snugly against the outside of the
pipe or against the outside of insulation on an insulated line. -
1.31 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish an access panel for each location where mechanical equipment such as a manual
valve, automatic control valve, automatic damper mechanism, (fire damper, etc. is installed
behind a furring, chase, or non-removable suspended ceiling). These panels will be
installed in the walls or ceilings by the trade involved under the applicable Division of the
general specifications. Size and position each access panel so that the concealed
equipment can be properly serviced, with the exact location subject to Architectural
approval.
B. Access panels shall be Milcor or equivalent steel access panels with hinged doors with
latching devices. In fire rated location UL 11/2 hour B labeled door; minimum size to 12 .-
inch by 12 inch. In unrated surfaces they shall be in accordance with the following:
BUILDING SURFACE MILCOR STYLE MINIMUM SIZE INS.
Masonry & Ceramic M 16 x 20
Tile Walls
Metal Lath & Plaster K 16 x 20
Walls
Gypsum Board Walls DW 14 x 14
Plaster Ceilings K 12 x 12
Acoustical Tile AT 12 x 12
Ceilings
Gypsum Board Ceilings DW 14 x 14
1.32 PAINTING
A. Where machinery and equipment has been shipped With an enameled factory finish, touch
up to repair any damage to the finish.
15010-12 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Suitably prepare all surfaces before painting. Remove all oil, rust, scale, dirt and other
foreign materials. Make surfaces smooth by grinding, filling, brushing or other approved
method.
C. Clean all uninsulated steel lines, support and hangers in underfloor spaces and apply two
coats of asphalt varnish. Clean copper and cast iron lines in these areas but do not paint.
D. For painting of insulated lines in underfloor spaces, see the INSULATION Section of these
Specifications.
E. All other finish painting will be accomplished under Division 9 of the Specifications.
F. Ceiling and wall grilles, diffusers and registers shall be factory painted as scheduled. If
field painting is necessary it shall be in a color directed by the Architect and Owner.
G. All rooftop equipment shall be factory painted as scheduled. If field painting is necessary
~- it shall be in a color directed by the Architect and Owner.
H. All new piping shall be painted to match the existing color scheme in the existing facility.
~_. This shall apply to all chilled water, condenser water, steam, condensate returns hot water
and drain piping.
1.33 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify each run of piping exposed in any space, including machinery space, attic areas,
and underfloor areas, by means of Seton, or equivalent Brady or Westline plastic markers
.... with pressure sensitive backing. Identify each system using black or white lettering with
an arrow to indicate direction of flow on a background color coded to conform to ANSI
A13.1. Use legends designed for parallel marking along length of pipe and sized as
follows:
O.D. OF LINE OR LENGTH OF COLOR HEIGHT OF
COVERING (INCHES) BAND (INCHES) LE'I-I-ERS (INCHES)
Less than 2 8 1/2
21/2 thru 6 12 11/2
over 6 24 21/2
B. Legends shall be installed following completion of all painting of piping and insulation
finishes.
C. Place pipe legends on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, on each drop
to an outlet, and on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet, except that in
no case shall an exposed line enter a room without being identified as specified herein.
Locate markers so as to be readily visible.
D. Secure identification markers to piping by firmly pressing markers in place, following
removal of protective covering. Additionally secure by banding ends of markers in place
using 1/2 inch wide aluminum bands of the type normally used to secure insulation in
place.
5010-13 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
E. Provide a nameplate for each motor starter furnished under this Division, identifying its
specific function. Fabricate nameplates or laminated phenolic plastic with black surface
and white core with beveled edges and with machine engraved lettering not less than 3/16
inch high cut through the black surface to the white core. Fasten nameplate to starter
enclosures with epoxy resin glue or stainless steel screws. Punched plastic tape will not
be acceptable for starter identification.
F. Provide identification for all fire damper or smoke damper access openings; stencil the
words "FIRE DAMPER" or "SMOKE DAMPER" on access doom that are in sheet metal
ducts; engrave the words "FIRE DAMPER" or "SMOKE DAMPER" on plastic plates with
letters not less than 3/16 inch high and secure the plates using an epoxy resin glue on
access doors that are in walls or ceiling where such doors conceal fire damper access
plates, or on the T-bars of removable ceilings immediately below the location of fire
damper access openings above. Fabricate these plates of laminated phenolic plastic with
a brown simulated wood grain finish exterior surface, a white core and beveled edges.
1.34 ELECTRIC WIRING
A. All eiectdc wiring will be done under Division 16, except for such equipment items as are
prewired at their point of manufacture and so delivered to the project, and except for the
following:
1. Temperature Control Wiring and Power Wiring for Controls.
B. Prepare and submit for review wiring diagrams for all equipment furnished under this
Division. Show on these diagrams all power, interlock, and control circuits. When the
Architect takes no exception to these drawings, they shall become installation drawings for
the Contractor.
C. All chilled water, condenser water, heating water, steam and condensate piping, domestic
cold and hot water, and wet fire protection system shall be heat traced when routed
external to the building or in areas susceptible to freezing conditions.
1.35 MOTORS
A. Furnish motors as required for all equipment provided under this Division. Motors shall
conform to the following requirements unless noted or specified otherwise.
1. Capacity: Be able to start and operate the driven equipment without exceeding
full load current nameplate rating at speed specified, or at the speed and load
imposed by the ddve actually furnished. In the case of a hermetic motor with
water or refrigerant cooling, actual motor running current may exceed nameplate
full load current by not more than 25% at specified operating conditions.
2. Motor 3/4 Horsepower and Larger:. 3-phase, drip-proof, squirrel cage induction
type; suitable for the current characteristics scheduled; NEMA Design B.
3. Motor Less than 1/2 Horsepower: Single-phase, drip-proof; of the type normally
used for the intended service, except where capacitor type is called for; suitable
for current characteristics scheduled.
15010-14 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00 --
4. Design and Service Factors: In accordance with current NEMA, IEEE, ANSI and
Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association Codes, Standards and
~ Specifications; rated for continuous duty at 40°C ambient temperature at a
standard service factor of 1.15.
5. Motors 3 HP and greater shall be of the high efficiency type and shall conform to
the following:
MOTOR SIZE PERCENT
-- HP EFFICIENCY
3 to 5 86.5
-- 71/2 to 10 88.5
15 to 40 93.0
50 to 60 94.0
75 to 100 95.0
Above 100 95.8
B. Where a motor is mounted integrally with an item of mechanical equipment, erect the
--~ entire assembly. Where a motor is separately delivered, provide the motor foundation, set
the foundation bolts and make all other provisions for installing the motor, and the final
motor setting will be under this Division 15.
C. Motors shall be manufactured by Baldor, Magnetek (Century), General Electric or Reliance.
1.36 STARTER AND MOTOR CONTROLS
A. Provide a suitable starter for control of each motor furnished under this Division. All
motors 3/4 horsepower and larger require starters, no exceptions. All motors that are
- automatically controlled require starters, no exceptions.
B. Provide each motor that does not require a starter, a manual starting switch with thermal
overload protection with identifying nameplate, green pilot light and stainless steel cover
plate equal to Westinghouse Type MS. Switches installed on finished walls shall be flush
type.
- C. Starter shall have overload protection on all phases. This will require three overload relays
for three phase motors and one ovedoad relay for one phase/line voltage motor. Provide
NEMA 1B control voltage transformer, "on" green pilot light, and 1-normally open and 2-
- normally closed auxiliary contacts on each starter, unless otherwise noted. Provide a
"HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC" control switch when H-O-A is noted on the plans.
D. Certain starters and motor controls for motors furnished under this Division are scheduled
on the Drawings to be elements of motor control centers provided under Division 16.
Except for those scheduled starters, provide a suitable starter for control of each motor
furnished under this Division.
E. Each starter shall have a capacity rating within the required limits of the motor which it
serves; it shall have overload elements selected to provide protection for the motor.
5010-15 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
F. Where a combination starter and disconnect switch or starter and circuit breaker in a
common enclosure is scheduled, provide auxiliary contacts on the switch or breaker as
required to assure that, when the disconnecting means is open, there are no "live" contact
points on the starter.
G. Where a schedule holding coil voltage differs from line voltage, install a transformer with
secondary fusing in the starter enclosure.
H. Unless otherwise indicated, furnish starters mounted indoors with NEMA Type 1
enclosures; and furnish those exposed to the weather with NEMA Type 3R enclosures.
I. Where starters are exposed to the weather, the heater elements shall be of the ambient
temperature-compensated, bimetallic type.
J. All motor starters and control devices shall be of one make and manufactured by one of
the following: Square D, Siemens or Westinghouse.
1.37 SAFETY GUARDS
A. Provide and install a belt guard covering the entire drive assembly for each belt drive
equipment item provided under this Contract. Use factory assembled belt guards when
they are available. Where a guard must be fabricated, rigidly construct it with a sheet
metal rim and aside panel of sheet metal or 1/2 inch metal hardware cloth, with openings .._
for tachometer insertion. Size each guard to permit full travel of the motor slide rails for
belt tightening and install each guard so as to permit removal for servicing the drive.
B. Guards shall also be installed to protect all projecting shafts and all rotating shafts,
couplings, keyways, etc. Generally, these shall be formed of not lighter than 18-gauge
galvanized steel bent to the proper shape and secured in place using removable fastening
devices.
1.38 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Instruct the OwneCs Representative in the proper operation of all equipment items of
systems.
1.39 MANUALS
A. Upon completion of the work, provide to the Architect for delivery to the Owner, 2 copies
of a bound manual or manuals of equipment, machinery and/or apparatus furnished under _
this Division of the Specifications. This shall include revised matedal from shop drawing
submittals showing numbers, sizes and ratings of equipment actually installed together with
any descriptions as to methods of installation. It shall also include manufacturer's service
and maintenance data, warranties, guarantees, etc.
B. Bind data in loose leaf, hardback ring binders sized for 81/2 by 11 inch sheets. Provide
sufficient binders to that no binder will be over 31/2 inches thick. -
15010-16 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
.40 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During the installation of the work, the Contractor shall keep detailed records of changes
made from the Contract Drawings. All changes must be approved by the
Architect/Engineer prior to the change being made. Prior to final completion of his work
he shall revise a set of reproducible sepias of the Contract Drawings and illustrate thereon
the work as actually installed; sepias shall be procured by the Contractor from the original
tracings which are the property of the Architect; revisions to the Drawings shall be the
Contractor's responsibility and the work shall be neat, legible, and accurate.
1. Should the Contractor prepare large scale installation drawings of mechanical
rooms, these drawings or reproducible sepias therefrom shall be revised as
required to accurately illustrate the actual installation.
2. All pipes buried in the ground or beneath floors on grade shall be accurately
located both by horizontally and vertical elevations.
3. Upon completion of the work, the as-built drawings shall be delivered to the
Architect.
END OF SECTION
15010-17 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
-- A. Refer to other Sections and Divisions of these Specifications for related work, materials
and procedures that are applicable hereunder.
--. B. This Section is pertinent to labor, material, equipment and service involved in the
installation of basic materials.
C. Each piping system shall be complete with pipe, fittings, joining materials, valves, cocks,
hangers, supports and other accessories; prove tight under test; repair leaks; clean.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
~ A. The following tabulates the description of various piping materials and applicable
standards:
DESCRIPTION STANDARD
Polwinyl Chloride (PVC) water ASTM D-2466
pipe and fittings - Schedule 40
,- PVC 12454-3 material.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) drain, ASTM D-2665
_ waste and vent (non-pressure
applications) - PVC 12454-B
material.
-- Polyethylene (PE) pipe and fittings
for gas pressure pipe and fittings ASTM D-2513
~- Cast iron bell and spigot or bell
and plain end soil pipe and fittings ASTM A-74
__ No-hub cast iron soil pipe and
fittings CISPI Std. 301
No-hub stainless steel couplings CISPI Std. 310
Rubber gaskets for joining cast iron
soil pipe and fittings ASTM C-564
Steel pipe, black and galvanized ASTM A-120
Steel welding fittings ANSI B16.9
15050-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
Cast iron flanged fittings, Class 125 ANSI B16.1
Cast iron flanged fittings, Class 250 ANSI B16.2
Cast iron drainage fittings, threaded ANSI B16.12
Malleable iron screwed fittings ANSI B16.3
Malleable iron grooved end fittings ASTM A-47
Red brass pipe, IPS ASTM B-43
Brass or bronze screwed fittings
(125 & 300 pounds) ANSI B16.15
Brass or bronze flanges and flanged
fittings (150 & 300 pounds) ANSI B16.24
Seamless copper water tube, Type
K, L & M ASTM B-88
Seamless copper drainage tube, Type
DWV ASTM B-306
Cast bronze solder joint pressure
fittings ANSI B16.18
Cast bronze solder joint drainage
fittings ANSI B16.23
Wrought copper solder joint pressure
fittings ANSI B16.22
Wrought copper solder joint drainage
fittings ANSI B16.29
Pipe threads ANSI B2.1
2.2 UNIONS
A. Malleable Iron: 150 lb. black, screwed, ground joint with brass to iron seats in lines
assembled with screwed fittings at points of connection to equipment for proper equipment
removal.
B. Brass: Screwed, ground joint.
C. Dielectric Type: As hereinafter specified.
5050-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2.3 FLANGES
A. In cold water lines flanges shall be flanged nipples with 125 pound cast iron flanges.
Provide 250 pound flanges where required.
B. In piping assembled using screwed joints, use 125 pound screwed-on cast iron flanges.
Provide 250 pound flanges where required.
C. In welded piping systems, flanges shall be 125 pound forged steel welding neck pattern.
Provide 250 pound flanges where required.
D. Where the above flanges connect to flat faced flanges on valves, items of equipment, etc.,
the companion flange shall be flat faced and where the flanges on items of equipment are
raised face flanges, the companion flanges shall have raised faces.
E. Flanges in copper lines shall be solder-joint type brass flanges.
F. Flange bolts and nuts shall conform to the applicable requirements of the Code for
Pressure Piping, ANSI B31.1-1955 (or later editions).
2.4 GASKETING
A. Rubber: Garlock No. 24 Wire Insertion Red Rubber Sheet; 1/16-inch thick.
B. Non-Asbestos: Johns-Manville compressed sheet; 1/16-inch thick.
C. Dielectric: As furnished with the flange for this application.
D. Other Material: As provided and/or recommended for the duty.
2.5 MECHANICAL COUPLINGS
A. No-Hub Cast Iron Joint: Neoprene sealing sleeve, corrugated stainless steel shield and
attached bands with individual tightening device; complying with CISPI 310.
B. High Silicon Iron Pipe Joint: Duriron with Teflon inner and neoprene outer sleeves,
stainless steel clamp with dual bolts and nuts.
C. Grooved End Steel Pipe Joint: Victaulic Style 77 Coupling with Grade H gasket.
2.6 VACUUM BREAKER
A. Watts No. 800, anti-siphon pressure type (for continuous pressure) with test cocks and
gate valves on each side.
2.7 SHOCK ARRESTOR
A. Plumbing Drainage Institute (PDI) rated shock arrestor (absorber) of Josam, Smith, Wade,
or Zurn make.
B. Alternate: Arrestor of Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
15050-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2.8 PIPE SEALS
A. Mason-Dallas "Pipe Linx" or Thunderline "Link-Seal", mechanical type.
2.9 PIPE FLASHING
A. Sheet lead; minimum weight of 4 pounds per square foot.
2.10 PITCH PAN
A. Form of not lighter than 24-gauge, galvanized steel with solder, watertight joints; 3-inch
minimum depth; minimum width and length, 3 inches larger than the outside diameter of
a penetrating pipe or 3 inches larger than the outside dimensions of a support member.
2.11 VALVES
A. Manufacturer's names and numbers used below are to set standards.
B. Butterfly Valves: Valves 3" inch and larger shall be resilient seated butterfly design. Seat
to rigid type and made of E.P.T. Nordel with temperature range -40°F. to 250°F. Body will
be cast iron with neck extended to provide for 2 inches of insulation over flange outside
diameter. Stem to be 410 Series, stainless steel with a bronze bushing. Disc will be
bronze. Valves 6-inch and larger to have enclosed heavy duty gear quadrant. All valves
to full tapped lug style. Butterfly valves shall be of Stockham, Nibco, Victaulic, DeZurick,
Keystone or Centerline manufacture. Valves used in control applications shall be Posi-
Seal. Valves shall be suitable for 200 psig working pressure.
C. Rising Stem Gate Valves: All valves shall be suitable for 200 psig working pressure.
Crane No. 430, screwed ends; No. 1334 solder joint ends for valves 2-inch and smaller;
Crane No. 465-1/2 for 2-1/2-inch and larger gate valves; flanged ends for larger steam
lines. Valves for steam service shall have stainless steel trim and seat with a cast iron
body. All valves in the tunnel shall be suitable for 250 lb. service. Stockham, Nibco,
Apollo, Watts and Jamesbury also acceptable.
D. Globe Valves: Crane No. 14-1/2P, threaded ends; No. 1310, solder joint ends with No. 12
disc. Valves for steam service shall have stainless steel trim and seat with a cast iron
body. Valves shall be suitable for 150 psig working pressure. Stockham, Nibco, Apollo,
Watts and Jamesbury also acceptable.
E. Ball Valves: Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be Stockham No. 5-216, screwed ends; No.
5-216, solder joint ends. Nibco, Jomar, Crane, Apollo or Watts also acceptable. Valves
shall be rated for 600 psig working pressure.
F. Non-Slam Check Valves: Combination Pump Valve Company No. 10B for 20B for 2-1/2-
inch and larger with iron body, bronze trim and stainless steel spring; No. 36 for 2-inch and
smaller with bronze body, nylon disc and stainless steel guide, retainer and spring. Valves
shall be lug pattern type and suitable for 200 psig working pressure.
G. Swing Check Valve 2-1/2-inch and Larger: Stockham, Nibco or Crane and equal to Crane
No. 373, bronze body, bronze trimmed and flanged ends. Valves shall be suitable for 200
psig working pressure.
15050-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
H. Swing Check Valve 2-inch and Smaller: Nibco, Stockham or Crane and equal to Crane
No. 37, bronze, screwed ends; No. 1342 bronze, solder joint ends. Valves shall be
suitable for 200 psig working pressure.
I. Fire Protection Line Valves: UL listed, FM approved, 175 pound cold water, non-shock.
Gate valves 2-1/2-inch and larger: Stockham, Nibco or Crane and equal to Crane No. 467
OS&Y iron body, bronze fitted, screwed pattem. Check valves 2-1/2-inch and larger:
Nibco or Crane and equal to Crane No. 375 iron body, bronze fitted, flanged pattern. Ball
drip 1/2-inch: brass, screwed pattern.
J. Balancing Valves: Gdswold or PSI automatic flow control valves with combination ball
valve, threaded ends pressure taps and double union, with Bronze housing and 300 series
stainless steel cartridge.
K. For control applications, ball valves shall be used to a maximum of 4-inch with butterfly
valves on 6-inch and above. For service applications, ball valves shall be used on lines
4-inch and smaller, rising-stem gate valves or butterfly valve with gear operator on 6-inch
and larger.
L. All valves shall be equipped with a 1" diameter brass tags with indented numerals. Tags
shall be provided with adequate link chain with which to secure them to valves.
COCKS
A. Manufacturer's names and numbers are to set standards.
B. Plug Cocks:
PLUG TYPE SIZE (INCHES) MAKE AND NUMBER
Screwed Ends 3/4 and smaller Crane 254
Lubricated, 1 thru 2 Rockwell 142
Screwed Ends
Lubricated, 2-1/2 & larger Rockwell 143
Flanged Ends
1. Fill lubricated plug cocks with proper lubricant for application and furnish with
wrench with set screw.
C. Pet Cocks: Crane No. 702 bronze, lever handle.
D. Gauge Cocks: Jomar 1/4" Model 82 ball valves. Nibco, Victaulic or Crane also
acceptable.
15050-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
2.13 STRAINERS
A. Full flow, Wye type; minimum 150 PSIG working pressure; iron body with blow-off; 2-inch
and smaller threaded and 2-1/2-inch and larger flanged; stainless steel screen that is
standard matedal and perforation sizes for the duty. Also acceptable are Victaulic T-
Strainer.
2.14 SNUBBERS
A. Weksler No. RS-1 bronze, pressure type.
2.15 SIPHON FITTING
A. Weksler Type AO3B, threaded brass pipe with full loop.
2.16 HEAT TRACE TAPE
A. Where called for provide heat trace taping consisting of self regulating polymer core that
varies its power output to respond to temperature along its length. The heater shall be
covered by a radiation cross-linked modified polyolefin dielectric jacket.
B. The heat trace tape shall operate on 120 volt and shall be 5 watts per foot for piping 4 inch
in size and less and 8 watts per foot for piping 6 inch and larger, unless noted otherwise
C. The heat trace tape shall be controlled by the Thermon line sensing thermostat with
variable set point.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. Piping shall be installed by skilled mechanics using designated basic materials plus any
required supplementary materials.
B. Run each line straight and true; minimum grade noted (or required by code); where
exposed run parallel to building planes grading for proper drainage and venting.
C. Install each run essentially as indicated as to location, direction and size. Cut to
measurements established at the site and work into place without forcing or springing.
D. Anchor lines to the building or tunnel structure where indicated or required to prevent
excessive movement or vibrations.
E. Provide each piping system with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connections
as required to compensate for expansion and/or contraction in that piping system.
3.2 JOINING PIPING
A. Use manufacturer's recommended procedures and follow all code requirements in joining
piping materials. Make square end cuts using proper tools and aligning devices. Ream
and deburr pipe ends; smooth rough surfaces; clean mating parts.
15050-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Change sizes using properly sized fittings and/or reducers (or increasers); use no long
screws or bushings. Change materials using suitable connectors or adapters.
C. Joining mitered pipe ends to form an elbow or connecting into a notched opening in a pipe
run to form a tee will not be permitted.
-- D. Threaded Joints: Full cut threads; assemble using an approved compound applied to male
threads only; not more than 3 threads shall remain exposed when the joint is completed.
- E. Welded Joints: All joints shall be fusion welded by a metallic arc or gas welding process.
Pipe ends shall be beveled 37-1/20. All welding operations shall conform to the latest
recommendations of the American Welding Society or to the applicable provisions of the
Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI B31.1, latest edition, amended to date.
1. Weld rods shall be of the proper type for each application to match the line
materials.
2. The Contractor shall provide written certification that every welder employed on the
job has passed qualification tests as prescribed by the National Pipe Welding
_ Bureau or other reputable testing laboratory using qualification procedures as set
forth in the ASME Boiler Construction Code, Section IX, or American Welding
Society Standard B3.0-41T. If the Engineer so requests, the Contractor shall have
each of his welders prepare test coupons which shall be tested in an approved
independent testing laboratory and any defects found shall be cause for dismissal
of the welder from the project. All cost of such tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.
3. Branch takeoffs not larger than 2/3 of the main may be made using shaped
nipples, Weldolets, or Threadolets to match branch line fabrication methods.
F. Bolted Joints: Pull up evenly all around on bolts or nuts to secure uniform tightening; use
torque wrenches where recommended.
-- G. Mechanical Joint in Underground Water Line: Force neoprene gasket into place. Use
stainless steel or Cor-Ten bolts and nuts to assemble.
- H. Rubber Gasket Joint: Force gasket in place.
I. Tongue and Groove Pipe: Apply a primer, then apply Ram-Nek or equivalent plastic joint
. sealing compound and press tongue and groove joint ends together; alternatively prime
with Talcote No. 041 primer and seal with Talcote No. 052 cold plastic and press together
per American Petrofina recommendations.
=' J. Polyethylene Pipe: Measure socket insertion depth and attach a cold ring. Heat pipe and
fitting the prescribed time; stab ends together and hold until initial set occurs. Route trace
cable next to pipe.
K. No-Hub Cast Iron: Join using a neoprene sealing sleeve, stainless steel corrugated shield,
and stainless steel bands with tightening device for each band; bands fastened to shield.
Joint fabrication to comply with CISPI Standard 301.
15050-7 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
L. Polypropylene Pipe: For fuse seal pipe and fittings, install fusion coil on pipe and set with
coil against the shoulder in the mating socket; apply a compression clamp; connect power
unit to coil and apply power as recommended with intermediate clamp tightening.
1. For Lab-Line/Enfield pipe and fittings the mechanical joints shall be fabricated
using the proper tests as provided by the manufacturer and the complete
installation shall be as recommended by the Lab-Line/Enfield Corp.
M. Mechanical Coupling on Grooved End Steel Pipe: File or grind surfaces to form leak tight
seat; lightly coat mating ends with grease or graphite paste. Pre-assemble any large
diameter multi-segment clamp and install as half housing.
N. Soldered and Brazed Joints: Use solder joint fittings in copper tubing lines; take care not
to anneal tubing and fittings.
1. Copper Piping Systems: Make all joints in copper tubing systems using solid
string or wire solder and a non-acid paste flux of the proper type for each
application. Drain lines and compressed air lines for temperature regulation shall
be joined using a non-lead solder. Water lines shall be jointed using 95-5 tin-
antimony. "SiI-Fos" solder shall be utilized on all copper line joints that are
installed below the floor slab.
O. Miscellaneous Joints: Make special joints as recommended by the manufacturer of pipe
and fittings to connect dissimilar materials, to connect to items of equipment, etc.
3.3 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Materials to be utilized in each piping system shall conform to the standards established
in this Section, but the particular application shall generally be as described in other
Sections.
B. Materials and applications that may be used in multiple disciplines may also be described
herein and apply to more than one subsequent section.
3.4 COPPER FITTINGS
A. Use wrought copper solder joint type in all patterns and sizes available. Use long radius _.
copper elbows wherever available and space will permit.
3.5 WELDING FI'I-rINGS
A. Welding Fittings: All fittings in welded lines shall be factory-fabricated welding fittings.
They shall be of the same material and the same weight or Schedule as the piping. All
elbow tees, caps and special fittings including connections into headers shall be standard
butt welding fittings, conforming to ANSI B16,9, with the following exception: Branch take-
offs from lines 2-1/2-inch and larger and where the size of the takeoff does not exceed 2/3
of the normal diameter of the mains to which connected, may be made with shaped
nipples or with Bonney Weldolets or Threadolets as required by the class of fabrication.
Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, or any similar
construction will not be permitted.
15050-8 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
3.6 FLANGES
A. At connections to flanged valves and equipment outlets in steel piping systems using
welding neck, slip on welding flanges, screwed steel, or cast iron companion flanges.
1. It will be permissible to use cast iron flanged fittings at connections to equipment
items.
B. In grooved end piping systems use matching flanged adapter nipples.
C. In copper lines use brass flanges.
D. Connecting flanges shall have matching flat or raised faces. Faces shall be free of
imperfections that would prevent proper seating.
E. Tighten bolts uniformly all around to prevent any stress.
3.7 GASKETS
A. Cut from proper materials as hereinafter listed, full-faced type for flat-faced flanges and
ring type for raised-faced flanges.
1. Water Lines: Red rubber sheeting.
2. Steam and Condensate Return Lines: Non-asbestos sheeting.
3. Dielectric Flanges: As provided with the flanges.
4. Other Lines: As recommended for the duty.
3.8 UNIONS
A. Provide in ferrous and brass screwed piping systems where indicated and/or as required
to permit installation and removal of equipment, valves, specialties, etc. In copper lines,
install only where shown or specified.
3.9 PIPE CAPS
A. Provide Swage lock fittings for all capped pipes in medical gas lines.
3.10 SECURING UNDERGROUND LINES
A. Install pipe clamps and braces using poured in place concrete blocks, or other anchors and
supports required to insure stability of all underground lines to prevent joint separation
either dudng tests or thereafter when lines are in service.
1. Pipe Braces and nuts installed in the ground shall be fabricated of stainless steel
to resist corrosion.
15050-9 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
3.11 PIPE GRADING
A. General: Grade each system in accordance with good established practice to avoid air
pockets, to relieve liquids and vent gases. Grade uniformly between indicated elevations
or at indicated slope. Slopes shown on plans shall take precedence over any listed herein.
B. Above Ground Fire Protection Piping: Grade to drain in accordance with NFPA standards.
C. Domestic Water Lines: Grade so that systems can be drained through fixtures or to valved
drains at Iow points.
D. Sanitary Waste and Drain Lines: Grade down in the direction of flow with a uniform grade
conforming to the requirements of the Plumbing Code, but not less than 1/8-inch per foot.
E. Vent Lines: Grade each up to a terminal, but not less than 10 inches above the roof.
F. Sanitary Vent Lines: Grade each up to a terminal, but not less than 10 inches above the
roof.
G. Downspout and Storm Water Drain Lines: Grade down in the direction of flow, but not less
than 1/8-inch per foot.
H. Gas Lines: Run in accordance with the requirements of the Plumbing Code and Gas
Company.
I. Gas Relief and Vent Lines: Grade up from the device to the point of discharge.
J. Equipment Drains: Each line from a relief valve, air vent valve, separator or a boiler, drip
pan elbow, exhaust head, heat exchanger, compression tank, receiver, pump base, air
conditioning unit pan, air washer overflow and drain, evaporator pan, and similar drain shall
grade down to a point of open sight discharge.
3.12 TESTING
A. All test results shall be submitted to the Owner.
B. Test piping prior to backfilling, concealing, insulating or painting; isolate pressure sensitive
equipment from tests.
1. Test portions as required by construction schedule. When previously tested
sections are expanded, retest at connections.
2. Test new portions as required by construction schedule; test new connections into
existing lines.
C. If pressure losses occur during tests, use suitable procedures to discover leaks, correct
and retest. Repeat until system is tight.
D. All other systems shall be tested hydraulically using water as the fluid for a 4 hour period.
15050-10 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
E. Furnish all compressed air, vacuum and water pumps; tanks of compressed air, nitrogen,
carbon dioxide, refrigerant, gauges, plugs, seals, etc., as required to obtain, maintain and
measure pressures during tests.
F. Pressure tests shall be applied to the various systems as follows and according to Section
15042:
TEST PRESSURE
PIPING SYSTEM (PSlG)
Gravity Condensate Returns 200
Fire Protection 200
Domestic Water 150
Gas, Between Gas Co's & Owners Regulators 50
Gas, On Load Side of Owner's Regulator 15
Gravity Waste Drain & Vent 5
Refrigerant As Noted
3.13 REPAIRS
A. Effect repairs as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe and fittings materials;
replace any defective materials. When procedures involve additional work on a joint and
they fail, remake the joint. Repair operations shall include:
1. Screwed Joints: Additionally tighten.
2. Caulked Joints: Additionally caulk.
3. Welded Joints: Chip out old weld metal and reweld.
4. Compression Joints: Reclean; replace seal, compression rings, couplings, etc.
5. Mechanical Joints: Reclean; additionally tighten.
6. Fused Joints: Additionally fuse, with clamping.
7. Soldered or Brazed Joints: Remake joint, no additional soldering or brazing
allowed.
8. Solvent Weld Joints: Cut out material and replace entirely.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Clean all previously existing and new piping systems and components prior to putting into
service.
B. Blow off all strainers in the above piping systems.
C. Domestic Water Lines: Flush with fresh water, opening and closing flush valves and
faucets until water runs clear.
D. Waste and Drain Lines: Swab out lines; flush with fresh water.
15050-11 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
E. Gas: Swab out when installing where size and arrangements will permit; blow clean using
nitrogen or oil free compressed air.
F. Repetition: Repeat the above procedures until all parts of each piping system is
thoroughly cleaned of all foreign materials.
3.15 PITCH PANS
A. Install a pitch pan filled with roofing pitch at each location of a pipe support above the roof,
point of penetration of the roof by a pipe, other than a vent line, and at support points for
roof mounted equipment as called for elsewhere herein.
END OF SECTION
15050-12 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15090 - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Comply with Division 15 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for coordination
work.
B. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and service, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of systems of pipe hangers and supports.
C. The Contractor shall provide complete submittals on all pipe hangers designating the
manufacturer, type, size, service, and number to be provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the recommendations of ASHRAE, ASPE,
ANSI, and MSS; and shall be of Grinnel or Fee and Mason manufacturers.
B. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated pipe hangers and supports in
which materials, design, and manufacture comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58. Select and apply
pipe hangers and supports in compliance with MSS SP-69, and manufacturer's published
product information. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports in compliance with
MSS SP-89.
C. Use only one type hangers and supports, by one manufacturer, for each piping service.
D. All thread rods, mits, washers, and similar to be cadmium plated.
E. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper piping systems where hangers are
in contact with bare pipe.
F. Provide isolation type hangers on all dissimilar metals to prevent electrolysis.
2.2 HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and around
piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping.
B. For suspension of non-insulated or insulated stationary pipe lines: Adjustable steel
clevices, MSS Type I.
C. For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines: Adjustable band hangers, MSS
Type 7 or 9; or split pipe rings, MSS Type II.
D. For support of piping where horizontal movement due to expansion and contraction may
occur, and where a Iow coefficient of friction is desired: Pipe slides and slide plates, MSS
Type 35, including guided plate mounted on a concrete pedestal or structural steel support.
15090-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
E. For support of pipe from floor stanchion, using floor flange to secure stanchion to floor:
Adjustable pipe stanchion saddles, MSS Type 37 or 38, including steel pipe base support
and cast-iron floor flange.
F. For suspension of pipe from two (2) rods where longitudinal movement due to expansion
and contraction may occur: Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43.
G. For suspension of pipe from a single rod where horizontal movement due to expansion and
contraction may occur: Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43.
H. For support of pipe from a single rod where horizontal movement due to expansion and
contraction may occur, but vertical adjustment is not necessary: Pipe roll stands, MSS
Type 45.
I. For support of pipe where small horizontal movement due to expansion and contraction
may occur, but vertical adjustment is not necessary: Pipe rolls and plates, MSS Type 45.
J. For support of pipe lines where vertical and lateral adjustment during installation may be
required in addition to provision for expansion and contraction: Adjustable pipe roll stands,
MSS Type 46.
2.3 VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS
A. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe.
B. For support and steadying of pipe risers: Two-bolt riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or 42.
2.4 HANGER ROD A'I-FACHMENTS
A. Select size of hanger rod attachments to suit hanger rods.
B. For adjustment up to six (6) inches for heavy loads: Steel turnbuckles, MSS Type 13.
C. For use on high temperature piping installations: Steel clevices, MSS Type 14.
D. For use with split pipe rings, MSS Type I1: Swivel turnbuckles, MSS Type 15.
E. For attaching hanger rod to various types of building attachments: Malleable iron sockets,
MSS Type 16 or 17.
2.5 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.
B. For upper attachment for suspending pipe hangers from concrete: Concrete inserts MSS
Type 18.
C. For attachment to top flange of structural shape: Top beam C-clamps, MSS Type 19.
D. For attachment to bottom flange of structural shape: Side beam or channel clamps, MSS
Type 20 or 27.
15090-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
E. For attachment to center of bottom flange of beams: Center beam clamps, MSS Type 21.
F. For attachment to bottom of beams where heavy loads are encountered and hanger rod
sizes are large: Welded attachments, MSS Type 22.
G. For attachment to structural shapes: C-clamps, MSS Type 23.
H. For attachment to top of beams when hanger rod is required tangent to edge of flange:
Top I-beam clamps, MSS Type 25.
I. For attachment to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads: Steel I-beam/WF-beam clamps
with eye nut, MSS Type 28 or 29.
J. Steel brackets, for indicated loading:
1. Light duty, 750 pounds, MSS Type 31.
2. Medium duty, 1500 pounds, MSS Type 32.
3. Heavy duty, 3000 pounds, MSS Type 33.
K. For use on sides of steel beams: Side beam brackets, MSS Type 34.
2.6 PIPE INSULATION HANGER SHIELDS
A. Where hangers are placed outside the jackets of pipe insulation, provide shields equal to
.... Thermal Hanger Shields" as manufactured by Pipe Shields, Inc., or equivalent by Elcen
Metal Products Company.
B. Shields shall consist of a 360 degree insert of high-density, 100 psi, waterproof calcium
silicate, encased in a 360 degree galvanized sheet steel shield. Insert shall be same
thickness as adjoining pipe insulation, and shall extend 1-inch beyond sheet metal shield
in each direction on cold lines. Shield lengths and minimum sheet metal gauges shall be
as directed below:
PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE
2" to 6" 6" 20
C. Shields shall be Model CS-CW, except for pipe roller applications and where pipe hanger
spacing exceeds 10 feet, then provide Model CSX-CW.
D. At the Contractor's option, shop-fabricated galvanized metal shields may be provided
based on approved shop drawings. Length and gauge of sheet metal shall be as specified
above.
2.7 METAL FRAMING: Provide products complying with NEMA ML-1.
15090-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
2.8 STEEL PLATES, SHAPES AND BARS: Provide products complying with ANSI/ASTM A-36.
2.9 PIPE GUIDES: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel,
consisting of a bolted two-section outer cylinder and base, with a two-section guiding spider bolted
tight to pipe or as shown on the Drawings. Size guides and spiders to clear pipe, cylinder, and
insulation, if any. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.
2.10 REINFORCED CONCRETE: Conform to Division 3 of these Specifications.
2.11 ROOF SUPPORTS
A. Equipment supports shall be all welded 18 gauge galvanized steel shell, baseplate and
counterflashing with internal bulkhead re-enforcement and factory installed wood nailer.
Supports shall be manufactured by Thy Curb or Pate and equal to the Thy Curb models
as follows:
1. Model TEMS-1 for insulated roof decks.
2. Model TEMS-2 for un-insulated roof decks and existing roofs.
3. Model TEMS-3 for single-ply roof systems.
B. Pipe curbs with covers shall be all welded 18 gauge galvanized steel shell and baseplate
with fully mitered 3" raised cant, wood nailer and TP-1 Duro EPDM cover or TP-2 pipe
cover, as detailed on the drawings, for pipe penetration(s). Pipe curbs shall be
manufactured by Thy Curb or Pate and equal to the Thy Curb models as follows:
1. Model TC-1 for insulated roof decks.
2. Model TC-2 for un-insulated and existing roof decks.
3. Model TC-3 for Bulb-T roof decks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building
structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct
inadequacies including, but not limited to proper placement of inserts, anchors and other
building structural attachments.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATrACHMI::NTS
A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for
proper support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length specified in this
Section. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional
concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints; at
changes in direction of piping; and, where required by a limited carrying capacity of the
structure. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts securely to
forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install
reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. In existing concrete structures, building
attachments shall be based on approved details.
15090-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
3.3 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
_ A. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure in compliance with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping to be supported together in trapeze-type hangers where possible. Install
supports with maximum spacings as specified in this Section. Where piping of various
'-- sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size
or install intermediate supports for small diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated
metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install
hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
C. Support fire protection water piping independently of other piping, except where detailed
on the Drawings in Tunnels, Service Corridors, and within the Central Utilities Building.
3.4 PROVISIONS FOR MOVEMENT
~ A. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, offsets, expansion bends and similar units.
-- B. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping, live and dead loading, and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
- C. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide necessary pipe slopes, and so that
maximum pipe deflections allow by ANSI B-31 are not exceeded.
3.5 INSULATED PIPING REQUIREMENTS
A. Hangers for insulated cold piping shall be placed around the outside of the insulation and
vapor barrier. Hangers for other insulated piping may be placed directly against the piping
with insulation carried completely over and around hanger and rod.
B. Clamps: Attach clamps including spacers, if any, to piping with clamps projecting through
-- insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B-31.
C. Factory Manufactured Insulation Hanger Shields: Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Shop-Fabricated Insulation Hanger Shields: Where Iow-compressive-strength insulation
or vapor barriers are indicated on cold, chilled water or refrigerant piping, install coated
~-' protective shields. Provide wood or high-compressive-strength insulation saddles inside
insulation jacket.
15090-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
3.6 HANGER SPACING AND ROD SIZES
A. Hangers shall be spaced so as to support piping properly and as shown on the Drawings.
Cast iron soil pipes shall be supported on hangers spaced not more than pipe length being
employed. Hangers for all other copper or steel piping shall be spaced according to the
following schedule:
MAXIMUM MINIMUM
PIPE SIZE HANGER SPACING ROD SIZE
1/2" 6' 3/8"
3/4" 6' 3/8"
1" 7' 3/8"
1-1/4" 8' 3/8"
1 - 1/2" 9' 3/8"
2" 10' 3/8"
2-1/2" 11' 1/2"
3" 12' 1/2"
3-1/2" 13' 5/8"
4" 14' 5/8"
5" 16' 5/8"
6" 17' 3/4"
8" 19' 7/8"
10" 20' 7/8"
12" 20' 7/8"
B. If the Contractor elects to deviate from the above hanger rod sizes and/or hanger spacing,
he does so at his own risk.
C. Spacing and rod sizes for other piping materials shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer. For example, where PVC piping is utilized it may require continuous support
depending on sizes and application.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by
ANSI B-31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ANSI B-31, with AWS standards, and with the details shown on the
Drawings.
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with
expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to limit movement of piping and forces
to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe
runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make
provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and
contraction of piping.
15090-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
3.8 INSTALLATION OF TRAPEZES OR PIPE RACKS
A. Light/Medium Duty: Assemble from standard manufactured metal framing systems, in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Heavy Duty: Fabricate from structural steel shapes selected for loads required. Weld steel
in accordance with AWS standards.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF PEDESTALS
A. Construct pedestals from reinforced concrete or structural steel shapes as shown on the
Drawings.
3.10 TUNNEL SUPPORTS
A. The tunnel piping shall be supported as detailed on the Drawings. The Contractor shall
coordinate with the General Contractor to insure that the proper steel supports are
provided.
END OF SECTION
15090-7 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15180 -INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. The General Provisions, Supplementary General Provisions, Special Provisions and
Division 1 Specification Sections apply to Work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with Section 15010 and other Division 15 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other
Divisions for coordination of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of insulation, including all related systems
and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
B. Submit for review the types and thicknesses of insulation proposed for use on the vadous
piping systems, vessels and equipment items specified to be covered. Include
substantiation of the various thicknesses offered and manufacturer's data sheets on
insulating materials, jackets, facings, finishes and accessories indicating compliance with
specified composite and component fire and smoke hazard ratings.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Insulation, jackets, coatings, etc., shall be manufactured in accordance with the following
standards:
1. All insulation systems (insulation, mastic, jacket or facing, finishes and adhesive)
shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by Procedure ASTM
E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding the indices: Flame Spread of 25 and
Smoke Developed of 50. Accessories, such as adhesives, plastics and cements,
shall be UL listed, non-flammable when wet with component fire and smoke
hazard ratings not exceeding the above indices.
2. Insulation thickness and values shall be in compliance with all applicable Energy
Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Owens-Corning
B. Johns-Manville
15180-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
C. Pittsburg-Corning
2.2 BASIC INSULATION MATERIALS, FI'I-rINGS, FINISHES
A. Insulation materials shall conform to the following requirements:
Maximum Density
K Lb. Per Federal
Factor Temp. Cubic Spec.
Type @ 75°F Limit-°F Foot Compliance
1. Calcium Silicate 0.38 1200 14 HH-I-523C
2. Fiberglass (Rigid) 0.23 450 5 HH-I-558B
3. Fiberglass Flexible
Duct Wrap 0.25 250 3/4 HH-I-558B
4. Foamed Glass
(Cellular) 0.36 850 9 HH-1-1751/3A
5. Foamed Plastic
(Flexible) 0.25 220 5 HH-I-573
6. High Temperature
Fiberglass 0.23 850 3 HH-I-558B
7. Insulating Cement 0.70 1700 3/4 SS-C-160
B. Fittings & Valves
1. Preformed P.V.C. fitting covers with rigid one piece (half-shell) preformed
fiberglass fitting of the same or greater material thickness, density and conductivity
as the adjoining pipe covering equal to Pro-Tec-T-Kote fittings.
2. Field fabricated fitting covers of same or similar material as pipe covering with
preformed inserts as specified above.
C. Finishes
1. 8'-ounce canvas.
2. Insulation cement.
3. 0.016 aluminum, plain, up through 12-inch pipe size; 0.016 aluminum, corrugated,
for pipe sizes 14-inch and larger.
4. 15-mil PVC.
5. Foil/reinforced/kraft jacket (vapor barrier).
6. 1/4-inch weatherproof mastic with glass mesh reinforcement.
7. 1/16-inch vapor barrier mastic with glass mesh reinforcement.
8. White all-service jacket (vapor barrier) with self-sealing lap.
9. Two coats vinyl lacquer type white paint.
15180-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
~ 3.1 GENERAL
A. Materials shall be applied by a qualified insulation applicator/workman skilled in this trade.
_ Insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions and
in accordance with recognized industry standards. Mechanical fasteners shall be used
whenever possible to assure permanent construction. Unsightly work shall be cause for
rejection.
B. Materials shall be applied only after surfaces have been tested and cleaned.
-- C. Non-compressible insulation material shall be Installed at hanger supports on cold piping
to prevent damage to insulation and vapor barrier.
_ D. Insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor-sealed to prevent condensation.
E. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be as scheduled; however, sufficient insulation shall
be provided to eliminate condensation on the cold surfaces, and to maintain a maximum
-- exterior insulation surface temperature of 125°F on the hot surfaces.
F. Where piping system insulation is specified, cover valves, strainers, unions, flanges, and
-- fittings.
G. Install protective metal shields where pipe hangers bear on the outside of insulation. On
_ piping six inches and larger provide wood blocking from the shield through the insulation
or O.C. Kaylo (minimum 24" long) to prevent crushing of the insulation.
H. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping
-- penetrations, there shall be no exceptions.
I. Prior to installation of any insulation materials to ferrous piping systems, the piping
- surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mill scale, grease and dirt.
3.2 APPLICATION TYPES
A. Equipment
El: Cut insulation to fit contour of equipment, and secure by means of bands, stick-
--- clips, weld-pins and lugs or adhesives as required for each individual piece of
equipment. Provide vapor barrier and finish as required for each specific
application. Provide new cold surfaces of pumps with accessible boxes that easily
_ separate coincidental with parting line of evaporator heads and pump casings.
Resulting insulation joints shall be covered with a self-sealing, vapor-barrier tape.
B. Piping
PI' Butt insulation together and securely staple in place with outward-clinching staples
on 3-inch centers. Install factory-fumished laps at the butt joints. Neatly bevel
.- and finish insulation where it terminates. Use of double tape self-sealing
adhesives systems will negate requirements for staples.
15180-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
P2: Butt insulation together and securely staple in place with outward-clinching staples
on 3-inch centers. Install factory-furnished laps at the butt joints. Neatly bevel
and finish insulation where it terminates. Seal all laps and penetrations in vapor -'.-
barrier jacket with an approved vapor barrier mastic. Use of double tape self-
sealing adhesive systems will negate requirement for staples.
P3: Butt insulation together and secure with mechanical fasteners. Fill joints with
insulation cement prior to insulation finish.
P4: Same as P2, except install insulation over heat trace tape. Finish with metal
jacket.
P5: Same as P4, except there is no heat trace tape.
C. Ductwork
D1: Apply fiberglass board insulation to ducts with mechanical fasteners such as stick-
clips or weld-pins spaced as required to install full pieces of board insulation.
Space on 12-inch centers (maximum) on the bottom of each duct and plenum.
Cover joints and seams in vapor barrier facings with 3-inch wide matching tape,
or with vapor-barrier mastic reinforced with 3-inch glass mesh reinforcement.
Provide an additional layer of insulation board where duct standing seams exceed
the insulation thickness.
D2: Wrap flexible fiberglass insulation around ducts and secure with outward-clinching
staples. Additionally, ducts 24 inches wide and larger shall secure insulation with
stick clips on 18-inch centers. Lap insulation a minimum of four (4) inches, and
seal seams and penetrations with an approved mastic reinforced with three (3)
inches of glass mesh reinforcement, or three (3) inches foil/vapor-barrier tape.
Seal raw glass to duct where insulation terminates.
15180-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PIPES
INSULATION FINISH
INSULATION APPLICATION INDOOR INDOOR
TYPE THICKNESS TYPE CONCEALED EXPOSED OUTDOOR
Domestic cold water;
bottom of roof drains;
storm drains above
ceilings; cooling
condensation drains;
waste from chilled
drinking water fountains.
Indoor: 2 1/2" P2 8 4
Outdoor: 2 1" P4 8 & 3
Domestic hot water
supply & recirculation 2 .N1 P1 8 4 8 & 3
See "Schedule Notes", this Section.
.. Provide insulation where piping is heat traced.
PIPE FITTINGS
FITTING TYPE FITTING FINISH TYPE
INDOOR INDOOR INDOOR INDOOR
CONCEALED EXPOSED OUTDOOR CONCEALED EXPOSED OUTDOOR
Domestic cold
water; bottom of
roof drains; storm
drains above
ceilings; cooling
condensation
drains; waste from
chilled drinking water
fountains, I 1 1 4 4 3
Domestic hot water
supply & recirculation. I 1 1 4 4 3
15180-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
DUCTS (N4)
INSULATION FINISH
INSULATION APPLICATION
TYPE THICKNESS TYPE INDOOR OUTDOOR
Outdoor supply and return
air ducts and plenums. 2 2" D1 - 3
Concealed supply, return"
and outside air ducts. 3 2" D2 5
Exposed supply, return'* and outside air ducts and plenums:
In mechanical equipment rooms
and other non-conditioned
areas. 2 2" D1 5
In air-conditioned areas 3 1-1/2" D2 5
See "Schedule Notes", this Section.
Where Noted on the Plans, Return Air Duct shall be Internally Lined.
SCHEDULE NOTES:
Refer to Article 3.04, "Domestic Hot Water Systems".
N2: Refer to Article 3.04, "Heating Water and Steam Systems".
N3: Refer to Article 3.04, "Cooling Systems".
N": Unless specifically noted to the contrary, all supply air ducts and plenums shall be externally
insulated.
3.3 PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULES:
DOMESTIC HOT WATER SYSTEMS (N~)
NON-CIRCULATING CIRCULATING MAINS AND BRANCHES
SUPPLY WATER RUNOUTS UP TO
TEMPERATURE l-INCH UP TO 1-1/4" 1-1/2" &2" OVER 2"
170 -180°F 1/2" 1" 1-1/2" 2"
140 -160° F 1/2" 1/2" 1" 1 - 1/2"
100 -130 ° F 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1"
15180-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PRE-FABRICATED HANGER SHIELDS
A. Refer to Section 15090, which provides for metal jacketed insulation inserts at the various locations
described.
B. Provide the following insulation work: Coat butt ends of insulation and inset with a vapor barrier
adhesive; cover butt joints with vapor barrier jacket butt strips; and, apply vapor barrier tape on
longitudinal overlap of metal jacket for insulation insert.
END OF SECTION
15180-7 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15300 - UTILITY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and Division
1 Specification Sections apply to Work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with Section 15010 and other Division 15 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other
Divisions for coordination of the Work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of utility services, including all related
systems and accessories.
B. This Plumbing Subcontractor shall extend the sanitary sewer service, storm drainage,
water service and natural gas service to the indicated points of connection shown on the
drawings. The scope of this work shall include all labor and materials for domestic water
services, compound water meter, detector check or compound water meter for fire line
service, code and permit fees, and materials required for the installation of various utility
services as herein specified, adhering to the general routing and methods of distribution
as shown by the drawings.
1.3 SUBMI-I-FALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY SEWER SERVICES
A. The sanitary sewer service shall be cast iron soil pipe exactly as specified under Section
15405 for sanitary sewer pipes and shall extend from the buildings to the point of
connection shown on the drawings.
2.2 WATER SERVICES
A. Domestic water and fire services of the size shown on the drawings shall be installed. All
water services lines shall be pipe and fittings as specified under Domestic Water Supply
System Section 15401 and "Basic Materials and Methods", Section 15050.
2.3 NATURAL GAS
A., Install gas service piping as shown on plans. Provide metering and metering equipment
or arrange with local utility company to do so. Piping and fitting shall be as specified under
gas piping system, Section 15403.
15300-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. All underground service lines shall be located to have a minimum cover of not less than
eighteen inches (18"). If it is impossible to maintain this specified cover due to new or
existing grades, floor elevations, curb elevations, etc., the Contractor shall contact the
Architect for instructions prior to installation of any pipe so affected.
END OF SECTION
15300-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15401 - DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Related work and materials are specified under Section 15010, General Provisions;
Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods, and other appropriate Sections of this
Division.
B. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, matedal equipment and
service necessary for and incidental to the domestic water supply system as shown on the
Drawings and/or specified herein.
C. Install piping as shown on the Drawings and as described in Section 15050, Basic
Materials and Methods, using methods of fabrication, grading, testing, repairing, cleaning
and other procedures as established therein, but the particular material application shall
be as described in this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A. PIPING MATERIALS
1. The materials as scheduled and/or hereinafter listed shall be used in fabricating
piping systems. Where material changes occur install suitable adapters to provide
tight sealing joints. Where multiple choices of materials are listed, only one shall
be used, except by special permission.
B. Exterior Water Lines 4-inch and Larger: PVC polyvinyl chloride gasketed, push joint pipe,
with ductile fittings.
C. Interior Domestic Hot and Cold Water Lines Aboveground: Type "L" hard drawn copper
tubing assembled using solder joint pressure fittings. Exposed connections to plumbing
fixtures shall be chrome plated red brass pipe assembled using chrome plated red brass,
and screwed fittings.
D. Interior Domestic Hot and Cold Water Lines Below Grade: Type "K" soft temper copper
tube. No joints below slab.
E. Connections between ferrous pipe or equipment and non-ferrous pipe or equipment shall
be made with bronze valves, or di-electric unions.
2.2 GAS-FIRED WATER HEATER
A. (WH-1) State Industries Model SB100-400NE Gas Fired Turbo Sandblaster with a 99
gallon storage capacity with 399,990 BTUH input with a recovery rate of 380 gallons per
hour with a 100 deg. rise. Tank shall be porcelainized glass lined with annular water inlet
ring with water jets. Tank shall have a working pressure rating of 150 psi and replaceable
magnesium anode rods. Factory installed temperature and pressure relief valve.
15401-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. (WH-2) State Industries Model SB6-20-12-1FE-ASME-NSF electric, 20 gal. storage, 2"
thick polyurethane foam insulation meets ASHRAE 90A, 12 kW input, 277V., 3 elements,
49 G PH at 100° deg. rise, replaceable magnesium anode pods, factor installed temperature
and pressure relief valve.
2.3 HOSE BIBBS
A. (HB-1) Single, Pipe Mounted Faucets: 3/4-inch copper plated brass, male inlet, tee handle,
hose threaded faucets equivalent to Woodford Model 24.
2.4 WALL HYDRANTS
A. (WH-1) Non-freeze type, cast brass with brass wall casing, Nikaloy face, loose T-handle,
wall clamp; equivalent to Woodford Model B65 Series, with deep box and approved
vacuum breaker.
2.5 VACUUM BREAKER
A. Watts No. 9D, or equivalent, chrome plated vacuum breaker with intermediate atmospheric
vent for continuous pressure service.
2.6 TRAP PRIMERS
A. (TP-1) Trap primers shall be Precision Plumbing Products Type P-1 or P-2 with distribution
units as required. Primer shall be machined of corrosion resistant brass with no springs
or diaphragms with "O" ring seals tested from 40-450°F, adjustable for high or Iow
pressure.
B. (TP-2) Trap Primer Valve: Wade Model W-3400 for installation on the cold water supply
to lavatories.
2.7 SHOCK ARRESTORS
A. (SA-A) Shock Arrestor: Sioux Chief Model Hydra-Restor copper construction, triple o-ring
piston, 60 psi factory charge. -A indicates PDI size.
2.8 CIRCULATING PUMPS CP-1
A. Domestic Hot Water Circulators: Hot water pumps shall be manufactured by Grundfos and
shall have capabilities as follows: The pumps shall be bronze construction with stainless
steel impeller. Ceramic motor shaft and bearings. Grundfos Model UP15-42F, 11 ff. HD
at 8 gallon per minute.
2.9 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE ASSEMBLY
A. (MV-1) Leonard Valve Co. Model TM-186-80-20-PRV-RF-0 high-low assembly with a large
thermostatic water mixing valve and small mixing valve, shut of valve, pressure regulating
valve, DDL thermostat, rough bronze finish.
15401-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. (MV-2) Leonard Valve Co. Model 110-B, thermostatic tempering valve. Mixing valves shall
have bimetal thermostat, screwdriver type temperature regulator and line size check/stop
valves on inlets.
C. (MV-3) Leonard Valve Co. Model M-15-E thermostatic mixing valve, Bl-metal thermostat,
integral check stops, volume control, rough chrome brass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
_ 3.1 PIPING
A. Install all piping as described in Section 15050, using methods of fabrication, grading and
other procedures described therein.
B. Install all extedor and interior piping as shown and/or as required. Make all connections
to backflow preventers, water heater, plumbing fixtures and equipment, etc.
3.2 HOSE BIBBS
A. Mount on face of wall where indicated on Drawings.
3.3 WALL HYDRANTS
-- A. Mount with the face of the valve box flush with the wall surface.
3.4 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Provide and install an approved vacuum breaker on each water supply serving a plumbing
fixture, item of equipment or other device having a water supply below the rim of the fixture
or as shown on the Drawings. Vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible
backflow through them. Where required, install drawings to the nearest open-site drain.
3.5 STERILIZATION
A. After completion of the installation and testing of the domestic water supply system,
thoroughly sterilize the system and its attached equipment with a solution containing not
less than 50 PPM of available chlorine. Introduce into the system either liquid chlodne
conforming to U.S. Army Specification No. 4-1 or calcium hypochlodte or chlorinated lime
conforming to the requirements of Federal Specification O-C-114. Allow the sterilizing
solution to remain in the system for a pedod of 8 hours, during which time all valves and
-- faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After sterilization, flush the solution
from the system with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2
PPM.
END OF SECTION
15401-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
_ CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15403 - NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
-- A. Related work and materials are specified under Section 15010, General Provisions;
Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods, and other appropriate Sections of this
Division.
B. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, service necessary
for and incidental to the natural gas distribution system as shown on the Drawings and/or
specified herein.
C. Install piping as shown on the Drawings and as described in Section 15050, Basic
Materials and Methods, using methods of fabrication, grading, testing, repairing, cleaning
-- and other procedures established therein, but particular material application shall be as
described in this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIAL
-- A. The materials as scheduled and/or hereinafter listed shall be used in fabricating piping
systems, but new pipe materials shall be the same type as presently installed at locations
as shown on the Drawings. Where material changes occur, install suitable adaptors to
_ provide tight sealing joints.
B. Exterior Gas Piping: Standard weight black steel.
1. Fittings 2-1/2-inch and Larger: Standard weight forged steel welding fittings.
2. Fittings 2-inch and Smaller: Black malleable iron screwed pattern.
3. Pipe and large fittings shall be "mill wrapped" with Keith-Kote, Inc. specification A-
2 jacket; small fittings shall be field, wrapped with vinyl tape equivalent to 3M
_ Company's No. 51 Scotchrap.
C. Exterior Underground Gas Piping: Polyethylene pipe and fittings, Nipak or equivalent. At
the point where a turn emerges from the ground, change to pre-bent standard weight black
-- steel pipe. Trace with #16 copper tracing cable.
D. Above Ground Gas Lines: Standard weight, black steel pipe.
1. 2-1/2-inch and Larger: Use black steel welding fittings.
2. 2-inch and Smaller: Use black malleable iron screwed fittings.
E. Gas Piping routed in return air plenums shall utilize socket weld fittings.
15403-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
_ CCRD 295254.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING
A. Install piping as described in Section 15050, using methods of fabrication, grading, and
other procedures described therein. Grade systems to established Iow points and provide
condensation pockets.
B. All gas piping within the building structure shall be run exposed to view, unless otherwise
indicated. It shall not be concealed under floor, above ceiling or in furrings or chases.
Where it is necessary to run piping concealed include stub-up gas piping through furred
ceiling space to service equipment or outlets on the floor above. Install the piping in the
ceiling with socket weld fittings.
3.2 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL GAS PIPING
A. All underground steel gas pipe and fittings shall be protected by wrapping.
B. Prior to wrapping, clean and dry steel pipe and fittings and wire brush joints. Prime and
hand wrap steel surfaces with one of the listed tapes spirally wound with half-lapping,
resulting in 2 thicknesses, a minimum thickness of 20 mils. Apply tape with a small amount
of tension and without wrinkles. The field application of primer and tape shall extend a
minimum of 6 inches onto the connecting material below ground and to a minimum of 4
inches above ground. Seal ends with mastic.
END OF SECTION
15403-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15405 - DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
-- A. Related work and materials are specified under Section 15010, General Provisions -
Mechanical; Section 15050, Basic Materials & Methods, and other appropriate Sections of
this Division.
B. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and
service necessary for and incidental to the sanitary and storm water drainage systems as
shown on the drawings and/or specified herein.
C. Install piping as shown on the drawings and as described in Section 15050, Basic
Materials & Methods, using methods of fabrication, grading, testing, repairing, cleaning and
-- other procedures as established therein. But the particular matedal application, shall be
as described in this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
-- A. The materials as scheduled and/or hereinafter listed shall be used in fabricating piping
systems. Where material changes occur, install suitable adapters to provide tight sealing
joints. Where multiple choices of materials are listed, only one shall be used, except by
-- special permission.
B. Interior Sanitary Waste and Vent Lines:
Below Ground:
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) type DWV, plain end, socket connections, solvent welded joings.
Above Ground:
_ Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) type DWV, plain end, socket connectins, solvent welded joints.
*Exception - No PVC allowed in return air plenum - incell chases: use cast iron fittings
as indicated on drawings.
C. Exterior Sanitary Waste and Sewer Lines: Shall be the same material as interior waste
and vent system.
- D. Sanitary Fixture Waste Arms: Use materials as specifically designated and do not intermix;
use approved fittings provided with carrier mounted fixtures; connect drains, floor mounted
sinks and other designated fixtures and equipment using deep seal cast iron -P-traps;
__ connect other fixtures and drain using cast iron, red brass, Type L hard copper or lead
pipe conforming to Plumbing Code requirements.
E. Fittings in copper waste lines shall be of drainage pattern.
15405-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
F. Sanitary tees or sanitary crosses shall be used in connecting fixtures to dsers, where
space conditions absolutely prevent the use of sanitary type fittings, tapped tees may be
used.
G. Fittings: PVC drainage pattern design having the manufacturer's mark or name and the
date of manufacturer cast on it.
H. PVC pipe shall not be installed in return air plenums unless allowed by code. Piping in
return air plenum shall be service weight, no-hub cast iron pipe with cast iron fittings and
neoprene stainless steel couplings. --
I. Condensate, Drains, Overflow and Drain from Hot Water Relief Valve, Ddp Pan Drains and
Other Plumbing Equipment Item: Type L hard drawn copper tubing with wrought copper
solder joint, drainage fittings.
2.2 FLASHINGS
A. Flashings shall be 4-pound per square foot or heavier weight sheet lead.
2.3 DRAINS
A. Size as noted; equivalent to manufacturer's type listed; Josam, Smith, Wade, or Zurn.
1. Provide each floor, shower, hub drain, or floor sink, with a cast iron P-trap.
Provide drains with flashing clamping device where membrane waterproofing or
metal pans occur.
B. Drains shall be equivalent to the following listed types:
1. Floor Drain (FD-1) Wade Model W-1100 cast iron body, bottom outlet, inside caulk
connection and adjustable Nickel Brass round strainer. Provide vandal-proof
screws for floor drains in secure areas.
2. Floor Drain (FD-2) Wade Model W-9010-17; cast iron round floor sink with
aluminum dome strainer, bronze top.
3. Floor Drain (FD-3) Wade Model W-1100-AS-5-6 cast iron drain body with flonge
and satin bronze 4" x 5" angle strainer with vandal proof screws.
2.4 CLEANOUT FERRULES AND CLEANOUTS
A. Ferrules shall be of materials and thicknesses to match the piping system in which they
are installed.
B. Cleanout Plugs
1. In Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Drain -Lines: Heavy brass with raised nuts or
recessed sockets.
C. Both cleanout ferrules and plugs shall have American Standard Tapered Pipe Threads.
15405-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
D. Size of cleanout shall be the same as the piping to which it is connected up to 4-inch. On
piping larger than 4-inch the cleanout shall be 4-inch in size. The following schedule shall
apply.
Linoleum Floors: J.R. Smith Series 4140 - round top with insert
Carpeted Floors: J.R. Smith Series 4240-Y - round with carpet marker
Exterior: J. R. Smith 4240 - round with cast iron cover
Wall: J.R. Smith Series 4710
Quarry Floor: J.R. Smith Series 4053-PB - square bronze top
Ceramic Floor: J.R. Smith Series 4053-NB - square nickaloy top
2.5 SHOWER PANS
A. Furnished under Section 15450 "Plumbing Fixtures".
2.6 DRIP PANS
A. Of not less than 14-gauge galvanized steel with raised sides and galvanized steel pipe
nipple drains welded in place at Iow points.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING
A. Install piping as described in Section 15050, using methods of fabrication, grading and
other procedures described therein.
3.2 DRAINS
A. Take care to locate bodies of drains at proper elevations to permit sloping of floors to
secure proper drainage.
3.3 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
A. Do all necessary form work, removal of forms, installation of reinforcing, installation of cast
iron steps and manhole frames at proper stages of construction.
B. Concrete shall be 3000 pound test.
3.4 DRIP PANS
A. Provide drip pans under waste lines concealed above certain rooms where so noted. Pans
shall be of galvanized steel, arranged to drain as noted on Drawings.
3.5 CLEANOUTS
A. Set exterior cleanouts in an 18-inch by 18-inch by 6-inch deep reinforced concrete pad
except in concrete paved drives or walkways.
B., All interior cleanouts shall be turned up to terminate flush with the floor above.
END OF SECTION
15405-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
-- A. Related work and materials are specified under Section 15010, General Provisions -
Mechanical; Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods; and other appropriate
Sections of this Division.
B. This Section of the Specification pertains to all other labor, material, equipment, and
service necessary for and incidental to the plumbing fixtures as shown on the
drawings and/or specified herein.
C. Provide and install plumbing fixtures and trim shown cross hatched or shaded on the
drawings.
D. Many items of furniture requiring water and waste services and various items of trim
will be provided under other Divisions of these specifications or by the Owner. As
_ a part of this work install all sinks and trim, including faucets, strainers, tailpieces.
Provide and install traps, vacuum breakers, shut-off valves and other required
appurtenances necessary for a complete installation. In the kitchen areas, the kitchen
equipment shall be installed in place by the kitchen equipment contractor. The
-- mechanical contractor shall install all plumbing related trim provided with the
equipment and make all final connections.
_ 1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Separate grab bars and toilet accessories not an integral part of plumbing fixtures as
specified in Division 10.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
-- A. Product Data: Submit product data and installation instructions for each fixture, faucet,
specialties, accessories and trim specified. Clearly indicate rated capacities of
selected models of water coolers.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit rough-in drawings. Detail dimensions, rough-in requirements,
required clearances and methods of assembly of components and anchorages.
Coordinate requirements with Architectural Woodwork shop drawings specified in
- Division 6 for fixtures installed in countertops and cabinets. Furnish templates for use
in woodwork shop.
- C. Wiring. Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements and wiring diagram
for power supply to units. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are
factory installed and field installed portions.
15450-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards
1. ASHRAE Standard 18: "Method of Testing for Rating Drinking Water Coolers
with Self-Contained Mechanical Refrigeration Systems."
2. ARI Standard 1010: "Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically
Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers."
3. ANSI Standard Al17.1: "Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities
Accessible To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People."
4. Public Lay 90-480: "Architectural Barriers Act of 1968."
5. UL Standard 399: "Drinking Water Coolers."
6. Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS _
2.1 MAN U FACTU RERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide plumbing fixtures of
one of the following:
1. Lavatories, Service Sinks, Water Closets, Urinals (all vitreous china fixtures
shall be by one manufacturer)
a. American Standard, Inc.
b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
c. Eljer; A Household International Co.
d. Kohler Co.
2. Faucets
a. American Standard
b. Speakman
c. Chicago Faucet Co.
3. Flush Valves
a. Sloan Valve Co.
b. Zurn
c. Coyne & Delany Co.
4. Water Closet Seats
a. Bemis Mfg. Co.
b. Beneke Corp.
c. Olsonite Corp.; Olsonite Seats
15450-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
5. Water Coolers
a. Ebco Mfg. Co.
b. Elkay Mfg. Co.
c. Halsey Taylor
d. Haws Drinking Faucet Co.
6. Mop Sinks
a. Fiat Products
b. Stem-Williams Co., Inc.
c. Florestone Products Co., Inc.
7. Fixture Supports
a. Josam Co.
b. Kohler Co.
c. Tyler Pipe
d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
8. Security Fixtures
a. Bradley
b. Metcraft
c. Acorn
2.2 FIXTURES
A. The following model numbers and trim items establish the type and quality required.
Fixtures and trim items installed must be fumished by the manufacturer as specified
below. Refer to plans for types and quantities.
2.3 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closet (WC-1)
1. Water Closet: American Standard 2234.015 floor mounted, 1-1/2" top spud,
elongated bowl.
2. Seat: Church 9500C solid plastic seat with open front for elongated bowl.
3. Flush Valve: Sloan "Royal" 111 exposed valve with screw driver stop,
vacuum breaker and 1.5 gallon flush.
B. Water Closet (.VVC-2)
1. Water Closet: American Standard 3043.102 floor mounted, 1-1/2" top spud
and elongated bowl. Mount at 17" A.F.F. for handicap use.
2. Seat: Church 9500 solid plastic seat with open front elongated bowl.
15450-3 Coppeil Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
3. Flush Valve: Sloan "Royal" 111 exposed valve with screw driver stop,
vacuum breaker and 1.5 gallon flush.
C. Water Closet (WC-3)
1. Water Closet/Lavatory Combination Unit: Bradley Model 5590-QS, type 304
12 ga. stainless steel cabinet with 14 ga. lavatory bowl, countertop, back
splash. Complete with lavatory trap and tissue holder. Toilet bowl is Iow
flow (1.6 gal.) flush.
2. Faucet: Bradley Model 1020 self-closing lavatory valves for hot and cold
water supplies with pushbutton controls, penal filler-bubbler.
3. Flush Valve: Sloan Model 603 flush valve.
4. Waste Connection: Bradley Model 1200-4 toilet waste Bradley Model 1156
lavatory waste.
5. Wall Sleeve: 18 ga. steel, 1/2" dia. rods, wall thickness as required.
2.4 URINALS
A. Urinal (UR-l)
1. Urinal: American Standard AIIbrook No. 6541.132 urinal.
2. Flush Valve: Sloan "Royal" 186-1 exposed valve with screw driver stop and
vacuum breaker. 16 gal. flush.
3. Carrier: Wade heavy duty upright urinal carrier.
2.5 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatory (L-l)
1. Lavatory: American Standard Affinity Model No. 3420.803 countertop mounted
Americast lavatory with 8" centers.
2. Faucet: American Standard 6832.342 faucet with 8" centers, gooseneck spout
and wrist blades with strainer drain.
3. P-trap: McGuire 8912 1-1/4" cast brass P-trap with tubing drain to wall,
cleanout and escutcheon.
4. Supplies: Chicago No. 1006 supply assembly with loose key angle valve,
flexible tube risers and escutcheon with set screw.
5. Insulate all exposed piping below lavatory with Lav-Guard foam insulation
15450-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Lavatory (L-2)
1. Lavatory: American Standard Lucerne Model No. 0194.019 vitreous china, d-
shaped lavatory with 8" centers.
2. Faucet: American Standard 6832.342 faucet with 8" centers, gooseneck spout
-- and wdst blades with strainer drain.
3. P-Trap: McGuire 8912, 1-1/4" cast brass P-trap with tubing drain to wall,
_ cleanout and escutcheon.
4. Supplies: Chicago No. 1006 supply assembly with loose key angle valves,
flexible tube risers and escutcheons with set screws.
2.6 SINKS
--- A. Sink (S-1)
1. Sink: Elkay Model PSR2522 stainless steel single compartment countertop
sink.
2. Faucet: Elkay Model LK-2432 faucet with gooseneck spout and wrist blades.
-- 3. Strainers: Elkay Model LK-99 chrome plated cup strainers with 1-1/2"
tailpieces.
-- 4. P-Trap: McGuire 8912 1-1/2" cast brass P-trap with tubing drain to wall,
cleanout and escutcheon.
5. Supplies: Chicago No. 1006 supply assembly with loose key angle valve,
escutcheon and flex tube dser.
6. Disposer: In-sink Erator model 17, 3/4 H.P.
2.7 MOP SINKS
~_ A. Mop Sink (MS-l)
1. Mop Sink: Fiat MSB-2424 24" x 24" x 10" molded stone mop sink with vinyl
bumper guard, silicone sealant and dome strainer.
2. Faucet: Fiat No. 830-AA service sink faucet Fiat #832-AA 30" long flexible
hose with coupling and securing bracket.
2.8 SHOWERS
A. Shower (SH-1)
1. Valve: Simmons S-25-1 series pressure balancing/thermostatic mixing valve
with volume control and shower head.
15450-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
2. Shower Drain: FD-1, refer 15405 2.3.
B. Shower (SH-2) _
1. Crane/Fiat Model ADA-3636, RH or LH cast acrylic one piece barrier-free
seamless unit. Reinforced fiberglass polyester. Crane model 180-AA
pressure balance single handle shower valve. Crane model H-11 flexible --
stainless steel hose with hand held shower head Crane model H-12 slide bar.
Complete with shower curtain, curtain rod and 2" brass strainer drain. Delete
grab bars and seat. _
C. Shower (SH-3)
1. Crane/Fiat Model ADA3636, RH or LH cast acrylic one piece seamless unit,
reinforced fiberglass polyester. Pre-drilled for single lever handle pressure
valve, flexible stainless steel hose with hand held shower head. Complete
with shower curtain rod and curtain with 2" brass strainer drain, grab bars and
fold down phenolic plastic seat. Crane model 180-AA pressure balance
single handle shower valve. Crane model H-12 slide bar.
D. Shower (SH-4)
1. Bradely Model 9551, 14 gal. type 304 stainless steel panel, recessed soap
dish, Bradley fixed direction severe service shower head, Bradley 1031
thermostatic metedng valve, 2.5 gpm.
E. Electric Water Cooler (EWC-1)
1. Elkay Model LKTE-8 dual-height, stainless steel wall mounted push bar
operated. One mounted at lower level for wheelchair access. Capacity: 8.0
GPH at 90°room temperature 115 v, 60 Hz, 1/5 Hp.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIXTURES FURNISHED UNDER THIS DIVISION
A. Plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be set in place, leveled and connected as
indicated on the drawings. Use china caps to conceal mounting bolts, and grout
between all vitreous china fixtures and finished wall and floor surfaces with plaster of
paris or portland cement.
B. Install wall-hung water closets, lavatories, urinals, sinks and electric water coolers on
carrier.
C. Do not install metal fittings until adjoining tile work has been acid-cleaned. The
mechanical contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of fixtures after
installation.
D. Connections to exposed plumbing fixtures shall be complete with chrome plated brass
nipples, tubing, wall escutcheons, etc.
15450-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
E. All valves that require maintenance and repair shall be located in a serviceable
location, or access doors shall be furnished.
'-- 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Prior to final acceptance of the work, mechanical contractor shall inspect all faucets,
-- flush valves, stop valves, etc., to determine whether they operate properly and
discharge proper quantities of water. Correct any deficiencies to satisfaction of
Architect's representative.
B. Thoroughly clean all plumbing fixtures, trim and accessories of all tape, adhesives and
other foreign materials prior to final acceptance.
-- 3.3 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing
by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
15450-7 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15500 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
'- A. Related work and materials are specified under Section 15010, General Provisions -
Mechanical; Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods, and other appropriate
Sections of this Division.
B. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment, and
service necessary for and incidental to the fire protection systems as shown on the
Drawings and/or specified herein.
C. All components, valves and thread type shall be in accordance with local Fire
Department requirements.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
_ A. It is the intent of these Specifications to cover the engineering, design and complete
installation of the wet type automatic sprinkler system with class III fire hose cabinets.
The sprinkler contractor shall furnish and install the entire system, from the connection
to the site water supply to the final installation of each head.
B. Provide fire hose cabinets with 2-1/2" hose valve, 1-1/2" reducer, 1-1/2" fire hose.
- C. It shall be a specific requirement that insofar as possible, all sprinkler system mains and
branches shall be installed as close as possible to the structural steel members.
D. All piping for all systems shall be coordinated with lighting fixtures, air conditioning
ducts, piping and air handling unit. Sprinkler heads shall be located as closely as
possible to the center of the ceiling tiles aligned with adjacent light fixtures. Final exact
locations shall be verified with the Architect upon shop drawing submittal, and
-' immediately prior to installation. Any head installed closer than 3" to the ceiling grid
will be relocated at no additional cost to the Owner. Sprinkler heads in non secure
areas and areas with grided ceilings shall be adjustable flush concealed with white
coverplate. Ail mains, branches, etc., shall be hydraulically designed and sized per
NFPA 13.
E. Provide a .qate valve or ball valve in the iail storage room to shut down water supply to
all jail holding areas. Valve shall be provided with a tamper switch to remote to fire
alarm panel.
'- F. The sprinkler contractor shall hydraulically design an automatic sprinkler system to
provide a density for the following areas:
1. Area: The major portion of the building is as follows; Hazard: Light, 0.10
gpm/sq, ft. over the most remote 1500 sq. ft., Head Temp: 165°F. Head
Type: concealed, application area 200 sq. ft. hd.
-- Exceptions:
15500-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
2. Area: Sallyport; Hazard: ORP.GP.3 0.21 gpm/sq, ft. over the most remote
1500 sq. ft., Head Temp: 212°F; Head Type: Brass pendent. Application
Area: 130 sq. ft. hd.
3. Area: Multi-purpose, Lobby; Hazard: light, 0.10 gpm/sq, ft. over the most
remote 1500 sq. ft. Head Temp: 165°F; Head Type: Brass pendent (black
finish); Application Area: 200 sq. ft. hd.
4. Area: Jail Holding, Security Vestibule, Jail Toilet, Intox, Visiting; Hazard: light,
0.10 gpm/sq, ft. over the most remote 1500 sq. ft.; Head Temp: 160°F; Head
Type: Security Sidewall (Holding) or Pendant; Application Area: 225 sq. ft. hd.
This area is to be controlled by a zone valve located in the storage room (181)
at 4'-0" AFF.
5. Area: Dispatch Area; Hazard: light, 0.10 gpm/sq, ft. over the most remote
15000 sq. ft.; Head Temp: 212°F Head Type: Chrome Pendant; Application
Area: 200 sq. ft. hd.
6. Area: Records, Records Storage Rooms, Storage, Property, Mechanical
Electrical, Armory, Copy, Mail Room, Files; Hazzard: ord GPI, 0.15 gpm/sq.
ft over the most remote 1500 sq. ft.; Head Temp: 165°F; Head Type:
Chrome Pendant; Application Area: 130 sq. ft. hd.
G. All work shall conform with all applicable provisions of NFPA, Standards 13 and other
appropriate NFPA Standards and local codes.
1.3 WORK EXCLUDED
A. Painting of exposed sprinkler system piping, controls, valves, etc., shall be
accomplished under the work of the Painting Section.
B. Caulking and sealing of sleeves for piping through floors and walls shall be included
under the scope of the work of Caulking and Sealing. The installation of all sleeves,
regardless of location, and the insulation of sprinkler system lines passing through
insulated walls and partitions shall be in this section of the work as specified
hereinafter.
1.4 CODE REQUIREMENTS
A. All aspects of design, installation and equipment shall conform in all respects to the
rules, regulations and requirements of the current standards of National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA), and the City of Coppell, Texas fire' codes.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND APPROVALS
A. The automatic sprinkler subcontractor shall prepare complete shop drawings and
calculations. Submit specifically for, but not limited to, the following items: sprinkler
heads, valves, pipe, pipe hangers and couplings, hose valves and accessories, and fire
department connections with dimensional working drawings for the entire installation.
Shop drawin.qs and working drawings shall indicate all ductwork and shall be
coordinated with the mechanical contractor to prevent conflicts.
15500-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. The automatic sprinkler subcontractor shall submit (4) copies to the Architect for
approval of the basic layout and hydraulic calculations. Each submittal will be noted
"FOR CORRECTIONS OR CHANGES IF REQUIRED." The corrected drawings shall then
be submitted by the subcontractor to the above listed code authorities, agencies and
the City of Coppell, Texas. Upon securing written approval of these agencies, submit
to the Architect five (5) copies of all drawings, stamped as approved, by each of the
-- agencies.
1.6 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. All materials and equipment furnished under this Section (15500) shall be new,
manufactured in the United States and approved by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
(UL), Factory Mutual (FM), American Water Works Association (AWWA) where
-- applicable and City of Coppell, Texas.
B. Approved manufacturer for fire department hose valve, fire department siamese
-- connection and similar fire protection equipment shall be Elkhard, Potter Roemer, and
Viking.
_ C. Approved manufacturers for other valves and appurtenances shall be Crane Company,
Jenkins, Milwaukee, Kenney, Grinnell and Stockham.
D. Approved manufacturers for sprinkler heads, alarm valves, water motor gongs and
-- related equipment shall be Automatic Sprinkler, Central, Reliable, Viking and Grinnell.
1.7 WET PIPE SYSTEM
A. Connect the fire service line as indicated on the Drawings and extend piping as shown.
B. Secure the services of a skilled and experienced Sprinkler System Contractor, licensed
in this field, to prepare complete Drawings of the sprinkler system; to secure the
approval of the Architect, before starting work; and to make the installation.
1. In addition 4 sets of sprinkler system shop drawings shall be submitted to the
City of Coppell Fire Engineer and their approval of the Drawings shall be
obtained before beginning the installation.
C. All work shall conform with all applicable provisions of NFPA, Standards 13, 14 and
other appropriate NFPA Standards, the City of Coppell, Texas Fire Code.
D. Sprinkler piping, fittings, couplings, valves, alarm devices, etc. have been specified to
meet minimum pressure requirements or 175 PSI.
15500-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
~__ CCRD 295254.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. The materials as scheduled and/or herein- after listed shall be used in fabricating piping
systems. Where material changes occur, install suitable adapters to provide tight sealing
joints. Where multiple choices of materials are listed, only one shall be used, except by
special permission.
B. Interior Fire Protection Lines: All pipe used for fire protection sprinkler systems shall be
Schedule 40 or 10 black steel pipe. This pipe shall, in every detail, conform to
Standard Specifications for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM Designation: A-120
or A-795. Grooved coupling and fittings shall be rated at 300 PSI as manufactured by
Victaulic Company of America. Contractor shall not mix manufacturer of grooved
products. Schedule 10 piping may be used for standpipes, standpipe mains, sprinkler
mains, and cross mains. Schedule 40 piping shall be used for sprinkler branch piping.
2.2 SIAMESE FITTINGS (OFFICE BUILDING)
A. The wall siamese shall be Potter Roemer Model 5134-D 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 4-inch size,
rough brass with front plate with raised lettering, and chrome plated caps attached with
chains. Lettering shall read "AUTO. SPRKR."
B. Threads shall be per the local fire department standard.
2.3 ALARM VALVE ASSEMBLY --
A. The alarm valve assembly shall consist of a service shutoff valve, a clapper type main
check valve, an auxiliary seat (alarm outlet), retard chamber, gauges, check valves,
gate valves, globe or angle valves, vane type flow switch.
2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. All heads in areas provided with suspended ceilings shall be adjustable flush concealed
with white cover plates similar to Central Model "A", arranged insofar as possible to
pattern with air diffusers, grilles and lights. Where practicable they shall be centered in
lay-in ceiling panels.
B. Sprinkler heads non-finished areas such as, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical
rooms, janitors closet, etc. shall be chrome plated brass pendent or upright, similar to
central Model "Sprinkler-A". Heads in areas without ceilings shall be of the upright
type.
C. Furnish a wall mounted cabinet, where directed, containing a supply of sprinkler heads
of the same types installed and suitable sprinkler head wrenches. Provide a separate
cabinet for each style sprinkler head (six) min. on the project.
15500-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2.5 IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. General: All controls, drain, test alarms and alarm valves shall be provided with
identification signs as outlined in NFPA pamphlet No. 13.
2.6 WATER MOTOR GONGS
A. Water powered gong with clapper roller, clapper, strainer, water wheel, shaft, housings,
cover plates, and other standard components.
2.7 FLOW SWITCHES
A. Provide an approved flow switch in each sprinkler system connection serving each
-- sprinkler zone. Switches shall be suitable for connection into the fire alarm system.
2.8 MONITOR SWITCHES
A. Each manual sectionalizing valve and/or shutoff valve in the standpipe and sprinkler
system shall be provided with an approved valve monitoring switch to indicate whether
the valve is open or closed. Wiring from switches to the fire alarm system will be done
under Division 16. The switch shall give a tamper indication if removed from its
mounting or the housing cover is removed; it shall signal an alarm when the valve
position is altered.
2.9 SPECIAL VALVES
_ A. General: Provide valves, UL listed/FM approved, in accordance with the following
listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match, piping and equipment
connections.
El. Alarm Check Valve: Provide cast-iron water flow alarm check valve, 175 psi working
pressure.
- C. Drains: The sprinkler system shall be provided with complete drainage facilities as
indicated and in accordance with NFPA No. 13.
_ 2.10 Fire Hose Cabinet (FHC-1) Potter Roemer model 1124-F-2710 with 20 ga. steel cabinet, semi-
recessed cabinet with solid steel door. 2-1/2" valve, 1-1/2" reducer, hoserack, 100 ft.
polyester jacket, rubber lined hose, brass fog nozzle. Provide door locks for cabinets in secure
areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
-- 3.1 WET PIPE SYSTEMS
A. The location of supply mains, risers, siamese fittings, are shown on the Drawings.
B. Except for piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms and unfinished spaces, run all piping
concealed where possible. Coordinate locations of piping in ceiling spaces with the
work of all other trades.
15500-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
C. Provide a check valve with automatic ball drip in the line to the siamese fire department
connection.
D. Install the water motor gong on the exterior of the building. Route between the alarm
valve and the motor gong. Route a drain from the motor gong, through the building
wall.
E. Each main riser shall be valved and shall be monitored.
F. Where a valve is located above the ceiling, a laminated plastic plate shall be affixed to
the underside of the ceiling reading "FIRE PROTECTION VALVE."
G. Manual sectionalizing valves and/or shutoff valves shall be provided with monitor
switches.
H. Installation of piping and supports shall be as described in Section 15050, including
methods of fabrications, grading and other procedures described therein. The
installation shall also be in conformity with the requirements of NFPA Standard No. 13,
the requirements of the and City of Coppell, Texas Codes and Ordinances.
END OF SECTION
15500-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15665 - SINGLE ZONE PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
-- A. Furnish and install factory assembled, piped and wired single zone packaged rooftop air
conditioning units of the type, operational characteristics and capacity as shown, as
scheduled and as specified herein. All rooftop units shall be by the same manufacturer.
1.2 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable manufacturers contingent upon products compliance with the specification:
1. Trane
_ 2. York
3. Carrier
-- 4. Lennox
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA Standard No. 90A "Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to the installation of the unit.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code
(NFPA No. 70) pertaining to construction and installation of electrically operated
components.
C. UL Compliance: Provide components which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters
Laboratory.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on rooftop unit, including drawings showing overall dimensions
of complete assembly operating weights, equipment support requirements, sizes and
locations of connections, valves and all other accessories required for a complete system.
- B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, descriptive literature, operating instructions,
and maintenance and repair data.
_ C. Compressor shall be warranted against failure for five (5) years.
1.5 EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The cooling mode shall have a minimum efficiency ration (SEER) of not less than 10.0 or
as required by the State Energy Code.
15665-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Unit shall be designed specifically for outdoor installation with all exterior surfaces of
phosphatized, zinc-coated steel with primer and baked enamel finish. All components,
including accessories shall be contained within the unit. Rooftop units shall be field
painted, color shall be selected by the Architect.
B. Access to internal components shall be afforded by removable gasketed access panels
with quick release latches and lifting handles.
C. Unit shall have factory installed lifting lugs capable of accepting standard lifting slings and
spreader bars to facilitate hoisting.
D. Electrical power shall be to a single point connection. The unit shall have integral starters.
All units shall be provided with factory mounted disconnect switch.
E. Unit shall be insulated with a minimum of one inch, one-pound density glass fiber
insulation mat-faced.
F. Unit shall be designed for cu~ mounting and mate provided with full perimeter roof curb
for a complete weather tight seal (and installed as shown on the plan details by the
Contractor). Unit sides shall overhang the curb to form protective drip lip. Coordinate with
roof framing and membrane. Supply and return ducts shall connect to the curb prior to
placement of the unit. The manufacturer shall furnish gasketing materials for a leak-tight
seal between the unit and cut connections. Open space within an curbs shall be filled with
fiberglass equal to roof deck insulation.
G. Installation shall be fully coordinated with roof membrane.
H. The unit shall consist of duct mounted smoke detectors on the supply and return air.
2.2 HEATING SECTION
A. Provide aluminum or stainless steel slotted port gas burners and aluminized steel heat
exchanger. Warranty on heat exchanger shall be 10 years.
B. Controls shall include redundant gas valve and intermittent pilot with electric spark ignition.
2.3 COMPRESSOR
A. Semi-hermetic reciprocating or scroll compressor shall be provided with capacity reduction
of a minimum of 50% on units 15 tons and larger. Units smaller than 15 tons shall have
hermetic compressors.
B. A crankcase heater shall be provided and wired to be active continuously.
C. The compressor shall be provided with spring isolators and flexible discharge line and hot
gas muffler.
15665-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
D. Motor shall be specifically designed for operation within a refrigerant atmosphere. Inlet
screens shall be provided. Motor shall be capable of starting and continuously operating
at ambients as high as 120 degrees F. Motor shall have overload protection and internal
thermostats.
E. Compressor motor shall be capable of withstanding voltage fluctuations of plus or minus
-- 10% of name plated voltage.
2.4 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT
A. The unit shall be certified as complying with ARI Standard 210 and bear the ARI seal.
B. The evaporator coil shall consist of 3/8" O.D. copper tubes mechanically bonded to
aluminum plate fins and be pressure and leak tested at 425 psig. Condenser fans shall
be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan motors shall be UL listed for outdoor use,
have built-in thermal overload protection and permanently lubricated bearings. Condensing
-- section shall be designed for a maximum of 130 degrees F. condensing temperature with
ambient air at 95 degrees F. Coil shall be circuited for subcooling.
C. Unit shall incorporate an insulated and sealed drain pan with threaded drain connections
at each end of the unit. Contractor shall install P-traps.
D. Refrigeration controls shall include as a minimum, high and Iow pressure control,
- compressor winding thermostat and overload, lockout circuit resetable at the unit
thermostat, Contractors for condenser/evaporator fans and compressor, and 24 volt control
power transformer.
E. Unit shall ship with an operating charge of R-22.
2.5 EVAPORATOR FANS
A. Evaporator fans shall be direct driven or belt driven forward curved type with an adjustable
sheave and motor sized to meet the air flow and static pressure as scheduled on the
-- drawings.
B. Fans assembly shall be isolated from the unit or RIS isolators.
C. Motor shall have thermal ovedoad protection and motor and fan bearings shall be
permanently lubricated.
D. Fan wheel shall be protected from corrosion with a painted finish.
2.6 FILTER SECTION
A. Furnish complete with filters and holding frames or racks to accept 2" filter panels as
specified. Provide hinged access doors with quick opening latches arranged to permit
_. servicing of filters.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
-- A. Low leakage manual O.A. dampers.
15665-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Anti-cycling timer to provide 5 minute delay between compressor shut-down and restart.
C. Low ambient control (25° F).
2.8 CONTROLS
A. The system control panel shall be capable of communicating with each individual rooftop
and monitoring various points. The control manufacturer shall provide one controller per
rooftop that communicates back to the main control panel.
B. The rooftop controller shall be capable of monitoring and communicating the following
information back to the system control panel:
1. Analog Input Points
a. Outside air temperature
b. Supply air temperature
c, Zone temperature
d. Return air temperature
e. Active setpoint
f. Outside air relative humidity (%)
g. Return air relative humidity (%)
h. Economizer damper position
2. Binary Input Points
a. Smoke/fire alarm status (Note: No fire shutdown capability)
b. Heating status
c. Economizer enable/disable status
d. Compressor on/off status
e. Supply fan on/off status
f. Compressor lockout
g. Supply fan failure
h. Dirty filter
C. The system control panel shall provide the following control functions for each rooftop unit:
1. Turn each compressor on or off
2. Schedule all rooftops for heating night setback
3. Schedule all rooftops for a heating morning warmup
4, Schedule night setup during cooling
5. Schedule all rooftops for optimum start and provide a program that automatically
adjusts on a daily basis the morning start-up time based on the zone temperature
versus the occupied setpoint and the historical recovery rate for each unit.
15665-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
D. Each rooftop shall be provided with a sensor that has an after hours override button. The
occupant will be able to override any scheduled night setbacK/setup pedod for two hours
_ of after hours comfort by depressing the button for a period of 5-10 seconds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
-- 3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Units shall be installed level within manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Open areas of roof curb shall be packed with sound absorbing insulation.
END OF SECTION
15665-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
· CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15800 - AIR TREATING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Related work and materials are specified under Section 15010, General Provisions;
Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods, and other appropriate Sections of this
Division.
B. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment,
and service necessary for and incidental to the air treating and handling equipment
as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
C. Furnish and install air treating and handling equipment as shown and scheduled,
including fans, filters, motors and drivers, mounting bases and supports and other
materials - and supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXHAUST FANS
A. General: Type, capacity and characteristics as tabulated in the Schedule on the
Drawings. Furnish Greenheck, ACME or Cook. Provide each fan complete with
fan motor, drive, and starting equipment as scheduled.
B. Dome Type Fans: Direct or belt driven units as scheduled with single inlet
centrifugal fan wheels having backwardly inclined, compound or air foil blades,
motor and drive, all enclosed in a weatherproof housing, with screened discharge.
Resiliently mount all moving assemblies to permit the rigid installation of the unit
on a prefabricated curb. For each fan provide an 8-inch high matching curb of the
type scheduled, a motor operated backdraft damper, and a motor rated tumbler
switch of the proper size, factory installed under the housing and wired.
C. Inline Centri-Vane Fans: Inline Centri-Vane blowers, air foil blade fan, factory
fabricated for outdoor installation. Vertical mounted with dome cover for intake
use or vertical discharge for exhaust use. Unit complete with curb flashing and
inlet screen or auto discharge exhaust damper. Adjustable belt drive with
weatherproof housing. Exterior lubricating tubes for lubricating fan bearings.
D. Packaged Fans: Packaged fans with steel housing, direct drive centrifugal blowers,
backdraft damper and speed controllers.
E. Motors: Ball bearing, drip proof, wound for operation on current characteristics as
scheduled; so selected that the brake horsepower required to deliver the ultimate
volume of air scheduled will not exceed the motor nameplate rating.
F. Belt Drives: Variable pitched type, selected so that the operating point of the fan
occurs approximately at the midpoint of the adjustable range. Design drives for at
least 50% overload capacity above the ultimate brake horsepower, requirements
scheduled.
15800-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
G. Starters and Motor Switches: As scheduled on the Drawings or called for in the
Specifications; NEMA 1 enclosures for surface mounting, unless otherwise noted.
H. Disconnect Switches: Each exhaust fan shall have a disconnect switch, factory
mounted inside of the cover over the fan motor and drive.
2.2 UNIT HEATERS (SEPARATED COMBUSTION TYPE)
A. Provide separated combustion type gas-fired unit heaters as manufactured by
Reznor, Modine or Dravo/Hastings and equal to Reznor Model SCB. Unit shall be
A.G.A. design certified and suitable for natural gas.
B. The units are available for use with natural gas and are designed for ceiling
suspension, utilizing a centrifugal blower equipped with an adjustable belt drive and
separated combustion venting.
C. Unit shall be equipped with a spark-ignited intermittent safety pilot and a single-
stage, 24-volt thermostat for automatic operation. Each unit to be provided with
all required limit and safety controls, including a combustion air pressure differential
switch to verify proper vent flow before allowing operation of the gas valve.
D. These units have been design-certified by the American Gas Association (AGA) and
bear and AGA label and shall have the following features:
1. Orifices for natural gas.
2. Aluminized steel heat exchanger.
3. Fan and limit safety controls.
4. Pre-purge and post-purge control sequence.
5. 24 volt control voltage.
6. Terminal block voltage.
7. Redundant single-stage combination gas valve.
8. Spark-ignited intermittent safety pilot with electronic flame supervision.
9. Burner rack access (pull-out drawer).
10. Adjustable belt-drive blower.
11. Horizontal directional louvers.
12. Threaded suspension couplings (2).
13. Baked enamel finish.
14. Manual summer/winter switch.
15800-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
15. Air recirculation kits.
16, Relay for summer fan operation.
17. OSHA type belt guard.
18. Vertical vent terminal.
19. Single-stage thermostat (40-90°).
E. Capacities as scheduled on the drawings.
2.3 FILTERS
A. Filter shall be provided in the return air stream to each air unit. The filter shall be
a Farr 30/30. The filter shall have an average efficiency of 30% per ASHRAE Test
Standard 52-76.
B. Two sets of filters shall be provided for each piece of equipment. Temporary
filters shall be installed during construction and the final set shall be installed just
prior to substantial completion,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXHAUST
A. Roof Mounted Fans: Set the proper prefabricated curb for each fan in place on
the roof; install the backdraft damper; have the roofer extend roofing up to and
nailed onto the nailer strip on the base; install the fan with its base forming the
counterflashing. The ductwork shall be extended up into the roof curb and make
a sealed connection to the fan inlet.
-- END OF SECTION
15800-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15840 - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
-- A. Related to work and materials are specified under Section 15010, General Provisions,
and other appropriate Sections of this Division.
_ B. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and
service necessary for and incidental to the sheet metal ductwork and accessories as
shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
-- C. Provide and install all supply, return and ventilation ductwork shown, together with
plenums, casings, dampers, turning vanes, grilles, ceiling outlets, variable air volume
terminal units, heating coils, etc., including the setting of fans, filters and air units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL
A. Spiral Conduit and Fittings: Factory-fabricated of lock forming quality galvanized prime
grade steel; both conduits and fittings from the same manufacturer; conduit
'-- constructed with continuous 4-ply reinforcing spiral lock seam; fittings constructed with
continuous welded seams; as manufactured by Spiral Pipe of Texas, National Duct
Systems or United Sheet Metal Company products.
B. All Other Supply, Return, and Ventilation Ductwork, Plenums, Dampers, Etc.: New lock
forming quality galvanized prime grade steel sheets.
C. All longitudinal joints in rectangular sheet metal shall be Pittsburgh joints. Snap lock
joints will not be permitted.
-~ 2.2 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A. Factory fabricated with vinyl coated spring steel wire helix bonded to a continuous
__ layer of vinyl impregnated and coated fiber glass mesh inner sleeve, a l-inch thick
glass fiber blanket insulation layer, and an outer moisture barrier jacket of foil-backed
kraft paper with integral attaching grommets, equivalent to Thermoflex M-KE. It shall
have a thermal conductance of 0.23 BTU/hr/sq. ft./ °F at 75°F, shall be UL listed
-~ and shall comply with NFPA Standard 90A.
15840-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
2.3 DUCT LINER
A. One inch thick, 1-1/2 pound minimum density, Johns-Manville Tuf-Skin Rx, or
equivalent, mat faced, glass fiber duct liner having a minimum effective "K" value of
0.24 at 75° F, a roughness (e) factor of 0.0008 feet and sound absorption coefficients
as published for that material. The material shall comply with the flame spread, fuel
contributed and smoke developed ratings of NFPA 90A as tested in accordance with
UL-723. The coating shall contain an anti-microbial agent and shall be rated to avoid
erosion at 5000 fpm velocity (and tested at 12,500 fpm velocity). All edges exposed
to airflow shall be treated with an application of Permacote Superseal. (Liner shall
be utilized in supply and return air ducts where indicated on the drawings.)
2.4 SHEET METAL HARDWARE
A. Ventlok, Young or equivalent.
2.5 DAMPERS
A. Fire Damper: Prefco, Ruskin or National Controlled Air and equal to Prefco No. LPB
or LPC for rectangular and No. 5500-CR for round; wall or floor sleeves as required
for proper protection of penetration; UL labeled and conforming to UL-555. Dampers
shall have 1-1/2 Hr. classification for fire resistive ratings of less than 2 hours and
3 Hr. classification for fire resistive ratings of 3 hours or more.
B. Smoke Damper: Prefco, Ruskin or National Controlled Air and equal to Prefco Model
5920-1, multi-blade, louver type damper with auxiliary operating shaft for pneumatic
motor drive. Motor shall be of the spring return, normally closed type and shall
conform to UL-555-S, leakage Class I.
C. Combination Smoke and Fire Damper: Prefco, Ruskin or National Controlled Air and
equal to Prefco Model 5920-1, multi-blade, louver type damper with fusible link and
spring closer for fire damper and with auxiliary operating shaft for pneumatic motor
drive. Motor shall be of the spring return, normally-closed type; wall sleeves as
required for proper protection of penetration; UL labeled as a fire damper and shall
conform to UL-555 and UL-555-S, leakage Class I.
D. Multi-Louver Volume Damper:. Prefco, Ruskin or National Controlled Air and equal to
Ruskin Type OB-25 galvanized steel damper with a baked enamel finish or an
extruded aluminum damper;, bearings shall be of brass, bronze, or plastic; blades shall
be opposed acting, not more than 10-inch wide, with felt, neoprene or plastic strips
to insure tight closure; frames shall be rigidly braced channel, angle, or band type.
E. Barometric relief dampers: Ruskin, National Controlled Air or American Warming and
Ventilating, Inc. Model PR-10 pressure relief dampers. Damper blades shall be
equipped with dual durometer vinyl seals. Dampers shall have EPT sponge seals.
Available range shall be .125 in. wg through 1 inc. wg, unless noted otherwise.
15840-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2.6 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Air Balance FSA 100, or equivalent, galvanized steel frame and double wall hinged
door with 1-inch insulation, gasketing, and latch. It shall be sized to permit servicing
of fusible links in fire dampers and/or sized as noted into plenums for access to coils,
filters, etc. where installed in lined ducts and/or plenums.
B. In unlined ducts, access doors shall be unlined metal of the same gauge as the duct.
2.7 TURNING VANES
A. Aero-Dyne Type H-E-P, or equivalent. Field or shop fabricated vanes less than 3"
wide are not permitted.
2.8 MANUAL DAMPER AND EXTRACTOR ADJUSTING DEVICES
A. Where extractors are accessible behind registers or ceiling diffusers, use Young No.
890 or equivalent extractors.
B. For other dampers or extractor operators use Young, or equivalent, locking type
regulators: No. 896 Concealed Air-Split above non-removable ceilings or in furrings
and No. 401 and 900 on exposed or easily accessible ducts.
2.9 AIR OUTLETS
A. Ceiling supply outlets, grilles and registers shall be provided in accordance with the
schedule on the Drawings. Where scheduled maximum and/or minimum security
device, manufactured for penal will be used. Acceptable manufacturers are Titus, E.H.
Price or Nailor.
1. Ceiling mounted devices shall be finished in off-white baked enamel. Sidewall
supplies and registers shall be finished in a prime coat or a baked enamel
finish and job painted in color as required.
2.10 DUCT TAP-OFFS
A. Duct tap-offs from rectangular ducts to receive round duct runouts shall be equivalent
to Thermaflex Type TD conical twist-in connectors with integral dampers.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: Benjamin Foster 85-10 or 85-15, Insul- Coustic I-C 201, or equivalent.
B. Linear Attaching Devices: Graham weld pins or Stic-clips and sheet metal clips.
C. Mastic: Benjamin Foster 30-60, InsuI-Coustic I-C 110 or equivalent.
15840-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
_ CCRD 295254.00
2.12 EXTERIOR DUCTWORK
A. Exterior ductwork shall be internally lined with 2" thick liner and then the exterior shall
be painted with bitumastic No. 50 paint overall surfaces and all joints.
2.13 ROOF SUPPORTS
A. Equipment supports shall be all welded 18 gauge galvanized steel shell, baseplate
and counterflashing with internal bulkhead re-enforcement and factory installed wood
nailer. Supports shall be manufactured by Thy Curb or Pate and equal to the Thy
Curb models as follows:
1. Model TEMS-1 for insulated roof decks.
2. Model TEMS-2 for un-insulated roof decks and existing roofs.
3. Model TEMS-3 for single-ply roof systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCT CONSTRUCTION
A. Except for special duct construction specified hereinbefore, Iow pressure ductwork shall
be constructed in accordance with the following:
1. Round ducts may be either of factory fabricated spiral conduit and fittings
using galvanized steel sheets not lighter than 24-gauge for ducts up to 8-inch
diameter and 22-gauge for ducts 9-inch through 22-inch diameter with
continuous welded or grooved longitudinal seams sealed with a mastic when
fabricated and with sections joined using a bell and spigot fitting or a coupling
sealed using a mastic to make a tight joint. Fittings for shop fabricated ducts
may be formed or of mitered construction with not less than 3 piece 45°
elbows or 5 piece 90 degree elbows.
2. For gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and construction details in
fabricating rectangular ducts, follow "HVAC Duct Construction Standard",
current edition, published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) with a minimum of 26 gauge.
a. Use beaded construction or cross break all uninsulated panels 13-inch
or more in width.
b. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory fabricated
turning vanes. Shop-fabricated turning vanes may only be used
following approval of samples and of procedures. Make all other
changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius
equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend.
15840-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
c. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes
on all sides. Make increases in dimension in the direction of air flow
with a maximum slope of 1-inch in 7 inches on any side. Make
decreases in dimension in the direction of air flow preferably with a
slope of 1-inch in 7 inches on any side, but with a maximum slope
of 1-inch in 4 inches where conditions necessitate.
d. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits,
ceiling hangers, etc., so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible.
When duct penetrations are unavoidable provide streamline shaped
sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct
surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at rods. Where
obstructions are of a size to exceed 5% of the duct area, the duct
shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area.
3. Ducts shall be sealed to class "B" standards as outlined in SMACNA "HVAC
Duct Construction Standard." Current edition.
3.2 DAMPERS
A. Install dampers as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various
duct systems. Install volume dampers where shown or required to achieve the final
air balance and splitter dampers where shown.
1. Splitter Dampers: Construct of 20-gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded
to square operating rods; splitter damper blade length equal to 1-1/2 times
the width of the split in the duct, but not less than 12 inches.
2. "Butterfly" Type Volume Dampers: 20-gauge galvanized steel riveted or
welded to square operating rods. Use only where neither dimension of the
damper exceeds 18-inches.
3. Multi-Louver Volume Dampers: Use where either dimension exceeds 18-inch.
Connect ductwork using a mastic to form an air tight seal.
4. Fire and Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers: Weighted or spring loaded
dampers held open by fusible links and installed where called for on the
Drawings. Provide access doors at each such fire damper through which the
fusible link can be serviced and the damper reset.
5. Smoke Dampers: Motor operated, normally closed, spring return type, installed
where ducts penetrate smoke barriers other than fire walls, and where called
for at air units.
B. Fit each splitter or volume damper with factory-fabricated bearings and, unless
specified for automatic operation, with an adjusting device having a locking
mechanism. Provide operators of the push-rod type for splitter dampers over 18-inch
in length.
15840-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
3.3 AIR OUTLET CONNECTIONS
A. Make provisions to control both the volume and distribution of the supply air
approaching each grille and ceiling outlet independently of other outlets on the supply
system. Install turning vanes and/or straightening vanes to insure that the air will
approach the face of the grille or ceiling outlet perpendicularly and evenly distributed
over the face. If the grille or ceiling outlet is not on a separately dampered branch
duct, install back of the grille or ceiling outlet a manually adjustable volume control
which is standard with the manufacturer of the outlet.
B. Install splitters, butterfly and/or multi-louver dampers in duct runs, takeoff connections,
etc., as shown and/or as specified to control air volumes.
3.4 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS
A. Where ducts penetrate 2-hour fire walls or floors, fire dampers shall be installed in
the construction in a manner directed by the manufacturer of the dampers, with or
without attached sleeves as required. Install angles completely framing each opening
on both sides and attach to the damper body or sleeve with screws, bolts, or other
approved fastener. Leave space between the edges of the construction and the face
of the sleeve or damper to accommodate expansion and contraction of the metal.
B. Where ducts penetrate intedor walls that are not rated as fire walls, install 1-1/2-inch
by 1-1/2-inch angles completely framing the opening on both sides and attach to the
duct with screws. Leave space between the duct and the edges of the opening.
3.5 HANGERS
A. Support horizontal ductwork on hangers at intervals of not more than 8 feet. Attach
hangers to the overhead structure by the same methods as outlined for pipe hangers
in Section 15050. Install hangers as follows:
1. For Ducts with Long Dimension of 36-Inch or Less: 1-inch wide strips of
16-gauge galvanized steel attached to the duct with sheet .metal screws and
to the construction above.
2. For Ducts with Long Dimension of 37-Inch to 60-tnch: 1-inch by 1/8-inch
galvanized band iron attached to the duct with sheet metal screws to the
construction above.
3. For Ducts with a Long Dimension Greater than 60-Inch: Trapeze consisting of
an angle iron cross member supported by 3/8-inch steel-rods secured to the
construction above.
4. For Round Ducts up Through 18-Inch Diameter: 1-inch wide strips of
16-gauge galvanized steel fully encircling the duct and bolted to 1-inch by
1/8-inch-galvanized band iron hangers attached to the construction above.
5. For Larger Round Ducts: 1-inch wide strips of 12-gauge galvanized steel fully
encircling the duct and bolted to 1-inch by 1/8-inch galvanized band iron
hangers attached to the construction above.
15840-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Support vertical ducts passing from one floor to the next at the floor line on angles
riveted to the ducts and resting on the floor construction. Unless otherwise indicated,
use supporting angles as follows:
1. For Ducts with Long Dimensions up to 60-inch: 1-inch by 1-inch by 1/8-inch
angles.
2. For Ducts Whose Longer Dimension Exceeds 60-Inch: Not less than 1-1/2-inch
by 1-1/2-inch by 1/8-inch angles.
3.6 PLENUMS
A. Construct all casings and plenum chambers of 18-gauge galvanized sheets thoroughly
- braced with 1-1/2-inch angle irons. Provide tight fitting, gasketed access doors of
sufficient size to permit the servicing of contained equipment. Hinge the doors and
use sandwich panel construction with insulation of the same thickness as the metal
sudace on which the doors are mounted. Install sheet metal edging to secure duct
liner or insulation at access door openings.
3.7 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide tight fitting gasketed access doors in ducts at the following locations:
-- 1. At each fire damper to permit inspection and servicing of its fusible link.
2. At the upstream side of each duct mounted reheat coil to permit inspection
.... and maintenance of the entering face of the coil.
3. At each smoke damper to permit the inspection and maintenance of that
damper.
B. Where ducts are lined or externally insulated, use double walled, insulated doors.
3.8 FLASHING
A. Where other ducts penetrate the roof, flash and counterflash them into the roof
. construction to the satisfaction of the Architect using galvanized steel sheets to
construct the flashing.
1. Counter[lashings shall be welded to the ducts or locked into duct seams and
made watertight using a sealant.
3.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS AT AIR UNITS AND FANS
A. Install flexible connections between the inlet and outlet of each air handling unit and
the ducts which serve it, and at any other point indicated on the Drawings. In each
_ case hold the metal surfaces 2-inches to 6-inches apart and install the flexible
connection with approximately 1-inch of slack.
15840-7 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
3.10 AIR DIFFUSING DEVICES
A. The size, manufacturer's model number and design air quantity to be handled is
indicated on the Drawings for each air diffusing device. The manufacturer's model
number establishes the type of device to be used. If the products of another
acceptable manufacturer are substituted for those shown on the Drawings, they shall
be of the same type but shall be selected from their manufacturer published data for --
the air volume and throw in each case. Acceptable manufacturers are Titus, E.H.
Price or Krueger.
B. Provide and install any special devices.
3.11 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS
A. All ducts shall be leak tested in accordance with SMACNA requirements within 5%
of the design cfm at 125% of normal operating pressure.
B. The leak testing shall be observed by the Owner's representative. Provide 48 hours
notification of such tests.
C. The leakage test shall be from the fan to the diffuser tap. Submit a written report
on each.
END OF SECTION
15840-8 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 15990 -TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions,
Amendments to the General Conditions, and Division-1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
B. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this
section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Scope of Work: Contractor will engage the services of an independent balance and
testing Contractor, which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating,
ventilating, and air conditioning systems, to balance adjust, and test steam, heating
and chilled water systems, air moving equipment and air distribution or exhausting
systems are herein specified.
B. Work Included:
1. Adjusting blower, fans, and ducts to deliver or exhaust design cfm.
2. Adjusting diffusers, registers, and grilles to deliver or exhaust design cfm.
3. Adjusting relief dampers and vents.
4. Adjusting diffusers, registers, and grilles to minimize drafts.
5. Adjusting all zones for design supply and return air cfm.
6. Adjusting blowers and fans to design rpm.
7. Balancing of domestic hot water return loop.
1.3 CONDITIONS
A. System Operation: Heating, ventilating, air conditioning equipment including filters,
shall be completely installed and in continuous operation as required to accomplish
the adjusting and balance work specified. Test and Balance Agency, shall give a
"Check List" to the Mechanical and/or Sheet Metal Contractors which, when completed,
and returned, will assure the systems are ready to be balanced. Adjusting and
balance work shall be performed when outside conditions approximate design
conditions indicated for heating and cooling functions.
1.4 AGENCY QUALIFICATIONS
A. Test and Balance Agency: Obtain the services of an independent Test and Balance
Agency that specializes in, and whose business is limited to, the testing and balancing
of Air conditioning systems.
1. The agency selected shall be fully certified by the AABC or the NEBB and
shall have at least one member of the agency qualified as a certified test and
balance Engineer who has been issued this certification by The National
Examining Board.
15990-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2. All work shall be done under the direct supervision of a full time member of
the organization which is a Professional Engineer registered in the State of
Texas.
3. All final reports shall be signed and sealed by the certified test and balance
Engineer and also the organization's Professional Engineer.
B. Agency Contract: Award the Contract to the approved balance Contractor in sufficient
time to allow the test and balance Contractor to schedule this work in cooperation
with other trades involved and comply with the completion date. _
1.5 SUBMI'I-I'ALS
A. Certificate: Selected and approved agency shall submit certificate immediately upon
receipt of test and balance contract.
B. Data Sheets: Submit typewritten data sheets on each item of testing equipment to --
be used. Included name of devices, manufacturer's name, model number, latest date
of calibration, and correction factors.
C. Report Forms: Submit specimen copies of report forms. Forms shall be 8-1/2" - 11"
paper for loose-leaf binding, with blanks for listing of the required test ratings and for
certification of report.
D. Final Report: Upon completion, all information shall be neatly typed and five (5)
copies submitted to the Owner with accompanying schematic diagrams of systems
tested. All test reports shall be assembled, indexed, and submitted in vinyl covered
loose-leaf notebooks with project name and balancing Contractor's name permanently
printed thereon.
1.6 MEASUREMENTS
A. Readjustments: Should corrective measures caused by faulty installation require
retesting, adjusting and balancing, such work shall be at no additional expense.
Corrective measures, other than those already listed, shall be made only as directed
by the Architect/Engineer and Owner in writing and shall be covered by Change Order
at an agreed amount before corrective work is done.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUMENTS
A. Quality: The minimum instrumentation for testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be
the "AABC Approved Minimum Field Instrumentation." Instruments used for testing
and balancing must have been calibrated within a period of six (6) months and
checked for accuracy prior to start of work. Instruments must be maintained and
carried in such manner to protect them form excessive vibration and moisture
conditions.
B. Approval: All products and instrumentation used shall be subject to approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
15990-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROCEDURE
A. Methodology: Testing and balancing shall be performed in complete accordance with
AABC and/or NEBB National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation.
3.2 PREPARATION
-- A. Air Systems: Prior to system testing and balancing:
1. Review the Sheet Metal Contractor's duct fabrication drawings and mark any
_ additional balancing dampers, etc. that are required for proper balancing of the
systems. This Contractor shall receive two (2) copies from the Sheet Metal
Contractor and shall return one (1) copy.
-- 2. Verify that the appropriate Contractor has:
a. Checked all systems and placed them into a fully operational status.
~ b. Cleaned all air filters or installed new ones as required.
c. Checked temperature and system controls for proper operation.
d. Checked fan rotation for proper operation.
-- 3.3 SYSTEM BALANCE
A. Air Systems: Perform the following minimum tests and balance:
1. Test and adjust supply, return, and exhaust fans to design requirements.
Change sheaves and belts as required to obtain design air quantities.
_ Sheaves and belts to be furnished by others.
2. Test and record motor electrical characteristics, R.P.M., service factor,
measured voltage, full load amperes and connected load amperage. Check
-- and record starter heater (s) sizes and rating, replacing belts sizes, etc.
3. Make pitot tube traverse (minimum of 16 point) of main supply ducts and
-- obtain design CFM at fans. Seal all test holes with suitable hole plugs.
4. Test and record system static pressure, suction, and discharge.
5. Test and adjust system for design CFM recirculated air.
6. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air.
7. Test and record entering air temperatures. (D.B. heating and cooling).
-- 8. Test and record entering air temperatures. (W.B. cooling).
9. Test and record leaving temperatures. (D.B. heating and cooling).
10. Test and record leaving air temperatures. (W.B. cooling).
15990-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
11. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design CFM.
12. Adjust all zones to proper design CFM, supply, and return.
13. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register to within +/-10% of design
requirements.
14. Each grille, diffuser, and register shall be identified as to location and area.
Size, type and flow factor and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers, and
all testing equipment shall be identified and listed.
15. Reading and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers shall include required FPM
velocity and test resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after
adjustment.
16. All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all
areas.
3.4 RECORD DATA
A. Air Systems: Record the following minimum data:
1. CFM delivery and RPM of blowers and fans.
2. Static pressure at inlet and outlet of blowers and fans.
3. All equipment nameplate data.
4. Actual running current and voltage of fan motors.
5. CFM delivery or exhaust at each diffusers, register or grille.
B. Equipment Cards: Install at each piece of equipment a "check out" card showing all
significant operating temperatures, pressures, amperes, voltages, brake horsepower,
etc. Check out cards shall be standard 5" x 8" index cards enclosed in vinafilm card
folders securely attached to equipment or wall in immediate area.
3.5 SERVICES
A. Owner's Instruction: Balancing Contractor shall arrange with the Owner a time of the
instruction of the Owner's personnel as to the proper operation and maintenance of
the equipment.
B. Reinspection: Balancing Contractor shall make two (2) return inspection trips to the
project, one at near heating design conditions and one during air conditioning design
conditions for the purpose of checking out the entire system (or group of systems).
Balancing Contractor shall make any additional adjustments at this time.
END OF SECTION
15990-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions, Division
I Specification Sections and all relevant documents shall form a part of this Division of
the Specifications, and shall be incorporated in this Section and each Division 16
Section hereinafter as if repeated verbatim herein. All conditions imposed by these
documents shall be applicable to all portions of the work under this Division. Certain
specific paragraphs of said references may be referred to hereinafter in this Division.
These references are intended to point out specific items to the Contractor, but in no
way relieve him of the responsibility of reading and complying with all relevant parts of
the entire Specification.
B. The Contractor shall examine and coordinate with all Contract Drawings and
Specifications, and all Addenda issued. Failure to comply shall not relieve him of
responsibility. The omission of details of other portions of the work from this Division
shall not be used as a basis for a request for additional compensation.
C. The specific features and details for other portions of the work related to the
construction in progress or to the existing building(s) shall be determined by
examination at the site.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The requirements contained in this Section apply to all work performed under Division
16 of these Specifications.
B. The work covered by this Division of the Specifications comprises the furnishing of
labor, material, equipment, transportation, tools and services, and performing operations
required for, and reasonably incidental to, the installation of the work in accordance
with the applicable Contract Documents, and subject to the terms and conditions of the
Contract.
C. The work shall include modifications and extensions to existing systems, and the
modification of the existing structure as required to accommodate the installation of the
work.
D. Refer to other Divisions of the Specifications for related work.
1.3 DEFINITION OF "CONTRACTOR"
A. Where the word "Contractor" is used under any Section of this Division of the
Specifications, it shall mean the Contractor engaged to execute the work included under
that Section.
16010-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
1.4 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work of every description in connection with
this Division of the Specifications. The Contractor shall specifically and distinctly
assume, and does so assume, all risk for damage or injury from whatever cause to
property or person used or employed on or in connection with this work and of all
damages or injury to any person or property wherever located, resulting from an action
or operation under the Contract in connection with the work, and undertake the
responsibility to defend the Owner against all claims on account of any such damage
or injury.
B. The Contractor will be held responsible for the satisfactory execution and completion
of the work in accordance with the true intent of the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall provide without extra charge all incidental items required as part of the
work, even though it may not be specifically indicated. If the Contractor has reason
for objecting to the use of any material, equipment, device or method of construction
as indicated, he shall make report of such objections to the Owner's Representative,
obtain proper approval and adjustment to the Contract, and shall proceed with the
work.
1.5 TERMINOLOGY
A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install", "provide and install",
and similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials, equipment and devices
described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division, complete for
operation, unless specifically noted to the contrary.
B. It is also the intent, unless specifically noted to the contrary, that all materials,
equipment and devices described and specified under this Division of the Specifications
be similarly furnished, installed and connected under this Division, whether or not a
phrase as described in the preceding paragraph has been actually included.
1.6 FEES AND PERMITS
A. The Contractor shall obtain permits, plan checks, inspections and approvals applicable
to the work as required by the regulatory authorities. Fees and costs of any nature
whatsoever incidental to these permits, inspections and approvals shall be assumed and
paid by the Contractor. The pro-rata costs, if any, for utilities serving this property will
be paid for by the Owner and shall not be included as part of this Contract.
1.7 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND DEVICE DESCRIPTION
A. Materials, equipment and devices shall be of the best quality customarily applied in
quality commercial practice, and shall be the products of reputable manufacturers.
Each major component shall bear a nameplate giving the name and address of the
manufacturer, and the catalog number or designation of the component.
16010-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Materials, equipment and devices furnished under this Division of the Specifications
shall be essentially the standard product of the specified manufacturer, or where
allowed, an alternate manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same kind or class
of a specific item are required, these shall be the products of a single manufacturer;
however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of one
manufacturer.
C. In describing the various materials, equipment and devices, in general each item will be
described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical items. Also,
_ where the description is only general in nature, exact sizes, duties, space arrangements,
horsepower requirements and other data shall be determined by reference to the
Contract Documents.
-- 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials, equipment and devices shall be new and of the quality specified, and shall
-- be free from defects at the time of installation. Materials, equipment and devices
damaged in shipment or otherwise damaged or found defective prior to acceptance by
the Owner shall not be repaired at the job site, but shall be replaced with new
_ materials, equipment or devices identical with those damaged, unless specifically
approved otherwise by the Owner's Representative.
B. Wherever a UL standard has been established for a particular type of material,
-- equipment or device, each item of such material, equipment or device provided on this
project shall meet the requirements of the UL standard in every way, and shall be UL
listed and labeled.
1.9 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Materials, equipment, devices and workmanship shall comply with applicable local,
county, state and national codes, laws and ordinances, utility company regulations and
industry standards.
'- B. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry
standards, utility company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent
shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in
. writing of any such difference. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not
comply with local codes, laws and ordinances, industry standards or other governing
regulations, the work shall be corrected of noncompliance deficiencies with the
Contractor bearing all costs.
C. In addition to the aforementioned ordinances, industry standards published by the
following organizations shall apply:
AABM - American Association of Battery Manufacturers
AIA - American Institute of Architects
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
CBM - Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association
ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories
- FM - Factory Mutual
16010-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
.- CCRD 295254.00
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Associated
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
lES Illuminating Engineering Society
IRI Industrial Risk Insurance
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NEC National Electrical Code
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NESC National Electrical Safety Code
NETA National Electrical Testing Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
UL Underwriters Laboratories
D. Where the Contract Documents exceed the above requirements, the Contract
Documents shall govern. In no case shall work be installed contrary to or below the
minimum legal standards.
1.10 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The interrelation of the Drawings and the Specifications are as follows:
1. The Drawings establish quantities, locations, dimensions and details of
materials, equipment and devices.
2. The Specifications provide written requirements for the quality, standard and
nature of the materials, equipment, devices and construction systems.
B. The Drawings and Specifications shall be considered as being compatible; therefore, the
work called for by one and not by the other shall be furnished and installed as though
called for by both. Resolution of conflicts between Drawings and Specifications shall
be as follows:
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for bringing any conflicts in the Drawings
and the Specifications to the attention of the Owner's Representative, prior to
any work being done.
2. In general, if there is conflict between the Drawings and Specifications, the
Drawings shall govern the Specifications.
3. Where the Specifications do not fully agree with schedules on the Drawings,
the schedules shall govern. Actual numerical dimensions indicated on the
Drawings govern scale measurements and large scale details govern small scale
drawings.
4. Materials, equipment and devices called for on the Drawings and not indicated
herein, shall be completely provided and installed as though it were fully
described herein.
5. Materials, equipment and devices called for herein shall be completely provided
and installed, whether or not it is fully detailed, scheduled or indicated on the
Drawings.
16010-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
C. The Contractor shall examine the Drawings and Specifications of the other portions of
the work for fixtures and finishes in connection with this work. The Contractor shall
carefully examine the Drawings to determine the general construction conditions, and
shall familiarize himself with all limitations caused by such conditions.
D. When discrepancies exist between scale and dimension, or between the Drawings of
the various portions of the work, they shall be called to the attention of the Owner's
Representative for further instruction. Instructions issued by the Owner's
Representative shall be final and binding and work promptly resumed without any
additional cost to the Owner.
E. Review the construction details of the building(s) as illustrated on the Drawings of the
various portions of the work and be guided thereby. Route conduits and set all boxes
as required by the pace of the general construction.
F. The Drawings diagrammatically show the sizes and locations of the various equipment
and devices, and the sizes of the major interconnecting wires, without showing exact
details as to elevations, offsets, control wiring and other installation requirements.
Carefully layout the work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural
conditions, to avoid obstructions and to permit proper grading of pipe associated with
other portions of the work. Determine the exact location of equipment and devices and
connections thereto by reference to the submittals and rough-in drawings, and by
measurements at the site. Make minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the
site, or directed by the Owner's Representative, without additional cost to the Owner.
G. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to describe and illustrate systems which
will not interfere with the structure of the building(s), fit into the available spaces, and
insure complete and satisfactory operating installations. Prepare installation drawings
for all critical areas illustrating the installation of the work in this Division as related to
the work of all other Divisions and correct all interferences with the other portions of
the work or with the building structures before the work proceeds.
H. The Drawings do not indicate the existing electrical installations other than to identify
modifications or extensions thereto. Visit the site and ascertain the conditions to be
met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and
in installing the new work. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for
any additional payment in connection with removing or modifying any part of the
existing installation or installing any new or temporary work under this Division.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTAL DATA
A. Process shop drawings and submittal data to insure that the proposed materials,
equipment and devices conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, and
that there are no omissions or duplications. Provide layouts, fabrication information and
data for systems, materials, equipment and devices proposed for the project.
B. Shop drawings shall be drawn on a scale not less than 1/4 inch equals 1 foot showing
actual dimensions. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Unit Substations
16010-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
2. Switchboards
3. Distribution Panelboards
4. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
5. Motor Control Centers --
6. UPS Modules
7. Engine-Generators
8. Automatic Transfer Switches
C. Submittal data (manufacturer's catalog data) shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Equipment: unit substations, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, --
transformers, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, fuses, etc.
2. Materials: conduit, conductors, connectors, supports, etc. _~
3. Lighting fixtures and lamps.
4. Wiring devices.
D. The submittal data shall not consist of manufacturer's catalogs or cut sheets that
contain no indication of the exact item offered. The submission on individual items --
shall designate the exact item offered.
E. Do not submit detailed quantitative listings of light fixtures, wiring devices and similar
items. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide proper sizes and quantities to
conform with Contract Documents.
F. Assemble submittals on related items procured from a single manufacturer in brochures
or other suitable package form, rather than submitting a multiplicity of loose sheets.
G. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings whenever equipment proposed varies in
physical size and arrangement from that indicated thus causing rearrangement of
equipment space, where tight spaces require extreme coordination between this work
and other work, where called for elsewhere in these Specifications and where
specifically requested by the Owner's Representative. Shop drawings shall be prepared
at a scale of not less than 1/4 inch equals I foot.
1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS '-
A. Where a single manufacturer is mentioned by trade name or manufacturer's name, it
has been done in order to establish a standard rather than to discriminate against an
equal product made by another manufacturer. Where multiple manufacturers are listed,
none other than those manufacturers will be acceptable.
16010-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Space allocations have been made on the basis of present and known future
requirements and the dimensions of items of equipment or device of a particular
_ manufacturer as indicated. If any equipment device not so indicated is offered which
differs substantially in dimension or configuration from the indicated equipment, provide
as part of the submittal 1/4 inch equals I foot scaled drawings showing that the
substitute can be installed in the space available without interfering with other portions
-' of the work or with access for operations and maintenance in the completed project.
C. Where substitute equipment or device requiring different arrangement or connections
_ from those indicated is accepted by the Owner's Representative, install the equipment
or device to operate properly and in harmony with the intent of the Contract
Documents, making all incidental changes in piping, ductwork or wiring resulting from
the equipment or device selection without an increase in the Contract amount. The
Contractor shall pay all additional costs incurred by other portions of the work in
connection with the substituted equipment or device.
-- D. The Owner's Representative reserves the right to call for samples of any item of
material, equipment or devices offered in substitution, together with a sample of the
specific item when, in the Owner Representative's opinion, the quality of the item
~._ and/or the appearance is involved, and it is deemed that an evaluation of the item may
be better made by visual inspection.
E. When any request for a substitution of material, equipment or device is submitted and
-- rejected, the item named in the Contract Documents shall be furnished. Repetitive
submittal of substitutions for the same item will not be considered.
· - 1.1 3 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare installation drawings for coordinating the work of this Division with the work
~_ of other Divisions, to illustrate its concealment in finished spaces, to avoid obstructions,
and to demonstrate the adaptability of any item of material, equipment or device in the
space upon which the Contract Documents are based.
-- B. Use these drawings in the field for the actual installation of this work. Provide three
(3) copies, not for approval, to the Owner's Representative for his information, review
and record.
1.14 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION
A. In no case shall the Contractor provide a class of material, equipment, device or
workmanship less than that required by the Contract Documents or applicable codes,
regulations, ordinances or standards. All modifications Which may be required by a
local authority having legal jurisdiction over all or any part of the work shall be made
by the Contractor without any additional charge. In all cases where such authority
requires deviations from the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications, the
Contractor shall report same to the Owner's Representative and shall secure his
approval before the work is started.
16010-7 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
- CCRD 295254.00
B. The work shall be performed by properly licensed technicians skilled in their respective
trades. All materials, equipment and devices shall be installed in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer and in the best standard practice to bring about
results of a first class condition.
C. The NECA "Standards of Installation" as published by the National Electrical Contractors
Association shall be considered a part of these Specifications, except as specifically
modified by other provisions contained in these Specifications.
1.15 WARRANTY
A. All materials, equipment, devices and workmanship shall be warranted for a period of
one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner's Representative for beneficial use
by the Owner, except that where specific equipment is noted to have extended
warranties. The warranty shall be in accordance with AIA Document A201. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the proper registration of these warranties so that
the Owner can make all proper claims should future need develop.
B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner's Representative for transmittal to the Owner,
the name, address and telephone number of those persons responsible for service on
systems and equipment covered by the warranty.
1.16 OPERATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE
A. When any equipment is operable, and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to
operate the equipment, the Contractor may do so provided that he properly supervises
the operation, and retains full responsibility for the equipment operated. Regardless of
whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall clean
the equipment properly, make required adjustments and complete punch list items
before final acceptance by the Owner.
1.17 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Provide the services of competent engineers and/or technicians acceptable to the
Owner's Representative to instruct other representatives of the Owner in the complete
and detailed operation of each item of equipment or device of all the various electrical
systems. These instructions shall be provided for whatever periods may be necessary
to accomplish the desired results. Upon completion of these instructions, the
Contractor shall obtain a letter of release, acknowledged by the Owner or his authorized
representative, stating the dates on which the various kinds of instruction were given,
and the personnel to whom the instructions were given.
B. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for proper maintenance of equipment and
systems until the instructions have been given to the Owner's personnel and the letter
of release acknowledged.
16010-8 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 29,5254.00
C. In providing the instructions to the Owner's personnel, the written operating and
maintenance manuals shall be followed in all instances, and the Owner's personnel shall
be familiarized with such manuals. Operating and maintenance manuals used for
~- instructions shall include wiring diagrams, manufacturer's operating and maintenance
instructions, parts lists (with sources identified), and other data as appropriate for each
system.
1.18 SCHEDULE AND SEQUENCE OF WORK
_ A. The Contractor shall meet and cooperate with the Owner and Owner's Representative
to schedule and sequence this work so as to insure meeting scheduled completion dates
and avoid delaying other portions of the work. Work requiring special sequencing shall
be at no additional cost to the Owner and shall have no impact on the schedule.
1.19 INSPECTIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS
_ A. Obtain timely inspections of the installation by the regulatory authorities. Remedy any
deficiencies to the satisfaction of the inspecting official.
_. B. Upon final completion of the work, obtain certificates of acceptance from the regulatory
authorities. Deliver the certificates to the Owner's Representative for transmission to
the Owner.
-- 1.20 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment and devices in a manner to permit access to all surfaces or
_ components, requiring such access, without the need to disassemble other unrelated
parts of the work.
B. Large equipment assemblies and components which will be installed in the building, and
-- which are too large to permit access through doorways, stairways or shafts, shall be
brought to the site and placed in the appropriate spaces before the enclosing structure
is complete.
C. Equipment specified to be factory assembled and tested prior to shipment shall not be
disassembled at the job site and reassembled at its final location. Apparatus not so
._ specified may be disassembled and reassembled in the proper location.
D. Furnish all scaffolding, rigging and hoisting required for the installation of all the work.
-- 1.21 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS
A. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide foundations for electrical equipment. This
-- shall consist of concrete housekeeping pads constructed in accordance with the details
on the Drawings, these Specifications, manufacturer's recommendations and Division
3.
16010-9 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
B. All pads shall be 4" high and extend a maximum 2" beyond the actual equipment size.
Coordinate the proper size of the pad with the equipment furnished. Furnish all anchor
bolts and other accessories required for casting the concrete pad. After the equipment
is set on the pad, the equipment shall be fully grouted to the pad and all void spaces
shall be filled with a non-shrinking grout.
1.22 SLEEVES
A. Each conduit, regardless of material, which passes through a concrete slab, masonry
wall, or roof or portion of the building structure shall be free from the structure and
shall pass through a sleeve.
B. All sleeves shall be constructed from electrical-metallic tubing or equivalent weight
galvanized steel tubing and shall be flush on both sides of the surface penetrated,
unless noted otherwise. All sleeves penetrating the roof areas shall extend a minimum
10 inches above the roof with approved weatherproof counterflashing attached to the
conduit above the roof. All sleeves penetrating floors shall extend a minimum of 6
inches above the finished floors. The sleeves shall be sized to allow free passage of
the conduit to be inserted.
C. Sleeves passing through walls or floors on or below grade or in moist areas shall be
constructed of galvanized rigid steel and shall be designed with a suitable flange in the
center to form a waterproof passage. After the conduit has been installed in the
sleeves, the void space around the conduit shall be caulked with jute twine and filled
with an asphalt-base compound to insure a waterproof penetration.
1.23 ESCUTCHEONS
A. In each finished space, provided a chromium plated, sectional escutcheon on each
conduit, or hanger rod penetrating a wall, floor or ceiling.
B. Size escutcheons and collars to fit snugly around conduit and rods.
C. Where required, provide escutcheons with set screws so that they fit snugly against the
finished surface.
1.24 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide wall and ceiling access panels for unrestricted access to all concealed electrical
equipment items and devices installed behind furrings, chases or non-removable
suspended ceilings.
B. Access panels shall be UL listed and labeled as required to suit the fire rating of the
surface in which installed, with mounting straps, concealed hinges, screwdriver locks,
180 degree open door design, 16 gauge steel construction and door and frame finished
in prime coat finish. Panels shall be 12-inch by 12-inch minimum size, but shall be
larger as the access requirement of the concealed electrical equipment item or device
increases.
16010-10 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
1.25 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. All excavating, trenching and backfilling shall generally be performed in accordance with
the procedures and using the materials as described in Division 2. Provide all
excavation required in connection with the installation of the work under this Division.
After the work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with
~-- suitable material.
B. Bottoms of trenches shall be cut to grade. Should rock be encountered, same shall be
_ excavated to a depth of six (6) inches below bottom of conduit and space shall be filled
and tamped as specified hereinafter. Should it be required to lay conduit on fill, fill shall
first be compacted.
'-- C. All conduit shall be installed promptly after excavation has been done so as to keep
excavations open as short a time as possible.
-- D. Trenches shall be excavated to the required depths. Depth of cover shall be as required
by the NEC or as indicated on Drawings. Keep banks of trenches as nearly vertical as
possible, and provide adequate shoring where required.
E. When excavation is below the shale or subgrade level, backfill with granular fill or
approved backfill material from the site to a depth of 12 inches above top of conduit,
but in no case less than 1 '-0" below the subgrade surface. The remainder of backfill
-- to the shale or subgrade surface shall be an impervious material and shall be compacted
at not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density as defined by ASTM D-698.
At all times, the top of the subgrade shall be kept in such condition that it will drain
_ readily and effectively. A mud slab shall be placed over excavation where required by
the Drawings or Specifications. Backfill above the subsurface shall be granular fill or
approved select backfill from site.
F. Beyond building walls or above the shale or subgrade level, backfill with sand or
granular fill to a depth of 12 inches above top of conduit and remainder of trench filled
with approved select backfill material from the site.
G. Bottoms of trenches shall be tamped hard and graded to secure the maximum fall.
Where rock is excavated below the bottom of the conduit, and before laying the
~._ conduit, fill the space between the bottom of the conduit and the rock surface with
sand, thoroughly tamped.
H. Trenches dug in fill shall have the conduit supported down to load-bearing soil. After
'- conduits have been inspected and approved by the Owner's Representative, trenches
shall be filled with approved backfill material which shall be firmly compacted, flooded
if necessary and thoroughly tamped. Do not backfill with any fill containing rocks,
- frozen earth or debris.
I. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets and other pavements and repairing the
openings in them to return the surface to approximately its original condition.
16010-11 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
_ CCRD 295254.00
1.26 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut all openings required to install the work or to repair any defective work. Do all this
cutting under the Owner's Representatives direction and exercise due diligence to avoid
cutting openings larger than required or in the wrong locations.
B. No cutting or drilling of any sort will be permitted in the webs of prestressed, precast
concrete structural elements. Use core drills or power driven saws to cut openings in
the flanges of other such elements; the use of reciprocating drills will not be permitted.
The cutting of structural members without first having received written permission from
the Owner's Representative is prohibited.
C. Where openings are cut in fire-rated walls or floors, seal the annular space between the
work installed and the fire-rated construction. Sealant, as applied, shall be fire rated
to maintain the fire rating of the construction penetrated. Sealant shall be re-enterable
(before fire) to alter penetrations. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
1.27 SEALING OF PENETRATIONS
A. All penetrations in horizontal or vertical fire-rated construction shall be sealed using
approved fire-rated sealing materials equivalent to the following:
1. Foam: Dow Corning 3-6548 RTV silicone foam, liquid component Part 4 (black)
and liquid component Part B (off-white).
2. Sealant: Dow Corning 96-081 RTV silicone adhesive sealant.
3. Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard, mineral fiber matting, mineral fiber
putty, plywood or particle board, as selected by applicator.
B. Preparation: Remove combustible materials and loose impediments from penetration
opening and involved surfaces. Remove free liquid and oil from penetration surfaces.
C. Installation: In accordance with manufacturer's instructions, install damming materials
and sealant to cover and seal penetration openings; inject foam mixtures into openings.
1.28 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS
A. At all times take every precaution to properly protect apparatus from damage due to
dust, dirt, water, etc. or from damage due to physical forces. Include the erection of
temporary shelters as required, to adequately protect any apparatus stored at the site,
the cribbing of any apparatus directly above the construction, and the covering of
apparatus in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering.
Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction
of the Owner's Representative will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of
apparatus in question.
16010-12 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Responsibility for the protection of apparatus extend also to existing apparatus involved
in this Division of the work, whether such apparatus is designated to be used
temporarily and later removed, or is to be reused as a part of the permanent installation.
Erect temporary sheltering structures, provide temporary bracing and supports, or cover
equipment as required or directed to afford proper protection for that equipment.
C. The Contractor shall protect this work and the work of all other Contractors from
damage by his work or workmen and shall make good any damage thus caused. He
shall also be responsible for the proper protection of his equipment, machinery,
materials and accessories delivered and installed on the job.
.29 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION OF OTHER DIVISION'S EQUIPMENT
A. Verify the electrical requirements of all equipment furnished under other Divisions,
separate contracts, or by the Owner. Install conduit, power wiring, control wiring,
devices, etc. as required for complete operation of all equipment.
.30 OPTION TO RELOCATE OUTLETS AND RELATED DEVICES
A. The location of power, data and telephone outlets, wall switches and other related
devices may be relocated at the Owner's option, at no additional cost to the Owner,
to a point within 10 feet of their present location provided the Contractor is notified
prior to installation.
.31 COOPERATION AND CLEAN-UP
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to cooperate fully to keep the job site in
a clean and safe condition. Upon the completion of the job, the Contractor shall
immediately remove all of his tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.
B. After the installation is complete, and before the equipment is energized, clean the
interior and exterior of all equipment thoroughly. Clean equipment, removing all debris,
rubbish and foreign materials. Each component shall be cleaned and all dust and other
foreign material removed. Components shall be cleaned of oxidation. The inside and
outside of all switchgear shall also be wiped clean with a lemon-oil rag after all other
cleaning is complete.
C. Any portion of the work requiring touch-up finishing shall be so finished to equal the
specified finish on the product.
16010-13 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
1.32 RECORD DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTATION FOR OWNER
A. The Contractor shall obtain at his own expense a complete set of blueline prints on
which to keep an accurate record of the installation of all materials, equipment and
devices covered by the Contract. The record drawings shall indicate the location of all
equipment and devices, and the routing of all systems. All piping and conduit buried
in concrete slabs, walls and below grade shall be located by dimension; both
horizontally and by vertical elevation, unless a surface mounted device in each space
indicates the exact location. He shall then obtain one complete reproducible set of the
original drawings on which he shall neatly, legibly and accurately transfer his notations
and deliver these drawings to the Owner's Representative at job completion before final
payment and delivery to the Owner. The above data, with the exception of the record
drawings, shall be delivered to the Owner's Representative prior to final acceptance.
B. The Contractor shall accumulate in duplicate during the job progress, the following data
prepared in indexed 3-ring Iooseleaf, hard-back binders sized for 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch
sheets. No binder shall exceed 3-1/2 inches thick. This data shall be turned over to
the Owner's Representative for review and subsequent delivery to the Owner. This
data shall be delivered to the Owner's Representative prior to final acceptance.
1. Warranties, guarantees and manufacturer's directions on material, equipment
and devices covered by the Contract.
2. Approved lighting fixture brochures, wiring diagrams and control diagrams.
3. Copies of approved submittals and shop drawings.
4. Operating instructions for major apparatus and recommended maintenance
procedures.
5. Copies of all other data and/or drawings required during construction.
6. Repair parts list of major apparatus, including name, address and telephone
number of local supplier or representative.
7. Tag charts and diagrams hereinbefore specified.
1.33 FINAL OBSERVATION
A. The purpose of the final observation is to determine whether the Contractor has
completed the construction in accordance with the Contract Documents and that in the
Owner Representative's opinion the installation is satisfactory for final acceptance by
the Owner.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to assure that the installation is ready for
final acceptance prior to calling upon the Owner's Representative to make a final
observation.
16010-14 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
6010-15 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 160.50 - SITE ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
-- A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
_ B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for
coordination of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of alt site electrical work.
B. The site electrical work shall include, but not be limited to, the furnishing and
installation of necessary materials and making arrangements for:
1. The connection of electrical and telephone utilities.
2. Underground conduit.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
_ A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division I for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 300
· - B. Service installation standards of the serving utility company(s).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL SERVICE
A. Coordination: The location of the service entrance shall be coordinated with all other
-- trades. Provide materials and equipment required to connect the electrical service.
B. Materials: Provide materials in accordance with other Sections of these Specifications.
C. Outages: For construction connected with existing facilities schedule power outages
to avoid interference with the Owner's or other tenant's activities. Obtain approval
_ prior to the requested outage as specified in Division 1. Provide a schedule showing
sequence and duration of all activities during the requested outage.
16050-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
_ CCRD 295254.00
2.2 TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Coordination: The location of the service entrance shall be coordinated with the
Owner. Provide materials and equipment required to connect the telephone service.
B. Materials: Provide materials in accordance with other sections of this specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Underground installation of more than one conduit shall be in a duct arrangement as
indicated. All conduits shall be laid so joints are staggered. Pour a red colored
concrete envelope 3" thick over the conduit ductbank. Where a duct bank crosses a
driveway, road or parking area, reinforcing rods shall be installed. All bends and
stub-ups shall be rigid steel.
B. Perform excavation, shoring, backfilling and concrete work in connection with electrical
work in accordance with other Divisions of the Specifications.
3.2 UTILITIES
A. The locations, elevations and voltage of electrical lines and the location of the telephone
lines included within the area of this work are indicated on the Drawings or in the
Specifications in accordance with information received by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall examine the site and shall verify, to his own satisfaction, the
location and elevation of all utilities, and shall adequately inform himself as to their
relation to the work.
C. The work associated with existing utility lines shown within the scope of this project
to be abandoned or removed shall be performed by the Owner.
D. Existing utility lines not indicated but encountered during construction shall be
protected, relocated or capped as directed by the Owner's Representative. All
precautions shall be exercised to prevent damage to existing lines not shown, but
should work become necessary, it must be authorized prior to execution except in an
emergency situation.
E. Before beginning excavations of any nature whatsoever, the Contractor shall make an
attempt to locate all underground utilities of every nature occurring within the bounds
of the area to be excavated. The Contractor shall then proceed with caution in his
excavation work so that no utility shall be damaged with a resultant loss of service.
F. Should a damage result to any utility through the Contractor's negligence or failure to
comply with the above directive, he shall be liable for such damage and for all expense
incurred in the expeditious repair or replacement of such damaged utilities.
16050-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
G. Repair of damaged utilities shall be to a condition equal to or better than the adjacent
undamaged portion of such utility and to the complete satisfaction of the Owner.
END OF SECTION
16050-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16110 - SYSTEMS OF RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
-- A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
_. B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for
coordination of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations
required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of all raceway systems
-- included in this project.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
-- PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT
A. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC): Rigid steel conduit shall be galvanized,
constructed of high-grade raw steel piping, galvanized inside and outside, conforming
in all respects with Federal Specification WW-C-581-E, ANSI C80-1 and UL 6. Zinc
coating shall be applied by the hot-dip, galvanizing process and shall be of uniform
thickness not only on the inside and outside surfaces of the conduit but also on the
threads of the conduit. Conduit shall be dipped in a chromic acid bath so as to form
~- a corrosion-resistant protective coating of zinc chromate over the hot-dipped galvanized
surface. Each conduit length shall be threaded and equipped with a coupling on one
end and a thread protector on the other end.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): IMC shall be constructed of high-grade steel
tubing, galvanized inside and outside and conforming in all respects with Federal
Specification WW-C-581-E and UL 1242. Zinc coating shall be applied by the hot-dip,
galvanized process and shall be of uniform thickness not only on the inside and
outside surfaces of the conduit, but also on the threads of the conduit. Each conduit
length shall be equipped with a coupling on one end and a thread protector on the
other end.
16110-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
- CCRD 295254.00
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): EMT shall be constructed of high-grade steel,
manufactured specifically to standards assuring maximum welding characteristics and
ductility. EMT shall conform in all respects to Federal Specification WW-C-563-A,
ANSI C80-3 and UL 797. The exterior galvanized coat of zinc shall be of uniform
thickness applied by the electro-galvanized process. The interior surface of each tube
shall be uniformly coated with a thick, tough, elastic coating of enamel. EMT shall
be dipped in chromic acid bath so as to form a corrosion resistant protective coating
of zinc chromate over the galvanized surface.
D. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
PVC conduit shall be rigid, Schedule 40, heavy-wall, high-impact, conforming in all
respects to the applicable requirements of Federal Specification W-C-1094-A, NEMA
TC-2, and UL 651. PVC conduit shall be joined with PVC couplings of the solvent
cement type to provide complete watertight joints. Conduit systems shall be UL listed
for direct burial and exposed use, and shall be in conformance with the NEC.
E. Flexible Metal Conduit: Shall be manufactured of spirally-wound, mild steel strip
material having a hot-dip galvanized coating and meeting requirements of UL 1 for
flexible metal conduit.
F. Liquidtight Flexible Steel Conduit: Shall be manufactured exactly as specified for
flexible metal conduit and, in addition, shall have a copper grounding strand and
factory-applied neoprene jacket. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall meet the
requirements of UL 360. For circuits in raised floor areas provide blue jacketed liquid
tight flexible conduit.
2.2 COUPLINGS AND TERMINATORS
A. For Galvanized Rigid Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit: Shall be factory-made
threaded couplings of same material as the conduit.
1. Molded nylon insulating bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with Iocknuts inside
and outside box or cabinet. In wet locations, watertight hubs shall be used
for conduit entry into enclosures.
2. Nylon insulated grounding bushing on all conduits where grounding bushings
are required, with Iocknuts inside and outside the enclosure. In wet locations,
watertight hubs shall be used for conduit entry into enclosures.
B. For Electrical Metallic Tubing
1. Steel compression couplings.
2. Steel compression box connectors with nylon insulated grounding bushing, or
box connector Iocknut, and nylon insulated grounding bushing on all tubing
where grounding bushings are required.
C. For Flexible Metal Conduit
1. Couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit.
16110-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2. Nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations.
D. For Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit
1. Adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit.
-- 2. Nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations.
E. Expansion Joints in Conduit: O.Z./Gedney, Type AX with internal ground and external
_ bonding jumper.
F. Wire Support Bushings: Provide for vertical runs as required by the NEC. Select for
the conductor size involved.
1. For conductors NO. 8 AWG and smaller provide galvanized, non-insulating
type.
2. For conductors No. 6 AWG and larger provide O.Z./Gedney, Type R,
insulating type.
2.3 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Junction and pull boxes 100 cubic inches in volume and smaller shall be standard
-- outlet boxes. Larger junction and pull boxes shall be constructed from code gauge
sheet steel with overlapped riveted or welded corners and with edges turned to
receive trim. Covers shall be same gauge as box and shall be screw fastened.
_ Boxes over 864 square inches shall be sectionalized. Boxes shall be factory-
fabricated from galvanized steel to prevent corrosion.
B. Size boxes in accordance with the requirements of the NEC. Boxes shall be no
smaller than 4 inches square and 1-1/2 inches deep with covers accessible at all
times. Set boxes on concealed conduits with covers flush with the finished wall or
ceiling line. Provide junction and pull boxes of appropriate dimensions for conduits
-- and conductors noted, where shown and where necessary for the installation and
pulling of cables and wires. Install covers on junction boxes and condulets after
wiring and connections are completed.
2.4 OUTLET BOXES
A. Outlet boxes shall be UL listed, and of sizes and types required for the application.
B. Boxes Recessed in Construction: Sheet steel boxes, unless noted or required
otherwise. Boxes shall be no lighter than 14 gauge and shall be galvanized after
- fabrication. Set so face of box will finish flush with building surface.
1. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4 inch square with raised fixture ring.
16110-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
2. For Wall Switches, Receptacles, and Communication Use: 4 inch square,
one-piece; no sectional boxes permitted. Use boxes with plaster rings in all
plastered walls where wall thickness permits. Use boxes less than 1-1/2 inch
deep only in locations where deep boxes cannot be accommodated by
construction.
C. Boxes Used Outdoors or in Damp/Wet Locations: Cast metal boxes (iron and alloy)
with gasketed covers and threaded hubs.
D. Boxes in Hazardous Areas: Approved cast metal boxes with appropriate sealing
fittings.
2.5 PULL CORD (OR WIRES)
A. Provide a nylon cord, with a tensile strength of not less than 200 pounds, in each
empty conduit to facilitate the future installation of conductors. Plastic tags shall be
incorporated for identification.
2.6 WlREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Wireways shall be constructed in accordance with UL 870. Every component
including lengths, connectors, and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled. Provision
shall be included in the construction to allow screwing the hinged cover closed without
the use of parts other than the standard lengths, fittings, and connectors. It shall also
be possible to seal the cover in the closed position with a sealing wire.
B. Wireway shall be constructed with/without knockouts, as required. Enclosure type shall
be as required by conditions encountered.
C. Gutters and Wireways shall be suitable for "lay-in" conductors. Connector covers shall
be permanently attached so that removal is not necessary to utilize the lay-in feature.
D. All sheet metal parts shall be provided with a rust-inhibiting phosphatizing coating and
gray baked enamel finish. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion. All
screws installed toward the inside shall be protected by spring nuts or otherwise
guarded to prevent wire insulation damage.
E. All connectors shall be slip-in type with self-retained mounting screws. All hangers
shall be two-piece with hook-together feature to permit pre-assembly of wireway and
hanger bottom plate before hanging on pre-installed upper bracket.
2.7 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Surface Metal Raceway shall be UL listed and labeled; shall be used together with
couplings, clips, bushings, straps, connectors, connection covers, elbows, boxes,
extension boxes, fixture boxes, extension adapters, blank covers and all other required
fittings; shall be of the proper size to accommodate the conductors to be installed
therein in each case.
16110-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Install underground conductors in plastic conduit, unless noted or specified otherwise.
Install at least 30 inches below finished grade, unless noted otherwise, on a bed of
-- sand not less than 3 inches deep. Cover raceways with 9 inches of sand before
continuing backfill. Assemble and install raceways in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Make joints with couplings and solvent welding cement. Fabricate long
-- radius bends with proper heating equipment. Bends showing signs of overheating or
flattening are unacceptable. Bends less than 10 feet radius shall be made with rigid
steel as described herein. Ream ends of all conduit before joining.
B. Install plastic conduit on non-metallic interlocking spacers securely anchored to prevent
movement during backfilling.
- C. Where conduit enters into or under a building and turns up out of the earth or turns
up into pole bases or concrete pads, change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel
conduit below grade. Do not extend any plastic conduit into, under or within a
_ building. Make similar change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit at
connections to underground pull or junction boxes and at all bends.
D. All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap conduit with
-- 3M 0.020-inch thick No. 52 "Scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double
thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent,
and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre-wrapped in the shop
-- and then cut and jointed on the job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe
wrapping 3 inches on both sides of joint.
_ E. Metal conduits shown to be concrete encased shall be rigid galvanized steel. At the
Contractor's option, corrosion protected conduits may be used; installation shall comply
with manufacturer's recommendations.
- 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING CONDUIT
A. All conduits installed within the building shall conform to requirements of this Section.
B. Run all conductors of every description in conduits unless noted or specified
otherwise. A maximum of six (6) current carrying conductors shall be permitted in
a conduit.
C. In above grade locations all conduits shall be galvanized rigid steel or intermediate
metal conduit where installed exposed in damp or wet locations or installed in
- concrete. Elsewhere conduit may be galvanized rigid steel conduit or electrical
metallic tubing.
~. D. Conduits shall be of such size and so installed that the conductors may be drawn
through without injury or excessive strain, shall be secured at cabinets and boxes,
with galvanized Iocknuts, both inside and outside, and shall have appropriate bushings
inside. Bushings shall be insulating type or insulating type with bonding ground
clamps where grounding bushings are required.
16110-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
E. Join galvanized rigid steel and intermediate metal conduit with threaded couplings.
Threaded conduits shall be reamed after threading, and shall be kept tightly closed
at each end, and shall be kept in dry locations during construction. Conduits shall
be swabbed out before conductors are pulled.
F. Conduits piercing roof membrane shall be flashed as specified in Division 7.
G. Use length of flexible metal conduit not less than 12 inches long at final connections
to all motors, transformers, generators, and similar devices subject to movement
because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use 3/8" by 6'-0" flexible metal
conduits for final connections to recessed lighting fixtures. Use liquidtight flexible
metal conduit, with appropriate connections, in damp or wet locations, in mechanical
equipment rooms, at motor or equipment location at or near pumps, and when
installed outdoors.
H. Ground metallic conduits as required by the NEC.
I. Provide a green grounding conductor in all conduits including PVC conduits as
required by the NEC.
J. Install raceways continuous from outlet box to outlet box, or cabinet, with a maximum
of 150 feet between pull points. The number of equivalent 1/4 bends between pull
points shall not exceed that required by the NEC.
K. Do not install raceways within three (3) inches of hot water pipes, except where
crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1 inch from insulation on
the pipe. When possible, avoid installing raceways directly above, or in close
proximity to objects operating at high temperatures.
L. In damp or wet locations, make every effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner
which will create moisture traps. Seal both ends of raceways with an approved
sealing compound to prevent moisture condensation within the raceways.
M. In systems operating at more than 300 volts between phase conductors, and where
different phase conductors are to be run to a common outlet box, provide substantial
barriers between adjacent devices in the box so that two different phase wires will not
be in the same compartment.
N. Join electrical metallic tubing with steel compression type couplings. At EMT
terminations, provide insulated throat, steel compression box connectors, and Iocknuts.
O. Provide an expansion joint in each raceway run which is buried in, or rigidly secured
to, the building construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint, and in
each long straight run of raceway which may be subject to excessive expansion.
P. Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls, penetrations, or other partitions, or
through sleeves in floors, walls or other partitions, carefully fill any space between the
outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water,
smoke, and fumes. Filling material shall be a UL listed, intumescent sealant having
fire/smoke resistive quality.
16110-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
Q. Conduits utilized throughout the project shall not be smaller than 3/4" inch.
_ 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with the NEC. Use larger sizes than
required by code where job conditions so indicate.
B. Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems.
- C. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set boxes
flush with finished surfaces for access, and provide overlapping covers.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES
A. Terminate conduits at a metal outlet box at each outlet or device. All boxes shall
conform to the NEC.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PULL CORD (OR WIRES)
_ A. Provide a pull cord (or wire) in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be
installed under this Division, to facilitate future installation of wiring. Cord shall be
free from splices and shall have 12 feet of exposed length at each end. Coil and
identify each end of each line with plastic tag bearing complete information as to the
purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Furnish and install all hangers and supports required by the raceway systems. Refer
to Section 16190 for additional requirements.
B. Support all above-grade electrical conduits from the building construction. Support
conduits running vertically or horizontally along walls with galvanized malleable iron
one-hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4 inch and larger
-- on suspension hangers.
C. Where multiple raceways are run vertically or horizontally at the same elevations, they
-- shall be supported on trapezes formed of sections of metal framing, suspended on
rods. Size trapeze members, including the suspension rods, based on the support
required for the number, size, and loaded weight of the conduits. Space them as
.... required for the smallest conduit to be supported.
D. Locate hangers and trapezes to support horizontal raCeways without appreciable
sagging. Hanger spacing shall not exceed NEC requirements, or recommendations
- of the NECA "Standard of Installation".
E. Where local branch circuit conduits smaller than 1-1/4 inch are installed above metal
-. lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended'dry ceilings of the non-removable
type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where multiple conduits are
passing through they shall be supported on trapeze hangers.
16110-7 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
F. Where local branch circuit conduits smaller than 1-1/4 inch are installed above
removable type dry ceilings, support them on suitable hanger rods with metal clips at
a distance above the ceiling sufficient to permit removal of ceiling panel and lighting _
fixtures. (Do not secure them to ceiling hanger rods.) Locate such conduits so as
not to hinder access to mechanical equipment through ceiling panels. Where multiple
conduits are passing through they shall be supported on trapeze hangers.
G. Where support anchors are required, establish their type and locate in concrete
construction before concrete is poured, if possible. Fit each hanger rod with a nut
at its upper end, and set nut in a universal concrete insert in the form. Where
supported weight exceeds holding strength of a single insert, pass rods through top
slot of inserts and interlock with reinforcing steel. Also, where particularly heavy loads
are to be supported, suspend hanger rod or rods from a structural angle spanning
two or more inserts and securely bolted thereto to distribute the weight.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Firmly secure raceway components to building surfaces using plastic expansion shields
and flathead sheet metal screws for plaster, plastic expansion shields and flathead
wood screws for drywall or masonry lead expansion shields for brick, cinder block and
concrete construction.
B. Raceways shall be run perpendicular and parallel to building surfaces with boxes set
plumb and square.
3.8 SEGREGATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS
A. Segregation of wiring systems shall not be compromised by the use of common
pullboxes, wireways, cabinets or any other type of enclosure.
B. The raceway system for each feeder shall be a separate system completely fault
isolated from all other raceway systems.
C. The raceway system for the branch circuits of each panelboard shall be a separate
system completely fault isolated from all other raceway systems.
END OF SECTION
16110-8 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16120 - SYSTEMS OF CONDUCTORS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
-- A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
_ B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for
coordination of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations
required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of the systems of conductors
-- for power and lighting service and for other systems included in this project, including
related accessories.
1.3 SUBMI'I-I'ALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
B. Submittal data for cables shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
_ 1. Complete physical properties of the cables.
2. Ampacity for use intended.
3. Allowable stresses and requirements for installations, including bend radii,
linear stress, and other pertinent data.
C. Submit splicing and termination kit materials and instructions for approval, include
evidence from the cable manufacturer indicating the suitability of the kits submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS OF CONDUCTORS - 600 VOLTS OR LESS
'- A. Wire (for installation within conduit or raceway)
1. Provide conductors of solid or stranded soft-drawn annealed copper, 98%
--- conductivity, new building wire, insulated in accordance with the requirements
of the NEC for the several services involved. Insulation shall be rated not
less than 600-volt. Conductors shall be Type "THWN" or "THHN/THWN".
Conductors No. 10 and smaller shall be solid.
2. Temperature ratings of conductors shall generally be 75 degrees C. For high
temperature applications, the temperature ratings shall be in accordance with
the NEC for the ambient condition.
16120-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-~ CCRD 295254.00
B. Connectors: Make splices and connections in conductors using UL connectors.
1. Stranded Conductors: UL listed, solderless, bolted pressure or compression _
connectors. Connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes.
2. Solid Conductors: UL listed bolted pressure or spring connectors. Connectors
shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes.
3. Motor Lead Pigtails: UL listed, crimp lugs with through-bolt fasteners between
lugs. Lugs shall be of proper sizes to match conductors. Proper sized dies
and tools shall be furnished to apply connectors.
4. Lighting Fixture Taps: Electrical spring connectors as specified for solid
conductors.
5. Ground Connections: Burndy ground clamps or connectors of a type suitable
for and having a UL listing for grounding applications.
C. Identification Tags: Nylon band with marking pad equivalent to Thomas and Betts
Series TY-553M.
D. Metal Clad Cable
1. Metal Clad Cable: Type MC metal clad cable shall be two or more factory
assembled insulated conductors enclosed in a metallic sheath of interlocked
galvanized steel strip manufactured in accordance with UL Standard 1569.
The insulated conductors shall have an operating temperature of 90 degree
C and shall be covered by a high dielectric strength assembly tape. These
600 volt rated metal clad cables shall be capable of passing UL's 70,000 BTU
vertical tray flame test and the two hour through-penetration flame test in
compliance with UL 1479. Type MC cable shall be as manufactured by AFC
or equal.
2. Home Run Cable: Type MC metal clad home run cable shall be a factory
assembly of five or more insulated conductors manufactured to UL 1569 for
metal clad cables and as indicated above for type MC metal clad cable. The
90 degree C rated multi-conductors shall be covered by high dielectric strength
assembly tape and enclosed in a metallic sheath of interlocked galvanized
steel strip. These 600 volt rated MC cables shall be capable of passing the
UL 70,000 BTU vertical tray flame test and the two hour through-penetration
flame test in compliance with UL 1479. Cable shall be as manufactured by
AFC or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to
the conductors is completed.
16120-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Before any wire is pulled into any conduit, thoroughly swab the conduit to remove all
foreign material and to permit the wire itself to be pulled into a clean, dry conduit.
_ Utilize pulling compounds to facilitate the pulling of conductors.
C. Exercise care in handling and installing cables to avoid damage. Carefully form
cables in equipment pull boxes. Form bends in cables larger than the minimum radii
shown in the cable manufacturer's published data for minimum bends such that bends
will not reduce the cable life.
-- D. Run feeders in continuous lengths, without joints or splices, insofar as practicable.
Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide.
_. E. Do not use gutters of panelboards as raceways, junction boxes, or pull boxes for
conductors not terminating in said panelboards.
F. Run conduits for emergency power conductors separate from all other wiring.
G. Make splices and terminations in cables with kits and instructions supplied by the kit
manufacturer. Each splice and termination shall be made by personnel well
_ experienced in splicing these types of cables, who can show evidence of their
qualifications. Each splice shall equal the integrity of the cable electrically and
environmentally.
- H. After a joint or splice is mechanically and electrically complete, insulate it with rubber
tape and friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the
conductor. Alternate: A vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in a least four (4)
-- layers, half-lapped in two (2) directions, with large splices, terminals, sharp corners,
and voids being first protected by applying insulating putty.
· I. Color Coding: Use standard color coding of conductors. Color coding shall be
continuous for the entire length of conductors, and shall be permanent and readily
distinguished after installation.
1. Neutral conductors: White or natural gray. Where conductors of two different
systems may be installed within the same enclosure, one neutral shall be
white or natural gray, and the other neutral shall be white with a colored
stripe other than green.
2. Grounding conductors: Green, or green with one or more yellow stripes.
_ Provide a grounding conductor in each conduit. Bond to each device, box
and light fixture.
3. Phase conductors in 208-volt systems: Black, Red and Blue for Phases A, B,
and C, respectively.
4. Use other colors as necessary to identify controls and other special circuits,
or to match existing building color schemes.
16120-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
5. Where specified colors of insulated wire and cable are unavailable, such
conductors shall be color coded as specified by means of slip-on colored
plastic sleeves at pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, --
switchboards, and other terminal and splicing points. Sleeves shall be of
proper sizes to fit conductor insulation snugly. Tape is unacceptable.
J. Identifying Tags: Install nylon band identifying tags having marking pad to each
conductor identifying the designation and phase of each conductor. Marking
designations shall be field applied, utilizing a black pen having non-smearing,
waterproof ink, and shall be written neatly and clearly. Securely fasten tags to
cables, feeders, and power circuits in pull boxes, in lighting and distribution
panelboards, in disconnect switches, and in switchboards.
K. Bundling Conductors: Bundle conductors in panelboards, cabinets, switchboards, and
the like, using nylon traps, made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No.
10 in individual circuits. Smaller conductors may be bundled in larger groups.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS OR LESS
A. Install all conductors in raceways, unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Sizes
1. No conductors shall be smaller than No. 12, except for signal or control
circuits.
2. For receptacle and motor branch circuits, conductors shall be No. 12
minimum.
3. A maximum of six (6) current carrying conductors shall be permitted in a
conduit.
4. For home runs on 120-volt, 20-ampere branch circuits, where length of run
from panelboard to first outlet exceeds 100 lineal feet, use No. 10 conductors;
where length of run is 100 lineal feet of less, use No. 12 conductors.
5. Termination of multiple branch circuit conductors on circuit breakers is not
acceptable.
C. Type MC metal clad cables shall be acceptable to be installed in walls and ceilings
in conformance with the requirements of NEC 334 and shall be installed in a
workmanlike manner. Type MC cable shall be used 0nly for branch circuits and
branch circuit homeruns for lighting and specific and general purpose receptacles.
Type MC cable shall not be used for feeders or HVAC, elevator/escalator and kitchen
equipment branch circuits. The MC cable shall not be utilized within electrical
equipment rooms. Cable shall transition to rigid conduit prior to entering electrical
equipment rooms.
16120-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
3.3 WIRE PULLING
A. Pull Cord in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing
conductors, a suitable pull cord to facilitate future installation of wiring. Cord shall be
free from splices and shall have ample exposed length at each end. All cords shall
be nylon cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. Pull wires are not
acceptable.
B. Provide suitable installation of equipment to prevent abrasion and cutting of raceways
during the pulling of conductors. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable
non-metallic material to pull in feeders. Metallic ropes are prohibited.
C. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of insulated woven basket grips or by
pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. Do not use rope hitches, or bare steel
basket grips. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in
simultaneously.
D. All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, of non-conducting type, and shall be certified
by their manufacturer to be non-injurious to the insulation on which they are used.
E. Do not use cable lubricants on conductors of ungrounded circuits, which are
electrically monitored by ground detector system, since each lubricant may increase
the capacities to ground of these conductors.
END OF SECTION
16120-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-- CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and Division
1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
..... B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for coordination of
work.
· 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, material, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required for,
and reasonably incidental to, the providing of wiring devices, including related systems and
accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products specified
under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA
B. Federal Specification FS-W-C-596-F
C. Federal Specification FS-W-5-896-E
D. UL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Pass & Seymour
~' B. Hubbell
C. Leviton
D. Others as noted.
2.2 RECEPTACLES - GENERAL
A. Receptacles shall be constructed of high-impact resistant thermoplastic material. They shall
have a nylon face and thermoplastic back body. They shall be 2-pole, 3-wire with a green
equipment ground screw or an automatic grounding system attached to the strap. They shall
be UL listed and comply with Federal Specification WC-596-F or latest revision.
16140-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Specification Grade
1. Specification Grade receptacles shall be UL listed and comply with Federal
Specification WC-595-F or latest revision. The face shall be constructed of a high-
impact resistant thermoplastic. The contacts shall be a triple wipe, T-slot, one-piece
copper alloy design. The device shall have a green ground screw or an automatic
grounding system attached to the strap. The device shall be 20-ampere, 125-volts,
NEMA configuration 5-20R, back and side-wired, ivory, equal to Pass & Seymour
5352-1, or side-wired only, equal to Pass & Seymour 5342-1, unless noted otherwise.
2.3 RECEPTACLES - SPECIAL PURPOSE
A. Special purpose receptacles shall be constructed of a high-impact resistant thermoplastic
matedal and shall meet the UL and Federal Specification requirements that may apply to their
special category.
B. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI)
1. The GFCI receptacle shall be a feed-through type wired for single receptacle
protection thus not affecting receptacles downstream on the same circuit. They shall
be UL rated Class 1 with 5-milliampere ground fault tdp level and a 20-ampere feed-
through rating. GFCl receptacles shall be NEMA configuration 5-20R, ivory, equal
to Pass & Seymour 2091-Sl for side-wired only.
2.4 SWITCHES - GENERAL
A. Switches shall be UL listed and comply with Federal Specification WS-896-E or latest
revision. The body of the switch shall be made of an arc-resistant thermoset material. All
toggle switch handles shall be constructed of a thermoplastic material. All wall switches shall
be of the quiet AC type.
B. Switches shall be SPST, DPST, 3-way or 4-way as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Specification Grade
1. Specification grade AC switches shall be UL listed and comply with Federal
Specification WD-896-E or latest revision. The body of the switch shall be
constructed of an arc-resistant thermoset material. The toggle shall be constructed
of thermoplastic material. The contact arms shall be made of one-piece copper alloy
material. The device shall be 20-ampere, 120/277-volts AC, horsepower rated, side-
wired, ivory, equal to Pass & Seymour 521-1 series, unless noted otherwise.
2.5 SWITCHES - SPECIAL PURPOSE
A. Special purpose AC switches shall meet the UL and Federal Specifications requirements that
may apply to their special category. All AC switch bodies shall be constructed of an arc-
resistant thermoset material. All toggles shall be constructed of a thermoplastic material. All
decorative style rockers shall be constructed of a thermoset material.
16140-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Pilot Lighted
.... 1. Pilot lighted AC switches shall be UL listed and comply with Federal Specification
WS-896-E or latest revision. The toggle shall be either red, green or clear, as
indicated or required. The toggle shall glow when the switch is in the ON position.
_ The device shall be 20-ampere, 120/277-volts AC, back and side-wired, equal to
Pass & Seymour 20AC1-RPL series, unless noted otherwise.
2.6 WALL PLATES - GENERAL
A. Wall plates shall be provided for all switches, receptacles, blanks, telephone and special
purpose outlets. The wall plates shall be of suitable configuration for the device for which it
is to cover with color matched mounting screws. The plates must comply with the latest UL
and NEMA standards. Color of the wall plates shall match the device, unless noted
otherwise.
- B. Plastic
1. Plastic wall plates shall comply with the latest UL and NEMA standards.
2. Thermoplastic wall plates shall be non-combustible and high-impact resistant. They
shall be equal to Pass & Seymour's Sierra "P" line smooth plates.
C. Metal
1. Metal wall plates shall comply with the latest UL and NEMA standards.
2. The metal wall plates shall have a nominal thickness of 0.035 inch. They shall be
equal to Pass & Seymour's Sierra "S" line, Type 430 stainless steel' equal to Pass
& Seymour's Sierra "S-N" line, Type 302 stainless steel for corrosion resistance;
equal to Pass & Seymour's Sierra "B" for corrosion resistant brass plates.
2.7 WALL PLATES - SPECIAL PURPOSE
A. Weatherproof: Weatherproof covers shall comply with UL 514 and NEC article 410-57(b) or
latest revision. Weatherproof covers shall provide protection in wet and damp locations.
They shall have spring-loaded, self-closing covers to protect the enclosure from moisture,
dust and other contaminants.
1. Stainless steel weatherproof covers shall comply with UL 514 and NEC article 410-
57(b) or latest revision. The base plate, cover, hinge .pins, springs and screws shall
be stainless steel for corrosion resistance.
2. Thermoplastic weatherproof covers must comply with UL 514 and NEC article 410-
57(b) or latest revision, the body and cover shall be molded of a high-impact
resistant thermoplastic, with stainless steel screws and outdoor gasket.
16140-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES
A. Each wiring device shall be mounted in a metallic outlet box. In general, devices in finished
spaces shall be flush mounted and devices in unfinished spaces, i.e. mechanical and
electrical equipment rooms, shall be surface mounted. Vedfy the requirements of all spaces
with the Architect.
B. Wall Plates
1. Each device shall have a cover plate appropriate for the application.
2. Cover plates shall be installed true and plumb with building lines, mortar joints and
architectural features.
3. Adjacent devices shall be mounted under a common cover plate suitable for the
application.
C. Mount receptacles and special systems outlets above finish floor to the device centerline,
unless noted otherwise.
D. Place conductor under wiring device screw terminals and draw up snugly.
E. Mount switches above finish floor to the device centerline and 6" from a door strike, unless
noted or required otherwise.
F. Grounding: Grounding continuity shall be maintained between devices and metallic raceway
system in addition to the green equipment grounding conductor run with circuit conductors.
Care shall be taken when installing receptacles having isolated ground pole so as to not bond
the equipment ground conductor to the conduit system.
G. Wire each receptacle using correct polarity (i.e., neutral to neutral terminal, etc.).
H. Mount receptacles throughout the project with ground pole at the top of configuration when
mounted vertically, on the left when horizontally mounted.
END OF SECTION
16140-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16160 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and Division
1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
_ B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for coordination
of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of electrical cabinets and enclosures,
- including all related systems and accessories.
1.3 SUBMI'I-I'ALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
.... 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
B. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. UL 50 - Electrical Cabinets and Boxes.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Hoffman Engineering Company.
B. Square D Company.
2.2 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES
A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 and 3R steel enclosure.
B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key.
16160-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
~ CCRD 295254.00
C. Interior: Provide interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical
components; finish with white enamel.
D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. When required, field painting shall be
as specified by Division 9.
2.3 CABINETS
A. Boxes: Galvanized steel with gray baked enamel finish.
B. Box Size: As required or indicated.
C. Fronts: Steel, flush or surface type indicated with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed
to match branch circuit paneiboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. When required, field
painting shall be as specified by Division 9.
D. Provide metal barriers to separate compartments containing control wiring operating at less
than 50 volts from power wiring.
E. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment ....
2.4 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Terminal Blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4.
B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw
connectors, rated 600 volts.
C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting,
with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts.
D. Provide ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure.
2.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two of each cabinet key.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at
each corner.
D. , Install cabinet fronts plumb.
END OF SECTION
16160-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Division for coordination
of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, material, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of supporting devices, including related
systems and accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Unistrut Corp.
B. B-Line Systems, Inc.
C. Midland Ross-Kindorf
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Suspension Hangers
1. Suspension hangers for individual conduit runs shall be zinc plated formed steel
type.
B. Vertical Supports
1. Malleable iron one hole pipe straps shall be used for vertical runs.
C. Clamps
1. Beam clamps shall be used for bar joists and beams.
D. Anti-Vibration Hangers
1. Anti-vibration hangers shall be combination type having a double deflection
neoprene element in series with a steel coil spdng; double deflection of 0.30";
steel coil spdng shall be selected from a 1" static deflection series with a
minimum additional travel to solid of 1/2"; spring diameters shall be large
enough to permit 15 degree angular misalignment of the rod connecting the
hanger to the ceiling support without rubbing the hanger box.
16190-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CORD 295254.00
E. Light Fixture Hangers
1. Refer to Section 16500
F. Corrosive Areas: PVC; at factory apply a minimum of 10-mil-thick PVC coating, bonded
to metal, inside and outside.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hangers
1. Approved hangers and stiff leg supports shall be installed in quantity and size
as required to carry the weight of raceway and contents and shall be arranged
to prevent vibration transmission to the building and allow for raceway
movement.
2. Hangers shall be supported by means of uncoated solid steel rods which are
threaded to allow vertical adjustments. Lock nuts shall be provided in sufficient
number and location to lock all rod adjustments permanently at the adjusted
height. Two lock nuts shall be used unless the nut tightens against a threaded
socket. Minimum rod diameters shall be as follows:
NOMINAL CONDUIT SIZE ROD DIAMETER
1/2" through 2" 1/4
2-1/2" through 3" 3/8"
4" and 5" 1/2"
3. Hanger spacing shall be as required for proper and adequate support raceway,
but in no case shall be less than one hanger per 8'-0" of raceway length except
that conduit less than 1" diameter shall be supported at least every 6'-0".
4. Where numerous conduits are run parallel to one another, they may be
supported from a trapeze type hanger arrangement with strut bottom.
5. Anti-vibration type hangers shall be provided for equipment as required to
minimize vibration and/or as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Supports
1. Support of hangers shall be by means of sufficient quantities of individual after
set steel expansion shields, or beam clamps attached to structural steel.
2. Stiff-legs shall be furnished and installed in cases where support from overhead
structure is not possible.
3. Ceiling mounted lighting fixtures shall be supported from the building structure
at two opposite corners. The Contractor shall provide fixture hangers to
properly interface with the ceiling system.
16190-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
4. Furnish and install complete any additional structural support steel, brackets,
fasteners, etc., as required to adequately support all raceway and equipment.
5. Support of hangers from concrete slabs shall be by means of sufficient quantity
of "U" brackets attached with after set expansion shields and bolts.
' 6. Support of hangers from concrete tees shall be by means of sufficient quantity
of angle iron brackets attached with after set expansion shields and bolts.
END OF SECTION
16190-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for
coordination of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, material, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for and reasonably incidental to the providing of electrical identification, including
related accessories.
B. Provide labeling and identification as follows:
1. Labeling raceways, junction boxes and pull boxes.
2. Labeling each unit substation, switchboard, motor control center, panelboard,
motor starter, contactor, disconnect switch and other electrical equipment with
nameplate identifying the item of equipment and the
switchboard/panelboard/MCC serving the same.
3. Labeling wiring devices, pushbuttons, and other devices with identification as
to the circuit number and panelboard serving same.
4. Wire tags for wiring.
5. Labeling of three phase motors with rotation tag.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady Company
B. Panduit Corporation
C. Thomas & Betts
2.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Raceway and Junction Box/Pull Box
1. Feeder and individual branch circuit raceways shall be identified with its voltage
rating.
16195-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
~ CCRD 295254.00
2. At all junction boxes and pull boxes, including branch circuit boxes, identify
each conduit entering and leaving the box and designate if of different voltages
and/or systems. Identification shall be with a permanent marking pen on the
top of 4" x 4" junction box covers or on the back of an outlet box cover plate
identifying the circuits or systems within the conduit. Pull boxes shall be
provided with a nameplate stating voltage and system served.
B. Nameplates
1. Nameplates shall be black engraved surface on white core for normal power
circuits and red engraved surface on white core for emergency only power
circuits.
2. Provide for each unit substation, switchboard, panelboard, transformer, motor
control center, UPS module, battery disconnect and any other similar equipment
furnished under this Division identification as to its given name, rating and
voltage.
3. Provide for each feeder protective device in each unit substation, switchboard,
panelboard, motor control center, starter, disconnect switch, and any other
similar equipment furnished under this Division, identification as to its specific
function.
4. Nameplates shall be laminated, white core, plastic with beveled edges.
Lettering shall be machine-engraved, not less than 1/4" high, cut through the
black or red surface to the white core.
C. Wire Tags
1. Wire tags shall be self-adhesive type having letters and numerals indicating
panelboard and circuit number.
D. Rotation Tags
1. Rotation tags shall be brass or aluminum tag securely attached to equipment.
E. Wiring Device Plates
1. On the back side of wiring device wall cover plates identify with a permanent
marking pen the branch circuit number the device is served from.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surfaces
1. Surfaces to receive labels or nameplates shall be carefully prepared in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
16195-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
3.2 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be properly attached to identify all switchboards, panelboards, feeder
circuit breakers, disconnect switches, pullboxes and other equipment and cabinets
furnished under Division 16.
-- 1. Nameplates shall identify the item and from where it is fed and the circuit
number.
_ 3.3 LABELS
A. Raceways
1. Raceways 2" and larger, exposed and above accessible ceilings shall have
labels identifying the system and/or voltage contained within.
" 2. Raceway smaller than 2" shall be identified with permanent marking pen as to
system and/or voltage contained within.
_ 3. Identification shall be provided at a minimum of every 50', at each end if less
than 50', and a minimum of once per room or space through which it passes.
B. Outlet Wallplates, Junction and Pullboxes
1. Each outlet shall be identified on the back of the coverplate with permanent
marking pen as to the panel and circuit breaker that the outlet is served from.
2. Each junction box shall be identified on the outside of the cover with permanent
marking pen as to what system and circuits are contained within.
3.4 WlRETAGS
A. Wiretags shall be applied to each conductor or cable within switchboards, panelboards,
'- motor control centers, cabinets, junction and pullboxes, devices and other equipment
identifying the panel and circuit from which the conductors are terminated.
END OF SECTION
16195-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
'"' CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
-- A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and Division
1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
_ B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for coordination
of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of disconnect switches, including all related
' systems and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
B. Provide outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, amperage,
horsepower and short circuit.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Switches shall be manufactured in accordance with the following standards:
1. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead Front Switches
2. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed Switches
3. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
_ PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
-- A. Square D Company.
B. General Electric.
C. Westinghouse.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Switches shall be heavy duty type.
16440-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2.3 SWITCH INTERIOR
A. Switches shall have switch blades which are visible when the switch is OFF and the cover
is open.
B. Lugs shall be front removable and UL listed for 60°C or 75°C conductors 30-100 ampere,
75°C conductors 200 ampere and up.
C. Current carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion.
D. Switches shall have removable arc suppressor to facilitate easy access to line side lugs.
E. Switches shall have provisions for a field installable electrical interlock.
2.4 SWITCH MECHANISM
A. Switch operating mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break such that, during normal
operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being
restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has
started.
B. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover.
C. Provisions for padlocking the switch in the OFF position with at least three padlocks shall
be provided.
D. The handle position shall travel at least 90° between OFF and ON positions to clearly
distinguish and indicate handle position.
E. Switches shall have a dual cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of
the switch cover when the switch is ON and prevent turning the switch ON when the cover
is open. The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated overdde but
the override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism. The tool used to
override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter the enclosure in
order to override the interlock.
2.5 SWITCH ENCLOSURES
A. Switch covers shall be attached with welded pin-type hinges (Type 1) or top-hinged,
attached with removable screws and securable in the open position (Type 3R).
B. The enclosure shall be finished with gray baked enamel paint which is electrodeposited
on cleaned, phosphate pre-treated steel (Type 1) or gray baked enamel paint which is
electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphate pre-treated galvannealed steel (Type 3R).
C. The enclosure shall have ON and OFF markings stamped into the cover.
D. The operating handle shall be provided with a dual colored, red/black position indication.
E. Switches shall have provisions to accept up to three 3/8" hasp padlocks to lock the
operating handle in the OFF position.
16440-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
F. Tangential knockouts shall be provided to facilitate ease of conduit entry (Type 1).
G. Type 3R enclosure shall contain no knockouts. Supply watertight hubs.
2.6 SWITCH RATINGS
A. Switches shall be horsepower rated.
B. The UL listed short circuit current rating of the switches shall be: 200,000 rms symmetrical
amperes when used with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses 30-600 ampere
employing appropriate fuse rejection schemes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
END OF SECTION
16440-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for
coordination of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of the grounding systems.
B. Exposed metallic parts of the electrical system which are not intended to carry current,
including system components such as busducts, switchboards, panelboards, and
raceway systems, and including grounding conductors and neutral conductors of the
various wiring systems, shall be grounded in accordance with NEC requirements.
1.3 GOVERNING AUTHORITIES
A. All grounding system shall comply with applicable State and Local Codes and
Ordinances, with the requirements of other authorities having jurisdiction, with NEC and
applicable NFPA Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Grounding conductors shall be annealed copper standard conductors. Conductor shall
be bare or insulated and of the sizes indicated or required by the NEC.
2.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Provide copper clad steel ground rods 3/4 inch diameter 10 feet long designed for
driven installation.
2.3 GROUNDING CONNECTORS
A. Provide exothermic type chemical welding process for joining of all conductors to
ground rods, grounding plates and splicing of conductors.
16450-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 POWER SYSTEMS GROUNDING
A. Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in
accordance with the National Electric Code and subject to the following additional
requirements.
B. Size grounding conductors in accordance with Tables 250-94 and 250-95 of the NEC.
C. Connect the service neutral and equipment ground to a common point within the
metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting means. Equipment
grounds and the identified neutral of the wiring system shall not be interconnected
beyond this point in the interior wiring system. From the common point of connection
of the service neutral and the equipment ground, run in non-magnetic conduit a
grounding electrode conductor without joint or splice to the grounding electrode system
and connect it thereto with an approved bolted pressure clamp.
D. The grounding electrode system shall be formed by bonding together the following to
the main service ground bus with a #3/0 green insulated "THWN" copper ground
conductor in non-magnetic conduit to provide a common grounding electrode system.
1. Underground main metallic water pipe, connect ahead of the first valve, provide
a bonding jumper across water meter (in accordance with NEC 250-81a).
2. Structural steel building frame, connect to nearest vertical member originating
at a footing (in accordance with NEC 250~81b).
3. Concrete-encased electrode consisting of twenty feet (20') of minimum #4
AWG bare copper conductor encased in a footing or foundation in direct
contact with the earth (in accordance with NEC 250-81c).
4. A made electrode consisting of a single ground rod. The rod shall be installed
a minimum of 12" below finished grade with an accessible ground rod test well.
E. Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all conduits
and/or Iocknuts wrench-tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur,
provide bonding jumpers. Wherever flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a
green insulated ground jumper installed in the flexible conduit.
F. Provide grounding bushings on all raceways terminating within all enclosures
constructed of separate enclosure panels which are not integrally welded together.
Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the enclosure, ground
bus and equipment grounding strap where one occurs.
16450-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254,00
G. Provide a separate green-insulated equipment grounding conductor, with insulation of
the same rating as the phase conductors, for all feeders and branch circuits. Install the
grounding conductors in the raceway with related phase and neutral conductors.
'- Where parallel conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor
in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors to ground terminals at each end
of the run, to the end that there will be no uninterrupted grounding circuit from the
_ point of ground fault back to a point of connection of the equipment ground and system
neutral.
3.2 GROUNDING SYSTEM TESTING
A. In addition to the tests outlined in Section 16950 perform the following:
-- 1. Test the continuity of, and the proper connection of, each ground conductor
and system, to assure that the grounding system is complete and uninterrupted.
Testing shall be performed using laboratory-accuracy test instruments of
suitable design for the tests to be performed. Test instruments shall be
provided under Division 16.
2. Make proper notification of testing dates and times in writing to the Owner so
'- that he may, at his discretion, witness any of the tests. A complete record of
each test shall be recorded, including the time and date of test, and the time
and date submitted for acceptance.
3. Test grounding conductors, phase conductors and neutral conductors for
continuity and for possible damage to insulation. Each such conductor shall be
tested for insulation from ground and from other conductors.
B. Any portions of the installations which fail to pass these tests shall be replaced,
repaired or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, and
- completely retested to show proper conformity.
._ END OF SECTION
16450-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and Division
1 Specification Sections apply to Work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with other Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for
coordination of the Work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of distribution and lighting and appliance
panelboards, including all related systems and accessories.
1.3 SUBMI'I-rALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
B. Submittals shall include drawings that contain overall panel dimensions, intedor mounting
dimensions, and wiring gutter dimensions. The location of the main, branches, solid
neutral and ground shall be clearly shown.
C. Provide time/current characteristic trip curves for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The panelboards, circuit breakers and switches referenced herein shall be designed and
manufactured according to the latest revision of the following standards.
A. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards
B. NEMA PB 1.1 Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
C. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breaker and Molded Case Switch
D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches
E. UL 50 - Boxes and Cabinets
F. UL 67 - Panelboards
G. UL 98 - Enclosed and Deadfront Switches
H. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
16470-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
I. Federal Specification W-P-115B Type I Class 1
J. Federal Specification W-P-115B Type II Class 1
K. Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN - Molded Case Circuit Breakers
L. Federal Specification W-C-865C - Fusible Switches
M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
N. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Panelboards shall be manufactured in accordance with standards previously listed.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time pedod for repair
or replacement.
B. Handle carefully to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and
finish.
C. Store in a clean, dry environment. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional
heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect enclosures from dirt, water, construction
debds, and traffic. -
1.7 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer shall provide installation instructions and NEMA Standards Publication PB
1.1 (Operations and Maintenance Manual) with each panelboard.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D
B. Siemens
C. General Electric
D. Westinghouse
16470-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Circuit Breaker Distribution Panelboards
1. Interior
-- a. Shall be rated 600 volts AC or 250 volts DC maximum. Continuous main
current ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Panelboard bus
current ratings shall be determined by heat-rise tests conducted in
accordance with UL 67.
b. Provide UL Listed short circuit current ratings as indicated on the
Drawings.
c. The panelboard interior shall have three flat bus bars stacked and aligned
vertically with glass reinforced polyester insulators laminated between
~_ phases. The molded polyester insulators shall support and provide phase
isolation to the entire length of bus. There shall be one (1) continuous
bus bar per phase; each bus bar having a pair of exposed longitudinal
edge portions providing non-specific mounting means for main and branch
-- circuit breakers specified herein.
d. The bussing shall be fully rated with sequentially phased branch
-- distribution. Panelboard bussing rated 100 - 600 amperes shall be plated
Aluminum. Bussing rated 800 amperes and above shall be plated copper.
The entire interleaved assembly shall be contained between two (2)
_ U-shaped steel channels, permanently secured to a galvanized steel
mounting pan by tamper-resistant fasteners.
e. Intedor trim shall be of dead-front construction to shield user from all
- energized parts. Main breaker and main lug interiors shall be field
convertible for top or bottom incoming feed.
- f. Equipment ground bar shall be bonded. Ground bar shall be copper.
Solid neutral shall be equipped with a full capacity grounding strap for
service entrance applications.
g. Metal nameplates shall contain system information, catalog number or
factory order number. Nameplate shall be secured to the dead-front with
rivets or screws. Sticker or foil nameplates are not acceptable. Interior
-- wiring diagram, neutral wiring diagram, UL listed label and short circuit
current rating shall be displayed on the interior. Leveling provisions shall
be provided for flush mounted applications.
2. Molded Case Circuit Breakers
a. Common Characteristics
1) Circuit breakers shall be constructed in accordance with the
following standards:
-- a) UL 489
16470-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
_ CCRD 295254.00
b) Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN
c) NEMA AB1
d) IEC 157-1
2) Circuit breakers shall be molded case constructed using glass
reinforced polyester insulating material providing superior
dielectric strength. Current carry components shall be completely
isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area.
3) Circuit breakers shall have an overcenter, trip-free, toggle
operating mechanism which will provide quick-make, quick-break
contact action. The circuit breaker shall have common tripping of
all poles.
4) Circuit breakers shall have a push-to-trip button for maintenance
and testing purposes.
5) Circuit breaker escutcheon shall have International I/O markings,
in addition to standard ON/OFF markings. Circuit breaker handle
accessories shall provide provisions for locking handle in the "ON"
or "OFF" position.
6) Breaker faceplate shall indicate rated ampacity. Breaker faceplate
shall indicate UL and IEC certification standards with applicable
voltage systems and corresponding AIC ratings.
7) Circuit breakers shall be factory sealed and shall have a date
code on the face of the circuit breaker. Poles shall be labeled
with respective phase designations.
8) Standard construction circuit breakers shall be UL listed for
reverse connection without restrictive line or load markings.
Circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting and operating in
any position.
9) Circuit breakers shall be equipped with line terminal jaws. In the
event of a short circuit condition, the increased magnetic flux shall
cause the jaws to grip the supply bus more firmly. Circuit breaker
jaws shall be protected by an impact resistant molded shroud.
10) Circuit breakers shall not require any additional external mounting
hardware. Circuit breakers shall be held in mounted position by
a self-contained bracket secured to the mounting pan by
fasteners. Each individual circuit breaker shall be capable of
being mounted independently. Circuit breakers of different frame
sizes shall be capable of being mounted across from each other.
11) Lugs shall be UL listed to accept solid or stranded copper and
aluminum conductors. Lugs shall be suitable for 90°C rated wire,
sized according to the 75°C temperature rating per NEC Table
310-16. Lug body shall be bolted in place, snap-in designs are
not acceptable.
b. Thermal Magnetic Molded Case Circuit Breakers _
1) Circuit breakers shall have ampere ratings and minimum short
circuit current ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
2) Circuit breakers shall have a permanent tdp unit with thermal and
magnetic trip elements in each pole. Thermal elements shall be
factory calibrated to operate in a 40°C ambient environment.
Thermal elements shall be ambient compensating above 40° C.
16470-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00 _
3) Two and three pole circuit breakers shall have an intemal
common trip crossbar to provide simultaneous tripping. Circuit
breaker frame sizes above 100 amperes shall have a single
-- magnetic trip adjustment located on the front of the breaker which
allows the user to simultaneously select the desired trip level of
all poles.
_ 4) Standard circuit breakers up to 250 amperes at 600 VAC shall be
UL listed with HACR ratings.
3. Enclosures
a. Type 1 Boxes
-- 1) Shall be galvanized steel constructed in accordance with UL 50
requirements.
2) Boxes shall have removable blank endwalls and interior mounting
_ studs. Interior support bracket shall be provided for ease of
interior installation.
b. Type 1 Trim Fronts
1) Trim front steel shall meet strength and rigidity requirements per
UL 50 standards. Shall have an ANSI medium/light gray enamel
-- over cleaned phosphatized steel.
2) Trim front shall be 4-piece surface.
B. Fusible Distribution Panelboards
1. Interior
-' a. Shall be rated for 600 volts AC or 250 volts DC. Continuous main current
ratings are indicated on the Drawings. Panelboard bus current ratings
shall be determined by heat-rise test conducted in accordance with UL 67.
b. Short circuit current ratings shall be provided as indicated on the
Drawings.
c. Main switch and main lug panelboards shall be suitable for use as service
equipment and shall comply with the requirements of UL 67 and NEC
Articles 230-F and G.
d. The panelboard bus material shall be Copper and be plated. The bussing
shall be fully rated allowing high ampacity switches to be mounted in any
_ position throughout the interior.
e. Main lugs and solid neutral shall be mounted in the mains compartment,
Main lugs compartment shall be isolated by a bolted cover to shield user
from energized parts. Branch mounted main lugs will not be acceptable,
Main lugs shall be field convertible for top or bottom incoming feed.
16470-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
f. Solid neutral shall be equipped with a full capacity grounding strap for
service entrance applications. Gutter mounted solid neutral will not be
acceptable.
g. Metal nameplates shall be secured to dead-front with rivets or screws.
Sticker or foil nameplates are not acceptable.
2. Fusible Switches
a. The operating mechanism shall be spring driven, with quick-make,
quick-break action. Operating handles shall be flange mounted, as an
integral part in the operating mechanism. Switch contact shall be
knife-blade and jaw construction. Switch shall include visible blades as a
positive blade status indicator. There shall be a visible air gap between
the line side jaws and the knife-blade with the switch in the OFF (open)
position.
b. Switches shall be secured to the bus with spring reinforced jaw
assemblies. In the event of a short circuit condition, the increased
magnetic flux shall cause the jaws to grip the bus more firmly._
c. Fusible switch units shall be equipped with all required mounting brackets
and guides.
d. Switch shall have dual mechanical cover interlocks to prevent the opening
of the cover when the switch is "ON". The cover interlock also prevents
the switch from being turned "ON" with the cover open. Interlock may be
manually overridden for testing purposes. Switch cover shall include a
hasp by which cover can be padlocked in the closed position. The
operating handle shall feature positive lock-off means by providing _
provisions for three (3) 3/8" padlocks.
e. There shall be two forms of visible ON/OFF indication: The dual-color
operating handle and the large steel ON/OFF nameplate with International
markings. The universal nameplate shall be readable regardless of the
switch orientation. Each nameplate shall furnish an easily removable
circuit directory card.
f. Switch fuse clips shall accept type Class R fuses through 600 amperes
and Class L from 601 amperes through 800 amperes. Fusible switches
shall have fuse pullers on 30 - 100 ampere switches as standard
construction. Fuse pullers shall disengage the line side of fuse only.
g. Switches shall have standard and maximum horsepower ratings. -,
h. Fusible switches shall accept the following UL listed field installable
accessories: Compression lugs, Copper mechanical lugs, and Electrical
interlocks.
16470-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
3. Enclosures
a. Type 1 Boxes
1 ) Boxes - Shall be galvanized steel constructed in accordance with
UL 50 requirements. Boxes shall have removable blank endwalls
and interior mounting studs.
b. Type 1 Trim Fronts
1) Trim front steel shall meet strength and rigidity requirements per
UL 50 standards. Shall have an ANSI medium/light gray enamel
over cleaned phosphatized steel.
2)Trim front shall be 4-piece surface.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A. Lighting and appliance panelboards shall be rated for 240 volts AC as indicated on the
Drawings. Continuous main current ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
Minimum short circuit current ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Intedor
1. Provide one (1) continuous bus bar per phase. Each bus bar shall have
sequentially phased branch circuit connectors suitable for plug-on or bolt-on
branch circuit breakers. The bussing shall be fully rated. Panelboard bus current
ratings shall be determined by heat-rise tests conducted in accordance with UL 67.
Bussing rated 100 - 400 amperes shall be plated Aluminum. Bussing rated for
600 amperes shall be copper as standard construction. Panelboards shall be
suitable for use as Service Equipment when application requirements comply with
UL 67 and NEC Articles 230-F and G.
2. All current carrying parts shall be insulated from ground and phase-to-phase by
Noryl high dielectric strength thermoplastic or equivalent.
3. Split solid neutral shall be plated and located in the mains compartment up to 225
amperes so all incoming neutral cable may be of the same length.
4. Interior trim shall be of dead-front construction to shield user from energized parts.
Dead-front trim shall have pre-formed twistouts covering unused mounting space.
5. Metal nameplates shall be secured to dead-front with rivets or screws. Sticker or
foil nameplates are not permitted. Interior wiring diagram, neutral wiring diagram,
UL listed label and short circuit current rating shall be displayed on the interior,
6. Interiors shall be field convertible for top or bottom incoming feed. Main and
sub-feed circuit breakers shall be vertically mounted. Main lug interiors up to 400
amperes shall be field convertible to main breaker. Interior leveling provisions
shall be provided for flush mounted applications.
6470-7 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
C. Branch Circuit Breakers
1. Shall be molded case circuit breakers. Breakers shall be UL listed with amperage
ratings, interrupting ratings, and number of poles as indicated on the panel
schedules.
2. Molded case branch circuit breakers shall have Bolt-on type bus connectors.
3. Circuit breakers shall have an overcenter toggle mechanism which will provide
quick-make, quick-break contact action. Circuit breakers shall have thermal and
magnetic trip elements in each pole. Two and three pole circuit breakers shall
have an internal common trip crossbar to provide simultaneous tripping.
4. There shall be two forms of visible trip indication. The breaker handle shall reside
in a "TRIPPED" position between "ON" and "OFF". In addition, there shall be a
VlSI-TRIP indicator appearing in the clear window of the circuit breaker housing.
5. The exposed faceplates of all branch circuit breakers shall be flush with one
another.
6. Lugs shall be UL listed to accept solid or stranded copper and aluminum
conductors. Lugs shall be suitable for 90°C rated wire, sized according to the
75° C temperature rating per NEC Table 310-16.
D. Enclosures
1. Type 1 Boxes
a. Shall be galvanized steel constructed in accordance with UL 50
requirements.
b. Boxes shall have removable endwalls with knockouts located on one end.
Boxes shall have welded interior mounting studs. Interior mounting
brackets are not required.
2. Type 1 Trim Fronts
a. Trim front steel shall meet strength and dgidity requirements per UL 50
standards. Shall have an ANSI gray enamel over cleaned phosphatized
steel.
b. Trim fronts shall be 1-piece with door. Mounting shall be flush or surface
as indicated on the Drawings.
c. Panelboards rated 225 amperes and below shall have flat fronts with
concealed door hinges and trim screws. Front shall not removable with
the door locked. Panelboards rated above 225 amperes shall have fronts
with trim clamps and concealed door hinges. Trim front doors shall have
rounded corners and edges shall be free of burrs.
16470-8 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
d. Front shall have cylindrical tumbler type lock with catch and spring loaded
stainless steel door pull. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. Two
(2) keys shall be provided with each lock. A clear plastic directory card
-- holder shall be mounted on the inside of door.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, NEMA PB 1.1
and NEC standards.
B. Anchor panelboards to structure and make branch circuit connections.
C. Coordinate the panelboard bus ratings and circuit breaker coordination rating with the
available fault current.
D. Provide engraved laminated nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect complete installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding.
B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the
panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing
for multi-wire branch circuits
C. Check tightness of bolted connections, and circuit breaker connections using calibrated
torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written specifications.
END OF SECTION
16470-9 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
-- A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for
coordination of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, material, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of overcurrent protection devices,
_ including all related systems and accessories.
1.3 SUBMI'I-rALS
-- A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
-- B. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including
time-current curves.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).
- B. NEMA FU I - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
C. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
D. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
E. UL 943 - Standard for flGround Fault Circuit Interrupters.
F. IEC 157-1 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Part 1: Circuit Breakers.
~ G. Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit
and Service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Overcurrent protection devices shall be constructed and tested in accordance with
NEMA standards and shall be UL listed and labeled.
16475-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295188.00
2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit breaker manufacturer shall be the same as the panelboard/switchboard
manufacturer.
B. Refer to specific switchboard, panelboard and motor control center specification
sections.
2.3 FUSES
A. Acceptable Manufactures
1. Bussmann
2. Gould Shawmut
3. Littlefuse
B. 600 Ampere and Below 600 VAC or Less
1. Fuses shall have 200,000 RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting capacity at
600 VAC or less, current limiting type; time delay characteristics; UL Class
RK1.
C. Above 600 Ampere 600 VAC or Less
1. Fuses shall have 200,000 RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting capacity at
600 VAC or less; current limiting type; time delay characteristic. UL Class
L.
2.4 SELF-CONTAINED CIRCUIT BREAKER ENCLOSURES
A. Self-contained breaker enclosures shall be padlockable NEMA 1, except for units in
damp or wet areas which shall be NEMA 3R enclosure with conduit hubs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATIONS
A. Enclosures for self-contained units shall be securely mounted to wall and shall be
level and true. Mounting height shall be plus 54" above finish floor to center of
breaker unless otherwise.
B. Furnish a number of spare fuses equaling 10% of quantity installed but not less than
three (3) fuses of each type and rating.
C. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type and size are easily read.
END OF SECTION
16475-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295188.00
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and Division
1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for coordination
of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, material, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of the lighting as indicated.
B. Fixtures shall be complete with lamps, ballasts and related auxiliary equipment and
accessories necessary to the intended operation, including mounting devices required for
each type of installation.
C. Specific responsibilities of the Contractor shall include: Receipt, handling, installation,
lamping, focusing, and final cleaning.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LAMPS
A. Equip each lighting fixture with a full set of new lamps of the types shown and specified
herein. Lamps shall be manufactured by General Electric, Phillips, or Osram-Sylvania,
except where scheduled otherwise.
B. Incandescent Lamps: In general, they shall be inside frosted, energy-saving style
designed for 130-volt operation with a rated life of 2500 hours (extended service). Where
reflector style lamps are scheduled, furnish beam pattern indicated. Special purpose
incandescent and incandescent quartz lamps shall be of style, color, wattage, and
configuration as scheduled as recommended by the iuminaire manufacturer.
C. Fluorescent Lamps: In general, they shall be cool-white color, 48-inch length, T-8, rapid
start, energy-spacing lamps with an initial nominal output of 2,850 lumens at 32 watts, and
an average rated life of 20,000 hours. For special purpose fluorescent lamps, color types,
lamp length, socket configuration, and illumination output shall be as scheduled, and
specified herein.
16500-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
D. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps: Shall be of the type and wattages scheduled.
Where metal halide lamps are indicated, self extinguishing lamps shall be furnished where
available in that wattage range. ~-
E. Special lamps shall be as indicated or required for the lighting fixtures scheduled.
2.2 BALLASTS --
A. Fluorescent Ballasts: Shall be rapid start, energy saving, Class "P" with thermal protection,
high power factor, UL listed and ETL certified and so labelled, having an "A" sound-rating,
and design for use with one or two energy-saving lamps. Where integral to lighting fixtures
subjected to the outdoors or unheated spaces, ballast shall be designed for "low
temperature" starting and operation of 0 degrees F.
B. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: In general, shall be regulator type designed to
start and operate the specified lamp combination with a maximum wattage variation of +/-
5% with a variation input voltage of +/-10%. Unit shall be designed for reliable start and --
operation to an ambient temperature of 20 degrees F. At rated line voltage, the power
factor shall be not less than 95%. Ballast primary current during starting shall not exceed
current during lamp operation. Voltage and lamp characteristics shall be as indicated.
2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Provide a lighting fixture complete with lamps, ballasts, and other required appurtenances
for each lighting outlet shown. Light fixtures shall be as described in the "Lighting Fixture
Schedule". Each unit shall be furnished with all mounting and tdm accessories to suit the
specific services applied. Finishes shall be factory-standard except where scheduled
otherwise.
B. Provide lighting fixtures in accordance with the designations and descriptions in schedule.
Where a single manufacturer and associated catalog number is scheduled, it is to establish
a desired type and standard of quality.
C. All lighting fixtures shall bear the UL label.
D. Submit shop drawings following procedures described in Division 1.
E. Where lighting fixtures are scheduled with plastic lenses, provide virgin acrylic lenses
having a thickness of 0.125 inches, unless noted otherwise.
F. Exit lighting fixtures shall comply with NFPA 101 and shall have "chevron" type arrows
external to the lettering.
16500-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures shall be installed in symmetrical patterns with ceiling grids, partitions, air
conditioning outlets, smoke detectors, sound system speakers and similar devices. The
-- locations are of a general nature, and shall not be scaled for locations. Refer to
architectural reflected ceiling plans, where these are provided, for specific locations of
lighting fixtures. The reflected ceiling plans shall be the governing documents for fixture
locations.
B. Stem-mounted fixtures shall have stems installed straight and perpendicular to the
mounting surfaces.
C. Each luminaire shall be supported at no fewer than two (2) points on each side for fixtures
up to 48 inches in length.
D. The weight of each fixture shall rest only on the fixture support system and attached to
ceiling channels. Provide hangers, cables, supports, channels, frames and brackets of
each kind required to erect this equipment safely in place.
E. The mounting brackets shall be installed to overlap the ceiling support channels in order
to prevent the channels from shifting from underneath the fixtures.
F. The mounting brackets shall lock in position so that the bottom of each fixture is flush with
the underside of the ceiling, without additional leveling adjustments.
G. The lighting fixture installations shall not interfere with the installation or removal of
adjacent ceiling panels.
H. Wire lay-in type fixtures in ceilings using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling
panels; install conductors, including a grounding conductor, in flexible metallic conduit
from box to fixture.
3.2 CLEANING
_ A. At the completion of the work leave all fixtures free of all dirt, duct, grease, spots and
debris, with all glass and plastic clean and unbroken.
END OF SECTION
16500-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
-_ CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16620 - EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
_ A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and Division
1 Specification Sections apply to Work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with other Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for
coordination of the Work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of the emergency/standby power system,
_ including all related systems and accessories.
B. Ratings
-- 1. Engine-Generator Set Ratings: 35 kW,
44 kVA at 0.8 PF,
Standby rating.
2. System Voltage: 277/480 WYE Volts AC,
Three phase,
_ Four-wire,
60 hertz.
3. Site Conditions: Altitude 500 FT
'- Temperatures up to 110 degrees F
1.3 SUBMI'I-rALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
B. As a minimum for all equipment specified provide the following:
1. Specification and data sheets.
2. Manufacturer's certification of prototype testing.
3. Manufacturefs published warranty documents.
4. Shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with certified overall and
interconnection point dimensions.
5. Interconnection wiring diagrams showing all external connections required; with
field wiring terminals marked in a consistent point-to-point manner.
16620-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
6. ManufactureCs installation instructions.
1.4WARRANTY
A. Shall be provided for all products against defects in material and workmanship, for one
year period from the start-up date, per the manufacturer's base coverage limited warranty.
1.5 The supplier shall be the manufacturer's authorized distributor, who shall provide initial start-up
services, conduct field acceptance testing and warranty service. The supplier shall have 24-hour
service availability and factory-trained service technicians authorized to do warranty service on all
warrantable products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Cummins/Onan
B. Caterpillar
C. Spectrum
D. Kohler
2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
A. Diesel Engine-Generator Set: 4-cycle, 1800 rpm, diesel engine generator set with Iow _
reactance brushless generator, torque-matched excitation, 3-phase RMS sensing automatic
voltage regulator, set-mounted control panel, and high ambient cooling system (50 degrees
C).
1. Prototype Tests and Evaluation: Prototype tests shall have been done on a
complete and functional unit, component level type tests will not substitute for this
requirement.
2. Performance
a. Voltage regulation shall be +/- 0.5 percent for any constant load between
no load and rated load.
b. Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to
steady state rated load.
c. The diesel engine-generator set shall be capable of single step load pick
up of 100% nameplate kW and power factor, less applicable derating
factors, with the engine-generator set at operating temperature.
d. Motor starting capability shall be a minimum of 131 kVA. The generator
set shall be capable of sustaining a minimum of 90% of rated no load
voltage with the specified kVA load at near zero power factor applied to
the generator set.
e. Maximum transient voltage dip shall not exceed 30 percent below rated
on application of the single largest surge load step.
16620-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
3. AC Generator
a. The AC generator shall be; synchronous, four pole, revolving field,
-- dripproof construction, single prelubricated sealed beadng, air cooled by
a direct drive centrifugal blower fan, and directly connected to the engine
with flexible drive disc(s).
_ b. All insulation system components shall meet NEMA MG1 temperature
limits for Class H insulation system. Actual temperature rise measured by
resistance method at full load shall not exceed 130 degrees Centigrade.
c. The generator shall be capable of delivering rated output (kVA) at rated
frequency and power factor, at any voltage not more than 5 percent above
or below rated voltage.
-- 4. Engine-Generator Set Control
a. The control shall have automatic remote start capability from a panel
_ mounted 3-position (Stop, Run, Remote) switch.
b. Provide cycle cranking of 15 SEC (ON)/15 SEC (OFF) for three attempts
(75 SEC). If engine fails to start lockout the engine and indicate
overcrank on alarm status panel.
- c. The control shall shutdown and lockout upon: failure to start (overcrank),
overspeed, Iow lubricating oil pressure, high engine temperature, or
operation of a remote manual stop station. A panel mounted switch shall
- reset the engine monitor and test all the lamps. Lamp indications on the
control panel shall include:
1) Overcrank shutdown - red
._ 2) Overspeed shutdown - red
3) Low oil pressure shutdown - red
4) High engine temperature shutdown - red
5) High engine temperature prealarm - yellow
- 6) Low engine oil pressure prealarm - yellow
7) Low coolant temperature - yellow
8) Low fuel - yellow
- 9) Run - green
10) Controls not in automatic - flashing red
11) Auxiliary (2 each) - red. (Customer identified)
d. The enclosed control panel shall be mounted on the generator set with
vibration isolators. A front control panel illumination lamp with ON/OFF
switch shall be provided. Control panel mounted indicating meters and
devices shall include:
- 1) Engine Oil Pressure Gauge, Coolant Temperature Gauge, DC
Voltmeter and Running Time Meter (hours);
2) Voltage adjusting rheostat, locking screwdriver type, to adjust
~ voltage +/- 5% from rated value;
3) Analog AC Ammeter, dual range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy;
4) Analog AC Ammeter, dual range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy;
5) Analog Frequency/RPM meter, 45-65 Hz, 1350-1950 RPM, 90
degree scale, +/- 0.6 Hz accuracy;
16620-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
6) Seven position phase selector switch with OFF position to allow
meter display of current and voltage in each phase. When
supplied with reconnectable generators, the meter panel shall be
reconnectable for the voltage specified.
5. Engine
a. The engine shall be diesel, 4 cycle, 1800 RPM, radiator and fan cooled.
b. An electronic governor shall provide automatic frequency regulation
adjustable from isochronous to 5% drop. The governor shall have
provision for paralleling with the addition of load sharing controls.
c. The engine shall be cooled by a mounted close loop radiator system rated
for full load operation in 122 degrees F (50 degrees C) ambient as
measured at the generator air inlet. Radiators shall be provided with a
duct adaptor flange. The cooling system shall be filled with 50/50
ethylene glycol/water mixture by the equipment supplier. Rotating parts
shall be guarded against accidental contact.
6. Engine Accessory Equipment: The engine-generator set shall include the engine
accessories as follows:
a. An electric starter(s) capable of three complete cranking cycles without
overheating, before overcrank shutdown (75 seconds).
b. Positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure, lubrication oil pump. Full
flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable spin-on canister elements and
dipstick oil level indicator.
c. An engine driven, mechanical, positive displacement fuel pump. Fuel filter
with replaceable spin-on canister element.
d. Replaceable dry element air cleaner with restriction indicator. Flexible
supply and return fuel lines. --
7. Base: The engine-generator set shall be mounted on a heavy duty steel base to
maintain alignment between components. The base shall incorporate a battery
tray with holdown clamps within the rails.
8. Generator Set Auxiliary Equipment and Accessories:
a. Engine mounted, thermostatically controlled, water jacket heater(s) for
each engine. The heater(s) shall be sized as recommended by the
equipment supplier. Heater voltage shall be as required. --
b. Starting and Control Batteries: Starting batteries, lead acid type, 24 volt
DC, sized as recommended by the generator set manufacturer, shall be
supplied for each generator set with battery cables and connectors. --H
C. Battery Charger: A 10 amp voltage regulated battery charger shall be
provided for each engine-generator set. Input AC voltage and DC output
voltage shall be as required. Chargers shall be equipped with float, taper
and equalize charge settings. Operational monitors shall provide visual
output along with individual form C contacts rated at 4 amps, 120 VAC,
30 VDC for remote indication of:
1) Loss of AC power - red light --
16620-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2) Low battery voltage - red light
3) High battery voltage - red light
4) Power ON - green light (no relay contact)
-- d. Generator main circuit breaker: Set-mounted and wired, UL listed, molded
case thermal-magnetic type, rated at 100 amps, 3 pole, 208 volts.
-- 9. Exhaust System
a. Exhaust muffler shall be critical grade. Exhaust system shall be installed
. according to the generator set manufacturers recommendations and
applicable codes and standards.
10. Fuel Tank
a. Provide a double wall sub-base fuel storage tank with 50 gallon capacity.
The tank shall be made of corrosion resistant aluminized steel. Tank shall
_ include over-fill protection, fuel level gauge and visual tank-to-foundation
clearance. Manufacturer's prototype tests shall have included set-
mounted endurance testing for vibration and stress analysis of resonant
frequencies, shape distortion and dampening.
11. Remote Annunciator
-- a. Provide and install a remote alarm annunciator located as shown on the
Drawings. The remote annunciator shall provide all the indications and
audible alarms called for by NFPA Standard 110 as provided on the
~ engine-generator set control panel; and in addition shall provide
indications for high battery voltage, Iow battery voltage, normal battery
voltage, battery charger malfunction. Alarm silence and lamp test
switches shall be provided.
12. Weatherproof Enclosure
- a. Provide an outdoor weather-protective housing factory assembled to
generator set base and radiator cowling. Housing shall provide ample
airflow for generator set operation. The housing shall have hinged side-
_ access doors and rear control door. All doors shall be Iockable. All sheet
metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the
manufacturer's standard color.
- 2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Complete factory assembled transfer equipment with electronic control designed for surge
.... voltage isolation, voltage sensors on all phases of both sources, linear operator,
permanently attached manual handles, positive mechanical and electrical interlocking, and
mechanically held contacts. Equipment rated 1000 amps and less shall include quick-
make, quick-break contact mechanisms for manual transfer under load. Refer to the
Drawings for sizes and types of transfer switch equipment, withstand and closing ratings,
number of poles, voltage and ampere ratings, enclosures and accessories.
16620-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
1. All transfer switches and accessories shall be UL listed and labeled, tested per UL
Standard 1008, and CSA approved.
a. Ratings: Main contacts shall be rated for 600 Volts AC minimum
b. Transfer switches shall be rated to carry 100 percent of rated current
continuously in the enclosure. Circuit breaker type transfer switches do
not meet this specification.
c. Transfer switches shall be continuously rated in ambient temperatures of
-40 to +50 degrees C, relative humidity up to 95% (non-condensing), and
altitudes up to 10,000 feet.
d. Transfer switch equipment shall have a withstand and closing rating
(WCR) in RMS symmetrical amperes greater than the available fault
currents shown on the drawings.
2. Construction: Transfer switches shall be double-throw, electrically and
mechanically interlocked, and mechanically held in both positions.
a. Transfer switches shall be equipped with permanently attached manual
operating handles and quick-break, quick-make over-center contact
mechanisms suitable for safe manual operation under load.
b. Main switch contacts shall be high-pressure silver alloy. Contact
assemblies shall have arc chutes for positive arc extinguishment. Arc
chutes shall have insulating covers to prevent interphase flashover.
c. Provide one set Form C auxiliary contacts on both sides, operated by
transfer switch position, rated 10 amp 250 VAC.
d. Enclosures shall be UL listed. The enclosure shall provide NEC wire bend
space. The cabinet door shall be key-locking. Controls on cabinet door
shall be key-operated. Provide switch position indicator lamps and power
available lamps for both sources (four total) on the outside cabinet door.
3. Automatic Controls: Control shall be solid-state and designed for a high level of
immunity to power line surges and transients, demonstrated by test to IEEE
Standard 587-1980. The control shall have optically isolated logic inputs, high
isolation transformers for AC inputs, and relays on all outputs.
a. Solid-state undervoltage sensors shall simultaneously monitor all phases
of both sources. Pick-up and drop-out settings shall be adjustable.
Voltage sensors shall allow for adjustment to sense partial loss of voltage
on any phase. Voltage sensors shall have field calibration of actual
supply voltage to nominal system voltage.
b. Automatic controls shall signal the engine-generator set to start upon
signal from normal source sensors. Solid-state time delay start, adjustable
from 0 to 15 seconds (factory set at 2 seconds) shall avoid nuisance start-
ups. Battery voltage starting contacts shall be gold, dry type contacts
factory wired to a field wiring terminal block.
c. The switch shall transfer when the emergency source reaches the set
point voltage and frequency. Provide a solid-state time delay on transfer,
adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds.
d. The switch shall retransfer the load to the normal source after a time delay
retransfer, adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes. Retransfer time delay shall
be immediately bypassed if the emergency power source fails.
16620-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
e. Controls shall signal the engine-generator set to stop after a time delay,
adjustable from 0 to 10 minutes, beginning on return to the normal source.
f. Power for transfer operation shall be from the source to which the load is
-- being transferred.
g. The control shall include latching diagnostic indicators to pinpoint the last
successful step in the sequence of control functions, and to indicate the
_ present status of the control functions in real time, as follows:
1) Source 1 OK
2) Start Gert Set
3) Source 2 OK
" 4) Transfer Timing
5) Transfer Complete
6) Retransfer Timing
-- 7) Retransfer Complete
8) Timing for Stop
h. The control shall include provisions for remote transfer inhibit and area
_ protection.
4. Front Panel Devices: Provide devices mounted on cabinet front consisting of:
- a. A key-operated selector switch to provide the following positions and
functions:
1) Test - Simulates normal power loss to control for testing of
-- generator set. Controls shall provide for a test with or without
load transfer.
2) Normal - Normal operating position.
~ 3) Retransfer - Momentary position to override retransfer time delay
and cause immediate return to normal source, if available.
5. Accessory Items: Transfer switches shall be equipped with accessories as follows:
a. Provide solid state exerciser clock to set the day, time and duration of
generator set exercise/test period. Provide a with/without load selector
_ switch for the exercise period.
b. Manual Selector Switch: Provide a manual/automatic retransfer selector
switch to provide either automatic retransfer after the retransfer time delay,
or a manual retransfer when selected by an operator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
-- 3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall comply with applicable state and local codes as required by the authority
_ having jurisdiction. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
instructions included in the listing or labeling of UL listed products.
16620-7 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
3.2 FACTORY TESTS
A. Generator set factory tests on the equipment to be shipped, shall be performed at rated
Icad and 0.8 PF. Generator sets that have not been factory tested at 0.8 PF will not be
acceptable. Tests shall include: run at full Icad, maximum power, voltage regulation,
transient and steady-state governing, single step Icad pickup, and safety shutdowns.
B. Provide a factory certified record of the production testing.
3.3 ON-SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST
A. The complete installation shall be tested for compliance with the specification following
completion of all site work. Testing shall be conducted by representatives of the
manufacturer, with required fuel supplied by Contractor. The Engineer shall be notified in
advance and shall have the option to witness the tests. Installation acceptance tests to
be conducted on-site shall include a "cold start" test, a two hour full Icad test, and a one
step rated Icad pickup test in accordance with NFPA 110. Provide a resistive Icad bank
and make temporary connections for full Icad test.
END OF SECTION
16620-8 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00 _
SECTION 16670- LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. The Conditions of the Contract, including the General Conditions and Supplementary
Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for coordination
of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Engage the services of a UL accredited Subcontractor normally engaged in the installation
of such systems to provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform
operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of a lightning protection
system, including necessary supplementary items.
B. Lighting protection system shall be a master-labeled system protecting the building,
consisting of air terminals on the roof, bonding roof-mounted mechanical equipment,
bonding of structure and other metal objects grounding electrodes interconnecting
conductors and bonding to counterpoise.
C. This specification recognizes that UL will not Master Label structures or additions that are
attached to a structure which does not fully comply with current UL96A lightning protection
standards. Therefore, lightning protection shall be provided for new buildings only. Upon
completion of the installation, the installer shall furnish the LPI System Certification and a
written guarantee of UL compliance. In addition, a written report of work and cost needed
on attached structure(s) in order for the facility to qualify for the UL Master Label will be
required. If no work is necessary, the UL Master Label shall be provided.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. The lightning protection system shall comply with the requirements of UL-96, UL-96A,
NFPA-780 and Lightning Protection Institute Installation Standard LP1-175.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings showing layout of air terminals, grounding electrodes and bonding
connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode and
conductor sizes, and connection and termination details.
B. Submit product data showing dimensions and materials of each component and include
indication of listing in accordance with ANSI/UL 96.
16670-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD
A. All equipment used in this installation shall be UL listed and properly labeled. All
equipment shall be new, and of a design and construction to suit the application where it
is used in accordance with accepted industry standards and LPI, UL, NFPA and NEC code
requirements.
2.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
A. All materials shall be copper and bronze and of the size, weight and construction to suit
the application and used in accordance with LPI, UL and NFPA code requirements. Class
I sized components may be utilized on roof levels 75 feet and below in height. Class II
sized components are required for roof levels over 75 feet in height. Bolt type connectors
and splicers shall be utilized on Class I and Class II structures. Pressure squeeze clamps
are not acceptable. All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel to prevent corrosion.
2.3 ALUMINUM COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum materials may not be used except on roofs that utilize aluminum roofing
components. On aluminum metal roofs or where aluminum parapet caps exist, the entire
roof lightning protection equipment shall utilize aluminum components to insure
compatibility. However, the downleads and grounding are to utilize copper with the bimetal
transition occurring at the through roof assembly with an approved bitmetal through roof
assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installation company that is UL
listed, a member of the Lightning Protection Institute, United Lightning Protection
Association qualified and an employer of Certified Master Installer of lightning protection
systems. A Certified Master Installer shall directly supervise the work.
B. All equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. The system shall consist
of a complete conductor network at the roof and include air terminals, connectors, splicers,
bonds, copper downleads and proper ground terminals.
C. Systems shall be semi-concealed, with all down-lead conductors and groundings
concealed within the building, but with roof conductors and air terminals exposed on roof.
D. Air terminals and conductors shall be mounted on inside faces of parapet and penthouse
wails where possible.
E. Copper downlead cables shall be utilized even when aluminum is required on the roof.
Downlead cables in conduit shall not be brought directly through the roof. Thru roof
assemblies with solid brass or stainless steel rods shall be utilized for this purpose.
Structural steel may be utilized in the installation as outlined by UL, NFPA and LPI.
1 6670-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
3.2 COORDINATION
A. The lightning protection installer will work with other trades to insure a correct, neat and
'- unobtrusive installation.
B. Coordinate with the roofing contractor to insure all roof penetrations are leak proof.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the lightning protection installer to assure a sound bond to
the main water service and to assure interconnection with other ground systems.
3.3 COMPLETION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the lightning protection installer shall secure and
-- deliver to the Owner the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Master Label certification and the
Lightning Protection Institute Certified System certification. The system will not be
accepted without the UL Master Label and the LPI certification certificate.
END OF SECTION
16670-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
-- A. Drawings, Conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions,
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to work in this Section.
B. Comply with other Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for
coordination of the Work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all
labor, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations in connection with the
._ installation of the Fire Alarm System as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
B. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72 E and F,
Local Code Requirements and National Electrical Code Article 760.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
-- A. Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE
fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by the Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the UL label. All control equipment shall be
_ listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial listing shall NOT be
acceptable.
B. In addition to the UL-UOJZ requirement listed above, the system controls shall be UL
~- listed for Power Limited Applications per NEC 760. All circuits must be marked in
accordance with NEC article 760-23.
.... 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit detailed system layout, wiring diagrams, and wdtten product specifications and
instructions for installation, operation and maintenance, suitable for inclusion in
maintenance manuals. Drawings shall be stamped by licensed Fire Alarm Planning
Superintendent.
1. Include copies of manufacturer's published product warranties.
2. Include standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams.
B. Submit shop drawings showing equipment/device locations and connecting wiring of
entire fire alarm system. Include wiring diagrams and riser diagrams.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fire alarm system components in factory-fabricated containers.
16720-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Store in a clean, dry space and protected from the weather.
C. Handle control and peripheral devices carefully to avoid damage to material
components, enclosure and finish.
1.6 SYSTEM ZONING
A. Each intelligent addressable device or conventional zone on the system shall be
displayed at the fire alarm control panel by a unique alpha numeric label identifying its
location.
1.7 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Activation of any fire alarm initiating device shall cause the following actions and
indications:
1. Indicate alarm conditions at the control panel and at the remote annunciator
through dedicated LEDs, local tone-alert and LCD alphanumeric display.
2. Sound horns and activate visual signals throughout the facility.
a. Audible/visual signals shall be silenceable from the fire alarm control
panel and the remote annunciator by an alarm acknowledge switch.
The alarm indication shall be transferred to a visual indicator and the
alarm signals shall resound for a subsequent alarm condition, reported
by a different device.
3. Release all electronically locked doors. Coordinate sequence of operation with
security contractor.
4. Shut down all rooftop units. Coordinate sequence of operation with
temperature controls contractor with reference to Section 15700 of these
Specifications.
5. Start all smoke removal fans and make-up air indicated on the Drawings.
Coordinate sequence of operation with mechanical contractor with reference to
Section 15665 of these Specifications.
6. Record within the non-volatile system historical memory the occurrence of the
event, the time and date of occurrence and the device initiating the event.
B. Initiation of an alarm from a smoke detector installed in the supply air stream of any air
handling unit not operating as part of a smoke removal system shall cause the
shutdown of that fan. Coordinate sequence of operation with mechanical contractor
with reference to Section 15665 of these Specifications.
C. Activation of any supervisory circuit shall cause thefollowing actions and indications:
1. Display the origin of the supervisory condition report at the alarm control panel
and at the remote annunciator.
16720-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2. Activate supervisory audible and visual signals at the control panel and at the
remote annunciator.
- a. Audible signals shall be silenceable from the fire alarm control panel
and the remote annunciator by an alarm acknowledge switch. The
supervisory indication shall be transferred to a visual indicator and the
-- supervisory signals shall resound for a subsequent supervisory
condition, reported by a different device.
3. Record within the non-volatile system historical memory the occurrence of the
event, the time of occurrence and the device initiating the event.
D. Receipt of a trouble report pdmary power loss, open or grounded initiating or signalling
-- circuit wiring, open, grounded or shorted indication system wiring, device
communication failure, battery disconnect at the fire alarm control panel shall cause the
following actions and indications:
1. Display at the alarm control panel and at the remote annunciator the origin of
the trouble condition report,
- 2. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the control panel and at the
remote annunciator.
-- a. Audible signals shall be silenceable from the fire alarm control panel
and the remote annunciator by a trouble acknowledge switch. The
trouble indication shall be transferred to a visual indicator and the
_ trouble signals shall resound for a subsequent trouble condition
reported by a different device.
3. Record within the non-volatile system historical memory the occurrence of the
'- event, the time of occurrence and the device initiating the event.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Simplex.
B. Honeywell.
C. Notifier.
D. Edwards.
2.2 CONTROL PANEL
A. Control panel shall be semi-flush mounted, tamper resistant smooth beige finish, with
all components mounted behind Iockable hinged safety glass door, 24 volt d.c., equal to
Simplex 4020 Series.
-~ B. Unit shall have all necessary components to completely supervise the entire fire alarm
system and operate the system including, but not limited to, the following:
~_ 1. Analog initiation circuits.
16720-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2. Power supplies.
3. Emergency battery power.
4. Addressable auxiliary relays.
5. Addressable signal circuits.
6. Walk test.
7. Controls: System reset, acknowledge, lamp test, trouble, silence, and
subsequent alarm feature.
8. Indicators: Alpha-numeric display, common alarm (red), common trouble
(yellow), AC power failure, (yellow), Iow battery (yellow), power on (green).
9. Ground fault detection.
10. Control of auxiliary service (fan shut-down, elevator control, etc.).
11. Time-limit cutouts.
12. Provisions to allow for fire drills.
C. Zone modules shall be programmed as to device type and location such that they can
be easily identified when panel door is closed.
2.3 MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A. Pull stations shall be semi-flush mounted, addressable red finish, double action, equal
to Simplex #2099-9761.
2.4 AUTOMATIC DETECTORS
A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to install the proper type and quantity detectors in
each space to meet all code requirements as well as prevent nuisance alarms.
B. Rate compensated temperature and rate of rise heat detector, spot type, restorable,
equal to Simplex #4098-9731.
1. Detectors shall be configurable from 32°F to 158 degrees F.
2. Rate-of-rise shall be programmable 15 or 20 degrees F.
C. Photoelectric, analog smoke detector with tamper proof cover, equal to Simplex #4098-
9201.
1. Smoke sensing chamber shall allow 360 degree smoke entry for optimum
response.
16720-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2. Smoke chamber shall be protected from insects by a screen at the smoke entry
a rea.
3. Sensitivity set at fire alarm control panel from 0.2 to 3.7 %.
E. Duct smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type with duct housing unit, LED power
and alarm indicator, equal to Simplex #4098-9702.
1. Air sampling tubes shall be sized to fit duct.
2. Auxiliary programmable relay for fan shutdown.
3. Detector head shall be Simplex 4098-9701.
2.5 ALARM DEVICES
A. Intedor alarm devices shall be combination audible/visible type.
1. Unit shall be audible/visible with horn, equal to Simplex 4904-9325 with
synchronized flash rate.
2. The signalling device shall be UL 1971 Listed and shall be mounted in
compliance with ADA requirements.
3. Trim shall be off-white.
4. Audible/visible unit shall be electrically supervised.
5. Devices shown on drawings are minimum. It is the Contractor's responsibility
to install audio/visual devices to provide required audio level throughout facility.
2.6 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Remote annunciator shall be LCD type and shall provide remote annunciation (both
visible and audible) and control similar to the primary operator functions of the control
panel equal to Simplex #4603 Sedes LCD annunciator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 IN STALLATION
A. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all
applicable codes and the manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring, if installed in
conduit, shall be in a completely separate conduit system. All wiring shall be installed
in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC - Article 760, Power-Limited
Protective Signaling Circuits.
B. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labelled "Fire Alarm". Wiring color code
shall be maintained throughout the installation.
16720-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
C. In lieu of using conduit, fire alarm system wiring may be plenum rated approved for use
on fire alarm systems.
D. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be
closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
E. The Contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire
alarm equipment after completion of installation.
F. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide onsite supervision of
installation.
3.2 TESTING
A. The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72H by
the contractor in the presence of the owner's representative and the Local Fire Marshal.
Upon completion of a successful test, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the _
owner and general contractor.
3.3 WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall warrant the completed fire alarm system wiring and equipment to
be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year
from the date of the completed and certified test or from the date of first beneficial use.
B. The equipment manufacturer shall make available to the owner a maintenance contract
proposal to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and tests per year in compliance _
with NFPA-72H guidelines.
END OF SECTION
16720-6 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16741 - TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
-- A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and Division
1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for coordination
of work.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of a telephone and data communications
_ empty conduit system, including all related systems and accessories.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products
specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
-- PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Conduit, conduit sleeves, outlet boxes, cover plates and pullwire as indicated.
B. Fireproofing material for telephone and data communication conduit and conduit sleeves
-- through fire rated walls and floors.
C. Plywood backboards, 3/4" thick, APA A/D grade plywood, treated with fire retardant,
-- minimum two (2) coats of light gray paint per the requirements of Division 9.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install telephone and data communication raceways as indicated.
B. Install individual raceways from telephone and data communications outlets to indicated
area.
1. Minimum size conduit: 3/4 inch.
2. Raceway installation shall be in accordancewith Section 16110.
3. Coordinate raceway installations in millwork and other fabricated architectural
items with the other portions of the Work.
16741-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
_ CCRD 295254.00
4, Provide pullwire in each raceway tagged on each end.
5. Raceways shall be terminated with an insulating bushing or a suitable connector
with an insulated throat. --
C. Provide telephone and data communications outlet boxes.
1. Provide a one-gang outlet unless noted otherwise.
2. Install outlet box and device ring at each location. _
3. Install telephone and data communications outlets at same height specified for
convenience outlets unless noted otherwise. Group telephone and data
communications outlets with related receptacle outlets unless noted otherwise.
4. Install a blank cover plate on all unused communications outlet boxes.
D. Install plywood backboards as indicated. Backboards shall be mounted six (6") inches AFF
and extend upward a full eight (8'-0") feet or to the ceiling grid if less than 8' 0"
END OF SECTION
16741-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
SECTION 16900 - EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND CONTROL WIRING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
_ A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for
-- coordination of work.
C. The furnishing and installation of control power wiring required for equipment furnished
-- under Division 15 and not shown on the electrical drawings shall be furnished under
Division 15. Control power wiring is defined as the line voltage (120V) power wiring
for equipment control cabinets, temperature control, energy management, or building
~_ automation system panels and line voltage combination smoke/fire dampers.
D. The furnishing and installation of the temperature control wiring, energy management
system or building automation wiring not shown on the electrical drawings shall be
-- furnished under Division 15. Temperature control, energy management system and
building automation system wiring is defined as the interlock or interconnecting wiring
required between system control devices, appurtenances and control panels to allow
-- the system to function automatically. This includes wiring between the fire alarm
system, smoke exhaust systems, door entry systems and any other system requiring
interface with the temperature control, energy management and building automation
~_ system.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations
required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of power wiring to each motor-
driven and/or electrically-operated system or unit of equipment.
B. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations
required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of the line voltage wiring
serving power to a motor(s) or piece of electric powered equipment. The wiring shall
allow the motor(s) or equipment to operate in a manual mode.
C. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and service and perform operations required
- for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of control wiring for miscellaneous
systems. The Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing the project specifications
to ascertain the extent of the control wiring required for the miscellaneous systems
.~ and shall assume the responsibility for performing the work.
D. The furnishing and installation of control wiring required for the elevator/escalator
equipment not shown on the electrical drawings shall be the responsibility of the
elevator/escalator contractor. Interface wiring between the elevator/escalator system
and the emergency power system and fire alarm system shall be furnished and
installed under this Division of the Specifications.
16900-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials and equipment provided hereinafter shall comply with other Division 16
Sections and with Division 15 of these Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MOTORS
A. Except for items that are furnished with factory-installed, integral motors, an electric
motor of required size and electrical characteristics will be provided and installed as
specified in Division 15 for each item of motor-driven equipment. As part of the work
of this Section, complete the electrical installation of these motors in accordance with
approved wiring diagrams and instructions.
B. Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided integral with control
equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all
disconnect switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or as indicated on
the drawings.
3.02 SYSTEM, EQUIPMENT AND DEVICE WIRING
A. Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning, plumbing, and
all other electrical systems, equipment and devices furnished by the Owner or
specified in other Divisions of the Specifications. System equipment and device
outlets of various types have been indicated in the Specifications or on the drawings,
but indication of exact location or scope of the work may not be indicated. Refer to
the Owner and to the work specified in the other Divisions for the scope of
connections to the equipment furnished by them and for the exact locations of all
connections to the equipment furnished by them. Power wiring shall be provided
under Division 16 as indicated. Control wiring not indicated to be provided under
Division 16 shall be provided by the provider of the system, equipment, or device' and
installed and terminated under Division 16. Request all rough-in drawings required
for proper installation of the electrical work in ample time to permit preparation of the
installation drawings and thus avoid delays on the job.
END OF SECTION
16900-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
-- SECTION 16950 - TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
_ A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and Division
I Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section.
B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for coordination
- of work.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required
for, and reasonably incidental to, the testing and inspecting of each item of equipment
provided or installed under this Division of the Specifications.
B. Tests and inspections for each system and each item of equipment shall be in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
C. Tests shall prove that electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's
tolerances, and that it is installed in accordance with the design Drawings and
._ Specifications.
D. Tests and inspections shall verify that power supplies are suitable for connection to the
designated equipment and systems, and shall determine suitability for continued reliable
operation.
E. Upon completion of tests and inspections specified, a label shall be attached to each
~- serviced device. Labels shall indicate date and by whom (name of company) serviced as
well as whether or not the service device passed or failed, or passed with exceptions.
1.3 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY
A. The Contractor shall perform routine insulation resistance, continuity, and rotation tests for
distribution and utilization equipment prior to, and in addition to, the tests specified to be
~- performed by the testing laboratory. The contractor's responsibility shall include the
following:
1. Engage the services of an approved testing laboratory with more than five (5)
years of experience for the purpose of performing the inspections and tests
specified.
2. Supply a suitable and stable source of power to the testing laboratory at each test
site. Notify the testing laboratory when equipment becomes available for
acceptance tests.
3. Coordinate work to expedite project scheduling.
16950-1 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
B. Prior to commencement of testing, the contractor shall supply a complete set of Electrical
Drawings, Specifications, and pertinent change orders to the testing laboratory.
C. The testing laboratory shall perform tests and inspections as specified. The testing --
laboratory's responsibility shall include the following:
1. Notify the NE as to when testing will commence. --
2. Provide sufficient protective barriers and warning signs to conduct tests and
inspections safely. ._
3. Report any matedal or workmanship found to be defective during tests and
inspections to the A/E.
4. Implement final settings and adjustments on electrical equipment in accordance
with the values indicated.
5. Maintain written records of tests. Upon completion of the project, furnish multiple
copies of the test report to the NE in accordance with Division 1 no later than 30
days after acceptance of the project for review prior to final acceptance. The test
report shall be bound and its contents certified by the testing laboratory. The
report shall include the following:
a. Summary of project.
b. Description of equipment tested.
c. Description of test.
d. List of the test equipment used in calibration, and calibration date. _
e. Test results.
f. Conclusions and recommendations.
g. Appendix, including completed test forms.
1.4 TEST INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION
A. The testing laboratory shall maintain test instruments which have been calibrated within
rated accuracy. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on the test equipment.
B. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule:
1. Field instruments - 6 months maximum.
2. Laboratory instruments - 12 months.
3. Leased specialty equipment - 12 months. (Where accuracy is guaranteed by
leaSor).
1.5 SAFETY PRACTICES
A. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to, the following requirements:
1. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970-OSHA.
16950-2 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations as published by the National
Safety Council.
- 3. Applicable safety operating procedures of the governing authorities.
4. Division 16 of these Specifications.
B. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized, except where otherwise specifically required.
C. Power circuits shall have conductors shorted to ground by a hot-line grounded device
approved for that purpose.
1.6 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Intemational Electrical Testing Association (NETA)
_ B. National Electrical Code (NEC)
C. National Electrical Safety Code
-- PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES
A. Perform each test and inspection until acceptable results are obtained in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise specified.
B. Perform tests and inspections for each system and item of equipment as applicable, unless
- otherwise specified. Inspect for physical damage and defective materials or installation
work. Inspect for proper physical, electrical and mechanical conditions (materials and
installation work).
C. Promptly report any discrepancies or unsatisfactory conditions determined by any test or
inspection.
D. Perform insulation resistance tests for each applicable system and item of equipment. Do
not perform this test on solid state devices or wiring connected to solid state devices. Be
aware that in some cases terminated cables cannot be tested unless disconnected from
- end devices. Coordinate the test with the contractor in this instance.
1. Apply test voltages as follows:
INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST VOLTAGE
Voltage Rating Test Voltage
150 - 600V 1000V
601 - 5000V 2500V
- 5001 and above 5000V
16950-3 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
2. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than the manufacturer's
recommended minimum, or less than a value equal to KV + I in megohms.
E. Overpotential tests shall not proceed until insulation resistance tests are satisfactorily
performed. Perform overpotential tests for each system and item of equipment as
specified.
3.2 CABLES - 600 VOLTS AND LESS
A. Inspect for shield grounding, cable support and termination.
B. Check visible cable bends against ICEA and manufacturer's minimum allowable bending
radius.
C. Inspect for proper fireproofing in common cable areas.
D. Perform insulation resistance tests on each cable with respect to ground and adjacent
cables.
E. Perform continuity tests to confirm proper cable connections.
3.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS- 600 VOLTS AND LESS (FEEDER CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ONLY)
A. Check each circuit breaker for proper mounting, conductor size and feeder designation.
B. Operate circuit breaker to insure smooth operation.
C. Open unsealed breakers and check internal components for tightness, when applicable.
D. Measure contact resistance in micro-ohms. Investigate deviations greater than 50%, as
compared to adjacent poles and similar breakers.
3.4 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A. Perform ground continuity tests between main ground system and equipment frames, and
between main ground system and system neutral and/or derived neutral points. Make test
by passing a minimum 10-amp DC current between the ground reference system and the
ground point to be tested. Measure voltage drop and calculate resistance by voltage drop
method.
B. The main ground electrode system resistance-to-ground shall be no greater than five (5)
ohms.
C. Perform an insulation power factor test.
3.5 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY
A. A thermographic survey shall be performed as follows on all electrical system equipment
once the building load is connected to the system.
16950-4 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
CCRD 295254.00
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
a. Inspect for physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.
-- b. Visually inspect for bus alignment.
c. Remove all necessary covers pdor to scanning.
-- 2. Equipment to be scanned shall include switches, buses, cables, cable and bus
connections and circuit breakers.
_ 3. Provide a report indicating the following:
a. Problem area (location of "hot spot").
b. Indicate temperature rise between "hot spot" and normal or reference
-- area.
c. Indicate cause of heat use.
d. Indicate phase unbalance, if present.
_ e. Index of areas scanned.
4. Test Parameters
a. Scanning distribution systems with ability to detect 1°C rise between
subject area and reference at 30° C.
b. Equipment shall detect emitted radiation and convert detected radiation to
--- visual signal.
c. Provide photographs (thermograms) of the deficient area as seen on
imaging system.
_ d. Infrared surveys should be performed during periods of maximum possible
loading but not less than eighty percent (80%) of rated load of the
electrical equipment being inspected.
-- 5. Test Results
a. Temperature gradients of 1°C to 3°C indicate possible deficiency and
-- warrant investigation. Corrective measures may not be required. The
testing laboratory shall review deficiency with the Owner and Architect/
Engineer and make recommendation.
_ b. Temperature gradients of 4° C to 15° C indicate minor deficiency; repair is
most probably required. The testing laboratory shall review deficiency with
the Owner and Architect/Engineer and make recommendation.
c. Temperature gradients of 16°C and above indicate major deficiency;
-- secure power and repair as soon as possible.
d. Provide a report indicating the equipment and devices scanned. Provide
photographs and/or thermograms any deficient area as seen on the
-- imaging system.
END OF SECTION
16950-5 Coppell Criminal Justice Center
_ CCRD 295254.00